SINAMICS G130-G150 Drive Manual

SINAMICS G130/G150
List Manual 11/2009
SINAMICS
s
s
Preface
SINAMICS
Parameter
Function diagrams
SINAMICS G130/G150
Faults and alarms

Appendix
List Manual
List of abbreviations
Bibliography
Index
Valid for
Drive
Software version
SINAMICS
4.3 SP1
A5E03263479A
11/2009
1
2
3
A
B
C
D
Safety notices
This manual contains information which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety and prevent material damage. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a
warning triangle; notices that relate to material damage only have no warning triangle. The notices shown
below are graded according to the level of danger (from most to least dangerous):
Danger
Indicates that death or serious injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
Indicates that death or serious injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
With a warning triangle, indicates that minor injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
Without a warning triangle, indicates that material damage may result if proper precautions are not taken.
Notice
Indicates that an undesirable result or state may occur if the relevant instructions are not observed.
If more than one level of danger exists, the warning for the highest level of danger is always used. A warning notice with a warning triangle indicating possible personal injury may also include a warning relating
to material damage.
Qualified personnel
The associated device/system may only be installed and operated in conjunction with this documentation.
The device/system may only be commissioned and operated by qualified personnel. For the purpose of
the safety notices in this documentation, "qualified personnel" are those authorized to commission,
ground, and label equipment, systems, and circuits in accordance with established safety procedures.
Proper use of Siemens products

Note the following:
Warning
Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications envisaged in the catalog and in the
associated technical documentation. If third-party products and components are used, they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. To ensure proper and safe operation of these products, they must
be correctly transported, stored, set up, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated, and maintained. The
permissible ambient conditions must be met. Information in the associated documentation must be
observed.
Trademarks
All names identified with are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Any other names used in this publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of
the owner.
Copyright Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved
Liability Disclaimer
The reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written permission. Violation of
this rule will cause indemnities. All rights reserved, especially those
relating to granting patents or GM registration.
We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to

the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, we cannot assume responsibility for any deviations that may arise. The data in this
document is regularly checked and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 4848
90327 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Siemens AG 2009
Subject to change without prior notice
SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2)
Preface
SINAMICS documentation
The SINAMICS documentation is organized in 2 parts:
General documentation/catalogs
Manufacturer/service documentation
At http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu information is available on the
following topics:
Ordering documentation
Here you can find an up-to-date overview of publications.
Downloading documentation
Further links for downloading files from Service & Support
Researching documentation online
Information on DOConCD and direct access to the publications in DOConWeb.
For customizing documentation based on Siemens content using My Documentation Manager (MDM), see
http://www.siemens.com/mdm
My Documentation Manager provides you with a range of features for creating
your own machine documentation
Training and FAQs
Information on the range of training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked
Questions) are available via the page navigation.
Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 11/2009, A5E03263479A
Preface-5
Preface
Usage phases and their tools/documents (as an example)

Table Preface-1Usage phases and the available tools/documents
Usage phase
Orientation
Planning/Configuration
Tools/documents
SINAMICS G Sales Documentation
SIZER configuration tool
Configuration Manuals, Motors
Decision making/ordering
SINAMICS G Catalogs
Installation/Assembly
SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions

Commissioning

Usage/Operation

Maintenance/Servicing

Target group
This documentation is aimed at machine manufacturers, commissioning engineers, and service personnel who use SINAMICS.
Use
This documentation contains the comprehensive information about parameters,
function diagrams, and faults and alarms required to commission and service the
system.
This manual should be used in addition to the other manuals and tools provided
for the product.
Preface-6

Preface
Standard version
The scope of the functionality described in this document can differ from the
scope of the functionality of the drive system that is actually supplied.
It may be possible for other functions that are not described in this documentation to be executed in the drive system. This does not, however, represent
an obligation to supply functions of this kind when new equipment is delivered
or during servicing.
The documentation may contain descriptions of functions that are not available in a particular product version of the drive system. The functionality of the
supplied drive system should only be taken from the ordering documentation.
Extensions or changes made by the machine manufacturer must be documented by the machine manufacturer.
For reasons of clarity, this documentation does not contain all of the detailed information on all of the product types. This documentation cannot take into consideration every conceivable type of installation, operation, and service/maintenance.
Search tools
The following guides are provided to help you locate information in this manual:
1. Table of contents
Table of contents for the entire manual (after the preface).
Table of contents for function diagrams (Chapter 2.1).
2. List of abbreviations
3. Bibliography
4. Index

Preface-7
Preface
Technical support
If you have any questions, please contact our hotline:
Europe/Africa
Phone
+49 (0) 180 5050 - 222
Fax
+49 (0) 180 5050 - 223
0.14 /min from German landlines, max. 0.42 /min from cell phones
Internet
http://www.siemens.de/automation/support-request
America
Phone
+1 423 262 2522
Fax
+1 423 262 2200
E-mail
techsupport.sea@siemens.com
Asia/Pacific
Phone
+86 1064 757 575
Fax
+86 1064 747 474
E-mail
support.asia.automation@siemens.com
Note:
Telephone numbers for technical support in specific countries are listed at the following Internet address:
http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner
Internet address for SINAMICS

http://www.siemens.com/sinamics
Preface-8

Table of contents
1
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-11
1.1
1.1.1
1.1.2
Overview of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of list of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number ranges of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-12
1-12
1-27
1.2
List of parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-29
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.3.5
Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parameters for command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-853
1-853
1-855
1-862
1-864
1-867
Function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-869
2.1
Table of contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-870
2.2
Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-876
2.3
Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-881
2.4
CU320-2 input/output terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-893
2.5
PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-900
2.6
Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-932
2.7
Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-945
2.8
Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-948
2.9
Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-953
2.10
Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-959
2.11
Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-968
2.12
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-971
2.13
Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-994
2.14
Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1000
2.15
Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1006
2.16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1014
2.17
Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1020
2.18
Terminal Board 30 (TB30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1026
2.19
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1031
2.20
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1038
2.21
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1049
2.22
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1053

Content-9
Table of contents
Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1055
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General information about faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Explanation of the list of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number ranges of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1056
3-1056
3-1061
3-1064
3.2
List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1066
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1445
A.1
ASCII table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1446
A.2
A.2.1
A.2.2
List for motor code/encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Motor code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A-1447
A-1447
A-1480
List of abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-1483
Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1491
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D-1497
Content-10

Parameter
Contents
1.1
Overview of parameters
1-12
1.2
List of parameters
1-29
1.3
Parameters for data sets

1-853
1-11
Parameter
1.1
1.1.1
Explanation of list of parameters
Basic structure of parameter descriptions

The data in the following example has been chosen at random. The table below
contains all the information that can be included in a parameter description. Some
of the information is optional.
The parameter list (See Section 1.2) is structured as follows:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - pxxxx[0 to n]
BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name
Drive object (function module)
Changeable in: C1(x), C2(x), U, T
Calculated: CALC_MOD_REG
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned32/Integer16
Dynamic index: CDS, p0170
Function diagram: 2080
P group: Closed loop control
Unit group: 7_1
Unit selection: p0505
Not for motor type: FEM
Normalizing: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
10.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Text
Values:
0:
1:
2:
etc.
Recommendation:
Text
Index:
[0] = Name and meaning of index 0

etc.
Bit array:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
Text
See also: pxxxx, rxxxx
See also: Fxxxxx, Axxxxx
Danger:
Warning:
Name and meaning of value 0

Signal name
Name and meaning of bit 0
etc.
Caution:
Caution:
Notice:
Note:
Information which might be useful
1-12
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
8010
8012
Safety notices with a warning triangle
Safety notices without a warning triangle

Parameter
pxxxx[0 to n] Parameter number

The parameter number consists of a "p" or "r", followed by the parameter number
and the index (optional).
Examples of number representation in the parameter list:
p...
Adjustable parameter (read and write parameter)
r...
Display parameter (read-only)
p0918
Adjustable parameter 918
p0099[0 to 3]
Adjustable parameter 99, indices 0 to 3
p1001[0 to n]
Adjustable parameter 1001, indices 0 to n (n = configurable)
r0944
Display parameter 944
Other examples of notation in the documentation:

p1070[1]
Adjustable parameter 1070, index 1
p2098[1].3
Adjustable parameter 2098, index 1 bit 3
r0945[2](3)
Display parameter 945, index 2 of drive object 3
p0795.4
Adjustable parameter 795, bit 4
r2129.0 to 15
Display parameter 2129 with bit array (maximum 16 bits)
The following applies to adjustable parameters:

The "shipped" parameter value is specified under "Factory setting" with the relevant unit in square parenthesis. The value can be adjusted within the range
defined by "Min" and "Max".
The term "linked parameterization" is used in cases where changes to adjustable
parameters affect the settings of other parameters.
Linked parameterization can occur, for example, as a result of the following
actions or parameters:
Execute macros
p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500
Set PROFIBUS telegram (BICO interconnection)
p0922
Set component lists
p0230, p0300, p0301, p0400
Calculate and pre-assign automatically
p0112, p0340, p0578, p3900
Restore factory settings
p0970

1-13
Parameter
The following applies to display parameters:

The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the
relevant unit in square parenthesis.
Note:
The parameter list can contain parameters that are not visible in the expert lists
of the particular commissioning software (e.g. parameters for trace functions).
BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name

The following abbreviations can appear in front of the parameter name:
BI:
Binector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of a digital signal.
BO:
Binector Output
This parameter is available as a digital signal for interconnection
with other parameters.
CI:
Connector Input
This parameter is used for selecting the source of an "analog" signal.
CO:
Connector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" signal for interconnection with other parameters.
CO/BO:
Connector/Binector Output
This parameter is available as an "analog" and digital signal for
interconnection with other parameters.
Note:
A connector input (CI) cannot be just interconnected with any connector output
(CO, signal source).
When interconnecting a connector input using the commissioning software, only
the corresponding possible signal sources are listed.
1-14

Parameter

A drive object (DO) is an independent, "self-contained" functional unit that has its
own parameters and, in some cases, faults and alarms.
When carrying out commissioning using the commissioning software, you can
select/deselect additional functions and their parameters by activating/deactivating function modules accordingly.
The parameter list specifies the associated drive object and function module for
each individual parameter.
Examples:
p1070 CI: Main setpoint
VECTOR
The parameter is only available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of
which function modules have been activated.
p1055 BI: Jog bit 0
VECTOR
The parameter is available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of which
function modules have been activated (i.e. it is available with every activated
function module belonging to the drive object).
A parameter can belong to one, several, or all drive objects.
The following information relating to "Drive object" and "Function module" can be
displayed under the parameter number:
Table 1-1
Data in "Drive object (function module)" field
Type
Meaning
All objects
This parameter belongs to all drive objects.
CU
Control Unit, all versions
CU_G_G130
Control Unit SINAMICS G130
CU_G_G150
Control Unit SINAMICS G150
CU_G_G130 (CAN)
CU_G_G150 (CAN)
Control Unit with "CAN" function module (p0108.29)
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD)
CU_G_G150 (COMM
BOARD)
Control Unit with "COMM BOARD" function module (p0108.30)
CU_G_G130 (PROFINET)
CU_G_G150 (PROFINET)
Control Unit with "PROFINET" function module (p0108.31)
ENCODER
300
Object for a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
HUB
150
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module
TB30
100
Terminal Board 30
TM31
200
Terminal Module 31

1-15
Parameter
Table 1-1
Data in "Drive object (function module)" field, continued
Type
Meaning
VECTOR_G130/G150
12
VECTOR_G130/G150
(n/M)
Vector drive with "Closed-loop speed/torque control" function module

(r0108.2)
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Ext. brake)
Vector drive with "Extended brake control" function module

(r0108.14).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Parallel)
Vector drive with "Parallel connection" function module (r0108.15).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Tech_ctrl)
Vector drive with "Technology controller" function module (r0108.16).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Ext. msg)
Vector drive with "Extended messages/monitoring functions" function

module (r0108.17).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(Cooling unit)
Vector drive with "Cooling unit" function module (r0108.28).
VECTOR_G130/G150
(CAN)
Vector drive with "CAN" function module (r0108.29)
VECTOR_G130/G150
(PROFINET)
Vector drive with "PROFINET" function module (r0108.31)
Vector drive
Note:
The drive object type is used to identify the drive objects in the drive system (e.g.
r0107, r0975[1]).
1-16

Parameter
Changeable in
The "-" sign indicates that the parameter can be changed in any object state and
that the change will be effective immediately.
The letters "C1(x), C2(x), T, U" ((x): optional) mean that the parameter can be
changed in the specified drive unit state only and that the change will not take
effect until the object switches to another state. This can be one or more states.
The following states may be specified:
C1(x) Device commissioning
C1: Commissioning 1
Device commissioning is in progress (p0009 > 0).

Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following device commissioning settings (p0009 > 0):
C1: Changeable for all settings p0009 > 0
C1(x): Only changeable when p0009 = x
A modified parameter value does not take effect until device commissioning mode is exited with p0009 = 0.
C2(x) Drive object commissioning
C2: Commissioning 2
Drive commissioning is in progress (p0009 = 0 and p0010 > 0).

Pulses cannot be enabled.
The parameter can only be changed in the following drive commissioning settings (p0010 > 0):
C2: Changeable for all settings p0010 > 0
C2(x): Only changeable when p0010 = x
A modified parameter value does not take effect until drive commissioning mode is exited with p0010 = 0.
U
Operation
U: Run
Pulses are enabled.

T
Ready
T: Ready to run
The pulses are not enabled and status "C1(x)" or "C2(x)" is not active.
Note:
Parameter p0009 is CU-specific (belongs to Control Unit).
Parameter p0010 is drive-specific (belongs to each drive object).
The operating state of individual drive objects is displayed in r0002.

1-17
Parameter
Calculated
Specifies whether the parameter is influenced by automatic calculations.
The calculation attribute defines which activities influence the parameter.
The following attributes apply:
CALC_MOD_ALL
p0340 = 1
Project download with commissioning software and send from p0340 = 3
CALC_MOD_CON
p0340 = 1, 3, 4
CALC_MOD_EQU
p0340 = 1, 2
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
p0340 = 1, 3, 5
p0578 = 1
CALC_MOD_REG
p0340 = 1, 3
Note:
For p3900 > 0, p0340 = 1 is also called automatically.
After p1910 = 1, p0340 = 3 is automatically called.
Access level
Specifies the access level required to be able to display and change the relevant
parameter. The required access level can be set via p0003.
The system uses the following access levels:
1. Standard
2. Advanced
3. Expert
4. Service
Parameters with this access level have password protection.
5. Macro (the parameter can only be changed via macro)
Note:
1-18

Parameter
Data type
The information on the data type can consist of the following two items (separated
by a slash):
First item
Data type of the parameter
Second item (for binector or connector input only)
Data type of the signal source to be interconnected (binector/connector output)
Parameters can have the following data types:
I8
Integer8
8-bit integer
I16
Integer16
16-bit integer
I32
Integer32
32-bit integer
U8
Unsigned8
8 bits without sign
U16
Unsigned16
16 bits without sign
U32
Unsigned32
32 bits without sign
Float
FloatingPoint32
32-bit Floating Point number
Depending on the data type of the BICO input parameter (signal sink) and BICO
output parameter (signal source), the following combinations are possible when
BICO interconnections are established:
Table 1-2
Possible combinations of BICO interconnections

BICO input parameter
CI parameter
BICO output parameter
Unsigned32/Inte
ger16
BI parameter
Unsigned32/Inte Unsigned32/Floa Unsigned32/Bina

ger32
tingPoint32
ry
CO: Unsigned8
CO: Unsigned16
CO: Integer16
CO: Unsigned32
CO: Integer32
CO: FloatingPoint32
x1
BO: Unsigned8
BO: Unsigned16
Legend:
x: BICO interconnection permitted

: BICO interconnection not permitted
1 Exception:
BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following
BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type:
CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060

1-19
Parameter
Table 1-2
Possible combinations of BICO interconnections, continued

BICO input parameter
CI parameter
BICO output parameter
Unsigned32/Inte
ger16
BI parameter
Unsigned32/Inte Unsigned32/Floa Unsigned32/Bina

ger32
tingPoint32
ry
BO: Integer16
BO: Unsigned32
BO: Integer32
BO: FloatingPoint32
Legend:
x: BICO interconnection permitted

: BICO interconnection not permitted
1 Exception:
BICO input parameters with data type "Unsigned32/FloatingPoint32" can also be interconnected with the following
BICO output parameters, although these are not of the "FloatingPoint32" data type:
CO: r8850, CO: r8860, CO: r2050, CO: r2060
Dynamic index
For parameters with a dynamic index [0 to n], the following information is specified
here:
Data set (if this is available).
Parameter for the number of indices (n = number - 1).
The following information can be contained in this field:
"CDS, p0170" (command data set, CDS count)
Example:
p1070[0] main setpoint [command data set 0]
p1070[1] main setpoint [command data set 1], etc.
"DDS, p0180" (drive data set, DDS count)
"EDS, p0140" (encoder data set, EDS count)
"MDS, p0130" (motor data set, MDS count)
"PDS, p0120" (power unit data set, PDS count)
"p2615" (traversing blocks count)
1-20

Parameter
Function diagram
The parameter is included in this function diagram. The structure of the parameter
function and its relationship with other parameters is shown in the specified function diagram.
Example:
Function diagram: 3060.3
3060:
Function diagram number
3:
Signal path (optional)
P group (refers only to access via BOP (Basic Operator Panel))

Specifies the functional group to which the parameter belongs. The required
parameter group can be set via p0004.
Note:
"Unit", "Unit group", and "Unit selection"

The standard unit of a parameter is specified in square brackets after the values
for "Min", "Max", and "Factory setting".
For parameters where the unit can be switched, the specifications for "Unit group"
and "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with
which parameter the unit can be changed over.
Example:
Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505
The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be changed over using
p0505.
All the potential unit groups and possible unit selections are listed below.
Table 1-3
Unit groups (p0100)
Unit group
Unit selection for p0100 =

0
Reference quantity
for %
7_4
Nm
lbf ft
8_4
lbf
14_2
HP
14_6
kW
HP
ft2
25_1
kgm
lb
27_1
kg
lb
28_1
Nm/A
lbf ft/A
29_1
N/Arms
lbf/Arms
30_1
ft

1-21
Parameter
Table 1-4
Unit groups (p0349)
Unit group

1
15_1
Reference quantity
for %
mH
1000 p0304
---------------------------------------------------------------2 3 p0305 p0310
16_1
Ohm
p0304 --------------------------3 p0305
Table 1-5
Unit groups (p0505)
Unit group

1
1-22
Reference quantity
for %
2_1
Hz
Hz
p2000
2_2
kHz
kHz
p2000
3_1
rpm
rpm
p2000
4_1
m/min
ft/min
p2000
4_2
m/min
m/min
ft/min
ft/min
5_1
Vrms
Vrms
p2001
5_2
p2001
5_3
p2001
6_1
mArms
mArms
p2002
6_2
Arms
Arms
p2002
6_3
mA
mA
p2002
6_4
p2002
6_5
p2002
7_1
Nm
lbf ft
p2003
7_2
Nm
Nm
lbf ft
lbf ft
7_3
Nm
lbf ft
1.0

Parameter
Table 1-5
Unit groups (p0505), continued
Unit group

1
Reference quantity
for %
8_1
lbf
p2003
8_2
lbf
lbf
8_3
lbf
1.0
14_1
HP
r2004
14_3
HP
r2004
14_4
HP
r2004
14_5
kW
HP
r2004
14_7
kW
HP
r2004
14_8
kW
HP
r2004
14_9
HP
HP
14_10
kW
kW
HP
HP
14_11
var
var
r2004
14_12
kvar
kvar
r2004
17_1
Nms/rad %
lbf ft
s/rad
p2000/p2003
18_1
V/A
V/A
p2002/p2001
19_1
A/V
A/V
p2001/p2002
21_1
21_2
ft/s2
ft/s2
p2007
22_1
m/s
m/s2
22_2
m/s2
ft/s2
23_1
Vrms
s/m
Vrms
s/m
Vrms s/ft Vrms s/ft -
24_1
Ns/m
Ns/m
lbf s/ft
lbf s/ft
24_2
Ns/m
lbf s/ft
p2000/p2003
26_1
m/s3
m/s
ft/s
ft/s
39_1
1/s2
1/s2
Table 1-6
p2007
Unit group (p0595)
Unit group

Value
9_1
Unit
Reference quantity
for %
The values that can be set and the technological units are shown in
p0595 (See Section 1.2).

1-23
Parameter
Parameter values
Min
Minimum value of the parameter [unit]
Max
Maximum value of the parameter [unit]
Factory setting
Shipped value (default) [unit]

A different value may be displayed for certain parameters
(e.g. p1800) during first commissioning.
Reason:
The setting of these parameters is determined by the
operating environment of the Control Unit (e.g. depending on device type, macro, power unit).
Note:
For SINAMICS G130/G150, the macros and their settings are provided in the following documentation:
SINAMICS G130/G150 Operating Instructions
Not for motor type

Specifies for which motor type this parameter has no significance
ASM: Induction motor
FEM: Separately excited synchronous motor
PEM: Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
REL: Reluctance motor/SIEMOSYN motor
Normalizing
Specifies the reference quantity that is used to convert a signal value automatically with a BICO interconnection.
The following reference quantities may be specified:
p2000 to p2007: Reference speed, reference voltage, etc.
TEMP: 100 = 100%
PERCENT: 1.0 = 100%
4000H: 4000 hex = 100%
Expert list
Specifies whether this parameter is available in the expert list of the specified
drive objects in the commissioning software
1: Parameter does exist in the expert list.
0: Parameter does not exist in the expert list.
1-24

Parameter
Notice:
The user shall assume full responsibility for using parameters marked "Expert list:
0" (parameter does not exist in the expert list).
These parameters and their functionalities have not been tested and no further
user documentation is available for them (e.g. description of functions). Moreover,
no support is provided for these parameters by "Technical Support" (hotline).
Description
Explanation of the function of a parameter
Values
Lists the possible values of a parameter
Recommendation
Information about recommended settings
Index
The name and meaning of each individual index is specified for indexed parameters.
The following applies to the values (Min, Max, Factory setting) of indexed adjustable parameters:
Min, Max:
The adjustment range and unit apply to all indices.
Factory setting:
When all indices have the same factory setting, index 0 is specified with the
unit to represent all indices.
When the indices have different factory settings, they are all listed individually
with the unit.
Bit array
For parameters with bit arrays, the following information is provided about each
bit:
Bit number and signal name
Meaning with signal states 0 and 1
Function diagram (optional)
The signal is shown on this function diagram.

1-25
Parameter
Dependency
Conditions that must be fulfilled for this parameter. Also includes special effects
that can occur between this parameter and others.
See also: List of other relevant parameters.
Safety notices
Important information that must be observed to avoid the risk of physical injury or
material damage.
Information that must be observed to avoid any problems.
Information that the user or operator may find useful.
1-26
Danger
The description of this safety notice can be found at the

beginning of this manual (see Safety notices).
Warning

Caution

Caution

Notice

Note
Information that the user or operator may find useful.

Parameter
1.1.2
Number ranges of parameters

Note:
The following number ranges represent an overview for all parameters in
SINAMICS.
The parameters for the product described in this List Manual are described in
detail in Section 1.2.
Parameters are grouped into the following number ranges:
Table 1-7
Number ranges of parameters
Range
Description
From
To
0000
0099
Operation and visualization
0100
0199
Commissioning
0200
0299
Power unit
0300
0399
Motor
0400
0499
Encoder
0500
0599
Technology and units
0600
0699
Thermal motor monitoring and motor model, maximum current
0700
0799
Command sources and terminals on Control Unit, measuring

sockets
0800
0839
CDS, DDS data sets (e.g. switch over, copy)
0840
0879
Sequence control (e.g. source for ON/OFF1)
0880
0899
Control and status words
0900
0999
PROFIBUS/PROFIdrive
1000
1199
Setpoint channel
1200
1299
Functions (e.g. motor holding brake)
1300
1399
V/f control
1400
1799
Closed loop control
1800
1899
Gating unit
1900
1999
Power unit and motor identification
2000
2099
Communication (PROFIBUS)
2100
2199
Faults and alarms, monitoring functions
2200
2399
Technology controller
2900
2930
Fixed values (e.g. per cent, torque)
3400
3699
Infeed control (Active Line Module)
3800
3899
Friction characteristic

1-27
Parameter
Table 1-7
Number ranges of parameters, continued
Range
1-28
Description
From
To
3900
3999
Management parameters
4000
4199
Terminal Board, Terminal Module (e.g. TB30, TM31)
4200
4399
Terminal Module (e.g. TM15, TM17)
6000
6999
SINAMICS GM/SM/GL
7000
7499
Parallel connection of power units
7800
7899
EEPROM read/write parameters
8500
8599
Data and macro management
8600
8799
CAN bus
8800
8899
Communication Board
9300
9399
Safety Integrated
9400
9499
Parameter consistency and storage
9500
9899
Safety Integrated
9900
9949
Topology
9950
9999
Diagnostics (internal)
10000
10099
Safety Integrated
11000
11299
Free technology controller 1, 2, 3
20000
20999
Free function blocks (FBLOCKS)
21000
25999
Drive Control Chart (DCC)
50000
53999
SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC closed loop control)
61000
61001
PROFINET

Parameter
List of parameters
1.2
List of parameters
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng
Objects: CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
r0002
Control Unit operating display / CU op_display
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Data type: Integer16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
117
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for the Control Unit (CU).
Value:
0:
10:
20:
25:
31:
33:
34:
35:
70:
80:
99:
101:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
117:
Notice:
For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed.
r0002
Encoder DO operating display / Enc DO op_display
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Operation
Ready
Wait for run-up
Wait for automatic FW update of DRIVE-CLiQ components
Commissioning software download active
Remove/acknowledge topology error
Exit commissioning mode
Carry out first commissioning
Initialization
Reset active
Internal software error
Specify topology
Insert drive object
Delete drive object
Change drive object number
Change component number
Run parameter download
Delete component
Description:
Operating display for encoder drive object
Value:
0:
35:
45:
46:
60:
200:
250:
Notice:
Encoder in cyclic operation

Carry out first commissioning (p0010)
Remove fault cause, acknowledge fault
Exit commissioning mode (p0009, p0010)
Encoder deactivated
Wait for booting/partial booting
Device signals a topology error

1-29
Parameter
List of parameters
r0002
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module operating display / Hub op_display
HUB
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Value:
0:
40:
50:
60:
70:
120:
200:
250:
Notice:
r0002
TB30 operating display / TB30 op_display
TB30
Module in cyclic operation

Module not in cyclic operation
Alarm
Fault
Initialization
Module deactivated
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value:
0:
40:
60:
70:
80:
120:
200:
250:
Notice:
r0002
TM31 operating display / TM31 op_display
TM31

Fault
Initialization
Reset active
Module deactivated
Wait for run-up
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value:
0:
40:
50:
60:
70:
120:
200:
250:
Notice:
1-30

Alarm
Fault
Initialization
Module deactivated

Parameter
List of parameters
r0002
TM54F operating display / TM54F op_display
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value:
0:
40:
50:
60:
70:
120:
200:
250:
r0002
Drive operating display / Drv op_display

Alarm
Fault
Initialization
Module deactivated
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
250
Factory setting
-
Description:
Operating display for the drive.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
21:
22:
23:
31:
35:
41:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
60:
200:
250:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0046
Notice:
Operation - everything enabled

Operation - set "enable setpoint" = "1" (p1142, p1152)
Operation - set "enable speed controller" = "1" (p0856)
Operation - RFG frozen, set "RFG start" = "1" (p1141)
Operation - set "enable RFG" = "1" (p1140)
Oper. - MotID, excit. running and/or brake opens, SS2, SOS
Operation - open brake (p1215)
Operation - withdraw braking with OFF1 using "ON/OFF1" = "1"
Operation - braking with OFF3 can only be interrupted with OFF2
Operation - brake on fault, remove fault, acknowledge
Operation - armature short-circ./DC brake act. (p1230, p1231)
Ready for operation - set "Operation enable" = "1" (p0852)
Ready for operation - demagnetizing running (p0347)
Ready for operation - set "Infeed operation" = "1" (p0864)
Ready for switching on - set "ON/OFF1" = "0/1" (p0840)
Switching on inhibited - carry out first commissioning (p0010)
Switching on inhibited - set "ON/OFF1" = "0" (p0840)
Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF2" = "1" (p0844, p0845)
Switching on inhibited - set "OC/OFF3" = "1" (p0848, p0849)
Switching on inhibited - connect 24 V to terminal EP (hardware)
Switching on inhibited - rectify fault, acknowledge fault, STO
Switching on inhibited - exit comm mode (p0009, p0010)
Drive object deactivated/not operational

1-31
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
OC: Operating condition

EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)
RFG: Ramp-function generator
COMM: Commissioning
MotID: Motor data identification
SS2: Safe Stop 2
SOS: Safe Operating Stop
STO: Safe Torque Off
p0003
BOP access level / BOP acc_level
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the access level for reading and writing parameters via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Note:
Access level 0 (user-defined):
User-defined
Standard
Extended
Expert
Service
Parameters from the user-defined list (p0013). Not used as of firmware version 2.6 (p0016).
Access level 1 (standard):
Parameters for the simplest operator control possibility (e.g. p1120 = ramp-function generator, ramp-up time).
Access level 2 (extended):
Parameters to operate the basic functions of the drive unit.
Access level 3 (experts):
Expert know-how is required for these parameters (e.g. BICO parameterization).
Access level 4 (service):
For these parameters, it is necessary that authorized service personnel enter the appropriate password (p3950).
p0004
BOP display filter / BOP disp_filter
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C2(1), U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
0
Description:
1-32
Sets the display filter for parameters with the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
7:
8:
10:
12:
13:
14:
15:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
25:
28:
47:
50:
90:
95:
98:
99:
All parameters
Displays, signals
Power unit
Motor
Encoder/pos enc
Technology/units
Digital inputs/outputs commands sequence control
Analog inputs/outputs
Setpoint channel/ramp-fct generator
Functions
V/f control
Control
Data sets
Basic positioner
Gating unit
Motor identification
Communication
Faults, alarms, monitoring functions
Closed loop position control
Free function blocks
Trace and function generator
OA parameters
Topology
Safety Integrated
Command Data Sets (CDS)
Drive Data Sets (DDS)
Dependency:
Refer to: p0003
Notice:
The display filter via p0004 provides precise filtering and displays the corresponding parameters only when p0009
and p0010 = 0.
Note:
The set access level via p0003 is also relevant for the display filter via p0004.
Examples (assumption: p0009 = p0010 = 0):
p0003 = 1, p0004 = 3
--> Only the parameters for the motor are displayed with access level 1.
p0003 = 2, p0004 = 3
--> Only the parameters for the motor are displayed with access levels 1 and 2.
p0005[0...1]
BOP operating display selection / BOP op_disp sel
All objects
Can be changed: U, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Data type: Unsigned16
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
[0] 2
[1] 0
Description:
Sets the parameter number and parameter index for display for p0006 = 2, 4 for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Examples for the SERVO drive object:
p0005[0] = 21, p0005[1] = 0: Actual speed smoothed (r0021)
p0005[0] = 25, p0005[1] = 0: Output voltage smoothed (r0025)
p0005[0] = 27, p0005[1] = 0: Absolute current actual value, smoothed (r0027)
Index:
[0] = Parameter number

[1] = Parameter index
Dependency:
Refer to: p0006

1-33
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Procedure:
1.
The parameter number to be displayed should be set in index 0. Only the monitoring parameters (read-only parameters) can be set that actually exist for the actual drive object.
If the set parameter number is not indexed, or if there is an index in index 1 that lies outside the valid range of the
set parameter, then index 1 is automatically set to 0.
2.
The index that belongs to the parameter set in index 0 should be set in index 1. The permissible changes in index 1
always depend on the parameter number set in index 0.
p0006
BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4
Max
4
Factory setting
4
Description:
Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for operation" and "operation".
Value:
4:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0005
Note:
Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object.
p0005
Mode 4 is available for all drive objects.
p0006
BOP operating display mode / BOP op_ disp mode
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: U, T

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
4
Description:
Sets the mode of the operating display for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) in the operating states "ready for operation" and "operation".
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0005
Note:
Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object.
Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020 <--> r0021

Operation --> r0021, otherwise r0020
Operation --> p0005, otherwise p0005 <--> r0020
Operation --> r0002, otherwise r0002 <--> r0020
p0005
Mode 4 is available for all drive objects.
p0007
BOP background lighting / BOP lighting
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
2000 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time until the background lighting of the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) is switched off.
Note:
p0007 = 0: Background lighting is always switched on (factory setting).
If no keys are actuated, then the background lighting automatically switches itself off after this time has expired.
1-34

Parameter
List of parameters
p0008
BOP drive object after booting / BOP DO after boot
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the required drive object that is active at the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) after booting.
Note:
The value from p0008 initializes the display on the Basic Operator Panel (BOP) at the top left after booting.
The drive object Control Unit is selected using the value 1.
p0009
Device commissioning parameter filter / Dev comm par_filt
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the device and basic drive commissioning.

By appropriately setting this parameter, those parameters are filtered that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
29:
30:
50:
55:
101:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
117:
10000:
Ready
Device configuration
Defining the drive type/function module
Drive base configuration
Data set base configuration
Device download
Parameter reset
OA application configuration
OA application installation
Topology input
Insert drive object
Delete drive object
Parameter download
Delete component
Ready (asynchronous)
Notice:
For p0009 = 10000 the following applies:

After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in
r3996. Modifications can be made again when r3996 = 0.
Note:
The drives can only be powered up outside the device commissioning (the inverter enabled). In this case, p0009
must be 0 (Ready) and the individual drive objects must have already gone into operation (p0010).
p0009 = 1: Device configuration
At the first commissioning of the device, after booting, the device is in the "device configuration" state. To start the
internal automatic first commissioning of the drive unit, p0009 should be set to 0 (Ready) after the ID for the actual
topology (r0098) was transferred into the ID for the target topology (p0099). To do this, it is sufficient to set a single
index value of p0099[x] the same as r0098[x]. Before the device has been completely commissioned, no other
parameter can be changed. After the first commissioning was carried out, in this state, when required, other basic
device configuration parameters can be adapted (e.g. the basic sampling time in p0110).
p0009 = 2: Defines the drive type / function module
In this state, the drive object types and/or the function modules can be changed or selected for the individual drive
objects. To do this, the drive object type can be set using p0107[0...15] and the function can be set using
p0108[0...15] (refer to p0101[0...15]).

1-35
Parameter
List of parameters
p0009 = 3: Drive basis configuration

In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, basic changes can be made for the individual drive objects (e.g. sampling times in p0111, p0112, p0115 and the number of data sets in p0120, p0130, p0140,
p0170, p0180).
p0009 = 4: Data set basis configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, for the individual drive objects changes can
be made regarding the assignment of the components (p0121, p0131, p0141, p0151, p0161) to the individual data
sets and the assignment of the power unit, motor and encoder to the drive data sets (p0185, ...).
p0009 = 29: Device download
If a download is made using the commissioning software, the device is automatically brought into this state. After
the download has been completed, p0009 is automatically set to 0 (ready). It is not possible to manually set p0009
to this value.
p0009 = 30: Parameter reset
In order to bring the complete unit into the "first commissioning" state or to load the parameters saved using p0977,
to start, p0009 must be set to this value. p0976 can then be changed to the required value.
p0009 = 50: OA application configuration
In this state, after the device has been commissioned for the first time, changes can be made for the individual drive
objects regarding the activity (p4956) of the OA applications.
p0009 = 55: OA application installation
OA applications can be installed and/or uninstalled in this state.
p0009 = 101: Topology input
In this state, the DRIVE-CLiQ target topology can be entered using p9902 and p9903.
p0009 = 111: Insert drive object
This state allows a new drive object to be inserted using p9911.
p0009 = 112: Delete drive object
This state allows existing drive objects to be deleted using p9912 after the device has been commissioned for the
first time.
p0009 = 113: Change drive object number
This state allows the drive object number of existing drive objects to be changed using p9913 after the device has
been commissioned for the first time.
p0009 = 114: Change component number
This state allows the component number of existing components to be changed using p9914 after the device has
been commissioned for the first time.
p0009 = 115: Parameter download
This state allows the complete device and drive commissioning using the parameter services.
p0009 = 117: Delete component
This state allows components to be deleted using p9917 after the device has been commissioned for the first time.
p0010
Encoder DO commissioning parameter filter / EncDO com par_filt
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: C2(1), T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter to commission an encoder drive object.

Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps.
For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered.
Value:
0:
4:
5:
29:
30:
Note:
Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
1-36
Ready
Encoder commissioning
Technological application/units
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset

Parameter
List of parameters
p0010
TB30 commissioning parameter filter / TB30 comm.par_filt
TB30
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Board 30 (TB30).

Value:
0:
29:
30:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0970
Note:
p0010
TM31 commissioning parameter filter / TM31 comm par_filt
TM31
Description:
Ready
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 31 (TM31).

Value:
0:
29:
30:
Ready
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Dependency:
Refer to: p0970
Note:
Only the following values are possible: p0010 = 0, 30

p0010
TM54F commissioning parameter filter / TM54F com par_filt
TM54F_MA
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
95
Factory setting
0
Sets the parameter filter for commissioning a Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value:
0:
29:
30:
95:
Ready
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Safety Integrated commissioning
Dependency:
Refer to: p0970
Note:

1-37
Parameter
List of parameters
p0010
Drive commissioning parameter filter / Drv comm. par_filt
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1), T

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800, 2846
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Sets the parameter filter to commission a drive.

Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
15:
17:
25:
29:
30:
95:
10000:
Ready
Quick commissioning
Power unit commissioning
Motor commissioning
Encoder commissioning
Technological application/units
Data sets
Basic positioner commissioning
Position control commissioning
Only Siemens int
Parameter reset
Ready with immediate feedback signal
Notice:

Note:
The drive can only be powered up outside the drive commissioning (inverter enable). To realize this, this parameter
must be set to 0.
For p3900 not equal to 0, at the end of the quick commissioning, this parameter is automatically reset to 0.
p0010 = 10000 corresponds to p0010 = 0. Unlike with p0010 = 0, the parameter modification is applied immediately
and the calculations are made in the background. Further parameter modifications cannot be made while the calculations are being performed.
p0011
BOP password entry (p0013) / BOP passw ent p13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0012, p0013
p0012
BOP password acknowledgement (p0013) / BOP passw ackn p13
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Acknowledges the password for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Dependency:
1-38

Parameter
List of parameters
p0013[0...49]
BOP user-defined list / BOP list
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the required parameters to read and write via the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Activation:
1. p0003 = 3 (expert).
2. p0013[0...49] = requested parameter number
3. If required, enter p0011 = password in order to prevent non-authorized deactivation.
4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the selected user-defined list.
Deactivation/change:
1. p0003 = 3 (expert).
2. If required, p0012 = p0011, in order to be authorized to change or deactivate the list.
3. If required p0013[0...49] = required parameter number.
4. p0016 = 1 --> activates the modified user-defined list.
5. p0003 = 0 --> deactivates the user-defined list.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976
Note:
The following parameters can be read and written on the Control Unit drive object:
- p0003 (access stage)
- p0009 (device commissioning, parameter filter)
- p0012 (BOP password acknowledgement (p0013))
The following applies for the user-defined list:
- password protection is only available on the drive object Control Unit and is valid for all of the drive objects.
- p0013 cannot be included in the user-defined list for all drive objects.
- p0003, p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976 cannot, for the drive object Control Unit, be included in the user-defined list.
- the user-defined list can be cleared and deactivated "restore factory setting".
A value of 0 means: Entry is empty.
p0015
Macro drive unit / Macro drv unit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
1
Description:
Runs the corresponding macro files.

The selected macro file must be available on the memory card/device memory.
Example:
p0015 = 6 --> the macro file PM000006.ACX is run.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Notice:
Note:
The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8570. r8570 is not in the expert list of the commissioning
software.
Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product.
The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting.

1-39
Parameter
List of parameters
p0015
Macro drive object / Macro DO
TM31,
Can be changed: C2(1)
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32
0
P-Group: Commands
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0

Example:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570
Notice:
No errors were issued during quick commissioning (p3900 = 1) when writing to parameters of the QUICK_IBN
group!
Note:
software.
p0016
Activate BOP user-defined list / BOP user list act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting for activating/deactivating the user-defined list for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
If p0016 = 1, then it is only possible to access parameters in the parameter list (p0013).
Value:
0:
1:
BOP user-defined list deactivated

BOP user-defined list activated
Dependency:
Refer to: p0011, p0012, p0013
Note:
The user-defined list can only be deactivated with p0011 = p0012
r0018
Control Unit Firmware-Version / CU FW version
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Control Unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00.
1-40

Parameter
List of parameters
r0019.0...14
CO/BO: Control word BOP / STW BOP
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Displays, signals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
07
13
14
r0020
Speed setpoint smoothed / n_set smth
Signal name
ON / OFF (OFF1)
No coast-down / coast-down (OFF2)
No Quick Stop / Quick Stop (OFF3)
Acknowledge fault (0 -> 1)
Motorized potentiometer raise
Motorized potentiometer lower
1 signal
ON
No coast down
No Quick Stop
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
OFF (OFF1)
Coast down (OFF2)
Quick Stop (OFF3)
No
No
No
FP
-

Data type: FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or V/f characteristic (after the
interpolator).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0060
Note:
Smoothing time constant = 100 ms

The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
r0021
CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1580, 1680,

4710, 6799
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0063
Note:

The value displayed in r0021 is the smoothed value of r0063.

1-41
Parameter
List of parameters
r0022
Speed actual value rpm smoothed / n_ist rpm smooth

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

4710, 6799
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.

r0022 is identical to r0021, however, it always has units of rpm and contrary to r0021 cannot be changed over.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0063
Note:

The value displayed in r0022 is the smoothed value of r0063.
r0024
Output frequency smoothed / f_outp smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5730, 6799
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the smoothed converter frequency.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0066
Note:

The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0025
CO: Output voltage smoothed / V_outp smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

6799
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed output voltage of the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0072
Note:

The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
1-42

Parameter
List of parameters
r0026
CO: DC link voltage smoothed / Vdc smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8850, 8950
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0070
Notice:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies:

When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed in the display parameter.
Note:
SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms

The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
r0027
CO: Absolute actual current smoothed / I_act abs val smth

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8850, 8950
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0068
Notice:
This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note:
A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms

SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068).
r0028
Modulation depth smoothed / Mod_depth smth

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

8950
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the modulation depth.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0074
Note:
A_INF: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms

SERVO, VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

1-43
Parameter
List of parameters
r0029
Current actual value field-generating smoothed / Id_act smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0076
Note:

VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0030
Current actual value torque-generating smoothed / Iq_act smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0078
Note:

VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms
The following applies for SERVO:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 100 ms, r0078[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0078[0]).
The following applies for VECTOR:
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
r0031
Actual torque smoothed / M_act smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0080
Note:

The active current actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed (r0080).
1-44

Parameter
List of parameters
r0032
CO: Active power actual value smoothed / P_actv_act smth

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8750, 8850, 8950
Units group: 14_10
Scaling: r2004
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0082
Notice:
This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this case, the
unsmoothed value should be used.
Note:
Significance for the drive: Power output at the motor shaft

Significance for the infeed: Line power drawn
For A_INF, B_INF and S_INF the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]).
For VECTOR and VECTORMV, the following applies:
The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082).
r0033
Torque utilization smoothed / M_util smooth

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8012
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage.

The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit, scaled using
p2196.
Note:

The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).
For M_set total (r0079) > 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = M_set total
- Actual torque limit = M_max upper effective (r1538)
For M_set total (r0079) <= 0, the following applies:
- Required torque = - M_set total
- Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539)
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %

1-45
Parameter
List of parameters
r0034
Motor utilization / Motor utilization

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8017
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL, FEM
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the motor utilization from the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency:
The motor utilization is only determined for permanent-magnet synchronous motors and if the I2t motor model is
activated.
The motor utilization is formed from the ratio between the I2t motor model temperature (minus 40 Kelvin) and the
reference value p0605 (motor overtemperature, fault threshold) - 40 Kelvin. If p0605 is reduced, r0034 increases
and the motor temperature remains the same.
Refer to: p0611, p0612, p0615
Note:

A value of r0034 = -200.0 % indicates an invalid display, for example, because the thermal I2t motor model was not
activated or was incorrectly parameterized.
r0035
CO: Motor temperature / Mot_temp

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8017
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the actual temperature in the motor.
Note:
For r0035 not equal to -200.0 C, the following applies:

- this temperature display is valid.
- a KTY sensor is connected.
- the thermal model for the induction motor is activated (p0612 bit 1 = 1 and temperature sensor deactivated: p0600
= 0 or p0601 = 0).
For r0035 equal to -200.0 C, the following applies:
- this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error).
- A PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected.
- the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is deactivated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0).
r0036
CO: Power unit overload I2t / PU overload I2t

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the power unit overload determined using the I2t calculation.
A current reference value is defined for the I2t monitoring of the power unit. It represents the current that can be
conducted by the power unit without any influence of the switching losses (e.g. the continuously permissible current
of the capacitors, inductances, busbars, etc.).
If the I2t reference current of the power unit is not exceeded, then an overload (0 %) is not displayed.
In the other case, the degree of thermal overload is calculated, whereby 100% results in a trip.
1-46

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:

Refer to: F30005
r0037[0...1]
Control Unit temperature / CU temperature
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the Control Unit temperature.

An appropriate message is output when 87 C is exceeded.
Index:
[0] = Control Unit temperature actual

[1] = Control Unit temperature maximum
Dependency:
Refer to: A01009
Note:
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
r0037[0...19]
CO: Power unit temperatures / PU temperatures

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the temperatures in the power unit.
Index:
[0] = Inverter, maximum value

[1] = Depletion layer maximum value
[2] = Rectifier maximum value
[3] = Air intake
[4] = Interior of power unit
[5] = Inverter 1
[6] = Inverter 2
[7] = Inverter 3
[8] = Inverter 4
[9] = Inverter 5
[10] = Inverter 6
[11] = Rectifier 1
[12] = Rectifier 2
[13] = Depletion layer 1
[19] = Cooling system liquid intake
Note:
The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.

r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.

1-47
Parameter
List of parameters
r0038
Power factor smoothed / Cos phi smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

8950
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual power factor.
Note:

Significance for the motor: Motor power factor
Significance for the infeed: Power factor at the connection point (p3470, p3471)
r0039
Energy consumption / Energy consumption

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kWh]
Max
- [kWh]
Factory setting
- [kWh]
Description:
Displays the electrical energy used since the last reset.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0040
p0040
Reset energy consumption display / Energy usage reset

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Setting to reset the energy consumption display (r0039).

Procedure: Set p0040 = 0 --> 1.
The display is reset and the parameter is automatically set to zero.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0039
p0045
Smoothing time constant, display values / T_smth display

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

5730, 6714, 8012
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
1000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
1.00 [ms]
Sets the smoothing time constant for the following display values:
SERVO: r0078[1], r0079[1], r0081 (calculated from the quantities smoothed with p0045), r0082[1].
VECTOR: r0063[1], r0068[1], r0080[1], r0082[1].
1-48

Parameter
List of parameters
r0046.0...31
CO/BO: Missing enable sig / Missing enable sig

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays missing enable signals that are preventing the closed-loop drive control from being commissioned.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Signal name
OFF1 enable missing
OFF2 enable missing
OFF3 enable missing
Operation enable missing
Armature short-circuit / DC current brake,
enable missing
STOP2 enable missing
STOP1 enable missing
EP terminals enable missing
Infeed enable missing
Ramp-function generator enable missing
Ramp-function generator start missing
Setpoint enable missing
OFF1 enable internal missing
Pulse enable internal missing
Armature short-circuit/DC current brake
internal enable missing
STOP2 enable internal missing
STOP1 enable internal missing
Function bypass active
Drive inactive or not operational
Demagnetizing not completed
Brake open missing
Cooling system ready signal missing
Speed controller inhibited
Jog setpoint active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: r0002
Note:
The value r0046 = 0 indicates that all enable signals for this drive are present.
FP
7014,
7016
7014,
7016
-
Bit 00 = 1 (enable signal missing), if:

- the signal source in p0840 is a 0 signal.
- there is a "switching on inhibited".
- the signal source in p0844 or p0845 is a 0 signal.
- the signal source in p0848 or p0849 is a 0 signal.
Bit 04 =1 (armature short-circuit active), if:
- the signal source in p1230 has a 1 signal
Bit 05, Bit 06: Being prepared
- the pulse enable via terminal EP is missing (booksize: X21, chassis: X41).

1-49
Parameter
List of parameters

Bit 11 = 1 (enable signal missing) if the speed setpoint is frozen, because:
- the speed setpoint is entered from jogging and the two signal sources for jogging, bit 0 (p1055) and bit 1 (p1056)
have a 1 signal.
- When activating the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1), the signal source in p1142 is set to a 0 signal.
- there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and
the "switching on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0.
- commissioning mode is selected (p0009 > 0 or p0010 > 0).
- there is an OFF2 fault response.
- the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0).
- OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present.
Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if:
- synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle.
Bit 20 =1 (internal armature short-circuit active), if:
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or "S5x" (refer to function diagram 2610).
- the internal pulse enable is missing (r0046.19 = 0).
The pulses have been enabled and the speed setpoint has still not been enabled, because:
- the holding brake opening time (p1216) has still not expired.
- the motor has still not been magnetized (induction motor).
- the encoder has not been calibrated (V/f vector and synchronous motor)
Bit 22: Being prepared
- the drive is inactive (p0105 = 0) or is not operational (r7850[DO-Index]=0).
- demagnetizing has still not been completed (only for vector).
- the holding brake is closed or has still not been opened.
- the cooling system ready signal via BI: p0266[1] missing.
Bit 30 = 1 (speed controller inhibited), if one of the following reasons is present:
- A 0 signal is available via BI: p0856.
- the function generator with current input is active.
- the measuring function "current controller reference frequency characteristic" is active.
- the pole position identification is active.
- motor data identification is active (only certain steps).
- the speed setpoint from jog 1 or 2 is entered.
1-50

Parameter
List of parameters
r0047
Motor data ident. routine and speed controller optimization / MotID and n_opt

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
300
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual status for the motor data identification (standstill measurement) and the speed/velocity controller optimization (rotating measurement).
Value:
0:
115:
120:
140:
150:
170:
190:
195:
200:
210:
220:
230:
240:
250:
270:
290:
300:
Note:
r0047 = 300 is also displayed if encoder calibration p1990 is selected.
r0049[0...3]
Motor data set/encoder data set effective / MDS/EDS effective
No measurement
Measurement q leakage inductance (part 2)
Speed controller optimization (vibration test)
Calculate speed controller setting
Measurement, moment of inertia
Measurement, magnetizing current and saturation characteristic
Speed encoder test
Measurement q leakage inductance (part 1)
Rotating measurement selected
Pole position identification selected
identification, leakage inductance
Identification, rotor time constant
Identification, stator inductance
Identification, stator inductance LQLD
Identification, stator resistance
Identification, valve lockout time
Standstill measurement selected

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective Motor Data Set (MDS) and the effective Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Index:
[0] = Motor Data Set MDS effective

[1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS effective
Dependency:
Refer to: p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189, r0838
Note:
Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured).

1-51
Parameter
List of parameters
r0050.0...3
CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS effective / CDS effective

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective Command Data Set (CDS).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Refer to: p0810, p0811, r0836
Note:
The Command Data Set selected using a binector input (e.g. p0810) is displayed using r0836.
r0051.0...4
CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS effective / DDS effective
Signal name
CDS eff., bit 0
CDS eff., bit 1
CDS eff., bit 2
CDS eff., bit 3
1 signal
On
On
On
On
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned8
0
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
-
Description:
Displays the effective Drive Data Set (DDS).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
Dependency:
Refer to: p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Note:
The drive data set changeover is suppressed when selecting the motor identification, during the rotating measurement, the encoder calibration and the friction characteristic record.
r0056.0...15
CO/BO: Status word, closed-loop control / ZSW cl-loop ctrl
Signal name
DDS eff., bit 0
DDS eff., bit 1
DDS eff., bit 2
DDS eff., bit 3
DDS eff., bit 4

1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the closed-loop control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
1-52
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Signal name
Initialization completed
Demagnetizing completed
Pulse enable present
Soft starting present
Magnetizing completed
Voltage boost when starting
Acceleration voltage
Frequency negative
Field weakening active
Voltage limit active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Active
Active
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
Inactive
Inactive
No
No
No
FP
6300
6300
6719
6714

Parameter
List of parameters
10
11
12
r0060
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
6310
6719
-
13
14
Slip limit active

Frequency limit active
Current limiting controller voltage output
active
Current/torque limiting
Vdc_max controller active
Active
Yes
Inactive
No
15
Vdc_min controller active
Yes
No
6060
6220,
6320
6220,
6320
CO: Speed setpoint before the setpoint filter / n_set before filt.

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5020, 6030, 6799
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or V/f characteristic (after the interpolator).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0020
Note:
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed (r0060).
r0061
CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

4715
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
r0061
CO: Actual velocity unsmoothed / v_act unsmoothed
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

4715
Units group: 4_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [m/min]
Max
- [m/min]
Factory setting
- [m/min]
Displays the actual velocities sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).

1-53
Parameter
List of parameters
r0061[0...2]
CO: Actual speed unsmoothed / n_act unsmoothed

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

4715
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed values sensed by the encoders (unsmoothed).
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
For V/f operating modes, the speeds from encoder 2 and encoder 3 are not displayed.
r0062
CO: Speed setpoint after the filter / n_set after filter

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5020, 5030, 5210, 6030
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed setpoint after the setpoint filters.
r0063[0...2]
CO: Actual speed value / n_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual speed of the closed-loop speed control and the V/f control.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed with p0045
[2] = Calculated from f_set - f_slip
Dependency:
Refer to: r0021
Note:
The speed actual value is calculated in encoderless operation and for V/f control.
For operation with encoder, r0063[0] is smoothed with p1441.
The speed actual value (r0063[0]) is additionally displayed - smoothed with p0045 - in r0063[1].
The speed (r0063[2]) calculated from the output frequency and slip can only be compared with the speed actual
value (r0063[0]) in the steady-state.
The actual speed (r0063[0]) is available as a display quantity with additional smoothing in r0021.
1-54

Parameter
List of parameters
r0064
CO: Speed controller system deviation / n_ctrl system dev

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual system deviation of the speed controller.
Note:
In servo control mode with active reference model, the system deviation to the P component of the speed controller
is displayed.
r0065
Slip frequency / f_Slip

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6727, 6730, 6732
Units group: 2_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the slip frequency for induction motors (ASM).
r0066
CO: Output frequency / f_outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5730, 6310, 6730, 6731, 6799
Units group: 2_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the Motor Module output frequency.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0024
Note:
The output frequency is available smoothed (r0024) and unsmoothed (r0066).
r0067
CO: Output current, maximum / I_outp max

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6640, 6724
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the maximum output current of the Motor Module.
Dependency:
The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal
protection.

1-55
Parameter
List of parameters
r0068[0...1]
CO: Absolute current actual value / I_act abs val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6799, 7017, 8014, 8017, 8018
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays actual absolute current.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
Dependency:
Refer to: r0027
Notice:
The value is updated with the current controller sampling time.
Note:
Absolute current value = sqrt(Iq^2 + Id^2)

The absolute value of the current actual value is available smoothed (r0027 with 300 ms, r0068[1] with p0045) and
unsmoothed (r0068[0]).
r0069[0...6]
CO: Phase current actual value / I_phase act value

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6714, 6730, 6731, 8850, 8950
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the measured actual phase currents as peak value.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
[3] = Phase U offset
[4] = Phase V offset
[5] = Phase W offset
[6] = Total U, V, W
Note:
In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed.
The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6.
r0070
CO: Actual DC link voltage / Vdc act val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6730, 6731, 6799
Units group: 5_2
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0026
Notice:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) the following applies:

When measuring a DC link voltage < 200 V, for the Power Module (e.g. PM340) a valid measured value is not supplied. In this case, when an external 24V power supply is connected, a value of approx. 24 V is displayed.
Note:
The DC link voltage is available smoothed (r0026) and unsmoothed (r0070).
1-56

Parameter
List of parameters
r0071
Maximum output voltage / V_output max

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6640, 6722, 6723, 6724, 6725,
6727
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the maximum output voltage.
Dependency:
The maximum output voltage depends on the actual DC link voltage (r0070) and the maximum modulation depth
(p1803).
Note:
As the (driven) motor load increases, the maximum output voltage drops as a result of the reduction in DC link voltage.
r0072
CO: Output voltage / V_output

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6730, 6731, 6799
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the actual power unit output voltage (Motor Module).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0025
Note:
The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072).
r0073
Maximum modulation depth / Modulat_depth max

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6724
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the maximum modulation depth.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1803
r0074
CO: Modulat_depth / Modulat_depth

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6731, 6799, 8940, 8950
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual modulation depth.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0028
Note:
For space vector modulation, 100% corresponds to the maximum output voltage without overcontrol.
Values above 100 % indicate an overcontrol condition - values below 100% have no overcontrol.
The phase voltage (phase-to-phase, rms) is calculated as follows:(r0074 * r0070) / (sqrt(2) * 100 %).
The modulation depth is available smoothed (r0028) and unsmoothed (r0074).

1-57
Parameter
List of parameters
r0075
CO: Current setpoint field-generating / Id_set

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5722, 6714
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note:
This value is irrelevant for the V/f control mode.
r0076
CO: Current actual value field-generating / Id_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5714, 5730, 6714, 6799
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the field-generating current actual value (Id_act).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0029
Note:

The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076).
r0077
CO: Current setpoint torque-generating / Iq_set

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5714, 6710, 6714, 6719
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the torque/force generating current setpoint.
Note:
r0078
CO: Current actual value torque-generating / Iq_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6714, 6799
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the torque-generating current actual value (Iq_act).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0030
Note:

The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0030 with 300 ms) and unsmoothed (r0078).
1-58

Parameter
List of parameters
r0079
CO: Torque setpoint total / M_set total

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6030, 6060, 6710, 8012
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller (before clock cycle interpolation).
r0080[0...1]
CO: Torque actual value / M_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the actual torque value.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
Dependency:
Refer to: r0031
Note:
The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0080[0]).
r0081
CO: Torque utilization / M_Utilization

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8012
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the torque utilization as a percentage.

The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque referred to the torque limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0033
Note:
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed (r0081).

The torque utilization is obtained from the required torque referred to the torque limit as follows:
- Positive torque: r0081 = (r0079 / r1538) * 100 %
- Negative torque: r0081 = (-r0079 / -r1539) * 100 %
For SERVO, the following applies:
The calculation of the torque utilization depends on the selected smoothing time constant (p0045).

1-59
Parameter
List of parameters
r0082[0...2]
CO: Active power actual value / P_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 14_5
Scaling: r2004
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Description:
Displays the instantaneous active power.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[2] = Electric power
Dependency:
Refer to: r0032
Note:
The mechanical active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed
(r0082[0]).
r0083
CO: Flux setpoint / Flux setpoint

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5722
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the flux setpoint.
r0084[0...1]
CO: Flux actual value / Flux act val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6731
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the flux actual value.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Note:
The flux actual value (index 1) smoothed with p1585 is only displayed for separately-excited synchronous motors.
In the following cases, the unsmoothed flux actual value is also displayed:
- in the range of the current model.
- during the pole position identification.
- for I/f control.
- for a stalled drive.
1-60

Parameter
List of parameters
r0087
CO: Actual power factor / Cos phi act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6732, 6799
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual active power factor.
r0088
CO: DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setpoint
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Tech_ctrl)

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_2
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the setpoint for the DC link voltage.
r0089[0...2]
Actual phase voltage / U_phase act val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6719
Units group: 5_3
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual phase voltage.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
Note:
The values are determined from the transistor power-on duration.
p0092
Clock synchronous operation pre-assignment/check / Clock sync op
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to pre-assign/check the sampling times for the internal controller clock cycles for clock-synchronous PROFIBUS operation.
p0092 = 1:
The controller clock cycles are set so that clock synchronous PROFIBUS operation is possible. If it is not possible
to change the controller clock cycles of the clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation, then an appropriate
message is output.
The presetting of the controller clock cycles can result in a derating of the Motor Module (e.g. p0115[0] = 400 s -->
375 s).
When the drive unit utilization (r9976) is calculated, its maximum computing time load has already been calculated
during ramp-up for clock-cycle synchronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (V4.3 and higher), if fixed
DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" and "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" are used.

1-61
Parameter
List of parameters
p0092 = 0:
The controller clock cycles are set without any restrictions by the clock-cycle PROFIBUS operation (as for up to version V2.3).
When the drive unit utilization (r9976) is calculated, its maximum computing time load has already been calculated
during ramp-up for non-clock-cycle-synchronous operation and taken into account in r9976 (V4.3 and higher), if
fixed DCC runtime groups "Receive AFTER IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" and "Send BEFORE IF1 PROFIdrive PZD" are
used.
Value:
0:
1:
No isochronous PROFIBUS
Isochronous PROFIBUS
Dependency:
Refer to: r0110, p0115
Caution:
Only current controller clock cycles (p0115 index 0) which are integers of 125 s are permitted for isochronous
mode.
Notice:
p0092 only affects the automatic default for the clock cycles (p0115) in the drive. If the clock cycles are modified
subsequently in expert mode (p0112 = 0), p0092 = 0 should be set so that the new values are not overwritten again
by the automatic default when the parameters are downloaded. Current controller clock cycle values must continue
to be integers of 125 s for synchronous mode.
r0094
CO: Transformation angle / Transformat_angle
Refer to: A01223, A01224

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

1690, 4710, 6714, 6730, 6731,
6732
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Description:
Displays the transformation angle.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0431, r1778
Note:
The transformation angle corresponds to the electrical commutation angle.

If no pole position identification is carried out (p1982), and the encoder is adjusted, the following applies:
The encoder supplies the value and indicates the electrical angle of the flux position (d axis).
p0097
Select drive object type / Select DO type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
17
Factory setting
0
Description:
Executes an automatic device configuration.

In so doing, p0099, p0107 and p0108 are appropriately set.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
12:
1-62
No selection
Drive object type SERVO
Drive object type VECTOR
SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV)
SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV)
SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL)
SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL)
Drive object type VECTOR parallel circuit

Parameter
List of parameters
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
Dependency:
Drive object type VECTORMV - GM parallel circuit

Drive object type VECTORMV - SM parallel circuit
Drive object type DC_CTRL
Drive object type SERVO HMI
Drive object type VECTOR HMI

Refer to: A01330
Note:
For p0097 = 0, p0099 is automatically set to the factor setting.

The possible settings are dependent upon the device type.
r0098[0...5]
Actual device topology / Device_act topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the automatically detected actual device topology in coded form.
Index:
[0] = DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100

Dependency:
Note:
Topology coding: abcd efgh hex

a = number of Active Line Modules
b = number of Motor Modules
c = number of motors
d = number of encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules)
e = number of additional encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules)
f = number of Terminal Modules
g = number of Terminal Boards
h = reserved
if the value 0 is displayed in all indices, then components are not detected via DRIVE-CLiQ.
If a value F hex occurs at a position of the coding (abcd efgh hex), then an overflow has occurred.
p0099[0...5]
Device target topology / Device_target topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the device target topology in coded form (refer to r0098). The setting is made during commissioning.
Deactivated or non-available components are also counted
Index:


1-63
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The parameter can only be written into for p0097 = 0.

To perform an automatic device configuration run, an index of the device target topology must be set to the value of
the device actual topology in r0098 for acknowledgement. An index of the device actual topology with a value other
than 0 must be selected.
Refer to: A01330
Note:
The parameter can only be set to the values 0, the value of the actual device topology, the value of the actual
device target topology and FFFFFFFF hex.
If the value 0 is displayed in all of the indices, then the system has still not been commissioned.
The value FFFFFFFF hex indicates that the topology was not generated by the automatic device configuration but
was commissioned using the commissioning software (e.g. using parameter download).
p0100
IEC/NEMA mot stds / IEC/NEMA mot stds
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1)

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Defines whether the motor and drive converter power settings (e.g. rated motor power - p0307) are expressed in
[kW] or [hp].
Depending on the selection, the rated motor frequency (p0310) is either set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
The following applies for IEC drives: The power factor (p0308) should be parameterized.
The following applies for NEMA drives: The efficiency (p0309) should be parameterized.
Value:
0:
1:
IEC-Motor (50 Hz, SI units)

NEMA motor (60 Hz, US units)
Dependency:
If p0100 is changed, all of the rated motor parameters are reset. Only then are possible unit changeovers made.
The units of all motor parameters are changed that are involved in the selection of IEC or NEMA (e.g. r0206, p0307,
p0316, r0333, r0334, p0341, p0344, r1493, r1969).
Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323,
p0335, r0336, r0337, p1800
Note:
The parameter can only be changed for vector control (p0107).

The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970).
p0101[0...23]
Drive object numbers / DO numbers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
62
Factory setting
0
Description:
The parameter contains the object number via which every drive object can be addressed.
The number of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The numbers are automatically assigned once and can no longer be changed as long as the object has not been
deleted.
In the commissioning software, this object number cannot be entered using the expert list, but is automatically
assigned when inserting an object.
1-64

Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Drive object number Control Unit

[1] = Drive object number object 1
Note:
Value = 0: No drive object is defined.
r0102[0...1]
Number of drive objects / DO count
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of existing or existing and prepared drive objects.
Index:
[0] = Existing drive objects

[1] = Existing and prepared drive objects
Dependency:
Refer to: p0101
Note:
The numbers of the drive objects are in p0101.

Index 0:
Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up.
Index 1:
Displays the number of drive objects that have already been set up and, in addition, the drive objects that still have
to be set up.
p0103[0...23]
Application-specific view / Appl_spec view
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999
Factory setting
0
Description:
The application-specific view of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
The parameter cannot be changed.
Dependency:

1-65
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
In the non-volatile memory, the application-specific views are defined in files with the following structure:
PDxxxyyy.ACX
xxx: Application-specific view (p0103)
yyy: Type of drive object (p0107)
Example:
PD052011.ACX
--> "011" stands for the drive object, type SERVO
--> "052" is the number of the view for this drive object
r0103
Application-specific view / Appl_spec view

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Closed-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the application-specific view of the individual drive object.
Dependency:
p0105
Activate/deactivate drive object / DO act/deact
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106
Notice:
The following applies when activating:
Deactivate drive object

Activate drive object
If components are inserted for the first time and the appropriate drive object is activated, then the drive system is
automatically booted. To do this, the pulses of all of the drive objects must be suppressed.
p0105
ENCODER, HUB,
Can be changed: T
TB30,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Not for motor type: Min
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106

Drive object, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01316

Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled.
Notice:

1-66

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Setting a drive object to deactivate principally corresponds to the "parking axis" function. however, here, all of the
DRIVE-CLiQ components, assigned to the drive object, are in involved.
p0105
TM31
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106

Refer to: A01316

Warning:
A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while this parameter is
being changed over.
Caution:
Notice:

Note:
p0105
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0106

Refer to: A01316

Caution:
It is not permissible to deactivate drive objects with safety functions enabled:

TM54F can only be deactivated if all of the axes connected to it via P10010 have been deactivated or are not
enabled on the connected safety axes.
Notice:

Note:

1-67
Parameter
List of parameters
r0106
Drive object active/inactive / DO act/inact
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active/inactive" state of a drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0105
p0107[0...23]
Drive object type / DO type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
300
Factory setting
0
Drive object inactive

Drive object active
Description:
The type of an existing drive object is entered into each index.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
30:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
100:
101:
102:
104:
150:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
1-68
SINAMICS S
SINAMICS G
SINAMICS I
SINAMICS CX32
SINAMICS GM
SINAMICS DC
SINAMICS GL
SINAMICS S110
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL
SERVO
VECTOR
VECTORMV
VECTORGL
VECTORSL
DC_CTRL
VECTORM2C
VECTORDM
SMART INFEED CONTROL
BASIC INFEED CONTROL
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV
BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C
SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
TB30 (Terminal Board)
SINAMICS SL
SINAMICS SM2
SINAMICS SM2I
TM31 (Terminal Module)
TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS)
TM54F - Master (Terminal Module)

Parameter
List of parameters
206:
207:
254:
300:
TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module)

CU-LINK
ENCODER
Index:
[0] = Drive object type, Control Unit

[1] = Drive object type, object 1
Dependency:
Caution:

If you change this parameter and exit the device commissioning mode, then the complete software will be set up
again and all of the previous drive parameter settings are deleted.
Note:
The number (p0101) and the associated drive object type are in the same index.
For SINAMICS S a drive object type can only be changed between SERVO and VECTOR. If you change the
parameter and exit drive start-up (p0009 from 2 to 0) the drive parameters are set up again.
r0107
Drive object type / DO type
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
300
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the type of each drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
SINAMICS S
SINAMICS G
SINAMICS I
SINAMICS CX32
SINAMICS GM
SINAMICS DC
SINAMICS GL
SINAMICS S110
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROL
SERVO
VECTOR
VECTORMV
VECTORGL

1-69
Parameter
List of parameters
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
30:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
100:
101:
102:
104:
150:
200:
201:
202:
203:
204:
205:
206:
207:
254:
300:
VECTORSL
DC_CTRL
VECTORM2C
VECTORDM
SMART INFEED CONTROL
BASIC INFEED CONTROL
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLMV
BASIC INFEED CONTROLMV
ACTIVE INFEED CONTROLM2C
SINAMICS G120 230 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
SINAMICSG120 240_2 (SingleDO-Drive which combines Device+Vector)
TB30 (Terminal Board)
SINAMICS SL
SINAMICS SM2
SINAMICS SM2I
TM17 High Feature (Terminal Module)
TM15 (Terminal Module for SINAMICS)
TM54F - Master (Terminal Module)
TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module)
CU-LINK
ENCODER
Dependency:
p0108[0...23]
Drive object, function module / DO function module
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
The function module of an existing drive object is entered into each index (also refer to p0101, p0107).
The following bits are available for the Control Unit (Index 0):
Bit 18: Free function blocks
Bit 29: CAN
Bit 30: COMM BOARD
Bit 31: PROFINET
For all other drive objects (Index > 0), the significance of the bits should be taken from the display parameters r0108
of the drive object.
Index:
[0] = Function module Control Unit

[1] = Function module object 1
1-70

Parameter
List of parameters

Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Note:
A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning.
r0108
ENCODER
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
-
Description:
Displays the activated function module for the particular drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
12
18
31
Note:
Signal name
Linear encoder
PROFINET
1 signal
Activated
Activated
Activated

0 signal
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
FP
-
1-71
Parameter
List of parameters
r0108
TB30, TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Bit field:
Bit
18
31
Note:
r0108
Signal name
PROFINET
1 signal
Activated
Activated

0 signal
Not activated
Not activated
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Bit field:
Bit
02
08
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
28
29
31
Note:
r0110[0...2]
Basic sampling times / t_basis
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
10000.00 [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Signal name
Closed-loop speed/torque control
Extended setpoint channel
Safety rotary axis
Extended brake control
Parallel cct. config.
Extended signals/monitoring
Software gating unit
Cooling system
CAN
PROFINET
1 signal
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
Not activated
Activated
Activated
Activated
0 signal
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
Activated
Not activated
Not activated
Not activated
FP
-
FP
-
Displays the basic sampling times.

The sampling times are set using p0112 and p0115. The values for the basic sampling times are determined as a
result of these settings.
Index:
[0] = Basic sampling time 0

1-72

Parameter
List of parameters
r0111
Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, HUB, Data type: Integer16
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Max
2
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0110
r0111
Basic sampling time selection / t_basis sel
TB30, TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0110
Note:
For TB30 and the Terminal Module, this parameter has no significance.
For TB30 and certain Terminal Modules, the sampling times can be set using p4099 (see description of p4099 for
the Module in question).
p0112
Sampling times presetting p0115 / t_sample for p0115

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
3
Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115.

The clock cycles for the current controller / speed controller / flux controller / setpoint channel / position controller /
positioning / technology controller are pre-assigned as follows:
SINAMICS S, servo drive:
p0112 = 1: 250 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s (for chassis units)
p0112 = 2: 125 / 250 / 250 / 4000 / 2000 / 8000 / 4000 s
p0112 = 3: 125 / 125 / 125 / 4000 / 1000 / 4000 / 4000 s
p0112 = 4: 62.5 / 62.5 / 62.5 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s
p0112 = 5: Not possible
SINAMICS S, Active Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1):
p0112 = 1: 400 / - / - / 1600 s (presetting for the rated pulse frequency = 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 3: 125 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 4: 125 / - / - / 1000 s
p0112 = 5: 125 / - / - / 500 s
SINAMICS S, Smart Infeed (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1):
p0112 = 3: 250 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 1000 s

1-73
Parameter
List of parameters
SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, booksize:

p0112 = 4: 250 / - / - / 2000 s
SINAMICS S, Basic Infeed, chassis:
p0112 = 1: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s
p0112 = 2: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s (presetting)
p0112 = 3: 2000 / - / - / 2000 s
SINAMICS S/G, vector drive (p0112 = 1 not for p0092 = 1 and not for PM340):
p0112 = 1: 400 / 1600 / 1600 / 1600 / 3200 / 3200 / 3200 s (for rated pulse frequency = 1.25, 2.5 kHz)
p0112 = 2: 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s
p0112 = 3: 250 / 1000 / 1000 / 1000 / 2000 / 4000 / 4000 s (for rated pulse frequency = 2.0, 4.0 kHz)
SINAMICS S, vector drive:
p0112 = 4: 250 / 500 / 1000 / 500 / 1000 / 2000 / 2000 s
p0112 = 5: 250 / 250 / 1000 / 250 / 1000 / 2000 / 1000 s
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Expert
xLow
Low
Standard
Recommend.:
When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend
that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are recalculated using p0340 = 4.
Dependency:
It is prohibited to select a parameter value from p0112 if the associated current controller clock cycle cannot set
(e.g. p0112 = 1 is not possible for a vector drive and PM340 power unit).
Refer to: p0092
Note:
For p0112 = 0 (expert) the individual sampling times in p0115 can be adjusted.
p0112 = 1 cannot be set for a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203) for vector drives.
p0113
Minimum pulse frequency, selection / f_puls min sel

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.000 [kHz]
Max
2.000 [kHz]
Factory setting
2.000 [kHz]
Description:
The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is pre-assigned by selecting the minimum pulse frequency.
Dependency:
The parameter can only be changed with p0112 = 0 (expert). For isochronous operation (p0092 = 1) the parameter
can only be set so that a current controller clock cycle of 125 s is obtained as an integer number.
The required pulse frequency can be set in p1800 after commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0).
Refer to: p0112, r0114, p0115, p1800
Note:
The current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) is set to the inverse value of twice the minimum pulse frequency.
For p0113 = 1.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 500 s is set, for p0113 = 2.0 kHz, p0115[0] = 250 s is set. The current controller
sampling time (p0115[0]), calculated from the pulse frequency, is set in a grid of 1.25 s.
For a power unit type PM340 (refer to r0203), only the values 1.0 and 2.0 kHz can be set. 1.0 kHz can be set in
order to achieve a current controller clock cycle of 500s. However, in this case, the minimum pulse frequency
p1800 is limited to 2 kHz.
1-74

Parameter
List of parameters
r0114[0...9]
Minimum pulse frequency, recommended / f_puls min recom

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kHz]
Max
- [kHz]
Factory setting
- [kHz]
Displays the recommended values (indices 0 and 1) for the minimum pulse frequency (p0113).
If the system rejects a change to p0113 because the value to be used lies outside the permitted value range, then
instead the recommended value from r0114 can be used.
Index:
[0] = If only the actual drive is changed

[1] = If all drives connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ line are changed
[2] = 2. possible pulse frequency
Dependency:
Refer to: p0113
Note:
After exiting commissioning (p0009 = p0010 = 0), the pulse frequencies calculated from the sampling time p115[0]
are displayed in indices 1 to 9. If additional restrictions do not apply (e.g. due to having selected an output filter),
these can be entered into p1800. The maximum pulse frequency of the power units was already taken into account
in r0114.
A value of 0 kHz does not define a recommended pulse frequency.
p0115[0]
Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
16000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the basic sampling time for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object.
Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 s are permissible.
Index:
[0] = Basic sampl. time
p0115[0]
Sampling time for speed detection / t_sample n_det
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
125.00 [s]
Max
500.00 [s]
Factory setting
125.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling times for speed detection.
Index:

1-75
Parameter
List of parameters
p0115[0]
TB30, TM31
Description:
Sampling time for supplementary functions / t_samp suppl_fct

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
16000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Sets the sampling times for supplementary functions (DCC, free function blocks) on this object.
Only setting values that are an integer multiple of 125 s are permissible.
Index:
Note:
This parameter only applies to set the sampling times of possible supplementary functions.
The sampling times for inputs/outputs must be set in p4099.
p0115[0...6]
Sampling times for internal control loops / t_sample int ctrl

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
16000.00 [s]
Factory setting
[0] 125.00 [s]
[1] 125.00 [s]
[2] 125.00 [s]
[3] 4000.00 [s]
[4] 1000.00 [s]
[5] 4000.00 [s]
[6] 4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling times for the control loops.
Recommend.:
When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend
that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are recalculated using p0340 = 4.
Index:
[0] = Current controller

[1] = Speed controller
[2] = Flux controller
[3] = Setpoint channel
[4] = Position controller
[5] = Positioning
[6] = Technology controller
Dependency:
The sampling times can only be separately set if p0112 is 0 (expert). If a sampling time is modified in the expert
mode, then all of the sampling times with higher indices are automatically changed in the same ratio as the sampling time itself was changed. Slower time slices are only taken if the calculated sampling time is also permitted.
Upper limit is 8 ms.
The default setting is made using p0112 and can only be individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert).
Higher-level controls must be calculated in integral ratios to lower-level controls (e.g. p0115[1] = N * p0115[0];
where N is an integer number). The sampling time of the speed controller (p0115[1]) can have as a maximum a
value of 800% of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
The sampling times for setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and technology controller (p0115[6]) must have at least 2x the value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
If p0092 = 1 the sampling times p0115 and the pulse frequency p1800 are checked every time the parameters are
downloaded, and reset to the initial values if necessary. This check can be deactivated by setting p0092 = 0 (making this setting does not affect isochronous PROFIBUS operation).
Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112
Note:
For function modules that can be activated (e.g. technology controller), the parameters values are pre-assigned.
The minimum current controller clock cycle is 250 s, the maximum current controller clock cycle is 500 s. For
power unit type PM340 (r0203), only these current controller sampling times of 250 s and 500 s can be set.
1-76

Parameter
List of parameters
r0116[0...1]
Drive object clock cycle recommended / DO_clock recom
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the recommended sampling time for the drive objects.

r00116[0] = recommended sampling time:
Recommended value which would then make the complete system operational.
r00116[1] = recommended sampling time:
Recommended value, which after changing other clock cycles on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, would result in an operational system.
Index:
[0] = Change only for the actual drive object

[1] = Changing all objects on the DRIVE-CLiQ line
Dependency:
Refer to: p0115
p0117
Current controller computing dead time mode / I_ctrl t_dead mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
6
Description:
Sets the mode for the computing dead time of the current controller.
0: Offset (shifted) clocking, minimum computing dead time of each drive, automatic setting
1: Clocking at the same time, the dead time aligns itself to the dead time of the latest drive, automatic setting
2: Manual setting of the computing dead time, early transfer
3: Manual setting of the computing dead time, late transfer
4-6: As for 0-2, however, no early transfers are set for vectors
Dependency:
Refer to: p0118

Refer to: A02100
Note:
Re p0117 = 0:
The times when the setpoints become effective for the individual controls is automatically and individually determined. Another computing dead time is set for each control (closed-loop) (p0118). Current is impressed for the individual controls without any offset with respect to time (improved EMC compatibility).
Re p0117 = 1:
The latest closed-loop control determines when the setpoints for each of the individual controls become active. The
same computing dead time is set for each control (p0118). Current is impressed (flows) for the individual controls
without any offset with respect to time.
Re p0117 = 2:
The computing dead time is manually set. The user must optimize the value in p0118.
Re p0117 = 3:
Only for internal Siemens use.
Re p0117 = 4 ... 6:
Behavior as for p0117 = 0 ... 2, however for vectors, the earliest times are not determined.
The modified computing dead time mode is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.

1-77
Parameter
List of parameters
p0118
Current controller computing dead time / I_ctrl t_dead

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
2000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
This parameter is preset as a function of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) and normally does not have
to be changed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0117

Refer to: A02100
Note:
For p0118 <= 0.005 s, the current controller output is delayed by a complete current controller clock cycle
(p0115[0]).
After p0118 has been changed, we recommend that the current controller is adapted (p1715).
p0120
Number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS) / PDS count

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
8
Factory setting
1
Sets the number of Power unit Data Sets (PDS).

The value corresponds to the number of power units connected together for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency:
Note:
This parameter is only significant for drive objects A_INFEED and VECTOR with a parallel circuit configuration.
p0121[0...n]
Power unit component number / PU comp_no

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
The power unit data set is assigned to a power unit using this parameter.
This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a power unit.
Dependency:
Note:
For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit.
p0124[0...23]
Detection of main components using LED / Detection LED
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
1-78
Detects the main components of the drive object selected via the index.

Parameter
List of parameters
p0124[0...n]
Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Detects the power unit assigned to this drive and data set.
Note:
While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate power unit.
p0125[0...n]
Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a power unit component.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0126
Deactivate component
Activate component
Component, deactivate and not present
Refer to: A01317

Caution:
Note:
The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time.
In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited.
For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn.
r0126[0...n]
Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active/inactive" state of a power unit component.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0105, p0125, p0897
Component inactive
Component active

1-79
Parameter
List of parameters
r0127[0...n]
Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0147, r0157
Note:
r0128[0...n]
Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0148, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
p0130
Number of Motor Data Sets (MDS) / MDS count

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
16
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of Motor Data Sets (MDS).
p0131[0...n]
Motor component number / Mot comp_no

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
The motor data set is assigned to a motor using this parameter.

Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a motor.
1-80

Parameter
List of parameters
p0139[0...2]
Copy Motor Data Set MDS / Copy MDS

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
0
Description:
Copying a Motor Data Set (MDS) into another.
Index:
[0] = Source motor data set

[1] = Target motor data set
[2] = Start copying procedure
Note:
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which motor data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the motor data set data that is to be copied into.
3. Start copying: Set index 2 from 0 to 1.
p0139[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed.
When copying, p0131 is not taken into account.
p0140
Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Note:
When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1).
p0140
Number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS) / EDS count

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
16
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Note:
When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1).
p0141[0...n]
Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Data sets
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: EDS, p0140
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder evaluation (e.g. SMC).
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder evaluation.
Note:
If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).

1-81
Parameter
List of parameters
p0142[0...n]
Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Data sets
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
This parameter is used to assign the encoder data set to an encoder.

This assignment is made using the unique component number that was assigned when parameterizing the topology.
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an encoder.
Note:
If the encoder evaluation and encoder are integrated (motor with DRIVE-CLiQ), then their component numbers are
identical.
For an SMC, different component numbers are assigned for the SMC (p0141) and the (actual) encoder (p0142).
p0144[0...n]
Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Detects the Sensor Module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note:
While p0144 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Sensor Module.
p0145[0...n]
Activate/deactivate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Data sets
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate an encoder interface (Sensor Module).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0146
Activate component
Refer to: A01317

Note:
The deactivation of an encoder interface corresponds to the"parking encoder" function and has the same effect.
The activation of a component can be rejected if the component was inserted for the first time.
In this case, it is only possible to activate the component when the pulses for all of the drive objects are inhibited.
With the encoder interface for encoder 1 (motor encoder), the relevant drive object for writing the parameter must
be in the "Ready for operation" state.
With the encoder interface for encoders 2 and 3, the parameter can also be written during operation.
1-82

Parameter
List of parameters
r0146[0...n]
Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Integer16
0
P-Group: Data sets
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of an encoder interface (Sensor Module).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0105, p0145, p0480, p0897
r0147[0...n]
Sensor Module EPROM data version / SM EEPROM version
Component inactive
Component active
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Sensor Module.
Dependency:
Note:
Example:
r0148[0...n]
Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Sensor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0158, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
p0150
Number of VSM data sets / VSM dat_sets qty.

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Sets the number of VSM data sets.

1-83
Parameter
List of parameters
p0151[0...1]
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module component number / Hub comp_no
HUB
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
This parameter is used to assign the data set to a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Only the numbers of components operated as hubs can be entered in these parameters.
[0] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 1
[1] = DRIVE-CLiQ node 2
p0151
Terminal Module component number / TM comp_no
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the component number for the Terminal Module.

Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a Terminal Module.
p0151[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module component number / VSM comp_no

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: p0150
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
The VSM data set is assigned to a VSM evaluation using this parameter.
p0154
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module detection via LED / Hub detection LED
HUB
Description:
1-84
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Detects any DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that has been assigned.

Parameter
List of parameters
p0154
Terminal Module detection via LED / TM detection LED
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Detects the Terminal Module assigned to this drive and data set.
Note:
While p0154 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Terminal Module.
p0155[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module, activate/deactivate / VSM act/deact

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Setting to activate/deactivate a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0156
Activate component
Refer to: A01317
r0156[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module, active/inactive / VSM act/inact

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the "active" or "inactive" state of a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0155
r0157
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module EPROM data version / Hub EPROM version
HUB
Component inactive
Component active
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Note:
Example:

1-85
Parameter
List of parameters
r0157
Terminal Module EPROM data version / TM EPROM version
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Terminal Module.
Dependency:
Note:
Example:
r0157[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module, EPROM data version / VSM EPROM version

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the EPROM data of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note:
Example:
r0158
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module firmware version / Hub FW version
HUB
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
r0158
Terminal Module Firmware Version / TM FW version
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Terminal Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
1-86

Parameter
List of parameters
r0158[0...n]
Voltage Sensing Module firmware version / VSM FW version

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware version of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0197, r0198
Note:
Example:
p0161
Option board, component number / Opt board comp_num
TB30
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9100
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Sets the component number for the option board (e.g. Terminal Board 30).
Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an option board.
p0170
Number of Command Data Sets (CDS) / CDS count

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
4
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the number of Command Data Sets (CDS).
Note:
It is possible to toggle between command parameters (BICO parameters) using this data set changeover.
p0180
Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS) / DDS count

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
32
Factory setting
1
Sets the number of Drive Data Sets (DDS).

1-87
Parameter
List of parameters
p0186[0...n]
Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Motor Data Set (MDS).
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned motor data set.
p0187[0...n]
Encoder 1 encoder data set number / Enc 1 EDS number

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Encoder Data Set (EDS) for
encoder 1.
The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned encoder data set.
Example:
Encoder data set 0 should be assigned to encoder 1 in drive data set 2.
--> p0187[2] = 0
Note:
A value of 99 means that no encoder has been assigned to this drive data set (not configured).
p0188[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
encoder 2.
Note:
p0189[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
encoder 3.
Note:
1-88

Parameter
List of parameters
r0192
Power unit firmware properties / PU FW property

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the properties supported by the power unit firmware.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
26
Signal name
Edge modulation possible
Free telegram can be selected
Smart mode possible for Active Line Module
Safety Integrated possible for VECTOR
Liquid cooling
SERVO pulse frequency changeover, DDSdependent
Simulation mode possible
Internal armature short-circuit possible
Autonomous internal armature short-circuit
possible
Infeed temperature inputs X21.1/2
Integral normalized to half the gating unit
clock cycle freq.
Filtering thermal power unit current limit
possible
DC link compensation possible in power unit
PT100 temperature evaluation possible
Gating unit with pulse frequency wobbulation possible
Compound brake possible
Extended voltage range possible
Gating unit available with current limitation
control
Component status possible
Temperature evaluation via Motor Module /
CU terminals possible
Reduced device supply voltage possible
Current measurement oversampling available
Internal fan operating hours counter available
Software gating unit in the CU is supported
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
no
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Notice:
This information represents the characteristics/features of the power unit firmware. It does not provide information/data about the characteristics/features of the hardware (e.g. bit 06 = 1 means that although the firmware supports "liquid cooling", a power unit with liquid cooling does not have to be used).
Note:
Re bit 09:
The Motor Module supports the internal armature short-circuit. The function is internally required for voltage protection (p1231 = 3).
Re bit 10:
The Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection. If the voltage protection function is internally activated (p1231 = 3) the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the
short-circuit is activated.
Re bit 23:
The component supports the detection of current actual values (and the detection of valve close durations) with
double clocking and phase shift.

1-89
Parameter
List of parameters
r0194[0...n]
VSM properties / VSM properties

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the properties supported by the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Bit field:
Bit
00
r0196[0...255]
DRIVE-CLiQ component status / DLQ comp status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Signal name
Reserved
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Displays the status of DRIVE-CLiQ components.

r0196[0...1]: Not used
r0196[2]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 2
...
r0196[255]: Status of DRIVE-CLiQ component with component number 255
Note:
Structure of status value: Bits 31 ... 08, 07, 06 ... 04, 03 ... 00
Re Bit 31 ... 08: Reserved
Re Bit 07: 1: Part of target topology, 0: Only in actual topology
Re Bit 06 ... 04: 1: Active, 0: Inactive or parked
Re bit 03 ... 00:
0: Component data not available.
1: Power-up, acyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = orange).
2: Ready for operation, cyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication (LED = green).
3: Alarm (LED = green).
4: Fault (LED = red).
5: Detection via LED and ready for operation (LED = green/orange).
6: Detection via LED and alarm (LED = green/orange).
7: Detection via LED and fault (LED = red/orange).
8: Downloading firmware (LED = green/red at 0.5 Hz).
9: Firmware downloading completed, Waiting for POWER ON (LED = green/red at 2.0 Hz).
r0197
Bootloader version / Bootloader vers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bootloader version.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0198
Note:
Example:
1-90

Parameter
List of parameters
r0198[0...1]
BIOS and EEPROM data version / BIOS/EEPROM vers
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the BIOS and EEPROM data version.

Re r0198[0]
Displays the BIOS version.
Re r0198[1]
Displays the EEPROM data version.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197
Note:
Example:
p0199[0...24]
All objects
Description:
Drive object name / DO name

Can be changed: C1
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Freely assignable name for a drive object.

In the commissioning software, this name cannot be entered using the expert list, but is specified in the configuration assistant. The object name can be subsequently modified in the Project Navigator using standard Windows
resources.
Note:
r0200[0...n]
Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the unique code number of the power unit.
Note:
No power unit found: r0200 = p0201.

p0201[0...n]
Power unit code number / PU code no

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07815
When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201.

1-91
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
When p0201 = 10000, the rated power unit data is reloaded and dependent parameters are set (e.g. p0205, p0210,
p0230, p0857, p1800). p0201 is then automatically assigned the value of r0200 if the code number of the power
unit could be read. A warm start must be performed after this procedure (automatically if necessary).
Note:
The parameter is used to identify when the drive is being commissioned for the first time.
The power unit commissioning can only be exited (p0201 = r0200), if the actual and acknowledged code numbers
are identical (p0010 = 2). However, if the comparator in p9906 or p9908 is at 2 (low) or 3 (minimum), the power unit
commissioning is automatically set to p0201 = r0200 upon exiting.
When the code number is changed, the connection voltage (p0210) is checked and, if necessary, adjusted.
r0203[0...15]
Memory card name / Sp_card name
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the name of the memory card in ASCII code.

r0203[0]: Name character 1
...
r0203[15]: Name character 16
For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded.
Notice:
An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the Appendix of the List Manual:
r0203[0...n]
Actual power unit type / PU actual type

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
400
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the type of power unit found.
Value:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
100:
101:
102:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
118:
120:
150:
200:
250:
260:
300:
350:
400:
Note:
1-92
MICROMASTER 440
MICROMASTER 411
MICROMASTER 410
MICROMASTER 436
MICROMASTER 440 PX
MICROMASTER 430
SINAMICS S
SINAMICS S (value)
SINAMICS S (combi)
PM220 (SINAMICS G120)
SINAMICS G120 Px
PM340 (SINAMICS S120)
SINAMICS G
SINAMICS GM
SINAMICS SM
SINAMICS SM120
SINAMICS GL
SINAMICS SL
SINAMICS DCM

Parameter
List of parameters
r0204[0...n]
Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the properties supported by the power unit hardware.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
12
13
14
Signal name
Device type
RFI filter available
Active Line Module available
Smart Line Module available
Basic Line Module available with thyristor
bridge
Basic Line Module available with diode
bridge
Liquid cooling with cooling system (chassis
PU)
F3E regenerative feedback into the line supply
Internal Braking Module
Different cooling type supported
Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported
Safety Integrated supported
Internal LC output filter
1 signal
DC/AC device
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
AC/AC device
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
Note:
p0205
Power unit application / PU application
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 2)

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
7
Factory setting
6
Overloading the load duty cycles applies under the prerequisite that before and after the overload, the drive converter is operated with its base load current - in this case, a load duty cycle of 300 s is used as basis.
For booksize drive units, the following applies:
Only the setting p0205 = 0 can be selected. In this particular case, the base load current has a load duty cycle of
150 % for 60 s and 176 % for 30 s.
For chassis units, the following applies:
The base load current for a slight overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 110 % for 60 s and 150 % for 10
s.
The base load current for a high overload condition is based on a load duty cycle 150 % for 60 s and 160 % for 10 s.
Value:
0:
1:
6:
7:
Load duty cycle with high overload for vector drives

Load duty cycle with low overload for vector drives
S1 duty cycle for servo drives (feed drive)
S6 duty cycle for servo drives (spindle drive)
Note:
When the parameter is changed, all of the motor parameters and the control mode are pre-assigned according to
the selected application.
The parameter has not influence when calculating the thermal overload.
p0205 can only be changed to the settings that are saved in the power unit EEPROM.
The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (see p0010 = 30, p0970).

1-93
Parameter
List of parameters
r0206[0...4]
Rated power unit power / PU P_rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: 14_6
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Description:
Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate

[1] = Load duty cycle with low overload
[2] = Load duty cycle with high overload
[3] = S1 cont duty cyc
[4] = S6 load duty cycle
Dependency:
IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
r0207[0...4]
Rated power unit current / PU PI_rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the rated power unit power for various load duty cycles.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate

Dependency:
Refer to: p0205
r0208
Rated power unit line supply voltage / PU V_rated

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Displays the rated line supply voltage of the power unit.

r0208 = 400 : 380 - 480 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 500 : 500 - 600 V +/-10 %
r0208 = 690 : 660 - 690 V +/-10 %
For the Basic Line Module (BLM) the following applies:
r0208 = 690 : 500 - 690 V +/-10 %
1-94

Parameter
List of parameters
r0209[0...4]
Power unit, maximum current / PU I_max

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8950
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.
Index:
[0] = Catalog
Dependency:
Refer to: p0205
p0210
Drive unit line supply voltage / Supply voltage

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [V]
Max
63000 [V]
Factory setting
600 [V]
Sets the drive unit supply voltage.

AC/AC unit: The rms value of the phase-to-phase line supply voltage should be entered.
DC/AC unit: The rated DC voltage of the connection busbar should be entered.
Dependency:
Set p1254, p1294 (automatic detection of the Vdc switch-on levels) = 0.

The switch-in thresholds of the Vdc_max controller are then directly determined using p0210.
The parameter can be reduced to p0210 = 100 V if p0212 bit 0 has been set.
Refer to: p0212
Caution:
If the line supply voltage is higher than the entered value, the Vdc controller may be automatically deactivated in
some cases to prevent the motor from accelerating. In this case, an appropriate alarm is output.
Note:
Setting ranges for p0210 as a function of the rated power unit voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- p0210 = 380 ... 480 V (AC/AC), 510 ... 720 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 600 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 900 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 660 V ... 690 V:
- p0210 = 660 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 890 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
V_rated = 500 V ... 690 V:
- p0210 = 500 ... 690 V (AC/AC), 675 ... 1035 V (DC/AC)
The pre-charging switch-in threshold for the DC link voltage (Vdc) is calculated from p0210:
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 * 1.35 (AC/AC)
Vdc_pre = p0210 * 0.82 (DC/AC)

1-95
Parameter
List of parameters
The undervoltage thresholds for the DC link voltage (Vdc) are calculated from p0210 as a function of the rated
power unit voltage:
V_rated = 400 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.78 (AC/AC) > 330 V, p0210 * 0.60 (DC/AC) > 380 V
V_rated = 500 V:
- V_min = p0210 * 0.76 (AC/AC) > 410 V
V_rated = 660 V ... 690 V:
V_rated = 500 V ... 690 V:
p0212
Power unit configuration / PU configuration

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Configuration of the power unit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Reduced supply voltages (bit 0 = 1) are only possible on booksize power units.
Signal name
Reduced device supply voltage
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Bit 0 = 1 can only be set if r0192 bit 22 = 1.

Caution:
Re bit 00:
Working with reduced input voltages deactivates undervoltage detection.
Note:
Re bit 00 = 0:
It is not possible to reduce the supply voltage in p0210.
Re bit 00 = 1:
With this setting the supply voltage in p0210 can be reduced to 100 V.
Only operating mode p1300 = 19 is possible.
p0230
Drive filter type, motor side / Drv filt type mot

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the type of the filter at the motor side.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
1-96
No filter
Motor reactor
dv/dt filter
Sine-wave filter, Siemens
Sine-wave filter, third-party

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The following parameters are influenced using p0230:

p0230 = 1:
--> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance
p0230 = 3:
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
--> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude
--> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement
p0230 = 4:
--> p0290 (power unit overload response) = inhibit pulse frequency reduction
--> p1802 (modulator modes) = space vector modulation without overcontrol
--> p1811 (modulator configuration) = wobbulation amplitude
--> p1909 (motor data identification, control word) = only Rs measurement
The user must set the following parameters according to the data sheet of the sine-wave filter and also the user
must check whether they are permitted.
--> p0234 (power unit sine-wave filter capacitance) = filter capacitance
--> p1082 (maximum speed) = Fmax filter / pole pair number
--> p1800 (pulse frequency) >= nominal pulse frequency of the filter
Refer to: p0233, p0234, p0290, p1082, p1800, p1802
Note:
if a filter type cannot be selected, then this filter type is not permitted for the Motor Module.
p0230 = 1:
The output frequency of booksize/blocksize power units with output reactors is restricted to 120 Hz.
p0230 = 2:
Chassis-type power units with dv/dt filter, depending on the rated pulse frequency, may only be operated with a
maximum pulse frequency of p1800 = 2.5 kHz or 4 kHz. The output frequency is limited to 150 Hz.
p0230 = 3:
Sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 1.25 or 2.5 kHz should only be operated with a current controller
sampling rate p0115[0] = 400 s, sine-wave filters with a rated pulse frequency of 2 or 4 kHz with p0115[0] = 250
s.
The sine-wave filter cannot be selected if the current controller sampling rate has not been appropriately set.
Chassis power units with sine-wave filter are limited to output frequencies of 115 Hz or 150 Hz.
p0233
Power unit motor reactor / PU mot reactor
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(2), U, T

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mH]
Max
1000.000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.000 [mH]
Description:
Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency:
This parameter is automatically preset when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note:
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0) and then the controller calculation (p0340 = 3) is carried out.

1-97
Parameter
List of parameters
p0234
Power unit sine-wave filter capacitance / PU sine filter C

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [F]
Max
1000.000 [F]
Factory setting
0.000 [F]
Description:
Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output.
Dependency:
This parameter is automatically preset when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power
unit.
Refer to: p0230
Note:
The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero. For this reason, the parameter value of a third-party filter only has to be entered outside the
commissioning phase (p0010 = 0).
p0235
Number of reactors connected in series / Qty L in series

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Number of reactors connected at the power unit output.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0230
Caution:
If the number of motor reactors connected in series does not correspond to the parameter value, then this can
result in an unfavorable control behavior.
Note:
The parameter cannot be changed for chassis units and for p0230 = 1.
r0238
Power unit internal resistance / PU R_int

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the internal resistance of the power unit (IGBT and line resistance).
Note:
For a parallel circuit, the value corresponds to the resistance of a power unit.
Index 0 refers to the first line filter from p0220[0].
Index 1 refers to the optional second line filter from p0220[1].
p0249
Power unit cooling type / PU cool type

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the cooling type for booksize compact power units.

This therefore defines whether for these power units, the internal air cooling is shut down and instead, the "ColdPlate" cooling type is used.
1-98

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Air cooling int

Cold-Plate
Note:
For booksize compact power units, there is a 4 at the 5th position in the Order No.
The parameter is irrelevant for all other power unit types.
p0251[0...n]
Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: T

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
4294967295 [h]
Factory setting
0 [h]
Displays the power unit fan operating hours.

The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been replaced).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0252
p0252
Maximum operating time power unit fan / PU fan t_oper max

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
100000 [h]
Factory setting
40000 [h]
Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan.

The pre-alarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value.
The monitoring is deactivated with p0252 = 0.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0251
Note:
For chassis units, the maximum operating time in the power unit parameter is set to 50000 via the factory setting.
p0255[0...1]
Power unit contactor monitoring time / PU contactor t_mon

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
6500 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time for internal monitoring of the contactor feedback contacts.
Index:
[0] = Pre-charge contactor

[1] = Bridging contactor
Dependency:
Refer to: F30060, F30061
Note:
This parameter is only effective for chassis power units with 3 AC line connection and line contactors.
A value of 0 deactivates the associated line contactor monitoring.

1-99
Parameter
List of parameters
p0260
Cooling system, starting time 1 / RKA start time 1

0 (Cooling system)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
60.0 [s]
Factory setting
5.0 [s]
Sets starting time 1 to monitor the cooling system after power-on command.
After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 1:
- "RKA powered up"
- "RKA liquid flow OK"
When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: F49152, F49153
Note:
RKA: Cooling system
p0261
Cooling system, starting time 2 / RKA start time 2

0 (Cooling system)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
1200.0 [s]
Factory setting
180.0 [s]
Sets starting time 2 to monitor the cooling system after power-on command.
After powering up, the following signals must be present within starting time 2:
- "RKA conductivity, no fault"
- "RKA conductivity, no alarm"
When a fault occurs, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0266

Refer to: F49151, A49171
p0262
Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time / RKA cond t_del

0 (Cooling system)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
30.0 [s]
Factory setting
0.0 [s]
Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Conductive limit value exceeded" during operation.
The fault is only output if, during operation, the conductivity exceeds the permissible fault value and the value
remains for a longer time than is set in this parameter.
Dependency:
1-100
Refer to: F49151

Parameter
List of parameters
p0263
Cooling system fault liquid flow, delay time / RKA flow t_del

0 (Cooling system)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
20.0 [s]
Factory setting
3.0 [s]
Sets the delay time for the fault "RKA: Liquid flow too low".
The fault is only output if the cause is present for a time longer than is set in this parameter.
Dependency:
Refer to: F49153
p0264
Cooling system, run-on time / RKA run-on time

0 (Cooling system)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9795
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
180.0 [s]
Factory setting
30.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the run-up time of the cooling system after a power-off command.
r0265.0...3
BO: Cooling system, control word / RKA CTW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Cooling system)

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the cooling system.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
p0266[0...7]
BI: Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source / RKA fdbk S_src
Signal name
Power up cooling system
Message converter off
Acknowledge faults
Leakage sensing OK

0 (Cooling system)
Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
1 signal
Activating
Off
Acknowledgement
No leaked liquid
0 signal
Deactivating
On
No acknowledgement
Leaked liquid
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Communications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal sources for the feedback signals from the cooling system.
Index:
[0] = Cooling system powered up

[1] = Cooling system ready to be powered up
[2] = Cooling system, no alarm present
[3] = Cooling system, no fault present
[4] = Cooling system, no leaked liquid
[5] = Cooling system, liquid flow OK
[6] = Cooling system, conductivity < fault threshold
[7] = Cooling system, conductivity < alarm threshold

FP
-
1-101
Parameter
List of parameters
r0267.0...7
BO: Cooling system status word / RKA ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Cooling system)

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the cooling system.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Dependency:
Refer to: p0266
p0278
DC link voltage undervoltage threshold reduction / Vdc V_under red
Signal name
RKA powered up
RKA ready to be powered up
RKA no alarm present
RKA no fault present
RKA no leaked fluid
RKA liquid flow OK
RKA conductivity, no fault
RKA conductivity, no alarm

0
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-80 [V]
Max
0 [V]
Factory setting
0 [V]
Description:
Sets the absolute value by which the threshold to initiate the undervoltage fault (F30003) is reduced.
Dependency:
FP
9974
9974
Refer to: F30003

Notice:
When using a Control Supply Module (CSM) for 24 V supply from the DC link, the minimum continuous DC link voltage may not lie below 430 V. DC link voltages in the range 300 ... 430 V are permissible up to a duration of 1 min.
Note:
The resulting shutdown threshold can be read in r0296 and is dependent on the selected rated voltage (p0210) and
the power unit being used.
p0287[0...1]
Ground fault monitoring thresholds / Gnd flt threshold

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
[0] 6.0 [%]
[1] 16.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the shutdown thresholds for the ground fault monitoring.

The setting is made as a percentage of the maximum power unit current (r0209).
Index:
[0] = Threshold for pulse inhibit

[1] = Threshold for pulse enable
Dependency:
Refer to: F30021
1-102

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter only applies to booksize and chassis power units.

Deactivating the ground fault monitoring:
- Sequence: --> p0287[1] = 0 --> p0287[0] = 0
- irrespective of the firmware version of the power unit.
Sets the thresholds:
- the prerequisite is at least firmware version 2.2 of the power unit.
r0289
CO: Maximum power unit output current / PU I_outp max

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the actual maximum output current of the power unit taking into account derating factors.
p0290
Power unit overload response / PU overld response

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.

The following quantities can result in a response to thermal overload:
- heat sink temperature (r0037.0)
- chip temperature (r0037.1)
- power unit overload I2T (r0036)
Possible measures to avoid thermal overload:
- reduce the output current limit r0289 and r0067 (for closed-loop speed/velocity or torque/force control) or the output frequency (for V/f control) indirectly via the output current limit and the intervention of the current limiting controller).
- reduce the pulse frequency (only for vector control).
A reduction, if parameterized, is always realized after an appropriate alarm is output.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Reduce output current or output frequency

No reduction, shutdown when overload threshold is reached
Reduce I_output or f_output and f_pulse (not using I2t)
Reduce the pulse frequency (not using I2t)
Dependency:
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), then only responses can be selected without
pulse frequency reduction (p0290 = 0, 1).
If a fault or alarm is present, then r2135.13 or r2135.15 is set.
Refer to: r0036, r0037, r0108, p0108, p0230, r2135
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Caution:
If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive is always shut
down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of this parameter.
Note:
The setting p0290 = 0, 2 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications with variable torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked and forbidden speed ranges (e.g. minimum speed p1080 and suppression [skip] speeds p1091 ... p1094) can be passed
through.
For p0290 = 2, 3, the I2t overload detection of the power unit does not influence the responses.
When the motor data identification routine is selected, p290 cannot be changed.

1-103
Parameter
List of parameters
r0293
CO: Power unit alarm threshold model temperature / PU Tmodel_A_thresh

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Temperature alarm threshold for the difference from the chip and heat sink temperature in the thermal model.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0037

Refer to: F30024
Note:
The parameter is only relevant for chassis power units.
p0294
Power unit alarm with I2t overload / PU I2t alrm thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8014
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
95.0 [%]
Sets the alarm threshold for the I2t power unit overload.
Drive:
If this threshold is exceeded, an overload alarm is generated and the system responds as parameterized in p0290.
Infeed:
When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output.
Dependency:

Refer to: A07805
Note:
The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output.
p0295
Fan run-on time / Fan run-on time

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
600 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Description:
Sets the fan run-on time after the pulses for the power unit have been canceled.
Note:
Under certain circumstances, the fan can continue to run for longer than was set (e.g. as a result of the excessively
high heat sink temperature).
For values less than 1 s, a 1 s run on time for the fan is effective.
1-104

Parameter
List of parameters
r0296
DC link voltage undervoltage threshold / Vdc V_lower_thresh

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the Motor Module is shut down due to a DC link undervoltage condition (F30003).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0278

Refer to: F30003
Note:
For booksize units, the following applies:

The undervoltage threshold can be reduced with p0278.
r0297
DC link voltage overvoltage threshold / Vdc V_upper_thresh

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8850, 8864, 8950, 8964
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to DC link overvoltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: F30002
p0300[0...n]
Motor type selection / Mot type sel

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6310
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10001
Factory setting
0
Selects the motor type or starts to read in the motor parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ (p0300 = 10000 or
10001, if there is a second data set).
The following applies for p0300 < 10000: The first digit of the parameter value always defines the general motor
type and corresponds to the third-party motor belonging to a motor list:
1 = Rotating induction motor
2 = Rotating synchronous motor
3 = Linear induction motor (reserved)
4 = Linear synchronous motor
5 = Synchronous motor separately-excited
7 = SIEMOSYN motor
8 = Reluctance motor
The type information must be entered to filter motor-specific parameters and to optimize the operating characteristics and behavior. For example, for synchronous motors, power factor (p0308) is neither used nor displayed (in the
BOP/AOP).

1-105
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
5:
7:
8:
11:
12:
15:
16:
17:
18:
102:
104:
107:
108:
134:
136:
166:
283:
10000:
10001:
No motor
Induction motor (rotating)
Synchronous motor (rotating, permanent-magnet)
Synchronous motor (separately excited)
SIEMOSYN motor
Reluctance motor
1LA1 standard induction motor
1LE2 standard induction motor (NEMA)
1LA8 / 1PQ8 standard induction motor
1PH2 induction motor
1PM4 induction motor
1PM6 induction motor
1PL6 induction motor
1FW3 synchronous motor
Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ
Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ 2nd data set
Dependency:
Motors, selection 206, 236, 237 cannot be operated (also not as motor with DRIVE-CLiQ).
p0300 = 5 cannot be selected with SINAMICS G.
When the motor type is changed, the code number in p0301 may be reset to 0.
p0300 = 12 can only be selected for p0100 = 1 (NEMA).
When selecting a motor type from the 1LA5 and 1LA7 series, parameters p0335, p0626, p0627 and p0628 of the
thermal motor model are pre-assigned as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution:
Refer to: p0301

A permanent-magnet synchronous motor cannot be operated with an SSI encoder without HTL/TTL track.
A separately-excited synchronous motor can only be operated with an SSI encoder if this is used as the second
encoder and an HTL/TTL encoder is used as the first encoder.
Caution:
If a catalog motor is selected (p0300 >= 100) and an associated motor code number (p0301), then the parameters,that are associated with this list cannot be changed (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the
motor type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 2 for p0301 = 2xxxx). Write protection is automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
Notice:
If required, the list of motor codes/encoder codes can be found in the Appendix of the List Manual.
For 1PQ8 motors (p0300 = 18) the fan type p0335 should be set to 5.
Note:
With p0300 = 10000, for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the motor parameters are automatically downloaded, with
p0300 = 10001, the motor parameters of a second data set (if available).
If a motor type has not been selected (p0300 = 0), then the drive commissioning routine cannot be exited.
A motor type with a value above p0300 >= 100 describes motors for which a motor parameter list exists.
Motor types with a value below p0300 < 100 correspond to the selection of a third-party motor. When appropriately
selected, this means that the motor parameters are pre-assigned the settings for a third-party motor.
This also applies for parameters for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. In this case p0300 can only be set to p0300 = 10000
or 10001 (read motor parameters) or to the corresponding non-Siemens motor (first digit of the motor code number)
in order to be able to cancel the write protection.
1-106

Parameter
List of parameters
p0301[0...n]
Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to select a motor from a motor parameter list.

When changing the code number (with the exception to the value 0), all of the motor parameters are pre-assigned
from the internally available parameter lists.
Dependency:
Code numbers can only be selected for motor types that correspond to the motor type selected in p0300. For 1PH2,
1PH4, 1PH7, 1PM4, 1PM6, 1FT6 motors, code numbers are also possible, whose fourth decimal position is greater
by a value of 1 or 2 than the matching motor type in p0300. For 1FE1 motors, the third decimal position can be
higher by a value of 1.
Refer to: p0300
Notice:
Note:
The motor code number can only be changed if the matching catalog motor was first selected in p0300.
For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, p0301 cannot be changed. In this case, p0301 is automatically written to the code
number of the motor parameter read in (r0302) if p0300 is set to 10000.
When selecting a catalog motor (p0300 >= 100), drive commissioning can only be exited if a code number is
selected.
r0302[0...n]
Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the motor code number from the saved motor data from a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note:
Drive commissioning can only be exited if the code number that was downloaded (r0302) matches the stored code
number (p0301). If the numbers differ, then the motor data set should be re-loaded using p0300 = 10000.
The motor data are always expected from the first encoder that is assigned to the drive data sets (refer to p0187 =
encoder 1) data set number.
The value is not updated cyclically but only on specific events (e.g. update DRIVE-CLiQ device).
r0302 = 0: No motor with DRIVE-CLiQ found
r0303[0...n]
Motor status word of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Mot ZSW Mot DLQ

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status word of the automatic motor parameter sensing of a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Motor parameter sensing takes place during warm restarts, following downloading, and when powering up, if the
SMI is connected to the Motor Module and the encoder is activated (see p0145).
If the motor data is reloaded (p0300 = 10000, 10001), r0303 is also updated.

1-107
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Signal name
Motor data sets selection
Motor connection type
Windings are switchable
Number of switchable windings bit 0
1 signal
Two
Delta
can be chng over
2
0 signal
One
Star
cannot be chg over
0
FP
-
Dependency:
Note:
Re bit 0: Value 0 indicates that the first SMI data set is selected, value 1 indicates that the second is selected
[MDS].
Re bit 1: Displays the connection type for the winding [MDS].
Re bit 2: Displays whether the windings can be changed over.
Re bit 3: Value 0 indicates that no windings that can be changed over are present, value 1 indicates that two are
present.
p0304[0...n]
Rated motor voltage / Mot V_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [Vrms]
Max
20000 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0 [Vrms]
Description:
Sets the rated motor voltage (rating plate).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0349
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301).
When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should
be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Note:
When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
p0305[0...n]
Rated motor current / Mot I_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the rated motor current (rating plate).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0349
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for motors from the motor list (p0301). When selecting a catalog motor, this
parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing
write protection.
Notice:
If p0305 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
If the rated motor current exceeds twice the maximum drive converter current (r0209), then the maximum current is
reduced due to the current harmonics that increase overproportionally (r0067).
Note:
When the parameter value is entered the connection type of the motor (star-delta) must be taken into account.
1-108

Parameter
List of parameters
p0306[0...n]
Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
50
Factory setting
1
Number of motors that can be operated in parallel using one motor data set.
Depending on the motor number entered, internally an equivalent motor is calculated.
The following should be carefully observed for motors connected in series:
The following rating plate data should only be entered for one motor:
- resistances and inductances: p0350 ... p0361
- currents: p0305, p0320, p0323, p0325, p0329, p0389, p0390, p0391, p0392
- power ratings: p0307
- masses/moments of inertia: p0341, p0344
All other parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0331
Caution:
The motors to be connected in parallel must be of the same type and size (same order no. (MLFB)).
The mounting regulations when connecting motors in parallel must be carefully maintained! Especially for synchronous motors, the pole position of motors that are rigidly coupled with one another (mechanically) must be identical.
The number of motors set must correspond to the number of motors that are actually connected in parallel.
After changing p0306, it is imperative that the control parameters are adapted (e.g. using automatic calculation with
p0340 = 1).
Notice:
If p0306 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is appropriately preassigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
Note:
Only operation with V/f characteristic makes sense if more than 10 identical motors are connected in parallel.
Separately-excited synchronous motors must not be connected in parallel. Synchronous and reluctance motors that
are not coupled with one another align themselves when the pulses are switched in. If the motors have different
load levels, then equalization currents flow between the motors.
p0307[0...n]
Rated motor power / Mot P_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 14_6
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [kW]
Max
100000.00 [kW]
Factory setting
0.00 [kW]
Description:
Sets the rated motor power (rating plate).
Dependency:
IECdrives (p0100 = 0): Units kW

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): Units hp
Refer to: p0100
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
For generators, a negative rated power should be entered.

1-109
Parameter
List of parameters
p0308[0...n]
Rated motor power factor / Mot cos_phi_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
1.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the rated motor power factor (cos phi, rating plate).
Dependency:
This parameter is only available for IEC motors (p0100 = 0).
For a parameter value of 0.000, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Refer to: p0100, p0309, r0332
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0309[0...n]
Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
99.9 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the rated motor efficiency (rating plate).
Dependency:
This parameter is only available for NEMA motors (p0100 = 1).
For a parameter value of 0.0, the power factor is internally calculated and displayed in r0332.
Refer to: p0100, p0308, r0332
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
p0310[0...n]
Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6300
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the rated motor frequency (rating plate).
Dependency:
The number of pole pairs (r0313) is automatically recalculated when the parameter is changed (together with
p0311), if p0314 = 0.
The rated frequency is restricted to values between 1.00 Hz and 650.00 Hz.
Refer to: p0311, r0313, p0314
Caution:
write protection.
Notice:
If p0310 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
1-110

Parameter
List of parameters
p0311[0...n]
Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Sets the rated motor speed (rating plate).

For VECTOR the following applies (p0107):
For p0311 = 0, the rated motor slip of induction motors is internally calculated and displayed in r0330.
It is especially important to correctly enter the rated motor speed for vector control and slip compensation for V/f
control.
Dependency:
If p0311 is changed and for p0314 = 0, the pole pair (r0313) is recalculated automatically.
Refer to: p0310, r0313, p0314
Caution:
write protection.
Notice:
(p0010 = 3).
r0313[0...n]
Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5300
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of motor pole pairs. The value is used for internal calculations.
Values:
r0313 = 1: 2-pole motor
r0313 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.
Dependency:
For p0314 > 0, the entered value is displayed in r0313.

For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number (r0313) is automatically calculated from the rated power (p0307), rated frequency (p0310) and rated speed (p0311).
Refer to: p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314
Note:
For the automatic calculation, the pole pair number is set to the value of 2 if the rated speed or the rated frequency
is zero.
p0314[0...n]
Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Sets the motor pole pair number.

Values:
p0314 = 1: 2-pole motor
p0314 = 2: 4-pole motor
etc.

1-111
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
For p0314 = 0, the pole pair number is automatically calculated from the rated frequency (p0310) and the rated
speed (p0311) and displayed in r0313.
Notice:
If p0314 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is appropriately pre-assigned. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
For induction motors, the value need only be input if the rated data of a generator is entered therefore resulting in a
negative rated slip. In this case, the number of pole pairs in r0313 is too low by 1 and must be manually corrected.
p0316[0...n]
Motor torque constant / Mot kT
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3), U, T

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 28_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm/A]
Max
400.00 [Nm/A]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm/A]
Sets the torque constant of the synchronous motor.

p0316 = 0: The torque constant is calculated from the motor data.
p0316 > 0: The selected value is used as torque constant.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0334
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx).
p0318[0...n]
Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the stall current for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
The parameter is used for the I2t monitoring of the motor (refer to p0611).
p0320[0...n]
Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [Arms]
Max
5000.000 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.000 [Arms]
Induction motors:
Sets the rated motor magnetizing current.
For p0320 = 0.000 the magnetizing current is internally calculated and displayed in r0331.
Synchronous motors:
Sets the rated motor short-circuit current.
Caution:
1-112
write protection.

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The magnetization current p0320 for induction motors (not for catalog motors) is reset when quick commissioning is
exited with p3900 > 0.
VECTOR: If, for induction motors, the magnetizing current p0320 is changed outside the commissioning phase
(p0010 > 0), then the magnetizing inductance p0360 is changed so that the EMF r0337 remains constant.
p0322[0...n]
Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum motor speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Caution:
write protection.
Notice:
(p0010 = 3).
p0323[0...n]
Maximum motor current / Mot I_max

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
20000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the maximum permissible motor current (e.g. demagnetizing current for synchronous motors).
Caution:
write protection.
Notice:
If p0323 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum current p0640 is pre-assigned
accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3).
Note:
The parameter has no effect for induction motors.
The parameter has not effect for synchronous motors if a value of 0.0 is entered. The user-selectable current limit is
entered into p0640.
p0324[0...n]
Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the electrical maximum speed of the winding.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Caution:
write protection.
Notice:
If p0324 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).

1-113
Parameter
List of parameters
p0325[0...n]
Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [Arms]
Max
10000.000 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.000 [Arms]
Sets the current for the 1st phase of the two-stage technique for pole position identification routine.
The current of the 2nd phase is set in p0329.
The two-stage technique is selected with p1980 = 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Notice:
When the motor code (p0301) is changed, it is possible that p0325 is not pre-assigned.
p0325 can be pre-assigned using p0340 = 3.
Note:
The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events:

- For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3).
- for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3).
p0327[0...n]
Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 5722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 []
Max
135.0 []
Factory setting
90.0 []
Sets the optimum load angle for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
SERVO: The load angle is measured at 1.5 x rated motor current.
VECTOR: The load angle is measured at the rated motor current.
Caution:
Note:
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, a angle of 90 degrees must be set.
When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been
selected (refer to p0300).
p0328[0...n]
Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [mH]
Max
1000.00 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00 [mH]
Sets the reluctance torque constant for synchronous motors with reluctance torque (e.g. 1FE ... motors).
This parameter has no significance for induction motors.
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
For synchronous motors without reluctance torque, the value 0 must be set.
1-114

Parameter
List of parameters
p0329[0...n]
Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Sets the current for the pole position identification routine.

For a two-stage technique, the current is set for the second phase.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0325, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Caution:
write protection.
r0330[0...n]
Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM, REL, FEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the rated motor slip.
Dependency:
The rated slip is calculated from the rated frequency, rated speed and number of pole pairs.
Refer to: p0310, p0311, r0313
Note:
r0331[0...n]
Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS

6724
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Induction motor:
Displays the rated magnetizing current from p0320.
For p0320 = 0, the internally calculated magnetizing current is displayed.
Synchronous motor:
Displays the rated short-circuit current from p0320.
Dependency:
If p0320 was not entered, then the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note:
In the case of multi-motor operation r0331 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to p0320.

1-115
Parameter
List of parameters
r0332[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the rated power factor for induction motors.

For IEC motors, the following applies (p0100 = 0):
For p0308 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0308 > 0, this value is displayed.
For NEMA motors, the following applies (p0100 = 1):
For p0309 = 0, the internally-calculated power factor is displayed.
For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed.
Dependency:
If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters.
Note:
r0333[0...n]
Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 7_4
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the rated motor torque.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft
Note:
For induction and reluctance motors, r0333 is calculated from p0307 and p0311.
For synchronous motors, r0333 is calculated from p0305, p0316, p0327 and p0328. The result can deviate from the
input in p0312. If p0316 = 0, then r0333 = p0312 is displayed.
In the case of multi-motor operation r0333 is increased by the factor p0306 compared to the rated torque of an individual motor.
r0334[0...n]
Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 28_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm/A]
Max
- [Nm/A]
Factory setting
- [Nm/A]
Description:
Displays the torque constant of the synchronous motor used.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit Nm / A

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lbf ft / A
Refer to: p0316
Note:

For synchronous motors, parameter r0334 = p0316 is displayed. When p0316 = 0, r0334 is calculated from p0305
and p0312 or p0305, p0307, and p0311.
1-116

Parameter
List of parameters
p0335[0...n]
Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 3), T

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
128
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the motor cooling system used.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
4:
5:
6:
128:
Dependency:
For 1LA5 and 1LA7 motors (refer to p0300), the parameter is preset as a function of p0307 and p0311.
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
The parameter influences the thermal 3-mass motor model.
Non-ventilated
Forced cooling
Liquid cooling
Non-ventilated and internal fan
Forced cooling and internal fan
Liquid cooling and internal fan
No fan
1LA1 and 1LA8 motors are characterized by the fact that they have an internal rotor fan. This "internal cooling" lies
within the motor frame and is not visible. Air is not directly exchanged with the motor ambient air. For 1PQ8 motors,
p0335 should be set to 5 as these motors are force-ventilated motors.
1LA7 motors, frame size 56 are operated without fan.
r0336[0...n]
Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Displays the rated frequency of the motor.

For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed.
Dependency:
Note:
For p0310 = 0 or for synchronous motors, the rated motor frequency r0336 is calculated from the rated speed and
the pole pair number.
For p0310 > 0, this value is displayed (not for synchronous motors).
r0337[0...n]
Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the rated EMF of the motor.
Note:
EMF: Electromagnetic force

1-117
Parameter
List of parameters
r0339[0...n]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the rated motor voltage
Note:
For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx) the parameter is set to p0304.

For synchronous motors, parameter r0339 = p0304 is displayed. If p0304 = 0, then r0339 is calculated from p0305
and p0316.
p0340[0...n]
Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
5
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and V/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the
rating plate data.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Notice:
No calculation
Complete calculation
Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters
Calculation of closed-loop control parameters
Calculation of controller parameters
Calculation of technological limits and threshold values
The following parameters are influenced using p0340:

The parameters designated with (*) are not overwritten for catalog motors (p0300 > 100).
SERVO:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005, p2007
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 (*), p0356 (*), p0358 (*), p0360 (*)
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0325 (is only calculated for p0325 = 0)
--> p0348 (*) (is only calculated for p0348 = 0)
--> p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 (only for 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors)
--> p0492, p1082, p1980, p1319, p1326, p1327, p1612, p1752, p1755
p0340 = 4:
--> p1441, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1596, p1656, p1657, p1658,
p1659, p1715, p1717
--> p1461 (for p0348 > p0322, p1461 is set to 100 %)
--> p1463 (for p0348 > p0322, p1463 is set to 400 %)
p0340 = 5:
--> p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p2140 ... p2142, p2148, p2150, p2155, p2161, p2162, p2163,
p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3820 ... p3829
1-118

Parameter
List of parameters
VECTOR:
p0340 = 1:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5
--> p0341 (*)
--> p0342, p0344, p0600, p0640, p1082, p1231, p1232, p1333, p1349, p1441, p1442, p1576, p1577, p1609,
p1619, p1620, p1621, p1654, p1726, p1825, p1828 ... p1832, p1909, p1959, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, p2005,
p2007, p3927, p3928
p0340 = 2:
--> p0350 (*), p0354 ... p0361 (*), p0652 ... p0660
--> p0625 (matching p0350)
p0340 = 3:
--> All of the parameters influenced for p0340 = 4, 5
--> p0346, p0347, p0492, p0622, p1262, p1320 ... p1327, p1582, p1584, p1612, p1616, p1744, p1748, p1749,
p1755, p1756, p2178
p0340 = 4:
--> p1290, p1292, p1293, p1299, p1338, p1339, p1340, p1341, p1345, p1346, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463,
p1464, p1465, p1470, p1472, p1590, p1592, p1600, p1628, p1629, p1630, p1643, p1703, p1715, p1717, p1740,
p1756, p1757, p1760, p1761, p1764, p1767, p1781, p1783, p1785, p1786, p1795, p7036, p7037, p7038
p0340 = 5:
--> p260 ... p264, p1037, p1038, p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531, p1574, p1750, p1802, p1803, p2140, p2142, p2148,
p2150, p2161, p2162, p2163, p2164, p2175, p2177, p2194, p3207, p3208, p3815, p3820 ... p3829
Note:
p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 without overwriting the motor parameters from the Siemens motor lists (p0301 > 0).
p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360), but only if it does involve a Siemens catalog motor
(p0301 = 0).
p0340 = 3 contains the calculations of p0340 = 4, 5.
p0340 = 4 only calculates the controller parameters.
p0340 = 5 only calculates the controller limits.
When quick commissioning is exited using p3900 > 0, p0340 is automatically set to 1.
At the end of the calculations, p0340 is automatically set to 0.
If the STARTER commissioning software writes a 3 into p0340 when "downloading to target device", then this corresponds to a "complete calculation of the motor/control parameters without equivalent circuit diagram data". The
same calculations are carried out as for p0340 = 1, however, without the equivalent circuit diagram parameters of
the motor (p0340 = 2), the motor moment of inertia (p0341) and the motor weight (p0344).
For third-party linear synchronous motors (p0300 = 4) equivalent circuit diagram data are not calculated (p0340 =
2).
p0341[0...n]
Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert

0
Calculated: CALC_MOD_ALL
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS

5210, 6030, 6031
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 25_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000000 [kgm]
Max
100000.000000 [kgm]
Factory setting
0.000000 [kgm]
Description:
Sets the motor moment of inertia (without load).
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
The parameter value is included, together with p0342, in the rated starting time of the motor.
Caution:
write protection.

1-119
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.
VECTOR:
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
p0342[0...n]
Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS

5210, 6030, 6031
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.000
Max
10000.000
Factory setting
1.000
Description:
Sets the ratio between the total moment of inertia/mass (load + motor) and the intrinsic motor moment of inertia/mass (no load).
Dependency:
This means that together with p0341, the rated starting (accelerating time) of the motor is calculated for a vector
drive.
Note:
SERVO:
p0341 * p0342 + p1498 influence the speed/torque pre-control in encoderless operation.
VECTOR:
The product of p0341 * p0342 is used when the speed controller (p0340 = 4) is calculated automatically.
r0343[0...n]
Identified motor rated current / Mot I_rated ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Identified motor rated current
p0344[0...n]
Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 27_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [kg]
Max
50000.0 [kg]
Factory setting
0.0 [kg]
Description:
Sets the motor weight.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb
Caution:
Note:
The parameter influences the thermal 3 mass model of the induction motor.
1-120

Parameter
List of parameters
r0345[0...n]
Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the rated motor starting time. This time corresponds to the time from standstill up to reaching the motor
rated speed and the acceleration with motor rated torque (r0333).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0313, r0333, r0336, p0341, p0342
p0346[0...n]
Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the excitation build-up time of the motor.

This involves the delay time between enabling the pulses and enabling the ramp-function generator. The induction
motor is magnetized during this time.
Caution:
If there is insufficient magnetization under load or if the acceleration rate is too high, then an induction motor can
stall (refer to the note). This is especially true for encoderless vector control or V/f control.
Notice:
If the parameter is set to 0 s for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), then an excitation current setpoint is generated even if the drive is powered down. In the base speed range, this is the no-load excitation current
(p0389). In the field-weakening range, the value is reduced with the inverse value of the actual speed. An excitation
current setpoint is not generated during demagnetizing (p0347) and if an encoder fault is detected.
Note:
The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.

For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384). If this time is excessively reduced, this
can result in an inadequate magnetizing of the induction motor. This is the case if the current limit is reached while
building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors and vector control, the value depends on the stator time constant
(r0386). Here, it defines the time to establish the current for encoderless operation immediately after the pulses
have been enabled.
p0347[0...n]
Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the demagnetizing time (for induction motors) after the inverter pulses have been canceled.
The inverter pulses cannot be switched in (enabled) within this delay time.
Note:
The parameter is calculated using p0340 = 1, 3.

For induction motors, the result depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
if this time is shortened too much, then this can result in an inadequate demagnetizing of the induction motor and in
an overcurrent condition when the pulses are subsequently enabled (only when the flying restart function is activated and the motor is rotating).

1-121
Parameter
List of parameters
p0349
System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data / Unit_sys mot ESB

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the actual system of units for motor equivalent circuit diagram data.
Value:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0304, p0305, p0310
Note:
The reference parameter for resistances of the rated motor impedance Z = p0304 / (1.732 * p0305) is in the % units
system.
System of units, physical

System of units, referred
Inductances are converted into a resistance using the factor 2 * Pi * p0310.

If a reference parameter (p0304, p305, p0310) is zero, then it is not possible to make a changeover to "referred"
values (per unit values).
p0350[0...n]
Motor stator resistance, cold / Mot R_stator cold

0
Calculated: CALC_MOD_EQU
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
2000.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Description:
Sets the stator resistance of the motor at ambient temperature p0625.
Dependency:
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable
resistance (p0352).
p0352[0...n]
Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
120.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Description:
Resistance of the power cable between the Motor Module and motor.
Dependency:
Caution:
Refer to: p7003

The cable resistance should be entered prior to motor data identification. If it is used subsequently, the difference
by which p0352 was changed must be subtracted from the stator resistance p0350 or motor data identification must
be repeated.
Notice:
Parallel circuits with one winding system (p7003 = 0):

p0352 includes the feeder cable resistance of an individual Motor Module. The total feeder cable resistance is
obtained from p0352 divided by the number of activated Motor Modules (refer to r0395).
Parallel circuits with multi-winding system (p7003 = 1):
p0352 includes the complete feeder cable resistance and is directly added to the stator resistance (refer to r0395).
1-122

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter influences the temperature adaptation of the stator resistance.

The motor identification sets the cable resistance to 20% of the measured total resistance if p0352 is zero at the
time that the measurement is made. If p0352 is not zero, then the value is subtracted from the measured total stator
resistance to calculate stator resistance p0350. In this case, p0350 is a minimum of 10% of the measured value.
Exception:
For parallel circuit configurations with one winding system (p07003 = 0), the cable resistance is directly measured.
It is important to note that only the component of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352.
The cable resistance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0353[0...n]
Motor series inductance / Mot L_series

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mH]
Max
1000000.000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.000 [mH]
Description:
Sets the series inductance.
Note:
For the automatic calculation with p0340 = 1, 3 or 4, the calculation of p1715 is influenced by p0353.
The series inductance is reset when quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0.
p0354[0...n]
Motor rotor resistance cold / damping resistance d axis / Mot R_r cold / RDd

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
300.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Sets the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the ambient temperature p0625.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
p0355[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, q axis / Mot R_damp q

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Not for motor type: ASM, PEM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
300.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Sets the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2).

1-123
Parameter
List of parameters
p0356[0...n]
Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor: Sets the rotor leakage inductance of the motor.
Synchronous motor: Sets the stator quadrature axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
If the stator leakage inductance (p0356) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then advised to
repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is, therefore, ideal for
a low current.
p0357[0...n]
Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the stator direct-axis inductance of the synchronous motor.

This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910).
Note:
The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current.
p0358[0...n]
Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the rotor/secondary section leakage inductance of the motor.

For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the damping inductance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
This value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine
(p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Caution:
1-124
write protection.

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

VECTOR:
If the rotor leakage inductance (p0358) for induction motors is changed outside the commissioning phase (p0010 >
0), then the magnetizing inductance (p0360) is automatically adapted to the new EMF (r0337). You are then
advised to repeat the measurement for the saturation characteristic (p1960).
p0359[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
1000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
p0360[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
10000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the magnetizing inductance of the motor.

For separately-excited synchronous motors: Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (daxis).
This parameter value is automatically calculated using the motor model (p0340 = 1, 2) or using the motor identification routine (p1910) (not for separately-excited synchronous motors).
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
p0361[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance q axis, saturated / Mot L_magn q sat

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [mH]
Max
10000.00000 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00000 [mH]
Sets the saturated magnetizing inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor
direction (q axis).

1-125
Parameter
List of parameters
p0362[0...n]
Saturation characteristic flux 1 / Mot saturat.flux 1

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
60.0 [%]
The saturation characteristic (flux as mapping of current) is defined using 4 points.

This parameter specifies the y coordinate (flux) for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Induction motors (ASM) and separately-excited synchronous motors (SESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the magnetizing current onto the motor flux.
The parameter sets the first motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):
The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature
axis flux.
The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency:
The following applies for the flux values:

p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis flux values (PESM):
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0366
Caution:
For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM):

If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20%, the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes.
Note:
For induction motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the rated motor flux.
For separately-excited synchronous motors p0362 = 100% corresponds to an induced terminal voltage with the
magnitude of the rated motor voltage (under no-load conditions at the synchronous speed).
With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100% corresponds to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305).
p0363[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
85.0 [%]

The parameter sets the second motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
axis flux.
The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated
quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
1-126

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:

p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0367
Caution:

Note:
p0364[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
115.0 [%]

The parameter sets the third motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
axis flux.
The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency:

p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0368
Caution:

Note:

1-127
Parameter
List of parameters
p0365[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
125.0 [%]

The parameter sets the fourth motor flux as a [%] referred to the rated motor flux.
axis flux.
The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current.
Dependency:

p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
20% < p0362 < p0363 < p0364 < p0365
Refer to: p0369
Caution:

Note:
p0366[0...n]
Saturation characteristic I_mag 1 / Mot sat. I_mag 1

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]

This parameter specifies the x coordinate for the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
The parameter sets the first magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
axis flux.
The parameter sets the first stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
1-128

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
The following applies for the magnetizing currents:

p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM):
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0362
Caution:

Note:
p0367[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
75.0 [%]

The parameter sets the second magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331
(ASM), which in turn is referred to the no-load excitation current (SESM).
axis flux.
The parameter sets the second stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency:

p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0363
Caution:

Note:

1-129
Parameter
List of parameters
p0368[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
150.0 [%]

The parameter sets the third magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
axis flux.
The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency:

p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0364
Caution:

Note:
p0369[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5.0 [%]
Max
800.0 [%]
Factory setting
210.0 [%]

The parameter sets the fourth magnetizing current as a [%] referred to the rated magnetizing current r0331 (ASM),
axis flux.
The parameter sets the fourth stator quadrature axis current as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
Dependency:

p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
20% < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369
Refer to: p0365
1-130

Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:

Note:
r0370[0...n]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the motor stator resistance at an ambient temperature p0625. The value does not include the cable resistance.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
r0372[0...n]
Cable resistance / Mot R_cable

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the total cable resistance between Motor Module and motor, as well as the internal converter resistance.
Dependency:
r0373[0...n]
Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the rated motor stator resistance at rated temperature (total of p0625 and p0627).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0627
Note:
r0374[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Displays the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor for the ambient temperature p0625.
For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Note:

1-131
Parameter
List of parameters
r0375[0...n]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the damping resistance of the separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
r0376[0...n]
Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the rated (nominal) rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor at the rated temperature (total of
p0625 and p0628).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0628
Note:
r0377[0...n]
Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6640
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Induction motor, separately-excited synchronous motor:

Displays the stator leakage inductance of the motor, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor
(p0233).
Synchronous motor:
Displays the stator quadrature inductance, including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233).
r0378[0...n]
Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the series inductance (p0353) and
the motor reactor (p0233).
Note:
The parameter is not used for separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
1-132

Parameter
List of parameters
r0380[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the damping inductance of the separately-excited synchronous motor in the rotor direction (d-axis).
r0381[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the damping inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
r0382[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Displays the magnetizing inductance of the motor.

For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance in the rotor direction (daxis).
Note:
r0383[0...n]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 15_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor
direction (q axis).
r0384[0...n]
Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6722
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Displays the rotor time constant.

For separately-excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping time constant in the rotor direction (d-axis).

1-133
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The parameter is not used for synchronous motors.

The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the rotor side (p0358, p0360) divided by the rotor/damping resistance (p0354). The temperature adaptation of the rotor resistance for induction motors is not taken into
account.
r0385[0...n]
Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot T_Dq

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the damping time constant of a separately-excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q
axis).
Note:
The value is calculated from the total of the inductances on the damping side (p0359, p0361) divided by the damping resistance (p0355).
r0386[0...n]
Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the stator leakage time constant.
Note:
The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233*, p0353, p0356, p0358) divided by the total
of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0354). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into
account.
* only applies for VECTOR (r0107).
r0387[0...n]
Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the stator leakage time constant quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis).
Note:
The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0359) divided by the total of all
motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0355).
The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account.
p0389[0...n]
Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated

0
Description:
1-134
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [A]
Max
10000.00 [A]
Factory setting
0.00 [A]
Sets the rated no-load current (I_F0) for the excitation.

Parameter
List of parameters
p0390[0...n]
Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [A]
Max
10000.00 [A]
Factory setting
0.00 [A]
Description:
Setting the rated current (I_F) of the controlled excitation rectifier (DC master).
p0391[0...n]
Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
6000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the current controller gain
p1715 is effective.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0392, p0393, p1402, p1715
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
p0392[0...n]
Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
6000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the starting point of the current-dependent current controller adaptation where the adapted current controller
gain p1715 * p0393 is effective.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0391, p0393, p1402, p1715
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
p0393[0...n]
Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6714
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Sets the factor for the current controller P gain in the adaptation range (e.g. r0078 > p0392, if p0392 > p0391).
The value is referred to p1715.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0391, p0392, p1402, p1715

1-135
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
For p0393 = 100 % or p1402 bit 2 = 0, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the
entire range.
r0395[0...n]
Actual stator resistance / R_stator act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS

6731, 6732
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the actual stator resistance (phase value).
Dependency:
In the case of induction motors the parameter is also affected by the motor temperature model.
The parameter value also contains the temperature-independent cable resistance.

Refer to: p0350, p0352, p0620
Note:
In each case, only the stator resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the stator temperature of the
thermal motor model.
r0396[0...n]
Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 6730
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 16_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Displays the actual rotor/secondary section resistance (phase value).

The parameter is affected by the motor temperature model.
Dependency:
Note:
In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the
thermal motor model.
This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
p0398[0...n]
Angle magnet. decoupling (cross saturation) coeff 1 / Magn decoupl C1

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.000000
Max
10.000000
Factory setting
0.000000
The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an
angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities.
The angle offset can be described as a third-order polynomial function of the load current consumed:
phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3)
This parameter is the coefficient C1; it describes the linear load impact effect.
1-136

Parameter
List of parameters
p0399[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.000000
Max
10.000000
Factory setting
0.000000
The magnetic cross coupling of the motor's d and q axes caused by saturation (current-dependent) leads to an
angle offset affecting the axis system d'q'; this decouples the magnetic quantities.
The angle offset can be described as a third-order polynomial function of the load current consumed:
phiOffset = f(C1*iq + C3*iq^3)
This parameter is the coefficient C3; it describes the cubic load impact effect.
p0400[0...n]
Encoder type selection / Enc_typ sel
ENCODER
Can be changed: C2(1, 4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10100
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value:
0:
202:
204:
242:
244:
1001:
1002:
1003:
1004:
2001:
2002:
2003:
2004:
2005:
2006:
2007:
2008:
2010:
2051:
2052:
2053:
2054:
2055:
2081:
2082:
2083:
2084:
2110:
2111:
2112:
2151:
3001:
3002:
3003:
3005:
3006:
No encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS20, singleturn
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM20, multiturn 4096
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AS24, singleturn
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder AM24, multiturn 4096
Resolver 1 speed
Resolver 2 speed
Resolver 3 speed
Resolver 4 speed
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B C/D R
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B R
256, 1 Vpp, A/B R
400, 1 Vpp, A/B R
512, 1 Vpp, A/B R
192, 1 Vpp, A/B R
480, 1 Vpp, A/B R
800, 1 Vpp, A/B R
18000, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Singleturn
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Singleturn
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Multiturn 4096
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, singleturn, error bit
2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, multiturn 4096, error bit
4000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B R distance-coded
16000 nm, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, resolution 100 nm
1024 HTL A/B R
1024 TTL A/B R
2048 HTL A/B R
1024 HTL A/B
1024 TTL A/B

1-137
Parameter
List of parameters
3007:
3008:
3009:
3011:
3020:
3081:
3082:
3090:
3109:
9999:
10000:
10050:
10051:
10058:
10059:
10100:
Caution:
2048 HTL A/B

2048 TTL A/B
1024 HTL A/B unipolar
2048 TTL A/B R, with sense
SSI, Singleturn, 24 V
SSI, Multiturn 4096, 24 V
4096, HTL, A/B, SSI, Singleturn
2000 nm, TTL, A/B R distance-coded
User-defined
Identify encoder
Encoder with EnDat interface identified
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder identified
Digital encoder (absolute) identified
Digital encoder (incremental) identified
Identify encoder (waiting)
An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write
protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999).
Notice:
Note:
The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder supports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface,
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
The encoder data (e.g. pulse number p0408) can only be changed when p0400 = 9999.
When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero
mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must
be executed:
- set p0400 to 9999
- set p0404.15 to 1
Prerequisite:
Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must
be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position.
If an identification is not possible, then p0400 is set to 0.
If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible.
p0400[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10000
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported.
Value:
0:
3001:
3002:
3003:
3005:
3006:
3007:
3008:
3009:
3011:
3020:
9999:
10000:
1-138
No encoder
1024 HTL A/B R
1024 TTL A/B R
2048 HTL A/B R
1024 HTL A/B
1024 TTL A/B
2048 HTL A/B
2048 TTL A/B
2048 TTL A/B R, with sense
User-defined
Identify encoder

Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
An encoder type with p0400 < 9999 defines an encoder for which there is an encoder parameter list. When selecting a catalog encoder (p0400 < 9999) the parameters from the encoder parameter list cannot be changed (write
protection). To remove write protection, the encoder type should be set to a third-party encoder (p0400 = 9999).
Notice:
Note:
The connected encoder can be identified by setting p0400 to 10000 or 10100. This assumes that the encoder supports this method, which is possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface,
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.
When using an encoder with track A/B and zero pulse, as standard, fine synchronization is not set using a zero
mark. If, for a synchronous motor, fine synchronization is to be realized using a zero mark, then the following must
be executed:
- set p0400 to 9999
- set p0404.15 to 1
Prerequisite:
Coarse synchronization must be selected (e.g. pole position identification) and the zero pulse of the encoder must
be either mechanically or electronically (p0431) adjusted to the pole position.
If an identification is not possible, p0400 remains set to 10100 until it becomes possible.
p0401[0...n]
Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32767
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types that the OEM supports.
Note:
The connected encoder can be identified by p0400 = 10000. This means that the encoder must support this and is
possible in the following cases: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, encoder with EnDat interface.
Using p0400 = 20000, the encoder type can be selected from the list of OEM encoders using p0401.
p0402[0...n]
Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10100
Factory setting
9999
Selects the gearbox type to preset the inversion and the gearbox factor.
Measuring gear factor = motor or load revolutions / encoder revolutions.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
9999:
10000:
10100:
Gearbox 1:1 not inverted

Gearbox 2:7 inverted
Gearbox, user-defined
Identify gearbox
Identify gearbox
Dependency:
Refer to: p0410, p0432, p0433

1-139
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re p0402 = 1:
Automatic setting of p0410 = 0000 bin, p0432 = 1, p0433 = 1.
Re p0402 = 2:
Re p0402 = 3:
Re p0402 = 4:
Re p0402 = 9999:
No automatic setting of p0410, p0432, p0433. The parameters should be manually set.
Re p0402 = 10000:
It is only possible to identify the gearbox type for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ. Parameters p0410, p0432 and p0433
are set corresponding to the identified gearbox. If an identification is not possible, then p0402 is set to 9999.
p0404[0...n]
Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Settings for the basic encoder properties.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400).
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Equidistant zero mark
Irregular zero mark
Distance-coded zero mark
Commutation with zero mark (not ASM)
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Remote sense (only SMC30)
Resolver excit.
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400
should be carefully observed when removing write protection.
Notice:
If an SSI encoder (bit 9 = 1) is used as motor encoder for permanent-magnet synchronous motors, then this is only
permissible in conjunction with an additional A/B track (bit 4 = 1 or bit 5 = 1).
1-140

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
ZM: Zero mark

SMC: Sensor Module Cabinet
If a technique to determine the commutation information/data has not been selected (e.g. track C/D, Hall sensor),
and the encoder pulse number is an integer multiple of the pole number, then the following applies:
The track A/B is adjusted to match the magnetic position of the motor.
Re bit 01, 02 (absolute encoder, multiturn encoder):
These bits can only be selected for EnDat encoders, SSI encoders or DRIVE-CLiQ encoders.
Re bit 10 (DRIVE-CLiQ encoder):
This bit is only used for the large-scale integrated DRIVE-CLiQ encoders that provide their encoder data directly in
DRIVE-CLiQ format without converting this data. This bit is not, therefore, set for first-generation DRIVE-CLiQ
encoders.
Re bit 12 (equidistant zero mark):
The zero marks occur at regular intervals (e.g. rotary encoder with 1 zero mark per revolution or linear encoder with
constant zero mark distance).
The bit activates monitoring of the zero mark distance (p0424/p0425, linear/rotary) or in the case of the linear
encoder with 1 zero mark and p0424 = 0 zero mark monitoring is activated.
Re bit 13 (irregular zero mark):
The zero marks occur at irregular intervals (e.g. a linear scale with only 1 zero mark in the traversing range). The
zero mark distance is not monitored.
Re bit 14 (distance-coded zero mark):
The distance (clearance) between two or several consecutive zero marks allows the absolute position to be calculated.
Re bit 15 (commutation with zero mark):
Only applicable for synchronous motors. For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
The phase sequence of the C/D track (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the encoder (A/B
track).
The phase sequence of the Hall signal (if available) must be the same as the phase sequence of the motor. Further,
the position of the Hall sensor must be mechanically adjusted to the motor EMF.
The fine synchronization is only started after two zero marks have been passed.
p0405[0...n]
Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1111 bin
Description:
Settings for the track A/B of a square-wave encoder. For square-wave encoders, p0404.3 must also be 1.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset for encoders from the encoder list (p0400). When selecting a catalog
encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed
when removing write protection.
Note:
Re bit 02:
Signal name
Signal
Level
Track monitoring
Zero pulse
Switching thresh
Pulse/direction
1 signal
Bipolar
TTL
A/B <> -A/B
Same as A/B track
High
Yes
0 signal
Unipolar
HTL
None
24 V unipolar
Low
No
FP
-
When the function is activated, track monitoring can be deactivated by setting p437.26.

1-141
Parameter
List of parameters
p0407[0...n]
Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [nm]
Max
250000000 [nm]
Factory setting
16000 [nm]
Description:
Sets the grid division for a linear encoder.
Caution:
Note:
The lowest permissible value is 250 nm.
p0408[0...n]
Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No.
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16777215
Factory setting
2048
Description:
Sets the number of pulses for a rotary encoder.
Caution:
Note:
The number of pole pairs for a resolver is entered here.

The smallest permissible value is 1 pulse.
p0410[0...n]
Encoder inversion actual value / Enc inv act value
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert actual values.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Invert speed actual value
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Invert position actual value
Yes
No
Note:
FP
4710,
4715
4704
The inversion influences the following parameters:

Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483
1-142

Parameter
List of parameters
p0410[0...n]
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: C2(4)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert actual values.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Invert velocity actual value
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Invert position actual value
Yes
No
Note:
FP
4710,
4715
4704
The inversion influences the following parameters:

Bit 00: r0061, r0063 (exception: encoderless control), r0094
Bit 01: r0482, r0483
p0411[0...n]
Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for position tracking of a measuring gear.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Notice:
For p0411.3 = 1 the following applies:
Signal name
Measuring gear, activate position tracking
Axis type
Measuring gear, reset position
Meas. gearbox, activate pos. tracking for
incremental encoders
1 signal
Yes
Linear axis
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
Rotary axis
No
No
FP
-
If position tracking is activated for incremental encoders, only the position actual value is stored. Axis or encoder
motion is not detected when deactivated! Any tolerance window entered in p0413 has no effect.
Note:
For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset:
- when an encoder replacement has been identified.
- when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS).
p0412[0...n]
Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4194303
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary encoder with activated position tracking of the measuring gear.
Dependency:
This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking
(p0411.0 = 1) and for an incremental encoder with activated position tracking (p0411.3 = 1).

1-143
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r0483.

For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies:
p0411.0 = 1:
This parameter is preset with p0421 and can be changed.
p0411.3 = 1:
The parameter value is preset to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
For linear axes, the following applies:
p0411.0 = 1:
This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of overflows) and cannot be changed.
p0411.3 = 1:
The parameter value is preset to the highest possible value. The highest possible value depends on the pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
p0413[0...n]
Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: FloatingPoint32
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
4294967300.00
Factory setting
0.00
Sets a tolerance window for position tracking.

After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined,
and depending on this, the following is initiated:
Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value.
Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Caution:
Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected.
Note:
The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses.

For p0411.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range.
Example:
Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4
It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point number with 23 bit mantissa).
p0414[0...n]
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
1-144
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
16
Sets the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.

Parameter
List of parameters
p0415[0...n]
Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
14
Description:
Sets the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Note:
MSB: Most Significant Bit
p0418[0...n]
Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
18
Factory setting
11
Description:
Sets the fine resolution in bits of the incremental position actual values.
Note:
The parameter applies for the following process data:

- Gx_XIST1
- Gx_XIST2 for reference mark or flying measurement
The fine resolution specifies the fraction between two encoder pulses. Depending on the physical measurement
principle, an encoder pulse can be broken down into a different number of fractions (e.g. squarewave encoder: 2 bit
= resolution 4, sin/cos encoder: Typical 11 bit = resolution 2048).
For a squarewave encoder, with the factory setting, the least significant bits have the value zero, i.e. they do not
supply any useful information.
For especially high quality measuring systems, the fine resolution must be increased corresponding to the available
accuracy.
p0419[0...n]
Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
18
Factory setting
9
Description:
Sets the fine resolution in bits of the absolute position actual values.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0418
Note:
This parameter applies to process data Gx_XIST2 when reading the absolute value.
p0420[0...n]
Encoder connection / Enc_connection
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Selecting the encoder connection.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Signal name
SUB-D
Terminal
1 signal
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
FP
-
1-145
Parameter
List of parameters
p0421[0...n]
Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
4096
Description:
Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder.
Caution:
p0422[0...n]
Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [nm]
Max
4294967295 [nm]
Factory setting
100 [nm]
Description:
Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder.
Caution:
Note:
The serial protocol of an absolute encoder provides the position with a certain resolution , e.g. 100 nm. This value
must be entered here.
p0423[0...n]
Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 4704
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1073741823
Factory setting
8192
Description:
Sets the number of measuring steps per revolution for a rotary absolute encoder. The resolution refers to the absolute position.
Caution:
p0424[0...n]
Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [mm]
Max
65535 [mm]
Factory setting
20 [mm]
Description:
Sets the distance between two zero marks for a linear encoder. This information is used for zero mark monitoring.
Caution:
Note:
For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.
1-146

Parameter
List of parameters
p0425[0...n]
Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16777215
Factory setting
2048
Description:
Sets the distance in pulses between two zero marks for a rotary encoder. This information is used for zero mark
monitoring.
Caution:
Note:
For distance-coded zero marks, this means the basic distance.
p0426[0...n]
Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc diff distance
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Differential distance with distance-coded zero marks [signal periods]. Corresponds to jump displacement of "zero
mark with interference".
Caution:
p0427[0...n]
Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [kHz]
Max
65535 [kHz]
Factory setting
100 [kHz]
Description:
Sets the baud rate for an SSI encoder.
Caution:
Note:
SSI: Synchronous Serial Interface
p0428[0...n]
Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
65535 [s]
Factory setting
30 [s]
Description:
Sets the minimum delay time between two data transfers of the absolute value for an SSI encoder.
Caution:

1-147
Parameter
List of parameters
p0429[0...n]
Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for an SSI encoder.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
06
Caution:
Note:
Re bit 06:
Signal name
Transfer code
Transfer absolute value twice
Data line during the monoflop time
1 signal
Binary code
Yes
High level
0 signal
Gray code
No
Low level
FP
-
The quiescent signal level of the data line corresponds to the inverted, set level.
p0430[0...n]
Sensor Module configuration / SM config
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1110 0000 0000 1000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Note:
Signal name
Burst oversampling
Continuous oversampling (reserved)
Safety position actual value sensing
Speed calculation mode (only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Deselection commutation with zero mark
Commutation with selected zero mark
Disconnection of encoder power supply on
parking
SSI position value extrapolation
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Amplitude correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Incremental diff
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Flank time meas
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Re bit 17 (burst oversampling):

Displays whether burst oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling):
Displays whether continuous oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 19 (safety position actual value sensing):
Displays whether the safety encoder position is sent in the cyclic telegram.
Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode):
If bit = 0 the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation between edges. In this mode the
speed actual value 0 measuring time can be set in p0453.
If bit = 1 the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. In this mode p0453 is irrelevant.
1-148

Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance):

If bit = 1 there is no fault response (F3x100) if the number of track pulses between two zero pulses does not match
the configured number on one occasion. If the next zero mark is correct, no fault occurs.
Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation):
If bit = 1 correction might take several steps (+/- 1 quadrant per revolution) if the zero mark arrived in a tolerance
bandwidth (+/- 1/12 of the electrical revolution).
Re bit 23 (deselection commutation with zero mark):
Only possible with the Sensor Module property "Commutation with zero mark can be deselected" (p0458.23 = yes).
This should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted.
Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark):
Sets commutation to selected zero mark.
Re bit 25 (disconnection of encoder power supply on parking):
If activated, the encoder power supply is disconnected completely on parking (0 V), regardless of whether the operating voltage is 5 V or 24 V. If not activated, the encoder power supply is not disconnected on parking (although the
24 V operating voltage is reduced to 5 V).
Re bit 27 (extrapolation SSI position value):
Sets the interpolation of the position values from the SSI encoder.
Re bit 28 (cubic correction);
Sets whether cubic correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 29 (phase correction):
Sets whether phase correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 30 (amplitude correction):
Sets whether amplitude correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 31 (offset correction):
Sets whether offset correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
p0430[0...n]
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1110 0000 0000 1000 0000
0000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Signal name
Burst oversampling
Continuous oversampling (reserved)
Velocity calculation mode (only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Deselection commutation with zero mark
parking
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Incremental diff
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Flank time meas
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No

1-149
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 17 (burst oversampling):

Displays whether burst oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 18 (continuous oversampling):
Displays whether continuous oversampling has been activated.
Re bit 19 (safety position actual value sensing):
Displays whether the safety encoder position is sent in the cyclic telegram.
Re bit 20 (speed calculation mode):
If bit = 0 the speed is calculated via edge time measurement with extrapolation between edges. In this mode the
speed actual value 0 measuring time can be set in p0453.
If bit = 1 the speed is calculated via incremental difference without extrapolation. In this mode p0453 is irrelevant.
Re bit 21 (zero mark tolerance):
If bit = 1 there is no fault response (F3x100) if the number of track pulses between two zero pulses does not match
the configured number on one occasion. If the next zero mark is correct, no fault occurs.
Re bit 22 (rotor position adaptation):
If bit = 1 correction might take several steps (+/- 1 quadrant per revolution) if the zero mark arrived in a tolerance
bandwidth (+/- 1/12 of the electrical revolution).
Re bit 23 (deselection commutation with zero mark):
Only possible with the Sensor Module property "Commutation with zero mark can be deselected" (p0458.23 = yes).
This should only be set for encoders that have not been adjusted.
Re bit 24 (commutation with selected zero mark):
Sets commutation to selected zero mark.
Re bit 25 (disconnection of encoder power supply on parking):
If activated, the encoder power supply is disconnected completely on parking (0 V), regardless of whether the operating voltage is 5 V or 24 V. If not activated, the encoder power supply is not disconnected on parking (although the
24 V operating voltage is reduced to 5 V).
Re bit 27 (extrapolation SSI position value):
Sets the interpolation of the position values from the SSI encoder.
Re bit 28 (cubic correction);
Sets whether cubic correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 29 (phase correction):
Sets whether phase correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 30 (amplitude correction):
Sets whether amplitude correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
Re bit 31 (offset correction):
Sets whether offset correction is activated for the A-B analog signals.
p0431[0...n]
Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-180.00 []
Max
180.00 []
Factory setting
0.00 []
Description:
Sets the angular commutation offset.
Dependency:
The value is taken into account in r0094.

Caution:
When the firmware is upgraded from V2.3 to V2.4 or higher, the value must be reduced by 60 if all the following
conditions are fulfilled:
- The motor is a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2, 2xx, 4, 4xx).
- The encoder is a resolver (p0404.23 = 1).
- The actual speed value is inverted (p0410.0 = 1).
Notice:
The angular commutation offset cannot be generally taken from other drive systems. As a minimum - the sign of the
offset determined for SIMODRIVE 611 digital and SIMODRIVE 611 universal must be reversed for SINAMICS
(p0431 (SINAMICS) = -p1016 (SIMODRIVE)).
1-150

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Angular commutation offset, angular difference between electrical position of encoder and flux position.
For p0404.5 = 1 (track C/D) the following applies:
The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B, the zero mark on track C/D.
For p0404.6 = 1 (Hall sensor) the following applies:
The angular offset in p0431 acts on track A/B and the zero mark.
p0432[0...n]
Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Sets the encoder revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between
the encoder shaft and the load.
Dependency:
This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999.

Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0433
Note:
Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.
p0433[0...n]
Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10000
Factory setting
1
Sets the motor and load revolutions for the gearbox factor of the encoder evaluation.
The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between
the encoder shaft and the load.
Dependency:
This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999.

Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0432
Note:
Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410.
p0434[0...n]
Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the position and level of the error bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice:
The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol.

1-151
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of the error bit in the protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level).
d: Status of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On with 1 error bit, 2: On with 2 error bits ... 9: On with 9 error bits).
For several error error bits, the following applies:
- the position specified under ba and the additional bits are assigned increasing consecutively.
- the level set under c applies to all error bits.
Example:
p0434 = 1013
--> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a low level.
p0434 = 1113
--> The evaluation is switched in and the error bit is at position 13 with a high level.
p0435[0...n]
Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Sets the position and level of the alarm bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice:
Note:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of the alarm bit in protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level).
d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On).
Example:
p0435 = 1014
--> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a low level.
p0435 = 1114
--> The evaluation is switched in and the alarm bit is at position 14 with a high level.
p0436[0...n]
Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Sets the position and parity of the parity bit in the SSI protocol.
Notice:
Note:
Value = dcba
ba: Position of the parity bit in the protocol (0 ... 63).
c: Parity (0: even, 1: uneven).
d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On).
Example:
p0436 = 1015
--> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with even parity.
p0436 = 1115
--> The evaluation is switched in and the parity bit is at position 15 with uneven parity.
1-152

Parameter
List of parameters
p0437[0...n]
Sensor Module configuration extended / SM config ext
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0011 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Activating the data logger
Zero mark edge detection
Correction position actual value XIST1
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze the speed actual value for dn/dt
errors
Accumulate uncorrected encoder pulses
Automatic alarm acknowledgment
Track monitoring deselection
EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute
EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy
Analog unipolar track monitoring
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Note:
A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present.

Re bit 00:
When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded
(traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data.
Re bit 01:
If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark.
For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction of rotation detected. For a positive direction of
rotation, the positive edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction of rotation, the negative edge
of the zero mark.
Re bit 02:
If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the
pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered.
Re Bit 04 and Bit 05:
The current hardware only supports 1x or 4x signal evaluation.
Bit 5/4 = 0/0: Signal evaluation per period, 4x.
Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting.
Re bit 06:
If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the speed actual value is internally frozen for a time equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is then
re-enabled after this time has expired.
Re bit 07:
If the bit is set, the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to r4688 at the zero mark.
Re bit 11:
If the bit is set, within a certain time grid the Sensor Module checks whether the fault cause is still present. This
enables the Module to switch from the fault state to the operating state and provide valid actual values automatically. The faults are displayed until the user acknowledges them.

1-153
Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 20:
If the bit is set, the bandwidth of the analog filter for SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder) can be set via
parameter p4660.
Re bit 26:
Track monitoring is deactivated for the square-wave encoders when the bit is set, even if the monitoring function is
selected in p405.2.
Re bit 28:
Monitoring of the difference between incremental and absolute position in the case of linear encoders.
Re bit 29:
When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain speed and, therefore, with high accuracy. If initialization at a higher speed is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output.
Re bit 31:
When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are
monitored separately.
p0437[0...n]
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0011 0000 0000 0000 0000
1000 0000 0000 bin
Description:
Sets the extended configuration of the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
errors
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Note:

Re bit 00:
When the data logger (trace) is activated, in the case of a fault, data before and after the event are recorded
(traced) and saved in files on the non-volatile memory medium. Experts can then evaluate this data.
Re bit 01:
If bit = 0, the zero mark is evaluated by ANDing tracks A and B and the zero mark.
For bit = 1, the zero mark is evaluated depending on the direction detected. For a positive direction, the positive
edge of the zero mark is considered and for a negative direction, the negative edge of the zero mark.
Re bit 02:
If the bit is set, in the event of a deviation less than the tolerance window for the zero mark (p4681, p4682), the
pulses per revolution are corrected. If the bit is not set, encoder fault F3x131 is triggered.
1-154

Parameter
List of parameters
Re Bit 04 and Bit 05:

Bit 5/4 = 1/1: Illegal setting.
Re bit 06:
If the function is active, when dn/dt monitoring responds, the velocity actual value is internally frozen for a time
equivalent to two current controller clock cycles. The rotor position continues to be integrated. The actual value is
then re-enabled after this time has expired.
Re bit 07:
If the bit is set, the encoder pulses detected as faulty between two zero marks are accumulated (r4688).
Re bit 29:
When the bit is set, the EnDat encoder is initialized under a certain velocity and, therefore, with high accuracy. If initialization at a higher velocity is requested, fault F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output.
Re bit 31:
When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are
monitored separately.
p0438[0...n]
Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
100.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.64 [s]
Sets the filter time for a squarewave encoder.

The hardware of the squarewave encoder only supports the following values:
No filtering
0.04 s
0.64 s
2.56 s
10.24 s
20.48 s
Dependency:
Refer to: r0452
Notice:
If the filter time is too long, the track signals A/B/R may be suppressed and the appropriate messages output.
Note:
The most suitable filter time depends on the number of pulses and maximum speed of the square-wave encoder.
The filter time is automatically corrected to the next value when entering a non-specified value. In this case, no
message is output.
The effective filter time is displayed in r0452.
p0439[0...n]
Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65535 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Ramp-up time of encoder. The encoder supplies stable track signals once this time has elapsed.
Caution:

1-155
Parameter
List of parameters
p0440[0...n]
Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Copies the actual serial number of the encoder belonging to this Encoder Data Set (EDS) to p0441 ... p0445.
Example:
For p0440[0] = 1, the serial number of the encoder belonging EDS0 is copied to p0441[0] ... p0445[0].
Value:
0:
1:
No action
Transfer serial number
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464, p1990
Note:
For encoders with serial number, encoder replacement is monitored in order to request angular commutation calibration (adjustment) for motor encoders and absolute calibration for direct measuring systems with absolute value
data. The serial number, which from then onwards is used for monitoring purposes, can be transferred using p0440.
In the following cases, copying is automatically started in the following cases:
1.) When commissioning 1FT6, 1FK6, 1FK7 motors.
2.) When writing into p0431.
3.) For p1990 = 1.
p0440 is automatically set to 0 when the copying has been completed.
In order to permanently accept the copied values, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).
p0441[0...n]
Encoder commissioning serial number part 1 / Enc comm ser_no 1
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Serial number part 1 of the encoder for the commissioning.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0440, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Note:
p0442[0...n]
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
1-156

Parameter
List of parameters
p0443[0...n]
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
p0444[0...n]
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
p0445[0...n]
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
p0446[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of bits before the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution:
Note:
For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits.

1-157
Parameter
List of parameters
p0447[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
25
Description:
Sets the number of bits for the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution:
p0448[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of bits after the absolute value in the SSI protocol.
Caution:
Note:
For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits.
p0449[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of filler bits for double absolute value transfer in the SSI protocol.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0429
Caution:
Note:
This parameter is only of significance for p0429.2 = 1.
r0451[0...2]
Commutation angle factor / Enc commut_factor

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4710
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the relationship between the electrical and mechanical pole positions.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
1-158

Parameter
List of parameters
r0452
Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder.

The filter time is set using p0438.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0438
Note:
r0452[0...2]
Squarewave encoder filter time display / Enc t_filt displ

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder.

The filter time is set using p0438.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0438
Note:
p0453[0...n]
Measuring time pulse encoder evaluation zero speed / t_meas enc_eva n_0
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.10 [ms]
Max
10000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
1000.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the measuring time for evaluating zero speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0452
Note:
This function is required for slow-running motors so that actual speeds close to zero can be output correctly.
r0455
Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act
If no further encoder pulses are detected during this time, a speed actual value of zero is output internally.
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the detected encoder configuration.

In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).

1-159
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Irregular zero mark
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Resolver excit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
This parameter is only used for diagnostics.

Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V):
The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0.
r0455[0...2]
Encoder configuration recognized / Enc config act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the detected encoder configuration.

In this case, the encoder must automatically support the function (e.g. encoder with EnDat interface).
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-160
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Irregular zero mark
Acceleration
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
17
20
21
22
23
Track A/B analog

Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Resolver excit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No

Re bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V):
The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0.
r0456
Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Contains the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Irregular zero mark
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Resolver excit.
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-


1-161
Parameter
List of parameters
r0456[0...2]
Encoder configuration supported / Enc config supp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Contains the encoder configuration supported by the Sensor Module.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404
Note:
ZM: Zero mark
Signal name
Linear encoder
Abs value encoder
Multiturn encoder
Track A/B sq-wave
Track A/B sinus
Track C/D
Hall sensor
EnDat encoder
SSI encoder
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Digital encoder
Irregular zero mark
Acceleration
Track A/B analog
Voltage level 5 V
Voltage level 24 V
Resolver excit.
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
no
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

r0458
Sensor Module properties / SM properties
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Sets the Sensor Module configuration.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
1-162
Signal name
Encoder data available
Motor data available
Temperature sensor connection available
Connection for PTC for motor with DRIVECLiQ also available
Module temperature available
Absolute encoder p0408/p0421, no power
of 2
Sensor Module permits parking/unparking
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No

Parameter
List of parameters
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Hall sensor can be combined with actual

value inversion
Evaluation through several temperature
channels possible
Encoder fault and its associated information
available
Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module
Configuring without park state possible
Extended functions available
Extended encoder fault handling
Extended singleturn/multiturn information
available
Valuation figures available
Pole position identification
Burst oversampling
Extended speed calculation being used
(only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
Commutation with zero mark can be deselected
parking supported
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Offset correction
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Note:

Re bit 11:
When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface
becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"):
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
The extended functions can be configured using p0437.
Re bit 13:
Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15.
Re bit 14:
Re bit 23:
When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be deselected using p0430.23.
Re bit 24:
If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.

1-163
Parameter
List of parameters
r0458
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Signal name
of 2
value inversion
channels possible
available
Velocity diagnostics in the Sensor Module
available
Burst oversampling
Extended velocity calculation available (only
SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
parking supported
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601
Note:

Re bit 11:
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
Re bit 13:
1-164

Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 14:
Re bit 23:
Re bit 24:
r0458[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
27
28
29
30
31
Dependency:
Signal name
of 2
value inversion
channels possible
available
Speed diagnostics in the Sensor Module
available
Burst oversampling
Extended speed calculation being used
(only SMC30)
Zero mark tolerance
Rot pos adapt
parking supported
Cubic correction
Phase correction
Offset correction
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Refer to: p0437, p0600, p0601

1-165
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

Re bit 11:
p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445
Re bit 12:
Re bit 13:
Re bit 14:
Re bit 23:
Re bit 24:
r0459
Sensor Module properties extended / SM prop ext
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the extended properties supported by the Sensor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
errors
Support function p0426, p0439
Pulse/direction interface
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437
Note:

Re bit 09:
Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module.
1-166

Parameter
List of parameters
r0459
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
26
28
29
31
Signal name
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
Freeze actual velocity for dn/dt errors
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437
Note:

Re bit 09:
r0459[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
09
10
11
Signal name
Edge evaluation
Edge evaluation
errors
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No

1-167
Parameter
List of parameters
26
28
29
31

Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437
Note:

Re bit 09:
r0460
Encoder serial number part 1 / Enc ser_no 1
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
r0460[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
r0461
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
1-168

Parameter
List of parameters
r0461[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
r0462
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
r0462[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
r0463
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:

1-169
Parameter
List of parameters
r0463[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
r0464
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
r0464[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
1-170

Parameter
List of parameters
r0465[0...27]
Encoder 1 identification number/serial number / Enc1 ID_no/Ser_no
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the serial number of encoder 1.

Index 0 = first character of the identification number
...
Index x = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 1 = 2F hex (slash) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 2 = 20 hex (blank) --> separation between the identification number of serial number
Index x + 3 = first character of the serial number
...
Index y with contents = last character of the serial number
Dependency:
Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice:
Note:
The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters.
r0466[0...27]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-

...
...
Dependency:
Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice:
Note:

1-171
Parameter
List of parameters
r0467[0...27]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-

...
...
Dependency:
Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464
Notice:
Note:
r0470
Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency:
r0470[0...2]
Redundant coarse value valid bits / Valid bits

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
1-172

Parameter
List of parameters
r0471
Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
Dependency:
r0471[0...2]
Redundant coarse value fine resolution bits / Fine bit

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
r0472
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
r0472[0...2]
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits / Relevant bits

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of relevant bits for the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

1-173
Parameter
List of parameters
r0474
Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
r0474[0...2]
Redundant coarse position value configuration / Red pos config
Signal name
Incrementer
Encoder CRC least significant byte first
Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned

1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
r0475
Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
ENCODER
Signal name
Incrementer
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Note:
1-174
FP
-
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r0475[0...2]
Gx_XIST1 coarse position safe most significant bit / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
r0477
CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Note:
The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder
increments.
r0477[0...2]
CO: Measuring gear, position difference / Meas gear pos diff

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the position difference before the measuring gear between powering down and powering up.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: F31501, F32501, F33501
Note:
The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483. The position difference should be read in encoder
increments.
r0479
CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
In contrast to p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.

1-175
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are interconnected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason:
These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs
(e.g. CO: r0482).
The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list).
r0479[0...2]
CO: Diagnostics encoder position actual value Gn_XIST1 / Diag Gn_XIST1

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Caution:
Following ramping-up or after a data set changeover, the new value is present at connector inputs which are interconnected to connector output r0479 and under certain circumstances take 100 ms to become available. Reason:
These interconnections are updated in the background, unlike interconnections involving other connector outputs
(e.g. CO: r0482).
In contrast to p0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign.
The value is immediately available when non-cyclically reading r0479 (e.g. via the expert list).
p0480
CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_src Gn_STW
ENCODER
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Note:
When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established:
CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2]
p0480[0...2]
CI: Signal source for encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc S_src Gn_STW

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Note:
When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established:
CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2]
1-176

Parameter
List of parameters
r0481
CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4730
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
13
14
15
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature:
Signal name
Function 1 active
Function 2 active
Function 3 active
Function 4 active
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Measuring probe 1 deflected
Encoder fault acknowledge active
Absolute value cyclically
Parking encoder active
Encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Displayed in r0483
0 signal
No
No
No
No
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
No
No
No
No
No
None
FP
9676
-
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions

Note:
Re bit 14:
Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value
(Gn_XIST1) invalid.
Re bit 14, 15:
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes:
- the encoder is parked.
- the encoder is deactivated.
- the encoder is being commissioned.
- no parameterized encoder available.
- encoder data set is being changed over.
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance:
An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid.
r0481[0...2]
CO: Encoder status word Gn_ZSW / Enc Gn_ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4730
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

1-177
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
13
14
15
Signal name
Function 1 active
Function 2 active
Function 3 active
Function 4 active
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Encoder fault acknowledge active
Absolute value cyclically
Parking encoder active
Encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Yes
Yes
Displayed in r0483
Yes
Displayed in r0483
0 signal
No
No
No
No
Not present
Not present
Not present
Not present
No
No
No
No
No
None
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW can, e.g. be found in the following literature:
FP
9676
-
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Drive Functions

Note:
Re bit 14:
Displays the acknowledgement for "activate parking encoder" (Gn_STW.14 = 1) or encoder position actual value
(Gn_XIST1) invalid.
Re bit 14, 15:
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 0 can have one of the following causes:
- the encoder is parked.
- the encoder is deactivated.
- the encoder is being commissioned.
- no parameterized encoder available.
- encoder data set is being changed over.
r0481.14 = 1 and r0481.15 = 1 has the following significance:
An encoder error has occurred and the encoder position actual value (Gn_XIST1) is invalid.
r0482
CO: Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 / Enc Gn_XIST1
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4010, 4704, 4735, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive.
Note:
- this value is reset if necessary when the "parking axis" function is deselected.
- in this value, the measuring gear (p0432, p0433) is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated
(p0411.0 = 1).
r0482[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4010, 4704, 4735, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
1-178

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
- this value is reset if necessary when the "parking axis" function is deselected.
(p0411.0 = 1).
r0483
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Recommend.:
Possible causes of the error codes:

Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware.
Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred.
Notice:
The encoder position actual value must be requested using the encoder control word Gn_STW.13.
Note:
(p0411.0 = 1).
- if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder fault.
2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1.
3: Reserved.
4: Abort, reference mark search.
5: Abort, retrieve reference value.
6: Abort, flying measurement.
7: Abort, retrieve measured value.
8: Abort, absolute value transfer.
3841: Function not supported.
4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error.
4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error.
4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error.
4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error.
r0483[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4010, 4704
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Recommend.:
Possible causes of the error codes:

Error code 4097 and 4098: Defective Control Unit hardware.
Error codes 4099 and 4100: Too many measuring pulses have occurred.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice:

1-179
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
(p0411.0 = 1).
- if GxZSW.15 = 1 (r0481), then an error code with the following significance is located in Gx_XIST2 (r0483):
1: Encoder fault.
2: Possible position shift in Gx_XIST1.
3: Reserved.
4: Abort, reference mark search.
5: Abort, retrieve reference value.
6: Abort, flying measurement.
7: Abort, retrieve measured value.
8: Abort, absolute value transfer.
3841: Function not supported.
4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error.
4098: Abort, flying measurement due to an initialization error.
4099: Abort, reference mark search due to a measuring error.
4100: Abort, flying measurement due to a measuring error.
r0484
CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC Gn_XIST1 / Enc red pos+CRC
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
Upper 16 bits:
CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position.
Lower 16 bits:
Redundant coarse encoder position.
On SMx encoder modules, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value
Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution.
On DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the encoder coarse position count direction corresponds to r0482 and the encoder
coarse position contains 9 valid bits and no fine resolution bits.
Dependency:
The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0430
Note:
This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when deselecting the function "parking axis".
r0484[0...2]
CO: Redundant coarse encoder position + CRC Gn_XIST1 / Enc red pos+CRC

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the redundant coarse encoder position including CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check).
Upper 16 bits:
CRC over the redundant coarse encoder position.
Lower 16 bits:
Redundant coarse encoder position.
On SMx encoder modules, the encoder coarse position count direction is opposite to r0482 (encoder actual value
Gn_XIST1). The value contains 2 bit fine resolution.
On DRIVE-CLiQ encoders, the encoder coarse position count direction corresponds to r0482 and the encoder
coarse position contains 9 valid bits and no fine resolution bits.
1-180

Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0430
Note:
This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when deselecting the function "parking axis".
r0485
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
r0485[0...2]
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value incremental / Enc raw val incr

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the incremental encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
r0486
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
r0486[0...2]
CO: Measuring gear, encoder raw value absolute / Enc raw val abs

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3

1-181
Parameter
List of parameters
r0487
Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
Signal name
Request function 1
Request function 2
Request function 3
Request function 4
Request command bit 0
Flying measurement mode/search for reference mark
Request absolute value cyclic
Request parking encoder
Request acknowledge encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Flying measurement
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Reference marks
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note:
The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.
r0487[0...2]
Diagnostic encoder control word Gn_STW / Enc Gn_STW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

4720, 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
13
14
15
Signal name
Request function 1
Request function 2
Request function 3
Request function 4
Flying measurement mode/search for reference mark
Request absolute value cyclic
Request parking encoder
Request acknowledge encoder fault
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Flying measurement
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Reference marks
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
Notice:
Information on Gn_STW/Gn_ZSW should be taken from the corresponding product documentation.
Note:
The signal source for the encoder control word is set with p0480.
1-182

Parameter
List of parameters
p0488
Measuring probe 1 input terminal / Meas probe 1 inp
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal to connect probe 1.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Dependency:
Notice:
To select the values:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
For Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual).
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output

The terminal must be set as input (p0728).
Refer to the encoder interface for PROFIdrive.
If parameterization is rejected, check whether the terminal is already being used in p0580, p0680, p2517 or p2518.
p0488[0...2]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Notice:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Note:


1-183
Parameter
List of parameters
p0489
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Dependency:
Notice:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Note:

p0489[0...2]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4740
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Notice:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Note:

1-184

Parameter
List of parameters
p0491
Motor encoder fault response ENCODER / Fault resp ENCODER

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
0
Sets the behavior for the ENCODER fault response (motor encoder).
This means, for example, if an encoder fault occurs, encoderless operation can be automatically selected with a
shutdown behavior that can be selected.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Encoder fault results in OFF2

Enc fault results in encoderless oper. and oper. continues
Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF1
Encoder fault results in encoderless operation and OFF3
Encoder fault results in an armature short-cct internal/DC brake
Dependency:
The following parameters are relevant for encoderless operation.

Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1470, p1472, p1517, p1612, p1755
Refer to: F07575
Caution:
For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies:

- encoderless operation must have been started.
For a value = 1, the following applies:
- in spite of the motor encoder fault that has occurred, the motor continues to operate.
Note:
For a value = 1, 2, 3, the following applies:

- Refer to the status signal "encoderless operation due to a fault" (BO: r1407.13).
- Not possible for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5).
p0492
Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle /

n_dif max/samp_cyc
ENCODER
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encoders.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31118, A31418
Note:
For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.

if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
appropriate alarm is output. However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times,
then a corresponding fault is output.

1-185
Parameter
List of parameters
p0492
Square-wave encoder, max. velocity difference per sampling cycle /

v_dif max/samp_cyc
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: U, T
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [m/min]
Max
1000.00 [m/min]
Factory setting
0.00 [m/min]
Description:
Sets the maximum permissible velocity difference within the current controller sampling time for square-wave
encoders.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31118, A31418
Note:
For a value of 0.0, velocity change monitoring is disabled.

if the set maximum velocity difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
p0492
Square-wave encoder, maximum speed difference per sampling cycle /

n_dif max/samp_cyc

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Sets the maximum permissible speed difference within the current controller sampling time for squarewave encoders.
When the value is exceeded, depending on p0491, either encoderless closed-loop speed/torque control is selected
or the drive is powered down.
Dependency:
Refer to: F31118, A31418, F32118, A32418, F33118, A33418
Note:
For a value of 0.0, the speed change monitoring is disabled.

if the set maximum speed difference is only exceeded for one sampling time of the current controller, then an
The parameter is only pre-assigned when selecting p0340 = 1, 3.
The following applies for SERVO, VECTORMV:
The speed actual value used for the monitoring is a floating average between p0115[0] and p0115[1].
p0493
Zero mark selection, input terminal / ZM_sel inp_term
ENCODER
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing
with several zero marks.
The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the positive edge of the BERO signal.
1-186

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
No selection via BERO

DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice:
For CU310, CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note:

For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
- there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal.
For p0493 > 0, the following applies:
- the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be
parameterized via p0490.
- if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518.
p0493[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Sets the input terminal for selecting the reference mark via BERO/switching signal when performing referencing
with several zero marks.
The encoder interface supplies the position of the reference mark, which was detected immediately after the positive edge of the BERO signal.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
No selection via BERO

DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Notice:
Manual).
Note:

For p0493 = 0 (factory setting) the following applies:
- there is no logic operation between the reference mark search and an input signal.
- the positive edge of the input signal is evaluated. If the negative edge is to be evaluated, signal inversion must be
parameterized via p0490.
- if a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0580, p0680, p2517, or p2518.

1-187
Parameter
List of parameters
p0495
Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark inp
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Notice:
Manual).
Note:
No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)

DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
The terminal must be set as input.

For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.
p0495[0...2]
Equivalent zero mark, input terminal / Zero mark inp

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 4735
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the input terminal for connecting an equivalent zero mark (external encoder zero mark).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Notice:
Manual).
1-188
No equivalent zero mark (evaluation of the encoder zero mark)

DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

The terminal must be set as input.
For p0495 = 0 (factory setting), the encoder zero mark is evaluated as zero mark.
Depending on the direction of motion, the positive or negative edge at the appropriate input is evaluated.
- increasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 0/1 edge is evaluated.
- decreasing position actual values (r0482) --> the 1/0 edge is evaluated.
Only one zero mark is supported. If function 2, 3 or 4 is selected, this results in a fault message in Gn_ZSW.
The inversion of the inputs via p0490 affects the function "referencing with equivalent zero mark". This is the reason
that the edge evaluation is interchanged as a function of the direction of motion.
An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The
same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot
be simultaneously requested.
p0496
Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
70
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
30:
31:
32:
33:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
60:
61:
70:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499
Inactive
r0497: Mechanical revolution
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y
r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y
r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X
r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B
r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number
r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount
r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D
r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution
r0497: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R
r0497: Absolute position serial
r0497: Absolute position, incremental
r0497: Zero mark position
r0497: Correction absolute position difference
r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm
r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt)
r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants
Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B
Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B
Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase

1-189
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re p0496 = 1: 360 <--> 2^32

Re p0496 = 10 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 12: 180 fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected
Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec
Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 32768 dec, phase: 180 <--> 18000 dec
p0496[0...2]
Encoder diagnostic signal selection / Enc diag select

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
70
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the trace signal to be output in r0497, r0498 and r0499 for encoder diagnostics.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
30:
31:
1-190
Inactive
r0497: Mechanical revolution
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track B
r0498: Fine position X (-A/2), r0499: Fine position Y (-B/2)
r0498: Fine position Phi, r0499: r0498: Offset correction X, r0499: Offset correction Y
r0498: Phase correction X, r0499: Amplitude correction Y
r0498: Cubic correction X, r0499: Fine position X
r0498: oversampling channel A, r0499: oversampling channel B
r0498: fan-out, amount, r0499: fan-out, number
r0498: Oversampling angle, r0499: Oversampling amount
r0498: Raw value, track C, r0499: Raw value, track D
r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2)
r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution
r0497: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track R, r0499: Zero mark status
r0498: Raw value, track A, r0499: Raw value, track R
r0497: Absolute position serial
r0497: Absolute position, incremental

Parameter
List of parameters
32:
33:
40:
41:
42:
51:
52:
60:
61:
70:
r0497: Zero mark position

r0497: Correction absolute position difference
r0498: Raw temperature, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0498: Resistance in 0.1 Ohm, r0499: Temperature in 0.1 C
r0497: Resistance 2500 Ohm
r0497: Absolute speed difference (dn/dt)
r0497: Xact1 corrected quadrants
Analog sensor: r0498: raw val chann. A, r0499: raw val chann. B
Analog sensor: r0498: fine pos chann. A,r0499: fine pos chann. B
Resolver: r0498: Transformation ratio, r0499: phase
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: r0497, r0498, r0499
Note:
Re p0496 = 1: 360 <--> 2^32

Re p0496 = 10, 20 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected
Re p0496 = 12: 180 fine position <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 13 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 14: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 15: 100 % <--> 16384 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (resolver): channel A: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec, channel B: 2900 mV <--> 26214 dec
Re p0496 = 16: (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat) channel A: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec, channel B: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 17 (resolver): absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 17 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): absolute value 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, number: 1 ... 8
Re p0496 = 18 (resolver): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec
Re p0496 = 18 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): angle: signal period <--> 2^16, absolute value: 500 mV <--> 10650 dec
Re p0496 = 22: 180 <--> 32768 dec
Re p0496 = 23, 24: r0497.31 (r0499.15) set for at least 1 current controller cycle when encoder zero mark detected
Re p0496 = 24, 25: 500 mV <--> 21299 dec
Re p0496 = 30: Rotary: 1 singleturn measuring step <--> 1 dec, linear: 1 measuring step <--> 1 dec
Re p0496 = 31: Absolute position, incremental in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 32: Zero mark position in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 33: counter offset absolute value in 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 40: r0498 <--> (R_KTY/1 kOhm - 0.9) * 32768
Re p0496 = 42: 2500 Ohm <--> 2^32
Re p0496 = 51: 1 rpm <--> 1000 dec
Re p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses
Re p0496 = 70: r: 100% <--> 32768 dec, phase: 180 <--> 18000 dec
r0497
Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word).

The signal to be output is selected in p0496.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499

1-191
Parameter
List of parameters
r0497[0...2]
CO: Encoder diagnostic signal double word / Enc diag DW

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (double word).

Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0498, r0499
r0498
Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component).

Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499
r0498[0...2]
CO: Encoder diagnostic signal low word / Enc diag low word

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component).

Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499
r0499
Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component).

Dependency:
1-192
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498

Parameter
List of parameters
r0499[0...2]
CO: Encoder diagnostic signal high word / Enc diag high word

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (high component).

Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0498
p0500
Technology application / Tec application
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2(1, 5), T

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Applications
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Sets the technology application.

The parameter influences the calculation of open-loop and closed-loop control parameters that is e.g. initiated using
p0578.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Standard drive (VECTOR)

Pumps and fans
Sensorless closed-loop control down to f = 0 (passive loads)
Dependency:
Note:
The calculation of parameters dependent on the technology application can be called up as follows:
- when exiting quick commissioning using p3900 > 0
- when writing p0340 = 1, 3, 5
- when writing p0578 = 1
For p0500 = 0 and when the calculation is initiated, the following parameters are set:
p1574 = 10 V (for separately-excited synchronous motors: 20 V)
p1750 bit 2 = 0
p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol)
p1803 = 106 %
p1750 bit 2 = 0
p1802 = 9 (edge modulation), if r0192 bit 0 = 1
p1802 = 4, if r0192 bit 0 = 0 or parallel circuit configuration with single-winding system (p7003)
p1803 = 106 %

1-193
Parameter
List of parameters
p1750 bit 2 = 1: Sensorless closed-loop control of induction motors effective up to a frequency of zero.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load does not generate
regenerative torque when breaking away and the motor comes to a standstill (zero speed) itself when the pulses
are inhibited.
p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol)
p1803 = 106 %
The setting of p1750 is only relevant for induction motors.
p1802 and p1803 are only changed, in all cases, if a sine-wave output filter (p0230 = 3, 4) has not been selected.
p0505
Selecting the system of units / Select unit sys
ENCODER,
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
4
Factory setting
1
Description:
Adjustable parameter of the actual system of units.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Dependency:
Caution:
The parameter cannot be changed if the master control was fetched.

If a per unit representation is selected and if reference parameters (e.g. p2000) are subsequently changed, then the
physical significance of some closed-loop control parameters will also be adapted where as a result, the closedloop control behavior can change (refer to p1576, p1621, p1744, p1752, p1755 and p1609, p1612, p1619, p1620).
Note:
Reference parameter for the unit system % are, for example, p2000 ... p2004. Depending on what has been
selected, these are displayed using either SI or US units.
p0528
Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
System of units SI
System of units, referred/SI
US system of units
System of units, referred/US
Description:
Sets the system of units for the controller gains.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
For p0528 = 0 (physical/%), the following applies:
Representation, physical/% (p0505)

Representation, no dimensions (referred)
Using p0505, the dependent parameters can be changed over between physical and % representation.
For SERVO (r0107) the following applies:
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 0 and cannot be changed.
1-194

Parameter
List of parameters
p0528
Controller gain, system of units / Ctrl_gain unit_sys

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the system of units for the controller gains.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies:
Representation, physical/% (p0505)

Representation, no dimensions (referred)
The parameter is pre-assigned a value of 1 and cannot be changed.
p0530[0...n]
Bearing type selection / Bearing type sel

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
104
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to select a bearing type.

0 = No selection
1 = Manual entry
101 = STANDARD
102 = PERFORMANCE
103 = HIGH PERFORMANCE
104 = ADVANCED LIFETIME
If the bearing type changes the bearing code number (p0531) is pre-assigned accordingly.
Dependency:
Caution:
If a valid bearing type (p0530) is entered, the parameters in the bearing list cannot be changed (write protection).
Write protection is canceled if bearing type 1 is entered.
Note:
p0530 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
p0531[0...n]
Bearing code number selection / Bear. code num sel

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to display and enter the bearing code number. It is pre-assigned automatically (from the
parameter lists which are available internally) when p0301 and p0530 are entered and cannot be changed (write
protection). The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
When changing the bearing code number (except in the case of changing the value to 0), all of the bearing parameters are pre-assigned from the parameter lists which are available internally.
Dependency:
Note:
p0531 cannot be changed on a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.

1-195
Parameter
List of parameters
p0532[0...n]
Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [rpm]
Max
210000.0 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.0 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum motor bearing speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Caution:
This parameter is pre-assigned in the case of motors from the motor list (p0301) if a bearing type (p0530) or a bearing code (p0531) is selected. When selecting a catalog motor, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection).
The information in p0530 should be observed when removing write protection.
Notice:
If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor
(p0010 = 3).
p0570
Inhibit list values effective number / Inhib list no

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
50
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of parameters in the inhibit list p0571 that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and
closed-loop control parameter calculation (refer to p0340, p0578), starting from index 0.
Note:
Defines the number of entries in p0571 that should be taken into account. This means that a value of 0 deactivates
the complete list.
p0571[0...49]
Inhibit list, motor/closed-loop control parameter calculation / Inhib list calc

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2142
Factory setting
0
Description:
The inhibit list contains parameters that should be withdrawn from the automatic motor and closed-loop control
parameter calculation (p0340, p0578).
Value:
0:
600:
640:
1082:
1460:
1462:
1470:
1472:
1520:
1521:
1530:
1531:
1590:
1592:
2141:
2142:
1-196
No parameter
Motor temperature sensor
Current limit
Maximum speed
Speed controller P gain
Speed controller integral time
Speed controller P gain, encoderless
Speed controller integral time, encoderless
Torque limit upper/motoring
Torque limit lower/regenerative
Power limit motoring
Power limit regenerative
Flux controller P gain
Flux controller integral time
Speed threshold 1
Hysteresis speed 1

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
p0570 defines the number of entries (starting at index 0) for which the inhibit should apply. p0572 can be used to
define for which drive data sets the inhibit list should apply.
If a motor data set is entered into a parameter number, then this is not overwritten as soon as only one drive data
set refers to the motor data set (p0186).
p0572[0...n]
Activate inhibit list / Act inhib list

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Enable ID as to whether the parameters of the inhibit list p0571 should be overwritten when calculating the motor
and closed-loop control parameters for the particular drive data set (index = DDS).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) also overwrites the parameters of list p0571.
No
Yes
1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) does not overwrite the parameters of list p0571.
p0573
Inhibit automatic reference value calculation / Inhibit calc

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Inhibits the calculation of reference parameters (e.g. p2000) when automatically calculating the motor and closedloop control parameters (p0340, p3900).
Value:
0:
1:
Notice:
The inhibit for the reference value calculation is canceled when new motor parameters (e.f. p0305) are entered and
only one drive data set exists (p0180 = 1). This is the case during initial commissioning. Once the motor and control
parameters have been calculated (see p3900, p0340), the inhibit for the reference value calculation is automatically
reactivated.
Note:
0: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) overwrites the reference parameters.
No
Yes
1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p3900) does not overwrite the reference parameters.
p0578[0...n]
Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc tec par

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
This parameter is used to calculate all parameters that depend on the technology of the application (p0500).
All of the parameters are calculated that can also be determined using p0340 = 5.
Value:
0:
1:
No calculation
Complete parameterization
Note:

1-197
Parameter
List of parameters
p0595
Selecting technological units / Select tech units

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
32
Factory setting
1
Description:
Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
27:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Only units of parameters with unit group 9_1 can be changed over using this parameter.
%
1 referred, no dimensions
Bar
C
Pa
ltr/s
m/s
ltr/min
m/min
ltr/h
m/h
kg/s
kg/min
kg/h
t/min
t/h
N
kN
Nm
psi
F
gallon/s
inch/s
gallon/min
inch/min
gallon/h
inch/h
lb/s
lb/min
lb/h
lbf
lbf ft
Refer to: p0596
p0596
Reference quantity, technological units / Ref tech units

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the reference quantity for the technological units. When changing over using changeover parameter 595 to
absolute units, all of the parameters involved refer to the reference quantity.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0595
1-198

Parameter
List of parameters
p0600[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor

0
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
21
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the sensor to monitor the motor temperature.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
10:
11:
20:
21:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0601, p0603
Caution:
If, for a selected temperature sensor (p0600 > 0), the motor temperature sensor is not connected but another
encoder, then the temperature adaptation of the motor resistances must be switched out. Otherwise, in controlledloop operation, torque errors will occur that will mean that the drive will not be able to be stopped.
Notice:
The parameter is calculated in the drive using p0340 and is inhibited for p0340 > 0.
Note:
Re p0600 = 0:
No sensor
Temperature sensor via encoder 1
Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection
Temperature sensor via Motor Module / CU terminals
Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p608
Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p609
With induction motors, the motor temperature is calculated using the motor temperature model (see also p0612, bit
1).
Re p0600 = 1, 2, 3:
Bimetallic switch (p0601 = 4) and PT100 temperature sensor (p0601 = 5) are not supported.
Re p0600 = 10:
The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input CI: p0603.
Re p0600 = 11:
For SINAMICS S120 AC Drive (AC/AC) and using the Control Unit Adapter CUA31, the temperature sensor is connected at the adapter (X210).
Re p0600 = 20, 21:
The BICO interconnection should be executed via connector input CI: p0608 or p0609.
Associated parameters: p0601, p4600..4603, p4610..p4613
p0601[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
11
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the sensor type for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
10:
11:
Dependency:
The thermal motor model is only calculated for p0612.1 = 1.
No sensor
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84
KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ):
Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temp_eval via MM)
PT100
Evaluation via several temperature channels SME12x
Evaluation via several temperature channels BICO
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0612

1-199
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The temperature sensor for the temperature evaluation is set in p0600.

For p0600 = 10 (temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection), the setting in p0601 has no significance.
Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature:
- hardware description of the appropriate components
- SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual
Re p0601 = 1 (PTC alarm & timer):
Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm.
After the tripping resistance has been exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in
p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault is output.
Re p0601 = 3 (KTY84 and PTC (only for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ)):
For motors with DRIVE-CLiQ and 2 temperature sensors, the value is automatically set.
Re p0601 = 4 (bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer (only for temperature evaluation via the Motor Module)):
Tripping resistance = 100 Ohm.
After tripping, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault
is output.
Re p0601 = 5 (PT100):
It is only possible to evaluate a PT100 for p0600 = 11 and r0192 bit 15 = 1.
Re p0601 = 10 (evaluation through several temperature channels (SME12x)):
Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11.
Associated parameters: p4600 ... p4603 (can be switched via EDS)
For r0458.8 = 1, a temperature evaluation is supported through several temperature channels.
Examples:
When evaluating using SME120 or SME125, 4 temperature channels are available ( parameterized using p4600,
p4601, p4602, p4603).
When evaluating using CU310 and CUA32, 2 temperature channels are available (encoder interface, parameterization via p4600 / terminal block, parameterization via p4601).
Re p0601 = 11 (evaluation via several temperature channels (BICO)):
Not permitted for p0600 = 0, 10, 11.
Associated parameters: p4610 ... p4613 (can be switched via MDS)
p0602
Par_circuit power unit number, temperature sensor / PU_No temp_sensor

0 (Parallel)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the power unit number to which the temperature sensor is connected. The value corresponds to the Power unit
Data Set number (PDS) of the power unit. The number of power unit data sets is defined in p0120.
p0603
CI: Motor temperature signal source / Mot temp S_src

0
Data type: Unsigned32 / FloatingPoint32
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0600
1-200

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Temperature sensor KTY: Valid temperature range -48 C ... 248 C.

PTC temperature sensor:
For a value = -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC.
For a value = 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC.
Note:
When using a Terminal Module 31 (TM31), the following applies:
- the sensor type used is set using p4100.
- the temperature signal is interconnected using CO: r4105.
p0604[0...n]
Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
200.0 [C]
Factory setting
130.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the alarm threshold for monitoring the motor temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0606
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
The hysteresis for canceling the alarm is 2 Kelvin.

p0605[0...n]
Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
200.0 [C]
Factory setting
145.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the fault threshold to monitor the motor temperature.
Caution:
write protection.
Note:
The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kelvin.


1-201
Parameter
List of parameters
p0606[0...n]
Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
600.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the timer for the alarm threshold for the motor temperature monitoring function.
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p0604) is exceeded.
If the timer expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F07011 is output.
If the temperature fault threshold (p0605) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault F07011
is immediately output.
As long as the motor temperature has still not exceeded the fault threshold and the alarm thresholds have again
been undershot, the fault can be acknowledged.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07011, A07910
Note:
With p0606 = 0 s, the timer is deactivated and only the fault threshold is effective.
KTY sensor: When setting the minimum value, the timer is disabled and a fault is not output until p0605 is
exceeded.
PTC sensor, bimetallic NC contact: The timer minimum value has no special significance.
p0607[0...n]
Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
600.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.100 [s]
Sets the timer between the output of alarm and fault for a temperature sensor fault.
If there is a sensor fault, this timer is started. If the sensor fault is still present after the timer has expired, a corresponding fault message is output.
Note:
If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output.
Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model.
p0608[0...3]
CI: Motor temperature signal source 2 / MotTempSignal2

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets signal source 2 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Index:
[0] = Motor temperature channel 1

Dependency:
Refer to: p0600
1-202

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

PTC/bimetal temperature sensor:
For a value of -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal
contact closed).
For a value of 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC
(bimetal contact open).
Note:
p0609[0...3]
CI: Motor temperature signal source 3 / MotTempSignal3

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets signal source 3 to evaluate the motor temperature via a BICO interconnection.
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p0600
Note:

PTC/bimetal temperature sensor:
For a value of -50 C, the following applies: Motor temperature < nominal response temperature of the PTC (bimetal
contact closed).
For a value of 250 C, the following applies: Motor temperature >= nominal response temperature of the PTC
(bimetal contact open).
Note:
p0610[0...n]
Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the system response when the motor temperature reaches the alarm threshold.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0601, p0604, p0605
No response only alarm no reduction of I_max

Alarm with reduction of I_max and fault
Alarm and fault no reduction of I_max
Refer to: F07011, A07910

Note:
The I_max reduction is not executed for PTC (p0601 = 1) or bimetallic NC contact (p0601 = 4).
The I_max reduction results in a lower output frequency.

1-203
Parameter
List of parameters
p0611[0...n]
I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
20000 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Sets the winding time constant.

The time constant specifies the warm-up time of the cold stator winding when loaded with the motor standstill current up until a temperature rise of 63 % of the continuously permissible winding temperature has been reached.
Dependency:
This parameter is only used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).

Refer to: r0034, p0612, p0615
Refer to: F07011, A07012, A07910
Caution:
This parameter is automatically preset from the motor database for motors from the motor list (p0301).
Note:
When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (also refer to p0612).
If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to
p0625.
p0612[0...n]
Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0010 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the thermal motor model.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0615
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
Activate I2t motor model
Activate motor temperature model
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
This bit is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). It is only possible to switch in thermal I2t monitoring with a time constant greater than zero (p0611 > 0).
Re bit 01:
This bit is used to activate/deactivate the thermal motor model for induction motors.
p0615[0...n]
I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8017
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
220.0 [C]
Factory setting
180.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the fault threshold for monitoring using the thermal I2t motor model.
Dependency:
The parameter is only used for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx).
Refer to: r0034, p0611, p0612
Refer to: F07011, A07012
1-204

Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
p0616[0...n]
Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [C]
Max
200.0 [C]
Factory setting
130.0 [C]
Description:
Sets the alarm threshold 1 for monitoring the motor temperature.
Note:
The alarm threshold is not, as for p0604, coupled to the timer p0606. The hysteresis for canceling the fault is 2 Kelvin.
p0620[0...n]
Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R

0
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the thermal adaptation of the stator/primary section resistance and rotor/secondary section resistance according to r0395 and r0396.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Note:
For p0620 = 1, the following applies:
No thermal adaptation of stator and rotor resistances

Resistances adapted to the temperatures of the thermal model
Resistances adapted to the measured stator winding temperature
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035 and the rotor resistance together with the model
temperature in r0633.
The stator resistance is adapted using the temperature in r0035. If applicable, the rotor temperature for adapting
the rotor resistance is calculated from the stator temperature (r0035) as follows:
theta_R = (r0628 + r0625) / (r0627 + r0625) * r0035
p0621[0...n]
Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Selects the identification of the stator resistance after booting the Control Unit (only for vector control).
The identification is used to measure the actual stator resistance and from the ratio of the result of motor data identification (p0350) to the matching ambient temperature (p0625) the actual mean temperature of the stator winding is
calculated. The result is used to initialize the thermal motor model.
p0621 = 1:
Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is powered up for the first time (pulse enable) after booting
the Control Unit.
p0621 = 2:
Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is powered up (pulse enable).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
No temperature identification
Temperature identification after restart
Temperature identification after each power-up

1-205
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
- perform motor data identification (see p1910) with cold motor.

- enter ambient temperature at time of motor data identification in p0625.
Notice:
The calculated stator temperature can only be compared with the measured value of a temperature sensor (KTY) to
a certain extent, as the sensor is usually the warmest point of the stator winding, whereas the measured value of
identification reflects the mean value of the stator winding.
Furthermore this is a short-time measurement with limited accuracy that is performed during the magnetizing phase
of the induction motor.
Note:
The measurement is carried out:

- For induction motors
- When vector control is active (see p1300)
- If a temperature sensor (KTY) has not been connected
- When the motor is at a standstill when switched on
When a flying restart is performed on a rotating motor, the temperatures of the thermal motor model are set to a
third of the overtemperatures. This occurs only once, however, when the CU is booted (e.g. after a power failure).
If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is determined via p0622 and not via p0346. Quick magnetizing
(p1401.6) is de-energized internally and alarm A07416 is displayed. The speed is enabled after completion of the
measurement.
p0622[0...n]
Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the excitation time of the motor for the stator resistance identification after powering up again (restart).
Dependency:
Note:
For p0622 < p0346 the following applies:

If identification is activated, the magnetizing time is influenced by p0622. The speed is enabled after measurement
is complete, but not before the time in p0346 has elapsed (see r0056 bit 4). The time taken for measurement also
depends on the settling time of the measured current.
For p0622 >= p0346 the following applies:
Parameter p0622 is internally limited to the magnetizing time p0346, so that p0346 represents the maximum possible magnetizing time during identification. The entire measurement period (magnetizing plus measurement settling
time plus measuring time) will always be greater than p0346.
r0623
Stator resistance of Rs identification after powering up again / R_Stator Reset_Id
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (n/M)

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor identification
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the identified stator resistance after the Rs identification after powering up again.
Dependency:
1-206

Parameter
List of parameters
p0624[0...n]
Motor Temperature Offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100.0 [K]
Max
100.0 [K]
Factory setting
0.0 [K]
Sets the temperature offset for the PT100 measured value.

If there is a difference between the motor temperature displayed in r0035 and the actual motor temperature, this offset can be entered in this parameter, thereby compensating for the difference.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0600, p0601, p0602
Note:
The parameter only takes effect with the following settings:

- Temperature sensor of the power unit detected (p0600 = 11).
- Sensor type PT100 selected (p0601 = 5).
If the resistance in series with the PT100 (e.g. the cable resistance of the feeder cable) is known, the following conversion formula must be used:
Offset in p0624 = Measured resistance in ohms x 2.5 K/Ohm
Example:
Measured cable resistance = 2 Ohm
--> 2 Ohm x 2.5 K / Ohm = 5.0 K
p0625[0...n]
Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-40 [C]
Max
80 [C]
Factory setting
20 [C]
Description:
Defines the ambient temperature of the motor for calculating the motor temperature model.
Note:
The parameters for stator and rotor resistance (p0350, p0354) refer to this temperature.
If the thermal I2t motor model is activated for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (refer to p0611), p0625 is
included in the model calculation if a temperature sensor is not being used (see p0601).
p0626[0...n]
Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20 [K]
Max
200 [K]
Factory setting
50 [K]
Description:
Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator core referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Note:

1-207
Parameter
List of parameters
p0627[0...n]
Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20 [K]
Max
200 [K]
Factory setting
80 [K]
Description:
Defines the rated overtemperature of the stator winding referred to the ambient temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Note:
p0628[0...n]
Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20 [K]
Max
200 [K]
Factory setting
100 [K]
Description:
Defines the rated overtemperature of the squirrel cage rotor referred to ambient temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0625
Note:
r0630[0...n]
Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the ambient temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0631[0...n]
Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core

Description:
1-208
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the stator core temperature of the motor temperature model.

Parameter
List of parameters
r0632[0...n]
Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.
r0633[0...n]
Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model.
p0634[0...n]
Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [Vsrms]
Max
100.000 [Vsrms]
Factory setting
0.000 [Vsrms]
The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients.
The parameter weights the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis flux function.
p0635[0...n]
Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the quadrature axis current.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0634
p0636[0...n]
Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
This parameter describes the interdependency of the unsaturated component of the direct axis current.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0634

1-209
Parameter
List of parameters
p0637[0...n]
Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mH]
Max
10000.00 [mH]
Factory setting
0.00 [mH]
This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636
p0640[0...n]
Current limit / Current limit

0
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the current limit.
Dependency:
Note:
The parameter is part of the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that it is appropriately pre-assigned when
changing p0305, p0323 and p0338.
The current limit p0640 is limited to r0209 and p0323. The limit to p0323 is not realized if a value of zero is entered
there.
The resulting current limit is displayed in r0067 and if required, r0067 is reduced by the thermal model of the Motor
Module.
The torque and power limits (p1520, p1521, p1530, p1531) matching the current limit are automatically calculated
when exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 > 0 or using the automatic parameterization with p0340 = 3, 5.
p0640 is limited to 4.0 * p0305.
p0640 is pre-assigned for the automatic self commissioning routine (e.g.to 1.5 * p0305, with p0305 = r0207[1]).
p0640 must be entered when commissioning the system. This is the reason that p0640 is not calculated by the
automatic parameterization when exiting the quick commissioning (p3900 > 0).
For SERVO the following applies (p0107):
p0640 is pre-assigned as follows using the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) taking into account
the limits r0209 and r0323:
- for induction motors: p0640 = 1.5 * p0305
- for synchronous motors: p0640 = p0338
p0641[0...n]
CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6640
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the variable current limit.

The value is referred to p0640.
1-210

Parameter
List of parameters
p0643[0...n]
Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the overvoltage protection for synchronous motors in the field-weakening range.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0316, p1082, p1231, p9601, p9801
No measure
Voltage Protection Module (VPM)
Refer to: F07906, F07907

Notice:
When the speed limiting is removed, the user is responsible for implementing a suitable overvoltage protection.
Note:
In the field-weakening range, synchronous motors can, when a fault condition exists, generate high DC link voltages. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due to overvoltage:
- limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection.
The maximum speed without protection is calculated as follows:
Rotary motors: p1082 [rpm] <= 11.695 * p0297/p0316 [Nm/A]
Linear motors: p1082 [m/min] <= 73.484 *p0297/0316 [N/A]
- use a Voltage Protection Module (VPM) in conjunction with the function "Safe Torque Off" (p9601, p9801).
When a fault condition exists, the VPM short-circuits the motors. During the short-circuit, the pulses must be suppressed - this means that the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" must be connected to the VPM.
- activating the internal voltage protection (IVP) with p1231 = 3.
p0650[0...n]
Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
4294967295 [h]
Factory setting
0 [h]
Displays the operating hours for the corresponding motor.

The motor operating time counter continues to run when the pulses are enabled. When the pulse enable is withdrawn, the counter is held and the value saved.
Dependency:
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the operating hours counter in a non-volatile
fashion:
- firmware with V2.2 or higher.
- Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM).
Refer to: p0651
Refer to: A01590
Note:
The operating hours counter in p0650 can only be reset to 0. In this case, p0651 is automatically set to 0.
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.
The operating hours counter only runs for MDS0 and MDS1 (Motor Data Set).

1-211
Parameter
List of parameters
p0651[0...n]
Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [h]
Max
150000 [h]
Factory setting
0 [h]
Sets the service/maintenance intervals in hours for the appropriate motor.

An appropriate fault is output when the operating hours set here are reached.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0650

Refer to: A01590
Note:
For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled.

The operating hours counter only runs for MDS0 and MDS1 (Motor Data Set).
p0652[0...n]
Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the stator resistance.
Dependency:
p0653[0...n]
Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the stator leakage inductance.
Dependency:
p0655[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency:
1-212

Parameter
List of parameters
p0656[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the magnetizing inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency:
p0657[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency:
p0658[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping inductance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency:
p0659[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping resistance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis).
Dependency:
p0660[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
300.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Factor to evaluate the damping resistance quadrature to the rotor axis (q axis).
Dependency:

1-213
Parameter
List of parameters
p0680[0...5]
Central measuring probe, input terminal / Cen meas inp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the digital input used for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
p0680[0]: Digital input, measuring probe 1
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
No measuring probe
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
Dependency:
Refer to: p0728
Notice:

For CU310, Cx32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 8, 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment
Manual).
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as input (p0728.x = 0).

If a parameter change is rejected, a check should be performed as to whether the input terminal is already being
used in p0488, p0489, p0493, p0495, p0580, p2517, or p2518.
p0681
BI: Central measuring probe, synchronizing signal signal source /

Cen meas sync_sig
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the synchronizing signal (SYN) of the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
The signal is used to synchronize the common system time between the master and slave.
Notice:
The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed.
p0682
CI: Central measuring probe, control word signal source / Cen meas STW S_src
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
1-214
Sets the signal source for the control word of the function "central measuring probe evaluation".

Parameter
List of parameters
p0684
Central measuring probe evaluation technique / Cen meas eval_tech
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the evaluation technique for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
During measurement without a handshake, the probe may have a higher evaluation frequency.
Measurement with handshake

Measurement without handshake
The setting "Measurement without handshake" must be supported by the higher-level control.
r0685
Central measuring probe, control word display / Cen meas STW disp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
11
12
13
Signal name
Falling edge, measuring probe 1
Rising edge, measuring probe 1
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
r0686[0...5]
CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time rising edge / CenMeas t_meas 0/1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the measuring time for a rising edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s.
r0686[0]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 1

1-215
Parameter
List of parameters
r0687[0...5]
CO: Central measuring probe, measuring time falling edge / CenMeas t_meas 1/0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the measuring time for a falling edge at the digital input for the "central measuring probe evaluation" function.
The measuring time is specified as 16-bit value with a resolution of 0.25 s.
r0687[0]: Measuring time, falling edge measuring probe 1
r0688
CO: Central measuring probe, status word display / Cen meas ZSW disp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the function "central measuring probe evaluation".
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
08
09
10
11
12
13
p0700[0...n]
Macro Binector Input (BI) / Macro BI
Signal name
Digital input, measuring probe 1
Sub-sampling, measuring probe 1

0
Description:
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0
FP
-

The binector inputs (BI) of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately interconnected.
Example:
Dependency:
1-216
Refer to: p0015, p1000, p1500, r8571

Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
group!
Note:
software.
BI: Binector input
r0721
CU digital inputs, terminal actual value / CU DI actual value
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual value at the digital inputs.

This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p0795.x = 1) to terminal mode (p0795.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of
r0721.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
Notice:
To the terminal designation:
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310.
Note:
If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p0728.x = 1), then r0721.x = 0 is displayed.

DI: Digital input

1-217
Parameter
List of parameters
r0722.0...21
CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status / CU DI status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Dependency:
Refer to: r0723
Note:
DI: Digital input
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
r0723.0...21
CO/BO: CU digital inputs, status inverted / CU DI status inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
1-218
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
Dependency:
Refer to: r0722
Note:
DI: Digital input
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
p0728
CU, set input or output / CU DI or DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2031, 2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as an input or output.
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Notice:
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
Output
0 signal
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
Input
FP
-
Note:
r0729
CU digital outputs access authority / CU DO access
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the access authority at the digital outputs.

Bit = 1:
The control has access authority to the digital output via PROFIBUS or direct access.
Bit = 0:
The drive has access authority to the digital output or the digital input/output is not set as digital output or is not
available.

1-219
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Dependency:
Refer to: p0728, p0738, p0739, p0740, p0741, p0742, p0743, p0744, p0745, r0747, p0748
Note:
The DI/DO must be connected as output (p0728).
FP
-
p0738
BI: CU, signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / CU S_src DI/DO 8
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2130
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X122.7).
Notice:
Note:
Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.8 = 1).

p0739
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:

p0740
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:

1-220

Parameter
List of parameters
p0741
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2131
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:

p0742
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:

p0743
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2132
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:

p0744
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:


1-221
Parameter
List of parameters
p0745
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Notice:
Note:

r0747
CU, digital outputs status / CU DO status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of digital outputs.
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Inversion using p0748 has been taken into account.
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
p0748
CU, invert digital outputs / CU DO invert
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2130, 2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs.
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Notice:
If telegram 39x is set via p0922 in SINAMICS Integrated, the inversion of the output has no effect.
Note:
1-222
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
p0771[0...2]
CI: Test sockets signal source / TestSktsSigSrce
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the signal to be output at the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Can only be set when p0776 = 99.

Refer to: r0772, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
r0772[0...2]
Test sockets output signal / TestSktsSignalVal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual value of the signal to be output.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0774, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
r0774[0...2]
Test sockets output voltage / TestSkts V_output
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual output voltage for the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0772, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786
p0776[0...2]
Test socket mode / Test skt mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
96
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
Sets the mode for the test sockets.
Value:
96:
97:
98:
99:
Physical address (32-bit integer signal unsigned)

Physical address (32-bit integer signal)
Physical address (32-bit floating-point signal)
BICO signal

1-223
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786, p0788, p0789, r0790
p0777[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value x1 / Test skt char x1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [%]
Max
100000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate
(percentage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:

Refer to: p0778, p0779, p0780, r0786
Note:
The value 0.00 % corresponds to 2.49 V.
p0778[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value y1 / Test skt char y1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [V]
Max
4.98 [V]
Factory setting
2.49 [V]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate
(output voltage) of the first point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:

Refer to: p0777, p0779, p0780, r0786
p0779[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value x2 / Test skt char x2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [%]
Max
427.9E9 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the x coordinate
(percentage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:

Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0780, r0786
Note:
The value 100.00 % corresponds to 4.98 V.
1-224

Parameter
List of parameters
p0780[0...2]
Test socket characteristic value y2 / Test skt char y2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [V]
Max
4.98 [V]
Factory setting
4.98 [V]
Description:
The scaling characteristic for the test sockets is defined using two points. This parameter specifies the y coordinate
(output voltage) of the second point on the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:

Refer to: p0777, p0778, p0779, r0786
p0783[0...2]
Test sockets offset / Test skt offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-4.98 [V]
Max
4.98 [V]
Factory setting
0.00 [V]
Description:
Sets an additional offset for the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
p0784[0...2]
Test socket limit on/off / TestSktLim on/off
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the limit for a signal to be output via test sockets.
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Note:
Limiting on:
Limiting off
Limiting on
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, the signal is limited to 4.98 V or to 0 V.
Limiting off:
If signals are output outside the permissible measuring range, this causes signal overflow. In the case of signal
overflow, the signal jumps from 0 V to 4.98 V or from 4.98 V to 0 V.

1-225
Parameter
List of parameters
r0786[0...2]
Test socket scaling per volt / TestSktScale/Volt
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8134
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the scaling of the signal to be output. A change in the output voltage by 1 volt corresponds to the value in
this parameter. The units are determined by the interconnected test signal.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Refer to: p0771, r0772, r0774, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784
Note:
Example:
r0786[0] = 1500.0 and the measuring signal is r0063 (CO: Actual speed smoothed [rpm]).
A change of 1 V at the output of test socket T0 corresponds to 1500.0 [rpm].
p0788[0...2]
Test sockets physical address / Test skt PhyAddr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address to output signals via the test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.

p0789[0...2]
Test sockets physical address gain / TestSktPhyAddrGain
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-340.28235E36
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
1.00000
Description:
Sets the gain of a signal output of a physical address via test sockets.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99.

Refer to: p0788
1-226

Parameter
List of parameters
r0790[0...2]
Test sockets physical address signal value / TestSktsPhyAddrVal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual value of a signal determined via a physical address.
Index:
[0] = T0
[1] = T1
[2] = T2
Dependency:
Only effective when p0776 = 97 or p0776 = 96.

Refer to: p0788
p0795
CU digital inputs simulation mode / CU DI simulation
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Dependency:
The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p0796.
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 16 (X122.6)
DI 16 (X132.5)
DI 16 (X132.6)
1 signal
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
0 signal
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
FP
-

Notice:
If a digital input is used as signal source for the function "STO" (BI: p9620) then it is not permissible to select the
simulation mode and this is rejected.
Note:
This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977).

DI: Digital input

1-227
Parameter
List of parameters
p0796
CU digital inputs simulation mode setpoint / CU DI simul setp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

2030, 2031, 2100, 2120, 2130,
2131, 2132, 2133
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
Dependency:
The simulation of a digital input is selected using p0795.
Signal name
DI 0 (X122.1)
DI 1 (X122.2)
DI 2 (X122.3)
DI 3 (X122.4)
DI 4 (X132.1)
DI 5 (X132.2)
DI 6 (X132.3)
DI 7 (X132.4)
DI/DO 8 (X122.9)
DI/DO 9 (X122.10)
DI/DO 10 (X122.12)
DI/DO 11 (X122.13)
DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
DI 16 (X122.5)
DI 17 (X122.6)
DI 20 (X132.5)
DI 21 (X132.6)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
Refer to: p0795

Note:
DI: Digital input

p0799[0...2]
CU inputs/outputs, sampling time / CU I/O t_sampl
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

2031
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
5000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs.
Index:
[0] = Digital inputs/outputs (DI/DO)

[1] = Not available - analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Not available - analog outputs (AO)
Dependency:
The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29.

Refer to: p0009
Note:
The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
1-228

Parameter
List of parameters
p0806
BI: Inhibit master control / PcCtrl inhibit

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to block the master control.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0807
Note:
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Advanced Operator
Panel (AOP, LOCAL mode).
r0807.0
BO: Master control active / PcCtrl active

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays what has the master control.

The drive can be controlled via the BICO interconnection or from external (e.g. the commissioning software).
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Master control active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
5030,
6031
Dependency:
Refer to: p0806
Notice:
The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device.
Note:
Bit 0 = 0: BICO interconnection active

Bit 0 = 1: Master control for PC/AOP
The master control is used from the commissioning software (drive control panel) and from the Advanced Operator
Panel (AOP, LOCAL mode).
p0809[0...2]
Copy Command Data Set CDS / Copy CDS

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Description:
Copies one Command Data Set (CDS) into another.
Index:
[0] = Source Command Data Set

[1] = Target Command Data Set
Note:
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which command data set should be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into.

1-229
Parameter
List of parameters
p0810
BI: Command Data Set selection CDS bit 0 / CDS select., bit 0

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 0 (CDS bit 0).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0050, p0811, r0836
Notice:
Note:
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0811
BI: Command data set selection CDS bit 1 / CDS select., bit 1

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Command Data Set bit 1 (CDS bit 1).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0050, p0810, r0836
Note:
The Command Data Set selected using the binector inputs is displayed in r0836.
A Command Data Set can be copied using p0809.
p0819[0...2]
Copy Drive Data Set DDS / Copy DDS

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
0
Description:
Copies one Drive Data Set (DDS) into another.
Index:
[0] = Source Drive Data Set

[1] = Target Drive Data Set
Note:
Procedure:
1. In Index 0, enter which drive data set is to be copied.
2. In Index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into.
1-230

Parameter
List of parameters
p0820[0...n]
BI: Drive Data Set selection DDS bit 0 / DDS select., bit 0

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 0 (DDS, bit 0).
Dependency:
Notice:
p0821[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Notice:
p0822[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Notice:
p0823[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8565
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Notice:

1-231
Parameter
List of parameters
p0824[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Notice:
p0826[0...n]
Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the freely-assignable motor number for the motor changeover.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0827
Caution:
When changing over motor data sets with the same motor number (e.g. star-delta changeover) and for a motor with
brake, the motor brake remains open during the changeover.
Note:
When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies:
The same motor number signifies the same thermal model.
For the same motor number, the correction values of the Rs, Lh or kT adaptation are applied for the data set
changeover (refer to r1782, r1787, r1797).
p0827[0...n]
Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo.

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
0
Sets the bit number for every motor data set.

Example:
p0827[0] = 0: For MDS0, r0830.0 is switched.
p0827[1] = 5: For MDS1, r0830.5 is switched.
Dependency:
Note:
A motor is only changed over (a new motor selected) after the pulses have been suppressed.
When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies:
Bit numbers that are not identical, signify that the motor must be changed over.
1-232

Parameter
List of parameters
p0828[0...n]
BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal when changing over the motor.
For p0833.0 = 1 the following applies:
This feedback signal (0/1 edge) is required after a motor changeover to enable the pulses.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0833
Notice:
r0830.0...15
CO/BO: Motor changeover, status word / Mot_chngov ZSW

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status word of the motor changeover.

These signals can be connected to digital outputs to change over the motor.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Motor selection, bit 0
Dependency:
Refer to: p0827
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High

0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
1-233
Parameter
List of parameters
p0831[0...15]
BI: Motor changeover, contactor feedback / Mot_chg cont fdbk

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the contactors when changing over motors.
There is a fixed inter-relationship between energizing the contactor and the feedback signal.
Example:
A changeover is to be made between MDS0 (motor 0) and MDS1 (motor 1). The contactors should be switched
using bit 4 (contactor 0) and 5 (contactor 1). The changeover should be made with an interconnection of the feedback signal.
Implementation:
MDS0: p0827[0] = 4, interconnect output to switch contactor 0 to r0830.4, p0831[4] = "input, feedback signal, contactor 0"
MDS1: p0827[1] = 5, interconnect output to switch contactor 1 to r0830.5, p0831[5] = "input, feedback signal, contactor 1"
The following sequence applies when changing over from MDS0 to MDS1:
1. The status bit r0830.4 is deleted. When the feedback signal (p0831[4]) is connected, the system waits until the
feedback signal "contactor open" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the
switch-off interlocking time of 320 ms.
2. The status bit r0830.5 is set. If the feedback signal (p0831[5]) is connected, the system waits until the feedback
signal "contactor closed" is displayed. If the feedback signal is not connected, then the system waits for the switchon interlocking time of 160 ms.
Index:
[0] = Feedback signal contactor 0

1-234

Parameter
List of parameters
r0832.0...15
CO/BO: Mot. changeover, contactor feedback sig. status word / Mot_chng fdbk ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the contactor feedback signals when changing over a motor.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: p0831
p0833
Data set changeover configuration / DS_chng config
Signal name
Feedback signal contactor 0

0
1 signal
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
FP
-
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
P-Group: Data sets
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0010 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the motor and encoder changeover.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Note:
0 signal
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Opened
Signal name
Contactor changeover from the application/drive
Pulse suppression by application/drive
Suppress drive parking for EDS changeover
1 signal
application
0 signal
Drive
FP
-
application
Yes
Drive
No
Re bit 00:
When the bit is set and the motor has to be changed over, then p0827 must be set differently in the appropriate
motor data sets.
Re bit 02:
The bit defines whether, for an EDS changeover, the status signal Gn_ZSW.14 is suppressed (parking encoder
active).
Re motor changeover to running motor:
The "flying restart" function should also be activated (p1200) when changing over to a motor that is already running.

1-235
Parameter
List of parameters
r0835.2
ENCODER
CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Bit field:
Bit
02
Note:
Re bit 02:
Signal name
Internal parameter calculation active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
r0835.0...11
CO/BO: Data set changeover status word / DDS_ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8575
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the drive data set changeover.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
10
11
Note:
This parameter is only supplied with up-to-date values if data set changeover has been selected or is running.
Signal name
Motor changeover active
Encoder changeover active
Internal parameter calculation active
Armature short circuit active
Identification running
Friction characteristic record running
Rotating measurement running
Motor data identification running
Wait for pulse suppression
Wait for motor changeover feedback signal
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
8575
-
Re bit 00:
The signal is only influenced when a motor changeover is set via p0827 (unequal bit numbers).
Re bit 01:
The signal is only influenced when an encoder changeover is set via p0187, p0188, or p0189.
Re bit 02:
A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation.
Re bit 04:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated.
Re bit 05:
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification, encoder adjustment, motor data identification, and rotating measurement are not running.
A data set changeover is only carried out when pole position identification is not running.
Re bit 06:
A data set changeover is only carried out when the friction characteristic record is not running.
Re bit 07 (VECTOR only):
A data set changeover is only carried out when rotating measurement is not running.
Re bit 08 (VECTOR only):
A data set changeover is only carried out when motor data identification is not running.
1-236

Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 10:
A motor changeover is set with p0833.1 = 1. It can only be carried out when the application performs pulse suppression.
Re bit 11:
A motor changeover is set with p0833.0 = 1. The pulses are only enabled when the "Motor changeover feedback"
signal is detected.
r0836.0...3
CO/BO: Command Data Set CDS selected / CDS selected

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the command data set (CDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811
Note:
Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following.
Signal name
CDS select. bit 0
CDS select. bit 1
CDS select. bit 2
CDS select. bit 3
1 signal
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
r0837.0...4
CO/BO: Drive Data Set DDS selected / DDS selected
ENCODER,
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the drive data set (DDS) selected via the binector input.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
Dependency:
Refer to: r0051, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824
Note:
Drive data sets are selected via binector input p0820 and following.
Signal name
DDS select. bit 0
DDS select. bit 1
DDS select. bit 2
DDS select. bit 3
DDS select. bit 4
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
The currently effective drive data set is displayed in r0051.

If there is only one data set, then a value of 0 is displayed in this parameter and not the selection via binector inputs.

1-237
Parameter
List of parameters
r0838[0...3]
Motor/Encoder Data Set selected / MDS/EDS selected

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8565
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the selected Motor Data Set (MDS) and the selected Encoder Data Sets (EDS).
Index:
[0] = Motor Data Set MDS selected

[1] = Encoder 1 Encoder Data Set EDS selected
Dependency:
Refer to: r0049, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Note:
Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured).
p0839
Motor changeover contactor control delay time / Mot_chg ctrl t_del

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
500 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Sets the delay time for the contactor control for the motor changeover.
The delay time is taken into account in the following cases:
- for feedback signal, previous contactor "Open". The new motor contactor is controlled (energized) after the delay
time has expired.
- for the feedback signal, new motor contactor "Closed". The pulses are enabled after the delay time has expired.
p0840[0...n]
BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

8720, 8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 0 (ON/OFF1).
Recommend.:
When the setting for this binector input is changed, the motor can only be switched on by means of an appropriate
signal change of the source.
Dependency:
Notice:
For BI: p0840 = 0 signal, the motor can be moved, jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056.
Only the signal source that originally powered up can also power down again.
Note:
For drives with closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (braking with the ramp-function generator, then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
For drives with closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 22, 23), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: Immediate pulse suppression
For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: No dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227)
For drives with closed-loop speed/torque control, the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pulses can be enabled)
1-238

Parameter
List of parameters
For active infeeds (Active Line Module and Smart Line Module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (reduce Vdc along the ramp, then pulse suppression and pre-charging contactor/line contactor
open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed, pulses can be enabled)
For passive infeeds (Basic Line Module) the following applies:
Bit 0 = 0: OFF1 (pre-charging contactor/line contactor open)
Bit 0 = 0/1: ON (pre-charging contactor/line contactor closed)
r0863.1 of a drive can also be selected as signal source.
p0844[0...n]
BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF2.
Caution:
When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is ineffective.
Notice:
Note:
For drives, the following applies:
The AND logic operation of the 1st OC/OFF2 and 2nd OC/OFF2 results in control word 1, bit 1 (OC/OFF2).
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)

Bit 1 = 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
For infeed units, the following applies:
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression for Active Infeed Modules and Smart Line Modules, pre-charging
contactor/line contactor open and switching on inhibited)
p0845[0...n]
BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF2.

Note:
For drives, the following applies:

Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
Bit 1 = 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse suppression for Active Infeed Modules and Smart Line Modules, pre-charging
contactor/line contactor open and switching on inhibited)

1-239
Parameter
List of parameters
p0848[0...n]
BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the 1st OC/OFF3.

Caution:
Notice:
Note:
Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
p0849[0...n]
BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the 2nd OC/OFF3.

Note:
Bit 2 = 0: OFF3 (braking along the OFF3 ramp (p1135), then pulse suppression and switching on inhibited)
p0852[0...n]
BI: Operation enable / Operation enable

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 3 (enable operation)
Caution:
Notice:
Note:
Bit 3 = 0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)

Bit 3 = 1: Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)
1-240

Parameter
List of parameters
p0854
BI: Master ctrl by PLC / Master ctrl by PLC
ENCODER
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (master control by PLC).
Notice:
Note:
Bit 10 = 0: No master control by PLC

Bit 10 = 1: Master control by PLC
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then BI: p0854 should be set to a 1 signal.
If a control is available, control word 1 bit 10 = 1 (STW1.10, PZD1) must be set so that the received data is updated.
This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0854[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

8820, 8920
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 10 (master control by PLC).
Notice:
Note:
Bit 10 = 0: No master control by PLC

Bit 10 = 1: Master control by PLC
This bit is used to initiate a response for the drives when the control fails (F07220). If there is no control available,
then BI: p0854 should be set to a 1 signal.
If a control is available, control word 1 bit 10 = 1 (STW1.10, PZD1) must be set so that the received data is updated.
This applies regardless of the setting in p0854 and even in the case of free telegram configuration (p0922 = 999).
p0855[0...n]
BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

2707
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally open holding brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p0858
Notice:
Note:
The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake).

1-241
Parameter
List of parameters
p0856[0...n]
BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

2707
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the command "enable speed controller" (r0898.12).
0 signal: Set the I component and speed controller output to zero.
1 signal: Enable speed controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0898
Note:
If "enable speed controller" is withdrawn, then an existing brake will be closed.

If "speed controller enable" is withdrawn, the pulses are not suppressed.
p0857
Power unit monitoring time / PU t_monit

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8964
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
100.0 [ms]
Max
60000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
6000.0 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time for the power unit.

The following applies for infeeds and drives:
The monitoring time is started after an 0/1 edge of the ON/OFF1 command. If the power unit does not return a
READY signal within the monitoring time, then fault F06000 (infeeds) or F07802 (drives) is output.
For drives, the following also applies:
After the pulse enable (operation enabled, p0852), the monitoring time is re-started. If the infeed does not signal
ready to the drive within the monitoring time (using BI: p0864 of the drive), fault F07840 is initiated.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07802, F07840, F30027
Notice:
The maximum time to pre-charge the DC link is monitored in the power unit and cannot be changed. The maximum
duration of the pre-charging depends on the power class and the power unit design.
The monitoring time for the pre-charging is started after the ON command (BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal). Fault F30027 is
output when the maximum pre-charging duration is exceeded.
Note:
The factory setting for p0857 depends on the power class and the design of the power unit.
The monitoring time for the ready signal of the power unit includes the time to pre-charge the DC link and, if relevant, the de-bounce time of the contactors.
If an excessively low value is entered into p0857, then after enable, this results in the corresponding fault.
p0858[0...n]
BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS

2707
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command "unconditionally close holding brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p0855
1-242

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The signal via BI: p0858 (unconditionally close holding brake) has a higher priority than via BI: p0855 (unconditionally open holding brake).
For a 1 signal via BI: p0858, the command "unconditionally close the holding brake" is executed and internally a
zero setpoint is entered.
p0860
BI: Line cont. fdbk sig / Line contact feedb

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

8834, 8934
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
863.1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal from the line contactor.
Recommend.:
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), then to control the line contactor, signal BO:
r0863.1 of its own drive object should be used.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07300
Notice:
The line contactor monitoring is deactivated if the control signal of the particular drive object is set as the signal
source for the feedback signal of the line contactor (BI: p0860 = r0863.1).
Note:
The state of the line contactor is monitored depending on signal BO: r0863.1.
When the monitoring is activated (BI: p0860 not equal to r0863.1), fault F07300 is then also output if the contactor
is closed before it is controlled using r0863.1.
p0861
Line contactor monitoring time / LineContact t_mon

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8834, 8934
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
5000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor.

This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the
line contactor within the time, a message is output.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07300
Note:
The monitoring function is disabled for the factory setting of p0860.
p0862
Power unit ON delay / PU t_on

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

8832, 8932
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the control command of the power unit and a line contactor, if used.
Note:
This means that it is possible to realize a shifted (delayed) pre-charging or power-on using a single ON command.
When the infeed units are active, before the line contactor is closed, an offset adjustment of the current measurement is carried out for a duration of 120 ms (p3491).

1-243
Parameter
List of parameters
r0863.0...2
CO/BO: Drive coupling status word/control word / CoupleZSW/STW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status and control words of the drive coupling.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Closed-loop control operation
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Energize contactor
Yes
No
02
Infeed line supply failure
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p0864
Note:
Re bit 00:
FP
2610,
6495,
8732,
8832,
8932,
9794
2610,
2634,
8732,
8734,
8832,
8834,
8932,
8934
-
Bit 0 signals that the infeed is ready.

When the operating signal is transferred via BO: r0863.0 this allows several drives to start (run-up) staggered over
time when they are simultaneously powered up.
To realize this, the following connections/interconnections are required:
Drive 1: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of the infeed
Drive 2: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 1
Drive 3: Internconnect BI: p0864 with BO: r0863.0 of drive 2, etc.
The first drive only transfers the operating signal to the next drive after it has reached its ready condition.
Re bit 01:
Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor.
Re bit 02:
This bit only signals line supply failure for Active Infeed (A_INF) and Smart Infeed (S_INF).
p0864
BI: Infeed operation / INF operation

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

2610
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the operating signal of the infeed (e.g. BO: r0863.0).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0863
Note:
The sequence control of a servo/vector drive requires this signal.

The following applies for an infeed without DRIVE-CLiQ:
For these infeeds, the "ready" message is available via an output terminal. This signal must be connected to a digital input. The drives supplied from this infeed must use this signal as ready signal (BI: p0864 = digital input).
1-244

Parameter
List of parameters
p0868
Power unit DC switch debounce time / PU DC sw t_deboun

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65000 [ms]
Factory setting
65000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the debounce time for the DC circuit breaker for Motor Modules in "chassis" format.
Note:
The following applies if p0868 = 65000 ms:

The debounce time defined internally in the power unit's EEPROM is implemented.
p0895[0...n]
BI: Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate a power unit component.
Dependency:
BI: p0895 = 0 signal

Deactivating power unit components
Activating power unit components
Refer to: A05054
Caution:
Note:
The power unit is only deactivated when the pulses are suppressed.
For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn.
r0896.0
BO: Parking axis, status word / Parking axis, ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the "parking axis" function.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Refer to: p0897
Signal name
Parking axis active
1 signal
Yes

0 signal
No
FP
-
1-245
Parameter
List of parameters
p0897
BI: Parking axis selection / Parking axis sel

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the "parking axis" function.
Dependency:

The function "parking axis" is not selected.
The function "parking axis" is selected.
Refer to: r0896
Notice:
Note:
After it has been selected the "parking axis" function only becomes active when the pulses are suppressed.
r0898.0...15
CO/BO: Control word drive object 1 / STW DO1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word of drive object 1 (Control Unit).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
07
12
13
14
15
r0898.10
CO/BO: Control word sequence control encoder DO / STW seq_ctrl encDO
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Signal name
Synchronization signal SYN
Real time synchronization PING
Acknowledge fault
Master sign-of-life bit 0
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Description:
Displays the control word for sequence control on the encoder drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
10
1-246
Signal name
Master ctrl by PLC
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
0 signal
No
FP
-
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r0898.0...14
CO/BO: Control word sequence control / STW seq_ctrl

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word of the sequence control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
12
14
Note:
r0899.0...15
CO/BO: Status word drive object 1 / ZSW DO1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Signal name
ON/OFF1
OC / OFF2
OC / OFF3
Operation enable
Ramp-function generator enable
Continue ramp-function generator
Speed setpoint enable
Command open brake
Jog 1
Jog 2
Master ctrl by PLC
Speed controller enable
Command close brake
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Description:
Displays the status word from drive object 1 (Control Unit).
Bit field:
Bit
00
03
07
08
12
13
14
15
r0899.9
CO/BO: Status word sequence control encoder DO / ZSW seq_ctrl encDO
ENCODER
Signal name
reserved
Fault present
Alarm present
System time synchronized
Slave sign-of-life bit 0
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
FP
-
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for sequence control on the encoder drive object.
Bit field:
Bit
09
Note:
For PROFIdrive, this signal is used for status word ZSW2_ENC.
Signal name
Control request
1 signal
Yes

0 signal
No
FP
-
1-247
Parameter
List of parameters
r0899.0...15
CO/BO: Status word sequence control / ZSW seq_ctrl

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the sequence control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Re bits 00, 01, 02, 04, 05, 06, 09:
Signal name
Ready for sw on
Ready
Operation enabled
Jog active
No coasting active
No Quick Stop active
Switching on inhibited active
Drive ready
Controller enable
Control request
Pulses enabled
Holding brake open
Command close holding brake
Pulse enable from the brake control
Setpoint enable from the brake control
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
OFF2 inactive
OFF3 inactive
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
OFF2 active
OFF3 active
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
For PROFIdrive, these signals are used for status word 1.

Re bit 13:
When the "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled using this signal.
Re bit 14, 15:
These signals are only of significance when the "extended brake control" function module is activated (r0108.14 =
1).
p0918
PROFIBUS address / PB address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
126
Factory setting
126
Description:
Displays or sets the PROFIBUS address for PROFIBUS interface on the Control Unit.
The address can be set as follows:
1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit.
--> p0918 can then only be read and displays the selected address.
--> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
2) Using p0918
--> Only if the address 00 hex, 7F hex, 80 hex, or FF hex has been set using the address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
Note:
Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126 (01 hex ... 7E hex)

Address 126 is used for commissioning.
Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
1-248

Parameter
List of parameters
p0922
PROFIdrive telegram selection / PD Telegr_sel
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2423, 2481, 2483
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
390
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Sets the send and receive telegram.
Value:
390:
391:
392:
999:
p0922
ENCODER
SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2

Free telegram configuration with BICO
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
81
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Value:
81:
82:
83:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2038

Refer to: F01505, F01506

Note:
If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited.
The inhibited interconnections can only be changed again after setting value 999.
p0922

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Value:
1:
2:
20:
220:
352:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Caution:
Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is
necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the
ramp-function generator (p1155).
Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2


1-249
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
p0922

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

2422, 2423, 2468, 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
20:
220:
352:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: F01505, F01506
Caution:
Telegrams 2, 3 and 4 are not suitable for sensorless vector control (p1300 = 20). For sensorless vector control, it is
necessary that the setpoint speed is entered at the ramp-function generator input (e.g. p1070) and not after the
ramp-function generator (p1155).
Note:

r0924[0...1]
ZSW bit pulses enabled / ZSW pulses enab

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Display of the position of the "Pulses enabled" status word bit in the PROFIdrive telegram
Index:
[0] = Signal number

[1] = Bit position
p0925
PROFIdrive clock synchronous sign-of-life tolerance / PD SoL_tol
ENCODER,
0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of tolerated consecutive sign-of-life errors of the clock-cycle synchronous master.
Dependency:
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the master.
Refer to: F01912
Note:
The sign-of-life monitoring is disabled for p0925 = 65535.
1-250

Parameter
List of parameters
r0930
PROFIdrive operating mode / PD operating mode

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the operating mode.

1: Closed-loop speed controlled operation with ramp-function generator
2: Closed-loop position controlled operation
3: Closed-loop speed controlled operation without ramp-function generator
r0944
CO: Counter for fault buffer changes / Fault buff change
All objects
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays fault buffer changes. This counter is incremented every time the fault buffer changes.
Recommend.:
Used to check whether the fault buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109
r0945[0...63]
Fault code / Fault code
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the numbers of faults that have occurred.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3120, r3122
Note:
The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139).
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0], r3115[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7], r3115[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8], r0948[8], r2109[8], r3115[8] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15], r0948[15], r2109[15], r3115[15] --> 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56], r0948[56], r2109[56], r3115[56] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63], r0948[63], r2109[63], r3115[63] --> 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8

1-251
Parameter
List of parameters
r0946[0...65534] Fault code list / Fault code list

All objects
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Lists the fault codes stored in the drive unit.

The indices can only be accessed with a valid fault code.
Dependency:
The parameter assigned to the fault code is entered in r0951 under the same index.
r0947[0...63]
Fault number / Fault number
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
This parameter is identical to r0945.
r0948[0...63]
Fault time received in milliseconds / t_fault recv ms
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault occurred.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0949, r2109, r2114, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Notice:
The time comprises r2130 (days) and r0948 (milliseconds).
Note:
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
r0949[0...63]
All objects
Fault value / Fault value

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency:
Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122
Note:
1-252

Parameter
List of parameters
p0952
Fault cases, counter / Fault cases qty
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Number of fault situations that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency:
The fault buffer is deleted (cleared) by setting p0952 to 0.

Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r0949, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136
r0963
PROFIBUS baud rate / PB baud rate
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the corresponding value for the PROFIBUS baud rate.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
255:
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
93.75 kbit/s
187.5 kbit/s
500 kbit/s
1.5 Mbit/s
3 Mbit/s
6 Mbit/s
12 Mbit/s
31.25 kbit/s
45.45 kbit/s
Baud rate unknown
r0964[0...6]
Device identification / Device ident.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the device identification.
Index:
[0] = Company (Siemens = 42)

[1] = Device type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = Number of drive objects
[6] = Firmware patch/hot fix

1-253
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Example:
r0964[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0964[1] = 5000 --> SINAMICS S CU320
r0964[1] = 5200 --> SINAMICS G CU320
r0964[2] = 102 --> first part of the firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 6)
r0964[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0964[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0964[5] = 4 --> 4 drive objects
r0964[6] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)
r0965
PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PROFIdrive profile number and profile version.

Constant value = 0329 hex.
Byte 1: Profile number = 03 hex = PROFIdrive profile
Byte 2: Profile version = 29 hex = Version 4.1
Note:
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the Octet String 2 data type applies.
p0969
System runtime relative / t_System relative
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
4294967295 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in ms since the last POWER ON.
Note:
The value in p0969 can only be reset to 0.

The value overflows after approx. 49 days.
When the parameter is read via PROFIdrive, the TimeDifference data type applies.
p0970
ENCODER reset parameters / ENC par reset
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Factory settings
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
Description:
The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters on the ENCODER drive object.
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Notice:
Note:
A factory setting run can only be started if p0010 was first set to 30 (parameter reset).
Parameter p0141 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976).
Inactive
Start a parameter reset
Start a BICO interconnection reset
At the end of the calculations, p0970 is automatically set to 0. Parameter reset has been completed if p0970 and
p0010 have been set to 0.
1-254

Parameter
List of parameters
p0970
TB30 reset parameters / TB30 par reset
TB30
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Inactive
Notice:
Note:
p0970
TM31 reset parameters / TM31 par reset
TM31
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
The sampling time p4099 is not reset if in so doing a conflict occurs with the basic clock cycle.
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Inactive
Dependency:
Refer to: p0010
Notice:
Note:
p0970
TM54F reset parameters / TM54F par reset
TM54F_MA
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
Description:
The parameter is used to initiate a reset of the parameters on Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value:
0:
1:
100:
Notice:
Inactive

1-255
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
p0970
Reset drive parameters / Drive par reset

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100
Factory setting
0
The parameter is used to initiate the reset of the parameters of an individual drive unit.
Parameters p0100, p0205 (only for VECTOR) and the parameters of the basic drive commissioning (p0009) are not
reset (p0107, p0108, p0111, p0112, p0115, p0121, p0130, p0131, p0140, p0141, p0142, p0170, p0186 ... p0189).
These can only be reset using the factory setting of the complete drive unit (p0976).
Value:
0:
1:
5:
100:
Inactive
Starts a safety parameter reset
Dependency:
Refer to: F01659
Notice:
Note:
If a Safety Integrated function is parameterized (p9601), the safety parameters will not be reset if p0970 = 1. In this
case, an error message (F1659) is output with fault value 2.
p0971
Save drive object parameters / Drv_obj par save
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to save the parameter of the particular drive object in the non-volatile memory.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0977, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution:
The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice:
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
Inactive
Save drive object
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.

Note:
Starting from the particular drive object, the following parameters are saved:
CU3xx: Device-specific parameters and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Other objects: Parameters of the actual object and PROFIBUS device parameters.
Prerequisite:
In order that the parameter of a drive object, saved with p0971 = 1, is read the next time that the Control Unit is
booted, then all parameters must, as a minimum, have first been saved once with p0977 = 1.
1-256

Parameter
List of parameters
p0972
Drive unit reset / Drv_unit reset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Danger:
It must be absolutely ensured that the system is in a safe condition.
Inactive
Hardware-Reset immediate
Hardware reset preparation
Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed
The memory card of the Control Unit must not be accessed.

Notice:
For SIMOTION or SINUMERIK with integrated SINAMICS, the hardware reset acts on the complete system and
depends on the state of the control.
Note:
Re value = 1:
Reset is immediately executed and communications interrupted.
After communications have been established, check the reset operation (refer below).
Re value = 2:
Help to check the reset operation.
Firstly, set p0972 = 2 and then read back. Secondly, set p0972 = 1 (it is possible that this request is possibly no longer acknowledged). The communication is then interrupted.
Re value = 3:
The reset is executed after interrupting cyclic communication. This setting is used to implement a synchronized
reset by a control for several drive units.
If the cyclic communication is active for both PROFIdrive interfaces, then the reset is executed after completing
both cycle communications.
To check the reset operation:
After the drive unit has been restarted and communications have been established, read p0972 and check the following:
p0972 = 0? --> The reset was successfully executed.
p0972 > 0? --> The reset was not executed.

1-257
Parameter
List of parameters
r0975[0...10]
All objects
Drive object identification / DO identification

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the identification of the drive object.
Index:
[0] = Company (Siemens = 42)

[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Firmware version
[3] = Firmware date (year)
[4] = Firmware date (day/month)
[5] = PROFIdrive drive object, type class
[6] = PROFIdrive drive object, sub-type Class 1
[7] = Drive object number
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Firmware patch/hot fix
Note:
Example:
r0975[0] = 42 --> SIEMENS
r0975[1] = 11 --> SERVO drive object type
r0975[2] = 102 --> first part, firmware version V01.02 (second part, refer to index 10)
r0975[3] = 2003 --> year 2003
r0975[4] = 1401 --> 14th of January
r0975[5] = 1 --> PROFIdrive drive object, type class
r0975[6] = 9 --> PROFIdrive drive object sub-type class 1
r0975[7] = 2 --> drive object number = 2
r0975[8] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[9] = 0 (reserved)
r0975[10] = 600 --> second part, firmware version (complete version: V01.02.06.00)
p0976
Reset and load all parameters / Reset load all par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1013
Factory setting
0
Description:
Resets or downloads all parameters of the drive system.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
10:
11:
12:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
100:
1-258
Inactive
Start reset of all parameters to factory setting
Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=1
Start dnload of volatile parameters from RAM
Start download of Siemens internal setting 20
Start download Siemens internal setting 23
Start resetting of all BICO interconnections

Parameter
List of parameters
1011: Start dnload of param. saved in volatile mem w/ p0977=1011

Notice:
Note:
After all of the parameters have been reset to their factory setting, the system must be commissioned for the first
time again.
Resetting or loading is realized in the non-volatile memory.
Procedure:
1. Set p0009 = 30 (parameter reset).
2. Set p0976 to "required value". The system is rebooted.
p0976 is automatically set to 0 and p0009 is automatically set to 1 after this has been carried out.
p0977
Save all parameters / Save all par
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1013
Factory setting
0
Description:
Saves all parameters of the drive system to the non-volatile memory.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
11:
12:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
1011:
1012:
1013:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0976, p1960, p3845, r3996
Caution:
The Control Unit power supply may only be powered down after data has been saved (i.e. after data save has been
started, wait until the parameter again has the value 0).
Notice:
Writing to parameters is inhibited while saving.
Inactive
Save in non-volatile memory - downloaded at POWER ON
Save as opt. in non-vol. memory - downloaded w/ p0976=10
Save in non-volatile memory as setting 20 (reserved)
Save in volatile memory, downloaded with p0976=1011
The progress while saving is displayed in r3996.

Note:
Parameters saved with p0977 = 10, 11 or 12 can be downloaded again with p0976 = 10, 11 or 12.

1-259
Parameter
List of parameters
p0978[0...24]
List of drive objects / List of the DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
[0] 1
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
[24] 0
Description:
This parameter is an image of p0101 in conformance with PROFIdrive.

Parameters p0101 and p0978 contain the following information:
1) The same number of drive objects
2) The same drive objects
In this sense, they are consistent.
Difference between p0101 and p0978:
p0978 can be re-sorted and a zero inserted in order to identify those drive objects that participate in the process
data exchange and to define their sequence in the process data exchange. Drive objects that are listed after the
first zero, are excluded from the process data exchange.
For p0978, in addition, the value 255 can be inserted a multiple number of times.
p0978[n] = 255 means: The drive object is visible for the PROFIBUS master and is empty (without any actual process data exchange). This allows cyclic communications of a PROFIBUS master with unchanged configuring to the
drive units with a lower number of drive objects.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0101, p0971, p0977
Note:
p0978 cannot be changed when the drive system is first commissioned. The reason for this is that at this time the
actual topology has still not been acknowledged (p0099 is still not equal to r0098 and p0009 is set to 0).
1-260

Parameter
List of parameters
r0979[0...10]
PROFIdrive encoder format / PD encoder format
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual position encoder used according to PROFIdrive.
Index:
[0] = Header
[1] = Type, encoder 1
[2] = Resolution enc 1
[3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1
[5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note:
Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature:
PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology
r0979[0...10]
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Header
[5] = Distinguishable distance encoder 1
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
Note:

1-261
Parameter
List of parameters
r0979[0...30]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = Header
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[9] = Reserved
[10] = Reserved
[16] = Reserved
[17] = Reserved
[18] = Reserved
[19] = Reserved
[20] = Reserved
[26] = Reserved
[27] = Reserved
[28] = Reserved
[29] = Reserved
[30] = Reserved
Note:
r0980[0...299]
All objects
List of existing parameters 1 / List avail par 1

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameters that exist for this drive.
Dependency:
1-262

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The existing parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 298. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
This list consists solely of the following parameters:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be
read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master).
r0981[0...299]
All objects

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
In a long list, index 299 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
r0989[0...299]
All objects

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
r0980[0...299], r0981[0...299] ... r0989[0...299]
r0990[0...99]
All objects
List of modified parameters 1 / List chang. par 1

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays those parameters with a value other than the factory setting for this drive.
Dependency:
Note:
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]

1-263
Parameter
List of parameters
r0991[0...99]
All objects

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here. In a
long list, index 99 contains the parameter number at which position the list continues.
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
r0999[0...99]
All objects

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Note:
Modified parameters are displayed in indices 0 to 98. If an index contains the value 0, then the list ends here.
r0990[0...99], r0991[0...99] ... r0999[0...99]
p1000[0...n]
Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints / Macro CI n_set

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0

The Connector Inputs (CI) for the speed setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
Example:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1500, r8572
Notice:
group!
Note:
software.
CI: Connector Input
1-264

Parameter
List of parameters
p1001[0...n]
CO: Fixed speed setpoint 1 / n_set_fixed 1

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set.
p1002[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1003[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1004[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:

1-265
Parameter
List of parameters
p1005[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1006[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1007[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1008[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
1-266

Parameter
List of parameters
p1009[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1010[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1011[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1012[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:

1-267
Parameter
List of parameters
p1013[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1014[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1015[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197
Notice:
p1020[0...n]
BI: Fixed speed setpoint selection Bit 0 / n_set_fixed Bit 0

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for selecting the fixed speed setpoint.
Dependency:
Selects the required fixed speed setpoint using p1020 ... p1023.
Displays the number of the actual fixed speed setpoint in r1197.
Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015.
Refer to: p1021, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note:
If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0).
1-268

Parameter
List of parameters
p1021[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1022, p1023, r1197
Note:
p1022[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197
Note:
p1023[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, r1197
Note:

1-269
Parameter
List of parameters
r1024
CO: Fixed speed setpoint effective / n_set_fixed eff

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the selected and effective fixed speed setpoint.

This setpoint is the output value for the fixed speed setpoints and must be appropriately interconnected (e.g. with
the main setpoint).
Recommend.:
Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency:
Note:
p1030[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0110 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Notice:
Signal name
Data save active
Automatic mode, ramp-function generator
active
Initial rounding-off active
Save in NVRAM active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint (Bit 03 = 1) in a non-volatile
fashion:
- Firmware with V2.3 or higher.
Note:
Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON set to the saved value. In order to
save in a non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 01:
0: Without ramp-function generator in the automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
1: With ramp-function generator in the automatic mode.
For manual operation (0 signal via BI: p1041), the ramp-function generator is always active.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off. The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is
a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed).
The jerk for the initial rounding-off is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum
speed (p1082). It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.01 % * p1082 [1/s] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk acts up until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p1082 [1/s] / p1047 [s]), and then the drive
continues to run linearly with a constant rate of acceleration. The higher the maximum acceleration (the lower that
p1047 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
1-270

Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for bit 00 = 1).
p1035[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer
Dependency:
Refer to: p1036
Notice:
p1036[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1035
Notice:
p1037[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / Mop n_max

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note:
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.

The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.
p1038[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / Mop n_min

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the minimum speed/velocity for the motorized potentiometer.
Note:
This parameter is automatically pre-assigned in the commissioning phase.

The setpoint output from the motorized potentiometer is limited to this value.

1-271
Parameter
List of parameters
p1039[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / Mop inversion

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to invert the minimum speed/velocity or the maximum speed/velocity for the motorized
potentiometer.
Dependency:
Note:
The inversion is only active during "motorized potentiometer raise" or "motorized potentiometer lower".
p1040[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has
been powered up.
Dependency:
Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.

Refer to: p1030
p1041[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to change over from manual to automatic when using a motorized potentiometer.
In the manual mode, the setpoint is changed using two signals - raise and lower. In the automatic mode, the setpoint must be interconnected via a connector input.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1030, p1035, p1036, p1042
Note:
The effectiveness of the internal ramp-function generator can be set in automatic mode.
p1042[0...n]
CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the setpoint of the motorized potentiometer in the automatic mode.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1041
1-272

Parameter
List of parameters
p1043[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setpoint / Mop accept set val

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to accept the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1044
Note:
The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
p1044[0...n]
CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1043
Note:
The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043).
r1045
CO: Mot. potentiometer speed setp. in front of ramp-fct. gen. / Mop n_set bef RFG

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
p1047[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
1000.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from zero up to the speed/velocity limit (p1082) within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1030, p1048, p1082
Note:
When the initial rounding-off is activated (p1030.2) the ramp-up time is correspondingly extended.

1-273
Parameter
List of parameters
p1048[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3020
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
1000.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer.
The setpoint is changed from the speed/velocity limit (p1082) to zero within this time (if no initial rounding-off has
been activated).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1030, p1047, p1082
Note:
The deceleration time is extended corresponding to the activated initial rounding-off (p1030.2).
r1050
CO: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator /

Mop setp after RFG

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Sets the effective setpoint after the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator.
This setpoint is the output value of the motorized potentiometer and must be appropriately interconnected onwards
(e.g. with the main setpoint).
Recommend.:
Interconnect the signal with main setpoint (p1070).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1070
Note:
For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation,
cancel pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0).
p1051[0...n]
CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1083[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction on the ramp-function generator input.
p1052[0...n]
CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg

0
Description:
1-274
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1086[0]
Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the negative direction on the ramp-function generator input.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1055[0...n]
BI: Jog bit 0 / Jog bit 0

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for jog 1.
Recommend.:
Dependency:
Notice:
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.
p1056[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for jog 2.
Recommend.:
Dependency:
Notice:
The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056.
Only the signal source that was used to power up can also be used to power down again.
p1058[0...n]
Jog 1 speed setpoint / Jog 1 n_set

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed/velocity for jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency:
p1059[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed/velocity for jog 2. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be incrementally moved.
Dependency:

1-275
Parameter
List of parameters
p1063[0...n]
Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3040
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
40000.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed limit/velocity limit effective in the setpoint channel.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085, p1086, p1088
p1070[0...n]
CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1024[0]
Sets the signal source for the main setpoint.

Examples:
r1024: Fixed speed setpoint effective
r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator
Dependency:
Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078
Notice:
p1071[0...n]
CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the main setpoint.
r1073
CO: Main setpoint effective / Main setpoint eff

Description:
1-276
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the effective main setpoint. The value shown is the main setpoint after scaling.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1075[0...n]
CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setpoint

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1076, r1077, r1078
p1076[0...n]
CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary setpoint.
r1077
CO: Supplementary setpoint effective / Suppl setpoint eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling.
r1078
CO: Total setpoint effective / Total setpoint eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the total effective setpoint. The value indicates the sum of the effective main setpoint and supplementary
setpoint.
p1080[0...n]
Minimum speed / Minimum speed

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
19500.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the lowest possible speed/velocity. This value is not undershot in operation.
Note:
The parameter value applies for both motor directions of rotation.

In exceptional cases, the motor can operate below this value (e.g. when reversing).

1-277
Parameter
List of parameters
p1082[0...n]
Maximum speed / n_Max

0
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS

3060, 3070, 3095, 5300
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
1500.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the highest possible speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0115, p0230, r0313, p0322, r0336
Notice:
Note:
The parameter applies for both motor directions. The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity
for all ramp-up and ramp-down times (e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator, motor potentiometer).
Since the parameter is part of quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), it is defined appropriately when p0310, p0311, and
p0322 are changed.
The following limits are always effective for p1082:
p1082 <= p0322, if p0322 > 0
p1082 <= 60 * Minimum (15 * r0336, 650 Hz) / r0313
p1082 <= 60 * Maximum power unit pulse frequency / (k * r0313)
k = 12 for vector control (r0108.2 = 1), k = 6.5 for V/f control (r0108.2 = 0)
If a sine-wave filter (p0230 = 3) is parameterized as output filter, then the maximum speed is limited corresponding
to the maximum permissible filter output frequency (refer to the filter data sheet). For reactors and dv/dt filters, it is
limited to 150 Hz / r0313 (for chassis power units) or 120 Hz / r0313 (for booksize power units).
For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1) the value of the parameter is pre-assigned the maximum motor speed
(p0322). If p0322 = 0, the rated motor speed (p0311) is used as default (pre-assignment) value. For induction
motors that are not catalog motors (p0301 = 0), the synchronous no-load speed is used as default (pre-assignment)
value (p0310 * 60 / r0313).
For synchronous motors, the following additionally applies:
The maximum speed p1082 is restricted to speeds (r1084) where the EMF does not exceed the DC link voltage.
The effective assignment of the motor data set parameter (e.g. p0311) to the drive data set parameter p1082 when
pre-assigning should be taken from p0186.
p1082 is also available in the quick commissioning (p0010 = 1); this means that when exiting via p3900 > 0, the
value is not changed.
For vector control (p1300 = 20 ... 23) the maximum speed is limited to 60.0 / (8.333 * p0115[0] * r0313). This can be
identified by a reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode
p1300 can be changed over.
When using sine-wave filters (p0230 = 3, 4), the maximum speed r1084 is limited to 70% of the resonant frequency
of the filter capacitance and the motor leakage inductance.
p1083[0...n]
CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
40000.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
Notice:
1-278

Parameter
List of parameters
r1084
CO: Speed limit positive effective / n_limit pos eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective positive speed limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085
p1085[0...n]
CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1083[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the speed limit of the positive direction.
p1086[0...n]
CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-210000.000 [rpm]
Max
0.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
-40000.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
Notice:
r1087
CO: Speed limit negative effective / n_limit neg eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective negative speed limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082, p1086, p1088
p1088[0...n]
CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1086[0]
Sets the signal source for the speed/velocity limit of the negative direction.

1-279
Parameter
List of parameters
p1091[0...n]
Skip speed 1 / n_skip 1

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101
Note:
The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance.
p1092[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 2.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1093, p1094, p1101
p1093[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 3.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1094, p1101
p1094[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets skip speed 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1101
1-280

Parameter
List of parameters
p1101[0...n]
Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
210000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.000 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the bandwidth for the skip speeds/velocities 1 to 4.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094
Note:
The setpoint (reference) speeds are skipped (suppressed) in the range of the skip speed +/-p1101.
Steady-state operation is not possible in the skipped (suppressed) speed range. The skip (suppression) range is
skipped.
Example:
p1091 = 600 and p1101 = 20
--> setpoint speeds between 580 and 620 [rpm] are skipped.
For the skip bandwidths, the following hysteresis behavior applies:
For a setpoint speed coming from below, the following applies:
r1170 < 580 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 580 [rpm]
For a setpoint speed coming from above, the following applies:
r1170 > 620 [rpm] and 580 [rpm] <= r1114 <= 620 [rpm] --> r1119 = 620 [rpm]
p1110[0...n]
BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to disable the negative direction.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1111
p1111[0...n]
BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to disable the positive direction.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1110
r1112
CO: Speed setpoint after minimum limiting / n_set n. min_lim

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint after the minimum limiting.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094, p1101

1-281
Parameter
List of parameters
p1113[0...n]
BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

2505, 3040
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Dependency:
Refer to: r1198
Notice:
r1114
CO: Setpoint after the direction limiting / Setp after limit

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

3050
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction.
p1115
Ramp-function generator selection / RFG selection

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the ramp-function generator type.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.
r1119
CO: Ramp-function generator setpoint at the input / RFG setp at inp
Basic ramp-function generator

Extended ramp-function generator

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

3050, 3060, 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the setpoint at the input of the ramp-function generator.
Notice:
Note:
The setpoint is influenced by other functions, e.g. skip (suppressed) speeds, minimum and maximum limits.
1-282

Parameter
List of parameters
p1120[0...n]
Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
999999.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Description:
The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed
(p1082) in this time.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Note:
The parameter is adapted during the rotating measurement (p1960 > 0). This is the reason that during the rotating
measurement, the motor can accelerate faster than was originally parameterized.
For V/f control and encoderless vector control (see p1300), ramp-up times of 0 s are not expedient. The setting
should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1121[0...n]
Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
999999.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Description:
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill
(setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1082
Note:
For V/f control and encoderless vector control (see p1300), ramp-down times of 0 s are not recommended. The setting should be based on the startup times (r0345) of the motor.
p1122[0...n]
BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2505
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for bypassing the ramp generator (ramp-up and ramp-down times = 0).
Notice:
Note:
For VECTOR in encoderless operation, it is not permissible that the ramp-function generator is bypassed.
p1130[0...n]
Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note:
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

1-283
Parameter
List of parameters
p1131[0...n]
Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note:
Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
p1134[0...n]
Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the smoothed response to the OFF1 command or the reduced setpoint for the extended ramp-function generator.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
No effect up to initial rounding-off time (p1130) > 0 s.
Note:
p1134 = 0 (continuous smoothing)
Cont. smoothing
Discont smoothing
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, initially a final rounding-off is carried out and then the ramp-up completed. During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the
previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new setpoint.
p1134 = 1 (discontinuous smoothing)
If the setpoint is reduced while ramping-up, then the output goes immediately in the direction of the new setpoint.
For the setpoint change there is no rounding-off.
p1135[0...n]
OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
600.000 [s]
Factory setting
3.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-down time from the maximum speed down to zero speed for the OFF3 command.
Note:
This time can be exceeded if the DC link voltage reaches its maximum value.
p1136[0...n]
OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd

0
Description:
1-284
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the initial rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1137[0...n]
OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
30.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the final rounding-off time for OFF3 for the extended ramp generator.
p1140[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator enable / RFG enable

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 4 (operating condition/disable ramp-function generator).
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
Bit 4 = 0: Inhibit ramp-function generator (the ramp-function generator output is set to zero)
Bit 4 = 1: Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)
p1141[0...n]
BI: Continue ramp-function generator / Continue RFG

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 5 (continue ramp-function generator/freeze ramp-function generator).
Dependency:
Notice:
The ramp-function generator is, independent of the state of the signal source, active in the following cases:
- OFF1/OFF3.
- ramp-function generator output within the suppression bandwidth.
- ramp-function generator output below the minimum speed.
Note:
Bit 5 = 0: Freeze ramp-function generator

Bit 5 = 1: Continue ramp-function generator
p1142[0...n]
BI: Speed setpoint enable / n_set enable

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2501
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for control word 1 bit 6 (enable setpoint/disable setpoint).
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
Bit 6 = 0: Inhibit setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero)

Bit 6 = 1: Enable setpoint

1-285
Parameter
List of parameters
p1143[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for accepting the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency:
The signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1144
Note:
0/1 signal:
The ramp-function generator output is immediately (without delay) set to the setting value of the ramp-function generator.
1 signal:
The setting value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
1/0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective. The ramp-function generator output is adapted to the
input value using the ramp-up time or the ramp-down time.
0 signal:
The input value of the ramp-function generator is effective.
p1144[0...n]
CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the ramp-function generator setting value.
Dependency:
The signal source for accepting the setting value is set using parameters.
Refer to: p1143
p1145[0...n]
Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0
Max
50.0
Factory setting
1.3
Sets the ramp-function generator tracking.

The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible
drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to
ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit.
Recommend.:
p1145 = 0.0:
This value deactivates the ramp-function generator tracking.
p1145 = 0.0 ... 1.0:
Generally, these values are not practical. They cause the motor to accelerate below its torque limit. The lower the
selected value, the greater the margin between the controller and torque limit when accelerating.
p1145 > 1.0:
The greater the value, the higher the permissible deviation between the speed setpoint and speed actual value.
1-286

Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
If ramp-function generator tracking is activated and the ramp time is set too short, this can cause unsteady acceleration.
Remedy:
- switch off ramp-function generator tracking (p1145 = 0).
- increase the ramp-up/ramp-down time (p1120, p1121).
Note:
In the V/f mode, ramp-function generator tracking is not active.

For SERVO with V/f operation, the following applies:
The complete ramp-function generator is not active, i.e. ramp-up and ramp-down time = 0.
p1148[0...n]
Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [rpm]
Max
1000.000 [rpm]
Factory setting
19.800 [rpm]
Sets the tolerance value for the status of the ramp-function generator (ramp-up active, ramp-down active).
If the input of the ramp-function generator does not change in comparison to the output by more than the entered
tolerance time, then the status bits "ramp-up active" and "ramp-down active" are not influenced.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1199
r1149
CO: Ramp-function generator, acceleration / RFG acceleration

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 39_1
Scaling: p2007
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rev/s]
Max
- [rev/s]
Factory setting
- [rev/s]
Description:
Displays the acceleration of the ramp-function generator.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1145
r1150
CO: Ramp-function generator speed setpoint at the output / RFG n_set at outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator.
p1151[0...n]
Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3070
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the extended ramp-function generator.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Disable rounding-off at the zero cross-over
1 signal
Yes

0 signal
No
FP
3070
1-287
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
Re bit 00 = 1:
If the ramp-up time is longer than the ramp-down time (p1120 > p1121), then there is an acceleration step at the
zero crossover. This can have a negative impact on the mechanical system.
Note:
Re bit 00 = 1:
When the direction change is changed there is no rounding-off before and after the zero crossover.
p1152
BI: Setpoint 2 enable / Setp 2 enab

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
899.15
Description:
Sets the signal source for "setpoint 2 enable".
p1155[0...n]
CI: Speed controller speed setpoint 1 / n_ctrl n_set 1

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

5030, 6031
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 1 of the speed controller.
Dependency:
The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6.
Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170, p1189
Notice:
p1160[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2 of the speed controller.
Dependency:
Note:
For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is effective.

The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the actual value, VECTOR: To the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the
drive corresponding to the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). While stopping via the ramp-function generator,
STW1.4 is effective (enable ramp-function generator).
When the function module "position control" (r0108.3 = 1) is activated, this connector input is interconnected as follows as standard:
CI: p1160 = r2562
1-288

Parameter
List of parameters
r1169
CO: Speed controller, speed setpoints 1 and 2 / n_ctrl n_set 1/2

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint after the addition of the speed setpoint 1 (p1155) and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency:
Note:
The value is only correctly displayed at r0899.2 = 1 (operation enabled).
r1170
CO: Speed controller, setpoint sum / n_ctrl setp sum

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

1690, 1700, 1750, 3080, 5020,
6030
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint after selecting the ramp-function generator and adding the speed setpoint 1 (p1155)
and speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1150, p1155, p1160
p1189[0...n]
Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 3080
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0011 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the speed setpoint.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Note:
Signal name
1 signal
Interpolation ramp-fct gen/speed controller Yes
active
Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active Yes
0 signal
No
FP
3080
No
3080
Re bit 01:
The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation and when the master receives a
sign-of-life (STW 2.12 ... STW 2.15).
r1197
Fixed speed setpoint number actual / n_set_fixed No act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 3010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of the selected fixed speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023
Note:

1-289
Parameter
List of parameters
r1198.0...15
CO/BO: Control word setpoint channel / STW setpoint chan

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the setpoint channel.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
05
06
11
13
14
15
r1199.0...6
CO/BO: Ramp-function generator status word / RFG ZSW
Signal name
Fixed setpoint bit 0
Inhibit negative direction
Inhibit positive direction
Setpoint inversion
Motorized potentiometer raise
Motorized potentiometer lower
Bypass ramp-function generator
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
3010
3010
3010
3010
3040
3040
3040
3020
3020
3060,
3070
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

8010
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the ramp-function generator (RFG).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Note:
Re bit 02:
Signal name
Ramp-up active
Ramp-down active
Ramp-function generator active
Ramp-function generator set
Ramp-function generator held
Ramp-function generator tracking active
Maximum limit active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
The bit is an OR logic operation - bit 00 and bit 01.
p1200[0...n]
FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
0
Sets the operating mode for flying restart.

The flying restart allows the drive converter to be powered up while the motor is still rotating. In so doing, the drive
converter output frequency is changed until the actual motor speed/velocity is found. The motor then accelerates up
to the setpoint at the ramp-function generator setting.
1-290

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Flying restart inactive

Flying restart always active (start in setpoint direction)
FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start in setp. dir.)
FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start in setp. direction)
Flying restart always active (start only in setpoint direction)
FlyRestart active after on, fault, OFF2 (start only in setp_dir)
FlyRestart active after fault, OFF2 (start only in setp. dir.)
Dependency:
For induction motors, the following applies:

A differentiation is made between flying restart for V/f control and for vector control (p1300).
Flying restart, V/f control: p1202, p1203, r1204
Flying restart, vector control: p1202, p1203, r1205
For synchronous motors, the following applies:
Flying restart is not possible with V/f control or if, in the case of sensorless vector control, a Voltage Sensing Module
has not been connected and parameterized.
Refer to: p1201
Refer to: F07330, F07331
Notice:
The "flying restart" function must be used in cases where the motor may still be running (e.g. after a brief line supply
interruption) or is being driven by the load. The system might otherwise shut down as a result of overcurrent.
It does not make sense to use "flying restart" together with the "motor holding brake function" (p1215 > 0) because
then the flying restart will always be realized with the motor stationary.
Note:
For p1200 = 1, 4, the following applies:

Flying restart is active after faults, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3.
For p1200 = 2, 5, the following applies:
The "power-on" is the first power-on operation after the drive system has been booted. This is practical for motors
with a high-inertia load.
For p1200 = 1, 2, 3, the following applies: The search is made in both directions.
For p1200 = 4, 5, 6, the following applies: The search is only made in the setpoint direction.
For operation with encoder, the following applies:
p1200 = 1, 4 as well as p1200 = 2, 5 and p1200 = 3, 6 have the same meaning.
For V/f control (p1300 < 20), the following applies:
The speed can only be sensed for values above approx. 5 % of the rated motor speed. For lower speeds, it is
assumed that the motor is at a standstill.
If p1200 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was
set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300).
p1201[0...n]
BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source to enable the "flying restart" function.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1200
Note:
Withdrawing the enable signal has the same effect as setting p1200 = 0.

1-291
Parameter
List of parameters
p1202[0...n]
FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest I_srch

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [%]
Max
400 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the search current for the "flying restart" function.

The value is referred to the motor magnetizing current.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0331
Caution:
An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
Note:
In V/f control mode, the parameter serves as a threshold value for establishing the current at the beginning of the
flying restart function. When the threshold value is reached, the prevailing search current is set dependent upon the
frequency on the basis of voltage inputs.
Reducing the search current can also improve flying restart performance (if the system moment of inertia is not very
high, for example).
p1203[0...n]
Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [%]
Max
4000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Description:
The value influences the rate at which the output frequency is changed during a flying restart . A higher value
results in a longer search time.
Caution:
An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion.
For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable.
Note:
The parameter factory setting is selected so that standard induction motors that are rotating can be found and
restarted as quickly as possible (fast flying restart).
With this presetting, if the motor is not found (e.g. for motors that are accelerated as a result of active loads) we recommend that the search rate is reduced (by increasing p1203).
r1204.0...13
CO/BO: Flying restart, V/f control status / FlyRest Vf st

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the V/f control mode.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
1-292
Signal name
Current impressed
No current flow
Voltage input
Voltage reduced
Start ramp-function generator
Wait for execution
Slope filter act
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
r1205.0...15
Positive gradient
Current < thresh
Current minimum
Search in the positive direction
Stop after positive direction
Stop after negative direction
No result
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
CO/BO: Flying restart, vector control status / FlyRest vector st

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status for checking and monitoring flying restart states in the vector control mode.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
Bits 0..9: Used by the control in internal sequences during the flying restart.
Signal name
Speed adaptation circuit record angle
Speed adaptation circuit set gain to 0
Isd channel enable
Speed control switched out
Quadrature arm switched in
Special transformation active
Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0
Current control on
Isd_set = 0 A
Frequency held
Search in the positive direction
Search Started
Current impressed
Search interrupted
Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0
Speed control activated
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Depending on the motor type (p0300), the number of active bits differs.
Bits 10..15: Are used to monitor the flying restart sequence.
For PEM, only bits 10, 11 and 15 are supported.
p1206[0...9]
Set the fault number without automatic restart / Fault_No w/o AR

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the faults for which automatic restart should not be effective.
Dependency:
The setting is only effective for p1210 = 6, 16.

Refer to: p1210

1-293
Parameter
List of parameters
p1208[0...1]
BI: AR modification infeed / AR modification

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to modify the automatic restart (AR).

Interconnections between the automatic restart and infeed:
With the following interconnection in the mode p1210 = 6, the automatic restart can respond to infeed faults:
BI: p1208[0] = r2139.3
With the following interconnection, in the mode p1210 = 4, the automatic restart can respond to line supply failure of
the infeed:
BI: p1208[1] = r0863.2
Index:
[0] = Infeed fault

[1] = Infeed line supply failure
Dependency:
p1210
Automatic restart, mode / AR mode

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the automatic restart mode (AR).
Value:
0:
1:
4:
6:
14:
16:
Recommend.:
For brief line supply failures, the motor shaft may still be rotating when restarting. The "flying restart" function
(p1200) might need to be activated to restart while the motor shaft is still rotating.
Dependency:
The automatic restart requires an active ON command, e.g. that is available at a digital input.
Inhibit automatic restart

Acknowledge all faults without restarting
Restart after line supply failure w/o additional start attempts
Restart after fault with additional start attempts
Restart after line supply failure following man. acknowledgment
Restart after fault following manual acknowledgment
If, for p1210 > 1, there is no active ON command, then the automatic restart is interrupted.
When using an Operator Panel in the LOCAL mode, then there is no automatic start.
For p1210 = 14, 16, a manual acknowledgement is required for an automatic restart.
Refer to: p0840, p0857, p1267
Danger:
Caution:
Refer to: F30003

If the automatic restart is activated (p1210 > 1) if there is an ON command (refer to p0840), the drive is powered up
as soon as any fault messages that are present can be acknowledged. This also occurs after the line supply returns
or the Control Unit boots if the DC link voltage is again present or the feedback of the line supply infeed (refer to
p0864) is again available. This automatic power-up sequence can only be interrupted by withdrawing the ON command.
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). When faults
are present, therefore, the parameter cannot be changed.
For p1210 > 1, the motor is automatically started.
1-294

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
When automatic restart mode is activated, the supply voltage must remain connected (e.g. backed up by UPS).
Re p1210 = 1:
Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. For p1210 = 1, fault F07320 is not generated if the
acknowledgment attempt was unsuccessful, for example, because the monitoring time p1213 index 0 was
exceeded.
Re p1210 = 4:
An automatic restart is only carried out if fault F30003 occurred at the Motor Module or a high signal is present at
binector input p1208[1]. If additional faults are present, then these faults are also acknowledged and when successful, starting continues. If the 24 V Control Unit power supply fails, then this is interpreted as a line supply failure.
Re p1210 = 6:
An automatic restart is carried out if any fault has occurred or there is a high signal at binector input p1208[0].
Re p1210 = 14:
As for p1210 = 4. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
Re p1210 = 16:
As for p1210 = 6. However, faults that are present must be manually acknowledged.
p1211
Automatic restart, start attempts / AR start attempts

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10
Factory setting
3
Description:
Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07320
Caution:
A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1).
Notice:
After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is reactivated.
After a complete blackout the start counter always starts with the counter value that applied before the blackout,
and decrements this startup attempt by 1. If a further attempt to acknolwedge is started by the automatic restart
function prior to blackout, e.g. when the CU remains active on blackout longer than the time p1212 / 2, the fault
counter will already have been decremented by 1. In this case, the fault counter is thus decreased by the value 2.
Note:
A start attempt starts immediately when a fault occurs. The start attempt is considered to been completed if the
motor was magnetized (r0056.4 = 1) and an additional delay time of 1 s has expired.
As long as a fault is present, an acknowledge command is generated in the time intervals of p1212 / 2. When successfully acknowledged, the start counter is decremented. If, after this, a fault re-occurs before a restart has been
completed, then acknowledgement starts again from the beginning.
Fault F07320 is output if, after several faults occur, the number of parameterized start attempts has been reached.
After a successful start attempt, i.e. a fault/error has no longer occurred up to the end of the magnetizing phase, the
start counter is again reset to the parameter value after 1 s. If a fault re-occurs - the parameterized number of start
attempts is again available.
At least one start attempt is always carried out.
After a line supply failure, acknowledgement is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is powered
up. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its
acknowledgement also causes the start counter to be decremented.

1-295
Parameter
List of parameters
p1212
Automatic restart, delay time start attempts / AR t_wait start

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [s]
Max
1000.0 [s]
Factory setting
1.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time up to restart.
Dependency:
This parameter setting is active for p1210 = 4, 6.

For p1210 = 1, the following applies: Faults are only automatically acknowledged in half of the waiting time, no
restart.
Caution:
Note:
The faults are automatically acknowledged after half of the waiting time has expired and the full waiting time.
If the cause of a fault is not removed in the first half of the delay time, then it is no longer possible to acknowledge in
the waiting time.
p1213[0...1]
Automatic restart, monitoring time / AR t_monitoring

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
10000.0 [s]
Factory setting
0.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time of the automatic restart (AR).
Index:
[0] = For restart

[1] = To reset the fault counter
Dependency:
Caution:
Notice:
After fault F07320 occurs, the power-on command must be withdrawn and all of the faults acknowledged so that the
automatic restart function is reactivated.
Note:
Index 0:
The monitoring time starts when the faults are detected. If the automatic acknowledgements are not successful, the
monitoring time runs again. If, after the monitoring time has expired, the drive has still not successfully started again
(flying restart and magnetizing of the motor must have been completed: r0056.4 = 1), then fault F07320 is output.
The monitoring is deactivated with p1213 = 0. If p1213 is set lower than the sum of p1212, the magnetizing time
p0346 and the additional delay time due to the flying restart, then fault F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for
p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart.
The monitoring time must be extended if the faults that occur cannot be immediately and successfully acknowledged (e.g. for faults that are permanently present).
Index 1:
The fault counter (refer to r1214) is only set back to the starting value p1211 if, after successful restart, the time in
p1213 index 1 has expired. The delay time is not effective for fault acknowledgement without automatic restart
(p1210 = 1). After a power failure (blackout) the delay time only starts after the line supply returns and the Control
Unit boots. The fault counter is set to p1211, if F07320 occurred, the power-on command is withdrawn and the fault
is acknowledged.
The fault counter is immediately updated if the starting value p1211 or the mode p1210 is changed.
1-296

Parameter
List of parameters
r1214.0...15
CO/BO: Automatic restart, status / AR status

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
12
13
14
15
Note:
Signal name
Initialization
Wait for alarm
Auto restart act
Setting the acknowledgement command
Acknowledge alarms
Restart
Delay time running after automatic powerup
Fault
Effective fault
Start count. bit 0
Start count. bit 1
Start count. bit 2
Start count. bit 3
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
On
On
On
On
No
No
Off
Off
Off
Off
Re bit 00:
State to display the single initialization after POWER ON.
Re bit 01:
State in which the automatic restart function waits for faults (initial state).
Re bit 02:
General display that a fault has been identified and that the restart or acknowledgement has been initiated.
Re bit 03:
Displays the acknowledge command within the "acknowledge alarms" state (bit 4 = 1). For bit 5 = 1 or bit 6 = 1, the
acknowledge command is continually displayed.
Re bit 04:
State in which the faults that are present are acknowledged. The state is exited again after successful acknowledgement. A change is only made into the next state if it is signaled that a fault is no longer present after an
acknowledgement command (bit 3 = 1).
Re bit 05:
State in which the drive is automatically powered up (only for p1210 = 4, 6).
Re bit 06:
State in which the system waits after having been powered up, to the end of the start attempt (to the end of the
magnetizing process).
For p1210 = 1, this signal is directly set after the faults have been successfully acknowledged.
Re bit 07:
State which is assumed after a fault occurs within the automatic restart function. This is only reset after acknowledging the fault and withdrawing the power-on command.
Re bit 10:
When the automatic restart function is active, r1214 bit 7 is displayed, otherwise the effective fault r2139 bit 3.
Re bits 12 ... 15:
Actual state of the start counter (binary coded).

1-297
Parameter
List of parameters
p1215
Motor holding brake configuration / Brake config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the holding brake configuration.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228, p1278
Caution:
For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will destroy the brake.
Notice:
If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is closed even if the
motor is still rotating. Pulse suppression can either be caused by a 0 signal at p0844, p0845 or p0852 or as a result
of a fault with OFF2 response. If this is not desirable (e.g. for a flying restart), then the brake can be kept open using
a 1 signal at p0855.
Note:
If the configuration is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then the motor holding brake will be automatically identified. If a motor holding brake is detected, the configuration is set to "motor holding brake as for sequence
control".
No motor holding brake being used

Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control
Motor holding brake always open
Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO
If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3.
if an external motor holding brake is being used, then p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as control signal.
When the function module "extended brake control" is activated (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected
as control signal.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.
The parameterization "no motor holding brake available" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 0, p9602 = 1,
p9802 = 1) is not practical if there is no motor holding brake.
The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake
Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical.
p1216
Motor holding brake, opening time / Brake t_open

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.

After controlling the holding brake (opens), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time. After this, the
speed/velocity setpoint is enabled.
Recommend.:
This time should be set longer than the actual opening time of the brake. This ensures that the drive cannot accelerate when the brake is applied.
Dependency:
1-298

Parameter
List of parameters
p1217
Motor holding brake closing time / Brake t_close

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.

After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled (the brake closes), then the drive remains closed-loop controlled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint/velocity setpoint of zero. The pulses are suppressed when the
time expires.
Recommend.:
This time should be set longer than the actual closing time of the brake. This ensures that the pulses are only suppressed after the brake has closed.
Dependency:
Notice:
If the selected closing time is too short with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, then the load can sag.
If the closing time is selected to be too long with respect to the actual closing time of the brake, the control works
against the brake and therefore reduces its lifetime.
p1218[0...1]
BI: Open motor holding brake / Open brake

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for a conditional opening of the motor holding brake.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215
Note:
[0]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 1

[1]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 2
p1219[0...3]
BI: Immediately close motor holding brake / Close brake

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 1229.9
Description:
Sets the signal source for an unconditional (immediate) closing of the motor holding brake.
Dependency:
Note:
[0]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.0

[1]: Signal, immediately close brake, inversion via p1275.1
[2]: Signal, immediately close brake
[3]: Signal, immediately close brake - refer to the factory setting
These four signals form an OR logic operation.

1-299
Parameter
List of parameters
p1220
CI: Open motor holding brake, signal source, threshold / Open brake thresh

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command "open brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1221, r1229, p1277
p1221
Open motor holding brake, threshold / Open brake thresh

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the threshold value for the command "open brake".
Dependency:
Refer to: p1220, r1229, p1277
p1222
BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake closed / Brake feedb closed

0 (Extended brk)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake closed".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake closed" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency:
Note:
1 signal: Brake closed.

When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1223).
For r1229.5 = 1, OFF/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor whereby OFF2 remains effective.
p1223
BI: Motor holding brake feedback signal brake open / Brake feedb open

0 (Extended brk)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2711
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake open".
For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake open" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1.
Dependency:
Note:
1 signal: Brake open.

When braking with 1 feedback signal, the inverted feedback signal is connected to the BICO input for the second
feedback signal (p1222).
1-300

Parameter
List of parameters
p1224[0...3]
BI: Close motor holding brake at standstill / Brk close standst

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for close brake at standstill.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1275
Note:
[0]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.2

[1]: Signal, close brake at standstill, inversion via p1275.3
[2]: Signal, close brake at standstill
[3]: Signal, close brake at standstill
These four signals form an OR logic operation.
p1225
CI: Standstill detection, threshold value / Standstill thresh

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
63[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source "threshold value" for the standstill identification.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1226, p1228, r1229
p1226[0...n]
Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
20.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.

Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold is undershot, standstill is identified.
The following applies when the brake control is activated:
When the threshold is undershot, the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing time in
p1217. The pulses are then suppressed.
if the brake control is not activated, the following applies:
When the threshold is undershot, the pulses are suppressed and the drive coasts down.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1227
Notice:
For reasons relating to the compatibility to earlier software versions, a parameter value of 0 in indices 1 to 31 is
overwritten with the parameter value in index 0 when the Control Unit boots.
Note:
Standstill is detected if the actual speed drops below the speed threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
- started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226) - has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if the speed
threshold is too low.

1-301
Parameter
List of parameters
p1227
Zero speed detection monitoring time / n_standst t_monit

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
4.000 [s]
Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.

When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint speed has
fallen below p1226 (also refer to p1145).
After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the pulses are suppressed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1215, p1216, p1217, p1226
Notice:
For p1145 > 0.0 (RFG tracking) the setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore cause the monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not suppressed.
Note:
Standstill (zero speed) is detected if, during the complete monitoring time (p1227), the speed setpoint falls below
the speed threshold (p1226).
For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies:
The monitoring is deactivated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts"
down.
p1228
Pulse suppression delay time / Pulse suppr t_del

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the delay time for pulse suppression.

After OFF1 or OFF3 and zero speed detection, the system waits for this time to expire and the pulses are then suppressed.
Dependency:
Note:
Standstill (zero speed) is detected if, during the complete delay time (p1228), the speed actual value falls below the
speed threshold (p1226).
r1229.1...11
CO/BO: Motor holding brake status word / Brake ZSW
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Extended brk)

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the motor holding brake.
Bit field:
Bit
01
03
04
05
06
1-302
Signal name
Command open brake (continuous signal)
Pulse enable, extended brake control
Brake does not open
Brake does not close
Brake threshold exceeded
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2711
2711
2711
2711
2707

Parameter
List of parameters
07
08
09
10
11
p1230[0...n]
Brake threshold undershot

Brake monitoring time expired
Pulse enable request missing/n_ctrl inhibited
Brake OR logic operation result
Brake AND logic operation result
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
2704
2704
2707
Yes
Yes
No
No
2707
2707
BI: Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation / ASC act

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS

7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to activate the armature short-circuit or DC brake.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note:
1 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC brake is deactivated.

0 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC brake is deactivated.
p1231[0...n]
Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration / ASC config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS

7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
14
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to activate the various types for armature short-circuit / DC brake.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
14:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0300, p1230, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346
Danger:
Re p1231 = 1, 2:
No function
External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal
Ext. armature short circuit without contactor feedback signal
Internal voltage protection
Internal armature short-circuit / DC brake
DC brake under starting speed
- only short-circuit-proof motors may be used, or suitable resistors must be used to short-circuit the motor
Re p1231 = 3:
- when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the
DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)!
- it is only permissible to use motors that are short-circuit proof (p0320 < p0323).
- The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209).
- the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs
during the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor.
- if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to
ensure safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for
the components.
- if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided
through a Control Supply Module.
- if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer
period of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor).

1-303
Parameter
List of parameters
Re p1231 = 4 and synchronous motor:

- when armature short-circuit is active, all of the motor terminals are at half of the DC link potential.
- The Motor Module must be able to conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0320) of the motor (r0209).
Note:
Re p1231 = 1, 2:
The external armature short circuit can only be selected for synchronous motors (p0300). In this case, control bit
BO: r1239.0 must be interconnected (e.g. to a digital input) to control the external contactor.
The external armature short circuit cannot be set as a fault response. It can be triggered via binector input p1230. It
is also always activated in the case of pulse suppression.
Re p1231 = 3:
Internal voltage protection (using an internal armature short circuit) can only be selected for synchronous motors
(p0300) and Motor Modules in booksize or chassis format. Further, it is not permissible for Safety to be active on
blocksize Motor Modules (i.e. p9501 = 0 and p9601 = 0). The internal voltage protection prevents the DC link
capacitance from being charged if there is no possibility of regenerating the EMF of a motor operated in the fieldweakening mode. The Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1).
a) If the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal armature short-circuit (r0192.10 = 0), the armature short-circuit is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled (refer below):
b) If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module
itself decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit should be activated. In this case, protection
is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted.
The short circuit is activated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the
short-circuit is withdrawn. This therefore ensures that the required input voltage for the Control Supply Module is
maintained.
Re p1231 = 4:
The function is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the function can be initiated by OFF2
a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), the internal armature short-circuit is initiated.
- the Motor Module must support this function (r0192.9 = 1).
b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), the DC brake is initiated.
Activation criterion (one of the following criteria is fulfilled):
- 1 signal via binector input p1230 (DC brake activation)
- the drive is not in the state "S4: Operation" or in S5x (refer to function diagram 2610).
Re p1231 = 14:
This DC brake can only be set on induction motors.
The DC brake is triggered if a 1 signal is pending at binector input p1230 during operation and the current speed is
below the starting speed p1234. Then, following upstream demagnetization (see p0347), the braking current p1232
is injected for the duration of time set in p1233. This is followed by automatic switch-off. During operation the command for DC braking can be withdrawn at any time.
DC braking by means of fault response continues to be possible.
Re p1231 = 3, 4, 14:
The value can only be changed to values not equal to 3 or 4 or 14 if p0491 is not equal to 4 and p2101 is not equal
to 6 (armature short-circuit/DC brake not set).
In the case of SERVO, the DC brake does not function in V/f operation (p1317).
Note:
ASC: Armature short circuit
IVP: Internal Voltage Protection
UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply
CSM: Control Supply Module
DC brake
1-304

Parameter
List of parameters
p1232[0...n]
DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake

0
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the braking current for DC braking.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346
Note:
A change to the braking current becomes effective the next time that the DC brake is powered up.
The value for p1232 is specified as an rms value in the 3-phase system. The magnitude of the braking current is the
same as that of an identical output current at frequency zero (see r0067, r0068, p0640).
For the current controller, the settings of parameters p1345 and p1346 (I_max limiting controller) are used.
p1233[0...n]
DC braking time / DCBRK time

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
3600.0 [s]
Factory setting
1.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the DC braking time (as fault response).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1234, r1239
Note:
If a speed encoder is being used, DC braking is ended as soon as the drive falls below the standstill threshold
p1226.
p1234[0...n]
Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 7017
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
40000.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the starting speed for DC braking.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, r1239
Caution:
If an encoder fault occurs during closed-loop operation with encoder, controlled decceleration of the drive down to
the start speed p1234 of the DC current brake. In this case, the DC brake is activated immediately and injects the
braking current p1232 for the braking current time p1233 after demagnetization.
If the actual speed falls below this threshold, then DC braking is activated.
The braking current and braking duration must, therefore, be dimensioned accordingly for this situation so that the
drive can be decelerated to standstill.
p1235[0...n]
BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the contactor feedback signal for external armature short-circuit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1236, p1237, r1239

1-305
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
In order that the pulses are not enabled when the contactor is closed, the contactor feedback signal must lag by a
sufficiently long time when opening the contactor.
Note:
1 signal: The contactor is closed.

0 signal: The contactor is open.
p1236[0...n]
Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
200 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time of the contactor feedback signal for the external armature short-circuit configuration.
If the contactor feedback signal (p1235) is parameterized, then the appropriate feedback signal (r1239.1) is
expected within this monitoring time after either opening or closing the contactor.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1237, r1239

Refer to: A07904, F07905
p1237[0...n]
External armature short-circuit, waiting time when opening / ASC ext t_wait

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
200 [ms]
Sets the delay time when opening the contactor of the external armature short-circuit.
If no contactor feedback signal has been selected (p1235), then the system waits for this time before the pulses are
switched in.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, r1239
Notice:
This delay time must be at least long enough so that the contactor contacts reliably open before the pulses are
switched in. The delay time must be greater than the contactor response time. The Motor Module can be damaged
if the delay time is too short.
r1238
CO: Armature short-circuit, external state / EASC state

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2610
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the state for the external armature short-circuit.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1239
Powered down
Ready
Active
Active - feedback signal "Closed" OK
Active - feedback signal "Closed" missing
Prompt to remove the armature short-circuit
Active - feedback signal "Open" missing
Refer to: A07904, F07905
1-306

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

- the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 0.
Re state "switched out" (r1238 = 0):
- the external armature short-circuit can be selected with p1231 = 1.
Re state "ready" (r1238 = 1):
- as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled, then a transition is made into the state "active" (r1238 = 2).
Regarding the state "active" (r1238 = 2), "active - feedback signal "Closed" OK" (r1238 = 3)", "active - feedback signal "Closed" missing" (r1238 = 4)":
- the control signal to close contactor r1239.0 is set to "1" (closed) and the pulses are suppressed.
- if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), then a transition is immediately made into
state 3.
- if a contactor feedback signal is connected, then a transition is made into state 3 if the feedback signal at BI:
p1235 goes to "1" (closed) within the monitoring time (p1236).
- otherwise, a transition is made into state 4.
Re state "prompt to remove the armature short-circuit" (r1238 = 5):
- the activation criterion is no longer fulfilled. An attempt is made to again remove the armature short circuit.
- the control signal to close the contactor r1239.0 is set to "0" (open) and the pulses remain suppressed.
- if a contactor feedback signal is not connected (BI: p1235 = 0 signal), the system waits for the delay time (p1237)
to expire until a transition is made into state 1.
- if a contactor feedback signal is connected, the system waits until the feedback signal at BI:p1235 goes to "0"
(open) until a transition is made into state 1. If this does not occur within the monitoring time (p1236), then a transition is made into state 6.
Re state "active - feedback signal "Open" missing" (r1238 = 6):
- this error state can be exited by deselecting the external armature short-circuit (p1231 = 0).
r1239.0...11
CO/BO: Armature short-circuit / DC brake status word / ASC/DCBRK ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for armature short-circuit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
08
10
11
Dependency:
Signal name
External armature short-circuit
External armature short-circuit, contactor
feedback signal
External armature short-circuit ready
External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal
Internal armature short-circuit
Internal armature short circuit, feedback signal from power unit
Internal armature short-circuit ready
DC brake active
DC brake ready
Armature short circuit/DC brake selected
1 signal
Active
Closed
0 signal
Inactive
Open
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Active
Active
Inactive
Inactive
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
7017
7017
-
Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237

1-307
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
External armature short-circuit (bits 0 ... 3):

Re bit 00:
Using this signal, the motor is short-circuited through an external contactor circuit. This means that this BO:
p1239.0 must be interconnected e.g. to a digital output.
Re bit 01:
This signal indicates the state of the contactor to establish the armature short-circuit. To do this, BI: p1235 must be
interconnected to a digital input.
Re bit 02:
The external armature short-circuit configuration is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
Re bit 03:
1: A feedback signal from an external contactor was parameterized in BI: p1235.
Internal voltage protection / internal armature short-circuit (bits 4 ... 6):
Re bit 04:
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous
internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0).
The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semiconductors.
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal
voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1).
The Motor Module decides autonomously whether the armature short-circuit is activated. In this case, the following
applies: r1239.4 = r1239.5.
c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected.
The Control Unit issues the command to the Motor Module to short-circuit the motor through the power semiconductors.
Re bit 05:
The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited in the Motor Module through the power semiconductors.
Re bit 06:
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module does not support the autonomous
internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0).
The internal voltage protection is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
a) Internal voltage protection (p1231 = 3) was selected and the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal
voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1).
The internal voltage protection is ready and the Motor Module decides autonomously - using the DC link voltage whether the short-circuit is activated. In this case, protection is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection
between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted. The short-circuit is activated if the DC link voltage
exceeds 800 V. If the DC link voltage falls below 450 V, then the short-circuit is withdrawn.
c) Internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) was selected.
The internal armature short-circuit is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled.
- the signal at BI: p1230 (armature short-circuit activation) is 1.
1-308

Parameter
List of parameters
p1240[0...n]
Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the controller configuration of the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the closed-loop control mode.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1245
Inhib Vdc ctrl

Vdc_max controller enable
Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
Activates Vdc_max monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
Refer to: A07400, A07401, A07402, F07403, F07404, F07405, F07406

Notice:
An excessively high value in p1245 can possibly negatively influence the normal operation of the drive.
Note:
p1240 = 1, 3:
When the DC link voltage limit specified for the Motor Module is reached the following applies:
- the Vdc_max controller limits the regenerative energy in order that the DC link voltage is kept below the maximum
DC link voltage when braking.
- the ramp-down times are automatically increased.
p1240 = 2, 3:
When the switch-in threshold of the Vdc_min controller is reached (p1245), the following applies:
- the Vdc_min controller limits the energy taken from the DC link in order to keep the DC link voltage above the minimum DC link voltage when accelerating.
- the motor is braked in order to use its kinetic energy to buffer the DC link.
p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
When the threshold in r1242 or r1246 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404)
with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.
r1242
Vdc_max controller switch-in level / Vdc_max on_level

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.

If p1254 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC device: r1242 = 1.15 * Udc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1254 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1242 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note:
The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1242 and
the controller output is zero.

1-309
Parameter
List of parameters
p1243[0...n]
Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: CALC_MOD_CON
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1250, p1251, and p1252 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used corresponding to their
basic settings and based on a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1243.
If several modules are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the
ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the module involved.
Note:
The presetting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the
power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then
the dynamic factor must be optimized manually.
p1245[0...n]
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min on_level

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
65 [%]
Max
150 [%]
Factory setting
76 [%]
Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
DC/AC device: r1246[V] = p1245[%] * p0210
Dependency:
Refer to: p0210
Warning:
An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for
operating modes p1240 = 5, 6.
Note:
For SINAMICS GM/SM, the following applies:

Minimum value = 0.75, Maximum value = 0.90
r1246

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note:
The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1246 and
1-310

Parameter
List of parameters
p1247[0...n]
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case p1250, p1251,
p1252 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1247.
p1249[0...n]
Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
10.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.
Note:
For fast braking where the ramp-function generator tracking was active, it is possible to prevent the drive rotating in
the opposite direction by increasing the speed threshold and setting a final rounding-off time in the ramp-function
generator (p1131). This is supported using a dynamic setting of the speed controller.
p1250[0...n]
Vdc controller proportional gain / Vdc_ctrl Kp

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
100.00
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency:
The effective proportional gain is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
Note:
The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units, which are
connected to the DC link, can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1247 or p1243).
p1251[0...n]
Vdc controller integral time / Vdc_ctrl Tn

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency:
The effective integral time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).

1-311
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
An integral time is normally not required for single axis drives. For multi-axis drives on the other hand, it may be
possible to compensate for interference from other axes using the integral time (integral component) . An integral
time of 0 (default) deactivates the integral component of the controller.
p1252[0...n]
Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the rate time constant for the DC-link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller).
Dependency:
The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor).
p1254
Vdc_max controller automatic ON level detection / Vdc_max SenseOnLev

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.
Value:
0:
1:
p1255[0...n]
Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
Automatic detection inhibited

Automatic detection enabled

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10000.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1256 = 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07406
Notice:
If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1240 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1256[0...n]
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: F07405, F07406
1-312
Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1257 -> F07405

Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1257 -> F07405, t>p1255 -> F07406

Parameter
List of parameters
p1257[0...n]
Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
50.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized .
r1258
CO: Vdc controller output / Vdc_ctrl output

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6220
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)
Note:
The regenerative power limit p1531 is used for vector control to pre-control the Vdc_max controller. The lower the
power limit is set, the lower the correction signals of the controller when the voltage limit is reached.
p1260
Bypass configuration / Bypass config

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Bypass deactivated
Bypass with synchronization and overlap
Bypass with synchronization without overlap
Bypass without synchronization
Note:
If the bypass function is selected ((p1260 > 0), then when the power unit restarts after POWER OFF, the state of
the bypass switch is evaluated. This means that after the ramp-up, it is possible to directly change into the standby
mode. This is only possible for p1267 = 0 (bypass using the control signal) and if the control command after the system has been booted is still available (p1266). This function has a higher priority than the automatic restart function
(p1210).
The "bypass" function can only be switched out again (p1260 = 0) if the bypass is not active or the bypass function
has a fault.
r1261.0...9
CO/BO: Bypass control/status word / Bypass STW / ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Control and feedback signals of the bypass switch.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Signal name
Command switch motor - drive
Command switch motor - line supply
Synchronization requested
1 signal
Close
Close
Yes

0 signal
Open
Open
No
FP
-
1-313
Parameter
List of parameters
03
05
06
07
08
09
Staging status
Feedback signal switch motor - drive
Feedback signal switch motor - line supply
Bypass command (from p1266)
Feedback signal synchronization completed
(from p1268)
Staging requested (from p2369)
Active
Closed
Closed
Yes
Yes
Not active
Opened
Opened
No
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p2369
Note:
Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via which the switches in the motor feeder
cables should be controlled. These should be selected/dimensioned for switching under load.
p1262[0...n]
Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
20.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the dead time for non-synchronized bypass.
Note:
This parameter is used to define the changeover time of the contactors. It should not be shorter than the demagnetizing time of the motor (p0347). The total changeover time for the bypass is based on the total of p1262 plus the
OFF time for the relevant switch (p1274[x]).
p1263
Debypass delay time / Debypass t_del

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time to switch back to converter operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
p1264
Bypass delay time / Bypass t_del

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for switching to line operation for a non-synchronized bypass.
p1265
Bypass speed threshold / Bypass n_thresh

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
1480.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold to activate the bypass.
Note:
When selecting p1260 = 3 and p1267.1 = 1, the bypass is automatically activated when this speed is reached.
1-314

Parameter
List of parameters
p1266
BI: Bypass, control command / Bypass command

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the command to bypass.
p1267
Bypass changeover source configuration / Chngov_src config

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the cause that should initiate the bypass.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Note:
The parameter only has an effect for a non-synchronized bypass.
Signal name
Bypass via signal (BI: p1266)
Bypass via reaching the speed threshold
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
p1267 bit 0 = 1:
The bypass is initiated by setting a binary signal. When the command is reset, after the debypass delay time
(p1263) has expired, operation at the Motor Module is re-selected.
p1267 bit 1 = 1:
When the speed threshold entered in p1265 is reached, the bypass is switched in. The system only switches back
when the speed setpoint again falls below the threshold value.
p1268
BI: Bypass, feedback synchronization completed / FdbkSig sync compl

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
3819.2
Description:
Input for the feedback signal that synchronization was successfully completed.
Dependency:
Refer to: r3819
p1269[0...1]
BI: Bypass switch feedback signal / Bypass FS

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the feedback signal of the bypass switch.
Index:
[0] = Switch motor - drive

[1] = Switch motor - line supply
Note:
In the case of switches without a feedback signal, connect the corresponding control bit as the signal source:
p1269 index 0 = r1261 bit 0
p1269 index 1 = r1261 bit 1

1-315
Parameter
List of parameters
p1272
Simulation mode / Simulation mode

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
In the simulation mode, the closed-loop control or V/f control can be operated without motor.
The simulation mode is used to test the power unit. Even though the DC link voltage is missing, the pulses are
enabled when powering up. The DC link pre-charging is bypassed and the undervoltage detection is disabled.
Closed-loop speed control with an encoder is possible if the torque setpoint (r0079) is used in order to operate a
second drive in the closed-loop torque controlled mode.
Value:
0:
1:
Off
On
Dependency:
The following functions are deactivated in the simulation mode:

- motor data identification routine
- motor data identification routine, rotating without encoder
- pole position identification routine
For V/f control and encoderless vector control, flying restart is not carried out (refer to p1200).
Refer to: r0192, p1900, p1910, p1960, p1990
Refer to: A07825, F07826
Notice:
In simulation mode, binector output r0863.1 = 1 is set. This is why you need to check whether other devices are
powered up via this signal before activating simulation mode. You might need to disconnect the corresponding
BICO interconnection temporarily.
Note:
Simulation mode is only possible for DC link voltages below 40 V. In order that the closed-loop control can be calculated, the displayed DC link voltage (r0026, r0070) is set to the rated DC link voltage (refer to p0210). Closed-loop
current control and motor model are switched out (disabled) - the same is true for the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
When fault messages occur, the parameter is not automatically reset. This function is not implemented for
SINAMICS GM.
p1274[0...1]
Bypass switch monitoring time / Switch t_monit

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
5000 [ms]
Factory setting
1000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the bypass switch monitoring time.
Index:
[0] = Switch motor - drive

[1] = Switch motor - line supply
Note:
The monitoring is deactivated with p1274 = 0 ms. The changeover time for the bypass (p1262) is extended by the
time set in this parameter.
1-316

Parameter
List of parameters
p1275
Motor holding brake control word / Brake STW

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the control word for the motor holding brake.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
05
p1276
Motor holding brake, standstill detection, bypass / Brk standst bypass
Signal name
Inverting BI: 1219[0]
Brake with feedback

0 (Extended brk)
Description:
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2707
2707
2704
2704
2711
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2704
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
300.000 [s]
Sets the delay time for closing the brake at standstill.

After this time has expired, if the "close brake at standstill" or OFF1/OFF3 is present, the brake is closed and the
pulses are suppressed.
For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is deactivated - this means that the timer output is always zero.
p1277
Motor holding brake, braking threshold delay exceeded / Del thresh exceed.

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
300.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the signal "braking threshold exceeded" (BO: r1229.6).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1220, p1221, r1229
p1278
Brake control, diagnostics evaluation / Brake diagnostics

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the brake control type (with or without diagnostics evaluation).

Example for brake control with diagnostics evaluation.
- brake control in the Motor Modules in booksize format
- Safe Brake Relay for AC Drive
Example for brake control without diagnostics evaluation.
- Brake Relay for AC Drive

1-317
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Brake control with diagnostics evaluation

Brake control without diagnostics evaluation
Note:
If the configuration of the motor holding brake (p1215) is set to "no holding brake present" when booting, then an
automatic identification of the motor holding brake will be carried out. If a brake control is detected without diagnostics evaluation (e.g. Brake Relay for AC Drive), then the parameter is set to "brake control without diagnostics evaluation".
It is not permissible to parameterize "brake control without diagnostics evaluation" and also enable "safe brake control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
p1279[0...3]
BI: Motor holding brake, OR/AND logic operation / Brake OR AND

0 (Extended brk)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2707
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the OR/AND logic operation.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1229
Note:
[0]: OR logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.10.

[2]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r1229.11.
p1280[0...n]
Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctr config V/f

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the configuration of the controller for the DC link voltage (Vdc controller) in the V/f operating mode.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Note:
p1240 = 4, 5, 6:
Inhib Vdc ctrl

Vdc_max controller enable
Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) enable
Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller enable
Activates Vdc_max monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring
Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
When the threshold in r1282 or r1286 is reached, the DC link voltage monitoring initiates a fault (F07403 or F07404)
with a response and therefore reduces additional negative effects on the DC link voltage.
1-318

Parameter
List of parameters
r1282
Vdc_max controller switch-in level (V/f) / Vdc_max on_level

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller.

If p1294 = 0 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = off), then the following applies:
AC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * V_mains = 1.15 * sqrt(2) * p0210 (supply voltage)
DC/AC device: r1282 = 1.15 * Vdc = 1.15 * p0210 (supply voltage)
If p1294 = 1 (automatic sensing of the switch-in level = on), then the following applies:
r1282 = Vdc_max - 50.0 V (Vdc_max: Overvoltage threshold of the power unit)
Note:
The Vdc_max controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage falls below the threshold 0.95 * p1282 and
p1283[0...n]
Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_max controller).
100% means that p1290, p1291, and p1292 (gain, integral time, and rate time) are used in accordance with their
basic settings and on the basis of a theoretical controller optimization.
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1283.
Note:
p1285[0...n]
Vdc_min controller switch-in level (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min on_level

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
65 [%]
Max
150 [%]
Factory setting
76 [%]
Sets the switch-in level for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
The value is obtained as follows:
AC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * sqrt(2) * p0210
Warning:
DC/AC unit: p1286[V] = p1285[%] * p0210

An excessively high value may adversely affect normal drive operation. The values up to 150 % are intended for
operating modes p1240 = 5, 6.

1-319
Parameter
List of parameters
r1286

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the switch-in level for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Note:
The Vdc_min controller is not switched back off until the DC-link voltage rises above the threshold 1.05 * p1286 and
p1287[0...n]
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
10000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the dynamic factor for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
If subsequent optimization is required, this can be carried out using the dynamic factor. In this case, p1290, p1291,
and p1292 are weighted with the dynamic factor p1287.
Note:
p1288[0...n]
Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (V/f) /

Vdc_max factor RFG

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100.000
Factory setting
0.500
Description:
Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal
of the Vdc_max controller.
Note:
For values p1288 = 0.0 to 0.5, the controller dynamics are automatically adapted internally.
p1289[0...n]
Vdc_max controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh

0
Description:
1-320
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
10.00 [rpm]
Sets the lower speed threshold for the Vdc_max controller. When this speed threshold is undershot, the Vdc_max
control is switched out and the speed is controlled using the ramp-function generator.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1290[0...n]
Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
100.00
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
Note:
The gain factor is proportional to the capacitance of the DC link. The parameter is preset to a value that is optimally
adapted to the capacitance of the individual Motor Module. The capacitances of the other power units which are
connected to the DC link can be taken into account using the dynamic factor (p1287 or p1283).
p1291[0...n]
Vdc controller integral time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
40 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1292[0...n]
Vdc controller rate time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
10 [ms]
Description:
Sets the rate time constant for the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller).
p1293[0...n]
Vdc min controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
600.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
10.00 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller).
p1294
Vdc_max controller automatic detection ON signal level (V/f) / Vdc_max SenseOnLev

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Activates/deactivates the automatic sensing of the switch-in level for the Vdc_max controller. When the sensing
function is deactivated, the activation threshold r1282 for the Vdc_max controller is determined from the parameterized connection voltage p0210.

1-321
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Automatic detection inhibited

Automatic detection enabled
p1295[0...n]
Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10000.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the time threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering). If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the
required response can be parameterized.
Prerequisite: p1296 = 1.
Notice:
If a time threshold has been parameterized, the Vdc_max controller should also be activated (p1280 = 3) so that the
drive does not shut down with overvoltage when Vdc_min control is exited (due to the time violation) and in the
event of fault response OFF3. It is also possible to increase the OFF3 ramp-down time p1135.
p1296[0...n]
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the response for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
Re p1296 = 1:
Buffer Vdc until undervoltage, n<p1297 -> F07405

Buff. Vdc until undervolt., n<p1297 -> F07405, t>p1295 -> F07406
The quick stop ramp entered in p1135 must not be equal to zero, to prevent overcurrent shutdown if F07406 is triggered.
p1297[0...n]
Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
50.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed threshold for the Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering).
If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized .
r1298
CO: Vdc controller output (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl output

Description:
1-322
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6320
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the actual output of the Vdc controller (DC link voltage controller)

Parameter
List of parameters
p1300[0...n]
Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode / Op/cl-lp ctrl_mode

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS

6310, 6320
P-Group: V/f open-loop control
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
19
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the V/f control mode of the drive.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
19:
Recommend.:
The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors.
Dependency:
If you are working with reduced supply voltages (p0212, bit 0 = 1), only V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
(p1300 = 19) can be set as the operating mode.
Notice:
Active slip compensation is required in the V/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
V/f control with linear characteristic

V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
V/f control with parabolic characteristic
V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
V/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
V/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note:
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6, the slip compensation p1335 and the resonance damping p1338
are internally switched out (disabled) in order to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the voltage (when the operating point is constant).
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing over drive data
sets.
p1300[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS

6300, 8012
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
23
Factory setting
20
Description:
Sets the open and closed loop control mode of a drive.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
18:
19:
20:
21:
22:
23:
V/f control with linear characteristic

V/f control with linear characteristic and FCC
V/f control with parabolic characteristic
V/f control with parameterizable characteristic
V/f control with linear characteristic and ECO
V/f control for drives requiring a precise freq. (e.g. textiles)
V/f control for drives requiring a precise frequency and FCC
V/f control for a parabolic characteristic and ECO
I/f control with fixed current
V/f control with independent voltage setpoint
Speed control (encoderless)
Speed control (with encoder)
Torque control (encoderless)
Torque control (with encoder)

1-323
Parameter
List of parameters
Recommend.:
The use of the vector control operating modes is recommended for synchronous motors.
Dependency:
Closed-loop speed or torque control (with encoder) cannot be selected if the encoder type is not entered (p0400).
Closed-loop speed or torque control can be selected if the closed-loop speed/torque control was selected as operating mode (p0108.2).
Only operation with V/f characteristic is possible if the rated motor speed is not entered (p0311).
A reluctance motor can only be operated in a V/f control mode (p1300 < 20).
Sensorless control on separately excited synchronous motors is only possible with a VSM module (see p0150,
p0151).
Refer to: r0108, p0108, p0300, p0311, p0400, p1501
Notice:
Active slip compensation is required in the V/f control types with Eco mode (p1300 = 4, 7). The scaling of the slip
compensation (p1335) should be set so that the slip is completely compensated (generally 100%).
The Eco mode is only effective in steady-state operation and when the ramp-function generator is not bypassed. In
the case of analog setpoints, if required the tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down should be actively increased for
the ramp-function generator using p1148 in order to reliably signal a steady-state condition.
Note:
The closed-loop torque control can only be changed over in operation (p1300 = 20, 21) by selecting the closed-loop
speed control (p1501). At the changeover, the setting of p1300 does not change. In this case, the actual state is displayed in r1407, bit 2 and bit 3.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), slip compensation p1335, resonance damping
p1338, and the Imax frequency controller are switched off internally so that the output frequency can be set precisely. The Imax voltage controller remains active.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 4 and 7 (Eco mode), the efficiency can be optimized by varying the voltage (when the operating point is constant).
Separately-excited synchronous motors can only be operated in modes p1300 = 20, 21 and 23 - or for diagnostic
purposes in modes p1300 = 0, 3 and 18. For I/f control (p1300 = 18), the current amplitude can be set using p1609.
Both for V/f as well as for I/f control only a small load may be applied to the separately-excited synchronous motor
because the excitation current is not calculated as a function of the load.
During operation (the pulses enabled) the open-loop/closed-loop control mode cannot be changed by changing
over drive data sets.
p1300 is pre-assigned depending on r0108.2 and p0187.
p1302[0...n]
V/f control configuration / V/f configuration

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for V/f control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
U_output starting angle zero
Take the sign of the setpoint voltage into
account
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
If the bit is set the device will always start up with setpoint angle zero on pulse enable. This also affects the setpoint
angle for DC braking (p1231).
Re bit 01:
If the bit is set, in the case of V/f control with independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19) and negative setpoint voltages at the input of p1330, the setpoint angle is rotated through 180 degrees, thereby achieving a negative output
voltage. This renders the voltage boost p1310, p1311 ineffective.
1-324

Parameter
List of parameters
p1310[0...n]
Voltage boost permanent / V_boost perm

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
250.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Defines the voltage boost as a [%] referred to the rated motor current (p0305).
The magnitude of the permanent voltage boost is reduced with increasing frequency so that at the rated motor frequency, the rated motor voltage is present.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1310 (permanent voltage boost [%]) / 100 %
At low output frequencies, there is only a low output voltage in order to maintain the motor flux. However, the output
voltage can be too low in order to achieve the following:
- magnetize the induction motor.
- hold the load.
- compensate for losses in the system.
This is the reason that the output voltage can be increased using p1310.
The voltage boost can be used for both linear as well as square-law V/f characteristics and is calculated as follows:
Voltage boost = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance) x p1310 (permanent
voltage boost)
Dependency:
The current limit p0640 limits the boost.

For vector control, the permanent voltage boost (p1310) has no effect as the drive converter automatically sets the
optimum operating conditions.
Refer to: p1300, p1311, p1312, r1315
Notice:
The voltage boost increases the motor temperature (particularly at zero speed).
Note:
The voltage boost is only effective for V/f control (p1300).

The boost values are combined with one another if the permanent voltage boost (p1310) is used in conjunction with
other boost parameters (acceleration boost (p1311), voltage boost for starting (p1312)).
However, these parameters are assigned the following priorities: p1310 > p1311, p1312
p1311[0...n]
Voltage boost at acceleration / V_boost accelerate

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
250.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
p1311 only results in a voltage boost when accelerating and generates a supplementary torque to accelerate the
load.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
The magnitude of the boost in Volt at a frequency of zero is defined as follows:
Voltage boost [V] = 1.732 * p0305 (rated motor current [A]) x r0395 (stator/primary section resistance [ohm]) x
p1311 (voltage boost when accelerating [%]) / 100 %
Dependency:

Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1312, r1315
Notice:
The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note:
The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310

1-325
Parameter
List of parameters
p1312[0...n]
Voltage boost when starting / V_boost starting

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
250.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
p1312 causes an additional voltage boost when starting, however, only for the first acceleration phase.
The voltage boost becomes effective for a positive setpoint increase and disappears as soon as the setpoint has
been reached. The build-up and withdrawal of the voltage boost are smoothed.
Dependency:

Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, r1315
Notice:
The voltage boost results in a higher motor temperature increase.
Note:
The voltage boost when accelerating can improve the response to small, positive setpoint changes.
Assigning priorities for the voltage boosts: refer to p1310
r1315
Voltage boost total / V_boost total

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the total resulting voltage boost in volt (p1310 + p1311 + p1312).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1312
p1320[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
The programmable characteristic for the V/f control is defined using 4 points and 0 Hz/p1310.
Dependency:
Selects the freely programmable characteristic using p1300 = 3.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point.
Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note:
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327.
The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable V/f characteristic.
1-326

Parameter
List of parameters
p1321[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic voltage 1 / Vf char U1

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
Description:
Dependency:
This parameter specifies the voltage of the first point along the characteristic.
Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327
Note:
p1322[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 2 / Vf char f2

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
Dependency:
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.
p1323[0...n]

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
Description:
Dependency:
p1324[0...n]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the second point along the characteristic.

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
Dependency:
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.

1-327
Parameter
List of parameters
p1325[0...n]

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]
Description:
Dependency:
p1326[0...n]
This parameter specifies the voltage of the third point along the characteristic.

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
10000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
In the servo control mode the following applies:

The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
For vector control, the following applies:
This parameter specifies the frequency of the fourth point along the characteristic.
Dependency:

Activates the V/f control using p1317.
Note:

Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. For output frequencies above p1326, the characteristic is extrapolated with the gradient between the characteristic points
p1324/p1325 and p1326/p1327.
p1327[0...n]

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
10000.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Vrms]

The linear characteristic for the V/f control is defined by 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
This parameter specifies the voltage of the fourth point along the characteristic.
1-328

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:

Activates the V/f control using p1317.
Note:

Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz / p1319 and p1326 / p1327.
p1330[0...n]
CI: V/f control independent voltage setpoint / Vf V_set independ.

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6300
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the voltage setpoint for V/f control with an independent voltage setpoint (p1300 = 19).
Dependency:
Selects the V/f control with independent voltage setpoint via p1300 = 19.
Refer to: p1300
p1333[0...n]
V/f control FCC starting frequency / V/f FCC f_start

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the starting frequency at which FCC (Flux Current Control) is activated.
Dependency:
The correct operating mode must be set (p1300 = 1, 6).
Warning:
An excessively low value can result in instability.
Note:
For p1333 = 0 Hz, the FCC starting frequency is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.
p1334[0...n]
V/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation.
Note:
For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency.

1-329
Parameter
List of parameters
p1335[0...n]
Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
600.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Sets the setpoint for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
p1335 = 0.0 %: Slip compensation deactivated.
p1335 = 100.0 %: The slip is completely compensated.
Dependency:
Prerequisite for a precise slip compensation for p1335 = 100 % are the precise motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360).
If the parameters are not precisely known, a precise compensation can be achieved by varying p1335.
For V/f control types with Eco optimization (4 and 7), the slip compensation must be activated in order to guarantee
correct operation.
Note:
The purpose of slip compensation is to maintain a constant motor speed regardless of the applied load. The fact
that the motor speed decreases with increasing load is a typical characteristic of induction motors.
For synchronous motors, this effect does not occur and the parameter has no effect in this case.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sector), the slip compensation is internally disabled in
order to be able to precisely set the output frequency.
If p1335 is changed during commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
p1336[0...n]
Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
600.00 [%]
Factory setting
250.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the limit value for slip compensation in [%] referred to r0330 (motor rated slip).
r1337
CO: Actual slip compensation / Slip comp act val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual compensated slip [%] referred to r0330 (rated motor slip).
Dependency:
p1335 > 0 %: Slip compensation active.

Refer to: p1335
1-330

Parameter
List of parameters
p1338[0...n]
V/f mode resonance damping gain / Vf Res_damp gain

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
100.00
Factory setting
0.00
Description:
Sets the gain for resonance damping for V/f control.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1300, p1339, p1349
Note:
The resonance damping function dampens active current oscillations that frequency occur under no-load conditions.
The resonance damping is active in a range of approximately 5 ... 90 % of the rated motor frequency (p0310), but
up to a maximum of 45 Hz.
For the open-loop control modes p1300 = 5 and 6 (textile sectors), the resonance damping is internally disabled in
order that the output frequency can be precisely set.
p1339[0...n]
V/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Vf Res_damp T

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [ms]
Max
1000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
20.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the filter time constant for resonance damping for V/f control.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1300, p1338, p1349
p1340[0...n]
I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
0.500
Factory setting
0.000
Sets the proportional gain of the I_max voltage controller.

The I_max controller reduces the drive converter output current if the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded.
In the V/f operating modes (p1300) for the I_max control, one controller is used that acts on the output frequency
and one controller that acts on the output voltage. The frequency controller reduces the current by decreasing the
converter output frequency. The frequency is reduced down to a minimum value (equaling twice rated slip). If the
overcurrent condition cannot be successfully resolved using this measure, then the drive converter output voltage is
reduced using the I_max voltage controller. Once the overcurrent condition has been resolved, the drive is accelerated along the ramp set in p1120 (ramp-up time).
Dependency:
In the V/f modes (p1300) for textile applications and for external voltage setpoints, only the I_max voltage controller
is used.
Notice:
When deactivating the I_max controller, the following must be carefully observed:
When the maximum current (r0067) is exceeded, the output current is no longer reduced, however, overcurrent
alarm messages are generated. The drive is shut down if the overcurrent limit (r0209) is exceeded.
Note:
The I_max limiting controller becomes ineffective if the ramp-function generator is deactivated with p1122 = 1.
p1341 = 0: I_max frequency controller deactivated and I_max voltage controller activated over the complete speed
range.

1-331
Parameter
List of parameters
p1341[0...n]
I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
50.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.300 [s]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1340
Note:
When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is deactivated and only the current limiting
controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346).
r1343
CO: I_max controller frequency output / I_max_ctrl f_outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the effective frequency limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1340
r1344
I_max controller voltage output / I_max_ctrl V_outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the amount by which the converter output voltage is reduced.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1340
p1345[0...n]
I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_V_ctrl Kp

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100000.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1340
Note:
The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC brake (refer to p1232).
1-332

Parameter
List of parameters
p1346[0...n]
I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_V_ctrl Tn

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
50.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.030 [s]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the I_max voltage controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1340
Note:
p1346 = 0: Integral time of the I_max voltage controller deactivated.

The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC brake (refer to p1232).
p1349[0...n]
V/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Vf res_damp F_max

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
3000.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.00 [Hz]
Sets the maximum output frequency for resonance damping for V/f control.
Resonance damping is inactive above this output frequency.
Dependency:
Note:
For p1349 = 0, the changeover limit is automatically set to 95 % of the rated motor frequency - however, to a max.
of 45 Hz.
p1350[0...n]
Soft starting / Soft starting

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1690
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets whether the voltage is continuously increased during the magnetizing phase (p1350 = 1, On) or whether it
jumps directly to the voltage boost (p1350 = 0, Off).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
The settings for this parameter have the following advantages and disadvantages:
Off
On
0 = off (jump directly to voltage boost)

Advantage: Flux is established quickly -> torque is quickly available
Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized
1 = on (voltage is continually established)
Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate
Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later

1-333
Parameter
List of parameters
p1351[0...n]
CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6310
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-300.00 [%]
Max
300.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the frequency setting value at the slip compensation output for starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency:
Setting parameter p1351 > 0 activates slip compensation automatically (p1335 = 100%) if it has been deactivated
up to this point.
Notice:
Note:
Connected with p1352 a value of 100% corresponds to the motor rated slip r0330.
p1356[0...n]
CI: V/f control, angular setpoint / Vf ang setpoint

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the differential angular generation for V/f control.
p1358[0...n]
Angular difference, symmetrizing, actual angle / Sym act angle

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the dead time for the symmetrizing of the actual angle value for the differential angular generation.
The selected multiplier refers to the current controller clock cycle (dead time= p1358 * p0115[0]).
r1359
CO: Angular difference / Angular difference

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Description:
Displays the output of the differential angular generation.
Note:
The difference between the setpoint angle, read-in in p1356 and the actual value of the V/f control delayed with
p1358 is displayed.
1-334

Parameter
List of parameters
p1400[0...n]
Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6490
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1000 0000 0010 0001 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the closed-loop speed control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
05
06
14
15
Note:
Signal name
Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
Encoderless vector control freeze I comp
Acceleration pre-control source
Reference model speed setpoint, I component
Kp/Tn adaptation active
Free Tn adaptation active
Torque pre-control
Encoderless vector control, speed pre-control
1 signal
Yes
Yes
External (p1495)
On
0 signal
No
No
Internal (n_set)
Off
FP
6040
6040
6031
6031
Yes
Yes
Always active
Yes
No
No
For n_ctrl enab
No
6030
Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, the I component of the speed controller is kept when changing into the open-loop controlled
mode.
p1401[0...n]
Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6491
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1110 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for flux setpoint control
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Flux setpoint soft starting active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
01
Flux setpoint differentiation active
Yes
No
02
Flux build-up control active
Yes
No
03
04
05
06
07
08
Flux characteristic, load-dependent

Flux controller (ASM with encoder)
Flux impression (ASM with encoder)
Quick magnetizing
Pre-control speed limitation
Speed limiting controller
Yes
Yes
with model chngov
Yes
Yes
With M_limits
No
No
From 30 % n_rated
No
No
With I_limits
Note:
FP
6722,
6725
6723,
6726
6722,
6723,
6725,
6726
6725
6722
6640
6640
Re bit 00 (not for permanent-magnet synchronous motors):

Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346.
Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint
p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. When quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is
selected, soft starting is internally deactivated and alarm A07416 is displayed.
The flux differentiation can be switched out if a significant ripple occurs in the field-generating current setpoint
(r0075) when entering the field weakening range. However, this is not suitable for fast acceleration operations
because then, the flux decays more slowly and the voltage limiting responds.

1-335
Parameter
List of parameters

The flux build-up control operates during the magnetizing phase p0346 of the induction motor. If it is switched out, a
constant current setpoint is injected and the flux is built up corresponding to the rotor time constant. When quick
magnetizing (p1401.6 = 1) is selected and when flux build-up control is de-energized alarm A07416 is displayed.
Re bit 03:
The load-dependent calculation of the flux characteristic is only available for separately-excited synchronous
motors.
Re bit 04 (only for vector control with sensor):
The flux controller does not operate in the range of the current model and not in the range of the flux impression
(refer to p1750.4).
Re bit 05 (only for vector control with sensor):
Extremely rugged control operation is possible by directly toggling between the current model and flux impression.
We therefore recommend that, in addition, the time-controlled model change is switched in (p1750.4 = 1) or the
model changeover limits are significantly increased (p1752 > 0.35 * p0311; p1753 = 5 %).
Re bit 06 (not for induction motors):
Magnetizing is performed with maximum current (0.9 * r0067). With active identification of the stator resistance (see
p0621) quick magnetizing is internally deactivated and alarm A07416 is displayed. During a flying restart of a rotating motor (see p1200) no quick magnetizing takes place.
Re bit 07:
if the speed of the drive exceeds the effective speed limit of the speed limiting controller, the torque limit is reduced
linearly to zero as the deviation becomes greater. This reduces the integral component of the speed controller and,
in turn, the overshoot during load shedding (see also F07901 and p2162).
Re bit 08:
The speed limiting controller sets the speed to maximum by opening the torque limits as far as the current limits (bit
08 = 0) or taking the torque limits into account (bit 08 = 1).
p1402[0...n]
Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0001 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
08
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
Speed-following error correction active
Current controller adaptation active
Changeover current model/voltage model
with speed setpoint
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
When the bit is set, the speed following error is compensated that is obtained as a result of the smoothing time constant in p1441.
Re bit 02:
The current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393) is only calculated when the bit is set.
Re bit 08:
Only with encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors.
1-336

Parameter
List of parameters
r1406.4...15
CO/BO: Control word speed controller / STW n_ctrl

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word of the speed controller.
Bit field:
Bit
04
05
08
11
12
15
r1407.0...15
CO/BO: Status word speed controller / ZSW n_ctrl
Signal name
Hold speed controller I component
Set speed controller I component
Travel to fixed stop
Droop enable
Torque control active
Set speed adaptation controller I component

1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
6040
6040
8012
6030
6060
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the speed controller.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Signal name
V/f control active
Encoderless operation active
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
03
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Speed control active

Speed controller I component frozen
Speed controller I component set
Torque limit reached
Upper torque limit active
Lower torque limit active
Droop enabled
Speed setpoint limited
Encoderless operation due to a fault
I/f control active
Torque limit reached (without pre-control)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

FP
6030,
6060,
8010
6040
6040
6040
6060
6060
6060
6030
6030
6060
1-337
Parameter
List of parameters
r1408.0...15
CO/BO: Status word current controller / ZSW I_ctrl

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2530
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the current controller status word.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
03
10
11
12
Signal name
Current ctrl act
Id control, I component limiting
Voltage limiting
Speed adaptation, limiting
Speed adaptation, speed deviation
Motor stalled
1 signal
Active
Active
Active
Active
Out tolerance
Yes
0 signal
Not active
Not active
Not active
Not active
In tolerance
No
15
Excitation current differential exceeded
Yes
No
p1416[0...n]
FP
6714
6714
6719
6719,
8018
-
Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
5000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
Note:
For SERVO (p0107) the following applies:

This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a PT1 low pass.
p1428[0...n]
Speed pre-control balancing dead time / n_prectrBal t_dead

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6031
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0
Max
3.0
Factory setting
0.0
Sets the dead time to symmetrize the speed setpoint for active torque pre-control.
The selected multiplier refers to the speed controller clock cycle (dead time= p1428 * p0115[1]).
Dependency:
In conjunction with p1429, this parameter can emulate the characteristics of how the torque is established (dynamic
response of closed current control loop).
The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 =
1). For p1400.2 = 0, a fixed dead time is used.
1-338

Parameter
List of parameters
p1429[0...n]
Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectr bal T

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

5210, 6031
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
10000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the time constant (PT1) for symmetrizing the speed setpoint for active torque pre-control.
Dependency:
In conjunction with p1428, this parameter can emulate the characteristics of how torque is established (dynamic
response of the closed current control loop).
The parameter is only effective if the acceleration model is supplied using external acceleration signals (p1400.2 =
1). For p1400.2 = 0, time constant p1442 (or p1452 for encoderless vector control) is used.
r1431
CO: Speed pre-control to motor model / n_pctrl mot_mod

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint for pre-controlling the motor model with sensorless vector control.
Note:
With p1400 bit 15 = 0 or encoderless torque control, the pre-control signal is kept continuously in the range of the
voltage model.
p1433[0...n]
Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Hz]
Max
8000.0 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.0 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the natural frequency of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller.
Recommend.:
The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual
speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled.
Dependency:
Together with p1434 and p1435, the characteristics (in the time domain) of the closed-loop speed control (P) can be
emulated.
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. For encoderless vector control (p1300 = 20) the reference
model is disabled in open-loop speed controlled operation (refer to p1755).

1-339
Parameter
List of parameters
p1434[0...n]
Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
5.000
Factory setting
1.000
Description:
Sets the damping of a PT2 element for the reference model of the speed controller.
Recommend.:
Dependency:
In conjunction with p1433 and p1435, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be
emulated.
The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1.
p1435[0...n]
Speed controller reference model dead time / n_ctrRefMod t_dead

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
3.00
Factory setting
0.00
Sets the "fractional" dead time for the reference model of the speed controller.
This parameter emulates the computing dead time of the proportionally controlled speed control loop.
The selected multiplier refers to the speed controller clock cycle (dead time= p1435 * p0115[1]).
Recommend.:
Dependency:
In conjunction with p1433 and p1434, the characteristics (in time) of the P-controlled speed control loop can be
emulated.
Refer to: p0115, p1433, p1434
r1436
CO: Speed controller reference model speed setpoint output / RefMod n_set outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint at the output of the reference model.
Dependency:

1-340

Parameter
List of parameters
p1437[0...n]
CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6031
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1436[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint for the integral component of the speed controller.
Dependency:

Refer to: p1400
Caution:
In should be ensured that a speed setpoint is selected as signal source that corresponds to the setpoint for the P
component of the speed controller.
r1438
CO: Speed controller, speed setpoint / n_ctrl n_set

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

1700, 5030, 5040, 5042, 5210,
5300, 5620, 6031, 6040
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the speed setpoint after setpoint limiting for the P component of the speed controller.
For V/f operation, the value that is displayed is of no relevance.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1439
Note:
In the standard state (the reference model is deactivated), r1438 = r1439.
r1439
Speed setpoint, I component / n_set I_comp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6031
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed setpoint for the I component of the speed controller (output of the reference model after the setpoint limiting).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1438
Note:
In the standard state (the reference model is deactivated), r1438 = r1439.
p1440[0...n]
CI: Speed controller speed actual value / n_ctrl n_act

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
63[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the speed actual value of the speed controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1443

1-341
Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
Speed control with encoder (p1300 = 21):

For the speed or position signal of the motor model there must always be a motor encoder available (evaluation via
SMC/SMI; see also p0400). The actual speed of the motor r0061 and the position data for synchronous motors continue to come from this motor encoder and are not affected by the setting of parameter p1440.
Notice:
Speed control without encoder (p1300 = 20):

Dependent upon the transmission path of the external speed signal there will be dead times which have to be taken
into account when setting the speed controller parameters (p1470, p1472) and can lead to dynamic losses accordingly. It is for this reason that signal transmission times have to be kept as low as possible.
So that the speed controller can also work at standstill, set p1750 bit 2 = 1 (controlled operation as of zero speed for
passive loads). If you do not make this setting, operation will switch to open-loop speed control in the low speed
range, switching the closed-loop speed controller off and rendering the measured actual speed ineffective.
p1441[0...n]
Actual speed smoothing time / n_ist T_smooth

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
1000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the speed actual value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0063
Notice:
Smoothing times above 20 ms are only possible if the drive is accelerated or braked with the appropriately long
ramp-up/ramp-down times. Otherwise, significant torque errors can occur and there is the danger that the drive is
powered down (tripped) with F07902 (motor stalled).
Note:
The speed actual value should be smoothed for encoders with a low pulse number or for resolvers.
After this parameter has been changed, we recommend that the speed controller is adapted and/or the speed controller settings checked Kp (p1460) and Tn (p1462).
p1442[0...n]
Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time / n_ctr n_act T_smth

0 (n/M)
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
32000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
4.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed value of the speed controller for closed-loop control with encoder.
Note:
The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the
speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).
r1443
CO: Speed actual value at actual value input speed controller / n_act n_ctrl inp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the speed actual value at the speed controller's free-wiring actual value input p1440.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1440
Note:
This speed signal is only used by the speed controller and not by the motor model.
1-342

Parameter
List of parameters
r1444
Speed controller, speed setpoint steady-state (static) / n_ctrl n_set stat

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5030
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the sum of all speed setpoints that are present.

The following sources are available for the displayed setpoint:
- setpoint at the ramp-function generator input (r1119).
- speed setpoint 1 (p1155).
- speed setpoint 2 (p1160).
- speed setpoint for the speed pre-control (p1430).
- setpoint from DSC (for DSC active).
- setpoint via PC (for master control active).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1119, p1155, p1160
r1445
CO: Actual speed smoothed / n_act smooth

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the actual smoothed actual speed for speed control.
p1451[0...n]
Motor model speed actual value smoothing time SLVC / Mot_mod n_act t_sm

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
100 [ms]
Factory setting
4 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the speed actual value calculated by the motor model in sensorless operation.
p1452[0...n]
Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
32000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
10.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control.
Note:
The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the
speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4).

1-343
Parameter
List of parameters
r1454
CO: Speed controller system deviation I component / n_ctrl sys dev Tn

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the system deviation of the I component of the speed controller.

When the reference model is inactive (p1433 = 0 Hz), this parameter corresponds to the system deviation of the
complete PI controller (r1454 = r0064).
p1455[0...n]
CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the source for the adaptation signal to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1456, p1457, p1458, p1459
p1456[0...n]
Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
400.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Sets the lower starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1455, p1457, p1458, p1459
Note:
If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition
p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458.
p1457[0...n]
Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
400.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Sets the upper starting point of the adaptation range for the additional adaptation of the P gain of the speed controller.
The values are in % and refer to the set source of the adaptation signal.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1458, p1459
Note:
1-344

Parameter
List of parameters
p1458[0...n]
Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the adaptation factor before the adaptation range (0 % ... p1456) to additionally adapt the P gain of the
speed/velocity controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1459
Note:
p1459[0...n]
Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the adaptation factor after the adaptation range (> p1457) to additionally adapt the P gain of the speed/velocity
controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1455, p1456, p1457, p1458
Note:
p1460[0...n]
Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower

0 (n/M)
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
999999.000
Factory setting
0.300
Description:
Sets the P gain of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range (0 ... p1464). This value corresponds to
the basic setting of the P gain of the speed controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %).
Dependency:
For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions.
Refer to: p1461, p1464, p1465
p1461[0...n]
Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Kp n upper

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the P gain of the speed controller for the upper adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred
to the P gain for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1460).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1460, p1464, p1465
Note:
p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.

1-345
Parameter
List of parameters
p1462[0...n]
Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower

0 (n/M)
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS

5042, 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
100000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
20.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integration time of the speed controller before the adaptation speed range (0 ... p1464). This value corresponds to the basic setting of the integral time of the speed controller without adaptation (p1461 = 100 %).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1463, p1464, p1465
p1463[0...n]
Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Tn n upper

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the integral time of the speed controller after the adaptation speed range (> p1465). The entry is made referred
to the integral time for the lower adaptation speed range of the speed controller (% referred to p1462).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1462, p1464, p1465
Note:
point p1464, then the controller integral time below p1465 is adapted with p1463. This means that an adaptation
can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1464[0...n]
Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the lower adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective below this speed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1465
Note:
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
p1465[0...n]
Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
210000.00 [rpm]
Sets the upper adaptation speed of the speed controller. No adaptation is effective above this speed.
For P gain, p1460 * p1461 is effective. For the integral time, p1462 * p1463 is effective.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1464
Note:
point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can
be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters.
1-346

Parameter
List of parameters
p1466[0...n]
CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6050
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the P gain of the speed controller. This also makes the effective P gain
(including adaptations) scalable.
r1468
CO: Speed controller P-gain effective / n_ctrl Kp eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective P gain of the speed controller.
Dependency:
For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions. In this case, connector output signal r1468 is increased by a factor of 100 in order to improve the resolution.
r1469
Speed controller integral time effective / n_ctrl Tn eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller.
p1470[0...n]
Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
999999.000
Factory setting
0.300
Sets the P gain for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
Dependency:
For p0528 = 1, the speed controller gain is represented without any dimensions.
Note:
The product p0341 * p0342 is taken into account when automatically calculating the speed controller (p0340 = 1, 3,
4).

1-347
Parameter
List of parameters
p1472[0...n]
Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
100000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
20.0 [ms]
Description:
Set the integral time for encoderless operation for the speed controller.
p1475[0...n]
CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the torque setting value when starting up with motor holding brake.
Dependency:
The switching in of the torque setting value for the motor holding brake has a higher priority than the setting of the
integrator value using p1477 and p1478.
Note:
The setting of the integral output of the speed controller begins after magnetizing (see p0346, r0056 bit 4) and ends
at the end of the brake control opening time p1216. A setting value of zero means that no setting procedure will take
place.
p1476[0...n]
BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

5042, 5210, 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller.
p1477[0...n]
BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

5042, 5210, 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to set the integrator setting value (p1478).
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
For the interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" (p2038 = 1), p1477 and p1478 are used for the signal STW2.6
(integrator inhibit, speed controller).
1-348

Parameter
List of parameters
p1478[0...n]
CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the integrator setting value for the velocity controller.
The signal to set this integrator setting value is interconnected via p1477.
Dependency:
The setting value of the speed controller integrator is weighted with the scaling factor of the signal source in p1479.
If p1478 is interconnected to the integral output of the speed controller (r1482), then after the magnetizing time
(r0346) and if the speed controller is enabled, the integral component of the controller is set to the last value before
the pulse inhibit. This value is set if no setting command (p1477) is interconnected or, at the instant that the pulses
were inhibited, a setting command is available, which is not deactivated up to the next time that the pulses are
inhibited. For encoderless vector control, in addition p1400.1 should be set to 1 so that when the drive is stopped,
the integral component of the speed controller is not controlled down to zero.
In order that when setting the integrator output, only the static torque is detected, we recommend that the accelerating torque is completely pre-controlled (e.g. p1496).
If p1478 is interconnected to another output other than r1482, then after magnetizing and speed controller enable,
the integral output is set once if the setting command is not interconnected (p1477 = 0).
Notice:
p1479[0...n]
CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6040
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller.
Dependency:
r1480
CO: Speed controller PI torque output / n_ctrl PI-M_output

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5042, 5060, 5210, 6060
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the PI speed controller.
r1481
CO: Speed controller P torque output / n_ctrl P-M_output

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5210, 6040
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the P speed controller.

1-349
Parameter
List of parameters
r1482
CO: Speed controller I torque output / n_ctrl I-M_output

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5210, 6030, 6040
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque setpoint at the output of the I speed controller.
p1486[0...n]
CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the compensation torque to be output within the droop calculation.
p1487[0...n]
Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-2000.0 [%]
Max
2000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation.
p1488[0...n]
Droop input source / Droop input source

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the source for droop feedback.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1489, r1490, p1492
1-350
Droop feedback not connected

Droop from torque setpoint
Droop from speed controller output
Droop from integral output, speed controller

Parameter
List of parameters
p1489[0...n]
Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
0.500
Factory setting
0.050
Description:
Sets the scaling for the droop feedback
Dependency:
Refer to: p1488, r1490, p1492
Note:
Example:
A value of 0.05 means that for a torque equal to the rated motor torque, the rated motor speed is reduced by 5 %.
r1490
CO: Droop feedback speed reduction / Droop n_reduction

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the output signal of the droop calculation. The droop feedback result is subtracted from the speed setpoint
when activated (p1492).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1488, p1489, p1492
p1492[0...n]
BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1488, p1489, r1490
Note:
Even when not enabled, the droop speed is calculated but not subtracted from the setpoint speed. This makes it
possible to subtract the result of this calculation from the speed of another drive.
r1493
CO: Moment of inertia, total / M_inertia total

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6031
Units group: 25_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kgm]
Max
- [kgm]
Factory setting
- [kgm]
Displays the parameterized total moment of inertia ((p0341 * p0342) + p1496) without evaluation by the scaling via
p1497.

1-351
Parameter
List of parameters
p1495[0...n]
CI: Acceleration pre-control / a_prectrl

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6031
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2007
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the acceleration pre-control.
Dependency:
The signal source for the acceleration is activated with p1400.2 = 1.

For p1400.2 = 0, the acceleration pre-control is calculated from the speed setpoint change from r0062.
For p1400.2 = 0 and activate reference model (p1400.3 = 1) the acceleration pre-control is switched out.
Note:
If the acceleration is entered as external signal, then the accelerating torque is calculated as follows (r1518):
r1518 = acceleration (% of p2007) / 100 % * (p2007 * 60 s) / p0311 * r0345 / 1 s * r0333
p1496[0...n]
Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
10000.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the acceleration pre-control of the speed/velocity controller.
Dependency:
When the reference model is activated (p1400.3 = 1) and for an internal acceleration pre-control (p1400.2 = 0), the
acceleration pre-control is switched out (disabled). The reference model (p1400.3 = 1) and external acceleration
pre-control (p1400.2 = 1) can be operated together.
Note:
The parameter is set to 100% by the rotating measurement (refer to p1960).

The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint)
and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled.
We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash.
p1497[0...n]
CI: Moment of inertia, scaling / M_mom inert scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

6030, 6031
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the moment of inertia.
p1499[0...n]
Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6030
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
400.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the acceleration integrator at low speeds (only for encoderless torque control).
Dependency:
1-352

Parameter
List of parameters
p1500[0...n]
Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints / Macro CI M_set

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999999
Factory setting
0

The Connector Inputs (CI) for the torque setpoints of the appropriate Command Data Set (CDS) are appropriately
interconnected.
Example:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, r8573
Notice:
group!
Note:
software.
CI: Connector Input
p1501[0...n]
BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

5060, 6060
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for toggling between speed and torque control.
Dependency:
The input connectors to enter the torque are provided using p1511, p1512 and p1513.
Refer to: p1300
Caution:
If the closed-loop torque control is not activated (p1300) and a change is made to closed-loop torque control
(p1501), OFF1 (p0840) does not have its own braking response but pulse suppression when standstill is detected
(p1226, p1227).
Notice:
Note:
0 signal: Closed-loop speed control

1 signal: Closed-loop torque control
p1503[0...n]
CI: Torque setpoint / M_set

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the torque setpoint for torque control.
Note:
A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selection was made using the changeover source in p1501.
it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501.

1-353
Parameter
List of parameters
r1508
CO: Torque setpoint before supplementary torque / M_set bef. M_suppl

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

6722
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Displays the torque setpoint before entering the supplementary torque.

For closed-loop speed control, r1508 corresponds to the speed controller output; for closed-loop torque control,
r1508 corresponds to the torque setpoint of the signal source assigned in p1503.
p1511[0...n]
CI: Supplementary torque 1 / M_suppl 1

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for supplementary torque 1.
p1512[0...n]
CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for scaling the supplementary torque 1.
p1513[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
p1514[0...n]
Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-354
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-2000.0 [%]
Max
2000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2.

Parameter
List of parameters
r1515
Supplementary torque total / M_suppl total

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Displays the total supplementary torque.

The displayed value is the total of supplementary torque values 1 and 2 (p1511, p1512, p1513, p1514).
r1516
CO: Supplementary torque and acceleration torque / M_suppl + M_accel

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6060
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Displays the total supplementary torque and the accelerating torque.

The displayed value is the total of the smoothed supplementary torque and the accelerating torque (p1516 =
p1518[1] + r1515).
p1517[0...n]
Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

6060
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
100.00 [ms]
Factory setting
4.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant of the accelerating torque.
Note:
For servo drives, the parameter is only effective in encoderless operation.

For vector drives, the acceleration pre-control is inhibited if the smoothing is set to the maximum value.
r1518[0...1]
CO: Accelerating torque / M_accel

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6060
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
[1] = Smoothed
Dependency:
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496

1-355
Parameter
List of parameters
p1520[0...n]
CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6630
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Sets the fixed, upper torque limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1521, p1522, p1523, r1538, r1539
Danger:
Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion.
Notice:
Note:
The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
p1521[0...n]
CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS

6630
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-20000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Sets the fixed, lower torque limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1520, p1522, p1523
Danger:
Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor accelerating in an uncontrollable fashion.
Notice:
Note:
The torque limit is limited to 400% of the rated motor torque. When automatically calculating the motor/closed-loop
control parameters (p0340), the torque limit is set to match the current limit (p0640).
p1522[0...n]
CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1520[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523
Danger:
Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
1-356

Parameter
List of parameters
p1523[0...n]
CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1521[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the lower torque limit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522
Danger:
Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
p1524[0...n]
CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-2000.0 [%]
Max
2000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Sets the scaling for the upper torque limit.
Notice:
Note:
This parameter can be freely interconnected.

The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
p1525[0...n]
CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-2000.0 [%]
Max
2000.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Sets the scaling for the lower torque limit.
Notice:
Note:
This parameter can be freely interconnected.

The value has the meaning stated above if it is interconnected from connector input p1528.
r1526
CO: Torque limit upper without offset / M_max up w/o offs

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6630, 6640
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the upper torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529

1-357
Parameter
List of parameters
r1527
CO: Torque limit lower without offset / M_max low w/o offs

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6630, 6640
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the lower torque limit of all torque limits without offset.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529
p1528[0...n]
CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1524[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limit in p1522.
Danger:
For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:

Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Notice:
p1529[0...n]
CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1525[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limit in p1523.
Danger:
For p1400.4 = 0 (torque limiting, upper/lower) the following applies:

Positive values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled
manner.
Notice:
p1530[0...n]
Power limit motoring / P_max mot

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: 14_5
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [kW]
Max
100000.00 [kW]
Factory setting
0.00 [kW]
Description:
Sets the power limit when motoring.
Dependency:
Note:

The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.
1-358

Parameter
List of parameters
p1531[0...n]
Power limit regenerative / P_max gen

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6640
Units group: 14_5
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [kW]
Max
-0.01 [kW]
Factory setting
-0.01 [kW]
Description:
Sets the regenerative power limit.
Dependency:
Note:
The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power.

For power units without regenerative feedback into the line supply, the regenerative power limit is preset to 30% of
the motoring power limit p1530 and in the ratio rated drive converter power to rated motor power.
r1533
Current limit torque-generating total / Iq_max total

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6640
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the maximum torque/force generating current as a result if all current limits.
r1536
Current limit maximum torque-generating current / Isq_max

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the maximum limit for the torque-generating current component.
r1537
Current limit minimum torque-generating current / Isq_min

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component.

1-359
Parameter
List of parameters
r1538
CO: Upper effective torque limit / M_max upper eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

5610, 5650, 6060, 6640
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the currently effective upper torque limit.
Note:
The effective upper torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected upper torque limit p1520, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: Further variable torque limiting is possible (e.g. binector input
p1540).
The torque limit p1520 can be recalculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
r1539
CO: Lower effective torque limit / M_max lower eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

5610, 5650, 6060, 6640
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the currently effective lower torque limit.
Note:
The effective lower torque limit is reduced with respect to the selected lower torque limit p1521, if the current limit
p0640 is reduced or the rated magnetizing current of the induction motor p0320 is increased.
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: This may be the case for rotating measurements (see p1960).
The following applies in the case of VECTOR: Further variable torque limiting is possible (e.g. binector input
p1541).
The torque limit p1520 can be recalculated using p0340 = 1, 3 or 5.
p1540[0...n]
CI: Torque limit speed controller upper scaling / M_max n-ctr upScal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output.
p1541[0...n]
CI: Torque limit. speed controller lower scaling / M_max nctr lowScal

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-360
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1545[0...n]
BI: Activates travel to a fixed stop / TfS activation

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

8012
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate the "travel to fixed stop" function
1: Travel to fixed stop is active
0: Travel to fixed stop is inactive
Notice:
Note:
EPOS uses the parameter (refer to p2686).

When traveling to fixed stop, the fault F07900 "motor locked" is suppressed.
r1547[0...1]
CO: Torque limit for speed controller output / M_max outp n_ctrl

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6060
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque limit to limit the speed controller output.
Index:
[0] = Upper limit

[1] = Lower limit
r1548[0...1]
CO: Stall current limit torque-generating maximum / Isq_max stall

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the limit for the torque-generating current component using the stall calculation, the current limit of the
Motor Module as well as the parameterization in p0640.
Index:
[0] = Upper limit

[1] = Lower limit

1-361
Parameter
List of parameters
p1551[0...n]
BI: Torque limit variable/fixed signal source / M_lim var/fixS_src

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

6060, 6630
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source to change over the torque limits between variable and fixed torque limit.
1 signal from BI: p1551:
The variable torque limit applies (fixed torque limit + scaling).
0 signal from BI: p1551:
The fixed torque limit applies.
Example:
In order that for a Quick Stop (OFF3) the fixed torque limit is effective, BI: p1551 must be interconnected to r0899.5.
p1552[0...n]
CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the upper torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.
p1554[0...n]
CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output without taking
into account the current and power limits.
p1555[0...n]
CI: Power limit / P_max

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6640
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: r2004
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the motoring and negative regenerative power limit.
Dependency:
Note:
The resulting power limit when motoring is the minimum from p1530 and the signal that is read in, the resulting
regenerative power limit is the maximum from p1531 and the negative signal that is read in.
1-362

Parameter
List of parameters
p1556[0...n]
Power limit scaling / P_max_scale

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6640
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
0.00
Sets the scaling of the signal source for the motoring and negative regenerative power limit.
0 signifies no power limiting.
p1569[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
3841[0]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p3842
Notice:
The signal input is after the torque limit (r1538, r1539). For vector drives, the signals that are entered are only limited by the current and power limits.
Note:
The signal input is preferably used to enter the friction characteristic. The friction compensation is also effective if
the speed controller output reaches its torque limits, but the current limits have still not been reached (this only
applies to vector drives).
p1570[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6722
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
50.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Sets the flux setpoint referred to rated motor flux.
Notice:
Note:
For p1570 > 100%, the flux setpoint increases as a function of the load from 100% (no-load operation) to the setting
in p1570 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set.
p1571[0...n]
CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6725
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the supplementary flux setpoint.
Notice:
Low flux setpoints can cause the drive to stall at higher loads. This is the reason that the flux setpoint should only be
adapted for slow load changes.
Note:
The supplementary flux setpoint is limited to +/- 50 %.

1-363
Parameter
List of parameters
p1572[0...n]
Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the supplementary flux setpoint for the flux controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
Notice:
The parameter should be set back to 0% again for normal closed-loop control operation.
Note:
The parameter is used to optimize the flux controller. The current model is not influenced by the setting.
p1573[0...n]
Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6722
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the flux threshold value for enabling the speed setpoint and the end of magnetizing (r0056.4).
Note:
The parameter only has an influence if the flux actual value reaches the threshold value p1573 more quickly during
magnetizing than the time set in p0346.
The parameter has no influence for flying restart (see p1200) and after DC braking (see p1231).
p1574[0...n]
Voltage reserve dynamic / V_reserve dyn

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
150.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
10.0 [Vrms]
Description:
Sets a dynamic voltage reserve.
Note:
In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due
to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage margin (reserve). Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071).
p1576[0...n]
Flux boost, adaptation speed, lower / Flux boost n lower

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6725
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Sets the lower adaptation speed of the flux boost.

Below this speed, p1570 is set as reference (setpoint) flux.
1-364

Parameter
List of parameters
p1577[0...n]
Flux boost adaptation speed, upper / Flux boost n upper

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6725
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.0 [%]
Max
10000.0 [%]
Factory setting
200.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the upper adaptation speed of the flux boost.
Dependency:
The parameter value refers to the lower adaptation speed of the flux boost.
Above this speed, the rated motor flux (100 %) is set as reference (setpoint) flux.
Refer to: p1576
p1580[0...n]
Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6722
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [%]
Max
100 [%]
Factory setting
0 [%]
Description:
Sets the efficiency optimization. When optimizing the efficiency, the flux setpoint of the closed-loop control is
adapted as a function of the load.
Note:
It only makes sense to activate this function if the dynamic response requirements of the speed controller are low.
In order to avoid oscillations, if required, the speed controller parameters should be adapted (increase Tn, reduce
Kp).
For p1580 = 100 %, under no-load operating conditions, the flux setpoint is reduced to 50 % of the rated motor flux.
Further, the smoothing time of the flux setpoint filter (p1582) should be increased.
p1582[0...n]
Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6722
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4 [ms]
Max
5000 [ms]
Factory setting
15 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint.
r1583
Flux setpoint smoothed / Flux setp smooth

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the smoothed flux setpoint. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.

1-365
Parameter
List of parameters
p1584[0...n]
Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6722
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
20000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint in the field-weakening range
Recommend.:
Smoothing should be especially used if there is no regenerative feedback into the line supply. This means that the
DC link voltage can quickly increase in regenerative operation
Note:
Only the flux setpoint rise is smoothed
p1585[0...n]
Flux actual value, smoothing time / Flux actVal T_smth

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the flux actual value.
p1586[0...n]
Field weakening characteristic, scaling / Field weak scal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
80.0 [%]
Max
120.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Sets the scaling of the pre-control characteristic for the start of field weakening.
For values above 100% and for partial load situations, the field weakening starts at higher speeds.
Note:
If the start of field weakening is shifted to lower speeds, then the voltage reserve is increased for partial load situations.
If the start of field weakening is shifted to higher speeds, the voltage reserve is appropriately reduced so that for fast
load changes, it can be expected that this will have a negative impact on the dynamic performance.
r1589
Field-weakening current, pre-control value / FieldWkCurrPrectrl

Description:
1-366
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6724
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the pre-control value for the field weakening current.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1590[0...n]
Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6723
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0
Max
999999.0
Factory setting
10.0
Description:
Sets the proportional gain of the flux controller.
Note:
The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned.
When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is recalculated.
p1592[0...n]
Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6723
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
30 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time of the flux controller.
Note:
r1593[0...1]
CO: Field weakening controller / flux controller output / Field/Fl_ctrl outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -

6726
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the output of the field weakening controller (synchronous motor) or the output of the flux controller (separately-excited synchronous motor, induction motor).
Index:
[0] = PI output
[1] = I output
p1594[0...n]
Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6724
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
1000.00
Factory setting
0.00
Sets the P gain of the field-weakening controller.

1-367
Parameter
List of parameters
p1596[0...n]
Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
50 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller.
r1597
CO: Field weakening controller output / Field_ctrl output

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6723
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the output of the field weakening controller. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
r1598
CO: Total flux setpoint / Flux setp total

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6724, 6725, 6726, 8018
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the effective flux setpoint.

The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
p1599[0...n]
Flux controller, excitation current difference / Flux ctr I_exc_dif

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
3.0 [%]
Sets the permissible difference between the actual excitation current and the excitation current setpoint. The excitation current flux controller is active within this difference.
If the difference lies outside the specified limit value, then the I component of the excitation current flux controller is
kept. Instead of this, for the flux controller of the field-generating current, an additional I controller is switched in
(integral time according to p1592).
If the difference again lies within the bandwidth, the I component of the excitation current flux controller is reactivated and the I component of the flux controller of the field-generating current is reduced as an exponential function
with respect to time. The reduction of the I component over time depends on the rotor time constant (r0384).
1-368

Parameter
List of parameters
p1600[0...n]
P flux controller, P gain / P flux ctrl Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0
Max
999999.0
Factory setting
10.0
Description:
Sets the proportional gain of the P flux controller for separately-excited synchronous motors.
Note:
r1602
CO: Flux controller P output / Flux ctrl P outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the output of the P flux controller for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM).
p1605[0...n]
Pulse technique pattern configuration / Pulse config

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
2
Sets the applied pulse patterns for estimating the continuous rotor position.
Remark: See p1750 for the activation of the pulse-pattern technique.
Value:
1:
2:
pm
ppmm
Dependency:
Refer to: p1750
Note:
When commissioning a catalog motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being
used.
r1606
CO: Pulse technique pattern current / Pulse config

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the currently applied pulse patterns for estimating the continuous rotor position.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Dependency:
None
pm
ppmm

1-369
Parameter
List of parameters
p1607[0...n]
Pulse technique stimulus / Pulse stimu

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mVs]
Max
20000.000 [mVs]
Factory setting
32.000 [mVs]
Description:
Sets the excitation amplitude (voltage-time pulse) for the pulse technique for estimating the continuous rotor position.
Dependency:
r1608[0...6]
CO: Pulse technique response / Pulse config

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the signal responses to the excitation of the pulse technique.
Index:
[0] = Phase R
[1] = Phase S
[2] = D estimated
[3] = Q estimated
[4] = D estimated AC
[5] = Q estimated AC
[6] = Pointer length AC
Dependency:
Refer to: p1605, p1607, p1750
p1609[0...n]
Current setpoint for I/f operation / I_set I/f oper

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the stator current setpoint for operation of separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM) in the operating
mode I/f (p1300 = 18).
p1610[0...n]
Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS

6722, 6726
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Sets the static torque setpoint for encoderless vector control (SLVC). This parameter is entered as a percentage
referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
For encoderless vector control, when the motor model is shut down, an absolute current is impressed. p1610 represents the maximum load that occurs at a constant setpoint speed.
Notice:
p1610 should always be set to at least 10 % higher than the maximum steady-state load that can occur.
1-370

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
For p1610 = 0%, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the no-load case (ASM: rated magnetizing current).
For p1610 = 100 %, a current setpoint is calculated that corresponds to the rated motor torque.
Negative values are converted into positive setpoints in the case of induction and permanent-magnet synchronous
motors.
p1611[0...n]
Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS

6722, 6726
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Description:
Enters the dynamic torque setpoint for the low-speed range for encoderless vector control (SLVC). This parameter
is entered as a percentage referred to the rated motor torque (r0333).
Note:
When accelerating and braking p1611 is added to p1610 and the resulting total torque is converted into an appropriate current setpoint and controlled.
For pure accelerating torques, it is always favorable to use the torque pre-control of the speed controller (p1496).
p1612[0...n]
Current setpoint magnetizing open-loop controlled / Id_set ctrl

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Sets the magnetizing current setpoint in the open-loop controlled encoderless operation.
The value is only valid during the current model orientation.
Dependency:
Note:
The value is effective at speeds less than p1755 and represents a reserve for a possibly existing load torque or
torque error in the moment of inertia.
p1616[0...n]
Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

6726
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
40 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time for the current/torque setpoint in the open-loop-controlled operating range in the case of
sensorless vector control.
Note:
This parameter is only effective in the range where current is injected for encoderless vector control.
In the case of induction motors the current setpoint is calculated from parameter value p1610 and in the case of
separately excited synchronous motors the torque setpoint is calculated from parameter value p1611.

1-371
Parameter
List of parameters
r1617
CO: Torque setpoint (controlled) / M_setp sv SLVC

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Torque setpoint for sensorless control of the separately excited synchronous motor in the open-loop-controlled
operating range (under p1755 * p1756).
r1618
Current model controller, pre-control / I_mod_ctrl prectrl

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the pre-control value of the current model controller. It involves a magnetizing current in the d-direction.
p1619[0...n]
Setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / SetAct track thrsh

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Description:
Threshold for setpoint/actual value tracking of the stator current in the q direction of the current model.
p1620[0...n]
Stator current, minimum / I_stator min

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10000.00 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.00 [Arms]
Sets the minimum stator current for separately-excited synchronous motors (FEM).
A negative value means that the field-generating stator current (d-axis) has a negative sign. The valid value is internally limited to 50% of the rated motor current (p0305).
p1621[0...n]
Changeover speed, inner cos phi = 1 / n_chngov cos phi=1

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed where a change is made from the inner to the outer cos phi = 1.
If the value that is entered exceeds the rated speed, then a change is made to the inner cos phi = 1 over the complete speed range.
1-372

Parameter
List of parameters
p1622[0...n]
Field-generating current setpoint smoothing time constant / Id_setp T_smth

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [ms]
Max
200.0 [ms]
Factory setting
20.0 [ms]
Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the field-generating current components.
The current filtered in this way is included in the calculation of the cos phi.
r1623[0...1]
Field-generating current setpoint (steady-state) / Id_set stationary

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -

6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set).
Note:
Index 1 shows the stationary field-generating current on the stator side in the case of separately excited synchronous motors without the excitation current monitoring component (r1644).
r1624
Field-generating current setpoint, total / Id_setp total

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -

6723, 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the limited field-generating current setpoint (Id_set).

This value comprises the steady-state field-generating current setpoint r1623 and a dynamic component that is only
set when changes are made to the flux setpoint.
p1625[0...n]
Excitation current setpoint calibration / I_exc_setp cal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Gain factor to weight the excitation current setpoint.

1-373
Parameter
List of parameters
r1626
CO: Excitation current setpoint / I_exc_setp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the calculated excitation current setpoint.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0390
r1627
CO: Current model load angle / I_mod load angle

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Description:
Displays the load angle of the current model.
p1628[0...n]
Current model controller, dynamic factor / I_mod_ctr dyn_fact

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
400 [%]
Factory setting
50 [%]
Description:
Dynamic factor of the model controller in the current model
p1629[0...n]
Current model controller P gain / I_mod_ctrl Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100000.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the proportional gain of the current model controller. This value is automatically preset using p3900 or p0340
when commissioning has been completed.
p1630[0...n]
Current model controller integral time / I_ctrl Tn

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-374
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
10000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Sets the proportional gain of the current model controller. This value is automatically preset using p3900 or p0340
when commissioning has been completed.

Parameter
List of parameters
r1631
Current model controller, P gain effective / I_mod ctrl Kp eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective P gain of the current model controller.
r1632
Current model controller integral time effective / I_mod_ctrl Tn eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the effective integral time of the current model controller.
r1633
Current model, flux setpoint / I_mod flux setp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the effective flux setpoint of the current model. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
r1634
Current model, flux actual value / I_mod flux act val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the effective flux actual value of the current model. The value is referred to the rated motor flux.
r1635
Current model controller, I component / I_mod_ctrl I_comp

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the I component of the current model controller.

1-375
Parameter
List of parameters
r1636
Current model controller output / I_mod_ctrl outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the output of the current model controller.
r1637
Current model, magnetizing current, d axis / I_mod I_mag d-ax

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the d-axis.
r1638
Current model, magnetizing current, q axis / I_mod I_mag q-ax

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the q-axis.
r1639
CO: Current model Isq after actual value tracking / I_mod Isq track

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the stator current in the q axis after current actual value tracking.
p1640[0...n]
CI: Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-376
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the excitation current actual value

Parameter
List of parameters
r1641
Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the excitation current actual value that is read in.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0390
p1642[0...n]
Minimum excitation current / Min I_exc

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [%]
Max
50.0 [%]
Factory setting
5.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the minimum excitation current. This means that negative excitation currents can be avoided.
p1643[0...n]
Gain factor, minimum excitation current closed-loop control / Min I_exc Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
5.00
Factory setting
0.40
Description:
Sets the gain factor for the minimum excitation current, closed-loop control. This is active if the excitation current is
below 75% of p1642.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1642
r1644
Excitation current monitoring output / I_exc_monit outp

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6727
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the output of the excitation current monitoring for separately excited synchronous motors.
p1645[0...6]
BI: Excitation feedback signals signal source / Exc FS S_src

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the individual feedback signals from the excitation.

1-377
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Excitation ready to be powered up

[1] = Excitation ready
[2] = Excitation operational
[3] = Excitation group signal fault
[4] = Excitation group signal alarm
[5] = Not used
[6] = Not used
Dependency:
Refer to: r1649
p1646
Excitation monitoring time / Excit t_monit

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2.0 [s]
Max
1300.0 [s]
Factory setting
20.0 [s]
Sets the monitoring time of the excitation.

After an ON command, the feedback signal must be received within this monitoring time.
Note:
After the on command for the excitation (r1648.0 = 1), its feedback signal must be available at r1649.1 within this
monitoring time (BI: p1645[1]).
The same monitoring time is effective after the excitation is enabled for operation (r1648.3 = 1) up to the feedback
signal "excitation operational" (r1649.2 = 1, BI: p1645[2]).
p1647
Excitation switch-off delay time / Exc t_off

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6495
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.5 [s]
Max
5.0 [s]
Factory setting
0.8 [s]
Description:
Sets the switch-off delay time to shut down the excitation equipment.
Note:
The delay time starts if, when powering down, r0863.0 = 0.

r1648.0 and r1648.3 are reset at the end of the delay time.
r1648.0...11
CO/BO: Excitation, control word / Excitation STW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6495
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the excitation equipment.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
07
10
11
1-378
Signal name
Power up excitation
Excitation no OFF2
Excitation no OFF3
Excitation operation enable
Excitation acknowledge fault
Master control by excitation equipment
ccw rotating field excitation invert excitation
current setpoint
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r1649.0...7
CO/BO: Excitation status word / Excitation ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6495
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the excitation equipment.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
07
Signal name
Excitation ready to be powered up feedback
signal
Excitation ready feedback signal
Excitation operational feedback signal
Excitation group signal fault
Excitation group signal alarm
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: p1645
r1650
Current setpoint torque-generating before filter / Iq_set before filt

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 5710
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the torque generating current setpoint Iqset after the torque limits and the clock cycle interpolation is
ahead of the current setpoint filters.
r1651
CO: Torque setpoint, function generator / M_set FG

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque setpoint of the function generator.
p1653[0...n]
Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time minimum / Isq_s T_smth min

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6710
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [ms]
Max
20.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.1 [ms]
Sets the minimum smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.

1-379
Parameter
List of parameters
p1654[0...n]
Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6710
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [ms]
Max
50.0 [ms]
Factory setting
4.8 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant for the setpoint of the torque-generating current components.
Note:
The smoothing time does not become effective until the field-weakening range is reached.
p1655[0...1]
CI: Current setpoint filter natural frequency tuning / I_set_filt f_n

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for tuning the natural frequency of the current setpoint filter.
Index:
[0] = Filter 1
[1] = Filter 2
p1656[0...n]
Activates current setpoint filter / I_setp_filt act

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6710
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0001 bin
Description:
Setting for activating/deactivating the current setpoint filter.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Signal name
Filter 1
Filter 2
1 signal
Active
Active
0 signal
Inactive
Inactive
Dependency:
The individual current setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1657.
Note:
If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from filter 1.
p1657[0...n]
Current setpoint filter 1 type / I_set_filt 1 Typ

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
FP
-
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the current setpoint filter 1 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Value:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661.
Note:
For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the
denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is
selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed.
Low pass: PT2

General 2nd-order filter
The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth:
f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency
1-380

Parameter
List of parameters
p1658[0...n]
Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_n

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.5 [Hz]
Max
16000.0 [Hz]
Factory setting
1999.0 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency:
p1659[0...n]
Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_n

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.001
Max
10.000
Factory setting
0.700
Description:
Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1.
Dependency:
p1660[0...n]
Current setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency / I_set_filt 1 fn_z

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.5 [Hz]
Max
16000.0 [Hz]
Factory setting
1999.0 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency:
p1661[0...n]
Current setpoint filter 1 numerator damping / I_set_filt 1 D_z

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
10.000
Factory setting
0.700
Description:
Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 1.
Dependency:
p1662[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the current setpoint filter 2 as low pass (PT2) or as extended general 2nd-order filter.
Value:
1:
2:
Low pass: PT2

General 2nd-order filter

1-381
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Note:
For an extended general 2nd-order filter, by inserting the same natural frequency in both the numerator and in the
denominator, i.e. bandstop frequency, a bandstop filter is implemented. If the numerator damping of zero is
selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed.
The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth:
f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency
p1663[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.5 [Hz]
Max
16000.0 [Hz]
Factory setting
1999.0 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency:
p1664[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.001
Max
10.000
Factory setting
0.700
Description:
Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 2.
Dependency:
p1665[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.5 [Hz]
Max
16000.0 [Hz]
Factory setting
1999.0 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency:
p1666[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
10.000
Factory setting
0.700
Description:
Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 2.
Dependency:
1-382

Parameter
List of parameters
p1699
Filter data acceptance / Filt data accept

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Activates data acceptance for parameter changes for the filter.

p1699 = 0:
The new filter data are immediately accepted.
p1699 = 1:
The new filter data are only accepted when this parameter is reset.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1416, p1656, p1657, p1658, p1659, p1660, p1661, p1662, p1663, p1664, p1665, p1666
p1702[0...n]
Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: ASM, REL
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
70.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the flux-generating current component Isd.
Note:
The parameter is effective for permanent and separately-excited synchronous motors.
p1703[0...n]
Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
70.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling of the dynamic current controller pre-control for the torque/force-generating current component Isq.
p1704[0...n]
Isq current controller pre-control EMF scaling / Isq_ctrl EMF scal

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling of the EMF pre-control for the Isq current controller.
p1705[0...n]
Flux setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / Flux track thresh

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Threshold for the setpoint - actual value tracking of the EMF pre-control of the Isq current controller.

1-383
Parameter
List of parameters
p1715[0...n]
Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

7017
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100000.000
Factory setting
0.000
Sets the proportional gain of the current controller for the lower adaptation current range.
This value is automatically preset using p3900 or p0340 when commissioning has been completed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393
Note:
For p0393 = 100 %, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1715 is effective over the entire range.
p1717[0...n]
Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

6714, 7017
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
1000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
2.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral-action time of the current controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1715
r1718
CO: Isq controller output / Isq_ctrl outp

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Displays the actual output of the Isq current controller (torque/force generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
r1719
Isq controller integral component / Isq_ctrl I_comp

Description:
1-384
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller).

Parameter
List of parameters
r1723
CO: Isd controller output / Isd_ctrl outp

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Displays the actual output of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
The value contains the proportional and integral components of the PI controller.
r1724
Isd controller integral component / Isd_ctrl I_comp

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the integral component of the Isd current controller (flux-generating current, PI controller).
r1725
Isd controller integral component limit / Isd_ctrl I_limit

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller.
p1726[0...n]
Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
75.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling of the quadrature arm decoupling
Note:
This parameter is ineffective for encoderless vector control. In this case, p1727 is always used. If p1726 is set to 0,
then the quadrature de-coupling is deactivated. The integral component of the Isd current controller remains effective in the complete speed control range.
For the closed-loop control of synchronous motors, this parameter is used to scale the current controller de-coupling.
p1727[0...n]
Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
200.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Sets the scaling of quadrature arm decoupling when the voltage limit is reached.

1-385
Parameter
List of parameters
r1728
De-coupling voltage, in-line axis / V_dir-axis_decoupl

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the d axis.
r1729
De-coupling voltage, quadrature axis / V_quad_decoupl

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6714
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the actual output of the quadrature channel de-coupling for the q axis.
r1732[0...1]
CO: Direct-axis voltage setpoint / Direct V set

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

6714, 5718
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the direct-axis voltage setpoint Ud.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
r1733[0...1]
CO: Quadrature-axis voltage setpoint / Quad V set

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

5718, 6714, 6719
Units group: 5_1
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the quadrature-axis component of voltage setpoint Uq.
Index:
[0] = Unsmoothed
p1740[0...n]
Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed loop control / Gain res_damp

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-386
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
10.000
Factory setting
0.025
Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with encoderless vector control in the range
that current is impressed.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1744[0...n]
Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall

0 (n/M)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
100.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed threshold value to detect a stalled motor.

If the adaptation controller output exceeds the parameterized speed difference, then bit 11 in status word p1408 is
set.
Dependency:
If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.11 set), fault 7902 is output after the delay time in p2178.
Refer to: p2178
Note:
Speed monitoring is only effective in operation with a speed encoder (refer to p1300).
p1745[0...n]
Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
1000.0 [%]
Factory setting
5.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the fault threshold in order to detect a motor that has stalled.
Dependency:
If a stalled drive is detected (p1408.12 set), fault F07902 is output after the delay time set in p2178.
If the error signal (r1746) exceeds the parameterized error threshold, then bit 12 in status word p1408 is set.
Refer to: p2178
Note:
Monitoring is only effective in the low-speed range (below p1755 * (100% - p1756)).
r1746
Motor model error signal stall detection / MotMod sig stall

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Signal to initiate stall detection
Note:
The signal is not calculated while magnetizing and only in the low speed range (below p1755 * (100 % - p1756)).
p1748[0...n]
Motor model lower changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Lower n_chngov

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
90.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Sets the lower speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in encoderless operation.
This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1749.
Dependency:

1-387
Parameter
List of parameters
p1749[0...n]
Motor model upper changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Upper n_chgov

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
99.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Sets the upper speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in sensorless operation.
This value is entered as a percentage of p1755.
Dependency:
p1750[0...n]
Motor model configuration / MotMod config

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Sets the configuration for the motor model.

Bit 0 = 1: Forces open-loop speed-controlled starting (ASM).
Bit 1 = 1: Forces the system to pass through frequency zero, open-loop-controlled (ASM).
Bit 2 = 1: Drive remains in full closed-loop control mode, even at zero frequency (ASM).
Bit 3 = 1: Motor model evaluates the saturation characteristic (ASM).
Bit 4 = 1: Time-controlled change between current and observer models (ASM).
Bit 5 = 1: HF signal injection to estimate the continuous rotor position (PESM).
Bit 6 = 1: If the motor is blocked, encoderless vector control remains speed-controlled (ASM).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
Signal name
Controlled start
Controlled through 0 Hz
Closed-loop ctrl oper. down to zero freq. for
passive loads
Motor model Lh_pre = f(PsiEst)
Model changeover
Cl.-loop control mode PESM up to f=0 with
HF signal injection
Closed-loop control when motor is blocked
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Time controlled
Yes
No
Freq. controlled
No
Yes
No
Caution:
Do not use bit 6 = 1 if the motor can be reversed by the load. Long wait times due to blocking (p2177) can cause the
motor to stall. In this case you should deactivate the function or use closed-loop control throughout the speed range
(note the information re bit 2 = 1).
Note:
Bit 0 ... Bit 2 only have influence for sensorless vector control, bit 4 only for vector control with sensor. Bit 2 is preassigned depending on p0500.
Re bit 02 = 1:
The sensorless vector control is effective down to zero frequency. A change is not made into the open-loop speed
controlled mode.
This operating mode is possible for passive loads. These include applications where the load itself does not generate any active torque and therefore only acts reactively to the drive torque of the induction motor.
If bit 2 is set to 1, then bit 3 is also automatically activated. Manual deselection is possible and can make sense if,
for third-party motors, the saturation characteristic (p1960) was not carried out. Generally, for standard SIEMENS
motors, the already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
For bit 2 = 1, the selection of bits 0 and 1 is ignored.
Re bit 02 = 0:
Bit 3 is deactivated automatically.
1-388

Parameter
List of parameters
Re bit 05 = 1:
The selection of HF signal injection is only relevant for permanent-magnet synchronous motors (PESM). Bits 0..4
are not relevant for PESM.
For the purpose of component configuration, an automatic system run-up is triggered on first-time activation. Activation is, therefore, only possible outside of motor commissioning (p0010 = 0).
Re bit 06 = 1:
The following applies for encoderless vector control of induction motors only: If the motor is blocked (see p2175,
p2177), the time condition p1758 is bypassed and there is no changeover to open-loop control.
r1751
Motor model status / MotMod status

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the motor model.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
p1752[0...n]
Signal name
Controlled operation
Set ramp-function generator
Stop RsLh adaptation
Feedback
Encoder operation
Holding angle
Acceleration criterion
Set angular integrator PEM
Stop Kt adaptation PEM
PolID active PEM SLVC
I injection PEM
Speed controller output cannot be set to
zero
Rs adapt waits
Motor operation
Stator frequency sign
Torque sign
Pulse injection active PEM
1 signal
Active
Active
Yes
Active
Active
Yes
Active
No
No
No
No
Yes
0 signal
Inactive
Inactive
No
Inactive
Inactive
No
Inactive
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
FP
6721
-
Yes
Yes
Positive
Motor mode
Yes
No
No
Negative
Regenerative mode
No
Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
210000.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed to change over the motor model for operation with encoder.
Dependency:
In V/f characteristic mode the parameter is of no significance.

Refer to: p1756

1-389
Parameter
List of parameters
p1753[0...n]
Motor model changeover speed hysteresis operation with encoder /

MotMod n_chgovHysE

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
90.0 [%]
Factory setting
0.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for operation with speed encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1752
Note:
The value refers to p1752. In the case of separately excited synchronous motors, the lower hysteresis value is calculated with p1752 * p1753; in the case of all other types of motor, p1752 * (1 - p1753) is used.
p1754[0...n]
Flux angle difference smoothing time / Angle diff T_smth

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [ms]
Max
1000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
5.0 [ms]
Sets the smoothing time constant to filter the main flux angle difference from the voltage and current models.
The filtered value is included in the calculation of the total flux angle.
PESM: Sets the smoothing time constant for the angular difference display between motor model and encoder.
Note:
In the case of a separately excited synchronous motor and sensorless vector control, the parameter must be set to
the minimum value to improve motor model changeover.
p1755[0...n]
Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
210000.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed to change over the motor model to encoderless operation.
Dependency:

Refer to: p1756
Notice:
The changeover speed represents the steady-state minimum speed up to which the motor model can be used in
sensorless steady-state operation. If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make
sense to increase the parameter value.
Note:
The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode.
1-390

Parameter
List of parameters
p1756
Motor model changeover speed hysteresis encoderless operation /

MotMod n_chgov hys

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
95.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis for the changeover speed of the motor model for encoderless operation.
Dependency:

Refer to: p1755
Note:
The parameter value refers to p1755. In the case of separately excited synchronous motors, the lower hysteresis
value is calculated with p1755 * p1756; in the case of all other types of motor, p1755 * (1 - p1756) is used.
p1757[0...n]
Motor model w/o enc. op./cl.-loop controlled stab. controller Kp / MotMod w/o enc Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01
Max
10.00
Factory setting
0.70
Description:
Sets the gain of the transient response controller when the motor model changes over from open-loop controlled
operation to closed-loop controlled operation.
Note:
Only for ASM and PSM in encoderless operation:

The settling range starts at 0.5 * p1755 * p1756.
For ASM it ends at p1755 * p1756 or at p1755, if p1759 is at the maximum value.
For PSM it always ends at p1755 * p1756.
p1758[0...n]
Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
100 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
1000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the minimum time for falling below the changeover speed when changing from closed-loop controlled operation to open-loop controlled operation.
Dependency:
p1759[0...n]
Motor model changeover delay time open/closed loop control / MotMod t op_cl

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
2000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the minimum time for exceeding the changeover speed when changing from open-loop controlled operation to
closed-loop controlled operation.
Dependency:
Note:
When p1759 = 2000 ms, the delay time becomes ineffective and the model changeover is determined by the output
frequency only.

1-391
Parameter
List of parameters
p1760[0...n]
Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100000.000
Factory setting
1000.000
Description:
Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder
p1761[0...n]
Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
4 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral-action time of the controller for speed adaptation with encoder
r1762[0...1]
Motor model deviation component 1 / MotMod dev comp 1

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -

6731
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Induction motor (ASM):

Displays the referred imaginary system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PESM):
Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation.
r1762.0: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF.
r1762.1: Angular deviation [electr. deg.] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique.
Index:
[0] = Deviation Model1

[1] = Deviation Model2
r1763
Motor model deviation component 2 / MotMod dev comp 2

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-

Displays the referred real system deviation for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Not used.
1-392

Parameter
List of parameters
p1764[0...n]
Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6730
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
100000.000
Factory setting
1000.000
Description:
Sets the proportional gain of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder.
r1765
Motor model, speed adaptation Kp effective / MotM n_ada Kp act

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective proportional gain of the controller for the speed adaptation.
p1766[0...n]
Motor model voltage model calculation enable / V_mod calc enab

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
90.0 [%]
Factory setting
50.0 [%]
Sets the speed to enable the voltage model to calculate the speed actual value.
This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1748.
Dependency:
p1767[0...n]
Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6730
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [ms]
Max
200 [ms]
Factory setting
4 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder
r1768
Motor model, speed adaptation Vi effective / MotM n_ada Vi act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the effective gain of the integral component of the controller for speed adaptation.

1-393
Parameter
List of parameters
r1770
CO: Motor model speed adaptation proportional component / MotMod n_adapt Kp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6730
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the P component of the controller for speed adaptation.
r1771
CO: Motor model speed adaptation I comp. / MotMod n_adapt Tn

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 6730
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the I component of the controller for speed adaptation.
r1773[0...1]
Motor model slip speed / MotMod slip

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays estimated (speed) signals of the motor model:

r1773.0: Displays the estimated (mechanical) slip of the motor model.
r1773.1: Displays the estimated input speed of the motor model.
Index:
[0] = Estimated slip speed

[1] = Estimated speed
p1774[0...n]
Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-5.000 [V]
Max
5.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the Motor Module.
Note:
The value is preset during the rotating measurement.
1-394

Parameter
List of parameters
p1775[0...n]
Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-5.000 [V]
Max
5.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
Sets the offset voltage in the beta direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at
low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the Motor Module.
Note:
The value is preset during the rotating measurement.
r1776[0...6]
Motor model status signals / MotMod status sig

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the internal status signals of the motor model:

Index 0: Changeover ramp between current and voltage models
Index 1: Changeover ramp for model tracking (encoderless induction motors only)
Index 2: Changeover ramp for zero frequency range (encoderless induction motors only)
Index 3: Transition ramp actual speed from speed setpoint to model value (encoderless FEM)
Index 4: Speed controller enable (encoderless FEM)
Index 5: Transition ramp between current and voltage models (encoderless FEM)
Index 6: Transition ramp for EMF deviation at PLL input (encoderless PESM)
Index:
[0] = Changeover ramp motor model

[1] = Changeover ramp model tracking
[2] = Changeover ramp zero frequency encoderless ASM
[3] = Changeover ramp actual speed encoderless FEM
[4] = Enable speed controller encoderless FEM
[5] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless FEM
[6] = Changeover ramp motor model encoderless PESM
Note:
Indices 3 through 5 are only relevant in the case of encoderless control of separately excited synchronous motors.
r1778
Motor model flux angle difference / MotMod ang. diff.

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []

Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle.
Displays the angular difference between motor model and encoder.
Dependency:
A setting for smoothing the display can be made using p1754.

1-395
Parameter
List of parameters
r1779
Motor model absolute flux / MotMod abs flux

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the absolute value of the flux of the motor model.
p1780[0...n]
Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0111 1100 bin
Sets the configuration for the adaptation circuit of the motor model.
Induction motor (ASM): Rs, Rr (only for operation with encoder), Lh and offset compensation.
Permanent magnet synchronous motor (PEM): kT
Bit field:
Bit
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Signal name
Select motor model ASM Rs adaptation
Select motor model ASM Lh adaptation
Select motor model PEM kT adaptation
Select motor model offset adaptation
Select ASM Rr adaptation (only with
encoder)
Select pole position identification PEM
encoderless
Select T(valve) with Rs adaptation
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
In V/f characteristic operating mode only bit 7 is relevant.
Note:

PEM: Permanent magnet synchronous motor
When selecting the compensation of the valve interlocking via Rs (bit 7), the compensation in the gating unit is
deactivated and is instead taken into account in the motor model.
In order that the correction values of the Rs, Lh and kT adaptation (selected using Bit 0 ... Bit 2) are correctly
accepted when changing over the drive data set, a dedicated motor number must be entered into p0826 for each
different motor.
p1781[0...n]
Motor model Rs adaptation integral time / MotMod Rs Tn

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-396
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the integral time for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).

Parameter
List of parameters
r1782[0...n]
Motor model Rs adaptation corrective value / MotMod Rs corr

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the corrective value for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency:
Note:
The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set.
p1783[0...n]
Motor model Rs adaptation Kp / MotMod Rs Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
1.000
Factory setting
0.100
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the Rs adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
p1785[0...n]
Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
1.000
Factory setting
0.100
Description:
Sets the proportional gain for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
p1786[0...n]
Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Description:
Sets the integral time for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
r1787[0...n]
Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the corrective value for the Lh adaptation of the motor model for an induction motor (ASM).
Dependency:
Note:
The adaptation result is reset if the magnetizing inductance of the induction motor is changed (p0360, r0382). This
also happens when changing over the data set if a different motor is not being used (p0826).

1-397
Parameter
List of parameters
r1789
Motor model Rs adaptation switch-in frequency / MotMod Rs f_on

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the power-on stator frequency for the Rs adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
r1790
Motor model Rs adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Rs fslip

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Rs adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
r1791
Motor model Lh adaptation power-on frequency / MotMod Lh f_on

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the power-on stator frequency/ primary section frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor
(ASM).
r1792
Motor model Lh adaptation power-on slip / MotMod Lh fslip

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the power-on slip frequency for the Lh adaptation for the induction motor (ASM).
p1795[0...n]
Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn

0 (n/M)
Description:
1-398
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6731
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [ms]
Max
10000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Sets the integral time of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM).

Parameter
List of parameters
r1797[0...n]
Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6731
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm/A]
Max
- [Nm/A]
Factory setting
- [Nm/A]
Description:
Displays the corrective value of the kT adaptation of the motor model for a permanent-magnet synchronous motor
(PEM).
Dependency:
Note:
p1798[0...n]
Motor model pulse technique speed adaptation Kp / MotMod pulses Kp

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
1000.000
Factory setting
1.000
Description:
Sets the proportional gain Kp for speed adaptation with active pulse technique for the estimation of the continuous
rotor position.
p1800[0...n]
Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.000 [kHz]
Max
16.000 [kHz]
Factory setting
4.000 [kHz]
Description:
Sets the drive converter switching frequency.
Dependency:
The pulse frequency can, depending on the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]) assume the following values:
This parameter is preset to the rated converter value when the drive is first commissioned.
p1800 = 1 / (p0115[0] * 2)
or
p1800 = n / p0115[0] where n = 1, 2, 3, ...
Example:
p0115[0] = 250 s --> p1800 = 2, 4, 8, 12, 16 kHz
Possible setting values can be taken from r0114 (if p0009 = p0010 = 0).
If p0092 = 1 the sampling times p0115 and the pulse frequency p1800 are checked every time the parameters are
downloaded, and reset to the initial values if necessary. This check can be deactivated by setting p0092 = 0 (making this setting does not affect isochronous PROFIBUS operation).
If wobbulation is selected (p1810.2), the pulse frequency can only be changed as part of pulse enabling to values
with the following ratio:
a) p1800 <= 1000 / p0115[0] for p1811 > 0 %
b) p1800 <= 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] for p 1811 = 0 %
Under pulse inhibit
p1800 > 1000 / p0115[0] -> p1811 = 0
p1800 > 1000 * 2 / p0115[0] -> 1810.2 = 0 and p1811 = 0
(applicable for all indices)
Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112, p0113, r0114, p0115, p0230, p1817

1-399
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The maximum possible pulse frequency is also determined by the power unit being used.
When the pulse frequency is increased, depending on the particular power unit, the maximum output current can be
reduced (derating, refer to r0067).
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be changed below
the minimum value required for the filter.
If p1800 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be
r1801[0...1]
CO: Pulse frequency / Pulse frequency

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kHz]
Max
- [kHz]
Factory setting
- [kHz]
Description:
Displays the actual converter switching frequency.
Index:
[0] = Actual
[1] = Minimum value of the modulator
Note:
The selected pulse frequency (p1800) may be reduced if the drive converter has an overload condition (p0290).
The following applies for vector drives (p0107):
The pulse frequency can also be reduced when changing over the modulator to an optimized pulse pattern. This is
used to avoid overcontrol.
In the case of chassis power units, two-thirds of the setpoint pulse frequency is displayed in the FLB modulation
range.
p1802[0...n]
Modulator mode / Modulator mode

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
9
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the modulator mode.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
Dependency:
If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3, 4), or if the power unit firmware is not able to calculate edge modulation (r0192 bit0 = 0), then only space vector modulation without overcontrol can be set as modulation type (p1802 = 3).
Automatic changeover SVM/FLB

Flat top modulation (FLB)
Space vector modulation (SVM)
SVM without overcontrol
SVM/FLB without overcontrol
SVM with pulse frequency reduction
SVM/FLB with pulse frequency reduction
No edge modulation up to 100 Hz
No edge modulation up to 60 Hz
Edge modulation
p1802 > 6: Wobbulation is deactivated, p1810.2 = 0 and p1811 = 0 (valid for all indices)
Refer to: r0192, p0230, p7003
Notice:
If the edge modulation is enabled (p1802 > 6), then the current actual value correction should be activated (p1840.0
= 0), if the Motor Module is connected to a controlled (regulated) DC link (Active Infeed).
1-400

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
When modulation modes are enabled that could lead to overmodulation (p1802 = 0, 1, 2, 5, 6), the modulation
depth must be limited using p1803 (pre-assignment, p1803 = 98%). The higher the overmodulation, the greater the
current ripple and torque ripple.
When changing p1802[x], the values for all of the other existing indices are also changed.
p1802 = 7, 8 should be used if the drive is operated below 100 Hz or 60 Hz, and it is necessary to avoid changing
over to edge modulation. Above these output frequencies, the modulation depth remains limited so that there the
full output voltage of the edge modulation is not reached.
p1803[0...n]
Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6723
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
20.0 [%]
Max
150.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Description:
Defines the maximum modulation depth.
Note:
p1803 = 100% is the overcontrol limit for space vector modulation (for an ideal drive converter without any switching
delay).
If an optimized pulse pattern is enabled (edge modulation), then the modulation depth is limited to below the output
frequency of 28 Hz as there is no optimized pulse pattern in this range.
p1804[0...n]
Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
10000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
10.0 [ms]
Description:
Filter time constant for the smoothed modulation index to change over the modulator mode.
p1806[0...n]
Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr

0
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
10000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the filter time constant of the DC link voltage used to calculate the modulation depth.
r1807
Actual DC link voltage to calculate the modulation depth / VdcActValMod_depth

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_2
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
DC link voltage that is used to convert the setpoint voltage into an equivalent modulation depth.

1-401
Parameter
List of parameters
r1808
DC link voltage actual value for V_max calculation / Vdc act val V_max

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_2
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage.
r1809
CO: Modulator mode actual / Modulator mode act

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
8
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective modulator mode.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
p1810
Modulator configuration / Modulator config
Flat top modulation (FLB)

Space vector modulation (SVM)
Edge modulation from 28 Hz; 23:3

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0010 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the modulator.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Signal name
Avg value filter for V_lim (only for
Vdc_comp. in modulator)
DC link voltage compensation in the current
control
Wobbulation activated
Current measurem. oversampling activated
(for PESM pulse techn.)
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Dependency:
If bit 2 is set from 1 to 0, p1811 = 0 is set.
Notice:
Bit 1 = 0 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1.
Bit 2 can only be set to 1 subject to the following prerequisites:
- Pulse inhibit
- r0192.16 = 1
- p1800 < 2 * 1000/p0115[0]
1-402

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 00 = 0:
Voltage limitation from the minimum of the DC link voltage (lower ripple in the output current, reduced output voltage).
Re bit 00 = 1:
Voltage limitation from averaged DC link voltage (higher output voltage with increased ripple in the output current).
The selection is only valid if the DC link compensation is not performed in the Control Unit (bit 1 = 0).
Re bit 01 = 0:
DC link voltage compensation in the modulator.
Re bit 01 = 1:
DC link voltage compensation in the current control.
Re bit 02 = 0:
A gating unit that does not permit wobbulation is used.
Edge modulation is not possible with a parallel connection.
Re bit 02 = 1:
A gating unit that permits wobbulation is used.
For a wobbulation amplitude equal to zero (p1811 = 0), the maximum possible pulse frequency in p1800 = 2 * 1/current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]).
For a wobbulation amplitude greater than zero (p1811 > 0), the maximum possible pulse frequency in p1800 =
1/current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]).
Re bit 03 = 1:
The component supports current actual value sensing (and the detection of valve close durations) with double
clocking and phase shift.
Activation must be supported by the component (r0192.23) and the system has to be restarted in order for it to take
effect.
p1811[0...n]
Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [%]
Max
20 [%]
Factory setting
0 [%]
Description:
Sets the amplitude of the statistical wobbulation signal.
Note:
p1811 > 0 is possible, if the following applies:
This signal is used to vary the pulse frequency to create a more pleasant sound.
- p1810.2 (modulator configuration) = 1 (wobbulation activated)
- p1800 (pulse frequency) <= 1/p115[0]
- p0230 (output filter) < 3 (no sine-wave filter)
p1812
BI: Offset calibration output current measurement / Off_calibr I_outp

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Caution:
Sets the signal source to activate/deactivate offset calibration for output current measurement.
The absence of offset calibration can have a negative effect on control properties. Offset calibration must be performed before switching on the power unit for the first time after POWER ON.
Note:
Offset calibration is only performed with pulses suppressed and can take up to one second.

1-403
Parameter
List of parameters
p1815
Phase for PWM generation subgroup / Ph for PWM subgr

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0001 bin
Description:
Sets bit 0 for recording the power unit in the subgroup for the "offset clocking".
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Note:
A change only becomes effective after booting.
Signal name
Recording in subgroup for offset clocking
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
If any of the following secondary conditions are not fulfilled, then "offset clocking" is deactivated for all power units
in the subgroup. This means that all power units of the subgroup are not clocked with offset.
Secondary conditions for clocking with an offset:
- the PWM frequency (p1800[D]) of all power units in the subgroup must be the same.
- the PWM frequency (p1800[D]) must be the same in all drive data sets in the subgroup.
- the following must apply for the ratio between the PWM cycle (1/p1800[D]) and the current controller cycle
(p0115[0]):
The ratio (1/p1800[D]) / (p0115[0]) must be an even integer number (2, 4, 6, ...) for all power units in the subgroup.
or
The ratio (p0115[0]) / (1/p1800[D]) must be an integer number (1, 2, 3, ...) for all power units in the subgroup.
p1816
Set phase for PWM generation manually / Set Ph for PWM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1
Max
16
Factory setting
-1
Sets manual setting and overwriting of automatically determined phase shift for "offset clocking".
Automatic mode. The phase shift value is automatically determined.
For p1816 = 0 ... 16, the following applies:
Manual mode. The user should define the phase shift value as follows:
1. PWM cycle (1/p1800) > current controller clock cycle (p0115[0])
The power unit executes a phase shift from Tshift = current controller cycle (p0115[0]) * p1816.
2. PWM cycle (1/p1800) <= current controller clock cycle (p0115[0])
For p1816 >= 1, the power unit executes a phase shift from Tshift = PWM cycle/2.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0116, p1800, p1819
p1817
Minimum ratio, pulse frequency to the output frequency / Min f_puls / f_max

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
8.3
Max
15.0
Factory setting
12.0
Description:
Sets the minimum ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency.
Notice:
If the ratio between the pulse frequency and the output frequency is reduced, then oscillations can occur in the output current that can result in significant levels of current ripple with the appropriate negative effects.
1-404

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
When the maximum speed is changed, the pulse frequency p1800 is automatically limited to this minimum ratio. It
is not permissible to reduce the pulse frequency if this would result in this ratio being undershot.
p1818
Phase for PWM generation configuration / Ph for PWM config
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the phase shift for offset clocking.

For the first active power unit, it is specified whether clocking is to start at 0 (value = 0) or 180 (value = 1). All other
active power units are clocked alternately according to the setting made here.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1819
Note:
A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

p1819
Phase for PWM generation / Ph for PWM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1
Max
16
Factory setting
-1
Display for "offset clocking". Depending on the particular case, the value is interpreted differently:
1. Case:
The PWM clock cycle (1/p1800[D]) is greater than the current controller clock cycle (p115[0]) and is an integer and
even multiple of it (e.g. p0115[0] = 125 s, p1800[D] = 4 kHz, 2 kHz, 1 kHz).
The value displayed refers to the phase shift in the current-controlled cycles to be applied by the power unit.
2. Case:
The current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]) is greater than or equal to the PWM clock cycle (1/p1800[D]) and is an
integer multiple (e.g. p0115[0] = 125 s, p1800[D] = 8 kHz, 16 kHz).
The displayed value 1 means that the power unit is to apply a phase shift of 180 (from the PWM cycle).
3. Case:
If neither case 1 nor case 2 applies to at least one power unit, then only 0 can be entered for all of the power units.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0108, p0108, p0115, p1800, p1818
Note:
For reasons of compatibility, the parameter is an adjustable parameter. However, it functions solely as a read
parameter. This means that factory setting -1 no longer has any significance and is only available for reasons of
compatibility.
p1820[0...n]
Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 6732
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the phase sequence reversal for the motor.

If the motor does not rotate in the required direction, then the output phase sequence can be reversed using this
parameter. This means that with the same setpoint, the motor direction is reversed without reversing the encoder
actual value.
When a speed encoder is being used, it may be necessary to also invert the encoder actual value (p0410).

1-405
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
Off
On
Dependency:
Refer to: p1821
Note:
This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited.
p1821 can be used to reverse the phase sequence and encoder actual value.
p1821[0...n]
Dir of rot / Dir of rot

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS

4711, 4715, 5730, 6730, 6731,
6732
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Setting to change the direction of rotation.

If the parameter is changed, it reverses the direction of rotation of the motor and the encoder actual value without
changing the setpoint.
Value:
0:
1:
Clockwise
Counter-clockwise
Dependency:
Refer to: F07434
Notice:
An appropriate fault is output for a drive data set changeover where the direction of rotation changes and the pulses
are enabled.
Note:
For operation with the phase sequence U/V/W, the direction of rotation is defined when viewing the face side of the
motor output shaft.
When changing the direction of rotation, the rotating field direction of the current controller is reversed. The speed
actual value (e.g. r0063) is also reversed so that the control sense is kept and internally causing the direction of
rotation to be reversed with the same setpoint. Further, the position actual values of the actual encoder are
reversed (e.g. r0482[0...2]).
For VECTOR, the following applies:
p1820 can be used to reverse the direction of the motor without reversing the encoder actual value.
p1825
Converter valve threshold voltage / Threshold voltage

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Vrms]
Max
100.0 [Vrms]
Factory setting
0.6 [Vrms]
Description:
Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated.
Note:
The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.
p1828
Compensation valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lock ph U

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase U.
Note:
The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine.

For type PM340 power units, the parameter is limited to 3.98 s.
1-406

Parameter
List of parameters
p1829
Compensation valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lock ph V

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase V.
Note:
p1830
Compensation valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lock ph W

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the valve lockout time to compensate for phase W.
Note:
p1832
Dead time compensation current level / t_dead_comp I_lev

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [Arms]
Max
10000.0 [Arms]
Factory setting
0.0 [Arms]
Description:
Above the current level, the dead time - resulting from the converter switching delays - is compensated by a previously calculated constant value. If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by
p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced.
Dependency:
The factor setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207).
r1837
Gating unit configuration / Gating unit config

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Display for the configuration of the gating unit driver.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
Signal name
Modulation depth for a flying restart
Modulation depth for Vdc closed-loop control
Vdc_min controller
Motor data identification routine
Current offset calculation
Simulation mode
1 signal
Limited
Limited
0 signal
Not limited
Not limited
FP
-
Active
Active
Active
Active
Not active
Not active
Not active
Not active

1-407
Parameter
List of parameters
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
p1840[0...n]
Reverse the output phase sequence

Counter-clockwise direction of rotation
Synchronization (bypass)
F7801 monitor by application
Chassis Drive active
Short-circuit test active
FL modulation prohibited
F3E present
PS-Asic3 present
CU230 or CU240
Active
Active
Active
active
Yes
no
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Not active
Not active
Not active
not active
no
Yes
No
No
No
No
Actual value correction configuration / AVC config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Configuration of the actual value correction
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Refer to: p1802
Note:
During operation (the pulses enabled) the configuration cannot be changed by changing over drive data sets.
r1841
Actual value correction status word / AVC status
Signal name
Actual value correction deactivated
Compares the integrals from modulator and
setpoint

0 signal
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Status of the actual value correction
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
15
p1845[0...n]
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Signal name
Hardware for the actual value correction
detected
Automatic shutdown (too many switching
instants)
Integral normalized to half the gating unit
clock cycle freq.
Actual value correction temporarily suppressed
Actual value correction active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActV_corr FactLsig

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
10.00
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the weighting factor for the leakage inductance of the L-R element of the actual value correction.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0391, p0392, p0393
1-408
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The load-dependent adaptation of the leakage inductance of the current actual value correction is defined using
p0391 ... p0393.
p1846[0...n]
Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
10.00
Factory setting
1.00
Sets the damping factor for the actual value correction.

The factor multiplies the T0/Tsig ratio in the feedback branch of the LR element
r1848[0...5]
Actual value correction phase currents / ActVal_corr I_corr

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays phase correction currents as well as the drive converter phase currents
Index:
[0] = Harmonics, phase U

[1] = Harmonics, phase V
[2] = Harmonics, phase W
[3] = Measured value phase U
[4] = Measured value phase V
[5] = Measured value phase W
r1849[0...5]
Actual value correction phase voltages / ActVal_corr V_corr

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the phase correction voltages and and the drive converter phase voltages
Index:
[0] = Harmonics, phase U

[1] = Harmonics, phase V
[2] = Harmonics, phase W
[3] = Measured value phase U
[4] = Measured value phase V
[5] = Measured value phase W

1-409
Parameter
List of parameters
p1900
Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
2
Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.

p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 2:
Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0
When the drive enable signals are present, a motor data identification routine is carried out at standstill with the
next power-on command. Current flows through the motor which means that it can align itself by up to a quarter of
a revolution.
For permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors, the encoder is adjusted with the next power-on
command. The motor must be free to rotate and rotates through 1.5 revolutions of the motor encoder.
Value:
0:
2:
Inhibited
Identify motor data at standstill
Dependency:
In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into. When selecting the motor data identification routine,
the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1910
Refer to: F07990, A07991
Notice:
If there is a motor holding brake, it must be open (p1215 = 2).

To permanently accept the determined settings they must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971, p0977).
Note:
The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.
1-410

Parameter
List of parameters
p1900
Motor data identification and rotating measurement / MotID and rot meas

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
2
Sets the motor data identification and speed controller optimization.

p1900 = 0:
Function inhibited.
p1900 = 1:
Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300
Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0, 1, 2
depending on p1300
a revolution.
With the following power-on command, a rotating motor data identification routine is carried out - and in addition, a
speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor speeds.
p1900 = 2:
Induction motors --> set p1910 = 1 and p1960 = 0
Permanent-magnet or separately-excited synchronous motors --> set p1910 = 1, p1990 = 1 and p1960 = 0
a revolution.
p1900 = 3:
Sets p1960 = 0, 1, 2 depending on p1300
This setting should only be selected if the motor data identification was already carried out at standstill.
When the drive enable signals are present, with the next power-on command, a rotating motor data identification
routine is carried out - and in addition, a speed controller optimization by making measurements at different motor
speeds.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Inhibited
Identify motor data at standstill and with motor rotating
Identify motor data at standstill
Identify motor data with motor rotating
Dependency:
Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1910, p1960, p1990
Refer to: A07980, A07981, F07982, F07983, F07984, F07985, F07986, A07987, F07988, F07990, A07991
Notice:

Note:
The motor and control parameters are only optimally set when both measurements are carried out (initially at standstill, and then with the motor rotating).
An appropriate alarm is output when the parameter is set.
The power-on command must remain set during a measurement and after the measurement has been completed,
the drive automatically resets it.
The duration of the measurements can lie between 0.3 s and several minutes. This time is, for example, influenced
by the motor size and the mechanical conditions.
p1900 is automatically set to 0 after the motor data identification routine has been completed.

1-411
Parameter
List of parameters
p1901
Test pulse evaluation configuration / Test puls config

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Sets the configuration for the test pulse evaluation.

Settable options:
Bit 0: Short-circuit test
Check for conductor-to-conductor short circuit when pulse is enabled.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Test pulse for phase short-circuit active
Note:
For short-circuit test:
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
If the test was successful once after POWER ON (see r1902.0), it is not repeated.
If a conductor-to-conductor short-circuit is detected during the test, this is displayed in r1902.1.
r1902
Test pulse evaluation status / Status test puls

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Status display of test pulse evaluation.

Short-circuit test:
Bit0: No faults detected during short-circuit test.
Bit1: Phase short-circuit detected.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Signal name
Short-circuit test
Phase short-circuit detected
p1909[0...n]
Motor data identification control word / MotID STW

0
1 signal
Executed
Yes
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration of the motor data identification.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
1-412
0 signal
Not executed
no
Signal name
Stator inductance estimate no measurement
Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat controller
Rotor time constant estimate no measurement
Leakage inductance estimate no measurement
Activates the identification dynamic leakage inductance
FP
-
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Parameter
List of parameters
05
06
07
11
12
14
15
Note:
Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time

range
Activate vibration damping
Deactivate vibration detection
Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld
Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measurement
Deactivate valve interlocking time measurement
Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead time
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
The following applies to permanent-magnet synchronous motors:

Without deselection in bit 11, in the closed-loop control mode, the direct inductance LD and the quadrature inductance Lq are measured at a low current. When deselecting with bit 11 or in the V/f mode, the stator inductance is
measured at half the rated motor current.
If the stator is inductance is not measured but is to be estimated, then bit 0 should be set and bit 11 should be deselected.
p1910
Motor data identification selection / MotID selection

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
25
Factory setting
1
Sets the motor data identification routine.

The motor data identification routine is carried out after the next power-on command.
p1910 = 1:
All motor data and the drive converter characteristics are identified and then transferred to the following parameters:
p0350, p0354, p0356, p0357, p0358, p0360, p1825, p1828, p1829, p1830
After this, the control parameter p0340 = 3 is automatically calculated.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
20:
21:
22:
23:
24:
25:
Inhibited
Complete identification (ID) and acceptance of motor data
Complete identification (ID) of motor data without acceptance
ID of the saturation characteristic and acceptance
ID of the saturation characteristic without acceptance
ID of dynamic leakage inductance Lsig (r1920) without acceptance
ID of lockout time (r1926) without acceptance
ID of stator resistance Rs (r1912) without acceptance
ID of stator inductance Ls (r1915) Rr (r1927) without acceptance
ID of rotor time constant Tr (r1913) without acceptance
ID of static leakage inductance Lsig (r1914) without acceptance
Voltage vector input
Voltage vector input without filter
Rectangular voltage vector input without filter
Triangular voltage vector input without filter
Rectangular voltage vector input with filter
Triangular voltage vector input with filter
Dependency:
"Quick commissioning" must be carried out (p0010 = 1) before executing the motor data identification routine!
Caution:
After the motor data identification (p1910 > 0) has been selected, alarm A07991 is output and a motor data identification routine is carried out as follows at the next power-on command:
- current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals.
- during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution.
- however, no torque torque is generated.

1-413
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:

Note:
When setting p1910, the following should be observed:

1. "With acceptance" means:
The parameters specified in the description are overwritten with the identified values and therefore have an influence on the controller setting.
2. "Without acceptance" means:
The identified parameters are only displayed in the range r1912 ... r1926. The controller settings remain
unchanged.
3. p1910 = 3, 4, 5 can only be selected for induction motors.
p1911
Number of phases to be identified / Qty ph to ident

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of phases to be identified.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
Note:
When identifying with several phases, the accuracy increases and also the time it takes to make the measurement.
r1912[0...2]
Identified stator resistance / R_stator ident
1 phase U
2 phases U, V
3 phases U, V, W

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the identified stator resistance.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1913[0...2]
Identified rotor time constant / T_rotor ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Not for motor type: PEM
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the identified rotor time constant.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
1-414

Parameter
List of parameters
r1914[0...2]
Identified total leakage inductance / L_total_leak ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the identified total leakage inductance.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1915[0...2]
Identified nominal stator inductance / L_stator ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the nominal stator inductance identified.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1916[0...2]
Identified stator inductance 1 / L_stator 1 ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 1st point of the saturation characteristic.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1917[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

1-415
Parameter
List of parameters
r1918[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 3rd point of the saturation characteristic.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1919[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the nominal stator inductance identified for the 4th point of the saturation characteristic.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1920[0...2]
Identified dynamic leakage inductance / L_leak dyn ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the identified dynamic total leakage inductance.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1921[0...2]
Identified dynamic leakage inductance 1 / L_leak 1 dyn id

Index:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
1-416

Parameter
List of parameters
r1922[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1923[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1924[0...2]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1925[0...2]
Identified threshold voltage / V_threshold ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W

1-417
Parameter
List of parameters
r1926[0...2]
Identified effective valve lockout time / t_lock_valve id

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the identified effective valve lockout time.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1927[0...2]
Identified rotor resistance / R_rotor ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the identified rotor resistance
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1929[0...2]
Identified cable resistance / R_cable ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the identified cable resistance.
Index:
[0] = Phase U
[1] = Phase V
[2] = Phase W
r1934[0...9]
q inductance identified / Lq ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mH]
Max
- [mH]
Factory setting
- [mH]
Description:
Displays the identified (differential) q-inductance.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1935, p1959, p1960
Note:
The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from p1934 and p1935 with the same index.
This value corresponds to the value of the total leakage inductance (r0377).
1-418

Parameter
List of parameters
r1935[0...9]
q inductance identification current / Lq I_ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Description:
Displays the identification current to identify the q inductance ([0...9]).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1934, p1959, p1960
Note:
The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from r1934 and r1935 with the same index.
p1959[0...n]
Rotating measurement configuration / Rot meas config

0 (n/M)
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0001 1111 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration of the rotating measurement.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
Signal name
Enc test active
Saturation characteristic identification
Moment of inertia identification
Recalculates the speed controller parameters
q leakage inductance ident. (for current controller adaptation)
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: F07988
Note:
The encoder is only tested if the rotating measurement with encoder is selected (p1960 = 2).
The following parameters are influenced for the individual optimization steps:
Bit 00: None
Bit 01: p0320, p0360, p0362 ... p0369
Bit 02: p0341, p0342
Bit 03: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1460, p1462, p1463, p1470, p1472, p1496
Bit 04: Dependent on p1960
Bit 05: p0391, p0392, p0393, p1402.2 only for induction motors
p1960 = 1, 3: p1400.0, p1458, p1459, p1470, p1472, p1496
p1960 = 2, 4: p1458, p1459, p1460, p1461, p1462, p1463, p1496
The identification of the q leakage inductance can only be carried out for unloaded motors or motors with a low load
(load approx. 30% below the rated motor torque). Only then is a current controller adaptation (p0391 ... p0393)
parameterized if the q-leakage inductance under no-load conditions is at least 30 % higher than the total leakage
inductance (p0356, p0358).

1-419
Parameter
List of parameters
p1960
Rotating measurement selection / Rot meas sel

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
0
Sets the rotating measurement.

The rotating measurement is carried out after the next power-on command.
The setting possibilities of the parameter depend on the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
p1300 < 20 (V/f open-loop control):
It is not possible to select rotating measurement or speed controller optimization.
p1300 = 20, 22 (encoderless operation):
Only rotating measurement or speed controller optimization can be selected in the encoderless mode.
p1300 = 21, 23 (operation with encoder):
Both versions (encoderless and with encoder) of the rotating measurement and speed controller optimization can
be selected.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Inhibited
Rotating measurement in encoderless operation
Rotating measurement with encoder
Speed controller optimization in encoderless operation
Speed controller optimization with encoder
Dependency:
Before the rotating measurement is carried out, the motor data identification routine (p1900, p1910, r3925) should
have already been done.
In the simulation mode, a value of 1 cannot be written into the parameter.
When selecting the rotating measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
Refer to: p1272, p1300, p1900, p1959
Danger:
Refer to: A07987

For drives with a mechanical system that limits the distance moved, it must be ensured that this is not reached during the rotating measurement. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried out.
Notice:

Note:
When the rotating measurement is activated, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).
Parameter changes are automatically made for the rotating measurement (e.g. p1120); this is the reason that up to
the end of the measurement, and if no faults are present, no manual changes should be made.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times (p1120, p1121) are limited, for the rotating measurement, to 900 s.
For speed controller optimization with encoder (p1960 = 2, 4), the speed controller for encoderless operation is also
pre-assigned (p1470, p1472).
Depending on whether the speed controller optimization is carried out with or without encoder, different Kp/Tn
adaptations of the speed controller are set (p1464, p1465). If the drive should be controlled with as well as without
speed encoder, then we recommend the use of two drive data sets (p0180). These can then be executed with different speed controller adaptations.
p1961
Saturation characteristic speed to determine / Sat_char n determ

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
26 [%]
Max
75 [%]
Factory setting
40 [%]
Sets the speed to determine the saturation characteristic and the encoder test.
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
1-420

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:

Refer to: F07983
Note:
The saturation characteristics should be determined at an operating point with the lowest possible load.
r1962[0...4]
Saturation characteristic magnetizing current / Sat_char I_mag

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the magnetizing currents of the identified saturation characteristic.

The values are referred to r0331.
After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0366 ... p0369.
Index:
[0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
Dependency:
Refer to: r0331
r1963[0...4]
Saturation characteristic magnetizing inductance / Sat_char L_main

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the magnetizing inductances of the identified saturation characteristic.

The values are referred to r0382.
Index:
[0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
Dependency:
Refer to: r0382
r1964[0...4]
Saturation characteristic rotor flux / Sat_char rot flux

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the rotor flux values of the identified saturation characteristic.
Index:
[0] = Value 1
[1] = Value 2
[2] = Value 3
[3] = Value 4
[4] = Value 5
After they have been determined, the values are transferred to p0362 ... p0365.

1-421
Parameter
List of parameters
p1965
Speed_ctrl_opt speed / n_opt speed

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [%]
Max
75 [%]
Factory setting
40 [%]
Sets the speed for the identification of the moment of inertia and the vibration test.
Induction motor:
The percentage value is referred to p0310 (rated motor frequency).
Synchronous motor:
The percentage value is referred to the minimum from p0310 (rated motor frequency) and p1082 (maximum
speed).
Dependency:

Refer to: F07984, F07985
Note:
In order to calculate the inertia, sudden speed changes are carried out - the specified value corresponds to the
lower speed setpoint. This value is increased by 20 % for the upper speed value. The q leakage inductance (refer to
p1959 bit 5) is determined at zero speed and at 50% of p1965 - however, with a maximum output frequency of 15
Hz and at a minimum of 10% of the rated motor speed.
p1967
Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor / n_opt dyn_factor

0 (n/M)
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
400 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Description:
Sets the dynamic response factor for speed controller optimization.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1959

Refer to: F07985
Note:
For a rotating measurement, this parameter can be used to optimize the speed controller.
p1967 = 100 % --> speed controller optimization according to a symmetric optimum.
p1967 > 100 % --> optimization with a higher dynamic response (Kp higher, Tn lower).
r1968
Speed_ctrl_opt dynamic factor actual / n_opt dyn_fact act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the dynamic factor which is actually achieved for the vibration test
Dependency:

Refer to: F07985
Note:
This dynamic factor only refers to the control mode of the speed controller set in p1960.
1-422

Parameter
List of parameters
r1969
Speed_ctrl_opt moment of inertia determined / n_opt M_inert det

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 25_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kgm]
Max
- [kgm]
Factory setting
- [kgm]
Displays the determined moment of inertia of the drive.

After it has been determined, the value is transferred to p0341, p0342.
Dependency:
IEC drives (p0100 = 0): unit kg m^2

NEMA drives (p0100 = 1): unit lb ft^2
Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1959
Refer to: F07984
r1970[0...1]
Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test vibration frequency determined / n_opt f_vibration

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test.
Index:
[0] = Frequency low

[1] = Frequency high
Dependency:
Refer to: p1959

Refer to: F07985
r1971[0...1]
Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test standard deviation determined / n_opt std. deviat.

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the standard deviations of the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test
Index:
[0] = Standard deviation of low frequency

[1] = Standard deviation of high frequency
Dependency:
Refer to: p1959

Refer to: F07985
r1972[0...1]
Speed_ctrl_opt vibration test number of periods determined / n_opt period qty

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of periods determined by the vibration test.
Index:
[0] = No. of periods of the low frequency

[1] = No. of periods of the high frequency

1-423
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p1959

Refer to: F07985
r1973
Rotating measurement, encoder test pulse number determined / n_opt pulse No.

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of pulses determined during the vibration test.
Note:
A negative signal indicates an incorrect polarity of the encoder signal.
r1979.0...11
BO: Speed_ctrl_opt status / n_opt status

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status to check and monitor the states of speed controller optimization.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
p1980[0...n]
Signal name
Speed controller optimization activated
Speed controller optimization completed
Speed controller optimization interrupted
Enc test active
Saturation char. identification active
Moment of inertia identification active
Recalc. speed controller parameters active
Speed controller vibration test active
Magnetizing inductance adapt. active
Operation with encoder after encoderless
operation
q-leakage inductance identification
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Pole position identification technique / PolID technique

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
10
Factory setting
4
Description:
Sets the pole position identification technique.
Value:
1:
4:
6:
10:
Dependency:
In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into.
Voltage pulsing, first harmonic

Voltage pulsing, 2-stage
Voltage pulsing, 2-stage invert
DC current injection

Note:
Voltage pulse technique (p1980 = 1, 4) cannot be applied to separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5)
and for for operation with sine-wave output filters (p0230).
1-424

Parameter
List of parameters
p1982[0...n]
Pole position identification selection / PolID selection

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activates the pole position identification routine to determine the commutation angle and to carry out a plausibility
check.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Recommend.:
Re p1982 = 1:
Pole position identification off

Pole position identification for commutation
Pole position identification for plausibility check
This is used for synchronous motors with motor encoder without absolute data.
The information/data regarding the absolute commutation angle is supplied via a track C/D, Hall sensors, an absolute encoder or from the pole position identification routine.
Re p1982 = 2:
This is used for synchronous motor with motor encoder with absolute data to check this data.
For VECTOR, the following applies:
With p1982 = 2, each time the pulses are enabled it is checked whether the absolute position supplied from the
encoder does not exceed a deviation of 45 degrees to the identified pole wheel position.
With separately-excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5), pole position identification cannot be selected if an
encoder with position data is used (e.g. SSI encoder).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990
Note:
For encoderless operation, the pole position identification routine is selected with p1780.6
r1984
Pole position identification, angular difference / PolID ang diff

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Description:
Displays the angular difference between the actual electrical commutation angle and the angle determined by the
pole position identification.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1985, r1987, p1990
Note:
When the pole position identification routine is executed several times using p1983, the spread of the measured
values can be determined using this value. At the same position, the spread should be less than 2 degrees electrical.
r1985
Pole position identification, saturation characteristic / PolID sat_char

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the saturation characteristic of the pole position identification routine.

The values for the characteristic of the last saturation-based pole position identification routine are output every 1
ms in order to record signals (e.g. trace).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1987, p1990

1-425
Parameter
List of parameters
r1987
Pole position identification trigger characteristic / PolID trig_char

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the trigger characteristic of the pole position identification routine.

The values for the characteristic of the last pole position identification routine are output every 1 ms in order to
record signals (e.g. trace).
The values for trigger characteristic and saturation characteristic are always output in synchronism from a time perspective.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985
Note:
The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic.
- the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement.
- the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine.
p1990
Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset / Enc_adj det ang

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
This function is only required for synchronous motors and can be started when commissioning for the first time or
after replacing an encoder. The function acts on the active motor data set.
Alarm A07971 is output while the angular commutation offset is being determined. p1990 is automatically set to 0
after the angular commutation offset has been determined.
For p1990 = 1 (encoder adjustment with transfer), the following applies:
The angular commutation offset is determined and transferred into p0431.
For p1990 = 2 (encoder adjustment for checking), the following applies:
The angular commutation offset is determined and is not transferred into p0431. For a deviation of more than 6
electrical, fault F07413 is output.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Deactivated
Activated with transfer
Activated for checking
Dependency:
In the simulation mode, the parameter cannot be written into.

When selecting the encoder adjustment, the changeover of the drive data sets is suppressed.
Encoder adjustment is only carried out if the function module for speed/torque control is available (r0108 bit2 = 1).
Caution:
1-426
Refer to: p0325, p0329, p0431, p1272, p1900

When the encoder is being adjusted, the motor must be operated without a load - and if a motor holding brake is
being used, this must be opened.

Parameter
List of parameters
p1991[0...n]
Motor changeover, angular commutation correction / Ang_com corr

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-180 []
Max
180 []
Factory setting
0 []
Description:
Sets the angle that is added to the commutating angle.
Caution:
If the angular correction is not correctly set, when changing over and with closed-loop torque control, the motor can
accelerate to high speeds in spite of the fact that a setpoint of zero has been entered.
p1999[0...n]
Ang. commutation offset calibr. and pole position ID - scaling / ComOffsCalib scal

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [%]
Max
5000 [%]
Factory setting
100 [%]
Sets the scaling for the runtime of the automatic encoder calibration and
the current-impressing technique for the pole position identification routine.
Dependency:
Caution:
For P1999 > 100% (setting, large moments of inertia):

There is no locked rotor monitoring (A7970.2).
The plausibility check of the encoder signal (A7970.4) only checks the sign.
Note:
For high moments of inertia, it is practical to scale the runtime of the calibration higher.
p2000
Reference speed reference frequency / Ref_n Ref_f
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: T
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
6.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
3000.00 [rpm]
Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.

All speeds or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in (rpm) / 60)
Note:
If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor.

1-427
Parameter
List of parameters
p2000
Reference velocity, reference frequency / Ref_v Ref_f
ENCODER (Lin enc) Can be changed: T
Description:
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.60 [m/min]
Max
600.00 [m/min]
Factory setting
120.00 [m/min]
Sets the reference quantity for velocity and frequency.

All velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference velocity (in (m/min) / 60)
Note:
p2000
Reference speed reference frequency / Ref_n Ref_f

0
Description:
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
6.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
3000.00 [rpm]
Sets the reference quantity for speed and frequency.

The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in (rpm) / 60)
Dependency:
Refer to: p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004
Note:
For the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) an appropriate pre-assignment is only made if the parameter
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1.
Example 1:
The signal of an analog input (e.g. r4055[0]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual percentage input value is cyclically converted into the absolute speed setpoint using the reference speed (p2000).
Example 2:
The setpoint from PROFIBUS (r2050[1]) is connected to a speed setpoint (e.g. p1070[0]). The actual input value is
cyclically converted into a percentage value via the pre-specified scaling 4000 hex. This percentage value is converted to the absolute speed setpoint via reference speed (p2000).
p2001
Reference voltage / Reference voltage

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10 [Vrms]
Max
100000 [Vrms]
Factory setting
1000 [Vrms]
Sets the reference quantity for voltages.

All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. This also applies for direct voltage values (= rms value) like the DC-link voltage.
1-428

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
For infeed units, the parameterized device supply voltage (p0210) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the parameterized scaling.
p2002
Reference current / Reference current

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.10 [Arms]
Max
100000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
100.00 [Arms]
Sets the reference quantity for currents.

All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
Notice:
If various DDS are used with different motor data, then the reference quantities remain the same as these are not
changed over with the DDS. The resulting conversion factor should be taken into account (e.g. for trace records).
Example:
p2002 = 100 A
Reference quantity 100 A corresponds to 100 %
p305[0] = 100 A
Rated motor current 100 A for MDS0 in DDS0 --> 100 % corresponds to 100 % of the rated motor current
p305[1] = 50 A
Rated motor current 50 A for MDS1 in DDS1 --> 100 % corresponds to 200 % of the rated motor current
Note:
For infeed units, the rated line current, which is obtained from the rated power and parameterized rated line supply
voltage (p2002 = r0206 / p0210 / 1.73) is pre-assigned as the reference quantity.
Example:
The actual value of a phase current (r0069[0]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual current
value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference current (p2002) and output according to the parameterized scaling.
p2003
Reference torque / Reference torque

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 7_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
1.00 [Nm]
Description:
Sets the reference quantity for torques.

All torques specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.

1-429
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Example:
The actual value of the total torque (r0079]) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual torque is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference torque (p2003) and output according to the parameterized scaling.
r2004
Reference power / Reference power

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 14_10
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Displays the reference quantity for power ratings.

All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
Dependency:
This value is calculated as follows:

Infeed: Calculated from voltage times current.
Closed-loop control: Calculated from torque times speed.
Refer to: p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003
Note:
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)
p2005
Reference angle / Reference angle

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
90.00 []
Max
180.00 []
Factory setting
90.00 []
Sets the reference quantity for angle.

All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
Note:
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different
physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor.
p2007
Reference acceleration / Ref accel

0
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01 [rev/s]
Max
500000.00 [rev/s]
Factory setting
0.01 [rev/s]
Sets the reference quantity for acceleration rates.

All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
1-430

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
is not inhibited from being overwritten using p0573 = 1. If a BICO interconnection is established between different
physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor.
The reference acceleration is calculated as follows:
Reference speed (p2000) converted from 1/min to 1/s divided by 1 s
--> p2007 = p2000 [rpm] / (60 [s/min] * 1 [s])
r2019[0...7]
Comm int error statistics / Comm err
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the receive errors at the commissioning interface (RS232).
Index:
[0] = Number of error-free telegrams

[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
p2020
Field bus interface baud rate / Field bus baud
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4
Max
13
Factory setting
8
Description:
Sets the baud rate for the fieldbus interface USS.
Value:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
Note:
Field bus interface.
2400 Baud
4800 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
38400 Baud
57600 Baud
76800 Baud
93750 Baud
115200 Baud
187500 Baud
Changes only become effective after POWER ON.


1-431
Parameter
List of parameters
p2021
Field bus interface address / Field bus address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
30
Factory setting
0
Description:
Displays or sets the address for the fieldbus interface.

The address can be set as follows:
--> p2021 displays the address setting.
2) Using p2021
--> Only if an address of 0 or an address which is invalid for the fieldbus selected in p2030 has been set using the
address switch.
--> The address is saved in a non-volatile fashion using the function "copy from RAM to ROM".
Dependency:
Refer to: p2030
Note:

p2022
Field bus int USS PZD no. / Field bus USS PZD
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PZD part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2030
Note:
p2023
Field bus int USS PKW no. / Field bus USS PKW
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
127
Factory setting
127
Description:
Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface.
Value:
0:
3:
4:
127:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2030
Note:
1-432
PKW 0 words
PKW 3 words
PKW 4 words
PKW variable

Parameter
List of parameters
r2029[0...7]
Field bus int error statistics / Field bus error
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the receive errors on the field bus interface (USS).
Index:
[0] = Number of error-free telegrams

[1] = Number of rejected telegrams
[2] = Number of framing errors
[3] = Number of overrun errors
[4] = Number of parity errors
[5] = Number of starting character errors
[6] = Number of checksum errors
[7] = Number of length errors
p2030
Field bus int protocol selection / Field bus protocol
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
3
Max
6
Factory setting
3
Description:
Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface.
Value:
3:
6:
Note:
PROFIBUS
USS(RS232) at X140
r2032
Master control, control word effective / PcCtrl STW eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the effective control word 1 (STW1) of the drive for the master control.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Notice:
The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control words/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device.
Note:
Signal name
ON/OFF1
OC / OFF2
OC / OFF3
Operation enable
Ramp-function generator enable
Speed setpoint enable
Acknowledge fault
Jog bit 0
Jog bit 1
Master ctrl by PLC
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
3030
3030
-
1-433
Parameter
List of parameters
p2035
Fieldbus interface USS PIV drive object number / Fieldbus USS DO_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
62
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the drive object number for communication via the field bus interface (USS).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0978
Note:
p2035 defines the destination for USS parameter requests (PIV).

p0978[0] defines the destination for USS process data (PZD).
The parameter is available globally on all drive objects.
p2037
PROFIdrive STW1.10 = 0 mode / PD STW1.10=0 mode
ENCODER,
Can be changed: T
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Sets the processing mode for PROFIdrive STW1.10 "master control by PLC".
Generally, control world 1 is received with the first receive word (PZD1) (this is in conformance to the PROFIdrive
profile). The behavior of STW1.10 = 0 corresponds to that of the PROFIdrive profile. For other applications that
deviate from this, the behavior can be adapted using this particular parameter.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Freeze setpoints and continue to process sign-of-life

Freeze setpoints and sign-of-life
Setpoints are not frozen
Recommend.:
Do not change the setting p2037 = 0.
Note:
If the STW1 is not transferred according to the PROFIdrive with PZD1 (with bit 10 "master control by PLC"), then
p2037 should be set to 2.
p2038
PROFIdrive STW/ZSW interface mode / PD STW/ZSW IF mode

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Sets the interface mode of the PROFIdrive control words and status words.
When selecting a telegram via p0922 (p2079), this parameter influences the device-specific assignment of the bits
in the control and status words.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
For p0922 (p2079) = 100 ... 199, p2038 is automatically set to 1 and p2038 can no longer be changed. This means
that for these telegrams, the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode is set and cannot be changed.
1-434
SINAMICS
SIMODRIVE 611 universal
VIK-NAMUR

Parameter
List of parameters
p2039
Select debug monitor interface / Sel. debug monitor
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
The serial interface for the debug monitor is COM1 (X140) or COM2 (internal).
Value = 0: COM2 (internal)
Value = 1: COM1 (X140), commissioning protocol is deactivated
Value = 2: COM2 (internal)
Value = 3: Reserved
p2040
Fieldbus interface monitoring time / Fieldbus t_monit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65535000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the fieldbus interface.
If no process data is received within this time, an appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: F01910
Note:
0: The monitoring is deactivated.
p2042
PROFIBUS Ident Number / PB Ident No.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the PROFIBUS Ident Number (PNO-ID).

SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is
independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with Ident Number 3AA0 hex).
Value:
0:
1:
SINAMICS S/G
VIK-NAMUR
Note:
Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.
r2043.0...2
BO: PROFIdrive PZD state / PD PZD state
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PROFIdrive PZD state.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Signal name
Setpoint failure
Clock cycle synchronous operation active
Fieldbus running
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
1-435
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p2044
Note:
When using the "setpoint failure" signal, the bus can be monitored and an application-specific response triggered
when the setpoint fails.
p2044
PROFIdrive fault delay / PD fault delay
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [s]
Max
100 [s]
Factory setting
0 [s]
Sets the delay time to initiate fault F01910 after a setpoint failure.
The time until the fault is initiated can be used by the application. This means that is is possible to respond to the
failure while the drive is still operational (e.g. emergency retraction).
Dependency:
Refer to: r2043

Refer to: F01910
p2045
CI: PROFIdrive clock-cyc. synchr. master sign-of-life, signal source /

PD mast-SoL S_src
ENCODER,
Can be changed: T
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Connector input for the sign-of-life of the clock synchronous PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
The sign-of-life is expected at bits 12 to 15. Bits 0 to 11 are not evaluated.
The sign-of-life signal is normally received in PZD4 (control word 2) from the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
Dependency:
Notice:
p2047
PROFIBUS additional monitoring time / PB suppl t_monit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
20000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the additional monitoring time to monitor the process data received via PROFIBUS.
The additional monitoring time enables short bus faults to be compensated.
Recommend.:
Do not set the additional monitoring time for clock-synchronous operation.
Dependency:
Refer to: F01910
1-436

Parameter
List of parameters
p2048
IF1 PROFIdrive PZD sampling time / IF1 PZD t_sample
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [ms]
Max
16.00 [ms]
Factory setting
4.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the cyclic interface 1 (IF1).
Note:
For clock cycle synchronous operation, the specified bus cycle time applies (Tdp).
r2050[0...4]
CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive word / IF1 PZD recv word
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, TB30, Data type: Integer16
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2050[0...3]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Dependency:
Refer to: r2060
Note:
IF1: Interface 1

1-437
Parameter
List of parameters
r2050[0...31]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Dependency:
Refer to: r2060
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
1-438

Parameter
List of parameters
p2051[0...14]
CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send word / IF1 PZD send word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) with word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
p2051[0...11]
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Dependency:
Refer to: p2061
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1

1-439
Parameter
List of parameters
p2051[0...4]
TB30, TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
p2051[0...31]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Dependency:
Refer to: p2061
1-440

Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2053[0...14]
IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send word / IF1 diag send word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD (actual values) with word format sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-441
Parameter
List of parameters
r2053[0...11]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2053[0...4]
TB30, TM31
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
1-442
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2053[0...31]

1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
FP
-
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32

1-443
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Dependency:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2054
PROFIBUS status / PB status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
-
Description:
Status display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Note:
Re r2054 = 3:
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Off
No connection (search for baud rate)
Connection OK (baud rate found)
Cyclic connection with master (data exchange)
Cyclic data OK
In state 3 (the LED flashes green), a cyclic connection has been established to the PROFIBUS master; however,
one of the following prerequisites is missing for cyclic operation:
- No setpoints are being received as the PROFIBUS master is in the STOP condition.
Only for clock-cycle synchronous operation, the following applies:
- The drive is not in synchronism as the global control (GC) has an error.
Re r2054 = 4:
In the status 4 (LED green), the cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master has been established and setpoints are
being received. The clock cycle synchronization is OK, the global control (GC) is error-free.
This state does not provide any statement regarding the quality of the clock cycle synchronous sign-of-life characters on the drive objects.
r2055[0...2]
PROFIBUS diagnostics standard / PB diag standard
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Diagnostics display for the PROFIBUS interface.
Index:
[0] = Master bus address

[1] = Master input total length bytes
[2] = Master output total length bytes
1-444

Parameter
List of parameters
r2057
PROFIBUS address switch diagnostics / PB addr diagn
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the setting of the PROFIBUS address switch "DP ADDRESS" on the Control Unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0918
r2060[0...2]
CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / IF1 PZD recv DW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
Dependency:
Refer to: r2050
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2060[0...30]
CO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD receive double word / IF1 PZD recv DW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24

1-445
Parameter
List of parameters
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
[27] = PZD 28 + 29
[28] = PZD 29 + 30
[29] = PZD 30 + 31
[30] = PZD 31 + 32
Dependency:
Refer to: r2050
Notice:
A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
p2061[0...10]
CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send double word / IF1 PZD send DW
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Dependency:
Refer to: p2051
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
p2061[0...30]
CI: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD send double word / IF1 PZD send DW

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2470
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the PROFIBUS master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
1-446

Parameter
List of parameters
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
[27] = PZD 28 + 29
[28] = PZD 29 + 30
[29] = PZD 30 + 31
[30] = PZD 31 + 32
Dependency:
Refer to: p2051
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2063[0...10]
IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / IF1 diag send DW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-447
Parameter
List of parameters
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2063[0...30]
IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics PZD send double word / IF1 diag send DW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD (actual values) with double word format sent to the PROFIBUS/PROFINET master.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
[15] = PZD 16 + 17
[16] = PZD 17 + 18
[17] = PZD 18 + 19
[18] = PZD 19 + 20
[19] = PZD 20 + 21
[20] = PZD 21 + 22
[21] = PZD 22 + 23
[22] = PZD 23 + 24
[23] = PZD 24 + 25
[24] = PZD 25 + 26
[25] = PZD 26 + 27
[26] = PZD 27 + 28
[27] = PZD 28 + 29
[28] = PZD 29 + 30
[29] = PZD 30 + 31
[30] = PZD 31 + 32
1-448

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Notice:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2064[0...7]
PROFIdrive diagnostics clock synchronous mode / PD diag clock sync
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Displays the last parameter received from the fieldbus master for clock synchronism.
The parameters for clock synchronism are created when configuring the bus and are transferred at the start of
cyclic operation from the master to the slave.
Index:
[0] = Clock synchronous mode activated

[1] = Bus cycle time (Tdp) [s]
[2] = Master cycle time (Tmapc) [s]
[3] = Instant of actual value acquisition (Ti) [s]
[4] = Instant of setpoint acquisition (To) [s]
[5] = Data exchange interval (Tdx) [s]
[6] = PLL window (Tpll-w) [1/12 s]
[7] = PLL delay time (Tpll-d) [1/12 s]

1-449
Parameter
List of parameters
r2065
PROFIdrive master sign-of-life, diagnostics / PD mast-SoL diag
ENCODER,
0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2410
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays how often the sign-of-life from the clock synchronous fieldbus master failed.
An appropriate fault is output when the tolerance, specified in p0925, is exceeded.
Dependency:
Refer to: F01912
r2074[0...4]
IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF1diag addr recv
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 125: Bus address of the sender
65535: Not assigned
r2074[0...3]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned
1-450

Parameter
List of parameters
r2074[0...31]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned

1-451
Parameter
List of parameters
r2075[0...4]
IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF1 diag offs recv
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, TB30, Data type: Unsigned16
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (master output).
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
0 - 242: Byte offset
65535: Not assigned
r2075[0...3]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned
r2075[0...31]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
1-452

Parameter
List of parameters
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned
r2076[0...14]
IF1 PROFIdrive diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF1 diag offs send
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (master output).
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned

1-453
Parameter
List of parameters
r2076[0...11]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned
r2076[0...4]
TB30, TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned
1-454

Parameter
List of parameters
r2076[0...31]

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
[16] = PZD 17
[17] = PZD 18
[18] = PZD 19
[19] = PZD 20
[20] = PZD 21
[21] = PZD 22
[22] = PZD 23
[23] = PZD 24
[24] = PZD 25
[25] = PZD 26
[26] = PZD 27
[27] = PZD 28
[28] = PZD 29
[29] = PZD 30
[30] = PZD 31
[31] = PZD 32
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Value range:
65535: Not assigned
r2077[0...15]
PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses / PB diag peer addr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the addresses of the slaves (peers) where peer-to-peer data transfer has been configured via PROFIBUS.

1-455
Parameter
List of parameters
p2079
PROFIdrive PZD telegram selection extended / PD PZD telegr ext
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
390
Max
999
Factory setting
999
Description:

Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded.
For p0922 < 999 the following applies:
p2079 has the same value and is inhibited. All of the interconnections and extensions contained in the telegram are
inhibited.
p2079 can be freely set. If p2079 is also set to 999, then all of the interconnections can be set.
For p0922 = 999 and p2079 < 999 the following applies:
The interconnections contained in the telegram are inhibited. However, the telegram can be extended.
Value:
390:
391:
392:
999:
p2079
ENCODER
Description:

Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
81
Max
999
Factory setting
999

inhibited.
Value:
81:
82:
83:
999:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0922
1-456


Parameter
List of parameters
p2079

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
999
Factory setting
999

inhibited.
Value:
1:
2:
20:
220:
352:
999:

Dependency:
Refer to: p0922
p2079

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
999
Factory setting
999

inhibited.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
20:
220:
352:
999:

Dependency:
Refer to: p0922

1-457
Parameter
List of parameters
p2080[0...15]
BI: Binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects bits to be sent to the fieldbus master.

The individual bits are combined to form status word 1.
Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
Notice:
p2081[0...15]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
1-458

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
For clock synchronous operation, bit 12 to 15 to transfer the sign-of-life are reserved in status word 2 - and may not
be freely interconnected.
p2082[0...15]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3.
Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
Notice:
p2083[0...15]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11

1-459
Parameter
List of parameters
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
p2084[0...15]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
p2088[0...4]
Invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index:
[0] = Status word 1

[1] = Status word 2
[2] = Free status word 3
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
1-460
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Refer to: p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083, r2089
r2089[0...4]
CO: Send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2472
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
Index:
[0] = Status word 1

[1] = Status word 2
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: p2051, p2080, p2081, p2082, p2083
Note:
r2089 together with p2080 to p2084 forms five binector-connector converters.
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-461
Parameter
List of parameters
r2090.0...15
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
BO: IF1 PROFIBUS PZD1 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD1 recv bitw
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the PROFIBUS master.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2091.0...15
BO: IF1 PROFIdrive PZD2 receive bit-serial / IF1 PZD2 recv bitw
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIBUS master.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
1-462
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r2092.0...15
ENCODER,
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received from the PROFIBUS master.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
r2093.0...15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
ENCODER,
0
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIBUS master.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-463
Parameter
List of parameters
r2094.0...15
BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
The PZD is selected via p2099[0].
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Dependency:
Refer to: p2099
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
r2095.0...15
BO: Connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
FP
-
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
Bit field:
1-464
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p2099
p2098[0...1]
Inverter connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.

Using p2098[0], the signals of CI: p2099[0] are influenced.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Dependency:
Refer to: r2094, r2095, p2099
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
FP
-
p2099[0...1]
CI: Connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2468
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.

A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (interconnection).
Dependency:
Note:
From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:
Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15

1-465
Parameter
List of parameters
p2100[0...19]
Setting the fault number for fault response / F_no F response
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
Description:
Selects the faults for which the fault response should be changed
Dependency:
The fault is selected and the required response is set under the same index.
Refer to: p2101
Notice:
For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault:
- if there is no existing fault number.
- the message type is not "fault" (F).
- when a fault is present.
1-466

Parameter
List of parameters
p2101[0...19]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Setting the fault response / Fault response

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
0
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
Description:
Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value:
0:
Dependency:
NONE

1-467
Parameter
List of parameters
p2101[0...19]
Setting the fault response / Fault response

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
7
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
Description:
Sets the fault response for the selected fault.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Dependency:
NONE
OFF1
OFF2
OFF3
STOP1 (being developed)
STOP2
IASC/DCBRAKE
ENCODER (p0491)
Refer to: p2100

Notice:
It is not possible to re-parameterize the response to a specific fault for faults that are already present (queued).
Note:
The fault response can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification (see the List Manual, chapter
"Faults and alarms").
Example:
F12345 and fault response = OFF3 (OFF1, OFF2, NONE)
--> The default fault response OFF3 can be changed to OFF1, OFF2 or NONE.
Re value = 1 (OFF1):
Braking along the ramp-function generator down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
Internal/external pulse inhibit.
Braking along the OFF3 down ramp followed by a pulse inhibit.
Re value = 5 (STOP2):
n_set = 0
1-468

Parameter
List of parameters
Re value = 6 (armature short-circuit, internal/DC brake):

The value can only be set for all motor data sets when p1231 = 3, 4.
a) For synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx), an internal armature short-circuit is executed.
b) For induction motors (p0300 = 1xx), a DC brake is initiated.
Re value = 7 (ENCODER (p0491)):
The fault response set in p0491 is executed if applicable.
Note:
IASC: Internal armature short circuit
DCBRAKE: Direct current brake
p2102
BI: Acknowledge all faults / Ackn all faults
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to acknowledge all faults at all drive objects of the drive system.
Note:
A fault acknowledgement is triggered with a 0/1 signal.
p2103
BI: 1. Acknowledge faults / 1. Acknowledge
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Notice:
Note:
p2103[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS

2443, 2447, 2475, 2546, 9220,
9677, 9678
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the first signal source to acknowledge faults.
Notice:
Note:

1-469
Parameter
List of parameters
p2104
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note:
p2104[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note:
p2105
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note:
p2105[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the third signal source to acknowledge faults.
Note:
1-470

Parameter
List of parameters
p2106
BI: External fault 1 / External fault 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for external fault 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07860
Note:
An external fault is triggered with a 1/0 signal.

If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects.
p2106[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: F07860
Note:

p2107
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: F07861
Note:

p2107[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: F07861
Note:


1-471
Parameter
List of parameters
p2108
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1

External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation:
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency:
Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112

Refer to: F07862
Note:

p2108[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1

- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency:
Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112

Refer to: F07862
Note:

r2109[0...63]
All objects
Fault time removed in milliseconds / t_flt resolved ms

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the fault was removed.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
1-472

Parameter
List of parameters
r2110[0...63]
All objects
Alarm number / Alarm number

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
This parameter is identical to r2122.
p2111
Alarm counter / Alarm counter
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Number of alarms that have occurred after the last reset.
Dependency:
When p2111 is set to 0, the following is initiated:

- all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63].
- the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted.
Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
Note:
The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON.
p2112
BI: External alarm 1 / External alarm 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for external alarm 1.
Dependency:
Refer to: A07850
Note:
An external alarm is triggered with a 1/0 signal.
p2112[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: A07850
Note:

1-473
Parameter
List of parameters
r2114[0...1]
System runtime / System runtime
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the total system runtime for the drive unit.

The time comprises r2114[0] (milliseconds) and r2114[1] (days).
After r2114[0] has reached a value of 86.400.000 ms (24 hours) this value is reset and r2114[1] is incremented.
Index:
[0] = Milliseconds
[1] = Days
Dependency:
Note:
The time in r2114 is used to display the fault and alarm times.
When the electronic power supply is switched out, the counter value is saved.
After the drive unit is powered up, the counter continues to run with the value that was saved the last time that the
drive unit was powered down.
p2116
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: A07851
Note:
p2116[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: A07851
Note:
1-474

Parameter
List of parameters
p2117
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: A07852
Note:
p2117[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: A07852
Note:
p2118[0...19]
Sets the message number for message type. / Msg_no Msg_type
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency:
Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Refer to: p2119
Notice:
It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type in the following cases:

- if there is no existing message number.
- if a message is present.
p2119[0...19]
Setting the message type / Message type
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index.
Fault (F)
Alarm (A)
No message (N)
Refer to: p2118

1-475
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
It is not possible to re-parameterize the message type for the existing faults or alarms.
Note:
The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345(A) --> Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
In this case, the message number that may be possibly entered in p2100[0...19] and p2126[0...19] is automatically
removed.
r2120
CO: Sum of fault and alarm buffer changes / Sum buffer changed
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the sum of all of the fault and alarm buffer changes in the drive unit.
Dependency:
r2121
CO: Counter, alarm buffer changes / Alrm buff changed
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
This counter is incremented every time the alarm buffer changes.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125
r2122[0...63]
Alarm code / Alarm code
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of alarms that have occurred.
Dependency:
Note:
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0], r2123[0], r2125[0] --> alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7], r2123[7], r2125[7] --> Alarm 8 (the latest)
When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history:
r2122[8], r2124[8], r2123[8], r2125[8] --> Alarm 1 (the latest)
...
r2122[63], r2124[63], r2123[63], r2125[63] --> alarm 56 (the oldest)
1-476

Parameter
List of parameters
r2123[0...63]
All objects
Alarm time received in milliseconds / t_alarm recv ms

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm occurred.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
r2124[0...63]
All objects
Alarm value / Alarm value

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Dependency:
Note:
r2125[0...63]
All objects
Alarm time removed in milliseconds / t_alarm res ms

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the system runtime in milliseconds when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
p2126[0...19]
All objects
Setting fault number for acknowledge mode / Fault_no ackn_mode

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the faults for which the acknowledge mode is to be changed
Dependency:
Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Refer to: p2127

1-477
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:
p2127[0...19]
All objects
Sets acknowledgement mode / Acknowledge mode

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the acknowledge mode for selected fault.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Selects the faults and sets the required acknowledge mode realized under the same index
Acknowledgment only using POWER ON

Ack IMMEDIATELY after the fault cause has been removed
Acknowledgement only for PULSE INHIBIT
Refer to: p2126

Notice:
It is not possible to re-parameterize the acknowledge mode of a fault in the following cases:
Note:
The acknowledge mode can only be changed for faults with the appropriate identification.
Example:
F12345 and acknowledge mode = POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY) --> The acknowledge mode can be changed from
POWER ON to IMMEDIATELY.
p2128[0...15]
All objects
Selecting fault/alarm code for trigger / Message trigger

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects faults or alarms which can be used as trigger.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2129
r2129.0...15
CO/BO: Trigger word for faults and alarms / Trigger word
All objects
Description:
1-478
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Trigger signal for the selected faults and alarms

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Trigger signal p2128[0]
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Dependency:
If one of the faults or alarms selected in p2128[n] occurs, then the particular bit of this binector output is set.
Refer to: p2128
Note:
CO: r2129 = 0 --> None of the selected messages has occurred.

CO: r2129 > 0 --> At least one of the selected messages has occurred.
r2130[0...63]
Fault time received in days / t_fault recv days
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the system runtime in days when the fault occurred.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
r2131
CO: Actual fault code / Actual fault code
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the code of the oldest active fault.
Note:
0: No fault present.
r2132
CO: Actual alarm code / Actual alarm code
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the code of the last alarm that occurred.
Note:
0: No alarm present.

1-479
Parameter
List of parameters
r2133[0...63]
Fault value for float values / Fault val float
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays additional information about the fault that occurred for float values.
Dependency:
Note:
r2134[0...63]
Alarm value for float values / Alarm value float
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays additional information about the active alarm for float values.
Dependency:
Note:
r2135.0...15
CO/BO: Status word faults/alarms 2 / ZSW fault/alarm 2
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the second status word of faults and alarms.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
10
11
12
13
14
15
1-480
Signal name
Fault encoder 1
Fault encoder 2
Fault encoder 3
Fault transformer overtemperature
Alarm transformer overtemperature
Fault motor overtemperature
Fault power unit thermal overload
Alarm motor overtemperature
Alarm power unit thermal overload
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r2135.0...15

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the second status word of faults and alarms.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
12
13
14
15
r2136[0...63]
Fault time removed in days / t_flt resolv. days
All objects
Signal name
Fault encoder 1
Fault encoder 2
Fault encoder 3
Fault motor overtemperature
Fault power unit thermal overload
Alarm motor overtemperature
Alarm power unit thermal overload
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the system runtime in days when the fault was removed.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
r2138.7...15
CO/BO: Control word faults/alarms / STW fault/alarm
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word of the faults and alarms.
Bit field:
Bit
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: p2103, p2104, p2105, p2106, p2107, p2108, p2112, p2116, p2117, p3110, p3111, p3112
Signal name
Acknowledge fault
External alarm 1 (A07850) effective
External fault 1 (F07860) effective
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
1-481
Parameter
List of parameters
r2139.0...12
All objects

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the first status word of faults and alarms.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
03
05
06
07
08
11
12
Note:
Re bit 03, 05, 07:
Signal name
Being acknowledged
Acknowledgment required
Fault present
Safety message present
Internal message 1 present
Alarm present
Internal message 2 present
Alarm class bit 0
Alarm class bit 1
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High
High
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Low
Low
FP
-
These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the
reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present"/"alarm present" has occurred, a change
in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121).
Re bit 06, 08:
These status bits are used for internal diagnostic purposes only.
Re bit 11, 12:
These status bits are used for the classification of internal alarm classes and are intended for diagnostic purposes
only on certain automation systems with SINAMICS functionality.
p2140[0...n]
Hysteresis speed 2 / n_hysteresis 2

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
300.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
90.00 [rpm]
Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:

"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency:
p2141[0...n]
Speed threshold 1 / n_thresh val 1

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
5.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "f or n comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency:
1-482

Parameter
List of parameters
p2142[0...n]

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
300.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
2.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "f or n / v comparison value reached or exceeded" (BO:
r2199.1).
Dependency:
p2144[0...n]
BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the negated enable (0 = enable) of the motor stall monitoring.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198

Refer to: F07900
Note:
If the enable signal is connected to r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint - actual
value deviation.
r2145[0...63]
Alarm time received in days / t_alarm recv days
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm occurred.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
r2146[0...63]
Alarm time removed in days / t_alarm res days
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the system runtime in days when the alarm was cleared.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:

1-483
Parameter
List of parameters
p2147
Delete fault buffer of all drive objects / Del fault buffer
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to delete the fault buffer of all existing drive objects.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Note:
p2147 is automatically set to 0 after execution.
p2148[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator active / HLG active
Inactive
Start to delete the fault buffer of all drive objects

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
"Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5)
Notice:
Note:
The binector input is automatically pre-assigned to r1199.2.

The pre-assignment is only made when the function module "setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
p2149[0...n]
Monitoring configuration / Monit config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0001 bin
Description:
Configuration word for signals and monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
03
15
Dependency:
Refer to: r2197
Signal name
Enable alarm A07903
Load monitoring only in the 1st quadrant
n_act > p2155 own hysteresis
Automatic parameterization carried out
(p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0)
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
8010
8013
8010
-
Refer to: A07903
1-484

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 00:
Alarm A07903 is output when the bit is set with r2197.7 = 0 (n_set <> n_act).
Re bit 01:
When the bit is set, load monitoring is only carried out in the 1st quadrant as a result of the positive characteristic
parameters (p2182 ... p2190).
Re bit 03:
When the bit is set, r2197 bit 1 and bit 2 are determined via separate hystereses.
Re bit 15:
The bit indicates whether the automatic parameterization (p0340 = 1, p3900 > 0) for the parameters of the extended
monitoring functions was carried out. If the bit is not set (e.g. when the configuration is activated (p0108.15)), the
parameterization is automatically carried out during booting even if r3925.0 is already 1.
p2150[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
300.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
2.00 [rpm]
Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals:

"|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0)
"n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5)
"n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3)
Dependency:
Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199
p2151[0...n]
CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1170[0]
Sets the signal source for the speed setpoint for the following messages:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"|n_set| < p2161" (BO: r2198.4)
"n_set > 0" (BO: r2198.5)
Dependency:
Refer to: r2197, r2198, r2199
p2153[0...n]
Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed / velocity actual value.
The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2169

1-485
Parameter
List of parameters
p2154[0...n]
CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for speed setpoint 2.

The sum of CI: p2151 and CI: p2154 is used for the following messages/signals:
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off" (BO: r2197.7)
"Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4)
Dependency:
Refer to: p2151, r2197, r2199
p2155[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
900.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages:

"|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1)
"|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2)
Dependency:
p2156[0...n]
On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
10000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the switch-in delay time for the signal "comparison value reached" (BO: r2199.1).
Dependency:
Refer to: p2141, p2142, r2199
p2161[0...n]

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
5.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0).
Dependency:
1-486

Parameter
List of parameters
p2162[0...n]
Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
60000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197
Notice:
For p0322 = 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 0.1 * p0311

For p0322 > 0, the following applies: p2162 <= 1.02 * p0322 - p1082
If one of the conditions is violated, p2162 is appropriately and automatically reduced when exiting the commissioning mode.
Note:
For a negative speed limit (r1087) the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit
(r1084) above the limit value.
If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (e.g. due to load shedding), you are advised to
increase the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient, the hysteresis p2162 can
only be increased by more than 10% of the rated speed when the maximum speed (p0322) of the motor is sufficiently greater than the speed limit p1082.
p2163[0...n]

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
90.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold value for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
Dependency:
Refer to: p2164, p2166, r2197
p2164[0...n]

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
200.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
2.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message (BO: r2197.7).
Dependency:
Refer to: p2163, p2166, r2197

1-487
Parameter
List of parameters
p2166[0...n]
Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
10000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
200.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the switch-off delay time for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_off" signal/message
(BO: r2197.7).
Dependency:
Refer to: p2163, p2164, r2197
p2167[0...n]
Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8010
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
10000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
200.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO:
r2199.4).
r2169
CO: Actual speed smoothed signals / n_act smth message

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8012, 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the smoothed actual speed for messages/signals.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2153
p2174[0...n]
Torque threshold value 1 / M_thresh val 1

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
5.13 [Nm]
Sets the torque threshold value for the messages:

"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 and n_set reached" (BO: r2198.9)
"Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.10)
"Torque setpoint > torque threshold value 1" (BO: r2198.13)
Dependency:
1-488

Parameter
List of parameters
p2175[0...n]
Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
120.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0500, p2177, r2198
Note:
The following applies for encoderless vector control:

At low speeds in open-loop speed controlled operation (see p1755, p1756), a locked motor cannot be detected.
p2177[0...n]
Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
65.000 [s]
Factory setting
1.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the message "Motor locked" (BO: r2198.6).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0500, p2175, r2198
p2178[0...n]
Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
If "Motor locked" is identified within this time, then ZSW2.6 is set and an appropriate fault is output.

0
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
10.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.010 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the message "Motor stalled" (BO: r2198.7).
Dependency:
Refer to: r2198
p2181[0...n]
Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
If "Motor stalled" is identified within this time, then ZSW2.7 is set and an appropriate fault is output.

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the response when evaluating the load monitoring.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Load monitoring disabled

A07920 for torque/speed too low
A07921 for torque/speed too high
A07922 for torque/speed out of tolerance
F07923 for torque/speed too low
F07924 for torque/speed too high
F07925 for torque/speed out of tolerance

1-489
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186, p2187, p2188, p2189, p2190, p2192, r2198
Refer to: A07920, A07921, A07922, F07923, F07924, F07925
Note:
The response to the faults F07923 ... F07925 can be set. F07926 is evaluated only if p2181 is not zero.
p2182[0...n]
Load monitoring speed threshold value 1 / n_thresh 1

0 (Extended sig)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
150.00 [rpm]
Sets the speed/torque envelope curve for load monitoring.

The envelope curve (upper and lower envelope curve) is defined as follows based on 3 speed thresholds:
p2182 (n_threshold 1) --> p2185 (M_threshold 1, upper), p2186 (M_threshold 1, lower)
Dependency:
The following applies: p2182 < p2183 < p2184

Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186
Refer to: A07926
p2183[0...n]

0 (Extended sig)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
900.00 [rpm]

Dependency:

Refer to: p2182, p2184, p2187, p2188
Refer to: A07926
p2184[0...n]

0 (Extended sig)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
1500.00 [rpm]

Dependency:

Refer to: p2182, p2183, p2189, p2190
Refer to: A07926
1-490

Parameter
List of parameters
p2185[0...n]
Load monitoring torque threshold 1, upper / M_thresh 1 upper

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
10000000.00 [Nm]
Description:
Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring.
Dependency:
The following applies: p2185 > p2186

Refer to: A07926
Note:
The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189.
p2186[0...n]
Load monitoring torque threshold 1, lower / M_thresh 1 lower

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
The following applies: p2186 < p2185

Refer to: A07926
Note:
The lower envelope curve is defined by p2186, p2188 and p2190.
p2187[0...n]

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
10000000.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:

Refer to: A07926
Note:

1-491
Parameter
List of parameters
p2188[0...n]

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:

Refer to: A07926
Note:
p2189[0...n]

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
10000000.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:

Refer to: A07926
Note:
p2190[0...n]

0 (Extended sig)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Nm]
Max
20000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:

Refer to: A07926
Note:
p2192[0...n]
Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del

0 (Extended sig)
Description:
1-492
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
65.00 [s]
Factory setting
10.00 [s]
Sets the delay time to evaluate the load monitoring.

Parameter
List of parameters
p2194[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
100.00 [%]
Factory setting
90.00 [%]
Sets the torque/force threshold value for the signal "Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2" (BO: r2199.11).
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0033, p2195, r2199
p2195[0...n]
Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
1000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
800.0 [ms]
Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed".
The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only
evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired.
Dependency:
p2196[0...n]
Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling factor for torque utilization (r0033).
r2197.1...7
CO/BO: Status word monitoring 1 / ZSW monitor 1

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the first status word for monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
01
02
03
06
07
Signal name
|n_act| <= speed threshold value 2
|n_act| > speed threshold value 2
n_act >= 0
|n_act| > n_max
Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance
t_off
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
8010
8010
8010
8010
8010
1-493
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 01, 02:

The threshold value is set in p2155 and the hysteresis in p2140.
Re bit 03:
The hysteresis is set in p2150.
Re bit 06:
The hysteresis is set in p2162.
Re bit 07:
The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164.
r2198.4...12

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the second status word for monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
04
05
06
07
10
11
12
Note:
Re bit 07:
Signal name
|n_set| < p2161
n_set > 0
Motor locked
Motor stalled
|M_set| < torque threshold value 1
Load monitoring signals an alarm
Load monitoring signals a fault condition
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
8010
8010
8012
8012
8012
8013
8013
For servo drives, bit 07 is not used and is always inactive.

Re bit 10:
The torque threshold value 1 is set in p2174.
Re bit 12:
If the fault condition is removed, bit 12 is reset to 0. This is also the case even if the alarm message is still present.
r2199.0...11

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

8018
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the third status word for monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
04
05
06
07
11
1-494
Signal name
|n_act| < speed threshold value 3
f or n comparison value reached or
exceeded
Speed setp - act val deviation in tolerance
t_on
Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
Current below the zero current threshold
Speed deviation model/external in tolerance
Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
8010
8010
Yes
No
8010
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
8010
8012
8012

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 00:
The speed threshold value 3 is set in p2161.
Re bit 01:
The comparison value is set in p2141. We recommend setting the hysteresis (p2142) for canceling the bit to a value
lower than that in p2141. Otherwise, the bit will never be reset.
Re bit 11:
The torque threshold value 2 is set in p2194.
p2200[0...n]
BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller.
The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal.
p2201[0...n]
CO: Technology controller, fixed value 1 / Tec_ctrl fix val 1

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
10.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the value for fixed value 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2202[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
20.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2203[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
30.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:

1-495
Parameter
List of parameters
p2204[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
40.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2205[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
50.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2206[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
60.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2207[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
70.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
1-496

Parameter
List of parameters
p2208[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
80.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2209[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
90.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2210[0...n]
CO: Technology controller, fixed value 10 / Tec_ctrl fix val10

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2211[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
110.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:

1-497
Parameter
List of parameters
p2212[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
120.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2213[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
130.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2214[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
140.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
p2215[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
150.00 [%]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229
Notice:
1-498

Parameter
List of parameters
p2216[0...n]
Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
2
Description:
Selects the method that can be used to select the fixed setpoints.
Value:
1:
2:
p2220[0...n]
BI: Technology controller fixed value selection bit 0 / Tec_ctrl sel bit 0
Fixed value selection direct

Fixed value selection binary

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to select the fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2221, p2222, p2223
p2221[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2222, p2223
p2222[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2223
p2223[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222

1-499
Parameter
List of parameters
r2224
CO: Technology controller, fixed value effective / Tec_ctr FixVal eff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the selected and effective fixed value of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2229
r2225.0
CO/BO: Technology controller fixed value selection status word / Tec_ctrl FW status

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Status word of the fixed value selection of the technology controller.
Bit field:
Bit
00
r2229
Technology controller number actual / Tec_ctrl No. act
Signal name
Technology controller fixed value selected

1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7950
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
-
Description:
Displays the number of the selected fixed setpoint of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2224
p2230[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0100 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
03
Dependency:
Notice:
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint in a non-volatile fashion:
Signal name
Data save active
Non-volatile data save active for p2230.0 =
1
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
- Firmware with V2.3 or higher.

1-500

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 00:
0: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
1: The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved and after ON is entered using r2231. In order to save in a
non-volatile fashion, bit 03 should be set to 1.
Re bit 02:
0: Without initial rounding-off
1: With initial rounding-off.
The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the
ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237).
It is calculated as follows:
r = 0.0001 * MAX( p2237, |p2238| ) [%] / 0.13^2 [s^2]
The jerk is effective until the maximum acceleration is reached (a_max = p2237 [%] / p2247 [s] or a_max = p2238
[%] / p2248 [s]), after which the drive continues to run linearly with constant acceleration. The higher the maximum
acceleration (the lower that p2247 is), the longer the ramp-up time increases with respect to the set ramp-up time.
Re bit 03:
0: Non-volatile data save deactivated.
1. The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
r2231
Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint memory /

Tec_ctrl mop mem

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the setpoint memory for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 1, the last setpoint that was saved is entered after ON.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2230
p2235[0...n]
BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint /

Tec_ctrl mop raise

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to increase the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2236
p2236[0...n]
BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint /

Tec_ctrl mop lower

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2235

1-501
Parameter
List of parameters
p2237[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the maximum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2238
p2238[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
-100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the minimum value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2237
p2240[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller.
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2230
r2245
CO: Technology controller mot. potentiometer setpoint before RFG /

Tec_ctr mop befRFG

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology
controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2250
1-502

Parameter
List of parameters
p2247[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
1000.0 [s]
Factory setting
10.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-up time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2248
Note:
The time is referred to 100 %.

When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-up is correspondingly extended.
p2248[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time /

Tec_ctrMop t_rdown

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
1000.0 [s]
Factory setting
10.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-down time for the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the technology
controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2247
Note:
The time is referred to 100 %.

When the initial rounding-off is activated (p2230.2 = 1) the ramp-down is correspondingly extended.
r2250
CO: Technology controller motorized potentiometer setpoint after RFG /

Tec_ctr mop aftRFG

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7954
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the effective setpoint after the internal ramp-function generator for the motorized potentiometer of the
technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2245
p2252
Technology controller configuration / Tec_ctrl config

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0111 bin
Sets the configuration of the technology controller.

1-503
Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Signal name
Ramp-up/down time independent of setpoint sign
Integrator independent of Kp
Output signal without ramp active
Dependency:
Refer to: p2257, p2258, p2280, p2285
Note:
Re bit 00 = 0:
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
The ramp-down time (p2258) switches to the ramp-up time (p2257) when the sign for the output signal r2260
changes. When the sign changes, the output signal is kept at zero for one arithmetic cycle.
Re bit 00 = 1:
When r2260 exhibits a positive gradient, the ramp-up time (p2257) is active; when it exhibits a negative gradient,
the ramp-down time (p2258) is active. The sign for r2260 does not have any effect on the ramp time.
Re bit 01 = 0:
The integration time of the PID controller is evaluated with the gain factor Kp (p2280) (p2285 = integral time).
Re bit 01 = 1:
The integration time of the PID controller is independent of the gain factor (p2285 = integration time) if p2280 > 0.
Re bit 02 = 0:
When the PID controller is deactivated via p2200, the output signal r2294 is reduced to zero via the ramp-down
time p2293.
Re bit 02 = 1:
When the PID controller is deactivated via p2200, the output signal r2294 is set directly to zero.
p2253[0...n]
CI: Technology controller setpoint 1 / Tec_ctrl setp 1

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency:
p2254[0...n]

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency:
p2255
Technology controller setpoint 1 scaling / Tec_ctrl set1 scal

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
100.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2253
1-504

Parameter
List of parameters
p2256
Technology controller setpoint 2 scaling / Tec_ctrl set2 scal

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
100.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the setpoint 2 of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2254
p2257
Technology controller, ramp-up time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
650.00 [s]
Factory setting
1.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-up time of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Note:
The ramp-up time is referred to 100 %.
p2258
Technology controller ramp-down time / Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
650.00 [s]
Factory setting
1.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-down time of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Note:
The ramp-down time is referred to 100 %.
r2260
CO: Technology controller setpoint after ramp-function generator /

Tec_ctr set aftRFG

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Sets the setpoint after the ramp-function generator of the technology controller.
p2261
Technology controller setpoint filter time constant / Tec_ctrl set T

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
60.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.

1-505
Parameter
List of parameters
r2262
CO: Technology controller setpoint after filter / Tec_ctr set aftFlt

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the smoothed setpoint after the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
p2263
Technology controller type / Tec_ctrl type

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the technology controller type.
Value:
0:
1:
p2264[0...n]
CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
D component in the actual value signal

D component in the fault signal

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the actual value of the technology controller.
p2265
Technology controller actual value filter time constant / Tec_ctrl act T

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
60.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the time constant for the actual value filter (PT1) of the technology controller.
r2266
CO: Technology controller actual value after filter / Tec_ctr act aftFlt

Description:
1-506
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller

Parameter
List of parameters
p2267
Technology controller upper limit actual value / Tec_ctrl u_lim act

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Upper limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271

Refer to: F07426
Notice:
If the actual value exceeds the parameter value, this results in fault F7426.
p2268
Technology controller lower limit actual value / Tec_ctrl l_lim act

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
-100.00 [%]
Description:
Lower limit for the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2271

Refer to: F07426
Notice:
If the actual value falls below the parameter value, this results in fault F7426.
p2269
Technology controller gain actual value / Tech_ctrl gain act

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
500.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Scaling factor for the actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2271
Note:
For 100%, the actual value is not changed.
p2270
Technology controller actual value function selection / Tech_ctrl act_fct

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects an arithmetic function that should be applied to the actual value signal of the technology controller.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271
No function
Root function (root from x)
Square function (x * x)
Cube function (x * x * x)

1-507
Parameter
List of parameters
p2271
Technology controller actual value inversion (sensor type) / Tech_ctrl act inv

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the inversion of the actual value signal of the technology controller. This depends on the type of the actual
value sensor.
Value:
0:
1:
Caution:
If the actual value inversion is incorrectly selected, then the closed-loop control with the technology controller can
become unstable and can oscillate.
No inversion
Inversion of technology controller actual value signal
The correct setting can be determined as follows:

- inhibit the technology controller (P2200 = 0).
- increase the motor speed and in so doing, measure the actual value signal (of the technology controller).
- if the actual value increases with increasing motor speed, then the inversion should be switched out.
- if the actual value decreases with increasing motor frequency, then the inversion should be set.
r2272
CO: Technology controller actual value scaled / Tech_ctrl act scal

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the scaled actual value signal of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2264, p2265, r2266, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2270, p2271
r2273
CO: Technology controller error / Tec_ctrl error

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: 9_1
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the error (system deviation) between the setpoint and actual value of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2263
p2274
Technology controller differentiation, time constant / Tec_ctrl D comp T

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
60.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller.
Note:
p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled.
1-508

Parameter
List of parameters
p2280
Technology controller proportional gain / Tec_ctrl Kp

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000
Max
1000.000
Factory setting
1.000
Description:
Sets the proportional gain (P component) of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2252
Note:
p2280 = 0: The proportional gain is disabled.
p2285
Technology controller integral time / Tec_ctrl Tn

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
60.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the integral time (I component, integrating time constant) of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2252
Note:
p2285 = 0: The integral time is disabled.
p2286[0...n]
BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the technology controller.
p2289[0...n]
CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the pre-control signal of the technology controller.

1-509
Parameter
List of parameters
p2291
CO: Technology controller maximum limiting / Tec_ctrl max_limit

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2292
Caution:
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
p2292
CO: Technology controller minimum limiting / Tec_ctrl min_lim

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-200.00 [%]
Max
200.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the minimum limit of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2291
Caution:
The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292).
p2293
Technology controller ramp-up/ramp-down time / Tec_ctr ramp up/dn

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
100.00 [s]
Factory setting
1.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramping time for the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Note:
The time refers to the set maximum and minimum limits (p2291, p2292).
r2294
CO: Technology controller output signal / Tec_ctrl outp_sig

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the output signal of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2295
1-510

Parameter
List of parameters
p2295
CO: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-100.00 [%]
Max
100.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the output signal of the technology controller.
p2296[0...n]
CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
2295[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2295
p2297[0...n]
CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl m_lm s_sc

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
2291[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the maximum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2291
p2298[0...n]
CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
2292[0]
Description:
Sets the signal source for the minimum limiting of the technology controller.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2292
p2299[0...n]
CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the offset of the output limiting of the technology controller.

1-511
Parameter
List of parameters
r2349.0...11
CO/BO: Technology controller status word / Tec_ctrl stat word

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7958
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word of the technology controller.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
08
09
10
11
p2369
Signal name
Technology controller deactivated
Technology controller limited
Technology controller, motorized potentiometer limited max.
Technology controller, motorized potentiometer limited min.
Technology controller actual value at the
minimum
Technology controller actual value at the
maximum
Technology controller output at the minimum
Technology controller output at the maximum
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
BI: Staging control word / Staging STW

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to select the "staging" function.

When the function is selected, monitoring of the switches is deactivated with the "bypass" function. This means that
the Motor Module can be connected to other motors via an external control without switch monitoring responding.
p2398
Hibernation operating mode / Hib op_mode

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Technology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the operating mode for the hibernation function.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p2200
Caution:
When this function is active, the motor can start again automatically.
1-512
Hibernation inhibited
Hibernation active

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
When the hibernation function (p2398 = 1) is activated, its behavior is defined as to whether the technology controller is additionally switched in (closed loop) or switched out (open loop).
p2200 is used to define the technology controller enable and p2251 its operating mode.
p2200 = 0, p2251 = 0, 1:
Hibernation operates without technology controller (open loop)
p2200 = 1, p2251 = 0:
Hibernation operates with technology controller (closed loop)
p2200 = 1, p2251 = 1:
Hibernation operates without technology controller (open loop) as its output is only used as supplementary setpoint
and not as main speed setpoint.
r2700
CO: Reference speed/reference frequency / n_ref/f_ref
ENCODER,
Can be changed: VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: FloatingPoint32
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Display and connector output for the reference quantity for speed and frequency (p2000).
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in rpm) / 60
This parameter has the unit rpm.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2000
Note:
This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2000 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in
DCC.
r2700
CO: Reference velocity/reference frequency current / v_ref/f_ref act
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Display and connector output for the current reference quantity for velocity and frequency.
All velocities or frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity.
The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference velocity (in m/min) / 60
Dependency:
Refer to: p2000
Note:
DCC.

1-513
Parameter
List of parameters
r2701
CO: Reference voltage / Reference voltage

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity for voltages p2001.

All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit Vrms.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2001
Note:
DCC.
r2702
CO: Reference current / Reference current

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity for currents p2002.

All currents specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit Arms.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2002
Note:
DCC.
r2703
CO: Reference torque / Reference torque

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity p2003 for torque (r0108.12 = 0) or force (r0108.12 = 1).
All torques specified as relative values (r0108.12 = 0) or forces (r0108.12 = 1) are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2003.
Dependency:
p0505, r0108.12
Refer to: p2003
Note:
This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2003 in the currently selected unit as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged
from this connector output in DCC.
1-514

Parameter
List of parameters
r2704
CO: Reference power / Reference power

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity for powers p2004.

All power ratings specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this
parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Dependency:
This value is calculated as voltage x current for the infeed and as torque x speed for closed-loop controls.
Refer to: r2004
Note:
This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2004 in the currently selected unit as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged
The reference power is calculated as follows:
- 2 * Pi * reference speed / 60 * reference torque (motor)
- reference voltage * reference current * root(3) (infeed)
r2705
CO: Reference angle / Reference angle

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity for angles p2005.

All angles specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this parameter
corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit degree.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2005
Note:
DCC.
r2706
CO: Reference temperature / Reference temp
TM31,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity for temperatures.

All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in this
parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
This parameter has the unit degree Celsius.
Note:
This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity for the temperature as a connector output for
interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value can be adopted unchanged from this connector output in DCC.

1-515
Parameter
List of parameters
r2707
CO: Reference acceleration / Ref accel

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Connector output of the reference quantity for accelerations p2007.

All acceleration rates specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity in
this parameter corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex.
Dependency:
r0108.12, p0505
Refer to: p2007
Note:
This parameter provides the numerical value of the reference quantity p2007 as a connector output for interconnection with Drive Control Chart (DCC). The numerical value in the currently selected unit can be adopted unchanged
p2720[0...n]
Load gear configuration / Load gear config

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for position tracking of a load gear.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Note:
For the following events, the non-volatile, saved position values are automatically reset:
Signal name
Load gear, activate position tracking
Axis type
Load gear, reset position
1 signal
Yes
Linear axis
Yes
0 signal
No
Rotary axis
No
FP
-
- when an encoder replacement has been identified.

- when changing the configuration of the Encoder Data Set (EDS).
- when adjusting the absolute encoder again
p2721[0...n]
Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4194303
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for a rotary absolute encoder with activated position tracking of
the load gear.
Dependency:
This parameter is only of significance for an absolute encoder (p0404.1 = 1) with activated position tracking of the
load gear (p2720.0 = 1).
Note:
The resolution that is set must be able to be represented using r2723.

For rotary axes/modulo axes, the following applies:
This parameter is preset with p0421 and can be changed.
For linear axes, the following applies:
This parameter is pre-assigned with p0421, expanded by 6 bits for multiturn information (maximum number of overflows) and cannot be changed.
1-516

Parameter
List of parameters
p2722[0...n]
Load gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track tol

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00
Max
4294967300.00
Factory setting
0.00
Sets a tolerance window for position tracking.

After the system is powered up, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined,
and depending on this, the following is initiated:
Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value.
Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07449
Caution:
Rotation, e.g. through a complete encoder range is not detected.
Note:
The value is entered in integer (complete) encoder pulses.

For p2720.0 = 1, the value is automatically pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range.
Example:
Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4
It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point number with 23 bit mantissa).
r2723[0...n]
CO: Load gear absolute value / Load gear abs_val

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the absolute value after the load gear.
Notice:
Note:
The increments are displayed in the format the same as r0483.
r2724[0...n]
CO: Load gear position difference / Load gear pos diff

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the position difference before the load gear between powering down and powering up.
Note:
The increments are displayed in the same format as for r0483/r2723.

If the measuring gear of the motor encoder is not activated, the position difference should be read in encoder increments.
If the measuring gear of the motor encoder is activated, the position difference is converted using the measuring
gear factor.

1-517
Parameter
List of parameters
p2810[0...1]
BI: AND logic operation inputs / AND inputs

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the AND logic operation.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2811
Note:
r2811.0
CO/BO: AND logic operation result / AND result

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the result of the AND logic operation
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Refer to: p2810
p2816[0...1]
BI: OR logic operation inputs / OR inputs
Signal name
AND logic operation result
1 signal
Yes

0
0 signal
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the OR logic operation.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2817
Note:
FP
-
r2817.0
CO/BO: OR logic operation result / OR result

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2634
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the result of the OR logic operation.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Refer to: p2816
1-518
Signal name
OR logic operation result
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
p2900[0...n]
CO: Fixed value 1 [%] / Fixed value 1 [%]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1021
P-Group: Free function blocks
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-10000.00 [%]
Max
10000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets a fixed percentage.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the main setpoint)
p2901[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1021
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-10000.00 [%]
Max
10000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets a fixed percentage.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
The value can be used to interconnect a scaling function (e.g. scaling of the supplementary setpoint)
r2902[0...14]
CO: Fixed values [%] / Fixed values [%]

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 1021
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Signal sources for frequently used percentage values.
Index:
[0] = Fixed value +0 %

[8] = Fixed value -5 %
Dependency:
Refer to: p2900, p2901, p2930
Note:
The signal sources can, for example, be used to interconnect scalings.

1-519
Parameter
List of parameters
p2930[0...n]
CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 1021
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00 [Nm]
Max
100000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Sets a fixed value for torque.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
The value can, for example, be used to interconnect a supplementary torque.
p3100
RTC time stamp mode / RTC t_stamp mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the mode for the time stamp

p3100 = 0: Time stamp, operating hours
p3100 = 1: Time stamp, UTC format
Note:
RTC: Real Time Clock

UTC: Universal Time Coordinates
The UTC time started, according to the definition on 01.01.1970 at 00:00:00 and is output in days and milliseconds.
p3101[0...1]
RTC set UTC time / RTC set UTC
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting the UTC time.

This means that the drive system is synchronized to the time specified by the time master. To start p3101[1] must
be written to followed by p3101[0]. After writing to p3101[0], the UTC time is accepted.
p3101[0]: Milliseconds
p3101[1]: Days
r3102[0...1]
RTC read UTC time / RTC read UTC
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the current UTC time in the drive system.

p3102[0]: Milliseconds
p3102[1]: Days
1-520

Parameter
List of parameters
p3103
RTC synchronization source / RTC sync_source
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the synchronization source/technique.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
p3104
BI: RTC real time synchronization PING / RTC PING
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
PPI
PROFINET PTP
Description:
Sets the signal source for the PING event to set the UTC time.
Notice:
r3108[0...1]
RTC last synchronization deviation / RTC sync_dev
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the last synchronization deviation that was determined.

r3108[0]: Milliseconds
r3108[1]: Days
p3109
RTC real time synchronization, tolerance window / RTC sync tol
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Description:
Sets the tolerance window for time synchronization.

When this tolerance window is exceeded, an appropriate alarm is output.
Dependency:
Refer to: A01099

1-521
Parameter
List of parameters
p3110
External fault 3, power-up delay / Ext fault 3 t_on
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the delay time for external fault 3.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2108, p3111, p3112

Refer to: F07862
p3111
BI: External fault 3, enable / Ext fault 3 enab
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency:
Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112

Refer to: F07862
p3111[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3.
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency:
Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112

Refer to: F07862
1-522

Parameter
List of parameters
p3112
BI: External fault 3 enable negated / Ext flt 3 enab neg
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2546
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency:
Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111

Refer to: F07862
p3112[0...n]

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3.
- BI: p2108 negated
- BI: p3111
- BI: p3112 negated
Dependency:
Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111

Refer to: F07862
r3113.0...15
All objects
Description:
CO/BO: NAMUR message bit bar / NAMUR bit bar

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status of NAMUR signal bit bar.

The faults or alarms are assigned to the appropriate signaling/message classes and influence a specific message
bit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
Signal name
Fault drive converter data electronics / software error
Line supply fault
DC link overvoltage
Fault drive converter power electronics
Drive converter overtemperature
Ground fault
Motor overload
Bus error
External safety-relevant shutdown
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No

1-523
Parameter
List of parameters
09
10
11
15
Mot encoder fault

Error internal communications
Infeed fault
Other faults
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
r3114.9...11
CO/BO: Messages status word global / Msg ZSW global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the global status word for messages.

The appropriate bit is set if at least one message is present at the drive objects.
Bit field:
Bit
09
10
11
Note:
The status bits are displayed with delay.
r3115[0...63]
Fault drive object initiating / F DO initiating
All objects
Description:
Signal name
Alarm present
Fault present
Safety message present
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
8065
8060
-
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the drive object number of the initiating drive object for this fault as integer number.
Value = 63:
The fault was initiated by the drive object itself.
Dependency:
Note:
p3116
BI: Acknowledgement automatically suppressed / Ackn suppress
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the automatic acknowledgement on the device drive object.
Faults present are not automatically acknowledged on the device drive object. Local device faults are not forwarded.
Faults present are automatically acknowledged on the device drive object. Local device faults are forwarded to the
first active drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2102, p2103, p2104, p2105, p3981
Note:
When selecting a standard telegram, the BICO interconnection for control signal STW1.10 (master control by PLC)
is automatically established.
1-524

Parameter
List of parameters
p3117
Change safety message type / Ch. SI mess type
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the re-parameterization of all safety messages for faults and alarms.
The relevant message type during changeover is selected by the firmware.
0: Safety messages are not re-parameterized
1: Safety messages are re-parameterized
Note:
r3120[0...63]
Component number fault / Comp_num flt
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the component number of the fault which has occurred.
Dependency:
Note:
Value = 0: Assignment to a component not possible.

r3121[0...63]
All objects
Component number alarm / Comp_num alarm

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the component number of the alarm which has occurred.
Dependency:
Note:

r3122[0...63]
All objects
Diagnostic attribute fault / Diag_attr fault

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the diagnostic attribute of the fault which has occurred.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Hardware replacement recommended
1 signal
Yes

0 signal
No
FP
-
1-525
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Note:
r3123[0...63]
All objects
Diagnostic attribute alarm / Diag_attr alarm

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8065
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the diagnostic attribute of the alarm which has occurred.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Dependency:
Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146
Note:
Signal name
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
r3131
CO: Current fault value / Current flt value
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the fault value of the oldest active fault.
p3135
Suppress active fault / Supp act flt

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the suppression of r2139.3 "Fault present" for certain fault responses.
Bit field:
Bit
08
10
Dependency:
Note:
Depending on the suppression of a fault reaction in this parameter, r2139.1 "Acknowledgement required" is set
when at least one fault occurs.
Signal name
Suppression of fault response ENCODER
Suppression of fault response NONE
1 signal
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
FP
-
Re bit 08:
The suppression is only effective if p0491 = 1.
1-526

Parameter
List of parameters
p3201[0...n]
Excitation current outside the tolerance threshold value / I_exc n Tol thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
10.0 [%]
Sets the threshold value for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring.
If the absolute value of the difference between the excitation current setpoint and actual value (r1641 - r1626)
exceeds the threshold value and the hysteresis is longer than the selected delay time, then fault F07913 is output.
This fault is withdrawn when the threshold voltage is undershot.
Dependency:
Refer to: r1626, r1641, p3202, p3203

Refer to: F07913
Note:
The monitoring function is only carried out for separately-excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5).
p3202[0...n]
Excitation current outside the tolerance hysteresis / I_exc n Tol hyst

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
10.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07913
Note:
p3203[0...n]
Excitation current outside the tolerance delay time / I_exc n Tol t_del

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
10.0 [s]
Factory setting
1.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07913
Note:
p3204[0...n]
Flux outside the tolerance threshold value / Flux n tol thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
10.0 [%]
Sets the threshold value for the "flux outside the tolerance" message for the flux monitoring.
If the absolute value of the difference between the flux setpoint and actual value (r0083 - r0084) falls below the
threshold value with hysteresis longer than the selected delay time, then fault F07914 is output.
This fault is withdrawn when the threshold voltage is undershot.

1-527
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: r0083, r0084, p3205, p3206

Refer to: F07914
Note:
The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1).
p3205[0...n]
Flux outside the tolerance hysteresis / Flux n tol hyst

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1 [%]
Max
50.0 [%]
Factory setting
10.0 [%]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis for the "flux outside tolerance" message for the flux monitoring.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07914
Note:
p3206[0...n]
Flux outside tolerance delay time / Flux n tol t_del

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
10.0 [s]
Factory setting
5.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the "flux outside tolerance" message for the flux monitoring.
Dependency:

Refer to: F07914
Note:
p3207[0...n]
Zero current signal threshold value / I_0_sig thresh

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
1.00 [Arms]
Sets the threshold value for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring.
If the absolute current falls below the threshold value then r2199.6 is set to 1 after the delay time has expired. The
bit is reset if the threshold value and the hysteresis are exceeded again.
Dependency:
Refer to: r2199, p3208, p3209
Note:
The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1).
1-528

Parameter
List of parameters
p3208[0...n]
Zero current signal hysteresis / I_0_sig hyst

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01 [Arms]
Max
10000.00 [Arms]
Factory setting
1.00 [Arms]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring.
Dependency:
Note:
The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1).
p3209[0...n]
Zero current signal delay time / I_0_sig t_del

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
10.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.02 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time for the zero current signal for the zero current monitoring.
Dependency:
Note:
The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1).
p3233[0...n]
Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T

0 (Extended sig)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8013
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the torque actual value.
The smoothed actual torque is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messages and signals.
p3235
Phase failure signal motor monitoring time / Ph_fail t_monit

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
2000 [ms]
Factory setting
320 [ms]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time for phase failure detection of the motor.
Notice:
Note:
Monitoring is only effective for blocksize and booksize power units. The function can be switched out with p3235 =
0.
For vector drives:
The monitoring is automatically deactivated during the flying restart operation for a motor that is still rotating.

1-529
Parameter
List of parameters
p3236[0...n]

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
3000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
100.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "speed deviation model/external" (BO: r2199.7).
Dependency:
Refer to: r1443, r2169, r2199, p3237
p3237[0...n]

0
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
200.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
2.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis speed for the signal "speed deviation model/external" (BO: r2199.7).
Dependency:
p3238[0...n]
OFF delay n_act_motor model = n_act external / t_del n_a = n_ext

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 8012
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [s]
Max
100.0 [s]
Factory setting
3.0 [s]
Description:
Sets the OFF delay for the signal "speed deviation model/external in tolerance" (BO: r2199.7). The smoothed actual
speed of the motor model r2169 is compared with the speed measured externally r1443 (threshold value p3236).
Dependency:
r3405.1
CO/BO: Status word DC-link control / UDC ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for DC-link voltage control.
Bit field:
Bit
01
Note:
Re bit 01:
Signal name
Vdc-ctrl active
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
DC-link voltage control is disabled and enabled with p3513.
1-530

Parameter
List of parameters
p3422
DC-link capacitance, total / C_DC tot

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.20 [mF]
Max
2000.00 [mF]
Factory setting
2.00 [mF]
Sets the total DC link capacitance for closed-loop voltage control.

The capacitance of one power unit is pre-assigned to this value. The value should be adapted according to the
number of power units.
Note:
The controller setting for the DC-link voltage controller is derived from this value.
p3510
DC link voltage setpoint / Vdc setp

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_2
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
100.00 [V]
Max
1600.00 [V]
Factory setting
600.00 [V]
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the DC-link voltage on the motor side.
p3511
CI: DC-link voltage supplementary setpoint / Vdc Z_set

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint for the DC-link voltage on the motor side.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3510
p3513
BI: Inhibit voltage-controlled operation / Inhib V_ctrl mode

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for disabling DC-link voltage control on the motor side.
r3517
CO: DC-link controller active current setpoint / UDC I_act ctrl stp

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the unlimited setpoint of the active current controller for DC-link voltage control on the motor side.

1-531
Parameter
List of parameters
p3520[0...3]
CI: DC link pre-control power / Vdc pre-ctrl P

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for power pre-control.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3521
Note:
Closed-loop control of the DC link voltage is improved by pre-controlling the power required for the other modules.
A non-normalized quantity is expected so that the various power reference values (r2004) of the drive objects do
not have to be taken into account. The scaling factors are used to adapt the scaling (p3521).
p3521[0...3]
DC link pre-control power scaling / Vdc prectrl P scal

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-100000.00000 [%]
Max
100000.00000 [%]
Factory setting
100.00000 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling factor for the power pre-control.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3520
p3523[0...3]
DC link pre-control power smoothing / Vdc pre-ctrl P sm

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the filter time for power pre-control.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3520
r3554
Vdc controller integral component / Vdc_ctrl I_comp

Description:
1-532
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the integral action component of the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller).

Parameter
List of parameters
p3560

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.01 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the normalized proportional gain for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc controller).
Note:
A value of 100% corresponds to the basic setting derived from the loop control parameter (p3422).
p3562

0 (Tech_ctrl)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.10 [%]
Max
100000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the normalized integral time for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc).
Note:
A value of 100% corresponds to the basic setting derived from the loop control parameter (p3422).
p3660[0...n]
VSM input line supply voltage, voltage scaler / VSM inp V_scaler

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9880
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
100000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the voltage scaler for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note:
When the 690 V input is used (X522) without voltage scaler, 0 % should be entered.
When the 100 V input (X521) is used with voltage scaler to measure medium voltages, the dividing (scaling) factor
multiplied by 100% should be entered.
Example:
1000 V line supply voltage, voltage scaling, 10:1
--> voltage at the VSM input is 100 V
--> p3660 = 10 * 100 % = 1000 %
r3661[0...n]
CO: VSM input line supply voltage u1 - u2 / VSM inp u1-u2

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_3
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the voltage between phases L1 and L2.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3660
Note:
X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1


1-533
Parameter
List of parameters
r3662[0...n]
CO: VSM input line supply voltage u2 - u3 / VSM inp u2-u3

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_3
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the voltage between phases L2 and L3.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3660
Note:

r3664[0...n]
CO: VSM temperature evaluation, status / VSM temp status

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status of the temperature evaluation of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
This displays whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Signal name
Temperature alarm threshold exceeded
Temperature fault threshold exceeded
Dependency:
Refer to: p3665, r3666, p3667, p3668
p3665[0...n]
VSM temperature evaluation, sensor type / VSM TempSensorType

0
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9886
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting of the temperature sensor for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
r3666[0...n]
CO: VSM temperature KTY / VSM temp KTY
FP
-
The temperature sensor is connected to terminals X520.5 and X520.6 of the VSM.
No sensor
PTC
KTY84

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9886
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the temperature actual value of a KTY84 temperature sensor connected to the Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM).
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency:
1-534
Refer to: p3665

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
For sensor type PTC (p3665 = 1), the following applies:

- below the nominal response temperature, r3666 = -50C.
- above the nominal response temperature, r3666 = 199.9 C.
p3667[0...n]
VSM line filter overtemperature alarm threshold / VSMfilt_T A_thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [C]
Max
301.00 [C]
Factory setting
150.00 [C]
Sets the alarm threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to monitor the line
filter temperature.
Prerequisite:
A KTY84 sensor is connected and p3665 is set to 2.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3665

Refer to: A34211
p3668[0...n]
VSM line filter overtemperature shutdown threshold / VSM filt_T F_thres

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [C]
Max
301.00 [C]
Factory setting
180.00 [C]
Description:
Sets the shutdown threshold for the KTY temperature sensor of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3667

Refer to: F34207
p3669[0...n]
VSM line filter overtemperature hysteresis / VSM filt_T hyst

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9886
P-Group: -
Units group: 21_2
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [K]
Max
50.00 [K]
Factory setting
3.00 [K]
Description:
Sets the hysteresis for the alarm threshold of the VSM to monitor the line filter temperature.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3667
p3670[0...n]
VSM 10 V input CT gain / VSM CT_gain

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9880
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [A]
Max
1000.000 [A]
Factory setting
1.000 [A]
Sets CT gain of the CT connected at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
The parameter specifies the current magnitude in [A] referred to the input voltage at the VSM in [V].
Example:
CT with 1 V per 200 A.
--> p3670 = 200

1-535
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Note:
The CT for phase 1 is connected at terminals X520.1 and X520.2 of the VSM.
r3671[0...n]
CO: VSM 10 V input CT 1 actual value / VSM CT 1 I_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9880
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 1 at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM).
Dependency:
Refer to: p3670
Note:
r3672[0...n]
CO: VSM 10 V input CT 2 actual value / VSM CT 2 I_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9880
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the current actual value from current transducer (CT) 2 at the 10 V input of the Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM).
Dependency:
Refer to: p3670
Note:
r3673[0...n]
CO: VSM 10 V input 1 actual value / VSM inp 1 V_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9880
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 1 of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM).
Dependency:
Refer to: p3670
Note:
10 V input 1: Terminals X520.1 and X520.2
r3674[0...n]
CO: VSM 10 V input 2 actual value / VSM inp 2 V_act

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: 9880
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 2 of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM).
Dependency:
Refer to: p3670
Note:
10 V input 2: Terminals X520.3 and X520.4
1-536

Parameter
List of parameters
p3784[0...n]
BI: Sync-line-drive external increase voltage / Sync ext V incr

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to increase the voltage for external line-drive synchronization.
BI: p3784 = 1 signal:
The voltage is increased.
Note:
Only SINAMICS GM150.
p3785[0...n]
BI: Sync-line-drive external decrease voltage / Sync ext V decr

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to decrease the voltage for external line-drive synchronization.
The voltage is lowered.
Note:
Only SINAMICS GM150.
p3800[0...n]
Sync-line-drive activation / Sync act

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the activation for the line-drive synchronization.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Note:
When the ground fault monitoring initiates a fault for overlapping synchronizing the threshold value p0287[1] for the
Motor Module and the associated infeed must be appropriately increased (e.g. p0287[1] = 100 %).
Sync-line-drive deactivated
Sync-line-drive activated VSM-INT

The INTERNAL voltage actual values are used for synchronization. The effects that a (sine-wave) filter - that is connected between the Motor Module and motor - has on the voltage actual values are taken into account (theoretically) by appropriately selecting p0230.
VSM: Voltage Sensing Module

1-537
Parameter
List of parameters
p3801[0...n]
Sync-line-drive, drive object number / Sync DO_No

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
62
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the drive object number of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) used for the line-drive synchronization.
Dependency:
Notice:
The current controller sampling time p0115[0] of the drive object with the VSM used for synchronization must be
identical to the current controller sampling time of the drive of the drive used to perform line synchronization.
Note:
VSM: Voltage Sensing Module

The setting p3801 = 1 is always possible (no VSM selected).
p3802[0...n]
BI: Sync-line-drive enable / Sync enable

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: CDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out for the line-drive synchronization.
The line-drive synchronization is switched in.
Dependency:
r3803.0
CO/BO: Sync-line-drive control word / Sync STW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the control word for the line-drive synchronization.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
Sync-line-drive selected
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
For a 1 signal, p3800 > 0 is set.
r3804
CO: Sync-line-drive target frequency / Sync f_target

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the target frequency for the line-drive synchronization.
Dependency:
Refer to: A07941
1-538

Parameter
List of parameters
r3805
CO: Sync-line-drive frequency difference / Sync f_diff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the frequency difference between the measured target frequency and output frequency of the gating unit
of the closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization.
p3806[0...n]
Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value / Sync f_diff thresh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
1.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.10 [Hz]
Sets the threshold value of the frequency difference to activate the closed-loop phase control for line-drive synchronization.
The closed-loop phase control is activated (r3819.6 = 1), if the frequency difference is less that the threshold value.
r3808
CO: Sync-line-drive phase difference / Sync phase diff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2005
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Description:
Displays the phase difference between the measured target phase and phase of the gating unit of the closed-loop
control for line-drive synchronization.
p3809[0...n]
Sync-line-drive phase setpoint / Sync phase setp

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-180.00 []
Max
179.90 []
Factory setting
0.00 []
Description:
Sets the phase setpoint for the line-drive synchronization.
p3811[0...n]
Sync-line-drive frequency limiting / Sync f_lim

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [Hz]
Max
1.00 [Hz]
Factory setting
0.20 [Hz]
Sets the frequency limiting of the phase controller output for the line-drive synchronization.

1-539
Parameter
List of parameters
r3812
CO: Sync-line-drive correction frequency / Sync f_corr

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Hz]
Max
- [Hz]
Factory setting
- [Hz]
Description:
Displays the correction frequency for the line-drive synchronization.
p3813[0...n]
Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value / Sync Ph_sync thrsh

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 []
Max
20.00 []
Factory setting
2.00 []
Sets the threshold value of the phase synchronism for the line-drive synchronization.
A prerequisite for synchronism is achieved if the phase difference is lower than the threshold value.
Note:
Synchronism is reached (r3819.2 = 1), if the AND logic operation of the results from the phase measurement
(p3813) and voltage measurement (p3815) is fulfilled.
r3814
CO: Sync-line-drive voltage difference / Sync V_diff

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Vrms]
Max
- [Vrms]
Factory setting
- [Vrms]
Description:
Displays the voltage difference between the measured target voltage and output voltage of the gating unit of the
closed-loop control for line-drive synchronization.
p3815[0...n]
Sync-line-drive voltage difference threshold value / Sync V_diff thresh

0
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
20.00 [%]
Factory setting
10.00 [%]
Sets the threshold value of the voltage difference for the line-drive synchronization.
A prerequisite for synchronism is reached if the voltage difference is less than the threshold value.
Note:
Synchronism is reached (r3819.2 = 1), if the AND logic operation of the results from the phase measurement
(p3813) and voltage measurement (p3815) is fulfilled.
For voltage manipulated quantity margin (reserve) of the drive converter, the amplitude difference (r3814) between
the setpoint and actual value is controlled (corrected) to zero.
1-540

Parameter
List of parameters
r3819.0...7
CO/BO: Sync-line-drive status word / Sync ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7020
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status word for the line-drive synchronization.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
03
05
06
07
p3820[0...n]
Signal name
Sync-line-drive enabled
Sync-line-drive synchronism reached
Sync-line-drive synchronizing error
Sync-line-drive frequency measurement
active
Sync-line-drive phase control active
Sync-line-drive without drive
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Friction characteristic, value n0 / Friction n0

0 (n/M)
Description:
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
15.00 [rpm]
The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs.

This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency:
p3821[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
30.00 [rpm]

This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency:

1-541
Parameter
List of parameters
p3822[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
60.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3823[0...n]
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic.

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
120.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3824[0...n]
This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic.

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
150.00 [rpm]

Dependency:
p3825[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
300.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
1-542

Parameter
List of parameters
p3826[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
600.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3827[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
1200.00 [rpm]

Dependency:
p3828[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
1500.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3829[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated:
CALC_MOD_LIM_REF
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
210000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
3000.00 [rpm]

Dependency:

1-543
Parameter
List of parameters
p3830[0...n]
Friction characteristic, value M0 / Friction M0

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3831[0...n]
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 1st value pair of the friction characteristic.

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]

This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic.
Dependency:
p3832[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3833[0...n]
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 3rd value pair of the friction characteristic.

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic.
1-544

Parameter
List of parameters
p3834[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3835[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]

Dependency:
p3836[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3837[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]

Dependency:

1-545
Parameter
List of parameters
p3838[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]
Description:
Dependency:
p3839[0...n]

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [Nm]
Max
1000000.00 [Nm]
Factory setting
0.00 [Nm]

Dependency:
r3840.0...8
CO/BO: Friction characteristic, status word / Friction ZSW

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the state of the friction characteristic.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
08
r3841
CO: Friction characteristic output / Frict outp
Signal name
Friction characteristic OK
Friction characteristic record activated
Friction characteristic record completed
Friction characteristic record aborted
Friction characteristic positive direction

1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: 7_1
Scaling: p2003
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Nm]
Max
- [Nm]
Factory setting
- [Nm]
Description:
Displays the torque of the friction characteristic dependent on the speed.
Dependency:
1-546
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
p3842
Friction characteristic activation / Frict act

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to activate and deactivate the friction characteristic.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1569, r3841, p3845
p3845
Friction characteristic record activation / Frict rec act
Friction characteristic deactivated

Friction characteristic activated

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Setting for the friction characteristic record.

After the next power-on command, the friction characteristic is automatically recorded.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Friction characteristic record deactivated

Friction char record activated for all directions
Friction char record activated for positive direction
Friction char record activated for negative direction
Dependency:
When selecting the friction characteristic measurement, the drive data set changeover is suppressed.
For linear drives (refer to r0108 bit 12) it is not permissible to carry out the friction characteristic measurement for
mechanical systems that limit travel.
Danger:
For drives with a mechanical system that limit the distance moved, it must be ensured that during recording, the friction characteristic is not reached. If this is not the case, then it is not permissible that the measurement is carried
out.
Notice:
Note:
When the friction characteristic record is active, it is not possible to save the parameters (p0971, p0977).
When the friction characteristic record is active (p3845 > 0), it is not possible to change p3820 ... p3829, p3830 ...
p3839 and p3842.
When recording the friction characteristic, in addition to the friction, the motor losses are also determined (e.g. iron
losses, eddy current losses and remagnetizing losses). A differentiation is not made between these individual loss
components. We recommend that a motor temperature sensor is used because torque deviations can also be emulated/mapped on the characteristic due to the thermal influence.
p3846[0...n]
Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RFG

0 (n/M)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
999999.000 [s]
Factory setting
10.000 [s]
Description:
Sets the ramp-up/ramp-down time of the ramp-up/ramp-down function generator to automatically record the friction
characteristic. The drive is accelerated from standstill (setpoint = 0) up to the maximum speed/velocity (p1082) in
this time.
Dependency:
Refer to: p3845

1-547
Parameter
List of parameters
p3847[0...n]
Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm

0 (n/M)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: 7010
P-Group: Functions
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [s]
Max
3600.000 [s]
Factory setting
0.000 [s]
Sets the warm-up time.

For an automatic trace (record) to start, the highest selected speed (p3829) is approached and this time is held.
After this, the measurement is started with the highest speed.
Dependency:
p3900
Completion of quick commissioning / Compl quick_comm

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Exits quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) with automatic calculation of all parameters of all existing drive data sets
that depend on the entries made during quick commissioning.
p3900 = 1 initially includes a parameter reset (factory setting, the same as p0970 = 1) for all parameters of the drive
object; however, without overwriting the entries made during the quick commissioning.
The interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the interconnections via p0700, p1000
and p1500 are re-established and all of the dependent motor, open-loop and control-loop control parameters are
calculated (corresponding to p0340 = 1).
p3900 = 2 includes the restoration of the interconnections of PROFIBUS PZD telegram selection (p0922) and the
interconnections via p0700, p1000 and p1500 and the calculations corresponding to p0340 = 1.
p3900 = 3 only includes the calculations associated with the motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters
corresponding to p0340 = 1.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
No quick parameterization
Quick parameterization after parameter reset
Quick parameterization (only) for BICO and motor parameters
Quick parameterization for motor parameters (only)
Notice:
Note:
When the calculations have been completed, p3900 and p0010 are automatically reset to a value of 0.
When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten.
If a catalog motor has not been selected (see p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in
order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time:
for induction motors p0320, p0352, p0353, p0362 ... p0369, p0391 ... p0393, p0604, p0605, p0626 ... p0628.
for synchronous motors p0326, p0327, p0352, p0353, p0391 ... p0393, p0604, p0605.
p3901[0...n]
Power unit EEPROM Vdc offset calibration / PU EEPROM Vdc_offs
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1, C2(1), T

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-40.0 [V]
Max
40.0 [V]
Factory setting
0.0 [V]
Description:
Differential voltage for calibrating the offset for DC-link voltage measurement.
Dependency:
1-548

Parameter
List of parameters
Caution:
Incorrect use of the calibration can have a negative impact on the closed-loop control. The parameter influences the
upper and lower voltage detection.
Note:
Parameter entries are directly saved in the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.

The parameter is only effective in the case of booksize power units if r0192 bit 22 and p0212 bit 0 are set.
r3925[0...n]
Identification final display / Ident final_disp

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the commissioning steps that have been carried out.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
03
04
10
15
Note:
Signal name
Motor/control parameters calculated (p0340
= 1, p3900 > 0)
Motor data identification carried out at
standstill (p1910 = 1)
Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 =
1, 2)
Motor encoder adjustment carried out
(p1960 = 1, p1990 = 1)
Automatic parameterization only for V/f control (r0108.2 = 0)
Motor equivalent circuit diagram parameters
changed
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Changed
Not changed
The individual bits are only set if the appropriate action has been initiated and successfully completed.
When motor rating plate parameters are changed, the final display is reset.
When setting the individual bits, all of the most significant bits are reset.
r3927[0...n]

Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Successfully completed component of the last motor data identification carried out.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
11
Signal name
Stator inductance estimate no measurement
Cl.-loop current control w/ dead-beat controller
Rotor time constant estimate no measurement
Leakage inductance estimate no measurement
Activates the identification dynamic leakage inductance
Determine Tr and Lsig evaluation in the time
range
Activate vibration damping
Deactivate vibration detection
Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No

1-549
Parameter
List of parameters
12
14
15
Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measureYes

ment
Deactivate valve interlocking time measure- Yes
ment
Determine only stator resistance, valve volt- Yes
age fault, dead time
Dependency:
Refer to: r3925
Note:
The parameter is a copy of p1909.
r3928[0...n]

No
No
No
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Successfully completed component of the last rotating measurement carried out.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
Signal name
Enc test active
Saturation characteristic identification
Moment of inertia identification
Recalculates the speed controller parameters
q leakage inductance ident. (for current controller adaptation)
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Dependency:
Refer to: r3925
Note:
The parameter is a copy of p1959.
p3950
Service parameter / Serv. par.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
For service personnel only.
r3974
Device status word / Device status word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the device status.

Bit 0: SW reset active
Bit 1: The writing of parameters is disabled, as parameters are being saved.
Bit 2: The writing of parameters is disabled, as a macro is running.
1-550

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Signal name
SW reset active
Writing of parameters disabled as parameter save in progress
Writing of parameters disabled as macro in
progress
1 signal
active
active
0 signal
inactive
inactive
FP
-
active
inactive
r3977
BICO counter, topology / BICO counter topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the BICO interconnections that have been parameterized in the complete (overall) topology.
Dependency:
r3978
BICO CounterDevice / BICO CounterDevice
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection.
Description:
Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this device.
r3979
BICO counter, drive object / BICO counter DO
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this drive object.
p3981
Faults, acknowledge drive object / Faults ackn DO
All objects
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8060
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to acknowledge all active faults of a drive object.
Note:
Parameter should be set from 0 to 1 to acknowledge.

After acknowledgement, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.

1-551
Parameter
List of parameters
p3985
Master control mode selection / PcCtrl mode select

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Setpoints
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the mode to change over the master control / LOCAL mode.
Value:
0:
1:
Danger:
When changing the master control in operation, the drive can manifest undesirable behavior - e.g. it can accelerate
up to another setpoint.
r3986
Parameter count / Parameter count
All objects
Description:
Change master control for STW1.0 = 0

Change master control in operation
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of parameters for this drive unit.

The number comprises the device-specific and the drive-specific parameters.
Dependency:
Refer to: r0980, r0981, r0989
r3988[0...1]
Boot state / Boot_state
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10800
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index 0:
Displays the boot state.
Index 1:
Displays the partial boot state
Value:
0:
1:
10:
20:
30:
40:
50:
90:
100:
101:
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
117:
1-552
Not active
Fatal fault
Fault
Reset all parameters
Drive object modified
Download using commissioning software
Parameter download using commissioning software
Reset Control Unit and delete drive objects
Start initialization
Wait for topology input
Instantiate Control Unit basis
Insert drive object
Remove drive object
Parameter download using commissioning software
Remove component

Parameter
List of parameters
150:
160:
170:
180:
200:
210:
250:
325:
350:
360:
370:
380:
550:
625:
650:
660:
670:
680:
690:
700:
725:
740:
745:
750:
800:
10050:
10100:
10150:
10200:
10250:
10300:
10350:
10400:
10450:
10500:
10550:
10600:
10800:
Wait until actual topology determined

Evaluate topology
Instantiate Control Unit reset
Initialization YDB configuration information
First commissioning
Create drive packages
Wait for topology acknowledge
Wait for input of drive type
Determine drive type
Write into topology-dependent parameters
Wait until p0009 = 0 is set
Check topology
Call conversion functions for parameter
Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE-CLiQ
Start cyclic operation
Evaluate drive commissioning status
Autom. FW update DRIVE-CLiQ components
Wait for CU LINK slaves
Wait non-cyclic starting DRIVE-CLiQ
Save parameters
Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic
Check the ability to operate
Start of the time slices
Interrupt enable
Initialization finished
Wait for synchronization
Wait for CU LINK slaves
Wait until actual topology determined
Evaluation component status
Call conversion functions for parameter
Preparation cyclic operation
Autom. FW update DRIVE-CLiQ components
Wait for slave properties
Check CX/NX status
Wait until DRIVE-CLiQ cyclic
Carry out warm start
Evaluate, encoder status
Partial boot completed
Index:
[0] = System
[1] = Partial boot
r3996
Parameter write inhibit status / Par_write inhib st
All objects
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited.

r3996 = 0: Write to parameter is not inhibited.
0 < r3996 < 100: Write to parameter is inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing.

1-553
Parameter
List of parameters
r3998[0...n]
First drive commissioning / First drv_comm

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
-
Displays whether the drive still has to be commissioned for the first time.
0 = Yes
2 = No
r4021
TB30 digital inputs terminal actual value / TB30 DI act value
TB30
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9100
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-

This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x prior to switching from the simulation mode
(p4095.x = 1) to the terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). The input signal of terminal DI x is displayed in bit x of r4021.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Note:
DI: Digital input
r4021
TM31 digital inputs terminal actual value / TM31 DI act value
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Signal name
DI 0 (X481.1)
DI 1 (X481.2)
DI 2 (X481.3)
DI 3 (X481.4)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-

This means that the actual input signal can be checked at terminal DI x or DI/DO x prior to switching from the simulation mode (p4095.x = 1) to terminal mode (p4095.x = 0). The input signal at terminal DI x or DI/DO x is displayed
in bit x of r4021.
Bit field:
1-554
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Signal name
DI 0 (X520.1)
DI 1 (X520.2)
DI 2 (X520.3)
DI 3 (X520.4)
DI 4 (X530.1)
DI 5 (X530.2)
DI 6 (X530.3)
DI 7 (X530.4)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
If a DI/DO is parameterized as output (p4028.x = 1), then r4021.x = 0 is displayed.

DI: Digital input
r4022.0...3
TB30
CO/BO: TB30 digital inputs, status / TB30 DI status

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Refer to: r4023
Note:
DI: Digital input
r4022.0...11
CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status / TM31 DI status
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Signal name
DI 0 (X481.1)
DI 1 (X481.2)
DI 2 (X481.3)
DI 3 (X481.4)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
Description:
Displays the status of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Dependency:
Refer to: r4023
Note:
DI: Digital input
Signal name
DI 0 (X520.1)
DI 1 (X520.2)
DI 2 (X520.3)
DI 3 (X520.4)
DI 4 (X530.1)
DI 5 (X530.2)
DI 6 (X530.3)
DI 7 (X530.4)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
FP
-

1-555
Parameter
List of parameters
r4023.0...3
TB30
BO: TB30 digital inputs, status inverted / TB30 DI status inv

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Refer to: r4022
Note:
DI: Digital input
r4023.0...11
CO/BO: TM31 digital inputs, status inverted / TM31 DI status inv
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Signal name
DI 0 (X481.1)
DI 1 (X481.2)
DI 2 (X481.3)
DI 3 (X481.4)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Description:
Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Dependency:
Refer to: r4022
Note:
DI: Digital input
Signal name
DI 0 (X520.1)
DI 1 (X520.2)
DI 2 (X520.3)
DI 3 (X520.4)
DI 4 (X530.1)
DI 5 (X530.2)
DI 6 (X530.3)
DI 7 (X530.4)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
FP
-
1-556

Parameter
List of parameters
p4028
TM31 set input or output / TM31 DI or DO
TM31
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the bidirectional digital inputs/outputs as input or output on the Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
08
09
10
11
p4030
BI: TB30 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TB30 S_src DO 0
TB30
Signal name
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
Output
Output
Output
Output
0 signal
Input
Input
Input
Input
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for digital output DO 0 (X481.5) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note:
DO: Digital output
p4030
BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 0 / TM31 S_src DO 0
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 0 (X542.1, X542.2, X542.3) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Digital output 0 of TM31 is a relay output.
If the signal at the binector input p4030 is low, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NC 0 (X542.1). This
connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay.
If the signal at the binector input p4030 is high, then terminal COM 0 (X542.2) is connected to NO 0 (X542.3).
Note:
DO: Digital output

NC: Normally Closed contact
NO: Normally Open contact
p4031
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DO 1 (X481.6) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Note:
DO: Digital output

1-557
Parameter
List of parameters
p4031
BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DO 1 / TM31 S_src DO 1
TM31
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the digital output DO 1 (X542.4, X542.5, X542.6) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Digital output 1 of TM31 is a relay output.
If the signal at the binector input p4031 is low, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NC 1 (X542.4). This
connection also matches the mechanical quiescent setting of the relay.
If the signal at the binector input p4031 is high, then terminal COM 1 (X542.5) is connected to NO 1 (X542.6).
Note:
DO: Digital output

NC: Normally Closed contact
NO: Normally Open contact
p4032
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Note:
DO: Digital output
p4033
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Note:
DO: Digital output
p4038
BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 / TM31 S_src DI/DO8
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 8 (X541.2) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note:

1-558

Parameter
List of parameters
p4039
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Note:

p4040
BI: TM31 signal source for terminal DI/DO 10 / TM31 S_srcDI/DO10
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Note:

p4041
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Note:

p4046
TM31 digital outputs, limit current / TM31 DO limit curr
TM31
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9560
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the limit for the total output voltage of terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 (DI/DO 8 ... 11) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p4028
Warning:
Since the sum of the output currents at terminals X541.1, X541.2, X541.3 and X541.4 is limited, an overcurrent or
short circuit at one output terminal can cause a dip in the signal at the other terminals.
0.1 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11

1.0 A total current limit DI/DO 8 ... 11

1-559
Parameter
List of parameters
r4047
TB30 digital outputs status / TB30 DO status
TB30
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Note:
Signal name
DO 0 (X481.5)
DO 1 (X481.6)
DO 2 (X481.7)
DO 3 (X481.8)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
DO: Digital output
r4047
TM31 digital outputs status / TM31 DO status
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
08
09
10
11
Note:
Signal name
DO 0 (X542.1 - 3)
DO 1 (X542.4 - 6)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
The setting of the DI/DO as either input or output is of no significance (p4028).

DO: Digital output
p4048
TB30 invert digital outputs / TB30 DO invert
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9102
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Note:
DO: Digital output
1-560
Signal name
DO 0 (X481.5)
DO 1 (X481.6)
DO 2 (X481.7)
DO 3 (X481.8)
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
p4048
TM31 invert digital outputs / TM31 DO invert
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

9562
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the signals at the digital outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
08
09
10
11
Note:
DO: Digital output
Signal name
DO 0 (X542.1 - 3)
DO 1 (X542.4 - 6)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
FP
-
r4052[0...1]
TB30
CO: TB30 analog inputs, current input voltage / TB30 AI inp_V

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual input voltage at the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
AI: Analog Input
r4052[0...1]
CO: TM31 analog inputs, current input voltage/current / TM31 AI inp_V/I
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual input voltage in V when set as voltage input.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency:
The type of analog input AI x (voltage or current input) is set using p4056.
Displays the actual input current in mA when set as current input and with the load resistor switched in.

Note:
AI: Analog Input

1-561
Parameter
List of parameters
p4053[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AI T_smooth
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
1000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30
(TB30).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
AI: Analog Input
p4053[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AI T_smooth
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
1000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31
(TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Note:
AI: Analog Input
r4055[0...1]
CO: TB30 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TB30 AI value in %
TB30
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
AI: Analog Input
r4055[0...1]
CO: TM31 analog inputs, actual value in percent / TM31 AI value in %
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -

9568
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x.
1-562

Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Note:
AI: Analog Input
r4056[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, type / TB30 AI type
TB30
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4
Max
4
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the type of analog inputs.
Value:
4:
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
p4056[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, type / TM31 AI type
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
5
Factory setting
4
Description:
Sets the type of analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).

p4056[x] = 0, 4 correspond to a voltage input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in V).
p4056[x] = 2, 3, 5 correspond to a current input (r4052, p4057, p4059 are displayed in mA).
In addition, the associated switch S5 must be switched.
For a voltage input, S5.1 or S5.2 must be switched to setting "V".
For a current input, S5.1 or S5.2 must be switched to setting "I" (load resistor = 250 ohm is switched in).
Value:
0:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
The maximum voltage difference between the analog input terminals AI+, AI- and the ground of the TM31 (X520.6,
X530.3) may not exceed 35 V.
Warning:
Unipolar voltage input (0 V ... +10 V)

Unipolar current input (0 mA ... +20 mA)
Unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V)
Bipolar current input (-20 mA ... +20 mA)
For operation with the load resistor switched in, the voltage between the differential inputs AI+ and AI- may not
exceed 15 V or the impressed current of 60 mA; if this is not carefully observed, the input will be damaged.
Notice:
For use as voltage input, switch S500 must be set to 0 for the input involved.
Switch S500 is located on the front panel of the TM31 above terminal block X521.
Note:
When changing p4056, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p4057, p4058, p4059, p4060) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p4056 = 0, 4, p4057 is set to 0.0 V, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 10.0 V and p4060 to 100.0 %.
For p4056 = 2, 5, p4057 is set to 0.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %.
For p4056 = 3, p4057 is set to 4.0 mA, p4058 to 0.0 %, p4059 to 20.0 mA and p4060 to 100.0 %.

1-563
Parameter
List of parameters
p4057[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AI char x1
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-11.000 [V]
Max
11.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog inputs is defined using two points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect.
p4057[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AI char x1
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000
Max
20.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency:
The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog input type.
Notice:
This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified.
Note:
p4058[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AI char y1
TB30
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
1-564

Parameter
List of parameters
p4058[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AI char y1
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Notice:
Note:
p4059[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AI char x2
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-11.000 [V]
Max
11.000 [V]
Factory setting
10.000 [V]
Description:
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
p4059[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AI char x2
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000
Max
20.000
Factory setting
10.000
Description:
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V or input current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:

1-565
Parameter
List of parameters
p4060[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AI char y2
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Note:
p4060[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AI char y2
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Notice:
Note:
p4061[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring response threshold /

TM31 WireBrkThresh
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mA]
Max
20.00 [mA]
Factory setting
2.00 [mA]
Description:
Sets the response threshold for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency:
For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active:
p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA))
1-566

Parameter
List of parameters
p4062[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, wire breakage monitoring delay time / TM31 wirebrk t_del
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
1000 [ms]
Factory setting
100 [ms]
Description:
Sets the delay time for wire-breakage monitoring of the analog inputs on Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
p4063[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs offset / TB30 AI offset
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000 [V]
Max
20.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
Sets the offset for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
The offset is added to the input signal before the scaling characteristic.
p4063[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs offset / TM31 AI offset
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000
Max
20.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the offset for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
p4066[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AI absVal act
The offset is added to the input signal before the scaling characteristic.
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
No absolute value generation

Absolute value generation switched in

1-567
Parameter
List of parameters
p4066[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AI absVal act
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
p4067[0...1]
BI: TB30 analog inputs invert signal source / TB30 AI inv S_src
TB30

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to invert the analog input signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
p4067[0...1]
BI: TM31 analog inputs invert signal source / TM31 AI inv S_src
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to invert the analog inputs signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
p4068[0...1]
TB30 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TB30 AI window
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
20.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the noise suppression window for the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Changes less than the window are suppressed.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
1-568

Parameter
List of parameters
p4068[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs, window to suppress noise / TM31 AI window
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
20.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the window for noise suppression for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Changes less than the window are suppressed.
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
p4069[0...1]
BI: TB30 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TB30 AI enable
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for enabling the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
p4069[0...1]
BI: TM31 analog inputs, signal source for enable / TM31 AI enable
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source for the enable signal of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
p4071[0...1]
CI: TB30 analog outputs, signal source / TB30 AO sig_source
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note:
AO: Analog Output

1-569
Parameter
List of parameters
p4071[0...1]
TM31
CI: TM31 analog outputs, signal source / TM31 AO sig_source

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Note:
AO: Analog Output
r4072[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, output value currently referred / TB30 AO outp_val
TB30
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
r4072[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, output value currently referred / TM31 AO outp_val
TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the actual referred output value of the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
p4073[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TB30 AO T_smooth
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
1000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order low pass filter for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30
(TB30).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
1-570

Parameter
List of parameters
p4073[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, smoothing time constant / TM31 AO T_smooth
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [ms]
Max
1000.0 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0 [ms]
Description:
Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st-order low pass filter for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31
(TM31).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
r4074[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, current output voltage / TB30 AO V_outp
TB30
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Description:
Displays the actual output voltage at the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
r4074[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, current output voltage/current / TM31 AO V/I_outp
TM31
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the actual output voltage in V when set as voltage output.

Displays the actual output voltage in mA when set as current output.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
The type of the analog output AO x (voltage or current output) is set using p4076.
Note:
AO: Analog Output
p4075[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TB30 AO absVal act
TB30
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)


1-571
Parameter
List of parameters
p4075[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, activate absolute value generation / TM31 AO absVal act
TM31
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
r4076[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, type / TB30 AO type
TB30

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4
Max
4
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the type of analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value:
4:
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
p4076[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, type / TM31 AO type
TM31
Description:
Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
4
Sets the type of analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).

p4076[x] = 1, 4 correspond to a voltage output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in V).
p4076[x] = 0, 2, 3 correspond to a current output (p4074, p4078, p4080, p4083 are displayed in mA).
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Current output (0 mA ... +20 mA)

Voltage output (0 V ... +10 V)
Current output (+4 mA ... +20 mA)
Current output (-20 mA ... +20 mA)
Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V)
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
Refer to: p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080
Note:
When changing p4076, the parameters of the scaling characteristic (p4077, p4078, p4079, p4080) are overwritten
with the following default values:
For p4076 = 0, 3, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA.
For p4076 = 1, 4, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 0.0 V, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 10.0 V.
For p4076 = 2, p4077 is set to 0.0 %, p4078 to 4.0 mA, p4079 to 100.0 % and p4080 to 20.0 mA.
1-572

Parameter
List of parameters
p4077[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TB30 AO char x1
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The scaling characteristic for the analog outputs is defined using 2 points.
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note:
p4077[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x1 / TM31 AO char x1
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling characteristic for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
Notice:
This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog output type is changed (p4076).
Note:
This parameter is automatically overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.

p4078[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TB30 AO char y1
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-11.000 [V]
Max
11.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 1st value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note:

1-573
Parameter
List of parameters
p4078[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y1 / TM31 AO char y1
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000 [V]
Max
20.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 1st value pair of the
characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
This parameter is automatically overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.

p4079[0...1]
TB30
Description:
TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TB30 AO char x2

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note:
p4079[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value x2 / TM31 AO char x2
TM31
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
This parameter is overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.

1-574

Parameter
List of parameters
p4080[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TB30 AO char y2
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-11.000 [V]
Max
11.000 [V]
Factory setting
10.000 [V]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
Note:
p4080[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, characteristic value y2 / TM31 AO char y2
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000 [V]
Max
20.000 [V]
Factory setting
10.000 [V]
Description:
This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage in V or output current in mA) of the 2nd value pair of the
characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
This parameter is overwritten if p4076 (type of analog output) is changed.

p4082[0...1]
TB30
BI: TB30 analog outputs invert signal source / TB30 AO inv S_src
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for inverting the analog output signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)

1-575
Parameter
List of parameters
p4082[0...1]
BI: TM31 analog outputs invert signal source / TM31 AO inv S_src
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source to invert the analog output signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
p4083[0...1]
TB30 analog outputs, offset / TB30 AO offset
TB30
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9106
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.000
Max
10.000
Factory setting
0.000
Sets the offset for the analog outputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
The offset is added to the output signal after the scaling characteristic.
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6)
[1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8)
p4083[0...1]
TM31 analog outputs, offset / TM31 AO offset
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9572
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000
Max
20.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the offset for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3)

[1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6)
Dependency:
The offset is added to the output signal after the scaling characteristic.

Note:
This means, for example, the offset of a downstream isolating amplifier can be compensated.
p4095
TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode / TB30 DI sim_mode
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
1-576
Signal name
DI 0 (X481.1)
DI 1 (X481.2)
DI 2 (X481.3)
DI 3 (X481.4)
1 signal
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
0 signal
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:

Refer to: p4096
Note:

DI: Digital input
p4095
TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode / TM31 DI sim_mode
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the simulation mode for the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Dependency:
Signal name
DI 0 (X520.1)
DI 1 (X520.2)
DI 2 (X520.3)
DI 3 (X520.4)
DI 4 (X530.1)
DI 5 (X530.2)
DI 6 (X530.3)
DI 7 (X530.4)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
Simulation
0 signal
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
Terminal eval.
FP
-
Refer to: p4096

Warning:
A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while the Terminal
Module is being activated or deactivated.
Note:

DI: Digital input
p4096
TB30 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TB30 DI sim setpt
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Dependency:
Signal name
DI 0 (X481.1)
DI 1 (X481.2)
DI 2 (X481.3)
DI 3 (X481.4)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
Refer to: p4095

Note:

DI: Digital input

1-577
Parameter
List of parameters
p4096
TM31 digital inputs, simulation mode setpoint / TM31 DI sim setp
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

9552, 9560, 9562
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the simulation mode of the digital inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
Dependency:
Signal name
DI 0 (X520.1)
DI 1 (X520.2)
DI 2 (X520.3)
DI 3 (X520.4)
DI 4 (X530.1)
DI 5 (X530.2)
DI 6 (X530.3)
DI 7 (X530.4)
DI/DO 8 (X541.2)
DI/DO 9 (X541.3)
DI/DO 10 (X541.4)
DI/DO 11 (X541.5)
1 signal
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
-
Refer to: p4095

Note:

DI: Digital input
p4097[0...1]
TB30
TB30 analog inputs simulation mode / TB30 AI sim_mode

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Dependency:
The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098.
No simulation mode for analog input x

Simulation mode for analog input x
Refer to: p4098

Note:

AI: Analog Input
1-578

Parameter
List of parameters
p4097[0...1]
TM31 analog inputs simulation mode / TM31 AI sim_mode
TM31
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the simulation mode for the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency:
The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098.
No simulation mode for analog input x

Simulation mode for analog input x
Refer to: p4098

Note:

AI: Analog Input
p4098[0...1]
TB30
TB30 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TB30 AI sim setp

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9104
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-11.000 [V]
Max
11.000 [V]
Factory setting
0.000 [V]
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the input voltage in the simulation mode of the analog inputs of Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2)
[1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4)
Dependency:
The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097.

Refer to: p4097
Note:

AI: Analog Input
p4098[0...1]
TM31
TM31 analog inputs simulation mode setpoint / TM31 AI sim setp

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-20.000
Max
20.000
Factory setting
0.000
Description:
Sets the setpoint for the input value in simulation mode of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:
[0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0)

[1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1)
Dependency:
The simulation of an analog input is selected using p4097.

If AI x is parameterized as voltage input (p4056), then the setpoint is a voltage in V.
If AI x is parameterized as current input (p4056), then the setpoint is a current in mA.
Refer to: r4056, p4056, p4097
Note:

AI: Analog Input

1-579
Parameter
List of parameters
p4099[0...2]
TB30 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TB30 I/O t_sample
TB30
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
5000.00 [s]
Factory setting
[0] 4000.00 [s]
[1] 4000.00 [s]
[2] 4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30).
Index:

[1] = Analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Analog outputs (AO)
Dependency:

The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (r0110, r0111).
Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111
Note:
The modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
For clock cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation, the TB30 hardware (e.g. A/D converter ) is operated with the
PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]). This clock cycle is also kept after the PROFIBUS connection has been exited up
to the next time that the Control Unit is powered down. In this case, a faster sampling time than the PROFIBUS
clock cycle is not practical in p4099[0...2].
p4099[0...2]
TM31
TM31 inputs/outputs, sampling time / TM31 I/O t_sample

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
5000.00 [s]
Factory setting
4000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the inputs and outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Index:

[1] = Analog inputs (AI)
[2] = Analog outputs (AO)
Dependency:

The sampling times can only be set as an integer multiple of the basic sampling time (r0110, r0111).
Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111
Notice:
The sampling times entered in index 0 (digital inputs/outputs) and index 2 (analog outputs) must always be greater
than or equal to the sampling time in index 1 (analog inputs).
Note:
- the modified sampling time is not effective until the drive unit is powered up again.
- parameter p4099[0] must never equal zero.
p4100
TM31 temperature evaluation, sensor type / TM31 temp sens_typ
TM31
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Sets the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).

This means that the temperature sensor type is selected and the evaluation is switched in.
1-580

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Note:
The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-).
r4101
TM31 temperature evaluation, sensor resistance / TM31 temp R_sensor
TM31
Evaluation disabled
PTC thermistor
KTY84
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Ohm]
Max
- [Ohm]
Factory setting
- [Ohm]
Description:
Displays the actual resistance value of the temperature sensor connected at Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Note:
The maximum measurable resistance value is approx. 1700 Ohm.

p4102[0...1]
TM31
TM31 temperature evaluation fault/alarm threshold / TM31 temp thresh

Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9576
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-48 [C]
Max
251 [C]
Factory setting
[0] 100 [C]
[1] 120 [C]
Description:
Sets the fault/alarm threshold for the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Temperature actual value > p4102[0] --> alarm A35211 is output.
Alarm A35211 remains present until the temperature actual value (r4105) falls below the corresponding value
(p4102[0] hysteresis).
Temperature actual value > p4102[1] --> fault F35207 is output.
Fault F35207 remains present until the temperature actual value (r4105) falls below the corresponding value
(p4102[1] hysteresis) and the fault has been acknowledged.
The hysteresis value is 5 C and cannot be changed by the user.
Index:
[0] = Alarm threshold

[1] = Fault threshold
Dependency:
Warning:
Refer to: r4104

Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive
and TM31.
Note:
A value > 250 C deactivates the alarm or fault.


1-581
Parameter
List of parameters
p4103
TM31 temperature evaluation timer / TM31 temp t_timer
TM31
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9576
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [ms]
Max
600.000 [ms]
Factory setting
0.000 [ms]
Timer for the fault output of the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This timer is started when the temperature alarm threshold (p4102[0]) is exceeded.
If the timer expires before the temperature in the meantime falls below the alarm threshold, the fault F35207 is output.
If the temperature fault threshold (p4102[1]) is prematurely exceeded before the timer has expired, then fault
F35207 is immediately output.
As long as the temperature of the TM31 has still not exceeded the fault threshold and the alarm threshold has again
been undershot, the fault can be acknowledged.
Dependency:
Refer to: r4104
Warning:
Fault F35207 only causes the drive to be shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive
and TM31.
Note:
With p4103 = 0 ms, the timer is deactivated and only the fault threshold is effective.
r4104.0...1
BO: TM31 temperature evaluation, status / TM31 temp status
TM31
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the status for the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
This displays whether the temperature actual value has exceeded the fault/alarm threshold.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Refer to: p4102
r4105
CO: TM31 temperature evaluation, actual value / TM31 temp actValue
TM31
Signal name
Temperature alarm threshold exceeded
Temperature fault threshold exceeded
1 signal
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
FP
-
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
P-Group: Terminals
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the actual temperature value of the temperature evaluation of Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Dependency:
For sensor type PTC (p4100 = 1), the following applies:

- below the nominal response temperature, r4105 = -50C.
- above the nominal response temperature, r4105 = 250 C.
For sensor type KTY84-130 (p4100 = 2), the following applies:
- the displayed value corresponds to the temperature actual value.
Refer to: p4100
Note:
For an invalid temperature actual value, (e.g. a short-circuit at the sensor input), r4105 = -300 C is displayed.
1-582

Parameter
List of parameters
p4600[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type / Temp_sens 1 type

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10.
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84
Bimetallic NC contact fault
Bimetallic NC contact alarm
Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer
PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm

p4601[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the second temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84
Terminals for KTY84: X200.1, X200.2


1-583
Parameter
List of parameters
p4602[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the third temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84
Terminals for PTC triplet and bimetallic: X200.3, X200.4

p4603[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the fourth temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84
Terminals for PTC triplet: X200.5, X200.6

1-584

Parameter
List of parameters
p4610[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor 1 sensor type MDS / Temp sens1 typ MDS

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
10
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84

p4611[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
10
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the second temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84


1-585
Parameter
List of parameters
p4612[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
10
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the third temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84

p4613[0...n]

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: MDS
Func. diagram: 8016
P-Group: Motor
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
32
Factory setting
10
Description:
Sets the sensor type of the fourth temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring.
Value:
0:
10:
11:
12:
20:
30:
31:
32:
Dependency:
Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601
Note:
No sensor
PTC fault
PTC alarm
PTC alarm & timer
KTY84

1-586

Parameter
List of parameters
r4620[0...3]
Motor temperature measured / Mot_temp meas

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Description:
Displays the actual temperature in the motor measured through temperature channels 1 ... 4.
Index:
[0] = Temperature channel 1

Note:
An invalid temperature is displayed using the value -200C.
r4640[0...95]
Encoder diagnostics state machine / Enc diag SM
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Encoder diagnostics for the Profidrive interface.
p4650
Encoder functional reserve component number / Enc fct_res num
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
399
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the component number (p0141) of the encoder whose functional reserve is to be displayed (r4651).
Dependency:
Refer to: r4651
r4651[0...3]
Encoder functional reserve / Enc fct_reserve
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the functional reserve of the encoder selected via p4650.

0 ... 25 %:
The function limit has been reached. A service is recommended.
26 ... 100 %:
The encoder is working in the specified range.
Index:
[0] = Incremental
[1] = Reserved
[2] = Abs track
[3] = Code conn
Dependency:
Refer to: p4650

1-587
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Value = 999 means:

- the component specified in p4650 is not connected
- the encoder does not support the display of the functional reserve
p4660
Sensor module filter bandwidth / SMx f_BW
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [kHz]
Max
20000.00 [kHz]
Factory setting
0.00 [kHz]
Sets the filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The value set on the Sensor Module is displayed in r4661.
The Sensor Module hardware only supports the following values:
- 0: The Sensor Module's default is used.
- 50 kHz
- 170 kHz
- 500 kHz
- Unlimited - only the bandwidth of the Op Amp is effective.
Dependency:
Refer to: r4661
Note:
p4660[0...2]
Sensor module filter bandwidth / SMx f_BW

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [kHz]
Max
20000.00 [kHz]
Factory setting
0.00 [kHz]
Sets the filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The value set on the Sensor Module is displayed in r4661.
The Sensor Module hardware only supports the following values:
- 0: The Sensor Module's default is used.
- 50 kHz
- 170 kHz
- 500 kHz
- Unlimited - only the bandwidth of the Op Amp is effective.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: r4661
Note:
1-588

Parameter
List of parameters
r4661
Sensor Module filter bandwidth display / SMx f_BW disp
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kHz]
Max
- [kHz]
Factory setting
- [kHz]
Displays the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660.
Dependency:
Refer to: p4660
Note:
r4661[0...2]
Sensor Module filter bandwidth display / SMx f_BW disp

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kHz]
Max
- [kHz]
Factory setting
- [kHz]
Displays the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Modules SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos encoder).
The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p4660
Note:
p4670[0...n]
Analog sensor configuration / Ana_sens config
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for evaluation on the analog sensor.
Bit field:
Bit
06
09
10
11
13
Notice:
Re bit 06:
Signal name
Set velocity to 0
Fault/Alarm messages
Chann B act
Chann A act
Commutation angle constant
1 signal
Yes
Alarm
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
Fault
No
No
No
FP
-
Setting the bit sets the velocity actual value (r0061) permanently to 0.
Re bit 13:
Setting the bit sets the commutation angle permanently to the commutation angle offset (p0431).
Note:
Re bit 09:
A setting of bit = 0 will trigger a fault for the relevant channel if the actual value is invalid.
A setting of bit = 1 will trigger an alarm for the relevant channel if the actual value is invalid.
Re bit 10, 11:
If both channels are activated, the actual value is generated from the mean value of both channels. If a channel fails
(actual value invalid), it is not included when the mean value is generated.

1-589
Parameter
List of parameters
p4671[0...n]
Analog sensor input / Ana_sens inp
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input circuit for the analog sensor.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Note:
p4671 = 0:
Differential
Single-ended A, B
Single-ended A*, B*
Single-ended A, B sensitive
The two signals on a track are evaluated differentially.

p4671 = 1:
Only the non-inverted signal on a track is evaluated.
p4671 = 2:
Only the inverted signal on a track is evaluated.
p4671 = 3:
Only the non-inverted signal on a track (high resolution) is evaluated.
p4672[0...n]
Analog sensor channel A voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens A U at 0
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.0000 [V]
Max
10.0000 [V]
Factory setting
0.0000 [V]
Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero.
At this voltage channel A supplies an actual value of zero.
p4673[0...n]
Analog sensor channel A voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens A U/per
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.0000 [V]
Max
10.0000 [V]
Factory setting
6.0000 [V]
Sets the output voltage range to be mapped for the connected analog sensor.
The voltage range is determined by the following parameters:
- p4672 (voltage at actual value 0)
- p4673 (voltage per encoder period)
Note:
The minimum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4672 - p4673/2.
The maximum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4672 + p4673/2.
1-590

Parameter
List of parameters
p4674[0...n]
Analog sensor channel B voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens B U at 0
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.0000 [V]
Max
10.0000 [V]
Factory setting
0.0000 [V]
Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero.
At this voltage channel B supplies an actual value of zero.
p4675[0...n]
Analog sensor channel B voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens B U/per
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10.0000 [V]
Max
10.0000 [V]
Factory setting
6.0000 [V]
Sets the output voltage range to be mapped for the connected analog sensor.
The voltage range is determined by the following parameters:
- p4674 (voltage at actual value 0)
- p4675 (voltage per encoder period)
Note:
The minimum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4674 - p4675/2.
The maximum actual value which can be mapped is equal to p4674 + p4675/2.
p4676[0...n]
Analog sensor range limit threshold / Ana_sens lim thr
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0 [%]
Max
100.0 [%]
Factory setting
100.0 [%]
Sets the threshold for limit monitoring of the absolute actual value on the analog sensor.
If this threshold is overshot by the actual value of a channel, a corresponding fault/alarm (p4670.9) is output.
Dependency:
p4677[0...n]
Analog sensor LVDT configuration / Ana_sens LVDT conf
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for LVDT mode on the analog sensor.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Signal name
LVDT ON
Track B excitation
Fixed value amplitude
Fixed value amplitude and phase
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

0 signal
No
No
No
No
FP
-
1-591
Parameter
List of parameters
p4680[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring tolerance permissible / ZM_monit tol perm
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1000
Factory setting
4
Sets the permissible tolerance in encoder pulses for the zero mark distance in the context of zero mark monitoring.
Causes fault F3x100 to appear less frequently.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0430

Refer to: F31100
Note:
The parameter is activated using p0430.21 = 1 (zero mark tolerance).
p4681[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 positive / ZM tol lim 1 pos
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1000
Factory setting
2
Sets the positive tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 1 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the deviation is less than this limit, the PPR is not corrected. If it is higher than this limit, fault F3x131 is triggered.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (r4688). The accumulator can be deactivated using p0437.7.
Dependency:

Refer to: F31131
Note:
This monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).

The positive limit describes additional pulses due to EMC.
p4682[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 negative / ZM tol lim 1 neg
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1001
Max
0
Factory setting
-1001
Sets the negative tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 1 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the deviation is less than this limit, the PPR is not corrected. If it is higher than this limit, fault F3x131 is triggered.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (r4688). The accumulator can be deactivated using p0437.7.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4688

Refer to: F31131
Note:
This monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).

For a set value = -1001, the negated value of p4681 is effective.
The negative limit describes the pulses lost due to a covered glass panel in the incremental encoder.
1-592

Parameter
List of parameters
p4683[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold positive / ZM tol A_thr pos
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100000
Factory setting
0
Sets the positive tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 2 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the zero mark deviation is higher than the tolerance set in p4681 and p4682 and fault F3x131 is re-parameterized
to alarm (A) or no message (N), the accumulator p4688 is compared with this parameter and, if applicable, alarm
A3x422 is output for 5 seconds.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4682, p4688

Refer to: F31131, A31422
Note:
Zero mark monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).
p4684[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold negative / ZM tol A_thr neg
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-100001
Max
0
Factory setting
-100001
Sets the negative tolerance window in encoder pulses for limit 2 for the zero mark monitoring.
If the zero mark deviation is higher than the tolerance set in p4681 and p4682 and fault F3x131 is re-parameterized
to alarm (A) or no message (N), the accumulator p4688 is compared with this parameter and, if applicable, alarm
A3x422 is output for 5 seconds.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0437, p4683, p4688

Refer to: F31131, A31422
Note:
Zero mark monitoring is activated by setting p0437.2 = 1 (position actual value correction).
For a set value = -100001, the negated value of p4683 is effective.
p4685[0...n]
Speed actual value mean value generation / n_act mean val
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
20
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the number of current controller clock cycles for mean value generation of the speed actual value.
Note:
Value = 0, 1: No mean value generation.

Higher values also mean higher dead times for the speed actual value.
p4686[0...n]
Zero mark minimum length / ZM min length
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: Encoder
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
10
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the minimum length for the zero mark.
Dependency:

1-593
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The value for the minimum length of the zero mark must be set less than p0425.
The parameter is activated using p0437.1 = 1 (zero mark edge detection).
p4688
CO: Zero mark monitoring, differential pulse count / ZM diff_pulse qty
ENCODER
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147483648
Max
2147483647
Factory setting
0
Displays the number of differential pulses for the zero mark monitoring that have accumulated.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688).
Dependency:
Refer to: p4681, p4682, p4683, p4684
Note:
The display can only be reset to zero.
p4688[0...2]
CO: Zero mark monitoring, differential pulse count / ZM diff_pulse qty

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147483648
Max
2147483647
Factory setting
0
Displays the number of differential pulses for the zero mark monitoring that have accumulated.
If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688).
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p4681, p4682, p4683, p4684
Note:
The display can only be reset to zero.
r4689
CO: Squarewave encoder, diagnostics / Sq-wave enc diag
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder.
Dependency:
Refer to: A31422
Note:
In the case of alarm A3x422 being output, this parameter is set for 100 ms.
1-594

Parameter
List of parameters
r4689[0...2]
CO: Squarewave encoder, diagnostics / Sq-wave enc diag

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Encoder
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder.
Index:
[0] = Encoder 1
[1] = Encoder 2
[2] = Encoder 3
Dependency:
Refer to: A31422
Note:
In the case of alarm A3x422 being output, this parameter is set for 100 ms.
p4690
SMI spare part component number / SMI comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
399
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the component number for the SMI/DQI for which motor and/or encoder data should be saved, deleted or
downloaded.
Dependency:
Refer to: p4691, p4692, p4693
Note:
DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated

SMI: SINAMICS Sensor Module Integrated
p4691
Save/download SMI spare part data / Save/DL SMI data
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
38
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting for the saving/downloading/deletion of motor and/or encoder data for the component specified in p4690
(SMI/DQI).
A backup of this data can be saved to non-volatile memory. The backup procedure is performed automatically as
part of the function for saving to non-volatile memory (p0977 = 1 or "Copy RAM to ROM"). If a part is replaced, the
backup can be reloaded.
Procedure:
p4690 = set component number
p4691 = 1, 2, 30: Set the required procedure (save/download/delete).
p4691 = 9, 10, 36: Feedback signal on successful completion of the procedure.
p4691 = 11... 21, 37, 38: Error vales if the procedure could not be executed successfully.

1-595
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
20:
21:
30:
35:
36:
37:
38:
Inactive
Save SMI data
Download SMI data
SMI data downloaded and POWER ON required for component
SMI data backup complete
SMI data backup for selected component not found
Selected component not available or not connected
Insufficient memory space for backup
Format of saved data is incompatible
Transfer fault during data download
Transfer fault during data backup
Data backup does not match parameterized encoder/motor
Data backup directory not permissible
Component already contains data
Component does not contain any data
Component is not an SMI or a DQI
Delete SMI data
Confirmation of SMI data delete required
SMI data deleted and POWER ON required for component
Access level not sufficient for delete
Delete SMI data not permitted for component
Dependency:
Refer to: p4690, p4692, p4693
Notice:
Once SMI data has been deleted or downloaded successfully, the component has to be powered off.
Note:

DLQ encoder: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
Help for error value = 11:
- Save the data for the original SMI on the memory card.
- Use an SMI with a suitable hardware version.
- Set the correct component number or connect the component.
- Use a memory card with more memory space.
- Create a data backup on the memory card corresponding to the SMI type.
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring for the component.
- Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring for the component.
- Save the data for the original SMI on the memory card.
- Set parameter p4693 to an appropriate value.
- Perform an SMI delete or use a blank SMI.
- Use an SMI card that is not blank.
- Set the correct component number (p4690).
- Reset parameter p4691 to 30.
- Set the access level to Expert or higher.
- Set the correct component number (p4690 >= 200).
1-596

Parameter
List of parameters
p4692
Save SMI spare part data of all SMIs / Save SMI data
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
29
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to back up the data of all SMIs and DQIs featured in the target topology.
Value:
0:
1:
10:
13:
16:
20:
29:
Note:
Inactive
Save data of all SMIs and DQIs
Save all data successful
Insufficient memory space for backup
Transfer fault during data backup
Component does not contain any data
Not all components from target topology saved
p4692 = 10: Automatic on successful completion of backup procedure.

p4692 = 13, 16, 20, 29: Error vales if the procedure could not be executed successfully.
The procedure must be repeated if the data save operation was interrupted (e.g. if the power supply voltage failed).
- Use a memory card with more memory space.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- Use an SMI card that is not blank.
- Check and correct the target and actual topologies for the SMIs.
- Repeat the save procedure.
p4693[0...1]
SMI spare part data backup directory / SMI dat_bkup dir
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
399
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the directory for downloading and saving data.

Example:
The SMI has the component number 5 and the SMI data (motor/encoder data) is to be stored in subdirectory C205.
--> p4690 = 5, p4693[0] = 205, p4691 = 1
Index:
[0] = Subdirectory selection

[1] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:
If p4693[0] is not equal to 0 and p4693[0] is not equal to p4690, the following applies:
- Only a number > 200 may be selected for the subdirectory when saving.
- In the case of downloads, a selection for the subdirectory may only be made for an SMI with a component number
> 200 (preliminary component number) (p4690 > 200).
Note:

Re index 0:
This index is used to select the subdirectory for saving and downloading data. The motor order number (MLFB) of
the corresponding data backup is displayed in r4694.
For p4693[0] = 0, the following applies:
The directory is determined by the setting of p4690.

1-597
Parameter
List of parameters
r4694[0...19]
SMI spare part data backup motor order number / SMI dat_bkup MLFB
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the motor order number (MLFB) of the data backup selected with p4693.
Dependency:
Caution:
If the selected subdirectory contains a number of data sets, "More Datasets" is displayed in r4694[0...19].
If there is no SMI data (motor/encoder data) in the selected subdirectory or if the selected subdirectory does not
exist, the following applies:
- The number of the next subdirectory located is displayed.
- This subdirectory is not checked for valid SMI data.
- If another subdirectory cannot be located, 0 is displayed in r4694[0...19].
Note:
p4700[0...1]
Trace control / Trace control
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Trace and function generator
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Value:
0:
1:
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4701
Measuring function, control / Meas fct ctrl
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Value:
0:
1:
2:
1-598
Stop trace
Start trace
Stop measuring function

Start measuring function
Measuring function, check parameterization

Parameter
List of parameters
r4705[0...1]
Trace status / Trace status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
4
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual status of the trace.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4706
Measuring function, status / Meas fct status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
5
Factory setting
-
Trace inactive
Trace is recording presamples
Trace is waiting for trigger event
Trace is recording
Recording (trace) ended
Description:
Displays the actual status of the measuring function.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Measurement function inactive

Measuring function, parameterization checked
Measuring function waits for stabilizing time
Measuring function recording (tracing)
Measuring function, trace ended with error
Measuring function, trace successfully completed
r4708[0...1]
Trace memory space required / Trace mem required
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the required memory in bytes for the actual parameterization.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
Refer to: r4799
r4709[0...1]
Trace memory space required for measuring functions / Trace mem required
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the memory space required for the current parameter setting in bytes, if the trace is used for the measuring functions.

1-599
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
Refer to: r4799
p4710[0...1]
Trace trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
1
Max
7
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the trigger condition for the trace.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Immediate start
Positive edge
Negative edge
Entry to hysteresis band
Leaving hysteresis band
Trigger at bit mask
Start with function generator
p4711[0...5]
Trace trigger signal / Trace trig_signal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the trigger signal for the trace.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format

[2] = Trace 0 PINx with DO Id and chart Id
[3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id
[4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id
[5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id
Dependency:
Only effective when p4710 does not equal 1.
Note:
It only makes sense to trace the PINs using the commissioning software.
For index 2(4) and 3(5) equal to zero, index 0(1) can only be written and vice versa.
Re index 0 ... 1:
Here, the trigger signal for trace 0 or 1 is entered as parameter in the BICO format.
For trace with a physical address (p4789), the data type of the trigger signal is set here.
Re index 2 ...3:
The triggering PIN for trace 0 is entered here.
Index 2 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the Drive Object (DO), bit 15 ... 0: Number of the chart
Index 3 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the block, bit 15 ... 0: Number of the PIN
Re index 4 ... 5:
The triggering PIN for trace 1 is entered here.
Index 4 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the Drive Object (DO), bit 15 ... 0: Number of the chart
Index 5 bit 31 ... 16: Number of the block, bit 15 ... 0: Number of the PIN
1-600

Parameter
List of parameters
p4712[0...1]
Trace trigger threshold / Trace trig_thresh
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-340.28235E36
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
0.00
Description:
Sets the trigger threshold for the trace.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
Only effective when p4710 = 2, 3.
p4713[0...1]
Trace tolerance band trigger threshold / Trace trig thresh
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-340.28235E36
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
0.00
Description:
Sets the first trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
p4714[0...1]
Trace tolerance band trigger threshold / Trace trig thresh
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-340.28235E36
Max
340.28235E36
Factory setting
0.00
Description:
Sets the second trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
p4715[0...1]
Trace bit mask trigger, bit mask / Trace trig mask
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the bit mask for the bit mask trigger.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
Only effective when p4710 = 6.

1-601
Parameter
List of parameters
p4716[0...1]
Trace, bit mask trigger, trigger condition / Trace Trig_cond
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the trigger condition for bit mask trigger.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
p4717
Measuring function, number of averaging operations / Meas fct avg qty
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
p4718
Measuring function, number of stabilizing periods / MeasFct StabPerQty
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
r4719[0...1]
Trace trigger index / Trace Trig_index
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the trigger index in the trace buffer. The trigger event occurred at this point.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
Only valid when p4705 = 4.
p4720[0...1]
Trace recording cycle / Trace record_cyc
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0.000 [ms]
Max
60000.000 [ms]
Factory setting
1.000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the recording cycle for the trace.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
1-602

Parameter
List of parameters
p4721[0...1]
Trace recording time / Trace record_time
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0.000 [ms]
Max
3600000.000 [ms]
Factory setting
1000.000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the recording time for the trace.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4722[0...1]
Trace trigger delay / Trace trig_delay
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-3600000.000 [ms]
Max
3600000.000 [ms]
Factory setting
0.000 [ms]
Description:
Sets the trigger delay for the trace.

Trigger delay < 0:
Pretrigger: Tracing (recording) starts the selected time before the trigger event actually occurs.
Trigger delay > 0:
Post trigger: Tracing does not start until the set time after the trigger event.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4723[0...1]
Time slice cycle for trace / Trace cycle
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0.03125 [ms]
Max
4.00000 [ms]
Factory setting
0.12500 [ms]
Description:
Sets the time slice cycle in which the trace is called.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4724[0...1]
Trace average in the time range / Trace average
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
0001 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1

1-603
Parameter
List of parameters
r4725[0...1]
Trace, data type 1 traced / Trace rec type 1
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4726[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4727[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4728[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4729[0...1]
Trace number of recorded values / Trace rec values
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of traced values for each signal.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
Dependency:
Only valid when p4705 = 4.
1-604

Parameter
List of parameters
p4730[0...5]
Trace record signal 0 / Trace record sig 0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the first signal to be traced.
Index:

p4731[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the second signal to be traced.
Index:

p4732[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the third signal to be traced.
Index:


1-605
Parameter
List of parameters
p4733[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the fourth signal to be traced.
Index:

p4734[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the fifth signal to be traced.
Index:

p4735[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the sixth signal to be traced.
Index:

1-606

Parameter
List of parameters
p4736[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the seventh signal to be traced.
Index:

p4737[0...5]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the eighth signal to be traced.
Index:

r4740[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 0 floating point / Trace 0 trace sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 0.
The trace (record) buffer is sub-divided into memory banks, each containing 16384 values. Parameter p4795 can
be used to toggle between the individual banks.
Example A:
The first 16384 values of signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out.
In this case, memory bank 0 is set with p4795 = 0. The first 16384 values can now be read out using r4740[0] to
r4740[16383].
Example B:
The values 16385 to 32768 from signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out.
In this case, memory bank 1 is set with p4795 = 1. The values can now be read out in r4740[0] to r4740[16383].
Dependency:
Refer to: p4795

1-607
Parameter
List of parameters
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
1-608

Parameter
List of parameters
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:

1-609
Parameter
List of parameters
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
1-610

Parameter
List of parameters
r4760[0...16383] Trace 0 trace buffer signal 0 / Trace 0 trace sig0

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 0 as integer number.
Note:
For signals, data type I32 or U32, the trace buffer is assigned as follows:
r4760[0] = value 0
r4760[1] = value 1
...
r4760[8191] = value 8191
r4760[0] = value 0 (bit 31 ... 16) and value 1 (bit 15 ... 0)
...
r4760[0] = value 0 (bit 31 ... 24) value 1 (bit 23 ... 16) value 2 (bit 15 ... 8) value 3 (bit 7 ... 0)
...

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

1-611
Parameter
List of parameters

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760
1-612

Parameter
List of parameters

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

1-613
Parameter
List of parameters

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760

CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r4760
p4780[0...1]
Trace physical address signal 0 / Trace PhyAddr Sig0
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the first signal to be traced.

The data type is defined using p4730.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
1-614

Parameter
List of parameters
p4781[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the second signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4782[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the third signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4783[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the fourth signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4784[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the fifth signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1

1-615
Parameter
List of parameters
p4785[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the sixth signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4786[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the seventh signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4787[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 bin
Max
1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111
1111 1111 bin
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the physical address for the eighth signal to be traced.

Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4789[0...1]
Trace physical address trigger signal / Trace PhyAddr Trig
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the physical address for the trigger signal.

The data type is defined by making the appropriate selection in p4711.
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
1-616

Parameter
List of parameters
r4790[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4791[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4792[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
r4793[0...1]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Trace 0
[1] = Trace 1
p4795
Trace memory bank changeover / Trace mem changeov
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
500
Factory setting
0
Description:
Changes over the memory bank to read out the contents of the trace buffer.
Dependency:

1-617
Parameter
List of parameters
r4799
Trace memory location free / Trace mem free
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the free memory for the trace in bytes.
Dependency:
Refer to: r4708
p4800
Function generator control / FG control
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
The function generator is started with p4800 = 1.

The signal is only generated for a 1 signal of binector input p4819.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Stop function generator

Start function generator
Check function generator parameterization
Start function generator without enable signals
Dependency:
Refer to: p4819
r4805
Function generator status / FG status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual status of the function generator.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
Dependency:
1-618
Inactive
Generate accelerating ramp to offset
Generate parameterized signal shape
Generate braking ramp
Function generator stopped due to missing enable signals
Function generator waits for BI: p4819
Function generator parameterization has been checked

Parameter
List of parameters
r4806.0
BO: Function generator status signal / FG status signal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the function generator.

0 signal: Function generator inactive
1 signal: Function generator running
Bit field:
Bit
00
Signal name
Bit 0
1 signal
On
0 signal
Off
FP
-
p4810
Function generator mode / FG operating mode
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the operating mode of the function generator.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
99:
p4812
Function generator physical address / FG phys address
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
0
Connection at connector output r4818

Connection at current setpoint after filter and r4818
Connection as disturbing torque and r4818
Connection at speed setpoint after filter and r4818
Connection at current setpoint before filter and r4818
Connection at speed setpoint before filter and r4818
Connection at physical address and r4818
Description:
Sets the physical address where the function generator is to be connected.
Dependency:
p4813
Function generator physical address reference value / FG phys addr ref
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00
Max
1000000.00
Factory setting
1.00
Description:
Sets the reference value for 100 % for referred inputs.
Dependency:

1-619
Parameter
List of parameters
p4815[0...2]
Function generator drive number / FG drive number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the required drive where the function generator is to be connected.
Index:
[0] = First drive for connection

[1] = Second drive for connection
[2] = Third drive for connection
Dependency:
Only effective when p4810 = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.
Note:
For the function generator, only type SERVO or VECTOR drives can be used.
r4818
CO: Function generator output signal / FG output signal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the output signal for the function generator.
Dependency:
Refer to: p4810
Note:
The value is displayed independently of the function generator mode.

The signal is available as connector output for an ongoing interconnection.
p4819
BI: Function generator control / FG control
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal source to control the function generator.

When the function generator is running, signal generation is stopped with a 0 signal from BI: p4819 and p4800 is
set to 0.
Dependency:
Refer to: p4800
p4820
Function generator signal shape / FG signal shape
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
5
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
1-620
Square-wave
Staircase
Delta
Binary noise - PRBS (Pseudo Random Binary Signal)
Sine-wave

Parameter
List of parameters
p4821
Function generator period / FG period duration
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
60000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
1000.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the period of the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency:
Ineffective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS).
p4822
Function generator pulse width / FG pulse width
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
60000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
500.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the pulse width for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency:
Only effective when p4820 = 1 (square-wave).
p4823
Function generator bandwidth / FG bandwith
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0025 [Hz]
Max
16000.0000 [Hz]
Factory setting
4000.0000 [Hz]
Description:
Sets the bandwidth for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency:
Only effective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS).

Refer to: p4830
Refer to: A02041
p4824
Function generator amplitude / FG amplitude
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1600.00 [%]
Max
1600.00 [%]
Factory setting
5.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency:
Units are dependent on p4810.

If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The amplitude is referred to p2002 (reference current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: The amplitude is referred to p2000 (reference speed).

1-621
Parameter
List of parameters
p4825
Function generator 2nd amplitude / FG 2nd amplitude
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1600.00 [%]
Max
1600.00 [%]
Factory setting
7.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the second amplitude for the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency:
Only effective for p4820 = 2 (staircase).

If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The amplitude is referred to p2002 (reference current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: The amplitude is referred to p2000 (reference speed).
p4826
Function generator offset / FG offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1600.00 [%]
Max
1600.00 [%]
Factory setting
0.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the offset (DC component) of the signal to be generated for the function generator.
Dependency:

If p4810 = 1, 2, 4: The offset is referred to p2002 (reference current).
If p4810 = 3, 5: The offset is referred to p2000 (reference speed).
If p4810 = 2: In order to avoid the undesirable effects of play (backlash), the offset does not act on the current setpoint, but instead on the speed setpoint.
p4827
Function generator ramp-up time to offset / FG ramp-up offset
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
100000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
32.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the ramp-up time to the offset for the function generator.
p4828
Function generator lower limit / FG lower limit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-10000.00 [%]
Max
0.00 [%]
Factory setting
-100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the lower limit for the function generator.
Dependency:
For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset).
1-622

Parameter
List of parameters
p4829
Function generator upper limit / FG upper limit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
10000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Description:
Sets the upper limit for the function generator.
Dependency:
For p4810 = 2 the limit only applies to the current setpoint, but not the speed setpoint (offset).
p4830
Function generator time slice cycle / FG time slice
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.03125 [ms]
Max
2.00000 [ms]
Factory setting
0.12500 [ms]
Description:
Sets the time slice cycle in which the function generator is called.
p4831
Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [%]
Max
200.00000 [%]
Factory setting
100.00000 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms for all output channels.
The value can be changed while the function generator is running.
p4832[0...2]
Function generator amplitude scaling / FG amplitude scal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-340.28235E36 [%]
Max
340.28235E36 [%]
Factory setting
100.00000 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel.
The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running.
Index:


1-623
Parameter
List of parameters
p4833[0...2]
Function generator offset scaling / FG offset scal
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-340.28235E36 [%]
Max
340.28235E36 [%]
Factory setting
100.00000 [%]
Description:
Sets the scaling for the offset of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel.
The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running.
Index:

r4950
OA application count / OA no
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
10
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency:
Refer to: r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960
Note:
OA: Open Architecture
r4951
OA application identifier, total length / OA ID length
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
90
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the total length of the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency:
Note:
The identifier of an OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator.
r4952
OA application GUID, total length / OA GUID length
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
180
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the total length of the GUIDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency:
Note:
The GUID of an OA application comprises 16 characters plus 1 character major information plus 1 character, minor
information.
GUID: Globally Unique IDentifier
1-624

Parameter
List of parameters
r4955[0...n]
OA application identifier / OA ID
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: r4951
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the IDs of all the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4955[0...8]: Identifier of OA application 1
r4955[9...17]: Identifier of OA applications 2, ...
Dependency:
Notice:
If there is no OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
p4956[0...n]
OA application activation / OA act
All objects
Description:
Can be changed: C1, T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Setting to activate the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.

r4956[0]: Activates OA application 1
r4956[1]: Activates OA application 2, ...
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Notice:
r4957[0...n]
OA application version / OA version
All objects
Description:
OA application inactive
OA application active
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4957[0]: Version of OA application 1
r4957[1]: Version of OA application 2, ...
Dependency:
Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4958, r4959, r4960
Notice:
Note:
Example:

1-625
Parameter
List of parameters
r4958[0...n]
All objects
Description:
OA application interface version / OA int_version

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the interface versions of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4958[0]: Interface version of OA application 1
r4958[1]: Interface version of OA applications 2, ...
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
Example:
r4959[0...n]
All objects
Description:
OA application GUID / OA GUID

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the GUIDs of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4959[0...15]: GUID of OA application 1
r4960[16]: Major information of OA application 1
r4960[17]: Minor information of OA application 1
r4959[18...33]: GUID of OA application 2
r4960[34]: Major information of OA application 2
r4960[35]: Minor information of OA application 2, ...
Dependency:
Notice:
r4960[0...n]
OA application GUID drive object / OA GUID DO
All objects
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the GUIDs of the drive object of the OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4960[0...15]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 1
r4960[16]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 1
r4960[17]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 1
r4960[18...33]: GUID of this drive object of OA application 2
r4960[34]: Major information of this drive object of OA application 2
r4960[35]: Minor information of this drive object of OA application 2, ...
Dependency:
Notice:
1-626

Parameter
List of parameters
p4961[0...n]
All objects
OA application logbook module selection / OA logbook module

Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Only for service purposes.
r4975
OA application invalid number / OA inv no.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency:
Refer to: r4976, r4978, r4979
Note:
r4976
OA application invalid identifier, total length / OA inv ID length
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the total length of the IDs of all the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency:
Refer to: r4975, r4978, r4979
Note:
The identifier of an invalid OA application comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator.
r4978[0...n]
OA application invalid identifier / OA inv ID
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the IDs of all the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4978[0...8]: Identifier of invalid OA application 1
r4978[9...17]: Identifier of invalid OA application 2, ...
Dependency:
Refer to: r4975, r4976, r4979
Notice:
If there is no invalid OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.

1-627
Parameter
List of parameters
r4979[0...n]
OA application invalid error code / OA inv error code
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: OEM range
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the error code of the invalid OA applications installed on the memory card/device memory.
r4979[0]: Fault value of OA application 1
r4979[1]: Fault value of OA application 2, ...
Dependency:
Refer to: r4975, r4976, r4978
Notice:
If there is no invalid OA application, then it is not possible to access an index.
Note:
The value in the error code must be interpreted in binary form. The bits have the following meaning:
Bit 0: Incompatible OA interface version.
Bit 1: OA application could not be loaded.
Bit 2: Incorrect description files.
Bit 3: OA application does not define a CPU type.
Bit 4: OA application for this device not supported (incorrect CPU type).
Bit 5: OA application for this device not supported (incorrect type ID).
Bit 6: Incorrect description files (Const/Startup incompatible).
r7000
Par_circuit No. of active power units / Qty active PU
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Parallel)

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the active power units for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency:
Refer to: p7001
p7001[0...n]
Par_circuit power units enable / PU enable

0 (Parallel)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Enables the power units in the parallel circuit configuration.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: r7000
Note:
For motors with separate winding systems (p7003 = 1) it is not possible to inhibit an individual power unit.
Deactivated
Activated
p7001 is automatically reset if a power unit is deactivated via p0125 or p0895.
1-628

Parameter
List of parameters
r7002[0...n]
Par_circuit status power units / Status PU

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the power units in the parallel circuit configuration.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
p7003
Par_circuit winding system / Winding system
Pulses inhibited
Pulses enabled

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Specifies the winding system for a parallel circuit configuration.

The following limitations/restrictions are obtained depending on the setting:
One winding system (p7003 = 0):
- the motor data identification routine (p1910) determines the stator resistance and the cable resistance. The cable
resistance of an individual Motor Module is entered into p0352.
- the current symmetrizing is activated as standard after the motor data identification routine (p7035 = 1).
- individual Motor Modules can be activated and deactivated (p7001).
- the edge modulation is not possible (p1802).
Several separate winding systems or motors (p7003 = 1):
- the motor data identification routine (p1910) determines the total (overall) resistance. The cable resistance is not
measured, but instead, entered as a component of the total resistance (refer to p0352).
- all Motor Modules are activated. It is not possible to deactivate a motor model.
- the edge modulation can be activated (p1802).
Value:
0:
1:
One winding system

Several separate winding systems or motors
Dependency:
Refer to: p1802
p7010
Par_circuit current dissymmetry alarm threshold / i_dissym A thresh

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
2 [%]
Max
100 [%]
Factory setting
20 [%]
Sets the alarm threshold to detect current dissymmetry in the parallel circuit configuration.
The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the
rated power unit current (p7251[0]).
Dependency:
Refer to: r7251

Refer to: A05052

1-629
Parameter
List of parameters
p7011
Par_circuit DC link voltage dissymmetry alarm threshold / Vdc_dissym A thrsh

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
2 [%]
Max
100 [%]
Factory setting
10 [%]
Sets the alarm threshold to detect dissymmetry of the DC link voltages in the parallel circuit configuration.
The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the
rated link voltage.
Dependency:
Refer to: A05053
r7020[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase U and the average value as peak value.
The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7025.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7021, r7022, r7025
r7021[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase V and the average value as peak value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7020, r7022, r7026
r7022[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase W and the average value as peak
value.
Dependency:
1-630
Refer to: r7020, r7021, r7027

Parameter
List of parameters
r7025
CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase U / Phase U Max i_dev

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase U from the average value
as peak value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7020, r7026, r7027
The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7020.
Refer to: A05052
r7026
CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase V / Phase V Max i_dev

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase V from the average value
as peak value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7021, r7025, r7027
Refer to: A05052
r7027
CO: Par_circuit max. deviation currents phase W / Phase W Max i_dev

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase W from the average
value as peak value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7022, r7025, r7026
Refer to: A05052
r7030[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage deviation / Vdc deviation

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7031

1-631
Parameter
List of parameters
r7031
CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage maximum deviation / Vdc deviation max.

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured DC link voltage from the average value.
The deviation of the individual voltages from the average value is displayed in r7030.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7030

Refer to: A05053
p7035[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control operating mode / Circ_I mode

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Sets the operating mode of the circulating current control.

The circulating current control ensures symmetrical distribution of the total currents to the individual converters.
Value:
0:
1:
Circulating current control deactivated

Circulating control control activated
p7036[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control proportional gain / Circ_I Kp

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00000 [Ohm]
Max
20.00000 [Ohm]
Factory setting
0.00000 [Ohm]
Sets the proportional gain for the circulating current controller.

The parameter is preset to the cable resistance.
p7037[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control integral time / I_circ Tn

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2.0
Max
1000.0
Factory setting
4.0
Sets the integral time of the circulating current controller.

The parameter is referred to the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]).
Dependency:
1-632
Refer to: p0115

Parameter
List of parameters
p7038[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control limit / I_circ limit

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: DDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1 [%]
Max
100 [%]
Factory setting
50 [%]
Sets the limit of the circulating current controller output values.

The parameter is, depending on the phase, referred to the valve lockout times (p1828, p1829, p1830).
p7040[0...n]
Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lockout U

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for
phase U (p1828).
The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a parallel circuit configuration.
Dependency:
Refer to: p1828
p7042[0...n]
Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lockout V

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
phase V (p1829).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1829
p7044[0...n]
Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lockout W

0 (Parallel)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Modulation
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1000000.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
phase W (p1830).
Dependency:
Refer to: p1830

1-633
Parameter
List of parameters
r7050[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current phase U / Circ_I_phase U

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the circulating current of phase U as peak value.
r7051[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current phase V / Circ_I_phase V

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the circulating current of phase V as peak value.
r7052[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current phase W / Circ_I_phase W

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Description:
Displays the circulating current of phase W as peak value.
r7100[0...99]
Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm code / Fault/alarm code

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Ring buffer for faults and alarms that have occurred from power units connected in parallel (Motor Module, Active
Line Infeed, Voltage Sensing Module).
Displays the fault/alarm code.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7101, r7102, r7103
Note:
The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0.

1-634

Parameter
List of parameters
r7101[0...99]
Par_circuit ring buffer data set number / Ring buffer Ds_No

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
p7101 < 100:
Displays the Power unit Data Set number (PDS).
p7101 >= 100:
Displays the Voltage Sensing Module Data Set number (VSMDS)
Dependency:
Refer to: r7100, r7102, r7103
Note:

r7102[0...99]
Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm received / F/A received

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7103
Note:
Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm occurred.
r7103[0...99]
Par_circuit ring buffer fault/alarm gone / F/A gone

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm was withdrawn.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7102
Note:


1-635
Parameter
List of parameters
r7200[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit overload I2T / PU overload I2T

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Displays the overload of the particular power unit in a parallel circuit configuration calculated using the I2t function.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0036.
r7201[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. inverter / PU temp max inv

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the maximum inverter temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[0].
r7202[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. depletion layer / PU TempMaxDepLayer

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the maximum depletion layer temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
r7203[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. rectifier / PU temp max rect

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the maximum rectifier temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
r7204[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures air intake / PU temp air intake

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the air intake temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
1-636

Parameter
List of parameters
r7205[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures electronics / PU temp electr

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the temperature of the electronics module in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
r7206[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp inv 1

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays the inverter temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
r7207[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7208[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7209[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]

1-637
Parameter
List of parameters
r7210[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7211[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7212[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures inverter 1 / PU temp rect 1

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays rectifier temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
r7213[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays rectifier temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
r7214[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures depletion layer 1 / PU temp DepLayer 1

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
Displays depletion layer temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration.
1-638

Parameter
List of parameters
r7215[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7216[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7217[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7218[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]
r7219[0...n]

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 21_1
Scaling: TEMP
Expert list: 1
Min
- [C]
Max
- [C]
Factory setting
- [C]

1-639
Parameter
List of parameters
r7220[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit drive output current maximum / Drv I_outp max

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the maximum output current of the power unit.

The minimum value of all power units multiplied by the number of Motor Modules is displayed in r0067.
r7222[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit absolute current actual value / I_act abs val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_2
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays actual absolute current.

The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0068.
r7223[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured actual value of phase U as peak value.

The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[0].
r7224[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured actual value of phase V as peak value.

r7225[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured actual value of phase W as peak value.

1-640

Parameter
List of parameters
r7226[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U offset / I_phase U offset

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured offset of phase U as peak value.

r7227[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V offset / I_phase V offset

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured offset of phase V as peak value.

r7228[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W offset / I_phase W offset

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured offset of phase W as peak value.

r7229[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value sum U, V, W / I_phase sum UVW

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 6_5
Scaling: p2002
Expert list: 1
Min
- [A]
Max
- [A]
Factory setting
- [A]
Displays the measured sum of the currents in phases U, V and W as peak value.
r7230[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_2
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the measured actual value of the DC link voltage.

The average value of all power units is displayed in r0070.

1-641
Parameter
List of parameters
r7231[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase U / V_phase U act val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_3
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the actual voltage, phase U.

The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[0].
r7232[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase V / V_phase V act val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_3
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the actual voltage, phase V.

r7233[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase W / V_phase W act val

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 5_3
Scaling: p2001
Expert list: 1
Min
- [V]
Max
- [V]
Factory setting
- [V]
Displays the actual voltage, phase W.

r7240[0...n]
Par_circuit gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: PDS
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays status word 1 of the power unit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
1-642
Signal name
Fault time-critical
Gating unit mode bit 0
Pulse enable
5 V upper circuit breaker
5 V lower circuit breaker
Brake state
Brake diagnostics
Armature short-circuit braking
Gating unit state bit 0
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Active
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Not active
Off
Off
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
12
13
14
15
r7250[0...4]

Alarm status bit 0
Alarm status bit 1
Diagnostics 24 V
Off
Off
Off
Off
Par_circuit power unit rated power / PU P_rated

Description:
On
On
On
On
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: 14_6
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [kW]
Max
- [kW]
Factory setting
- [kW]
Displays the rated power of the individual power units connected in parallel for various load duty cycles.
The sum of the rated powers of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0206.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate

Dependency:
The value is displayed in [kW] or [hp].

r7251[0...4]
Par_circuit power unit rated current / PU PI_rated

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the rated current of the individual power units connected in parallel for various load duty cycles.
The sum of the rated currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0207.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate

Dependency:
Refer to: p0205
r7252[0...4]
Par_circuit maximum power unit current / PU I_max

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [Arms]
Max
- [Arms]
Factory setting
- [Arms]
Displays the maximum output current of the individual power units connected in parallel.
The sum of the maximum currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0209.
Index:
[0] = Rating plate

Dependency:
Refer to: p0205

1-643
Parameter
List of parameters
p7770
NVRAM action / NVRAM action
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Sets the action to be executed for NVRAM data.

At the end of the action the value is automatically set to 0.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Inactive
Load NVRAM data to parameters
Load parameters to NVRAM
Reset
Notice:
After action p7770 = 1 no more pulses may be enabled.

After action p7770 = 2, it is essential that parameters are backed up (p0977 = 1) and that a warm restart is then performed (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2, 3). This will apply the values written.
Note:
Re value = 1:
This action loads the NVRAM data to the parameters.
Re value = 2:
This action loads the parameters to the NVRAM.
Re value = 3:
This action sets parameters p7771 ... p7774 to the factory setting.
It is recommended to avoid placing unnecessary load on the subsequent upload/download operation.
p7788
Sign-of-life monitoring tolerance window /

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
1000
Factory setting
10
Description:
The size of the window for monitoring sign-of-life errors on the power unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: A30853
Note:
An active window is generated by means of DRIVE-CLiQ telegrams. If more than one sign-of-life error appears in
the window, A30853 is issued. The lower the value in p7788, the greater the tolerance of the monitoring procedure.
p7789
Sign-of-life monitoring fault threshold /

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Converter
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Number of consecutive sign-of-life errors on the power unit that are tolerated.
Dependency:
Refer to: F30008
Note:
If more sign-of-life errors than the number set in p7789 occur one after the other, F30008 is issued. The higher the
value in p7789, the greater the tolerance of the monitoring procedure.
1-644

Parameter
List of parameters
p7820
DRIVE-CLiQ component component number / DLQ comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component whose parameters are to be accessed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p7821, p7822, r7823
p7821
DRIVE-CLiQ component parameter number / DLQ para_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the parameter number to access a parameter of a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Dependency:
Refer to: p7820, p7822, r7823
p7822
DRIVE-CLiQ component parameter index / DLQ para_index
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the parameter index to access a parameter of a DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Dependency:
Refer to: p7820, p7821, r7823
r7823
DRIVE-CLiQ component read parameter value / Read DLQ value
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameter value read from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Dependency:
Refer to: p7820, p7821, p7822

1-645
Parameter
List of parameters
r7825[0...6]
DRIVE-CLiQ component versions / DLQ version
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the firmware and EPROM versions of the DRIVE-CLiQ component selected using p7828[1].
Index:
[0] = Reference firmware version

[1] = Actual firmware version
[2] = EPROM0 version
Dependency:
Refer to: p7828
Note:
Reference firmware version: Version on the memory card/device memory.

Current firmware version: Actual version of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
EPROM version: Current EPROM version of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
p7826
Firmware update automatic / FW update auto
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the behavior for the automatic firmware update of the DRIVE-CLiQ components.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Notice:
If this parameter is changed, it only becomes effective the next time that the drive system boots.
Note:
The firmware is automatically updated when the system boots. The boot can take several minutes.
Deactivated
Upgrade and downgrade
Upgrade
After the update has been completed, it is necessary to carry out a new POWER ON (power-down/power-up) for
the components involved.
The firmware update procedure is displayed as follows:
Control Unit (LED RDY):
Flashes yellow with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated.
Flashing yellow with 2 Hz --> POWER ON is required for the components involved.
Components involved:
Flashing red/green with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated.
Flashing red/green with 2 Hz --> POWER ON of the components is required.
Only components from firmware version 2.5 support the red/green flashing at 2 Hz.
r7827
Firmware update progress display / FW update progress
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
1-646
Displays the progress when updating the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ components.

Parameter
List of parameters
p7828[0...1]
Firmware download component number / FW download number
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
399
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the component number for the required DRIVE-CLiQ component.

Index 0:
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which a firmware download is to be made.
Index 1:
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component for which the reference firmware version, saved in r7825 on the
memory card/device memory, is to be displayed.
Index:
[0] = Firmware download

[1] = Reference firmware version
Dependency:
Refer to: p0121, p0141, p0151, p7829
Note:
For p7828[0] = 399, the firmware for all of the existing components is downloaded.
The firmware download is started with p7829 = 1.
p7829
Activate firmware download / FW download act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
999
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activating the firmware download for the DRIVE-CLiQ components specified in p7828.
1: Activate download.
0: Download successfully completed.
> 1: Fault code
011: DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error.
015: The selected DRIVE-CLiQ components did not accept the contents of the firmware file.
018: Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the component.
019: Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release of the component.
101: After several communication attempts, no response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
140: Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the memory card/device memory.
143: Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing
firmware.
144: When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible
that the file on the memory card/device memory is defective.
145: Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time.
156: Component with the specified component number is not available.
Additional values:
Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Dependency:
Refer to: p7828
Note:
p7829 is automatically set to 0 after the firmware has been successfully downloaded.
The new firmware only becomes active at the next system run-up.

1-647
Parameter
List of parameters
p7830
Diagnostics telegram selection / Diag telegram
ENCODER,
Can be changed: T
0
P-Group: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects a telegram whose contents should be shown in p7831 ... p7836.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Refer to: r7831, r7832, r7833, r7834, r7835, r7836
r7831[0...15]
Telegram diagnostics signals / Tel diag signals
Reserved
First cyclic receive telegram sensor 1
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
11826
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the signals contained in the selected telegram (p7830).
Value:
0:
1:
102:
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
10500:
10501:
10502:
10503:
10504:
10505:
10516:
10517:
10518:
10519:
10520:
10521:
10523:
10526:
10532:
10533:
10534:
10535:
10536:
10537:
10538:
10539:
10542:
10543:
10544:
10545:
1-648
UNUSED
UNKNOWN
SAPAR_ID_DSA_ALARM
SAPAR_ALARMBITS_FLOAT_0
ENC_ID_TIME_PRETRIGGER
ENC_ID_TIME_SEND_TELEG_1
ENC_ID_TIME_CYCLE_FINISHED
ENC_ID_TIME_DELTA_FUNMAN
ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_CALCTIMES
ENC_ID_SYNO_PERIOD
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_C
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_D
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_A_SAFETY
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_B_SAFETY
ENC_ID_ADC_TEMP_1
ENC_ID_ADC_TRACK_R
ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_X
ENC_ID_TRACK_AB_Y
ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_X
ENC_ID_OFFSET_CORR_AB_Y
ENC_ID_AB_ABS_VALUE
ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_X
ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_Y
ENC_ID_TRACK_CD_ABS
ENC_ID_AB_RAND_X
ENC_ID_AB_RAND_Y
ENC_ID_AB_RAND_ABS_VALUE
ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_ABS_ARRAY

Parameter
List of parameters
10546:
10547:
10564:
10565:
10566:
10580:
10590:
10591:
10592:
10593:
10596:
10597:
10598:
10599:
10600:
10612:
10613:
10628:
10629:
10644:
10645:
10660:
10661:
10662:
10663:
10664:
10665:
10667:
10676:
10677:
10678:
10692:
10693:
10724:
10725:
10740:
10741:
10742:
10743:
10756:
10757:
10772:
10788:
10789:
10790:
11825:
11826:
Index:
ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_0
ENC_ID_PROC_OFFSET_4
ENC_SELFTEMP_ACT
ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_TOP
ENC_ID_MOTOR_TEMP_1
ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_1
ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_A
ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_B
ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_X
ENC_ID_ANA_CHAN_Y
ENC_ID_AB_ANGLE
ENC_ID_CD_ANGLE
ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE_HI
ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU
ENC_ID_PHI_COMMU
ENC_ID_DIFF_CD_INC
ENC_ID_RM_POS_PHI_COMMU_RFG
ENC_ID_MECH_ANGLE
ENC_ID_MECH_RM_POS
ENC_ID_INIT_VECTOR
FEAT_INIT_VEKTOR
ENC_ID_SENSOR_STATE
ENC_ID_BASIC_SYSTEM
ENC_ID_REFMARK_STATUS
ENC_ID_DSA_STATUS1_SENSOR
ENC_ID_DSA_RMSTAT_HANDSHAKE
ENC_ID_DSA_CONTROL1_SENSOR
ENC_ID_SAFETY
ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_SAW_VALUE
ENC_ID_COUNTCORR_ABS_VALUE
ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH_CORR
ENC_ID_RESISTANCE_CALIB_INSTANT
ENC_ID_SERPROT_POS
ENC_ID_ACT_FUNMAN_FUNCTION
ENC_ID_SAFETY_COUNTER_CRC
ENC_ID_POS_ABSOLUTE
ENC_ID_POS_REFMARK
ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH
ENC_ID_SAFETY_PULSE_COUNTER
ENC_ID_DSA_ACTUAL_SPEED
ENC_ID_SPEED_DEV_ABS
ENC_ID_DSA_POS_XIST1
ENC_ID_AB_CROSS_CORR
ENC_ID_AB_GAIN_Y_CORR
ENC_ID_AB_PEAK_CORR
ENC_ID_RES_TRANSITION_RATIO
ENC_ID_RES_PHASE_SHIFT
[0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

1-649
Parameter
List of parameters
r7832[0...15]
Telegram diagnostics numerical format / tel diag format
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1
Max
14
Factory setting
-
Indicates the original numerical format of the signals contained in the telegram.
The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831.
Value:
-1:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
Index:
[0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
1-650
Unknown
Boolean
Signed 1 byte
Signed 2 byte
Signed 4 byte
Signed 8 byte
Unsigned 1 byte
Unsigned 2 byte
Unsigned 4 byte
Unsigned 8 byte
Float 4 byte
Double 8 byte
mm dd yy HH MM SS MS DOW
ASCII string
SIMUMERIK frame type
SIMUMERIK axis type

Parameter
List of parameters
r7833[0...15]
Telegram diagnostics unsigned / Tel diag unsigned
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Parameter to display a DSA signal in the unsigned-integer format.

Index:
[0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
r7834[0...15]
Telegram diagnostics signed / Tel diag signed
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Parameter to display a DSA signal in the signed-integer format.

Index:
[0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =

1-651
Parameter
List of parameters
r7835[0...15]
Telegram diagnostics real / Tel diag real
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Parameter to display a DSA signal in the float format.

Index:
[0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
r7836[0...15]
Telegram diagnostics unit / Tel diag unit
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-1
Max
147
Factory setting
-
Parameter to display the units of a DSA signal.

Value:
-1:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
18:
19:
20:
21:
1-652
Unknown
None
Millimeter or degrees
Millimeter
Degrees
mm/min or RPM
Millimeter / min
Revolutions / min
m/sec^2 or V/sec^2
m/sec^2
V/sec^2
m/sec^3 or V/sec^3
m/sec^3
V/sec^3
Sec
16.667 / sec
mm/revolution
ACX_UNIT_COMPENSATION_CORR
Newton
Kilogram
Kilogram meter ^2
Percent

Parameter
List of parameters
22:
23:
24:
25:
26:
28:
29:
30:
31:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
38:
39:
40:
42:
43:
44:
45:
46:
47:
48:
49:
53:
54:
55:
59:
61:
62:
63:
64:
65:
66:
67:
68:
69:
80:
81:
82:
83:
84:
85:
90:
91:
92:
93:
94:
95:
96:
97:
98:
99:
100:
101:
102:
103:
104:
105:
106:
107:
108:
109:
Hertz
Volt peak-to-peak
Amps peak-to-peak
Degrees Celsius
Degrees
Millimeter or degrees
Meters / minute
Meters / second
Ohm
Millihenry
Newton meter
Newton meter / Amps
Volt / Amp
Newton meter second / rad
31.25 microseconds
Microseconds
Milliseconds
Kilowatt
Micro amps peak-to-peak
Volt seconds
Microvolt seconds
Micro Newton meter
Amps / Volt seconds
Per mille
Hertz / second
Micrometer or millidegrees
Micrometer
Millidegrees
Nanometer
Newton/Amps
Volt seconds / meter
Newton seconds / meter
Micronewton
Liters / minute
Bar
Cubic centimeters
Millimeters / Volt minute
Newton/Volt
Millivolts peak-to-peak
Volt rms
Millivolts rms
Amps rms
Micro amps rms
Micrometers / revolution
Tenths of a second
Hundredths of a second
10 microseconds
Pulses
256 pulses
Tenth of a pulse
Revolutions
100 revolutions / minute
10 revolutions / minute
0.1 revolutions / minute
Thousandth revolution / minute
Pulses / second
100 pulses / second
10 revolutions / (minute * second)
10000 pulses/second^2
0.1 Hertz
0.01 Hertz
0.1 / seconds
Factor 0.1
Factor 0.01

1-653
Parameter
List of parameters
110:
111:
112:
113:
114:
115:
116:
117:
118:
119:
120:
121:
122:
123:
124:
125:
126:
127:
128:
129:
130:
131:
132:
133:
135:
136:
137:
138:
139:
140:
141:
142:
143:
144:
145:
146:
147:
Index:
Factor 0.001
Factor 0.0001
0.1 Volt peak-to-peak
0.1 Volt peak-to-peak
0.1 amps peak-to-peak
Watt
100 Watt
10 Watt
0.01 percent
1 / second ^3
0.01 percent/millisecond
Pulses / revolution
Microfarads
Milliohm
0.01 Newton meter
Kilogram millimeter ^2
Rad / (seconds newton meter)
Henry
Kelvin
Hours
Kilohertz
Milliamperes peak-to-peak
Millifarads
Meter
Kilowatt hours
Percent
Amps / Volt
Volt
Millivolts
Microvolts
Amps
Milliamperes
Micro amps
Milliamperes rms
Millimeter
Nanometer
Joules
[0] =
[1] =
[2] =
[3] =
[4] =
[5] =
[6] =
[7] =
[8] =
[9] =
[10] =
[11] =
[12] =
[13] =
[14] =
[15] =
1-654

Parameter
List of parameters
r7843[0...20]
Memory card serial number / Mem_card ser.no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual serial number of the memory card.
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
Example: displaying the serial number for a memory card:
The individual characters of the serial number are displayed in the ASCII code in the indices.
r7843[0] = 49 dec --> ASCII characters = "1" --> serial number, character 1
r7843[6] = 69 dec --> ASCII characters = "E" --> serial number, character 7
r7843[7] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 8
...
r7843[19] = 0 dec --> ASCII characters = " " --> serial number, character 20
r7843[20] = 0 dec
Serial number = 111923E
r7844[0...1]
Memory card/device memory firmware version / Mem_crd/dev_mem FW
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the version of the firmware stored on the memory card/device memory.
Note:
Example:
r7850[0...23]
Drive object operational/not operational / DO ready for oper
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-32786
Max
32767
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays whether, for an activated drive object, all activated topology components are available or not (or whether
these can be addressed).
0: Drive object not ready for operation
1: Drive object ready for operation

1-655
Parameter
List of parameters
p7852
Number of indices for r7853 / Qty indices r7853
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
200
Factory setting
1
Description:
Displays the number of indices for r7853[0...n].

This corresponds to the number of DRIVE-CLiQ components that are in the target topology.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7853
Note:
The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following
power-up.
r7853[0...n]
Component available/not available / Comp present
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF hex
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the component and whether this component is currently present.

High byte: Component number
Low byte: 0/1 (not available/available)
Dependency:
Refer to: p7852
Note:
The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following
power-up.
p7857
Sub-boot mode / Sub-boot mode
ENCODER, HUB,
TB30, TM31,
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the mode for the sub-boot.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
For p7857 = 0 (manual sub-boot) the following applies:
Sub-boot manual
Sub-boot automatic
The parameter should be set to 1 to start the sub-boot.
1-656

Parameter
List of parameters
p7859[0...199]
Component number global / Comp_nr global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-32786
Max
32767
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the global and unique component number in a drive system with several Control Units.
Each index of the parameter corresponds to a possible local component number on the corresponding Control Unit.
The indices are allocated to the global component numbers as follows:
p7859[0]: Not used
p7859[1]: Sets the global component number for the local component number 1
...
Notice:
This parameter is preferably set via suitable commissioning software (e.g. UpdateAgent, STARTER, SCOUT).
Changing the parameter via the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) or BOP (Basic Operator Panel) can destroy a
valid unique setting.
Note:
r7867
Status/configuration changes global / Changes global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays status and configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit.
When changing the status or the configuration of the Control Unit or a drive object, the value of this parameter is
incremented.
Dependency:
Refer to: r7868, r7869, r7870
r7868[0...24]
Configuration changes drive object reference / Config_chng DO ref
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Reference to the drive objects whose configuration has changed.

Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is increased.
Index 1...n:
The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its configuration.
Example:
r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read.
--> the configuration of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed.

1-657
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Sum of the following indices

[1] = Object number in p0101[0]
Dependency:
Refer to: p0101, r7867, r7871
r7869[0...24]
Status changes drive object reference / Status_chng DO ref
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Reference to the drive objects whose status has changed.

Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is increased.
Index 1...n:
The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its status.
Example:
r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read.
--> the status of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed.
Index:

1-658

Parameter
List of parameters

Dependency:
Refer to: p0101, r7867, r7872
r7870[0...7]
Configuration changes global / Config_chng global
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit.
Index:

[1] = r7871[0] of a drive object
[2] = p0101 or r0102
[3] = PROFIBUS configuration (p0978)
[4] = DRIVE-CLiQ actual topology (r9900 or r9901)
[5] = DRIVE-CLiQ target topology (r9902 or r9903)
[6] = DRIVE-CLiQ ports (p0109)
[7] = OA applications
Dependency:
Note:
Index 0:
When changing one of the following indices, then the value in this index is incremented.
Index 1:
Drive object configuration. When changing r7871[0] on a drive object, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object, configuration unit. When changing either p0101 or r0102, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
PROFIBUS configuration unit. When changing p0978, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
DRIVE-CLiQ actual topology. When changing either r9900 or r9901, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 5:
DRIVE-CLiQ target topology. When changing either p9902 or p9903, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
DRIVE-CLiQ ports. When changing p0109, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 7:
OA applications. When changing OA applications, the value in this index is incremented.

1-659
Parameter
List of parameters
r7871[0...10]
Configuration changes drive object / Config_chng DO
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the configuration changes on the drive object.
Index:

[1] = p0107 or p0108
[2] = Drive object name (p0199)
[3] = Structure-relevant parameters (e.g. p0180)
[4] = BICO interconnections
[5] = Activate/deactivate drive object
[6] = Data backup required
[7] = Reserved
[8] = Reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000)
[9] = Parameter count through Drive Control Chart (DCC)
[10] = p0107 or p0108
Dependency:
Note:
Index 0:
Index 1:
Drive object commissioning: When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object name. When changing p0199, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object structure. When changing a parameter that is relevant for the structure (e.g. number of data sets), the
value in this index is incremented.
Index 4:
Drive object BICO interconnections. When changing r3977, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 5:
Drive object activity: When changing p0105, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 6:
Drive object, data save.
0: There are no parameter changes to save.
1: There are parameter changes to save.
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the
Index 9:
Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the
Index 10:
Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
1-660

Parameter
List of parameters
r7871[0...15]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:

[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[7] = Activate/deactivate component
[10] = p0107 or p0108
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Reserved
[14] = Reserved
[15] = Encoder type (p0400)
Dependency:
Note:
Index 0:
Index 1:
Drive object configuration. When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Index 3:
Index 4:
Index 6:
Index 8:
Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304 ...), the
Index 9:
Index 15:
Encoder configuration. When changing p0400, the value in this index is incremented.

1-661
Parameter
List of parameters
r7871[0...10]
HUB, TB30, TM31
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:

[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[7] = Reserved
[10] = p0107 or p0108
Dependency:
Note:
Index 0:
Index 1:
Drive object commissioning: When changing p0010, p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Index 3:
Index 4:
Index 5:
Index 6:
Index 8:
Index 9:
Index 10:
1-662

Parameter
List of parameters
r7871[0...10]
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:

[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[5] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[10] = p0107 or p0108
Dependency:
Note:
Index 0:
Index 1:
Index 2:
Index 3:
Index 4:
Index 6:
Index 8:
Index 9:
Index 10:

1-663
Parameter
List of parameters
r7871[0...15]

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Index:

[1] = p0010, p0107 or p0108
[7] = Activate/deactivate component
[10] = p0107 or p0108
[11] = Reserved
[12] = Reserved
[13] = Reserved
[14] = Reserved
[15] = SERVO or VECTOR (e.g. p0300)
Dependency:
Note:
Index 0:
Index 1:
Index 2:
Index 3:
Index 4:
Index 5:
Index 6:
Index 7:
Drive object component activity: When changing either p0125 or p0145, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 8:
Index 9:
Index 10:
Index 15:
SERVO/VECTOR configuration. When changing p0300, p0301 or p0400, the value in this index is incremented.
1-664

Parameter
List of parameters
r7872[0...3]
Status changes drive object / Status_chng DO
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status changes on the drive object.

Index 0:
Index 1:
Drive object faults. When changing r0944, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 2:
Drive object alarms. When changing r2121, the value in this index is incremented.
Index 3:
Drive object safety messages. When changing r9744, the value in this index is incremented.
Index:

[1] = Faults (r0944)
[2] = Alarms (r2121)
[3] = Safety messages (r9744)
Dependency:
Refer to: r7869
p7900[0...23]
Drive objects priority / DO priority
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the priority for processing the existing drive objects in the system.
The parameter enables a free sequence to be set for processing the drive objects. For this purpose all the drive
object numbers existing in the system have to be written in the desired sequence into the corresponding indices of
the parameter. After re-booting this sequence will be effective without a plausibility check.
With the factory setting the following priorities regarding processing are applicable:
- The drive objects are pre-sorted according to their type as follows: CONTROL UNIT, INFEED, SERVO, VECTOR,
TM, HUB, CU-LINK
- If they are of the same type, they are sorted in ascending order according to their drive object number, i.e. the
lower the number, the higher the priority for processing.
Index:
[0] = Drive object number Control Unit


1-665
Parameter
List of parameters

Notice:
This parameter may only be used by qualified service personnel.
Note:
If the same drive object numbers are used and if the existing drive object numbers in the system are entered incompletely, the content of this parameter is ignored entirely. The behavior as with factory setting will then become effective.
r7901[0...43]
Sampling times / t_sample
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the sampling times currently present on the drive unit.

For r7901[x] = 0, the following applies: The time slice is not active.
r7903
Hardware sampling times still cannot be assigned / HW t_samp free
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of hardware sampling times that can still be assigned.
These free sampling times can be used by OA applications such as DCC (Drive Control Chart) or FBLOCKS (free
function blocks).
Note:
p8500[0...7]
BI: Data transfer 0 bitwise / Transfer 0 bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for bitwise data transfer.

These signals are available in BO: r8510.0 ... 7 for further interconnection.
Index:
[0] = Send signal to BO: r8510.0

Dependency:
Refer to: r8510
1-666

Parameter
List of parameters
p8501[0...21]
BI: Data transfer 1 bitwise / Transfer 1 bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for bitwise data transfer.

These signals are available in BO: r8511.0 ... 15 for further interconnection.
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: r8511
p8502
CI: Data transfer 0 wordwise / Transfer 0 word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the wordwise data transfer (process signal).
Dependency:
Refer to: r8512
p8503
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
This signal value is available in CO: r8512 for further interconnection.
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r8513

1-667
Parameter
List of parameters
p8504
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r8514
p8505
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r8515
r8510.0...7
BO: Data transfer 0 receive bitwise / Trans 0 recv bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the signals of the bitwise received data.

These signals were interconnected and transferred via BI: p8500[0...7].
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Dependency:
Refer to: p8500
r8511.0...21
BO: Data transfer 1 receive bitwise / Trans 1 recv bit
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Signal name
Receive signal from BI: p8500
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Displays the signals of the bitwise received data.

These signals were interconnected and transferred via BI: p8501[0...15].
1-668

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dependency:
Refer to: p8501
r8512
CO: Data transfer 0 receive wordwise / Trans 0 recv word
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Signal name
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Displays the signals of the wordwise received data (process signal).

This signal value is interconnected and transferred via CI: p8502.
Dependency:
Refer to: p8502
r8513
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:

Dependency:
Refer to: p8503

1-669
Parameter
List of parameters
r8514
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:

Dependency:
Refer to: p8504
r8515
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: PERCENT
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:

Dependency:
Refer to: p8505
p8550
AOP LOCAL/REMOTE / AOP LOCAL/REMOTE
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
1001 bin
Description:
Is used to save the actual configuration of the Advanced Operator Panels (AOP).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
14
15
1-670
Signal name
LOCAL save
Start in LOCAL
Change in oper.
OFF acts like OFF1
OFF acts like OFF2
OFF acts like OFF3
Reserved
CW/CCW active
Jog active
Save speed setpoint
Inhibit operation
Inhibit parameterization
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r8570[0...39]
Macro drive object / Macro DO
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, TM31, Data type: Unsigned32
VECTOR_G130/G15
P-Group: 0
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0015
Note:
For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running.
r8571[0...39]

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the ACX file saved in the appropriate directory in the non-volatile memory.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0700
Note:
r8572[0...39]

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1000
Note:
r8573[0...39]

Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p1500
Note:

1-671
Parameter
List of parameters
r8585
Actual macro running / Actual macro
CU_G_G130,
Can be changed: CU_G_G150, TM31, Data type: Unsigned16
VECTOR_G130/G15
P-Group: 0
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Indicates which macro is presently being run in the drive object.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573
r8600
CAN device type / Device type
CU_G_G130 (CAN), Can be changed: CU_G_G150 (CAN) Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays all of the devices connected to the CAN bus after run-up.
r8600
= 00000000 hex: No drive recognized.
= FFFF0192 hex: Several drives - drive 1 is an Active Line Module, servo drive or vector drive
= FFFF0191 hex: Several drives - 1st drive is a Terminal Module
= 02010192 hex: 1 Vector drive
= 00020192 hex: 1 Servo drive
= 01000192 hex: 1 Active Line Module
= 00080191 hex: 1 Terminal Module
Note:
Corresponds to the CANopen object 1000 hex.

For each detected drive, the device type is displayed in object 67FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
r8601
CAN error register / Error register
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the error register for CANopen.

Bit 0: Generic error
0 signal: No error present.
1 signal: Generic error present.
Bit 1 ... 3: Not supported (always a 0 signal)
Bit 4: Communications error
0 signal: There is no message in the range 8700 ... 8799.
1 signal: There is at least one message (fault or alarm) in the range 8700 ... 8799.
Bit 5 ... 6: Not supported (always a 0 signal)
Bit 7:; Fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799
0 signal: There is no fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799.
1 signal: There is at least one fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799.
Note:
1-672

Parameter
List of parameters
p8602
CAN SYNC object / SYNC object
CU_G_G130 (CAN), Can be changed: C1(1), T

CU_G_G150 (CAN) Data type: Unsigned32
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0080 hex
Sets the SYNC object parameter for the following CANopen objects:
- 1005 hex: COB-ID
Note:
SINAMICS operates as SYNC load.

COB-ID: CAN object identification
p8603
CAN COB ID Emergency Message / COB ID EMCY Msg
CU_G_G130 (CAN), Can be changed: C1(1), T

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Sets the COB ID of the emergency message (error telegram). It corresponds to the CANopen objects:
- 1014 hex: COB-ID
Note:
If, when downloading, the preset value 0 is downloaded, then the CANopen preset value 80 hex + Node-ID is automatically set.
Online, the value 0 is rejected as, according to the CANopen Standard, COB ID 0 is not permitted here.
The changeover of the node ID using the hardware switch at the CU or per software has no effect on the COB-ID
EMCY. The saved value remains effective.
p8604[0...1]
CAN node guarding / Node guarding
CU_G_G130 (CAN), Can be changed: T

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Sets the node guarding parameter for the following CANopen objects:
- 100C hex: Guard Time
- 100D hex: Life Time Factor
The life time is derived by multiplying guard time by the life time factor.
Index:
[0] = Time interval [ms] for new node guarding telegram

[1] = Factor for failure of the node guarding telegram
Dependency:
Only adjustable if heartbeat time = 0 (heartbeat is disabled).

Refer to: p8606
Note:
For p8604[0] = 0 and/or p8604[1] = 0, the node guarding protocol is not used.
Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used.

1-673
Parameter
List of parameters
p8606
CAN Producer Heartbeat Time / Prod Heartb Time

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65535 [ms]
Factory setting
0 [ms]
Sets the time [ms] to cyclically send heartbeat telegrams.

The smallest cycle time is 100 ms.
When a 0 is written, then heartbeat telegrams are not sent.
Dependency:
Only adjustable if guard time = 0 (node guarding disabled).

Refer to: p8604
Note:

Either node guarding or heartbeat can be used.
r8607[0...3]
CAN Identity Object / Identity object
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
General device information display.
Index:
[0] = Vendor ID
[1] = Product code
[2] = Revision number
[3] = Serial number
Note:

Re index 3:
The SINAMICS serial number comprises 60 bits. Of these bits, the following are displayed in this index:
Bits 0 ... 19: Consecutive number
Bits 20 ... 23: Production ID
- 0 hex: Development
- 1 hex: P1 unique number
- 2 hex: P2 unique number
- 3 hex: WA unique number
- 9 hex: Pattern
- F hex: All others
Bits 24 ... 27: Month of manufacture (0 means January, B means December)
Bits 28 ... 31: Year of manufacture (0 means 2002)
1-674

Parameter
List of parameters
p8608
CAN Clear Bus Off Error / Clear bus off err
CU_G_G130 (CAN), Can be changed: U, T

CU_G_G150 (CAN) Data type: Integer16
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
For a bus off error, the CAN bus is restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the error has been removed.
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
This parameter is automatically reset to 0 after start.
p8609[0...1]
CAN Error Behaviour / Error behavior
Inactive
Start CAN controller

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the behavior of the CAN node referred to the communications error or equipment fault.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Index:
[0] = Behavior for communication errors

[1] = Behavior for device faults
Note:
r8610[0...1]
CAN First Server SDO / First server SDO
Pre-operational
No change
Stopped
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the identifier (client/server and server/client) of the SDO channel.
Index:
[0] = Displays the COB ID from client to server

[1] = Displays the COB ID from server to client
Note:

SDO: Service Data Object

1-675
Parameter
List of parameters
p8611[0...82]
CAN Pre-defined Error Field / Pre_def err field

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF 1000 hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Displays the Pre-defined Error Field of the CAN node.

It includes the number of all errors that have occurred, the number of errors that have occurred for each drive and
the errors according to their history.
The first 16 bits represent the CANopen error code and the second 16 bits the SINAMICS error code.
Index 1 has the same structure - however, the drive object ID is in the second 16 bits instead of the SINAMICS error
code.
CANopen error code:
0000 hex: No error present
8110 hex: Alarm A08751 present
8120 hex: Alarm A08752 present
8130 hex: Alarm A08700(F) with alarm value = 2 present
1000 hex: Generic error 1 present (there is at least one fault outside the range 8700 ... 8799)
1001 hex: Generic error 2 present (there is at least one alarm in the range 8700 ... 8799 with the exception of
A08751, A08752, A08700)
All drive objects are acknowledged by writing the value 0 to the index 0. As soon as a fault has been acknowledged
or an alarm cleared, then it is also cleared from the fault list.
Index:
[0] = Number of all faults in the drive unit

[1] = Most recent drive number / fault number
[2] = Number of faults drive 1
[3] = Fault 1/ drive 1
1-676

Parameter
List of parameters

[74] = Number of faults Control Unit
[75] = Fault 1/Control Unit
Note:

1-677
Parameter
List of parameters
p8620
CAN Node-ID / Node ID

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
126
Factory setting
126
Display or setting of the CANopen Node ID.

The Node ID can be set as follows:
--> p8620 can then only be read and displays the selected Node ID.
--> CANopen Node ID and PROFIBUS address are identical.
2) Using p8620
--> only if all of the DIP switches - from S1 to S7 - are either set to ON or OFF.
--> the Node ID is set as standard to 126.
--> A change only becomes effective after save and POWER ON.
Note:
Every node ID change only becomes effective after a POWER ON.

It is only possible to independently set CANopen node ID and the PROFIBUS address using p0918 and p8620 (prerequisite: For DIP switches, all of the switches from S1 to S7 are either set to ON or OFF).
p8622
CAN baud rate / Baud rate

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
7
Factory setting
6
Setting the baud rate for the CAN bus.

The appropriate bit timings are selected that are defined in p8623 in the associated sub-index.
Example:
Baud rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6].
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
Dependency:
Refer to: p8623
Note:
1-678
1 Mbit/s
800 kbit/s
500 kbit/s
250 kbit/s
125 kbit/s
50 kbit/s
20 kbit/s
10 kbit/s

Parameter
List of parameters
p8623[0...7]
CAN Bit Timing selection / Bit timing select

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
000F 7FFF hex
Factory setting
[0] 1405 hex
[1] 1605 hex
[2] 1C05 hex
[3] 1C0B hex
[4] 1C17 hex
[5] 1C3B hex
[6] 0002 1C15 hex
[7] 0004 1C2B hex
Description:
Sets the bit timing for the C_CAN controller to the associated and selected baud rate (p8622).
Bits are distributed to the following parameters of the C_CAN controller in p8623[0...7]:
Bit 0 ... 5: BRP (Baud Rate Prescaler)
Bit 6 ... 7: SJW (Synchronization Jump Width)
Bit 8 ... 11: TSEG1 (Time Segment 1, before the sampling point)
Bit 12 ... 14: TSEG2 (Time Segment 2, after the sampling point)
Bit 15: Reserved
Bit 16 ... 19: BRPE (Baud Rate Prescaler Extension)
Bit 20 ... 31: Reserved
Example:
Baud rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6] --> 0001 2FB6
Recommend.:
Use the factory setting when setting the bit timing.
Index:
[0] = 1 Mbit/s
[1] = 800 kbit/s
[2] = 500 kbit/s
[3] = 250 kbit/s
[4] = 125 kbit/s
[5] = 50 kbit/s
[6] = 20 kbit/s
[7] = 10 kbit/s
Dependency:
Refer to: p8622
Note:

1-679
Parameter
List of parameters
p8630[0...2]
CAN virtual objects / Virtual objects

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Sets the drive object selection (index 0), the sub-index area (index 1) and the parameter area (index 2) when using
virtual objects.
This means that it is possible to access all SINAMICS parameters via CAN.
Index 0 (drive object selection):
0: Not possible to access virtual CANopen objects
1: Device
2 ... 65535: Drive 1 ... 8
Index 1 (sub-index area):
0: 0 ... 255
1: 256 ... 511
2: 512 ... 767
3: 768 ... 1023
Index 2 (parameter area):
0: 1 ... 9999
1: 10000 ... 19999
2: 20000 ... 29999
3: 30000 ... 39999
Index:
[0] = Drive object selection

[1] = Sub-index range
[2] = Parameter range
p8641
CAN Abort Connection Option Code / Abort con opt code

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
3
Description:
Sets the drive behavior if a CAN communication error occurs.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Dependency:
Refer to: F08700
r8680[0...36]
CAN Diagnosis Hardware / Diagnostics HW
No response
OFF1
OFF2
OFF3
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the register of the CAN controller C_CAN:

Register, Message Interface Register and Message Handler Register - referred to the CAN protocol.
1-680

Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Control register

[1] = Status register
[2] = Error counter
[3] = Bit timing register
[4] = Interrupt register
[5] = Test register
[6] = Baud rate prescaler extension register
[7] = Interface 1 command request register
[8] = Interface 1 command mask register
[9] = Interface 1 mask 1 register
[11] = Interface 1 arbitration 1 register
[13] = Interface 1 message control register
[14] = Interface 1 data A1 register
[16] = Interface 1 data B1 register
[18] = Interface 2 command request register
[19] = Interface 2 command mask register
[24] = Interface 2 message control register
[29] = Transmission request 1 register
[30] = Transmission request 2 register
[31] = New data 1 register
[32] = New data 2 register
[33] = Interrupt pending 1 register
[34] = Interrupt pending 2 register
[35] = Message valid 1 register
[36] = Message valid 2 register
Note:
A description of the individual registers of the C_CAN controller can be taken from "C_CAN User's Manual".
p8684
CAN NMT state after booting / NMT state boot

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
4
Max
127
Factory setting
127
Description:
Sets the CANopen NMT state that is effective after booting.
Value:
4:
5:
127:
Dependency:
Refer to: p8685
Note:
Booting in the NMT state pre-operational corresponds to the CANopen standard
Stopped
Operational
Pre-operational

1-681
Parameter
List of parameters
p8685
CAN NMT states / NMT states
CU_G_G130 (CAN), Can be changed: C1(1), U, T

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
129
Factory setting
127
Description:
Sets and displays the CANopen NMT state.
Value:
0:
4:
5:
127:
128:
129:
Note:
The value 0 (initialization) is only displayed and cannot be set.
p8700[0...1]
CAN Receive PDO 1 / Receive PDO 1
Initializing
Stopped
Operational
Pre-operational
Reset node
Reset Communication

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 1 (RPDO 1).
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[1] = PDO transmission type
Dependency:
A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel.
Note:
Corresponds to the CANopen object 1400 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set.
PDO: Process Data Object
p8701[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:
1-682

Parameter
List of parameters
p8702[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:
p8703[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:
p8704[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:

1-683
Parameter
List of parameters
p8705[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:
p8706[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:
p8707[0...1]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
8000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] 8000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

Dependency:
Note:
1-684

Parameter
List of parameters
p8710[0...3]
CAN Receive Mapping fr RPDO 1 / Mapping RPDO 1

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Receive Process Data Object 1 (RPDO 1).
Index:
[0] = Mapped object 1

Note:
Dummy mapping not supported.
The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid.
p8711[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8712[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:

1-685
Parameter
List of parameters
p8713[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8714[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8715[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
1-686

Parameter
List of parameters
p8716[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8717[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9204
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8720[0...4]
CAN Transmit PDO 1 / Transmit PDO 1

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Sets the communication parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 1 (TPDO 1).
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[2] = Inhibit time (in 100 s)
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Event timer (in ms)
Dependency:

1-687
Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
For inhibit time and even timer, the following apply:

A value that is not a multiple integer of CANopen (4 ms) is rounded-off.
Note:
Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set.
p8721[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

Note:
p8722[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

1-688

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
p8723[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

Note:
p8724[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

Note:

1-689
Parameter
List of parameters
p8725[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

Note:
p8726[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

Note:
1-690

Parameter
List of parameters
p8727[0...4]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
C000 06DF hex
Factory setting
[0] C000 06DF hex
[1] 00FE hex
[2] 0000 hex
[3] 0000 hex
[4] 0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = PDO COB-ID

[3] = Reserved
Dependency:
Notice:

Note:
p8730[0...3]
CAN Transmit Mapping for TPDO 1 / Mapping TPDO 1

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the mapping parameters for CANopen Transmit Process Data Object 1 (TPDO 1).
Index:

Note:
Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A00 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
p8731[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:


1-691
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
p8732[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8733[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8734[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
1-692

Parameter
List of parameters
p8735[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8736[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:
p8737[0...3]

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 9208
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:

Note:

1-693
Parameter
List of parameters
p8740[0...23]
CAN channel distribution / Chann assign.

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
8
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
[8] 0
[9] 0
[10] 0
[11] 0
[12] 0
[13] 0
[14] 0
[15] 0
[16] 0
[17] 0
[18] 0
[19] 0
[20] 0
[21] 0
[22] 0
[23] 0
Description:
Sets the number of channels for receive PDOs and Transmit PDOs.
To define the number of channels of a drive, there are 3 indices (3 * n indices, n = 8).
Index 0: Number of channels for receive PDOs (1st drive)
Index 1: Number of channels for transmit PDOs (1st drive)
Index 2: Reserved
Correspondingly, indices 3 to 5 are valid for the 2nd drive, etc.
Index:
[0] = Number of channels for receive PDOs (drive 1)

[1] = Number of channels for transmit PDOs (drive 1)
[2] = Reserved
[5] = Reserved
[8] = Reserved
[11] = Reserved
[14] = Reserved
[17] = Reserved
1-694

Parameter
List of parameters

[20] = Reserved
[23] = Reserved
Dependency:
Refer to: p8741
Note:
Channel assignment not yet in effect. To acknowledge set p8741 = 1.
p8741
CAN PDO configuration acknowledgement / PDO config ackn

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Acknowledges the channel distribution selection made (p8740) and the setting of the predefined connection sets
(p8744).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
r8742
CAN number of free RPDO channels / Qty free RPDO
Inactive
Acknowledge configuration
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the RPDO channels that are still available.
Dependency:
Refer to: p8741
Note:
The display is updated after acknowledging the configuration (p8741 = 1).

The number only includes the RPDO channels in p8740 for which an axis is present in the topology!
RPDO: Receive Process Data Object
r8743[0...7]
CAN assignment drive/drive ID / Drive ID
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the drive ID associated with each drive.
Index:
[0] = Drive ID for 1st drive

[1] = Drive ID for 2nd drive
[2] = Drive ID for 3rd drive
[3] = Drive ID for 4th drive

1-695
Parameter
List of parameters
p8744
CAN PDO mapping configuration / PDO Mapping conf.
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C2, T

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -

9208, 9210
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2
Factory setting
2
Description:
Selector switch for the PDO mapping.
Value:
1:
2:
r8750[0...15]
CAN mapped 16-bit receive objects / RPDO 16 mapped
Sets the mapping for download or in the online mode after acknowledging with p8741.
Predefined Connection Set
Free PDO Mapping
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (CAN)

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the mapped 16-bit receive CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Example:
If, e.g. the control word is mapped in an RPDO, then r8750 indicates the position of the control word in the process
data buffer.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
1-696

Parameter
List of parameters
r8751[0...15]
CAN mapped 16-bit transmit objects / TPDO 16 mapped

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays mapped 16-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency:
Refer to: r8750
r8760[0...14]
CAN mapped 32-bit receive objects / RPDO 32 mapped

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the mapped 32-bit receive CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16

1-697
Parameter
List of parameters
r8761[0...14]
CAN mapped 32-bit transmit objects / TPDO 32 mapped

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays mapped 32-bit transmit CANopen objects in the process data buffer.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
r8784
CO: CAN status word / Status word

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 8010
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the CANopen status word.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
14
15
1-698
Signal name
Ready for sw on
Ready
Operation enabled
Fault present
No coasting active
No Quick Stop active
Switching on inhibited active
Alarm present
Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8785)
Control request
Target reached
Velocity equal to zero
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High
High
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Low
No
No
No
No
Low
Low
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re bit 10:
When the ramp-function generator is activated, the interconnection from CI: p2151 = r1119 can be changed, so that
to evaluate bit 10, the setpoint can be retrieved (taken) from in front of the ramp-function generator.
Re bit 10, 12:
When braking, the two bits must indicate the same state. This is the reason that the following parameters must be
set the same:
p2161 (speed threshold value 3, for r2199.0) = p2163 (speed threshold value 4, for r2197.7)
p2150 (hysteresis speed 3, for r2199.0) = p2164 (hysteresis speed 4, for r2197.7)
p8785
BI: CAN status word bit 8 / Status word bit 8

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Binector input for CANopen status word bit 8.
Dependency:
Refer to: r8784
p8786

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r8784
p8787

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: r8784
p8790
CAN control word - auto interconnection / STW interc auto

0 (CAN)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the automatic BICO interconnection of the CANopen control word.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: r2050, r2090, r2091, r2092, r2093, r8750, r8795, r8850, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
No interconn
Interconnection

1-699
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The following BICO interconnections are automatically established if the CANopen control word is mapped at one
of the locations x = 0 ... 3 in the receive process data buffer.
For SINAMICS S120 with CBC10, the PZD interface IF2 is used:
BI: p0840.0 = r889x.0
BI: p0844.0 = r889x.1
BI: p0848.0 = r889x.2
BI: p0852.0 = r889x.3
BI: p2103.0 = r889x.7
For SINAMICS S110, the PZD interface IF1 is used:
BI: p0840.0 = r209x.0
BI: p0844.0 = r209x.1
BI: p0848.0 = r209x.2
BI: p0852.0 = r209x.3
BI: p2103.0 = r209x.7
The write access is rejected if a CANopen control word is not mapped at one of these locations.
This also causes the project download of the commissioning software to be canceled.
r8795
CAN control word / Control word

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Access to the CANopen control word using SDO transfer.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
07
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: p8790
Note:
r8796
CAN Target Velocity / Target velocity
Signal name
ON/OFF1
Do not activate coast down
Do not activate a Quick Stop
Operation enable
Acknowledge fault
Freely interconn
Freely interconn
Freely interconn
Freely interconn
Freely interconn
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
High
High
High
High
High

Description:
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
Low
Low
Low
Low
Low
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
-
Access to the CANopen object target velocity using the SDO transfer.
The value is displayed in increments/second as standard.
Note:
Corresponds to the CANopen object 60FF hex + 800 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7).
The displayed value is calculated as follows:
r8796 = n_set [RPM] / 60 s * p0408 * 2^p0418 * p8798[1] / p8798[0]
1-700

Parameter
List of parameters
r8797
CAN Target Torque / Target torque

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Access to the CANopen object target torque using SDO transfer.

The value is displayed as per mille (1/1000) as standard.
Note:
The displayed value is calculated as follows:
r8797 [per mille] = M_set [Nm] / p0333 [Nm] * 1000
p8798[0...1]
CAN speed conversion factor / n_conv_factor

0 (CAN)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
1
The factor converts the required velocity units into the internal velocity units (V/s).
With the factor setting, for CANopen, the velocity units are increments/second.
The parameter corresponds to the CANopen object 6094 hex.
The internal velocity is calculated as follows:
n_set_internal = object 6094.1 / object 6094.2 * 1/(p0408 * 2^p0418) * n_set_bus
Index:
[0] = Counter
[1] = Denominator
p8835
CBE20 firmware selection / CBE20 FW sel
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
99
Factory setting
1
Description:
Selects the firmware version for the PROFINET COMM BOARD CBE20.
Value:
1:
2:
3:
99:
Note:
PROFINET V2.2
PN gate
SINAMICS Link
Customer-specific from the OEM directory

1-701
Parameter
List of parameters
p8836
SINAMICS Link address / SINAMICS Link add
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
64
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the node address for the SINAMICS Link on the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
p8836 = 0: SINAMICS Link deactivated
p8836 = 1 ... 64: SINAMICS Link node address
Dependency:
Refer to: p8835
Note:
SINAMICS Link requires that the appropriate CBE20 firmware version is selected (p8835 = 3).
p8839[0...1]
PZD interface hardware assignment / PZD IF HW assign
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
99
Description:
Assignment of the hardware for cyclic communications via PZD interface 1 and interface 2.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
99:
Index:
[0] = IF1
[1] = IF2
Note:
For value = 99 (automatic) the following applies:
Inactive
Communication interface integrated in the Control Unit
Option module
Automatic
- if neither a COMM BOARD nor CAN is inserted, then PROFIBUS communicates via IF1.
- if a CBE20 is inserted, then PROFINET communicates via IF1. PROFIBUS PZD are deactivated.
- CAN always communicates via IF2.
For a value not equal to 99 (automatic) the following applies:
- both indices must be set to a number not equal to 99 (automatic).
A new setting only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or download.
p8840
COMM BOARD monitoring time / CB t_monit
CU_G_G130 (COMM
BOARD, PROFINET), CU_G_G150
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 [ms]
Max
65535000 [ms]
Factory setting
20 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via COMM BOARD.
Dependency:
Refer to: F08501
Note:
Value = 0: Monitoring is deactivated.
1-702

Parameter
List of parameters
p8841[0...39]
COMM BOARD send configuration data / CB s config_dat
CU_G_G130 (COMM
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
p8842
COMM BOARD start configuration / CB config start
CU_G_G130 (COMM
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
p8848
IF2 PZD sampling time / IF2 PZD t_sample
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [ms]
Max
16.00 [ms]
Factory setting
4.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the cyclic interface 2 (IF2).
r8849[0...139]
COMM BOARD receive configuration data / CB r config_dat
CU_G_G130 (COMM
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
r8850[0...3]
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Dependency:
Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893.

1-703
Parameter
List of parameters
r8850[0...15]
CO: IF2 PZD receive word / IF2 PZD recv word

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency:
Refer to: r8860, r8890, r8891, r8892, r8893
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
PZD1 to PZD4 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8893.
p8851[0...11]
ENCODER
CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Dependency:
Refer to: p8861
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
1-704

Parameter
List of parameters
p8851[0...15]
CI: IF2 PZD send word / IF2 PZD send word

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency:
Refer to: p8861
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8853[0...11]
IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9210
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-705
Parameter
List of parameters
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Dependency:
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8853[0...15]
IF2 diagnostics PZD send / IF2 diag PZD send

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9210
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
1-706
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r8854
COMM BOARD state / CB state
CU_G_G130 (COMM
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
-
Description:
Status display for COMM BOARD.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
255:
r8858[0...39]
COMM BOARD read diagnostics channel / CB diag_chan read
CU_G_G130 (COMM
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
r8859[0...7]
CU_G_G130 (COMM
(COMM BOARD,
PROFINET)
r8860[0...2]
ENCODER
No initialization
Fatal fault
Initialization
Send configuration
Receive configuration
Non-cyclic communication
Cyclic communications but no setpoints (stop/no clock cycle)
Cyclic communication
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
COMM BOARD identification Data / CB Ident_data

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
CO: IF2 PZD receive double word / IF2 PZD recv DW

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
Dependency:
Refer to: r8850
Note:
IF2: Interface 2

1-707
Parameter
List of parameters
r8860[0...14]
CO: IF2 PZD receive double word / IF2 PZD recv DW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output for interconnecting the PZD (setpoints) received via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency:
Refer to: r8850
Notice:
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
p8861[0...10]
CI: IF2 PZD send double word / IF2 PZD send DW
ENCODER
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9210
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Dependency:
Refer to: p8851
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
1-708

Parameter
List of parameters
p8861[0...14]
CI: IF2 PZD send double word / IF2 PZD send DW

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9210
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: 4000H
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the double word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Dependency:
Refer to: p8851
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8863[0...10]
IF2 diagnostics PZD send double word / IF2 diag send DW
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2487
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD sent via interface 2 (actual values) with double word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-709
Parameter
List of parameters
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Notice:
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8863[0...14]
IF2 diagnostics PZD send double word / IF2 diag send DW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2487
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the PZD sent via interface 2 (actual values) with double word format.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1 + 2
[1] = PZD 2 + 3
[2] = PZD 3 + 4
[3] = PZD 4 + 5
[4] = PZD 5 + 6
[5] = PZD 6 + 7
[6] = PZD 7 + 8
[7] = PZD 8 + 9
[8] = PZD 9 + 10
[9] = PZD 10 + 11
[10] = PZD 11 + 12
[11] = PZD 12 + 13
[12] = PZD 13 + 14
[13] = PZD 14 + 15
[14] = PZD 15 + 16
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
1-710
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Bit 16
Bit 17
Bit 18
Bit 19
Bit 20
Bit 21
Bit 22
Bit 23
Bit 24
Bit 25
Bit 26
Bit 27
Bit 28
Bit 29
Bit 30
Bit 31
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Notice:
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
p8870[0...15]
SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD / Recv link word
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET),
ENCODER (PROFINET), TB30 (PROFINET), TM31
(PROFINET),
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (PROFINET)
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
0
Description:
Assignment of a PZD to a telegram word from a SINAMICS Link receive telegram.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency:
Refer to: p8872
Note:
Value range:
PZD p2050[index] is assigned by means of p8870[index], p8872[index].
0: Not used
1 ... 16: Telegram word
A pair of values p8870[index], p8872[index] may only be used once in single a device.

1-711
Parameter
List of parameters
p8871[0...15]
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET),
(PROFINET),
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (PROFINET)
Description:
SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD / Send link word

Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
0
Assigns a PZD to a telegram word in the SINAMICS Link send telegram.

p8871[index] assigns PZD p2051[index].
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency:

Refer to: A50002
Note:
Value range:
0: Not used
1 ... 16: Send telegram word
A specific telegram word send may only be used once within a single device.
1-712

Parameter
List of parameters
p8872[0...15]
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET),
(PROFINET),
VECTOR_G130/G15
0 (PROFINET)
SINAMICS Link address receive PZD / Link addr recv

Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
64
Factory setting
0
Description:
Selects the address of the SINAMICS Link sender from which the process data (PZD) is received.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Dependency:
Refer to: p8870
Note:
Value range:
0: Not used
1 ... 64: Address
r8874[0...3]
ENCODER
IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
255: Not assigned

1-713
Parameter
List of parameters
r8874[0...15]
IF2 diagnostics bus address PZD receive / IF2 diag addr recv

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
255: Not assigned
r8875[0...3]
IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv
ENCODER
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
255: Not assigned
1-714

Parameter
List of parameters
r8875[0...15]
IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD receive / IF diag offs recv

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
255: Not assigned
r8876[0...11]
ENCODER
IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
255: Not assigned

1-715
Parameter
List of parameters
r8876[0...15]
IF2 diagnostics telegram offset PZD send / IF2 diag offs send

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram.
Index:
[0] = PZD 1
[1] = PZD 2
[2] = PZD 3
[3] = PZD 4
[4] = PZD 5
[5] = PZD 6
[6] = PZD 7
[7] = PZD 8
[8] = PZD 9
[9] = PZD 10
[10] = PZD 11
[11] = PZD 12
[12] = PZD 13
[13] = PZD 14
[14] = PZD 15
[15] = PZD 16
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
Value range:
255: Not assigned
p8880[0...15]
BI: IF2 binector-connector converter status word 1 / Bin/con ZSW1
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32 / Binary
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2489
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
1-716

Parameter
List of parameters
p8881[0...15]
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2489
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
p8882[0...15]
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2489
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:

1-717
Parameter
List of parameters
p8883[0...15]
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2489
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
p8884[0...15]
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2489
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0

Index:
[0] = Bit 0
[1] = Bit 1
[2] = Bit 2
[3] = Bit 3
[4] = Bit 4
[5] = Bit 5
[6] = Bit 6
[7] = Bit 7
[8] = Bit 8
[9] = Bit 9
[10] = Bit 10
[11] = Bit 11
[12] = Bit 12
[13] = Bit 13
[14] = Bit 14
[15] = Bit 15
Dependency:
1-718

Parameter
List of parameters
p8888[0...4]
IF2 invert binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW inv
ENCODER,
0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2489
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to invert the individual binector inputs of the binector connector converter.
Index:
[0] = Status word 1

[1] = Status word 2
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: p8880, p8881, p8882, p8883, r8889
r8889[0...4]
CO: IF2 send binector-connector converter status word / Bin/con ZSW send
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
ENCODER,
0
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Connector output to interconnect the status words to a PZD send word.
Index:
[0] = Status word 1

[1] = Status word 2
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-719
Parameter
List of parameters
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
On
On
On
On
On
On
Dependency:
Refer to: p8851, p8880, p8881, p8882, p8883
Note:
r8889 together with p8880 to p8883 forms four binector-connector converters.
r8890.0...15
BO: IF2 PZD1 receive bit-serial / IF2 PZD1 recv bitw
ENCODER,
0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9204, 9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received via interface 2.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: r8850
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8891.0...15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
ENCODER,
0
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9204, 9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received via interface 2.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
1-720
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Dependency:
Refer to: r8850
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8892.0...15
ENCODER,
0
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD3 received via interface 2.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Dependency:
Refer to: r8850
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8893.0...15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
ENCODER,
0
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -

9206
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received via interface 2.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On

0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
1-721
Parameter
List of parameters
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Dependency:
Refer to: r8850
Note:
IF2: Interface 2
r8894.0...15
BO: IF2 connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Binector output for bit-serial onward interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Dependency:
Refer to: p8899
r8895.0...15
BO: IF2 connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp
ENCODER,
0
Description:
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of a PZD word received from the fieldbus master.
Bit field:
1-722
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
1 signal
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
0 signal
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Dependency:
Refer to: p8899
p8898[0...1]
IF2 invert connector-binector converter binector output / Con/bin outp inv
ENCODER,
0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Setting to invert the individual binector outputs of the connector-binector converter.

Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Signal name
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
Bit 8
Bit 9
Bit 10
Bit 11
Bit 12
Bit 13
Bit 14
Bit 15
Dependency:
Refer to: r8894, r8895, p8899
p8899[0...1]
CI: IF2 connector-binector converter signal source / Con/bin S_src
ENCODER,
VECTOR_G130/G15 Data type: Unsigned32 / Integer16
0
Description:
1 signal
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
Inverted
0 signal
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
Not inverted
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source for the connector-binector converter.

A PZD receive word can be selected as signal source. The signals are available to be serially passed-on (interconnection).
Dependency:
Note:
From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted.
p8899[0...1] together with r8894.0...15 and r8895.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters:

1-723
Parameter
List of parameters
p8900[0...239]
IE Name of Station / IE Name Stat
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Sets the station name for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active station name is displayed in r8910.
Dependency:
Note:
The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated with p8905 = 1.
IE: Industrial Ethernet
p8901[0...3]
IE IP Address of Station / IE IP of Stat
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the IP address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active IP address is displayed in r8911.
Dependency:
Note:

p8902[0...3]
IE Default Gateway of Station / IE Def Gateway
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the default gateway for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active default gateway is displayed in r8912.
Dependency:
Note:

p8903[0...3]
IE Subnet Mask of Station / IE Subnet Mask
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
The active subnet mask is displayed in r8913.
1-724

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Note:

p8905
IE Interface configuration / IE IF config
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Setting to control the configuration of the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
p8905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of an operation.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
No function
Activate configuration
Activate and save configuration
Delete configuration
Dependency:
Refer to: p8900, p8901, p8902, p8903

Refer to: A08561
Note:
Re p8905 = 1:
The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated.
Re p8905 = 2:
The interface configuration (p8900 and following) is activated and saved to non-volatile memory.
Re p8905 = 3:
The interface configuration is reset to the factory setting at all points.
The factory settings for the interface configuration are loaded on activation (p8905 = 1) or at the next POWER ON.
r8910[0...239]
IE Name of Station active / IE Name Stat act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
This parameter defines the station name of the onboard Ethernet interface.
r8911[0...3]
IE IP Address of Station active / IE IP of Stat act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the active IP address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.

1-725
Parameter
List of parameters
r8912[0...3]
IE Default Gateway of Station active / IE Def Gateway act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the active default gateway for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
r8913[0...3]
IE Subnet Mask of Station active / IE Subnet Mask act
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the active subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
r8915[0...5]
IE MAC Address of Station / IE MAC of Station
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the MAC address for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit.
p8940[0...239]
CBE20 Name of Station / CBE20 Name Stat
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Sets the station name for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note:
The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945 = 1 (becomes effective at the next POWER
ON).
1-726

Parameter
List of parameters
p8941[0...3]
CBE20 IP Address of Station / CBE20 IP of Stat
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the IP address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note:
ON).
p8942[0...3]
CBE20 Default Gateway of Station / CBE20 Def Gateway
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the default gateway for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note:
ON).
p8943[0...3]
CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station / CBE20 Subnet Mask
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the subnet mask for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note:
ON).
p8944
CBE20 DHCP Mode / CBE20 DHCP Mode
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the DHCP mode for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
Note:
ON).

1-727
Parameter
List of parameters
p8945
CBE20 interface configuration / CBE20 IF config
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the configuration control for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
p8945 is automatically set to 0 at the end of an operation.
Value:
0:
2:
3:
No function
Save and activate configuration
Delete configuration
Note:
Re p8945 = 2:
The CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following) is saved and activated at the next POWER ON.
Re p8945 = 3:
The factory settings for the CBE20 configuration are loaded at the next POWER ON.
p9300
SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI Mtn clock MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Safety Integrated
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
500.00 [s]
Max
25000.00 [s]
Factory setting
12000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring.
Dependency:

Refer to: F01652
Notice:
This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive.
Note:
The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9311 or of the DP clock
cycle.
p9301
SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module) / SI Mtn enable MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Bit field:
Bit
00
03
16
Dependency:
Refer to: p9501
Signal name
SOS/SLS enable
Actual value synchronization enable
Enable NX Hys Fil
1 signal
Enable
Enable
Enable
0 signal
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
FP
-
Refer to: F01682, F01683

Notice:
Note:

SLS: Safely-Limited Speed
1-728

Parameter
List of parameters
p9302
SI Motion axis type (Motor Module) / SI Mtn AxisType MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle).
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p9502
Notice:
Note:
For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only
updated after a project upload.
Linear axis
Rot axis/spindle
p9306
SI Motion function specification (Motor Module) / SI Mtn fct_spc MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the function specification for Safety Integrated.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: C30711
p9307
SI Motion function configuration MM / SI Mtn config MM
Safety with encoder

Safety without encoder

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Function configuration for Safe Motion Monitoring
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Signal name
Extended alarm acknowledgment
Setpoint speed limit for stop F
1 signal
Yes
No

0 signal
No
Yes
FP
-
1-729
Parameter
List of parameters
p9311
SI Motion actual value sensing clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act clk MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0000 [s]
Max
25000.0000 [s]
Factory setting
0.0000 [s]
Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring.
The slower clock cycle time reduces the maximum permissible velocity - however, it ensures a lower load of the
Control Unit for the safe actual value sensing.
The maximum permissible velocity, which when exceeded can mean that errors occur during safe actual value
sensing, is displayed in r9730.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed without an encoder: - The actual value sensing clock
cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p115).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0115, p9300, p9511

Refer to: F01652
Notice:
Note:
The parameter is only active for drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9801.2 = 1).
The monitoring clock cycle from p9300 must be an integer multiple of this parameter.
In the case of motion monitoring functions with encoder, the clock cycle time for actual value sensing must be an
integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle and at least 4 times slower than the current controller clock
cycle. A factor of at least 8 is recommended.
p9315
SI Motion coarse position value configuration (Motor Module) / SI Mtn s config MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
Dependency:
p9316
SI Motion encoder configuration, safety functions (Motor Module) /

SI Mtn enc_cfg MM
16
Signal name
Incrementer
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder

0
Description:
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Sets the configuration for the encoder and position actual value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module must be parameterized in
this parameter.
1-730

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Signal name
Encoder rotating/linear
Position actual value, sign change
Dependency:
Refer to: p0404, p0410, p9516
p9317
SI Motion linear scale grid division (Motor Module) / SI Mtn grid MM

0
Description:
1 signal
Linear
Yes
0 signal
Rotating:
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
FP
-
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [nm]
Max
250000000.00 [nm]
Factory setting
10000.00 [nm]
Sets the grid division for a linear encoder.

this parameter.
Dependency:
p9318
SI Motion encoder pulses per revolution (Motor Module) / SI Mtn p/rev MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100000
Factory setting
2048
Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution for rotary encoders.
this parameter.
Dependency:
p9319
SI Motion fine resolution G1_XIST1 (Motor Module) / SI Mtn G1_XIST1 MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
18
Factory setting
11
Sets the fine resolution for G1_XIST1 in bits.

this parameter.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0418

Refer to: F01670, F01671
Note:
For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9301 = 0), the following applies: When booting, p9319 is automatically set the same as p0418.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9301 > 0), the following applies: p9319 is checked for agreement with
p0418.
G1_XIST1: Encoder 1 position actual value 1 (PROFIdrive)

1-731
Parameter
List of parameters
p9320
SI Motion spindle pitch (Motor Module) / SI Mtn sp_pitch MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1000 [mm]
Max
8388.0000 [mm]
Factory setting
10.0000 [mm]
Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder.
this parameter.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9520
Notice:
The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from three places before
the decimal point).
p9321[0...7]
SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load denom (Motor Module) / SI Mtn denom MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2147000000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions) and the load.
Index:
[0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency:
Refer to: p9322
p9322[0...7]
SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator (Motor Module) /

SI Mtn numer MM
It is not possible to change over the gearbox stages. Gearbox stage 0 is always active.

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2147000000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions)
and the load.
Index:
[0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency:
Refer to: p9321
1-732

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
In the case of encoderless monitoring functions (p9506), the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator
of the gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4*2)
p9323
SI Motion red. coarse position value valid bits (Motor Module) / Valid bits MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
9
Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse postion value.
this parameter.
Dependency:
p9324
SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value fine resolution bits (MM) / SI Mtn fine bit MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-16
Max
16
Factory setting
-2
Sets the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
this parameter.
Dependency:
p9325
SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value relevant bits (MM) / Relevant bits MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
16
this parameter.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0414, r0472, p9525

1-733
Parameter
List of parameters
p9326
SI Motion encoder assignment (Motor Module) / SI Mtn encoder MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of the encoder that the Motor Module uses for safe motion monitoring functions.
Dependency:
For the safe motion monitoring functions, the redundant safety position actual value sensing must be activated in
the appropriate encoder data set (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0187, p0188, p0189, p0430, p9526
Notice:
Note:
For p9326 = 1 the following applies: Motor Module uses an encoder for closed-loop speed control, it involves a 1encoder system.
p9328[0...11]
SI Motion Sensor Module Node Identifier (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SM Ident MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00FF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the node identifier of the Sensor Module that is used by the Motor Module for the motion monitoring functions.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9881
Notice:
p9329
SI Motion Gx_XIST1 Safe most significant bit (MM) / Gx_XIST1 MSB MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
14
this parameter.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0415, r0475, p9529
Note:
p9330
SI Motion standstill tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SOS Tol MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mm]
Max
100.000 [mm]
Factory setting
1.000 [mm]
Description:
Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9530

Refer to: C01707
Notice:
Note:
SOS: Safe Operational Stop
1-734

Parameter
List of parameters
p9330
SI Motion standstill tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SOS Tol MM

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 []
Max
100.000 []
Factory setting
1.000 []
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p9530

Refer to: C01707
Notice:
Note:
p9331[0...3]
SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS lim MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
1000000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
2000.00 [mm/min]
Description:
Sets the limit values for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index:
[0] = Limit value SLS1

[3] = Limit value SLP4
Dependency:

Refer to: C01714
Notice:
Note:
p9331[0...3]
SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS lim MM

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
1000000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
2000.00 [rpm]
Description:
Index:

Dependency:

Refer to: C01714
Notice:
Note:

1-735
Parameter
List of parameters
p9342
SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act tol MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [mm]
Max
360.0000 [mm]
Factory setting
0.1000 [mm]
Sets the tolerance for the cross-check of the actual position between the two monitoring channels.
For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary and 1
mm linear).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9542

Refer to: C01711
Notice:
p9342
SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act tol MM

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 []
Max
360.0000 []
Factory setting
0.1000 []
mm linear).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9542

Refer to: C01711
Notice:
p9345
SI Motion SSM filter time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM filt MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
100000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note:
The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
The parameter is included in the data cross-check of the two monitoring channels.
SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring)
1-736

Parameter
List of parameters
p9346
SI Motion SSM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM v_limMM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
1000000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
20.00 [mm/min]
Sets the velocity limit for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 applies
also for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9546
Caution:
The function "Safe Acceleration Monitor" (SBR) is switched out after the selected threshold value is undershot.
Notice:
Note:
SBR: Safe Acceleration Monitor

p9346
SI Motion SSM velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM v_limMM

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
1000000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
20.00 [rpm]
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 applies
also for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9546
Caution:
Notice:
Note:

p9347
SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [mm/min]
Max
500.0000 [mm/min]
Factory setting
10.0000 [mm/min]
Description:
Sets the velocity hysteresis for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill (n < nx).
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).

1-737
Parameter
List of parameters
p9347
SI Motion SSM velocity hysteresis (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SSM Hyst MM

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [rpm]
Max
500.0000 [rpm]
Factory setting
10.0000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
p9348
SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR Tol MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
120000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
300.00 [mm/min]
Description:
Sets the velocity tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor".
Dependency:
Refer to: p9548

Refer to: C01706
Notice:
Note:
p9348
SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR Tol MM

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
120000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
300.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p9548

Refer to: C01706
Notice:
Note:
p9349
SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn slip MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
6000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
6.00 [mm/min]
Description:
Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in cross-check between the Control Unit and the
Motor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9301, p9342, p9549
1-738

Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
Note:
If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9301.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9342 is used as
tolerance in the data cross-check.
p9349
SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Motor Module) / SI Mtn slip MM

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
6000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
6.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in cross-check between the Control Unit and the
Motor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9301, p9342, p9549
Notice:
Note:
p9351
SI Motion SLS changeover delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS t MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
600000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
100000.00 [s]
Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover or for the changeover from SLS to SOS for the function "Safely-Limited
Speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage or to the safe operating stop (SOS),
within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS or SOS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9551
Notice:
Note:
SLS: Safely Limited Speed

p9352
SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t C->SOS MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
600000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
100000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP C to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9552
Notice:
Note:

1-739
Parameter
List of parameters
p9353
SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t D->SOS MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
600000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
100000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9553
Notice:
Note:
p9355
SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t F->B MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
600000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP F to STOP B.
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Notice:
p9356
SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL t_del MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
600000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
100000.00 [s]
Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B / SS1.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506/p9306 = 1), the parameter has no effect.
Dependency:

Refer to: C01701
Notice:
Note:
SS1: Safe Stop 1
p9357
SI Motion pulse suppression test time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL t MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
10000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
100000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the time after which the pulses must have been suppressed when initiating the test stop.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9557

Refer to: C01798
Notice:
1-740

Parameter
List of parameters
p9358
SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc t MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5000000.00 [s]
Max
100000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
40000000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9558
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.
Refer to: C01799
Notice:
p9360
SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown velocity (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL v_shutMM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
6000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min]
Sets the shutdown velocity for pulse suppression.

Below this velocity "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter must be > 0 (recommended value: 10).
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
SS1: Safe Stop 1
p9360
SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (Motor Module) / SI Mtn IL n_shutMM

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
6000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.

Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
Dependency:
Notice:
Note:
SS1: Safe Stop 1

1-741
Parameter
List of parameters
p9363[0...3]
SI Motion SLS stop response (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SLS Stop MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
14
Factory setting
2
Sets the stop response for the function "safely reduced speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
STOP A
STOP B
STOP C
STOP D
STOP E
STOP A with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
STOP B with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
STOP C with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
STOP D with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
STOP E with delayed pulse suppression when the bus fails
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9331, p9380, p9563
Notice:
Values 10 to 14 are being prepared and are presently ineffective.
Note:
SLS: Safely-Limited Speed / SG: Safely reduced speed
p9368
SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR v_limMM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
1000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min]
Sets the velocity limit for the "SBR" function.

SBR is deactivated once the set velocity limit has been undershot.
Notice:
Note:

For p9568 = p9368 = 0, the following applies:
The value in p9546/p9346 (SSM) is applied as the velocity limit for SBR.
p9368
SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Motor Module) / SI Mtn SBR v_limMM

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
1000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]

1-742

Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
Note:

p9370
SI Motion acceptance test mode (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc_mod MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00AC hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Setting to select and deselect the acceptance test mode.
Value:
0:
172:
Dependency:
[00 hex] Deselect the acceptance test mode

[AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Refer to: C01799
r9371
SI Motion acceptance test status (Motor Module) / SI Mtn acc_stat MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00AC hex
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value:
0:
12:
13:
15:
172:
Dependency:
[00 hex] Acc_mode inactive

[0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
[0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9370
[0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
[AC hex] Acc_mode active
Refer to: C01799
p9380
SI Motion pulse suppression delay bus failure (Motor Module) / SI Mtn t to IL MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
800000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time after which the pulses are safely suppressed after a bus failure.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9363
Notice:
The parameter is being prepared and is presently ineffective.

1-743
Parameter
List of parameters
p9381
SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ramp ref MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
600.0000 [mm/min]
Max
24000.0000 [mm/min]
Factory setting
1500.0000 [mm/min]
Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp.

The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time).
Dependency:
p9381
SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ramp ref MM

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
600.0000 [rpm]
Max
24000.0000 [rpm]
Factory setting
1500.0000 [rpm]

Dependency:
p9382
SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn rp t_del MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10000.00 [s]
Max
99000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
250000.00 [s]
Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.

Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
Dependency:
p9383
SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn rp t_mon MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
500.00 [ms]
Max
1000000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
10000.00 [ms]
Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.

Dependency:
1-744

Parameter
List of parameters
p9387
SI Motion act val sensing encoderless filter time (Motor Module) / SI Mtn EL filt MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
100000.00 [s]
Factory setting
25000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with encoderless actual value sensing.
Note:
This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9306/p9506 = 1).
p9388
Minimum current actual value sensing encoderless (Motor Module) /

SI Mtn I_min EL MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
100.00 [%]
Factory setting
10.00 [%]
Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing.

Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be increased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1042.
- The value must be decreased if C30711 has occurred with message value 1041.
Dependency:
Refer to: C30711
Note:
p9389
SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (Motor Module) / SI Mtn V tol MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks.

Increasing this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude during acceleration
procedures if they are not to affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be decreased if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive safety actual velocity.
Dependency:
Refer to: C30711
Note:

1-745
Parameter
List of parameters
r9390[0...3]
SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Motor Module) / SI Mtn Version MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module.
Index:
[0] = Safety Version (major release)

[1] = Safety Version (minor release)
[2] = Safety Version (baselevel or patch)
[3] = Safety Version (hotfix)
Dependency:
Refer to: r9590, r9770, r9870, r9890
Note:
Example:
r9390[0] = 2, r9390[1] = 60, r9390[2] = 1, r9390[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00
r9398[0...1]
SI Motion actual checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI Mtn act CRC MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring function (actual
checksum) on the Motor Module.
Index:
[0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring

[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference
Dependency:
Refer to: p9399
Note:
SI: Safety Integrated
p9399[0...1]
SI Motion reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI Mtn ref CRC MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (reference
checksum) on the Motor Module.
Index:

[1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference
Dependency:
Refer to: r9398
Note:
1-746

Parameter
List of parameters
r9406[0...19]
All objects
Description:
PS file parameter number parameter not transferred / PS parameter No.

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the parameters that were not able to be transferred when reading the parameter back-up files (PS files)
from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[0...x] > 0
--> Displays the parameter number whose value was not able to be completely transferred or for an indexed parameter, for at least 1 index, was not able to be transferred. The first index that is not transferred is displayed in r9407.
Dependency:
Note:
All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter.

r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted
r9407[x] parameter index, parameter not accepted
r9408[x] fault code, parameter not accepted
r9407[0...19]
All objects
Description:
PS file parameter index parameter not transferred / PS parameter index

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the first index of the parameters that could not be transferred when the parameter backup files (PS files)
were read from the non-volatile memory (e.g. memory card).
If, from an indexed parameter, at least one index was not able to be transferred, then the parameter number is displayed in r9406[n] and the first index that was not transferred is displayed in r9407[n].
r9406[0] = 0
--> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free.
r9406[n] > 0
--> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred.
Dependency:
Note:

r9408[0...19]
PS file fault code parameter not transferred / PS fault code
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Only for internal Siemens service purposes.
Dependency:

1-747
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

r9409
Number of parameters to be saved / Qty par to save
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of modified parameters and those that have still not be saved for this drive object.
Dependency:
Note:
The modified parameters that still need to be saved are internally listed in r9410 ... r9419.
r9450[0...29]
Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation /

Ref_chg par n poss
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameters for which the re-calculation was unsuccessful after an internal system reference value
change.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07086
r9451[0...29]
Units changeover adapted parameters / Unit_chngov par
ENCODER,
0
P-Group: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the parameters whose parameter would have to be changed during a units changeover.
Dependency:
Refer to: F07088
r9481
Number of BICO interconnections / BICO count
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of BICO interconnections (signal sinks).

The selected BICO interconnections should be entered into r9482[0...59] and r9483[0...59].
Dependency:
1-748

Parameter
List of parameters
r9482[0...59]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
BICO interconnections BI/CI parameters / BICO BI/CI par

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the signal sinks (binector/connector inputs, BI/CI parameters).

The number of BICO interconnections is displayed in r9481.
Dependency:
Note:
The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows:

r9842[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal source, BICO coded)
...
r9483[0...59]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
BICO interconnections BO/CO parameters / BICO BO/CO par

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the signal sources (binector/connector outputs, BO/CO parameters).

The number of BICO interconnections is displayed in r9481.
Dependency:
Note:
The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows:

...
p9484
BICO interconnections search signal source / BICO S_src srch
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source (BO/CO parameter, BICO coded) to search in the signal sinks.
The question is answered:
How often is a connection made to a signal source in the drive object and from which index are these interconnections saved (r9482[0...59], r9483[0...59])?
Dependency:
Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, r9485, r9486

1-749
Parameter
List of parameters
r9485
BICO interconnections signal source search count / BICO S_src srchQty
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of BICO interconnections to the signal sink being searched for.
The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482[0...59] and r9483[0...59] and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first
index (r9486).
Dependency:
Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, p9484, r9486
r9486
BICO interconnections signal source search first index / BICO S_src srchIdx
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31, TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the first index of the signal source being searched for.
The signal source to be searched is set in p9484 (BICO-coded).
The search result is contained in r9482[0...59] and r9483[0...59] and is specified by the count (r9485) and the first
index (r9486).
Dependency:
Refer to: r9481, r9482, r9483, p9484, r9485
r9490
Number of BICO interconnections to other drives / Qty BICO to drive
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of signal sources from this drive to other drives/drive objects (Binector Output/Connector Output, BO/CO).
Dependency:
Refer to: r9491, r9492, p9493
r9491[0...9]
BI/CI of BICO interconnections to other drives / BI/CI to drive
All objects
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the signal receiver list (Binector Input/Connector Input, BI/CI) for the first interconnections between this
drive and other drives/drive objects.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9490, r9492, p9493
1-750

Parameter
List of parameters
Notice:
A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a signal from a drive that no longer existed.
Note:
All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection.

r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the
interconnection.
r9492[0...9]
All objects
BO/CO of BICO interconnections to other drives / BO/CO to drive

Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the signal source list (Binector Output/Connector Output, BO/CO) for the first interconnections between
this drive and other drives/drive objects.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9490, r9491, p9493
Notice:
A drive cannot be deleted if this list is not empty! Otherwise, another drive would continue to attempt to read a signal from a drive that no longer existed.
Note:

interconnection.
p9493[0...9]
Reset BICO interconnections to other drives / Reset BICO to drv
All objects
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
15
Factory setting
15
Description:
Setting to reset the BICO interconnections to other drives. Each interconnection can be individually reset.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
15:
Dependency:
Refer to: r9490, r9491, r9492
Note:
Set connection to 0
Set connection to 1 (100 %)
Set connection to factory setting
Finished
interconnection.
p9495
BICO behavior to deactivated drive objects / Behav to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Description:
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Setting for the behavior for BICO interconnections to other non-operational/deactivated drive objects.
If this drive object has BICO interconnections to other non-operational or deactivated drive objects as drain, then
using these parameters, all of the associated BI/CI parameters of this drive object can be marked and then set to
the factory setting or only marked.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Do not do anything
Mark connection
Mark connection and then set to the factory setting

1-751
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p9496, p9497, p9498, p9499

Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note:
The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498[0...29] (drain).

The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499[0...29] (source).
However, r9498 and r9499 are only then filled if p9495 is not equal to 0, otherwise they remain empty.
p9496
Restore BICO to the drive objects that are now activated / Rest BICO act obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Description:
If this drive object has BICO interconnections to other drive objects that are either not operational or have been
deactivated, then using this parameter, all of the BI/CI parameters involved with this drive object can be re-established.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
Dependency:
Refer to: p9495, p9497, p9498, p9499
Do not do anything
Restore the connections from the list
Delete the connection from the list
Refer to: A01318, A01507

Note:
The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498[0...29] (drain).

The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499[0...29] (source).
After setting p9496 to 1 or 2, r9498 and r9499 are reset, r9497 is set to 0 and p9496 itself is set to 0.
p9497
BICO number of interconnections to deactivated drive objects / Qty to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Displays the number of signal sinks of this drive object to other drives/drive objects that are no longer operational/deactivated (Binector Input/Connector Input, BI/CI).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9498, p9499

Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note:
The parameter is only used for display purposes and cannot be written into.
p9498[0...29]
BICO BI/CI parameters to deactivated drive objects / BI/CI to deact obj
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
List of the BI/CI parameters that represent a connection to non-operational/deactivated drive objects.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9497, p9499

Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note:
All indices from r9498 to r9499 designate the same BICO interconnection.
This signal sink is in r9498[x] and the associated signal source in r9499[x].
1-752

Parameter
List of parameters
p9499[0...29]
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150,
ENCODER, TB30,
TM31,
VECTOR_G130/G15
0
BICO BO/CO parameters to deactivated drive objects / BO/CO to deact obj

Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Commands
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
List of the BO/CO parameters that represent a connection to non-operational/deactivated drive objects.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9495, p9496, p9497, p9498

Refer to: A01318, A01507
Note:
All indices from r9498 to r9499 designate the same BICO interconnection.
This signal sink is in r9498[x] and the associated signal source in r9499[x].
p9500
SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI Mtn clock CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.50 [ms]
Max
25.00 [ms]
Factory setting
12.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring.
Dependency:

Refer to: F01652
Note:

The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 (dbSI) or of the DP
clock cycle (ncSI).
p9501
SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit) / SI Mtn enable CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the enable signals for the safe motion monitoring.
Bit field:
Bit
00
03
16
Dependency:
Refer to: F01682, F01683
Note:
Signal name
SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) enable
Actual value synchronization enable
Enable NX Hys Fil
1 signal
Enable
Enable
Enable
0 signal
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
FP
-

SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop

1-753
Parameter
List of parameters
p9502
SI Motion axis type (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ax type CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the axis type (linear axis or rotary axis/spindle).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only
updated after a project upload.
Linear axis
Rot axis/spindle
p9503
SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA enab

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Setting to enable the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Dependency:
Refer to: p9501
Signal name
SCA1 (SN1) enable
SCA2 (SN2) enable
SCA3 (SN3) enable
SCA4 (SN4) enab
SCA5 (SN5) enab
SCA6 (SN6) enable
SCA7 (SN7) enable
SCA8 (SN8) enable
SCA9 (SN9) enable
SCA10 (SN10) enable
SCA11 (SN11) enable
SCA12 (SN12) enable
SCA13 (SN13) enable
SCA14 (SN14) enable
SCA15 (SN15) enable
SCA16 (SN16) enable
ESCA17 (SN17) enable
SCA18 (SN18) enable
SCA19 (SN19) enable
SCA20 (SN20) enable
SCA21 (SN21) enable
SCA22 (SN22) enable
SCA23 (SN23) enable
SCA24 (SN24) enable
SCA25 (SN25) enable
SCA26 (SN26) enable
SCA27 (SN27) enable
SCA28 (SN28) enable
SCA29 (SN29) enable
SCA30 (SN30) enable
1 signal
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
0 signal
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
Inhibit
FP
-
Refer to: F01686
1-754

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The "Safe Cam" function (SCA) can either be enabled using p9501 or p9503.
SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam
p9505
SI Motion SCA (SN) modulo value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA modulo

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0 []
Max
737280 []
Factory setting
0 []
Description:
Sets the modulo range of the safe position actual value in degrees for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA) for rotary
axes.
Dependency:
Note:
p9506
SI Motion function specification (Control Unit) / SI Mtn fct_spc CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the function specification for Safety Integrated.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
p9507
SI Motion function specification (Control Unit) / SI Mtn config
Safety with encoder

Safety without encoder

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Function configuration for Safe Motion Monitoring
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Signal name
Extended alarm acknowledgment
Setpoint speed limit for stop F
1 signal
Yes
No

0 signal
No
Yes
FP
-
1-755
Parameter
List of parameters
p9510
SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master / SI Mtn sync master

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Setting for the clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master.

The parameter must be set if the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive are enabled
and there is a clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master.
This is, for example, the case when using the following controls:
- clock-cycle synchronous control for the motion control (e.g. SIMOTION).
- clock-cycle synchronous PROFIsafe master (e.g. SIMATIC S7-400F).
Value:
0:
1:
No clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master

Clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master present
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711, A01796
Notice:
As of firmware V2.6, the parameter has no effect.
p9511
SI Motion actual value sensing cycle clock (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act clk CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0000 [ms]
Max
25.0000 [ms]
Factory setting
0.0000 [ms]
Sets the clock cycle time of the actual value sensing for safe motion monitoring.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed with an encoder.
- A slower clock cycle time reduces the maximum permissible velocity - however, it ensures a lower load of the Control Unit for safe actual value sensing.
- The maximum permissible velocity which, when exceeded, can mean that errors occur during safe actual value
sensing, is displayed in r9730.
- The isochronous PROFIBUS clock cycle is used as a clock cycle time for actual value sensing with a setting of 0
ms; the setting is 1 ms if isochronous operation is not being used.
Setting criteria if the motion monitoring functions are executed without an encoder:
- The actual value sensing clock cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p115).
Dependency:
Refer to: p0115

Refer to: F01652
Note:
The parameter is only active for drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9601.2 = 1).
The monitoring clock cycle from p9500 must be an integer multiple of this parameter.
In the case of motion monitoring functions with encoder, the clock cycle time for actual value sensing must be an
integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle and at least 4 times slower than the current controller clock
cycle. A factor of at least 8 is recommended.
The clock cycle time of the actual value sensing should not be set to more than 8 ms.
1-756

Parameter
List of parameters
p9515
SI Motion encoder coarse position value config (Control Unit) / SI Mtn s config CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the encoder configuration for the redundant coarse position value.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
16
Signal name
Incrementer
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
-
Yes
No
Dependency:
Note:
For safe functions that are not enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies:
- p9515 is automatically set the same as p0474 when the system boots.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies:
- p9515 is checked to see that it matches p0474.
p9516
SI Motion encoder configuration safety functions (Control Unit) / SI Mtn enc_cfg CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the configuration for the motor encoder and position actual value.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
Dependency:
Signal name
Motor encoder, rotating/linear
Position actual value, sign change
1 signal
Linear
Yes
0 signal
Rotating:
No
FP
-
Refer to: F01671

Note:
- p9516.0 is automatically set when booting as for p0410.0. When booting, p9516.1 is automatically set as for
p0404.1.
- p9516.1 is checked to identify whether it tallies with p0404.1.
p9517
SI Motion linear scale grid division (Control Unit) / SI Mtn grid CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [nm]
Max
250000000.00 [nm]
Factory setting
10000.00 [nm]
Description:
Sets the grid division for a linear motor encoder.
Dependency:

Refer to: F01671

1-757
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting p9517 is automatically set the same as p0407.
For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9517 is checked whether it coincides with
p0407.
p9518
SI Motion encoder pulses per revolution (Control Unit) / SI Mtn puls/rev CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
100000
Factory setting
2048
Description:
Sets the number of encoder pulses per revolution for rotary motor encoders.
Dependency:

Refer to: F01671
Note:
p0408.
p9519
SI Motion fine resolution G1_XIST1 (Control Unit) / SI Mtn G1_XIST1 CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
18
Factory setting
11
Description:
Sets the fine resolution for G1_XIST1 in bits.
Dependency:
Refer to: p0418

Refer to: F01671
Note:
p0418.
G1_XIST1: Encoder 1 position actual value 1 (PROFIdrive)
p9520
SI Motion spindle pitch (Control Unit) / SI Mtn Sp_pitch CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.1000 [mm]
Max
8388.0000 [mm]
Factory setting
10.0000 [mm]
Description:
Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder.
Notice:
The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from three places before
the decimal point).
1-758

Parameter
List of parameters
p9521[0...7]
SI Motion gearbox enc (motor)/load denominator (Control Unit) / SI Mtn gear denom

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2147000000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the denominator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions) and the load.
Index:
[0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency:
Refer to: p9522
p9522[0...7]
SI Motion gearbox encoder (motor)/load numerator (Control Unit) / SI Mtn gear numer

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
2147000000
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the numerator for the gearbox between the encoder (or motor in the case of encoderless monitoring functions)
and the load.
Index:
[0] = Gearbox 1
[1] = Gearbox 2
[2] = Gearbox 3
[3] = Gearbox 4
[4] = Gearbox 5
[5] = Gearbox 6
[6] = Gearbox 7
[7] = Gearbox 8
Dependency:
Refer to: p9521
Note:
In the case of encoderless monitoring functions (p9506), the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator
of the gearbox ratio.
Example:
Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2
--> p9521 = 1, p9522 = 8 (4*2)

1-759
Parameter
List of parameters
p9523
SI Motion redundant coarse pos. value valid bits (Control Unit) / Valid bits CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
9
Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse position value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this
parameter.
Dependency:
Note:
- p9523 is automatically set the same as r0470 when the system boots.
- p9523 is checked to see that it matches r0470.
p9524
SI Motion Redundant coarse pos. value fine resolution bits (CU) / SI Mtn fine bit CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-16
Max
16
Factory setting
-2
Sets the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value.
The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this
parameter.
Dependency:
Note:
p9525
SI Motion Redundant coarse pos. value relevant bits (CU) / Relevant bits CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
16
Factory setting
16
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0414, r0472, p9325
Note:
1-760

Parameter
List of parameters
p9526
SI Motion encoder assignment second channel / SI Mtn enc chan 2

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of the encoder that the second channel (control, Motor Module) uses for safe motion monitoring
functions.
Dependency:
For the safe motion monitoring functions, the redundant safety position actual value sensing must be activated in
the appropriate encoder data set (p0430.19 = 1).
Refer to: p0187, p0188, p0189, p0430
Note:
For p9526 = 1, the encoder for the closed-loop speed control is used for the second channel of the motion monitoring functions (1-encoder system).
p9529
SI Motion Gx_XIST1 Safe most significant bit (CU) / Gx_XIST1 MSB CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
31
Factory setting
14
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: p0415, r0475, p9329
Note:
p9530
SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn standst_tol

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [mm]
Max
100.000 [mm]
Factory setting
1.000 [mm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01707
Note:

1-761
Parameter
List of parameters
p9530
SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn standst_tol

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 []
Max
100.000 []
Factory setting
1.000 []
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01707
Note:
p9531[0...3]
SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS lim CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
1000000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
2000.00 [mm/min]
Description:
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563

Refer to: C01714
Note:
p9531[0...3]
SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS lim CU

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
1000000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
2000.00 [rpm]
Description:
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563

Refer to: C01714
Note:
1-762

Parameter
List of parameters
p9532[0...15]
SI Motion SLS (SG) override factor (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS over

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [%]
Max
100.000 [%]
Factory setting
100.000 [%]
Description:
Sets the override factor for the limit value for SLS2 and SLS4 for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
Index:
[0] = SLS (SG) override factor 0

Dependency:
Note:
The actual override factor for SLS2 and SLS4 is selected using the safety-relevant inputs (SGE).
p9533
SI Motion SLS setpoint velocity limiting (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS set_lim

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.000 [%]
Max
100.000 [%]
Factory setting
80.000 [%]
This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit.
The active SLS limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in r9733:
r9733 = p9533 * p9531[0...3]
Dependency:
This parameter only has to be parameterized for the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive (p9601.2 =
1)
Refer to: p9501, p9531, p9601
Note:
The active actual speed limit is selected via safety-relevant inputs (SGE).
When selecting SOS or a STOP A ... D, setpoint 0 is specified in r9733.

1-763
Parameter
List of parameters
p9534[0...1]
SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP up lim

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 [mm]
Max
2147000.000 [mm]
Factory setting
100000.000 [mm]
Description:
Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index:
[0] = Limit value SLP1 (SE1)

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562
Note:
For the setting of these limit values, the following applies: p9534 > p9535
SLP: Safely-Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches
p9534[0...1]
SI Motion SLP (SE) upper limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP up lim

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 []
Max
2147000.000 []
Factory setting
100000.000 []
Description:
Sets the upper limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9535, p9562
Note:
p9535[0...1]
SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP low lim

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 [mm]
Max
2147000.000 [mm]
Factory setting
-100000.000 [mm]
Description:
Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562
Note:
1-764

Parameter
List of parameters
p9535[0...1]
SI Motion SLP (SE) lower limit values (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP low lim

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 []
Max
2147000.000 []
Factory setting
-100000.000 []
Description:
Sets the lower limit for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9534, p9562
Note:
p9536[0...29]
SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA+

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 [mm]
Max
2147000.000 [mm]
Factory setting
10.000 [mm]
Description:
Sets the plus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index:
[0] = Cam position SCA1 (SN1)

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537
Note:


1-765
Parameter
List of parameters
p9536[0...29]
SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA+

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 []
Max
2147000.000 []
Factory setting
10.000 []
Description:
Sets the plus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537
Note:

1-766

Parameter
List of parameters
p9537[0...29]
SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA-

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 [mm]
Max
2147000.000 [mm]
Factory setting
-10.000 [mm]
Description:
Sets the minus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536
Note:


1-767
Parameter
List of parameters
p9537[0...29]
SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA-

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-2147000.000 []
Max
2147000.000 []
Factory setting
-10.000 []
Description:
Sets the minus cam position for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536
Note:

1-768

Parameter
List of parameters
p9538[0...29]
SI Motion SCA (SN) cam track assignment (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA assign.

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
100
Max
414
Factory setting
[0] 100
[1] 101
[2] 102
[3] 103
[4] 104
[5] 105
[6] 106
[7] 107
[8] 108
[9] 109
[10] 110
[11] 111
[12] 112
[13] 113
[14] 114
[15] 200
[16] 201
[17] 202
[18] 203
[19] 204
[20] 205
[21] 206
[22] 207
[23] 208
[24] 209
[25] 210
[26] 211
[27] 212
[28] 213
[29] 214
Description:
Assigns the individual cams to the maximum of 4 cam tracks and defines the numerical value for the SGA "cam
range".
p9538[0...29] = CBA dec
C = Assignment of the cam to the cam track.
Valid values are 1, 2, 3, 4.
BA = Numerical value for the SGA "cam range".
If the position lies in the range of this cam, the value BA is signaled to the safety-relevant logic via the SGA "cam
range" of the cam track set using C.
Valid values are 0 ... 14. Each numerical value may only be used once for each cam track.
Examples:
p9538[0] = 207
Cam 1 (index 0) is assigned cam track 2. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 7 is entered in
the SGA "cam range" of the second cam track.
p9538[5] = 100
Cam 6 (index 5) is assigned cam track 1. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 0 is entered in
the SGA "cam range" of the first cam track.

1-769
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Track assignment SCA1

Dependency:

Refer to: F01681
Note:

p9540
SI Motion SCA (SN) tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA tol

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [mm]
Max
10.0000 [mm]
Factory setting
0.1000 [mm]
Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).

Within this tolerance, both monitoring channels may signal different signal states of the same safe cam.
Note:
p9540
SI Motion SCA (SN) tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SCA tol

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 []
Max
10.0000 []
Factory setting
0.1000 []
Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Cam" (SCA).

Within this tolerance, both monitoring channels may signal different signal states of the same safe cam.
Note:
1-770

Parameter
List of parameters
p9542
SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act val tol

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [mm]
Max
360.0000 [mm]
Factory setting
0.1000 [mm]
mm linear).
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
p9542
SI Motion act val comparison tol (crosswise) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn act val tol

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 []
Max
360.0000 []
Factory setting
0.1000 []
mm linear).
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
p9544
SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (CU) / SI Mtn ref tol

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0000 [mm]
Max
36.0000 [mm]
Factory setting
0.0100 [mm]
Description:
Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (absolute encoder).
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
p9544
SI Motion actual value comparison tolerance (referencing) (CU) / SI Mtn ref tol

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0000 []
Max
36.0000 []
Factory setting
0.0100 []
Description:
Sets the tolerance to check the actual values after referencing (incremental encoder) or when powering up (absolute encoder).
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:

1-771
Parameter
List of parameters
p9545
SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) filter time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SSM filt CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
100.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the filter time for the SSM feedback signal to detect standstill.
Note:
The filter time is effective only if the function is enabled (p9300/p9500 Bit 16 = 1).
p9546
SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity limit (CU) / SI Mtn SSM v_limCU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
1000000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
20.00 [mm/min]
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" (SGA n < n_x) is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 also applies
for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Caution:
Note:
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output / SGA: Safety-related output

SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safetyrelated output n < nx
p9546
SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity limit (CU) / SI Mtn SSM v_limCU

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
1000000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
20.00 [rpm]
When this limit value is undershot, the signal "SSM feedback signal active" (SGA n < n_x) is set.
If a value of 0 is entered in p9368/p9568, the value of parameter p9346/p9546 also applies
for the safe acceleration monitor SBR.
Caution:
Note:
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output / SGA: Safety-related output

SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safetyrelated output n < nx
1-772

Parameter
List of parameters
p9547
SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity hysteresis (CU) / SI Mtn SSM hyst CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [mm/min]
Max
500.0000 [mm/min]
Factory setting
10.0000 [mm/min]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
p9547
SI Motion SSM (SGA n < nx) velocity hysteresis (CU) / SI Mtn SSM hyst CU

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.0010 [rpm]
Max
500.0000 [rpm]
Factory setting
10.0000 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
p9548
SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SBR tol

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
120000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
300.00 [mm/min]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01706
Note:
p9548
SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SBR tol

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
120000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
300.00 [rpm]
Description:
Dependency:
Refer to: C01706
Note:

1-773
Parameter
List of parameters
p9549
SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn slip tol

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
6000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
6.00 [mm/min]
Description:
Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitoring channels.
Dependency:
Note:
p9549
SI Motion slip velocity tolerance (Control Unit) / SI Mtn slip tol

0 (Safety rot)
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
6000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
6.00 [rpm]
Description:
Sets the velocity tolerance that is used for a 2-encoder system in crosswise comparison between the two monitoring channels.
Dependency:
Note:
p9550
SI Motion SGE changeover tolerance time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SGE_chg tol

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
10000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
500.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the tolerance time for the changeover of the safety-related inputs (SGE).
p9551
SI Motion SLS (SG) changeover delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS t CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
600000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
100.00 [ms]
Sets the delay time for the SLS changeover or for the changeover from SLS to SOS for the function "Safely-Limited
Speed" (SLS).
When transitioning from a higher to a lower safely-limited velocity/speed stage or to the safe operating stop (SOS),
within this delay time, the "old" velocity stage remains active.
Even if SLS or SOS is activated from non safety-related operation, then this delay is still applied.
Note:

1-774

Parameter
List of parameters
p9552
SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t C->SOS CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
600000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
100.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP C to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Note:
p9553
SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t D->SOS CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
600000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
100.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Note:
p9554
SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit) / SI Mtn time E->SOS

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
600000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
100.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP E to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS).
Note:
p9555
SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit) / SI Mtn t F->B CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
600000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the transition time from STOP F to STOP B.
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711

1-775
Parameter
List of parameters
p9556
SI Motion pulse suppression delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL t_del CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2825
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
600000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
100.00 [ms]
Sets the delay time for the safe pulse suppression after STOP B.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506/p9306 = 1), the parameter has no effect.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9560

Refer to: C01701
p9557
SI Motion pulse suppression test time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL t_test

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
10000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
100.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the time after which the pulses must have been suppressed when initiating the test stop.
Dependency:
Refer to: C01798
Note:
p9558
SI Motion acceptance test mode time limit (Control Unit) / SI Mtn acc_test t

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
5000.00 [ms]
Max
100000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
40000.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the maximum time for the acceptance test mode.
Dependency:
Refer to: C01799
p9559
SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (Control Unit) / SI Mtn dyn timer
If the acceptance test mode takes longer than the selected time limit, then the mode is automatically terminated.

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [h]
Max
9000.00 [h]
Factory setting
8.00 [h]
Sets the time to carry out the forced checking procedure and test the safety motion monitoring functions integrated
in the drives.
Within the parameterized time, the safety functions must have been tested at least once (including deselection of
the "STO" function).
This monitoring time is reset each time the test is carried out.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is set in p9705.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9705

Refer to: A01697, C01798
Note:
1-776

Parameter
List of parameters
p9560
SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown velocity (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL v_shutCU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
6000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min]
Sets the shutdown velocity for pulse suppression.

Below this velocity "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP
A).
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring functions, the parameter must be > 0 (recommended value: 10).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9556
p9560
SI Motion pulse suppression shutdown speed (Control Unit) / SI Mtn IL n_shutCU

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
6000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]
Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression.

Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B, the pulses are suppressed by changing to STOP A).
Dependency:
Refer to: p9556
p9561
SI Motion SLS (SG) stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS resp

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
14
Factory setting
5
Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
This setting applies for all SLS limit values.
An input value of less than 5 signifies personnel protection, from 10 and upwards, machine protection.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
STOP A
STOP B
STOP C
STOP D
STOP E
Sets the stop response via p9563 (SLS-specific)
Dependency:
Refer to: p9531, p9563, p9580
Note:

1-777
Parameter
List of parameters
p9562
SI Motion SLP (SE) stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLP resp

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2
Max
4
Factory setting
2
Description:
Sets the stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SLP).
Value:
2:
3:
4:
Dependency:
Note:
p9563[0...3]
SI Motion SLS (SG)-specific stop response (Control Unit) / SI Mtn SLS stop
STOP C
STOP D
STOP E

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
14
Factory setting
2
Sets the SLS-specific stop response for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS).
These settings apply to the individual limit values for SLS.
In the case of encoderless motion monitoring (p9306 = 1), only a value of 0 or 1 is permitted.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
STOP A
STOP B
STOP C
STOP D
STOP E
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: p9531, p9561, p9580
Notice:
Values 10 to 14 are being prepared and are presently ineffective.
Note:
p9568
SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Control Unit) / SI MtnSBR v_lim CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [mm/min]
Max
1000.00 [mm/min]
Factory setting
0.00 [mm/min]

1-778

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

p9568
SI Motion SBR velocity limit (Control Unit) / SI MtnSBR v_lim CU

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [rpm]
Max
1000.00 [rpm]
Factory setting
0.00 [rpm]

Note:

p9570
SI Motion acceptance test mode (Control Unit) / SI Mtn Acc_mode

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00AC hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Setting to select and deselect the acceptance test mode.
Value:
0:
172:
Dependency:
Refer to: p9558, r9571, p9601
[00 hex] Deselect the acceptance test mode

[AC hex] Select the acceptance test mode
Refer to: C01799

Note:
Acceptance test mode can only be selected if Safety Extended Functions are enabled (p9601/9801).
r9571
SI Motion acceptance test status (Control Unit) / SI Mtn acc_status

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00AC hex
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the acceptance test mode.
Value:
0:
12:
13:
15:
172:
Dependency:
[00 hex] Acc_mode inactive

[0C hex] Acc_mode not possible due to POWER ON fault
[0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9570
[0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer
[AC hex] Acc_mode active
Refer to: C01799

1-779
Parameter
List of parameters
p9580
SI Motion pulse suppression delay time after bus failure (CU) / SI Mtn t to IL

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
800.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the delay time after which the pulses are safely suppressed after a bus failure.
Dependency:
p9581
SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ramp ref CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
600.0000 [mm/min]
Max
24000.0000 [mm/min]
Factory setting
1500.0000 [mm/min]

Dependency:
p9581
SI Motion brake ramp reference value (Control Unit) / SI Mtn ramp ref CU

0 (Safety rot)
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
600.0000 [rpm]
Max
24000.0000 [rpm]
Factory setting
1500.0000 [rpm]

Dependency:
p9582
SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn rp t_del CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.00 [ms]
Max
99000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
250.00 [ms]
Sets the delay time for monitoring the brake ramp.

Monitoring of the brake ramp starts once the delay time has elapsed.
Dependency:
1-780

Parameter
List of parameters
p9583
SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn rp t_mon CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.50 [s]
Max
1000.00 [s]
Factory setting
10.00 [s]
Sets the monitoring time to define the brake ramp.

Dependency:
p9587
SI Motion act val sensing encoderless filter time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn EL filt CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
100.00 [ms]
Factory setting
25.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the filter time for smoothing the actual value with encoderless actual value sensing.
Note:
p9588
SI Motion min current act val sensing encoderless (Control Unit) /

SI Mtn I_min EL CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [%]
Max
100.00 [%]
Factory setting
10.00 [%]
Sets the minimum current for encoderless actual value sensing.

Reducing this percentage value can adversely affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be decreased if C1711 has occurred with message value 1041.
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
p9589
SI Motion voltage tolerance acceleration (Control Unit) / SI Mtn V tol CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
10.00 [%]
Max
1000.00 [%]
Factory setting
100.00 [%]
Sets the voltage tolerance for suppressing acceleration peaks.

Increasing this percentage value means that voltage peaks will need to have a higher amplitude during acceleration
procedures if they are not to affect actual value sensing.
- The value must be decreased if acceleration procedures have led to an excessive safety actual velocity.
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:

1-781
Parameter
List of parameters
r9590[0...3]
SI Motion version safety motion monitoring (Control Unit) / SI Mtn version

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit.
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: r9770, r9870, r9890
Note:
Example:
r9590[0] = 2, r9590[1] = 60, r9590[2] = 1, r9590[3] = 0 --> SI Motion version V02.60.01.00
p9601
SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit) / SI enable fct CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Sets the enable signals for safety functions on the Control Unit that are integrated in the drive.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Motor Module or Power
Module being used:
- p9601 = 0: Safety functions integrated in the drive disabled.
- p9601 = 1: STO/SS1 enabled via terminals. Permissible if r9771.0 = 1.
- p9601 = 4: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
(SINAMICS S120) or via an integrated F-DI/F-DO (SINAMICS S110). Permissible if r9771.5 = 1.
- p9601 = 5: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) and
STO/SS1 via terminals (SINAMICS S120 only). Permissible if r9771.5 = 1.
- p9601 = 8: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9771.6 = 1.
- p9601 = 9: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via terminals. Permissible if r9771.6 = 1.
- p9601 = 12: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9771.4 = 1.
- p9601 = 13: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via terminals. Permissible if r9771.4 = 1.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
03
Signal name
STO (SH) via terminals (Control Unit)
enable
Motion monitoring functions integr. in the
drive (Control Unit)
PROFIsafe (Control Unit) enable
Dependency:
Note:
CU: Control Unit.
1 signal
Enable
0 signal
Inhibit
FP
2810
Enable
Inhibit
Enable
Inhibit
STO: Safe Torque Off/SH: Safe standstill.

SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN 60204).
SI: Safety Integrated.
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring.
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input.
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output.
1-782

Parameter
List of parameters
p9602
SI enable Safe Brake Control (Control Unit) / SI enable SBC CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2814
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the enable signal for the function "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) on the Control Unit.
Value:
0:
1:
Dependency:
Refer to: p9802
Note:
The "Safe Brake Control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled
(i.e. p9501 not equal to 0 and/or p9601 not equal to 0).
Inhibit SBC
Enable SBC
It does not make sense to parameterize "no motor holding brake available" and enable "Safe Brake Control" (p1215
= 0, p9602 = p9802 = 1) if there is no motor holding brake.
It is not permissible to parameterize "motor holding brake without feedback signals" and also enable "safe brake
control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
CU: Control Unit
SBC: Safe Brake Control
p9610
SI PROFIsafe address (Control Unit) / SI PROFIsafe CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFE hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9810
p9620[0...7]
BI: SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit) / SI S_srcSTO/SS1 CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
[0] 0
[1] 0
[2] 0
[3] 0
[4] 0
[5] 0
[6] 0
[7] 0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the following functions on the Control Unit:
STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (time monitored)

1-783
Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p9601
Note:
The following signal sources are permitted:

- fixed zero (standard setting).
- digital inputs DI 0 to DI 7 on the Control Unit 320 (CU320).
- digital inputs DI 0 to DI 3 on the Controller Extensions (CX32, NX10, NX15).
- digital inputs DI 0 to DI 3 on the Control Unit 310 (CU310).
It is not permitted to establish an interconnection to a digital input in the simulation mode.
For a parallel circuit configuration of n power units, the following applies:
p9620[0] = Signal source for power unit 1
...
p9620[n-1] = Signal source for power unit n
p9621
BI: SI signal source for SBA (Control Unit) / SI s_src SBA CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
An entry is added, specifying whether and/or via which digital CU input the SBA feedback signal (SBA_DIAG) is to
be read in; the parameter can be interconnected as a BICO drain.
0 : No SBC with SBA (default)
Bico code: To be parameterized by the user
SBA and no DQ CIM: p0722.x CU signal source for DIx where x = { 0,1,2...7 }
SBA with DQ CIM: p9872.3 Signal source is permanently interconnected to bit 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p9601
Note:
No difference is tolerated for a data cross-check between p9621 and p9821.
p9622[0...1]
SI SBA relay wait times (Control Unit) / SI SBA WT CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
1000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
[0] 100.00 [ms]
[1] 65.00 [ms]
Description:
The relay-specific minimum wait times (ms) for evaluating the feedback signal contacts have to be taken into
account. They differ for the activation and deactivation of one and the same relay.
Index:
[0] = Relay wait time activation

[1] = Relay wait time deactivation
Dependency:
Refer to: p9850
Note:
For a data cross-check between p9622 and p9822, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated.
The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
The relay-specific minimum wait times (ms) for evaluating the feedback signal contacts are entered.
Index 0 : for the ON time (default 100 ms)
Index 1 : for the OFF time (default 65 ms)
1-784

Parameter
List of parameters
p9650
SI SGE changeover tolerance time (Control Unit) / SI SGE_chg tol CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
2000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
500.00 [ms]
Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related inputs (SGE) on the Control Unit.
An SGE changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an SGE changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a data cross-check during this tolerance time.
Dependency:
Note:
Refer to: p9850

SGE: Safety-related input (e.g. STO terminals)
p9651
SI STO/SBC/SS1 debounce time (Control Unit) / SI STO t_debou CU

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
100.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Sets the CU DI debounce time used to control the SH terminal (see p9620).
The debounce time is accepted rounded to whole milliseconds. The debounce time indicates the maximum duration
of a fault pulse on the F-DIs, so that there are no negative effects on the SGEs.
Note:
Example:
Debounce time = 1 ms: Fault pulses of 1 ms are filtered; only pulses longer than 2 ms are processed.
p9652
SI Safe Stop 1 delay time (Control Unit) / SI Stop 1 t_del CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
300.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the delay time of the pulse suppression for the function "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) on the Control Unit to brake along
the OFF3 down ramp (p1135).
Dependency:
Note:
The parameterized time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle.
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204)

1-785
Parameter
List of parameters
p9658
SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (Control Unit) / SI STOP F->A CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
30000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the Control Unit.
Dependency:

Refer to: F01611
Note:
STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the data cross-check)
STOP A: Pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path
p9659
SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FrcdCkProcTimer

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [h]
Max
9000.00 [h]
Factory setting
8.00 [h]
Sets the time to carry out the dynamic update and testing the safety shutdown paths (forced checking procedure).
Within the parameterized time, STO must have been deselected at least once. The monitoring time is reset each
time that STO is deselected.
Dependency:
Refer to: A01699
Note:
r9660
SI forced checking procedure remaining time / SI frc chk remain

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [h]
Max
- [h]
Factory setting
- [h]
Description:
Displays the time remaining before dynamization and testing of the safety shutdown paths (forced checking procedure).
Dependency:
Refer to: A01699
p9700
SI Motion copy function / SI Mtn copy fct
TM54F_MA
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
0057 hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Setting to start the required copy function.

After starting, the appropriate parameters are copied from the Control Unit to the Motor Module.
Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
1-786

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
29:
87:
[00 hex] Copy function ended

[1D hex] Start copy function node identifier
[57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters
Note:
Re value = 57 hex:
The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered.
p9700
SI Motion copy function / SI Mtn copy fct

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00D0 hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Setting to start the required copy function.

After starting, the appropriate parameters are copied from the Control Unit to the Motor Module.
Once copying is complete, the parameter is automatically reset to 0.
Value:
0:
29:
87:
208:
[00 hex] Copy function ended

[1D hex] Start copy function node identifier
[57 hex] Start copy function SI parameters
[D0 hex] Start copy function SI basic parameters
Note:
Re value = 57 hex and D0 hex:

The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered.
Re value = D0 hex:
The following parameters are copied after starting the copy function:
p9601/p9801, p9602/p9802, p9610/9810, p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852, p9658/p9858
p9701
Acknowledge SI Motion data / Ackn SI Mtn dat
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00EC hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters,
hardware).
After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to 0.
Value:
0:
172:
236:
[00 hex] Data unchanged

[AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete
[EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC
Dependency:
Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899
Note:
Re value = AC hex:
These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was
entered.

1-787
Parameter
List of parameters
p9701
Acknowledge SI Motion data / Ackn SI Mtn dat

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00EC hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters,
hardware).
After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to 0.
Value:
0:
172:
220:
236:
[00 hex] Data unchanged

[AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete
[DC hex] Acknowledge SI basic parameter change
[EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC
Dependency:
Refer to: r9398, p9399, r9728, p9729, r9798, p9799, r9898, p9899
Note:
Re value = AC and DC hex:

These values can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was
entered.
p9705
BI: SI Motion: Test stop signal source / SI Mtn test stop

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the signal source for the test stop of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Notice:
It is not permissible to use TM54F inputs to start the test stop.
r9710[0...1]
SI Motion diagnostics result list 1 / SI Mtn res_list 1

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays result list 1 that, for the data cross-check between the monitoring channels, led to the fault.
Index:
[0] = Result list, second channel

[1] = Result list, drive
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
1-788
Signal name
Actual value > upper limit SOS
Actual value > lower limit SOS
Actual value > upper limit, SE1
Actual value > lower limit, SE1
Actual value > upper limit, SE2
Actual value > lower limit, SE2
Actual value > upper limit, SG1
Actual value > lower limit, SG1
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
12
13
16
17

Actual value > upper limit, SBR
Actual value > lower limit, SBR
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
r9711[0...1]
SI Motion diagnostics result list 2 / SI Mtn res_list 2

No
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays result list 2 that, for the data cross-check between the monitoring channels, led to the fault.
Index:
[0] = Result list, second channel

[1] = Result list, drive
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
r9712
SI Motion diagnostics position action value motor side / SI Mtn s_act mot
Signal name
Actual value > upper limit, SN1+
Actual value > lower limit, SN1+
Actual value > upper limit, SN1Actual value > lower limit, SN1Actual value > upper limit, SN2+
Actual value > upper limit, SN4Actual value > lower limit, SN4Actual value > upper limit, n_x+
Actual value > lower limit, n_x+
Actual value > upper limit, n_xActual value > lower limit, n_xActual value > upper limit, modulo
Actual value > lower limit, modulo

Description:
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
-
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the actual motor-side position actual value for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit.

1-789
Parameter
List of parameters
r9713[0...3]
SI Motion diagnostics position action value load side / SI Mtn s_act load

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual load-side actual values of both monitoring channels and their difference.
Index:
[0] = Load-side actual value on the Control Unit

[1] = Load-side actual value on the second channel
[2] = Load-side actual value difference Control Unit - second channel
[3] = Load-side max. actual value difference CU - 2nd channel
Dependency:
Refer to: r9724
Note:
DCC: Data cross-check

Re r9713[0]:
The display of the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit is updated in the monitoring clock cycle.
Re r9713[1]:
The display of the load-side position actual value on the second channel is updated in the DCC clock cycle (r9724)
and delayed by one DCC clock cycle.
Re r9713[2]:
The difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and load-side position actual value in
the second channel is updated in the DCC clock cycle (r9724) and delayed by one DCC clock cycle.
Re r9713[3]:
The maximum difference between the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit and the load-side position
actual value on the second channel.
r9714[0...1]
SI motion diagnostics velocity / SI Mtn diag v

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the current velocity actual values for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit.
Index:
[0] = Load-side velocity actual value on the Control Unit

[1] = Current SBR velocity limit on the Control Unit
Note:
For a linear axis, the following units apply: Micrometers per monitoring clock cycle (p9500)
For a rotary axis, the following units apply: Millidegrees per monitoring clock cycle (p9500)
r9718.23
CO/BO: SI Motion control signals 1 / SI Mtn ctrl_sig 1

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Control signal 1 for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
23
Note:
TfS: Traverse to fixed stop
1-790
Signal name
Set offset for TfS to the actual torque
1 signal
Set
0 signal
Reset
FP
-

Parameter
List of parameters
r9719.0...31
CO/BO: SI Motion control signals 2 / SI Mtn ctrl_sig 2

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Control signal 2 for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
03
04
08
09
10
12
13
15
16
18
19
20
21
28
29
30
31
Note:
Re r9719.0 and r9719.1:
Signal name
Deselect SOS/SLS (SBH/SG)
Deselect SOS (SBH)
Select SLS (SG) bit 0
Select SLS (SG) bit 1
Gearbox selection, bit 0
Select SLP (SE)
Close brake from control
Select test stop
SGE valid
Deselect external STOP A
Deselect external STOP C
Deselect external STOP D
Deselect external STOP E
SLS (SG) override bit 0
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
SLP2 (SE2)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Set
Set
Set
Set
0 signal
No
No
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
SLP1 (SE1)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Not set
Not set
Not set
Not set
FP
-
These two bits must be considered together.

- if SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) is deselected using bit 0, then assignment of bit 1 is irrelevant.
- if SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) is selected using bit 0, then a changeover is made between SOS (SBH) and SLS (SG)
using bit 1.
r9720.0...10
CO/BO: SI Motion control signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ STW

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Control signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
07
09
10
Signal name
Deselect STO
Deselect SS1
Deselect SS2
Deselect SOS
Deselect SLS
Acknowledgement
Select SLS bit 0
Select SLS bit 1
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Signal edge active
Set
Set

0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
Not set
Not set
FP
-
1-791
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety
Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero.
r9721.0...15
CO/BO: SI Motion status signals / SI Mtn stat_sig

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
12
13
14
15
Note:
r9722.0...15
CO/BO: SI Motion status signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ stat
Signal name
SOS or SLS active
SOS active
Pulse enable
Active SLS stage bit 0
Velocity below limit value n_x
Status signals valid
Safely referenced
STOP A or B active
STOP C active
STOP D active
STOP E active

1 signal
Yes
Yes
Deleted
Set
Set
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
Enabled
Not set
Not set
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
FP
-
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Status signal for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
07
09
10
11
15
Notice:
Re bit 07:
Signal name
STO active
SS1 active
SS2 active
SOS active
SLS active
Internal event
SOS selected
SSM (speed below limit value)
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Set
Set
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Not set
Not set
No
No
FP
-
The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard.

Note:
Re bit 07:
An internal event is displayed if a STOP A ... F is active.
1-792

Parameter
List of parameters
r9723.0...16
CO/BO: SI Motion diagnostic signals integrated in the drive / SI Mtn integ diag

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the diagnostic signals for safety-relevant motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive.
Bit field:
Bit
00
16
r9724
SI Motion crosswise comparison clock cycle / SI Mtn DCC clk cyc
Signal name
Forced checking procedure required
Status of the SBR function

Description:
1 signal
Yes
active
0 signal
No
inactive
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
FP
-
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Displays the crosswise comparison clock cycle.

The value indicates the clock cycle time with which each individual DCC value is compared between the two monitoring channels.
Dependency:
Note:
Refer to: p9500

Crosswise comparison clock cycle = monitoring clock cycle (p9500) * number of data to be crosswise compared
DCC: Data cross-check
r9725[0...2]
SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F / SI Mtn Diag STOP F

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Re r9725[0]:
Displays the message value that resulted in the STOP F on the drive.
Value = 0 means:
The Control Unit signaled a STOP F.
Value = 1 ... 999 means:
Number of the incorrect cross-checked data between the Control Unit and second channel.
Value >= 1000 means:
Additional diagnostic values of the drive.
Re r9725[1]:
Displays the value of the Control Unit that resulted in the STOP F.
Re r9725[2]:
Displays the value of the 2nd channel that resulted in the STOP F.
Index:
[0] = DCC error number

[1] = Control Unit DCC act value
[2] = Components DCC act val
Dependency:
Refer to: C01711
Note:
The significance of the individual values is described in message C01711.

1-793
Parameter
List of parameters
p9726
SI Motion, user agreement selection/deselection / SI Mtn UserAgr sel

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
00AC hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Setting to select and deselect the user agreement.
Value:
0:
172:
Dependency:
Refer to: r9727
r9727
SI Motion user agreement, inside the drive / SI Mtn UserAgr int
[00 hex] Deselect user agreement

[AC hex] Select user agreement

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the internal state of the user agreement.

Value = 0: User agreement is not set.
Value = AC hex: User agreement is set.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9726
r9728[0...2]
SI Motion actual checksum, SI parameters / SI Mtn act CRC

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters of the motion monitoring functions (actual
checksum).
Index:

[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for HW
Dependency:
Refer to: p9729

Refer to: F01680
p9729[0...2]
SI Motion reference checksum, SI parameters / SI Mtn ref CRC

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the checksum using the checksum-tested Safety Integrated parameters for motion monitoring functions (reference checksum).
Index:

[1] = Checksum over SI parameters for actual values
[2] = Checksum over SI parameters for HW
1-794

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: r9728

Refer to: F01680
r9730
SI Motion Safe maximum velocity / SI mtn safe v_Max

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mm/min]
Max
- [mm/min]
Factory setting
- [mm/min]
Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions
as a result of the actual value sensing.
If safety is not enabled, the parameter has no significance and is set to "0".
Note:
If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults.
r9730
SI Motion Safe maximum velocity / SI mtn safe v_Max
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Safety rot)

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Displays the safe maximum velocity (on the load side) that is permissible for the safe motion monitoring functions
as a result of the actual value sensing.
Note:
If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults.
r9731
SI Motion safe position accuracy / SI Mtn pos acc

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [mm]
Max
- [mm]
Factory setting
- [mm]
Displays the safe position accuracy (on the load side) that can be achieved as a maximum for the safe motion monitoring functions as a result of the actual value sensing.
r9731
SI Motion safe position accuracy / SI Mtn pos acc
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: 0 (Safety rot)

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- []
Max
- []
Factory setting
- []
Displays the safe position accuracy (on the load side) that can be achieved as a maximum for the safe motion monitoring functions as a result of the actual value sensing.

1-795
Parameter
List of parameters
r9733[0...1]
CO: SI Motion setpoint speed limit effective / SI Mtn setp_lim

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: 3_1
Scaling: p2000
Expert list: 1
Min
- [rpm]
Max
- [rpm]
Factory setting
- [rpm]
Description:
Displays the necessary setpoint speed limit as a result of the selected SI Motion monitoring functions.
Contrary to the parameterization of the SI limit values, this parameter specifies the motor-side limit value and not
the load-side limit value.
Index:
[0] = Setpoint limiting positive

[1] = Setpoint limiting negative
Dependency:
r9733[0] = p9531[x] * p9533

r9733[1] = - p9531[x] * p9533
x = SLS stage selected
Notice:
If p1051 = r9733[0] is interconnected, p1052 = r9733[1] must also be interconnected.

If only the absolute value of the setpoint speed limit is required, r9733[0] is sufficient.
Note:
The unit changeover between linear and rotary axis is not implemented via the safety changeover (p9502) but by
the linear motor changeover.
If the "SLS" function is not selected, r9733[0] shows p1082 and r9733[1] shows -p1082.
The display in r9733 can be delayed by up to one Safety monitoring clock cycle as compared to the display in
r9719/r9720 and r9721/r9722.
r9744
SI message buffer changes, counter / SI msg_buffer chng

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the changes of the safety message buffer. This counter is incremented every time that the safety message
buffer changes.
Recommend.:
This is used to check whether the safety message buffer has been read out consistently.
Dependency:
r9745[0...63]
SI component number / SI comp_num

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the component number of the safety message which has occurred.
Note:
1-796

Parameter
List of parameters
r9747[0...63]
SI message code / SI msg_code

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the numbers of safety messages that have occurred.
Dependency:
Note:
The messages type "safety message" (Cxxxxx) are entered in the message fault buffer.
Message buffer structure (principle):
r9747[0], r9748[0], r9749[0], r9753[0], r9754[0], r9755[0], r9756[0] --> Actual message case, safety message 1
...
r9747[7], r9748[7], r9749[7], r9753[7], r9754[7], r9755[7], r9756[7] --> Actual message case, safety message 8
r9747[8], r9748[8], r9749[8], r9753[8], r9754[8], r9755[8], r9756[8] --> 1st acknowledged message case, safety
message 1
...
r9747[15], r9748[15], r9749[15], r9753[15], r9754[15], r9755[15], r9756[15] --> 1st acknowledged message case,
safety message 8
...
r9747[56], r9748[56], r9749[56], r9753[56], r9754[56], r9755[56], r9756[56] --> 7th acknowledged message case,
safety message 1
...
r9747[63], r9748[63], r9749[63], r9753[63], r9754[63], r9755[63], r9756[63] --> 7th acknowledged message case,
safety message 8
r9748[0...63]
SI message time received in milliseconds / SI t_msg recv ms

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message occurred.
Dependency:
r9749[0...63]
SI message value / SI msg_value

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the additional information about the safety message that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency:

1-797
Parameter
List of parameters
r9750[0...63]
SI diagnostic attributes / SI diag_attr

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the diagnostic attributes of the safety messages that have occurred.
Bit field:
Bit
00
p9752
SI message cases, counter / SI msg_cases count
Signal name

0
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
Number of safety messages that have occurred since the last reset.
Dependency:
The safety message buffer is cleared by resetting the parameter to 0.
FP
-
Note:
r9753[0...63]
SI message value for float values / SI msg_val float

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays additional information about the safety message that has occurred for float values.
Dependency:
r9754[0...63]
SI message time received in days / SI t_msg recv days

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message occurred.
Dependency:
1-798

Parameter
List of parameters
r9755[0...63]
SI message time removed in milliseconds / SI t_msg rem ms

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message was removed.
Dependency:
r9756[0...63]
SI message time removed in days / SI t_msg rem days

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Messages
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the relative system runtime in days when the safety message was removed.
Dependency:
p9761
SI password input / SI password inp
VECTOR_G130/G15 Can be changed: C1, T

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Enters the Safety Integrated password.
Dependency:
Refer to: F01659
Note:
It is not permissible to change Safety Integrated parameter settings until the Safety Integrated password has been
entered.
p9762
SI password new / SI password new

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Enters a new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency:
A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p9763

1-799
Parameter
List of parameters
p9763
SI password acknowledgement / SI ackn password

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Acknowledges the new Safety Integrated password.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9762
Note:
The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p9762 = p9763 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowledged.
r9765
SI Motion forced check procedure remaining time (Control Unit) / SI Mtn dyn remain

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [h]
Max
- [h]
Factory setting
- [h]
Displays the time remaining until the next dynamization and testing of the safety motion monitoring functions integrated in the drives.
The signal source to initiate the forced checking procedure is parameterized in p9705.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9705

Refer to: C01798
r9770[0...3]
SI vers. safety fcts that run indep. in the drive (Control Unit) / SI version Drv CU

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety functions that run independently in the drive on the Control
Unit.
Index:

Dependency:
Note:
Example:
r9770[0] = 2, r9770[1] = 60, r9770[2] = 1, r9770[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00
1-800

Parameter
List of parameters
r9771
SI common functions (Control Unit) / SI common fct CU

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2804
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the Safety Integrated monitoring functions supported on the Control Unit and Motor Module.
The Control Unit determines this display.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Signal name
STO supported via terminals
SBC supported
SI Motion supported
SS1 supported
PROFIsafe supported for Extended Functions
Drive-based motion monitoring functions
supported
PROFIsafe supported for Basic Functions
Encoderless motion monitoring supported
Safe Brake Adapter supported
PROFIsafe supported BasicFunctions for
parall circuit connection
Dependency:
Refer to: r9871
Note:
CU: Control Unit
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2804
2804
2804
2804
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No

SS1: Safe Stop 1
r9772.0...23
CO/BO: SI status (Control Unit) / SI status CU

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2804
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated status on the Control Unit.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
09
10
15
16
17
18
19
Signal name
STO selected on Control Unit
STO active on Control Unit
SS1 delay time active on the Control Unit
SBC requested
SS1 selected on the Control Unit (Basic
Functions)
SS1 active on the Control Unit (Basic Functions)
STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
STOP A active
STOP F active
STO cse: Safety comm. mode
STO cause selection via terminal (Basic
Functions)
STO cause: selection via SMM
STO cause actual value missing
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2810
2810
2810
2814
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
2802
2802
2802
-
Yes
Yes
No
No

1-801
Parameter
List of parameters
20
22
23
STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic

Functions)
SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Functions)
SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
Dependency:
Refer to: r9872
Note:
Re bit 00:
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 20.

Re bit 05:
When SS1 is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 22 and 23.
Re bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe or Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Re bit 19:
With SMM encoderless no actual value sensing is possible on account of OFF2.
With SMM with encoder no actual value sensing is possible on account of parking.
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring
Re bit 22 and 23:
These bits show via which path the SS1 has been triggered, i.e. what has started the SS1 delay time.
If the SS1 delay time is not started (e.g. because an STO is triggered at the same time), neither of the two bits is
set.
r9773.0...31
CO/BO: SI status (Control Unit + Motor Module) / SI status CU+MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2804
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated status on the drive (Control Unit + Motor Module).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
31
Note:
This status is formed from the AND operation of the relevant status of the two monitoring channels.
r9774.0...31
CO/BO: SI status (group STO) / SI stat group STO
Signal name
STO selected in drive
STO active in drive
SS1 delay time active in the drive
SBC requested
SS1 selected in the drive (Basic Functions)
SS1 active in the drive (Basic Functions)
Shutdown paths must be tested

Description:
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2804
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
FP
2804
2804
2804
2804
2810
Displays the status for Safety Integrated of the group to which this drive belongs.
These signals are an AND logic operation of the individual status signals of the drives included in this group.
1-802

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
04
05
06
31
Signal name
STO selected in group
STO active in group
SS1 delay time active in group
SBC requested in group
SS1 selected in group (Basic Functions)
SS1 active in group (Basic Functions)
Shutdown paths of the group must be tested
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2804
2804
2804
2804
Dependency:
Notice:
If a drive belonging to a group is deactivated via p0105, then the signals in r9774 can no longer be correctly displayed (Remedy: Before deactivating, remove this drive from the group).
Note:
A group is formed by appropriately grouping the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" (STO).
The status of a group of n drives is, for drives 1 to n - 1 displayed with a delay of one monitoring clock cycle; this is
a system-related effect.
r9776
SI Motion diagnostics / SI Mtn diag

Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
The parameter is used for diagnostics.
Bit field:
Bit
00
Note:
Re bit 00:
Signal name
Safety parameter changed POWER ON
required
1 signal
Yes
0 signal
No
FP
-
The bit indicates whether a change has been made to at least one Safety parameter which will only take effect after
a POWER ON.
r9780
SI monitoring clock cycle (Control Unit) / SI monitor_clck CU

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on the Control Unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9880
r9781[0...1]
SI checksum to check changes (Control Unit) / SI chg chksm CU
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the checksum for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.

These are additional checksums that are created to track changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality)
to safety parameters (that are relevant for checksums).
Index:
[0] = SI checksum to track functional changes

[1] = SI checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency:
Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799

Refer to: F01690

1-803
Parameter
List of parameters
r9782[0...1]
SI time stamps to check changes (Control Unit) / SI chg t CU
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [h]
Max
- [h]
Factory setting
- [h]
Description:
Displays the time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes for Safety Integrated.
The time stamps for the checksums for tracking changes (fingerprint for the "safety logbook" functionality) made to
safety parameters are saved in parameters p9781[0] and p9781[1].
Index:
[0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes

[1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes
Dependency:
Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799

Refer to: F01690
r9794[0...19]
SI crosswise comparison list (Control Unit) / SI DCC_list CU

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the Control Unit.
Example:
r9794[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety functions)
r9794[2] = 3 (SGE changeover, tolerance time)
r9794[3] = 4 (transition time, STOP F to STOP A)
...
The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9894
Note:
A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.
r9795
SI diagnostics STOP F (Control Unit) / SI diag STOP F CU

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of the cross-checked data which has caused STOP F on the Control Unit.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9895

Refer to: F01611
Note:
A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611.
1-804

Parameter
List of parameters
r9798
SI actual checksum SI parameters (Control Unit) / SI act_checksum CU

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the checksum over the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (actual checksum).
Dependency:
p9799
SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit) / SI set_checksum CU

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (reference checksum).
Dependency:
p9801
SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module) / SI enable fct MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Sets the enable signals for safety functions on the Motor Module that are integrated in the drive.
Not all of the settings listed below will be permissible, depending on the Control Unit and Motor Module or Power
Module being used:
- p9801 = 0: Safety functions integrated in the drive disabled.
- p9801 = 1: STO/SS1 enabled via terminals. Permissible if r9871.0 = 1.
- p9801 = 4: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
(SINAMICS S120) or via an integrated F-DI/F-DO (SINAMICS S110). Permissible if r9871.5 = 1.
- p9801 = 5: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) and
STO/SS1 via terminals (SINAMICS S120 only). Permissible if r9871.5 = 1.
- p9801 = 8: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9871.6 = 1.
- p9801 = 9: STO/SS1 enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via terminals. Permissible if r9871.6 = 1.
- p9801 = 12: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe. Permissible if r9871.4 = 1.
- p9801 = 13: Motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive enabled via PROFIsafe and STO/SS1 via terminals. Permissible if r9871.4 = 1.
Bit field:
Bit
00
02
03
Dependency:
Signal name
STO (SH) via terminals (Motor Module)
enable
Motion monitoring functions integr. in the
drive (Motor Module)
PROFIsafe (Motor Module) enable
1 signal
Enable
0 signal
Inhibit
FP
2810
Enable
Inhibit
Enable
Inhibit

1-805
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
MM: Motor Module.

SI: Safety Integrated.
SMM: Safe Motion Monitoring.
STO: Safe Torque Off/SH: Safe standstill.
SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN 60204).
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input.
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output.
p9802
SI enable Safe Brake Control (Motor Module) / SI enable SBC MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2814
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Sets the enable signal for the "Safe Brake Control" function (SBC) on the Motor Module.
0: Inhibit SBC
1: Enable SBC
Dependency:
Refer to: p9602
Note:
The "Safe Brake Control" function is not activated until at least one safety monitoring function has been enabled
(i.e. p9501 not equal to 0 and/or p9801 not equal to 0).
It does not make sense to parameterize "no motor holding brake available" and enable "Safe Brake Control" (p1215
= 0, p9602 = p9802 = 1) if there is no motor holding brake.
It is not permissible to parameterize "motor holding brake without feedback signals" and also enable "safe brake
control" (p1278 = 1, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1).
MM: Motor Module
p9810
SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module) / SI PROFIsafe MM

0
Description:
1-806
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFE hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Sets the PROFIsafe address of the Motor Module.

Parameter
List of parameters
p9821
BI: SI signal source for SBA (Motor Module) / SI s_src SBA MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
An entry is added, specifying whether and/or via which digital CU input the SBA feedback signal (SBA_DIAG) is to
be read in; the parameter can be interconnected as a BICO drain.
0 : No SBC with SBA (default)
Bico code: To be parameterized by the user
SBA and no DQ CIM: p0722.x CU signal source for DIx where x = { 0,1,2...7 }
SBA with DQ CIM: p9872.3 Signal source is permanently interconnected to bit 3
Dependency:
Refer to: p9601
Note:
No difference is tolerated for a data cross-check between p9621 and p9821.
p9822[0...1]
SI SBA relay wait times (Motor Module) / SI SBA t_wait MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
1000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
[0] 100000.00 [s]
[1] 65000.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the wait times for activating and deactivating the relay.
Index:
[0] = Relay wait time activation

[1] = Relay wait time deactivation
Dependency:
Refer to: p9850
p9850
SI SGE changeover tolerance time (Motor Module) / SI SGE_chg tol MM
The relay-specific minimum wait times for evaluating the feedback signal contacts have to be set.

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2810
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
2000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
500000.00 [s]
Sets the tolerance time to change over the safety-related inputs (SGE) on the Motor Module.
An SGE changeover is not effective simultaneously due to the different runtimes in the two monitoring channels.
After an SGE changeover, dynamic data is not subject to a data cross-check during this tolerance time.
Dependency:
Note:
Refer to: p9650

SGE: Safety-related input (e.g. STO terminals)

1-807
Parameter
List of parameters
p9851
SI STO/SBC/SS1 debounce time (Motor Module) / SI STO t_debou MM

0
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
100000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Sets the debounce time for the EP terminal of the Motor Module.
The debounce time is rounded to whole milliseconds. The debounce time indicates the maximum duration of a fault
pulse on the F-DIs, so that there are no negative effects on the SGEs.
Example:
Note:
Example:
p9852
SI Safe Stop 1 delay time (Motor Module) / SI Stop 1 t_del MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [ms]
Max
300000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
0.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the delay time of the pulse suppression for the function "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) on the Motor Module to brake
along the OFF3 down ramp (p1135).
Dependency:
Note:
p9858
SI transition time STOP F to STOP A (Control Unit) / SI STOP F->A MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [s]
Max
30000000.00 [s]
Factory setting
0.00 [s]
Description:
Sets the transition period from STOP F to STOP A on the Motor Module.
Dependency:

Refer to: F30611
Note:
STOP F: Defect in a monitoring channel (error in the data cross-check)
STOP A: Pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path
1-808

Parameter
List of parameters
r9870[0...3]
SI version safety functions integrated in drive (Motor Module) / SI version MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated version for the safety functions integrated in the drive on the Motor Module.
Index:

Dependency:
Note:
Example:
r9870[0] = 2, r9870[1] = 60, r9870[2] = 1, r9870[3] = 0 --> Safety version V02.60.01.00
r9871
SI common functions (Motor Module / SI general fct MM

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2804
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the Safety Integrated monitoring functions supported on the Control Unit and Motor Module.
The Motor Module determines this display.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Signal name
STO supported via terminals
SBC supported
SI Motion supported
SS1 supported
PROFIsafe supported for Extended Functions
Drive-based motion monitoring functions
supported
PROFIsafe supported for Basic Functions
Encoderless motion monitoring supported
Safe Brake Adapter supported
PROFIsafe supported BasicFunctions for
parall circuit connection
Dependency:
Refer to: r9771
Note:
MM: Motor Module
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
No
No
FP
2804
2804
2804
2804
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No

SS1: Safe Stop 1

1-809
Parameter
List of parameters
r9872.0...23
CO/BO: SI status list (Motor Module) / SI status MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2804
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated status on the Motor Module.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
09
10
15
16
17
18
20
22
23
Signal name
STO on Motor Module selected
STO on Motor Module active
SS1 delay time on Motor Module active
Safe Brake Adapter feedback signal
SBC requested
SS1 selected on the Motor Module (Basic
Functions)
SS1 active on the Motor Module (Basic
Functions)
STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
STOP A active
STOP F active
STO cse: Safety comm. mode
STO cause selection via terminal (Basic
Functions)
STO cause: selection via SMM
STO cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
SS1 cause selection terminal (Basic Functions)
SS1 cause selection PROFIsafe (Basic
Functions)
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
High
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
Low
No
No
FP
2810
2810
2810
2814
-
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
2802
2802
2802
-
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Dependency:
Refer to: r9772
Notice:
If communication between the Control Unit and the Motor Module is interrupted (e.g. by switching off the Motor
Module), this display parameter is no longer updated. The last transferred status of the Motor Module is displayed.
Note:
Re bit 00:
When STO is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 16 ... 18 and in bit 20.
Re bit 05:
When SS1 is selected, the cause is displayed in bits 22 and 23.
Re bit 18:
When the bit is set, STO is selected via PROFIsafe or Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Re bit 22 and 23:
These bits show via which path the SS1 has been triggered, i.e. what has started the SS1 delay time.
If the SS1 delay time is not started (e.g. because an STO is triggered at the same time), neither of the two bits is
set.
r9880
SI monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module) / SI monitor_clck MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [ms]
Max
- [ms]
Factory setting
- [ms]
Description:
Displays the clock cycle time for the Safety Integrated Basic Functions on the Motor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9780
1-810

Parameter
List of parameters
r9881[0...11]
SI Motion Sensor Module Node Identifier second channel / SI Mtn SM Ident

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Node Identifier of the Sensor Module that the second channel uses for the motion monitoring functions.
r9890[0...2]
SI version (Sensor Module) / SI version SM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated version on the Sensor Module.
Index:

Dependency:
Note:
Example:
r9890[0] = 2, r9890[1] = 3, r9890[2] = 1 --> Safety-Version V02.03.01
r9894[0...19]
SI crosswise comparison list (Motor Module) / SI DCC_list MM

Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Displays the number of the data that are being presently compared crosswise on the Motor Module.
Example:
r9894[0] = 1 (monitoring clock cycle)
r9894[1] = 2 (enable safety functions)
r9894[2] = 3 (SGE changeover, tolerance time)
r9894[3] = 4 (transition time, STOP F to STOP A)
...
The content of the list of crosswise-compared data is dependent upon the particular application.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9794
Note:
The complete list of numbers for data cross-check is listed in Fault F30611.

1-811
Parameter
List of parameters
r9895
SI diagnostics STOP F (Motor Module) / SI diag STOP F MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2802
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of the cross-checked data which has caused STOP F on the Motor Module.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9795

Refer to: F30611
Note:
The complete list of numbers for data cross-check is listed in Fault F30611.
r9898
SI actual checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI act_checksum MM

Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (actual checksum).
Dependency:
p9899
SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module) / SI set_checksum MM

0
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2800
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the checksum for the checked Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (reference checksum).
Dependency:
r9900
Actual topology number of indices / Act topo indices
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the number of indices of the actual topology.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9901
Note:

The parameter is not displayed for the STARTER commissioning software.
1-812

Parameter
List of parameters
r9901[0...n]
Actual topology / Act topo
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual topology of the drive unit.

The actual topology is sub-divided into several sections. Each of the following data is saved under an index.
General data on the topology:
- version
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology
- number of components
Data on a component:
- type component of the node ID of the component
- number of DRIVE-CLiQ sockets in the Node Identifier
- manufacturer and version of the Node Identifier
- serial number of the Node Identifier (4 indices)
- index of the component
- order number (8 indices)
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology of the component
- communications address
- number of port types
- port type
- number of ports of the port type
- communications address of the associated/linked component
- number of the associated/linked port
- communications address of the associated/linked component
- etc.
Data on the next component:
- etc.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9900
Note:

p9902
Target topology number of indices / TargetTopo indices
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
1
Max
65535
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the number of target topology indices.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9903
Note:


1-813
Parameter
List of parameters
p9903[0...n]
Target topology / Target topology
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the target topology of the drive unit.

The target topology is sub-divided into several sections. Each of the following data is saved under an index.
General data on the topology:
- version
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology
- number of components
Data on a component:
- type component of the Node Identifier of the component
- number of DRIVE-CLiQ sockets in the Node Identifier
- manufacturer and version of the Node Identifier
- serial number of the Node Identifier (4 indices)
- index of the component
- order number (8 indices)
- attribute to compare the actual topology and target topology of the component
- component number
- number of port types
- port type
- number of ports of the port type
- component number of the associated/linked component
- component number of the associated/linked component
- etc.
Data on the next component:
- etc.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9902
Note:
The target topology can only be modified using the commissioning software.
Changes do not become effective until they have been accepted with p9428 = 1, or on change of status from p0009
= 101 to 0 or 111.
1-814

Parameter
List of parameters
p9904
Topology comparison, acknowledge differences / Topo_compare ackn
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
If, when comparing the actual topology and target topology, only error has occurred, that can be acknowledged,
then using this parameter, a new comparison can be started - acknowledging the error in the target topology.
Differences that can be acknowledged:
- topology comparison, component shifted
- topology comparison, serial number of a component has been detected to be different (byte 3 = 1)
- topology comparison shows one component that is connected differently
The following parameter values are available:
p9904 = 1 --> the procedure is started.
p9904 = 0 after starting --> the procedure has been successfully completed.
p9904 = 1 after starting --> the procedure has not been successfully completed.
The possible causes for an unsuccessful procedure are located in bytes 4, 3, 2.
Byte 2:
Number of structural differences.
Byte 3:
Number of differences that can be acknowledged (p9904).
Byte 4:
Number of differences. These differences can be resolved as follows:
- sets the topology comparison (p9906 or p9907/p9908).
- change over the actual topology.
The appropriate action should be selected corresponding to the message that is displayed/output.
Note:
In order to permanently accept the acknowledgement of the fault that can be resolved, then it must be saved in a
non-volatile fashion (p0977).
p9905
Device specialization / Specialization
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Description:
With p9905 = 1, the serial numbers and the hardware versions of all of the components are transferred from the
actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started..
For this device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topology by the serial numbers.
With p9905 = 2, the serial numbers, the hardware versions and the order numbers of all of the components are
transferred from the actual topology into the target topology and a new comparison is started..
For this device specialization, the components of the target topology may only differ from those of the actual topology by the serial numbers and order numbers.
Note:
p9905 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.

In order to permanently accept the data, it is necessary to save in a non-volatile fashion (p0977).

1-815
Parameter
List of parameters
p9906
Topology comparison, comparison stage of all components / Topo_cmpr tot comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the type of comparison between the actual topology and target topology.
The comparison is started by setting the required value.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
99:
High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate

Average: Compares the component type and the Order number
Low: Compares the component type
Minimum: Compares the component class
Topology has different comparison stages
Note:
The electronic rating plate comprises the following data:

- component type (e.g. "SMC20")
- Order No. (e.g. "6SL3055-0AA0-5BA0")
- manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
- hardware version (e.g. "A")
- Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495")
When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies:
p9906 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No.
p9906 = 1: Component type, Order No.
p9906 = 2: Component type
p9906 = 3: Component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module)
p9907
Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number /

Topo_cmpr comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
Enters the number of the component where the setting of how the actual topology should be compared to the target
topology should be changed.
Dependency:
Refer to: p9908
p9908
Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component / Topo_cmpr 1 comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
99
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the type of comparison of a component in the target topology with the actual topology.
The comparison is started by setting the required value.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
99:
1-816
High: Compares the complete electronic rating plate

Average: Compares the component type and the Order number
Low: Compares the component type
Minimum: Compares the component class
Topology has different comparison stages

Parameter
List of parameters
Dependency:
Refer to: p9907
Note:
The electronic rating plate comprises the following data:

- manufacturer (e.g. SIEMENS)
- hardware version (e.g. "A")
- Serial No. (e.g. "T-P30050495")
When comparing the topology, the following data is compared in the target and actual topologies:
p9908 = 0: Component type, Order No., Hardware version, Manufacturer, Serial No.
p9908 = 1: Component type, Order No.
p9908 = 2: Component type
p9908 = 3: Component class (e.g. Sensor Module or Motor Module)
p9909
Topology comparison, component replacement / Topo_cmpr replace
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
For p9909 = 1, the serial number and the hardware version of the new replaced component is automatically transferred from the actual topology into the target topology and then saved in a non-volatile fashion.
For the components that have been replaced, the electronic rating plate must match as far as the following data is
concerned:
For p9909 = 0, serial numbers and hardware versions are not automatically transferred. In this case, the transfer
must be made using p9904.
Dependency:
Note:
The modified target topology is automatically saved in a non-volatile fashion when the drive object runs-up (e.g.
after a POWER ON).
Special case for Control Unit and option slot modules:
When replacing these components, independent of p9909, the serial number and hardware version are automatically transferred and saved in a non-volatile fashion.
p9910
Transfer additional components into the target topology / Transfer comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 1
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
6
Factory setting
0
Description:
Transfer additional inserted DRIVE-CLiQ components into the target topology and add the appropriate drive objects
to the project.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
No selection
Drive object type SERVO
Drive object type VECTOR
SINAMICS GM (DFEMV & VECTORMV)
SINAMICS SM (AFEMV & VECTORMV)
SINAMICS GL (VECTORGL)
SINAMICS SL (VECTORSL)

1-817
Parameter
List of parameters
p9911[0...3]
Insert drive object / Drv_obj insert
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
4294967295
Factory setting
0
Description:
New drive objects can be created using this parameter.

Index 0:
The values 2 ... 62 are permissible.
Index 1:
Number of the drive object type (e.g. 11 for type SERVO).
Index 2:
Function modules defined for the drive object.
Index 3:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 ... 3).
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 ... 3 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for insertion.
Index:

[1] = Drive object type
[2] = Drive object function module
[3] = Reset or check and flag for insertion
Note:

p9912[0...1]
Delete drive object / Drv_obj delete
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
62
Factory setting
0
Description:
Drive objects can be deleted using this parameter.

Index 0:
Index 1:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 and 1)
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 and 1 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for deletion.
= 30: Check and flag for deletion. Keep target topology.
Index:

[1] = Reset or check and flag for deletion
Note:

1-818

Parameter
List of parameters
p9913[0...2]
Change drive object number / Change drv_obj_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
62
Factory setting
0
Description:
Existing drive objects can be assigned new numbers using these parameters.
Index 0:
Index 1:
Index 2:
= 0: Ready.
= 3: Check and flag for modification.
Index:
[0] = Drive object number old

[1] = Drive object number new
[2] = Reset or check and flag for modification
Note:

p9914[0...2]
Change component number / Change comp_no
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: C1
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
You can change the number of topology components using this parameter.
Index 0:
Index 1:
Index 2:
= 0: Ready.
= 3: Check and flag for modification.
Index:
[0] = Component number old

[1] = Component number new
[2] = Reset or check and flag for modification
Note:


1-819
Parameter
List of parameters
p9915
DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master / DLQ fault master
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
0007 07FF hex
Factory setting
0007 02FF hex
Description:
p9916
DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave / DLQ fault slave
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
0007 07FF hex
Factory setting
0007 02FF hex
Description:
p9917[0...1]
Delete component / Delete comp
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
199
Factory setting
0
Description:
Excessive components that have not been assigned can be removed from the component target topology using this
parameter.
Index 0:
Index 1:
= 0: Ready.
= 1: Reset (only indices 0 and 1)
= 2: Reset all (indices 0 and 1 and flagged entries).
= 3: Check and flag for deletion.
Index:
[0] = Component number

[1] = Reset or check and flag for deletion
Note:

1-820

Parameter
List of parameters
p9920[0...99]
Licensing, enter license key / Enter license key
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Enters the license key for this drive unit.

Example of the license key:
EACZ-QBCA = 69 65 67 90 45 81 66 67 65 dec (ASCII characters)
Index 0 = license key character 1 (e.g. 69 dec)
...
With the STARTER commissioning software, ASCII characters are not entered coded, i.e. the characters of the
license key can be entered as printed in the Certificate of License. In this case, STARTER codes the characters.
Dependency:

Refer to: A13000, A13001, F13010
Notice:
Note:
Onlyy the ASCII characters, contained in a license key can be entered.

When changing p9920[x] to the value 0, all of the following indices are also set to 0.
After entering the license key, the license key must be activated (p9921).
If the licensing is not adequate, then the following alarm is displayed together with LED:
- A13000 --> licensing not sufficient
- LED READY --> flashes green/red with 0.5 Hz
p9921
Licensing, activate license key / Act license key
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Activates the entered license key.

The following is executed when activating the license key.
- the checksum of the entered license key is checked.
- the entered license key is saved in a non-volatile fashion on the memory card.
- re-enter the license key.
Value:
0:
1:
Inactive
Activate start license key
Dependency:
Refer to: p9920

Refer to: A13000, A13001, F13010
Note:
Before activation, the license key entered using parameter p9920 is checked. If this check identifies an error, activation is rejected. In this case, writing a 1 to p9921 is rejected.
When the license key has been activated, p9921 is automatically set to 0.

1-821
Parameter
List of parameters
r9925[0...99]
Firmware file incorrect / FW file incorr
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the directory and name of the file whose status as shipped from the factory was identified as impermissible.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9926

Refer to: A01016
Note:
The directory and name of the file is displayed in the ASCII code.
r9926
Firmware check status / FW check status
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 2
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status when the firmware is checked when the system is booted.
0: Firmware not yet checked.
1: Check running.
2: Check successfully completed.
3: Check indicates an error.
Dependency:
Refer to: r9925

Refer to: A01016
p9930[0...8]
System logbook activation / SYSLOG activation
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Index:
[0] = System logbook stage (0: Not active)

[1] = COM2/COM1 (0: COM2, 1: COM1)
[2] = Activate file write (0: Not active)
[3] = Display time stamp (0: Not displayed)
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Reserved
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
[8] = System logbook file size (stages, each 10 kB)
Notice:
Before powering down the Control Unit, ensure that the system logbook is switched out (p9930[0] = 0).
1-822

Parameter
List of parameters
p9931[0...99]
System logbook module selection / SYSLOG mod select.
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
p9932
Save system logbook EEPROM / SYSLOG EEPROM save
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
r9935.0
BO: POWER ON delay signal / POWER ON t_delay
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
After power-on, binector output r9935.0 is set with the start of the first sampling time and is again reset after approx.
100 ms.
Bit field:
Bit
00
p9941
Target topology feature delete all components / Feature delete
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: Topology
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 0
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
0
Description:
Signal name
POWER ON delay signal
1 signal
High
0 signal
Low
FP
-
Writing the parameter to the value 1 deletes (sets to zero) the serial numbers of all components in the target topology.
Through activation and deactivation this enables the actual topology components to be newly assigned to the target
topology components.
Note:
p9941 is automatically set to 0 at the end of the operation.

A warm restart is triggered automatically after p0009 = 0.

1-823
Parameter
List of parameters
r9975[0...7]
System utilization measured / Sys util meas
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the measured system utilization. The higher the value displayed, the higher the system utilization.
Index:
[0] = Computing time utilization (min)

[1] = Computing time utilization (averaged)
[2] = Computing time utilization (max)
[3] = Largest total utilization (min)
[4] = Largest total utilization (averaged)
[5] = Largest total utilization (max)
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency:
Refer to: r9976, r9979, r9980, r9981

Refer to: F01054, F01205
Note:
Re index 3 ... 5: The total utilizations are determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilizations are
mapped here. The sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979. Total utilization: Computing
time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
r9976[0...7]
System utilization / Sys util
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the system utilization. If the utilization is greater than 100%, fault F01054 is output.
Index:
[0] = Reserved
[1] = Computing time utilization
[2] = Reserved
[3] = Reserved
[4] = Reserved
[5] = Largest total utilization
[6] = Reserved
[7] = Reserved
Dependency:

Refer to: F01054, F01205
Note:
Re index 1:
The value shows the total computing time load of the system.
Re index 5:
The total utilization is determined using all sampling times used. The largest total utilization is mapped here. The
sampling time with the largest total utilization is displayed in r9979.
Total utilization:
Computing time load of sampling time involved including load from higher-priority sampling times (interrupts).
1-824

Parameter
List of parameters
r9979
Sampling time with largest total utilization / t_sampl lg total
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [s]
Max
- [s]
Factory setting
- [s]
Description:
Displays the sampling time with the largest total utilization.
Dependency:

Refer to: F01054
Note:
The largest total utilization is displayed in r9976[5].

Total utilization:
r9980[0...63]
Sampling times utilization calculated / t_sampl util calc
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the calculated utilizations for the active sampling times based on the existing target topology.
Index:
[0] = Net utilization 0

[1] = Total utilization 0

1-825
Parameter
List of parameters

Dependency:
Refer to: r7901, r9976, r9979

Refer to: F01054
Note:
The corresponding sampling times can be read out in parameter r7901.

Net utilization:
Computing time load that is only called by the sampling time involved.
Total utilization:
r9981[0...63]
Sampling times utilization measured / t_sampl util meas
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the utilizations measured for the active sampling times.
Index:

1-826

Parameter
List of parameters

Dependency:
Refer to: r7901, r9975, r9980

Refer to: F01054
Note:
The corresponding sampling times can be read out in parameter r7901.

Net utilization:
Computing time load that is only called by the sampling time involved.
Total utilization:

1-827
Parameter
List of parameters
r9982[0...4]
Memory utilization: Data memory /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the calculated data memory utilization rates based on the existing target topology.
Index:
[0] = Fast Memory 1

[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
Dependency:
Refer to: F01068
r9983[0...4]
Memory utilization: Data memory measurement (actual load) /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the measured memory utilization rates based on the existing target topology.
Index:
[0] = Fast Memory 1

[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
Dependency:
Refer to: F01068
r9986[0...7]
DRIVE-CLiQ system load / DQ SysLoad
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ system load based on the existing target topology.
The values are not made available until the RUNUP READY (800) state is adopted (see p3988).
Indices 0..7 correspond to DRIVE-CLiQ ports X100..X107.
Dependency:
1-828
Refer to: F01340

Parameter
List of parameters
r9987[0...7]
DRIVE-CLiQ bandwidth load / DQ BandWidthLoad
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ bandwidth load based on the existing target topology.
Dependency:
Refer to: F01340
r9988[0...7]
DRIVE-CLiQ DPRAM load / DQ DPRLoad
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
- [%]
Max
- [%]
Factory setting
- [%]
Description:
Displays the calculated DRIVE-CLiQ DPRAM load based on the existing target topology.
Dependency:
Refer to: F01340
p9990
DO selection for memory usage actual value determination /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
65535
Factory setting
0
Description:
The meaning of the parameter differs for reading and writing:

Read:
Returns the number of memory areas monitored.
Write:
Memory usage of a drive object: Enter the drive object ID.
Memory usage of the complete system: Enter value 65535.
r9991[0...4]
Memory usage actual values per DO /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Fast Memory 1

[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap

1-829
Parameter
List of parameters
r9992[0...4]
Memory usage setpoints per DO /
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Index:
[0] = Fast Memory 1

[1] = Fast Memory 2
[2] = Fast Memory 3
[3] = Fast Memory 4
[4] = Heap
r9999[0...99]
Software error internal supplementary diagnostics / SW_err int diag
CU_G_G130,
CU_G_G150
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Diagnostics parameter to display additional information for internal software errors.
Note:
p10000
SI sampling time / SI t_sample
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [ms]
Max
25.00 [ms]
Factory setting
12.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the sampling time for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
p10001
SI delay time for test stop at DO 0 ... DO 3 / SI t_delay DO
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
2.00 [ms]
Max
2000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
500.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the wait time for testing the digital outputs 0 ... 3 (DO 0 ... DO 3).
Within this time, for a forced checking procedure of the digital outputs, the signal must have been detected via the
corresponding digital input DI 20 ... DI 23.
Dependency:
Refer to: p10003, p10007, p10041, p10046
Note:
The wait time must be set to a value greater than parameter p10017.
The duration of the test stop is adapted to the debounce time set in p10017 automatically if the wait time in p10001
should be less than the debounce time.
1-830

Parameter
List of parameters
p10002
SI discrepancy monitoring time / SI discrep t_monit
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [ms]
Max
2000.00 [ms]
Factory setting
500.00 [ms]
Description:
Sets the monitoring time for the discrepancy for the digital inputs.
The signal states at the two associated digital inputs (F-DI) must assume the same state within this monitoring time.
Note:
F-DI: Failsafe Digital Input
p10003
SI forced checking procedure timer / SI FrcdCkProcTimer
TM54F_MA
Description:
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2848
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0.00 [h]
Max
8760.00 [h]
Factory setting
8.00 [h]
Sets the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop).
Within the parameterized time, the digital inputs/outputs must must have been subject to a forced checking procedure at least once. The forced checking procedure is started with BI: p10007 = 0/1 signal.
Dependency:
Refer to: p10001, p10007, p10046
r10004[0...1]
SI actual checksum TM54F parameters / SI act CRC TM54F
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the actual checksum of the checksum-checked parameters for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
p10005[0...1]
SI reference checksum TM54F parameters / SI ref CRC TM54F
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Displays the reference checksum of the checksum-checked parameters for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).

1-831
Parameter
List of parameters
p10006
SI acknowledgement internal event input terminal / SI ackn int event
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Select a safety-relevant digital input for the signal "acknowledge internal event" (internal fault).
The signal is transferred to the corresponding control signal of all drives. The falling edge at this input resets the
status "internal event" in the drives.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
p10007
BI: SI forced checking procedure F-DO 0 ... 3 signal source / SI frc_chF-DO s_sc
TM54F_MA
Description:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2848
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0
Sets the signal source to trigger the test stop (e.g. digital input of the Control Unit or one of the other Terminal Modules).
The test stop is triggered on a 0/1 signal edge.
The TM54F must not be in commissioning mode at this point (p0010 = 0).
Dependency:
Refer to: p10001, p10003, p10041, p10046
Notice:
Digital inputs of the TM54F must not be used to trigger the test stop.
p10008
SI operating mode TM54F / SI op_mode TM54F
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
1
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the operating mode for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Value:
0:
1:
Note:
Parameter being prepared. For this firmware version, the function interface is not supported.
1-832
Function interface
Control interface

Parameter
List of parameters
p10010[0...5]
SI drive object assignment / SI drv_obj assign
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
62
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the drive object number for the drives that are available.
Index:
[0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Notice:
If, for a drive, Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is activated (p9601 = 5), its drive object number must be set in an
index.
Note:
p10011[0...5]
SI drive group assignment / SI drv_gr assign
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2848
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1
Max
4
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the drive group for the drives that are available.
A drive group is a combination of several drives with the same types of behavior.
Index:
[0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
p10012[0...5]
SI Motor Module Node Identifier Word 1 / SI MM Node ID 1
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Sets the current Node Identifier (word 1, bit 0 ... 31) for the Motor Modules.
Index:
[0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Dependency:
Refer to: p10013, p10014

1-833
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
The Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in the following 3 parameters.

p10012[0] word 1 (bit 0 ... 31) for Motor Module 1
...
...
...
p10013[0...5]
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Dependency:
Refer to: p10012, p10014
Note:
The complete Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in p10012, p10013 and p10014.
p10014[0...5]
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Index:
[0] = Drive 1
[1] = Drive 2
[2] = Drive 3
[3] = Drive 4
[4] = Drive 5
[5] = Drive 6
Dependency:
Refer to: p10012, p10013
Note:
The complete Node Identifier (96 bit) is represented in p10012, p10013 and p10014.
1-834

Parameter
List of parameters
p10017
SI digital inputs debounce time / SI DI t_debounce
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
1.00 [ms]
Max
100.00 [ms]
Factory setting
1.00 [ms]
Description:
Parameter setting for the debounce time of the F-DIs and single-channel DIs of the TM54F. The debounce time is
rounded to whole mS. The debounce time indicates the maximum duration of a fault pulse on the FDIs, so that
there are no negative effects on the SGEs.
Example:
Debounce time 1mS : Fault pulses of 1mS are filtered; only pulses longer than 2mS are processed.
Debounce time 3mS : Fault pulses of 3mS are filtered; only pulses longer than 4mS are processed.
p10020[0...3]
SI special operating mode selection / SI spec op sel
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
3
Factory setting
1
Description:
Sets the special operating mode for the operating mode "function interface".
0 = Inactive
1 = Safe Operating Stop with braking (SS2)
2 = Safe Operating Stop without braking (SOS)
3 = Safely reduced speed without standstill (SLS)
4 = Safely reduced speed with agreement (SS2 --> SLS)
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Dependency:
Refer to: p10008
Note:
SS2: Safe Stop 2
p10021[0...3]
SI Emergency Stop stop response / SI Emergency Stop
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
2
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the stop response for the drive group for Emergency Stop.
The input terminal for Emergency Stop is set in p10038.
0 = Stop reaction STO
1 = Stop reaction SS1
2 = Stop reaction SS2

1-835
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Dependency:
Refer to: p10008, p10038
Note:
p10022[0...3]
SI STO input terminal / SI STO DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal for STO (operating mode "control interface").
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:
Re value = 0:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
No terminal assigned, safety function always active.

Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, safety function always inactive.
p10023[0...3]
SI SS1 input terminal / SI SS1 DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Assignment of the input terminals for input SS1 (operating mode = control interface)
Description, refer to P10022
1-836

Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:
SS1: Safe Stop 1

Re value = 0:
Re value = 255:
p10024[0...3]
SI SS2 input terminal / SI SS2 DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Assignment of the input terminals for input SS2 (operating mode = control interface).
Description, refer to p10022.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:
SS2: Safe Stop 2

Re value = 0:
Re value = 255:

1-837
Parameter
List of parameters
p10025[0...3]
SI SOS input terminal / SI SOS DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Assignment of the input terminals for input SOS (operating mode = control interface)
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:

Re value = 0:
Re value = 255:
p10026[0...3]
SI SLS input terminal / SI SLS DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Assignment of the input terminals for input SLS (operating mode = control interface)
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
1-838
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact

Parameter
List of parameters
Note:

Re value = 0:
Re value = 255:
p10027[0...3]
SI SLS_Limit(1) input terminal / SI SLS_Limit(1) DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal for SLS_Limit bit 0 (operating mode "control interface").
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, selection bit remains statically at "0".
Re value = 255:
p10028[0...3]
SI SLS_Limit(2) input terminal / SI SLS_Limit(2) DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal for SLS_Limit bit 1 (operating mode "control interface").
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact

1-839
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:

Re value = 0:
Re value = 255:
p10036[0...3]
SI special operating mode input terminal / SI spec op DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal for "special operating mode" (operating mode "function interface").
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, static special operation.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, static normal operation.
1-840

Parameter
List of parameters
p10037[0...3]
SI agreement input terminal / SI agreement DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal for "agreement" (operating mode "function interface").
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Note:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, no static agreement.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, static agreement.
p10038[0...3]
SI Emergency Stop input terminal / SI Emer Stop DI
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 4
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
255
Factory setting
0
Description:
Sets the input terminal for input "Emergency Stop" (operating mode "function interface").
The behavior of this input signal is set in p10021.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
255:
Statically active
F-DI 0 (X521.2/3/6)
F-DI 1 (X521.4/5/7)
F-DI 2 (X522.1/2/7)
F-DI 3 (X522.3/4/8)
F-DI 4 (X522.5/6/9)
F-DI 5 (X531.2/3/6)
F-DI 6 (X531.4/5/7)
F-DI 7 (X532.1/2/7)
F-DI 8 (X532.3/4/8)
F-DI 9 (X532.5/6/9)
Statically inact
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Dependency:
Refer to: p10008, p10021

1-841
Parameter
List of parameters
Note:
Re value = 0:
No terminal assigned, "Emergency Stop" statically active.
Re value = 255:
No terminal assigned, no "Emergency Stop" statically active.
p10039[0...3]
SI Safe State signal selection / SI Safe State Sel
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2856
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0001 bin
Description:
Sets the signals for the drive group specific signal "Safe State".
Bit 0 = Power_removed
Bit 1 = SS1_active
Bit 2 = SS2_active
Bit 3 = SOS_active
Bit 4 = SLS_active
Bit 5 = Reserved
Index:
[0] = Drive group 1

[1] = Drive group 2
[2] = Drive group 3
[3] = Drive group 4
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
Note:
Bit = 0 signal --> not selected
Signal name
Power_removed
SS1_active
SS2_active
SOS_active
SLS_active
1 signal
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
Selected
0 signal
Not selected
Not selected
Not selected
Not selected
Not selected
FP
-
Bit = 1 signal --> selected

The selected signals (high-active) are OR'ed The result of the logic operation results in the status "Safe State".
p10040
SI F-DI input mode / SI F-DI inp_mode
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the input mode for the safety-relevant input terminals of terminal series 2.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Note:
Only an NC contact can be connected to terminals that are not listed in the selection.
1-842
Signal name
F-DI 0, DI 1+ (X521.3)
F-DI 1, DI 3+ (X521.5)
F-DI 2, DI 5+ (X522.2)
F-DI 3, DI 7+ (X522.4)
F-DI 4, DI 9+ (X522.6)
F-DI 5, DI 11+ (X531.3)
F-DI 6, DI 13+ (X531.5)
F-DI 7, DI 15+ (X532.2)
F-DI 8, DI 17+ (X532.4)
F-DI 9, DI 19+ (X532.6)
1 signal
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
NO contact
0 signal
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
NC contact
FP
2850
2850
2850
2850
2850
2851
2851
2851
2851
2851

Parameter
List of parameters
p10041
SI F-DI enable for test / SI F-DI enab test
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2848
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Enable signal for the integration of F-DI in the test (forced checking procedure) of the sensor power supply.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Note:
p10042[0...5]
SI F-DO 0 signal sources / SI F-DO 0 S_src
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2857
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
779
Factory setting
0
Signal name
F-DI 0, power supply L1+
Description:
Sets the signal sources for F-DO 0.
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
257:
258:
259:
260:
261:
262:
263:
264:
265:
266:
267:
1 signal
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
0 signal
No test
No test
No test
No test
No test
No test
No test
No test
No test
No test
FP
-
The 6 signal sources in p10042[0...5] are AND'ed and the result is output at F-DO 0.
No function
Drive group 1 STO active
Drive group 1 SS1 active
Drive group 1 SOS active
Drive group 1 SLS active
Drive group 1 SSM feedback signal active
Drive group 1 safe state
Drive group 1 SOS selected
Drive group 1 internal event
Drive group 1 active SLS stage bit 0

1-843
Parameter
List of parameters
513:
514:
515:
516:
517:
518:
519:
520:
521:
522:
523:
769:
770:
771:
772:
773:
774:
775:
776:
777:
778:
779:

Index:
[0] = AND logic operation input 1

Note:
F-DO: Failsafe Digital Output
p10043[0...5]
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2857
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
779
Factory setting
0
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
1-844
No function

Parameter
List of parameters
257:
258:
259:
260:
261:
262:
263:
264:
265:
266:
267:
513:
514:
515:
516:
517:
518:
519:
520:
521:
522:
523:
769:
770:
771:
772:
773:
774:
775:
776:
777:
778:
779:

Index:

Note:
p10044[0...5]
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2857
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
779
Factory setting
0
Description:


1-845
Parameter
List of parameters
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
257:
258:
259:
260:
261:
262:
263:
264:
265:
266:
267:
513:
514:
515:
516:
517:
518:
519:
520:
521:
522:
523:
769:
770:
771:
772:
773:
774:
775:
776:
777:
778:
779:
Index:

Note:
1-846
No function

Parameter
List of parameters
p10045[0...5]
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2857
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0
Max
779
Factory setting
0
Description:
Value:
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
257:
258:
259:
260:
261:
262:
263:
264:
265:
266:
267:
513:
514:
515:
516:
517:
518:
519:
520:
521:
522:
523:
769:
770:
771:
772:
773:
774:
775:
776:
777:
778:
779:
No function

1-847
Parameter
List of parameters
Index:

Note:
p10046
SI test sensor feedback signal input DI 20 ... 23 / SI test sens FS
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2848
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
0000 bin
Description:
Sets the test of the feedback line for forced checking procedure.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Note:
p10047[0...3]
SI selection of test mode for test stop / SI test mode sel.
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0001 bin
Max
0011 bin
Factory setting
0010 bin
Signal name
Read back F-DO 0 in DI 20
1 signal
Test active
Test active
Test active
Test active
0 signal
No test
No test
No test
No test
FP
-
Value:
1:
2:
3:
Note:
When test mode 1 is being used, too great a load resistance on the part of the load between DO+ and DO- can lead
to problems during the test stop. It is, therefore, important to make sure that the load resistance on an individual
FDO does not exceed 10 Kohm.
1-848
Test mode 1 evaluation of int. diagnostic signal (passive load)

Test mode 2 read back F-DO in DI (relay circuit)
Test mode 3 read back F-DO in DI (actuator with feedback signal)

Parameter
List of parameters
r10051.0...9
CO/BO: SI digital inputs status / SI DI status
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the single-channel, logical, and debounced status of the safety digital inputs F-DI 0 .. 9 at Terminal Module
54F (TM54F).
If a safety function is assigned to an input (e.g. via p10022), then the following applies:
- logical "0": Safety function is selected
- logical "1": Safety function is deselected
The interrelationship between the logical level and the external voltage level at the input depends on the parameterization (refer to p10040) of the input as either NC or NO contact and is aligned to the use of a safety function:
With 24 V at the input, NC contacts have a logical "1" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "0" level.
This means that an NC/NC contact parameterization of 0 V at both inputs of the F-DI selects the safety function, for
24 V at both inputs, deselects the safety function.
With 24 V at the input, NO contacts have a logical "0" level, for 0 V at the input, a logical "1" level.
This means that for an NC/NO contact parameterization, the level 0 V/24 V selects the safety function, the level 24
V/0 V deselects the safety function.
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Signal name
F-DI 0
F-DI 1
F-DI 2
F-DI 3
F-DI 4
F-DI 5
F-DI 6
F-DI 7
F-DI 8
F-DI 9
Dependency:
Refer to: p10017, p10040
Note:
1 signal
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
Logical 1
0 signal
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
Logical 0
FP
2850
2850
2850
2850
2850
2851
2851
2851
2851
2851
r10052.0...3
CO/BO: SI digital outputs status / SI DO status
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital outputs at the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
Note:
Signal name
DO 0
DO 1
DO 2
DO 3
1 signal
High
High
High
High

0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
2853
2853
2853
2853
1-849
Parameter
List of parameters
r10053.0...3
CO/BO: SI digital inputs 20 ... 23 status / SI DI 20...23 stat
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2848
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the digital inputs at the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
r10054
SI TM54F failsafe events active / SI failsafe act
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Signal name
DI 20
DI 21
DI 22
DI 23
1 signal
High
High
High
High
0 signal
Low
Low
Low
Low
FP
2853
2853
2853
2853
Displays the events that lead to the transfer of failsafe signals to all drives assigned to the TM54F. If the second
channel of the TM54F transmits failsafe signals, then these are synchronized to the other channel.
Possibilities of resolving the situation:
- error during test stop: correctly perform the test stop.
- internal software error: no possibility of resolving this problem, POWER ON.
- internal synchronization problem: no possibility of resolving this problem, POWER ON.
- all other causes: remove the cause of the error and carry out a safety-relevant acknowledgement (p10006).
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
31
Signal name
Commissioning mode active (p0010 = 95)
Checksum error of the safety parameters
Internal synchronization problem within
RM54F
Overvoltage in the TM54F
Undervoltage in the TM54F
Error at test stop
Error for data cross-check within TM54F
Overvoltage in the TM54F
Failsafe events active on another channel
1 signal
Yes
Yes
Yes
0 signal
No
No
No
FP
2847
-
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
r10055
SI TM54F communication status drive-specific / SI comm_stat drv
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2846
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the communication status of the individual drives with the the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
For r10055 = 0, the following applies:
All drives assigned in p10010 communicate with the TM54F.
1-850

Parameter
List of parameters
Bit field:
Bit
00
01
02
03
04
05
Signal name
Communication between drive 1 and
TM54F
TM54F
TM54F
TM54F
TM54F
TM54F
1 signal
Not configured
0 signal
Configured
FP
-
Not configured
Configured
Not configured
Configured
Not configured
Configured
Not configured
Configured
Not configured
Configured
r10056.0
CO/BO: SI Status / SI stat
TM54F_MA
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the status of the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Bit field:
Bit
00
p10061
SI password input TM54F / SI password inp
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: T
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Signal name
Test stop status
1 signal
Active
0 signal
Inactive
FP
-
Enters the Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
This password is required to change the safety-relevant parameters.
p10062
SI password new TM54F / SI password new
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Enters the new Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Dependency:
A change made to the Safety Integrated password must be acknowledged in the following parameter:
Refer to: p10063

1-851
Parameter
List of parameters
p10063
SI password acknowledgement TM54F / SI ackn password
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: 2847
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
0000 hex
Max
FFFF FFFF hex
Factory setting
0000 hex
Description:
Acknowledgement of the new Safety Integrated password for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Dependency:
Refer to: p10062
Note:
The new password entered into p10062 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge.
p10062 = p10063 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowledged.
r10090[0...3]
SI TM54F version / SI TM54F version
TM54F_MA,
TM54F_SL
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays the Safety Integrated version for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Index:

Dependency:
Refer to: r9390, r9590, r9770, r9870, r9890
Note:
Example:
r10090[0] = 2, r10090[1] = 60, r10090[2] = 1, r10090[3] = 0 --> SI TM54F version V02.60.01.00
r61000[0...239]
PROFINET Name of Station / PN Name of Station
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
Displays PROFINET Name of Station.
Notice:
r61001[0...3]
PROFINET IP of Station / PN IP of Station
CU_G_G130
(PROFINET),
CU_G_G150
(PROFINET)
Can be changed: -
Calculated: -
Access level: 3
Dynamic index: -
Func. diagram: -
P-Group: -
Units group: -
Unit selection: -
Scaling: -
Expert list: 1
Min
-
Max
-
Factory setting
-
Description:
1-852
Displays PROFINET IP of Station.

Parameter
1.3
1.3.1
Parameters for command data sets (CDS)

The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the command data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: CDS
p0641[0...n]
CI: Current limit, variable / Curr lim var
p0700[0...n]
p0820[0...n]
p0821[0...n]
p0822[0...n]
p0823[0...n]
p0824[0...n]
p0828[0...n]
BI: Motor changeover, feedback signal / Mot_chng fdbk sig
p0840[0...n]
BI: ON/OFF1 / ON/OFF1
p0844[0...n]
BI: 1. OFF2 / 1. OFF2
p0845[0...n]
BI: 2. OFF2 / 2. OFF2
p0848[0...n]
BI: 1. OFF3 / 1. OFF3
p0849[0...n]
BI: 2. OFF3 / 2. OFF3
p0852[0...n]
BI: Operation enable / Operation enable
p0854[0...n]
p0855[0...n]
BI: Unconditionally release holding brake / Uncond open brake
p0856[0...n]
BI: Speed controller enable / n_ctrl enable
p0858[0...n]
BI: Unconditionally close holding brake / Uncond close brake
p1000[0...n]
p1020[0...n]
p1021[0...n]
p1022[0...n]
p1023[0...n]
p1035[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer setpoint raise / Mop raise
p1036[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Mop lower
p1039[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer inversion / Mop inversion
p1041[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer manual/automatic / Mop manual/auto
p1042[0...n]
CI: Motorized potentiometer automatic setpoint / Mop auto setpoint
p1043[0...n]
BI: Motorized potentiometer accept setpoint / Mop accept set val
p1044[0...n]
CI: Motorized potentiometer setting value / Mop set val
p1051[0...n]
CI: Speed limit RFG positive direction of rotation / n_limit RFG pos
p1052[0...n]
CI: Speed limit RFG negative direction of rotation / n_limit RFG neg
p1055[0...n]
p1056[0...n]
p1070[0...n]
CI: Main setpoint / Main setpoint
p1071[0...n]
CI: Main setpoint scaling / Main setp scal
p1075[0...n]
CI: Supplementary setpoint / Suppl setpoint
p1076[0...n]
CI: Supplementary setpoint scaling / Suppl setp scal
p1085[0...n]
CI: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1088[0...n]
CI: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1110[0...n]
BI: Inhibit negative direction / Inhib neg dir
p1111[0...n]
BI: Inhibit positive direction / Inhib pos dir
p1113[0...n]
BI: Setpoint inversion / Setp inv
p1122[0...n]
BI: Bypass ramp-function generator / Bypass RFG

1-853
Parameter
p1140[0...n]
1-854
BI: Ramp-function generator enable / RFG enable
p1141[0...n]
BI: Continue ramp-function generator / Continue RFG
p1142[0...n]
BI: Speed setpoint enable / n_set enable
p1143[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator, accept setting value / Accept RFG set val
p1144[0...n]
CI: Ramp-function generator setting value / RFG setting value
p1155[0...n]
p1160[0...n]
p1201[0...n]
BI: Flying restart enable signal source / Fly_res enab S_src
p1230[0...n]
BI: Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation / ASC act
p1235[0...n]
BI: External armature short-circuit, contactor feedback signal / ASC ext feedback
p1330[0...n]
CI: V/f control independent voltage setpoint / Vf V_set independ.
p1356[0...n]
CI: V/f control, angular setpoint / Vf ang setpoint
p1437[0...n]
CI: Speed controller, reference model I component input / n_ctrRefMod I_comp
p1440[0...n]
CI: Speed controller speed actual value / n_ctrl n_act
p1455[0...n]
CI: Speed controller P gain adaptation signal / n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp
p1466[0...n]
CI: Speed controller P-gain scaling / n_ctrl Kp scal
p1475[0...n]
CI: Speed controller torque setting value for motor holding brake / n_ctrl M_sv MHB
p1476[0...n]
BI: Speed controller hold integrator / n_ctrl integ stop
p1477[0...n]
BI: Speed controller set integrator value / n_ctrl integ set
p1478[0...n]
CI: Speed controller integrator setting value / n_ctr integ_setVal
p1479[0...n]
CI: Speed controller integrator setting value scaling / n_ctrl I_val scal
p1486[0...n]
CI: Droop compensation torque / Droop M_comp
p1492[0...n]
BI: Droop feedback enable / Droop enable
p1495[0...n]
CI: Acceleration pre-control / a_prectrl
p1497[0...n]
CI: Moment of inertia, scaling / M_mom inert scal
p1500[0...n]
p1501[0...n]
BI: Change over between closed-loop speed/torque control / Changeov n/M_ctrl
p1503[0...n]
CI: Torque setpoint / M_set
p1511[0...n]
p1512[0...n]
CI: Supplementary torque 1 scaling / M_suppl 1 scal
p1513[0...n]
p1522[0...n]
CI: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1523[0...n]
CI: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1528[0...n]
CI: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1529[0...n]
CI: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1540[0...n]
CI: Torque limit speed controller upper scaling / M_max n-ctr upScal
p1541[0...n]
CI: Torque limit. speed controller lower scaling / M_max nctr lowScal
p1545[0...n]
BI: Activates travel to a fixed stop / TfS activation
p1551[0...n]
BI: Torque limit variable/fixed signal source / M_lim var/fixS_src
p1552[0...n]
CI: Torque limit upper scaling without offset / M_max up w/o offs
p1554[0...n]
CI: Torque limit lower scaling without offset / M_max low w/o offs
p1555[0...n]
CI: Power limit / P_max
p1569[0...n]
p1571[0...n]
CI: Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp
p1640[0...n]
CI: Excitation current actual value / I_exc_act val
p2103[0...n]
p2104[0...n]
p2105[0...n]
p2106[0...n]
p2107[0...n]
p2108[0...n]
p2112[0...n]
p2116[0...n]

Parameter
1.3.2
p2117[0...n]
p2144[0...n]
BI: Motor stall monitoring enable (negated) / Mot stall enab neg
p2148[0...n]
BI: Ramp-function generator active / HLG active
p2151[0...n]
CI: Speed setpoint for messages/signals / n_set for msg
p2154[0...n]
CI: Speed setpoint 2 / n_set 2
p2200[0...n]
BI: Technology controller enable / Tec_ctrl enable
p2220[0...n]
p2221[0...n]
p2222[0...n]
p2223[0...n]
p2235[0...n]
BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer raise setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop raise
p2236[0...n]
BI: Technology controller motorized potentiometer lower setpoint / Tec_ctrl mop lower
p2253[0...n]
p2254[0...n]
p2264[0...n]
CI: Technology controller actual value / Tec_ctrl act val
p2286[0...n]
BI: Hold technology controller integrator / Tec_ctr integ stop
p2289[0...n]
CI: Technology controller pre-control signal / Tec_ctrl prectrl
p2296[0...n]
CI: Technology controller output scaling / Tec_ctrl outp scal
p2297[0...n]
CI: Technology controller maximum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl m_lm s_sc
p2298[0...n]
CI: Technology controller minimum limit signal source / Tec_ctrl min_l s_s
p2299[0...n]
CI: Technology controller limit offset / Tech_ctrl lim offs
p3111[0...n]
p3112[0...n]
p3784[0...n]
BI: Sync-line-drive external increase voltage / Sync ext V incr
p3785[0...n]
BI: Sync-line-drive external decrease voltage / Sync ext V decr
p3802[0...n]
BI: Sync-line-drive enable / Sync enable
Parameters for drive data sets (DDS)

The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the drive data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: DDS
p0186[0...n]
Motor Data Sets (MDS) number / MDS number
p0187[0...n]
p0188[0...n]
p0189[0...n]
p0340[0...n]
Automatic calculation, motor/control parameters / Calc auto par
p0572[0...n]
Activate inhibit list / Act inhib list
p0578[0...n]
Calculate parameters that are dependent on the technology/units / Calc tec par
p0640[0...n]
Current limit / Current limit
p1001[0...n]
p1002[0...n]
p1003[0...n]
p1004[0...n]
p1005[0...n]
p1006[0...n]
p1007[0...n]
p1008[0...n]
p1009[0...n]
p1010[0...n]
p1011[0...n]
p1012[0...n]

1-855
Parameter
1-856
p1013[0...n]
p1014[0...n]
p1015[0...n]
p1030[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer configuration / Mop configuration
p1037[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer maximum speed / Mop n_max
p1038[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer minimum speed / Mop n_min
p1040[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer starting value / Mop start value
p1047[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Mop ramp-up time
p1048[0...n]
Motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Mop ramp-down time
p1058[0...n]
p1059[0...n]
p1063[0...n]
Speed limit setpoint channel / n_limit setp
p1080[0...n]
Minimum speed / Minimum speed
p1082[0...n]
Maximum speed / n_Max
p1083[0...n]
CO: Speed limit in positive direction of rotation / n_limit pos
p1086[0...n]
CO: Speed limit in negative direction of rotation / n_limit neg
p1091[0...n]
p1092[0...n]
p1093[0...n]
p1094[0...n]
p1101[0...n]
Skip speed bandwidth / n_skip bandwidth
p1120[0...n]
Ramp-function generator ramp-up time / RFG ramp-up time
p1121[0...n]
Ramp-function generator ramp-down time / RFG ramp-down time
p1130[0...n]
Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time / RFG t_start_round
p1131[0...n]
Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time / RFG t_end_delay
p1134[0...n]
Ramp-function generator rounding-off type / RFG round-off type
p1135[0...n]
OFF3 ramp-down time / OFF3 t_RD
p1136[0...n]
OFF3 initial rounding-off time / RFGOFF3 t_strt_rnd
p1137[0...n]
OFF3 final rounding-off time / RFG OFF3 t_end_del
p1145[0...n]
Ramp-function generator tracking intensity. / RFG track intens
p1148[0...n]
Ramp-function gen., tolerance for ramp-up and ramp-down active / RFG tol HL/RL act
p1151[0...n]
Ramp-function generator configuration / RFG config
p1189[0...n]
Speed setpoint configuration / n_ctrl config
p1200[0...n]
FlyRest oper mode / FlyRest op_mode
p1202[0...n]
FlyRest srch curr / FlyRest I_srch
p1203[0...n]
Flying restart search rate factor / FlyRst v_Srch Fact
p1226[0...n]
Threshold for zero speed detection / n_standst n_thresh
p1240[0...n]
Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration / Vdc_ctrl config
p1243[0...n]
Vdc_max controller dynamic factor / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1245[0...n]
p1247[0...n]
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1249[0...n]
Vdc_max controller speed threshold / Vdc_max n_thresh
p1250[0...n]
p1251[0...n]
p1252[0...n]
Vdc controller rate time / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1255[0...n]
Vdc_min controller time threshold / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1256[0...n]
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) / Vdc_min response
p1257[0...n]
Vdc_min controller speed threshold / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1262[0...n]
Bypass dead time / Bypass t_dead
p1280[0...n]
Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f) / Vdc_ctr config V/f
p1283[0...n]
Vdc_max controller dynamic factor (V/f) / Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1285[0...n]
p1287[0...n]
Vdc_min controller dynamic factor (kinetic buffering) (V/f) / Vdc_min dyn_factor

Parameter
p1288[0...n]
Vdc_max controller feedback coupling factor ramp-fct. gen. (V/f) / Vdc_max factor RFG
p1289[0...n]
Vdc_max controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_max n_thresh
p1290[0...n]
Vdc controller proportional gain (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1291[0...n]
Vdc controller integral time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1292[0...n]
Vdc controller rate time (V/f) / Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1293[0...n]
Vdc min controller output limit (V/f) / Vdc_min outp_lim
p1295[0...n]
Vdc_min controller time threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min t_thresh
p1296[0...n]
Vdc_min controller response (kinetic buffering) (V/f / Vdc_min response
p1297[0...n]
Vdc_min controller speed threshold (V/f) / Vdc_min n_thresh
p1300[0...n]
p1302[0...n]
V/f control configuration / V/f configuration
p1310[0...n]
Voltage boost permanent / V_boost perm
p1311[0...n]
Voltage boost at acceleration / V_boost accelerate
p1312[0...n]
Voltage boost when starting / V_boost starting
p1320[0...n]
V/f control programmable characteristic frequency 1 / Uf char f1
p1321[0...n]
p1322[0...n]
p1323[0...n]
p1324[0...n]
p1325[0...n]
p1326[0...n]
p1327[0...n]
p1333[0...n]
V/f control FCC starting frequency / V/f FCC f_start
p1334[0...n]
V/f control slip compensation starting frequency / Slip comp start
p1335[0...n]
Slip compensation, scaling / Slip comp scal
p1336[0...n]
Slip compensation limit value / Slip comp lim val
p1338[0...n]
V/f mode resonance damping gain / Vf Res_damp gain
p1339[0...n]
V/f mode resonance damping filter time constant / Vf Res_damp T
p1340[0...n]
I_max frequency controller proportional gain / I_max_ctrl Kp
p1341[0...n]
I_max frequency controller integral time / I_max_ctrl Tn
p1345[0...n]
I_max voltage controller proportional gain / I_max_V_ctrl Kp
p1346[0...n]
I_max voltage controller integral time / I_max_V_ctrl Tn
p1349[0...n]
V/f mode resonance damping maximum frequency / Vf res_damp F_max
p1350[0...n]
Soft starting / Soft starting
p1351[0...n]
CO: Motor holding brake starting frequency / Brake f_start
p1358[0...n]
Angular difference, symmetrizing, actual angle / Sym act angle
p1400[0...n]
Speed control configuration / n_ctrl config
p1401[0...n]
Flux control configuration / Flux ctrl config
p1402[0...n]
Closed-loop current control and motor model configuration / I_ctrl config
p1416[0...n]
Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant / n_set_filt 1 T
p1428[0...n]
Speed pre-control balancing dead time / n_prectrBal t_dead
p1429[0...n]
Speed pre-control balancing time constant / n_prectr bal T
p1433[0...n]
Speed controller reference model natural frequency / n_ctrl RefMod fn
p1434[0...n]
Speed controller reference model damping / n_ctrl RefMod D
p1435[0...n]
Speed controller reference model dead time / n_ctrRefMod t_dead
p1441[0...n]
Actual speed smoothing time / n_ist T_smooth
p1442[0...n]
Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time / n_ctr n_act T_smth
p1451[0...n]
Motor model speed actual value smoothing time SLVC / Mot_mod n_act t_sm
p1452[0...n]
Speed controller speed actual value smoothing time (SLVC) / n_C n_act T_s SLVC
p1456[0...n]
Speed controller P gain adaptation lower starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKpLow
p1457[0...n]
Speed controller P gain adaptation upper starting point / n_ctrl AdaptKp up
p1458[0...n]
Adaptation factor, lower / Adapt_factor lower
p1459[0...n]
Adaptation factor, upper / Adapt_factor upper

1-857
Parameter
1-858
p1460[0...n]
Speed controller P gain adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl Kp n lower
p1461[0...n]
Speed controller Kp adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Kp n upper
p1462[0...n]
Speed controller integral time adaptation speed lower / n_ctrl Tn n lower
p1463[0...n]
Speed controller Tn adaptation speed, upper scaling / n_ctrl Tn n upper
p1464[0...n]
Speed controller adaptation speed, lower / n_ctrl n lower
p1465[0...n]
Speed controller adaptation speed, upper / n_ctrl n upper
p1470[0...n]
Speed controller encoderless operation P-gain / n_ctrl SLVC Kp
p1472[0...n]
Speed controller encoderless operation integral time / n_ctrl SLVC Tn
p1487[0...n]
Droop compensation torque scaling / Droop M_comp scal
p1488[0...n]
Droop input source / Droop input source
p1489[0...n]
Droop feedback scaling / Droop scaling
p1496[0...n]
Acceleration pre-control scaling / a_before scaling
p1499[0...n]
Accelerating for torque control, scaling / a for M_ctrl scal
p1514[0...n]
Supplementary torque 2 scaling / M_suppl 2 scal
p1517[0...n]
Accelerating torque smoothing time constant / M_accel T_smooth
p1520[0...n]
CO: Torque limit upper / M_max upper
p1521[0...n]
CO: Torque limit lower / M_max lower
p1524[0...n]
CO: Torque limit upper scaling / M_max upper scal
p1525[0...n]
CO: Torque limit lower scaling / M_max lower scal
p1530[0...n]
Power limit motoring / P_max mot
p1531[0...n]
Power limit regenerative / P_max gen
p1556[0...n]
Power limit scaling / P_max_scale
p1570[0...n]
p1572[0...n]
Supplementary flux setpoint / Suppl flux setp
p1573[0...n]
Flux threshold value magnetizing / Flux thresh magnet
p1574[0...n]
Voltage reserve dynamic / V_reserve dyn
p1576[0...n]
Flux boost, adaptation speed, lower / Flux boost n lower
p1577[0...n]
Flux boost adaptation speed, upper / Flux boost n upper
p1580[0...n]
Efficiency optimization / Efficiency opt.
p1582[0...n]
Flux setpoint smoothing time / Flux setp T_smth
p1584[0...n]
Field weakening operation, flux setpoint smoothing time / Field weak T_smth
p1585[0...n]
Flux actual value, smoothing time / Flux actVal T_smth
p1586[0...n]
Field weakening characteristic, scaling / Field weak scal
p1590[0...n]
Flux controller P gain / Flux controller Kp
p1592[0...n]
Flux controller integral time / Flux controller Tn
p1594[0...n]
Field-weakening controller, P gain / Field_ctrl Kp
p1596[0...n]
Field weakening controller integral-action time / Field_ctrl Tn
p1599[0...n]
Flux controller, excitation current difference / Flux ctr I_exc_dif
p1600[0...n]
P flux controller, P gain / P flux ctrl Kp
p1605[0...n]
Pulse technique pattern configuration / Pulse config
p1607[0...n]
Pulse technique stimulus / Pulse stimu
p1609[0...n]
Current setpoint for I/f operation / I_set I/f oper
p1610[0...n]
Torque setpoint static (SLVC) / M_set static
p1611[0...n]
Supplementary accelerating torque (SLVC) / M_suppl_accel
p1612[0...n]
Current setpoint magnetizing open-loop controlled / Id_set ctrl
p1616[0...n]
Current setpoint smoothing time / I_set T_smooth
p1619[0...n]
Setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / SetAct track thrsh
p1620[0...n]
Stator current, minimum / I_stator min
p1621[0...n]
Changeover speed, inner cos phi = 1 / n_chngov cos phi=1
p1622[0...n]
Field-generating current setpoint smoothing time constant / Id_setp T_smth
p1625[0...n]
Excitation current setpoint calibration / I_exc_setp cal
p1628[0...n]
Current model controller, dynamic factor / I_mod_ctr dyn_fact
p1629[0...n]
Current model controller P gain / I_mod_ctrl Kp

Parameter
p1630[0...n]
Current model controller integral time / I_ctrl Tn
p1642[0...n]
Minimum excitation current / Min I_exc
p1643[0...n]
Gain factor, minimum excitation current closed-loop control / Min I_exc Kp
p1653[0...n]
Current setpoint torque-generating smoothing time minimum / Isq_s T_smth min
p1654[0...n]
Curr. setpoint torque-gen. smoothing time field weakening range / Isq_s T_smth FW
p1656[0...n]
Activates current setpoint filter / I_setp_filt act
p1657[0...n]
p1658[0...n]
p1659[0...n]
p1660[0...n]
p1661[0...n]
p1662[0...n]
p1663[0...n]
p1664[0...n]
p1665[0...n]
p1666[0...n]
p1702[0...n]
Isd current controller pre-control scaling / Isd_ctr_prectrScal
p1703[0...n]
Isq current controller pre-control scaling / Isq_ctr_prectrScal
p1704[0...n]
Isq current controller pre-control EMF scaling / Isq_ctrl EMF scal
p1705[0...n]
Flux setpoint/actual value tracking threshold / Flux track thresh
p1715[0...n]
Current controller P gain / I_ctrl Kp
p1717[0...n]
Current controller integral-action time / I_ctrl Tn
p1726[0...n]
Quadrature arm decoupling, scaling / Transv_decpl scal
p1727[0...n]
Quadrature arm decoupling at voltage limit scaling / TrnsvDecplVmaxScal
p1740[0...n]
Gain resonance damping for encoderless closed loop control / Gain res_damp
p1744[0...n]
Motor model speed threshold stall detection / MotMod n_thr stall
p1745[0...n]
Motor model error threshold stall detection / MotMod ThreshStall
p1748[0...n]
Motor model lower changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Lower n_chngov
p1749[0...n]
Motor model upper changeover speed n_set -> n_act / Upper n_chgov
p1750[0...n]
Motor model configuration / MotMod config
p1752[0...n]
Motor model changeover speed operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgov enc
p1753[0...n]
Motor model changeover speed hysteresis operation with encoder / MotMod n_chgovHysE
p1754[0...n]
Flux angle difference smoothing time / Angle diff T_smth
p1755[0...n]
Motor model changeover speed encoderless operation / MotMod n_chgSnsorl
p1757[0...n]
Motor model w/o enc. op./cl.-loop controlled stab. controller Kp / MotMod w/o enc Kp
p1758[0...n]
Motor model changeover delay time closed/open-loop control / MotMod t cl_op
p1759[0...n]
Motor model changeover delay time open/closed loop control / MotMod t op_cl
p1760[0...n]
Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod wE n_ada Kp
p1761[0...n]
Motor model with encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod wE n_ada Tn
p1764[0...n]
Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Kp / MotMod woE n_adaKp
p1766[0...n]
Motor model voltage model calculation enable / V_mod calc enab
p1767[0...n]
Motor model without encoder speed adaptation Tn / MotMod woE n_adaTn
p1774[0...n]
Motor model, offset voltage compensation alpha / MotMod offs comp A
p1775[0...n]
Motor model, offset voltage compensation beta / MotMod offs comp B
p1780[0...n]
Motor model adaptation configuration / MotMod adapt conf
p1781[0...n]
Motor model Rs adaptation integral time / MotMod Rs Tn
r1782[0...n]
Motor model Rs adaptation corrective value / MotMod Rs corr
p1783[0...n]
Motor model Rs adaptation Kp / MotMod Rs Kp
p1785[0...n]
Motor model Lh adaptation Kp / MotMod Lh Kp
p1786[0...n]
Motor model Lh adaptation integral time / MotMod Lh Tn
r1787[0...n]
Motor model Lh adaptation corrective value / MotMod Lh corr
p1795[0...n]
Motor model kT adaptation integral time / MotMod kT Tn
r1797[0...n]
Motor model kT adaptation corrective value / MotMod kT corr

1-859
Parameter
1-860
p1798[0...n]
Motor model pulse technique speed adaptation Kp / MotMod pulses Kp
p1800[0...n]
Pulse frequency setpoint / Pulse freq setp
p1802[0...n]
Modulator mode / Modulator mode
p1803[0...n]
Maximum modulation depth / Modulat depth max
p1804[0...n]
Filter time constant smoothed modulation index / T_filt mod_idxSmth
p1806[0...n]
Filter time constant Vdc correction / T_filt Vdc_corr
p1811[0...n]
Pulse frequency wobbulation amplitude / Puls wobb ampl
p1820[0...n]
Reverse the output phase sequence / Outp_ph_seq rev
p1821[0...n]
Dir of rot / Dir of rot
p1840[0...n]
Actual value correction configuration / AVC config
p1845[0...n]
Actual value correction evaluation factor Lsig / ActV_corr FactLsig
p1846[0...n]
Actual value correction damping factor / ActV_corr D_factor
p1959[0...n]
p2140[0...n]
p2141[0...n]
p2142[0...n]
p2149[0...n]
Monitoring configuration / Monit config
p2150[0...n]
p2153[0...n]
Speed actual value filter time constant / n_act_filt T
p2155[0...n]
p2156[0...n]
On delay, comparison value reached / t_on cmpr val rchd
p2161[0...n]
p2162[0...n]
Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max / Hyst n_act>n_max
p2163[0...n]
p2164[0...n]
p2166[0...n]
Off delay n_act = n_set / t_del_off n_i=n_so
p2167[0...n]
Switch-on delay n_act = n_set / t_on n_act=n_set
p2174[0...n]
p2175[0...n]
Motor locked speed threshold / Mot lock n_thresh
p2177[0...n]
Motor locked delay time / Mot lock t_del
p2178[0...n]
Motor stalled delay time / Mot stall t_del
p2181[0...n]
Load monitoring response / Load monit resp
p2182[0...n]
p2183[0...n]
p2184[0...n]
p2185[0...n]
p2186[0...n]
p2187[0...n]
p2188[0...n]
p2189[0...n]
p2190[0...n]
p2192[0...n]
Load monitoring delay time / Load monit t_del
p2194[0...n]
p2195[0...n]
Torque utilization switch-off delay / M_util t_off
p2196[0...n]
Torque utilization scaling / M_util scal
p2201[0...n]
p2202[0...n]
p2203[0...n]
p2204[0...n]
p2205[0...n]
p2206[0...n]
p2207[0...n]
p2208[0...n]

Parameter
p2209[0...n]
p2210[0...n]
p2211[0...n]
p2212[0...n]
p2213[0...n]
p2214[0...n]
p2215[0...n]
p2216[0...n]
Technology controller fixed value selection method / Tec_ctr FixVal sel
p2230[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer configuration / Tec_ctr mop config
p2237[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer maximum value / Tec_ctrl mop max
p2238[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer minimum value / Tec_ctrl mop min
p2240[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer starting value / Tec_ctrl mop start
p2247[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-up time / Tec_ctr mop t_r-up
p2248[0...n]
Technology controller motorized potentiometer ramp-down time / Tec_ctrMop t_rdown
p2720[0...n]
Load gear configuration / Load gear config
p2721[0...n]
Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
p2722[0...n]
Load gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track tol
r2723[0...n]
CO: Load gear absolute value / Load gear abs_val
r2724[0...n]
CO: Load gear position difference / Load gear pos diff
p2900[0...n]
p2901[0...n]
p2930[0...n]
CO: Fixed value M [Nm] / Fixed value M [Nm]
p3201[0...n]
Excitation current outside the tolerance threshold value / I_exc n Tol thresh
p3202[0...n]
Excitation current outside the tolerance hysteresis / I_exc n Tol hyst
p3203[0...n]
Excitation current outside the tolerance delay time / I_exc n Tol t_del
p3204[0...n]
Flux outside the tolerance threshold value / Flux n tol thresh
p3205[0...n]
Flux outside the tolerance hysteresis / Flux n tol hyst
p3206[0...n]
Flux outside tolerance delay time / Flux n tol t_del
p3207[0...n]
Zero current signal threshold value / I_0_sig thresh
p3208[0...n]
Zero current signal hysteresis / I_0_sig hyst
p3209[0...n]
Zero current signal delay time / I_0_sig t_del
p3233[0...n]
Torque actual value filter, time constant / M_act_filt T
p3236[0...n]
p3237[0...n]
p3238[0...n]
OFF delay n_act_motor model = n_act external / t_del n_a = n_ext
p3800[0...n]
Sync-line-drive activation / Sync act
p3801[0...n]
Sync-line-drive, drive object number / Sync DO_No
p3806[0...n]
Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value / Sync f_diff thresh
p3809[0...n]
Sync-line-drive phase setpoint / Sync phase setp
p3811[0...n]
Sync-line-drive frequency limiting / Sync f_lim
p3813[0...n]
Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value / Sync Ph_sync thrsh
p3815[0...n]
Sync-line-drive voltage difference threshold value / Sync V_diff thresh
p3820[0...n]
p3821[0...n]
p3822[0...n]
p3823[0...n]
p3824[0...n]
p3825[0...n]
p3826[0...n]
p3827[0...n]
p3828[0...n]
p3829[0...n]
p3830[0...n]

1-861
Parameter
1.3.3
p3831[0...n]
p3832[0...n]
p3833[0...n]
p3834[0...n]
p3835[0...n]
p3836[0...n]
p3837[0...n]
p3838[0...n]
p3839[0...n]
p3846[0...n]
Friction characteristic record ramp-up/ramp-down time / Frict rec t_RFG
p3847[0...n]
Friction characteristic record warm-up time / Frict rec t_warm
r3925[0...n]
Identification final display / Ident final_disp
r3927[0...n]
r3928[0...n]
r3998[0...n]
First drive commissioning / First drv_comm
p7035[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control operating mode / Circ_I mode
p7036[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control proportional gain / Circ_I Kp
p7037[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control integral time / I_circ Tn
p7038[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current control limit / I_circ limit
Parameters for encoder data sets (EDS)

The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the encoder data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: EDS
1-862
p0141[0...n]
Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number / Enc_interf comp_no
p0142[0...n]
Encoder component number / Encoder comp_no
p0144[0...n]
Sensor Module detection via LED / SM detection LED
p0145[0...n]
Activate/deactivate encoder interface / Enc_intf act/deact
r0146[0...n]
Encoder interface active/inactive / Enc_intf act/inact
r0147[0...n]
Sensor Module EPROM data version / SM EEPROM version
r0148[0...n]
Sensor Module firmware version / SM FW version
p0400[0...n]
p0401[0...n]
Encoder type, OEM selection / Enc type OEM sel
p0402[0...n]
Gearbox type selection / Gearbox type sel
p0404[0...n]
Encoder configuration effective / Enc_config eff
p0405[0...n]
Square-wave encoder track A/B / Sq-wave enc A/B
p0407[0...n]
Linear encoder grid division / Enc grid div
p0408[0...n]
Rotary encoder pulse No. / Rot enc pulse No.
p0410[0...n]
p0411[0...n]
Measuring gear, configuration / Meas gear config
p0412[0...n]
Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual / Abs rot rev
p0413[0...n]
Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window / Pos track window
p0414[0...n]
Redundant coarse position value relevant bits (identified) / Relevant bits
p0415[0...n]
Gx_XIST1 Coarse position safe most significant bit (identified) / Gx_XIST1 safe MSB
p0418[0...n]
Fine resolution Gx_XIST1 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST1
p0419[0...n]
Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits) / Enc fine Gx_XIST2
p0420[0...n]
Encoder connection / Enc_connection
p0421[0...n]
Absolute encoder rotary multiturn resolution / Enc abs multiturn
p0422[0...n]
Absolute encoder linear measuring step resolution / Enc abs meas step
p0423[0...n]
Absolute encoder rotary singleturn resolution / Enc abs singleturn
p0424[0...n]
Encoder, linear zero mark distance / Enc lin ZM_dist

Parameter
p0425[0...n]
Encoder, rotary zero mark distance / Enc rot dist ZM
p0426[0...n]
Encoder zero mark differential distance / Enc diff distance
p0427[0...n]
Encoder SSI baud rate / Enc SSI baud rate
p0428[0...n]
Encoder SSI monoflop time / Enc SSI t_monoflop
p0429[0...n]
Encoder SSI configuration / Enc SSI config
p0430[0...n]
p0431[0...n]
Angular commutation offset / Ang_com offset
p0432[0...n]
Gearbox factor, encoder revolutions / Grbx_fact enc_rev
p0433[0...n]
Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions / Grbx_fact mot_rev
p0434[0...n]
Encoder SSI error bit / Enc SSI error bit
p0435[0...n]
Encoder SSI alarm bit / Enc SSI alarm bit
p0436[0...n]
Encoder SSI parity bit / Enc SSI parity bit
p0437[0...n]
p0438[0...n]
Squarewave encoder filter time / Enc t_filt
p0439[0...n]
Encoder ramp-up time / Enc ramp-up time
p0440[0...n]
Copy encoder serial number / Copy enc ser_no
p0441[0...n]
p0442[0...n]
p0443[0...n]
p0444[0...n]
p0445[0...n]
p0446[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits before the absolute value / Enc SSI bit before
p0447[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits absolute value / Enc SSI bit val
p0448[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits after the absolute value / Enc SSI bit after
p0449[0...n]
Encoder SSI number of bits, filler bits / Enc SSI fill bits
p0453[0...n]
Measuring time pulse encoder evaluation zero speed / t_meas enc_eva n_0
p0493[0...n]
p4600[0...n]
p4601[0...n]
p4602[0...n]
p4603[0...n]
p4670[0...n]
Analog sensor configuration / Ana_sens config
p4671[0...n]
Analog sensor input / Ana_sens inp
p4672[0...n]
Analog sensor channel A voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens A U at 0
p4673[0...n]
Analog sensor channel A voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens A U/per
p4674[0...n]
Analog sensor channel B voltage at actual value zero / Ana_sens B U at 0
p4675[0...n]
Analog sensor channel B voltage per encoder period / Ana_sens B U/per
p4676[0...n]
Analog sensor range limit threshold / Ana_sens lim thr
p4677[0...n]
Analog sensor LVDT configuration / Ana_sens LVDT conf
p4680[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring tolerance permissible / ZM_monit tol perm
p4681[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 positive / ZM tol lim 1 pos
p4682[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring, tolerance window limit 1 negative / ZM tol lim 1 neg
p4683[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold positive / ZM tol A_thr pos
p4684[0...n]
Zero mark monitoring tolerance window alarm threshold negative / ZM tol A_thr neg
p4685[0...n]
Speed actual value mean value generation / n_act mean val
p4686[0...n]
Zero mark minimum length / ZM min length

1-863
Parameter
1.3.4
Parameters for motor data sets (MDS)

The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the motor data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: MDS
1-864
p0131[0...n]
Motor component number / Mot comp_no
p0300[0...n]
Motor type selection / Mot type sel
p0301[0...n]
Motor code number selection / Mot code No. sel
r0302[0...n]
Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Motor code Mot DLQ
r0303[0...n]
Motor status word of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ / Mot ZSW Mot DLQ
p0304[0...n]
p0305[0...n]
Rated motor current / Mot I_rated
p0306[0...n]
Number of motors connected in parallel / Motor qty
p0307[0...n]
Rated motor power / Mot P_rated
p0308[0...n]
p0309[0...n]
Rated motor efficiency / Mot eta_rated
p0310[0...n]
Rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated
p0311[0...n]
Rated motor speed / Mot n_rated
r0313[0...n]
Motor pole pair number, actual (or calculated) / Mot PolePairNo act
p0314[0...n]
Motor pole pair number / Mot pole pair No.
p0316[0...n]
Motor torque constant / Mot kT
p0318[0...n]
Motor stall current / Mot I_standstill
p0320[0...n]
Motor rated magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rated
p0322[0...n]
Maximum motor speed / Mot n_max
p0323[0...n]
Maximum motor current / Mot I_max
p0324[0...n]
Winding maximum speed / Winding n_max
p0325[0...n]
Motor pole position identification current, 1st phase / Mot PolID I 1st ph
p0327[0...n]
Optimum motor load angle / Mot phi_load opt
p0328[0...n]
Motor reluctance torque constant / Mot kT_reluctance
p0329[0...n]
Motor pole position identification current / Mot PolID current
r0330[0...n]
Rated motor slip / Mot slip_rated
r0331[0...n]
Actual motor magnetizing current/short-circuit current / Mot I_mag_rtd act
r0332[0...n]
r0333[0...n]
Rated motor torque / Mot M_rated
r0334[0...n]
Actual motor-torque constant / Mot kT act
p0335[0...n]
Motor cooling type / Motor cooling type
r0336[0...n]
Actual rated motor frequency / Mot f_rated act
r0337[0...n]
Rated motor EMF / Mot EMF_rated
r0339[0...n]
p0341[0...n]
Motor moment of inertia / Mot M_mom of inert
p0342[0...n]
Ratio between the total and motor moment of inertia / Mot MomInert Ratio
r0343[0...n]
Identified motor rated current / Mot I_rated ident
p0344[0...n]
Motor weight (for the thermal motor model) / Mot weight th mod
r0345[0...n]
Nominal motor starting time / Mot t_start_rated
p0346[0...n]
Motor excitation build-up time / Mot t_excitation
p0347[0...n]
Motor de-excitation time / Mot t_de-excitat.
p0350[0...n]
p0352[0...n]
Cable resistance / Mot R_cable cold
p0353[0...n]
Motor series inductance / Mot L_series
p0354[0...n]
p0355[0...n]
p0356[0...n]
Motor stator leakage inductance / Mot L_stator leak.
p0357[0...n]
Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator d

Parameter
p0358[0...n]
Motor rotor leakage inductance / damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_r leak / LDd
p0359[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damp q
p0360[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance/magn. inductance, d axis saturated / Mot Lh/Lh d sat
p0361[0...n]
p0362[0...n]
p0363[0...n]
p0364[0...n]
p0365[0...n]
p0366[0...n]
p0367[0...n]
p0368[0...n]
p0369[0...n]
r0370[0...n]
r0372[0...n]
Cable resistance / Mot R_cable
r0373[0...n]
Motor rated stator resistance / Mot R_stator rated
r0374[0...n]
r0375[0...n]
r0376[0...n]
Rated motor rotor resistance / Mot R_rotor rated
r0377[0...n]
Motor leakage inductance, total / Mot L_leak total
r0378[0...n]
Motor stator inductance, d axis / Mot L_stator_d
r0380[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, d axis / Mot L_damping_d
r0381[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis / Mot L_damping_q
r0382[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance transformed / Lh d axis saturated / Mot L_m tr/Lhd sat
r0383[0...n]
r0384[0...n]
Motor rotor time constant / damping time constant d axis / Mot T_rotor/T_Dd
r0385[0...n]
Motor damping time constant, q axis / Mot T_Dq
r0386[0...n]
Motor stator leakage time constant / Mot T_stator leak
r0387[0...n]
Motor stator leakage time constant, q axis / Mot T_Sleak /T_Sq
p0389[0...n]
Excitation rated no-load current / Exc I_noload_rated
p0390[0...n]
Rated excitation current / Exc I_rated
p0391[0...n]
Current controller adaptation, starting point KP / I_adapt pt KP
p0392[0...n]
Current controller adaptation, starting point KP adapted / I_adapt pt KP adap
p0393[0...n]
Current controller adaptation P gain scaling / I_adapt Kp scal
r0395[0...n]
Actual stator resistance / R_stator act
r0396[0...n]
Actual rotor resistance / R_rotor act
p0398[0...n]
p0399[0...n]
p0530[0...n]
Bearing type selection / Bearing type sel
p0531[0...n]
Bearing code number selection / Bear. code num sel
p0532[0...n]
Bearing maximum speed / Bearing n_max
p0600[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor for monitoring / Mot temp_sensor
p0601[0...n]
Motor temperature sensor type / Mot_temp_sens type
p0604[0...n]
Motor temperature alarm threshold / Mot_temp al thr
p0605[0...n]
Motor temperature fault threshold / Mot_temp flt thr
p0606[0...n]
Motor temperature timer / Mot_temp timer
p0607[0...n]
Temperature sensor fault timer / Sensor fault time
p0610[0...n]
Motor overtemperature response / Mot temp response
p0611[0...n]
I2t motor model thermal time constant / I2t mot_mod T
p0612[0...n]
Thermal motor model configuration / Therm Mot_mod conf
p0615[0...n]
I2t motor model fault threshold / I2t mot_mod thresh
p0616[0...n]
Motor overtemperature alarm threshold 1 / Mot temp alarm 1
p0620[0...n]
Thermal adaptation, stator and rotor resistance / Mot therm_adapt R
p0621[0...n]
Identification stator resistance after restart / Rst_ident Restart

1-865
Parameter
1-866
p0622[0...n]
Motor excitation time for Rs_ident after powering up again / t_excit Rs_id
p0624[0...n]
Motor Temperature Offset PT100 / Mot T_offset PT100
p0625[0...n]
Motor ambient temperature / Mot T_ambient
p0626[0...n]
Motor overtemperature, stator core / Mot T_over core
p0627[0...n]
Motor overtemperature, stator winding / Mot T_over stator
p0628[0...n]
Motor overtemperature rotor winding / Mot T_over rotor
r0630[0...n]
Motor temperature model ambient temperature / MotTMod T_amb.
r0631[0...n]
Motor temperature model, stator core temperature / MotTMod T_core
r0632[0...n]
Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature / MotTMod T_copper
r0633[0...n]
Motor temperature model, rotor temperature / MotTMod T_rotor
p0634[0...n]
Q flux flux constant unsaturated / PSIQ KPSI UNSAT
p0635[0...n]
Q flux quadrature axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KIQ UNSAT
p0636[0...n]
Q flux direct axis current constant unsaturated / PSIQ KID UNSAT
p0637[0...n]
Q flux flux gradient saturated / PSIQ Grad SAT
p0643[0...n]
Overvoltage protection for synchronous motors / Overvolt_protect
p0650[0...n]
Actual motor operating hours / Mot t_oper act
p0651[0...n]
Motor operating hours maintenance interval / Mot t_op maint
p0652[0...n]
Motor stator resistance, scaling / Mot R_stator scal
p0653[0...n]
Motor stator leakage inductance, scaling / Mot L_S_leak scal
p0655[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance, d axis saturated scaling / Mot L_m d sat scal
p0656[0...n]
Motor magnetizing inductance, q axis, saturated scaling / Mot L_m q sat scal
p0657[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, d axis scaling / Mot L_damp d scal
p0658[0...n]
Motor damping inductance, q axis scaling / Mot L_damp q scal
p0659[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, d axis scaling / Mot R_damp d scal
p0660[0...n]
Motor damping resistance, q axis scaling / Mot R_damp q scal
p0826[0...n]
Motor changeover, motor number / Mot_chng mot No.
p0827[0...n]
Motor changeover status word bit number / Mot_chg ZSW bitNo.
p1231[0...n]
Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration / ASC config
p1232[0...n]
DC braking, braking current / DCBRK I_brake
p1233[0...n]
DC braking time / DCBRK time
p1234[0...n]
Speed at the start of DC braking / DCBRK n_start
p1236[0...n]
Ext. armature short-cct., contactor feedback signal monit. time / ASC ext t_monit
p1237[0...n]
External armature short-circuit, waiting time when opening / ASC ext t_wait
p1909[0...n]
p1980[0...n]
Pole position identification technique / PolID technique
p1982[0...n]
Pole position identification selection / PolID selection
p1991[0...n]
Motor changeover, angular commutation correction / Ang_com corr
p1999[0...n]
Ang. commutation offset calibr. and pole position ID - scaling / ComOffsCalib scal
p4610[0...n]
p4611[0...n]
p4612[0...n]
p4613[0...n]

Parameter
1.3.5
Parameters for power unit data sets (PDS)

The following list contains the parameters that are dependent on the power unit data sets.
Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng, Type: PDS
p0121[0...n]
Power unit component number / PU comp_no
p0124[0...n]
Power unit detection via LED / PU detection LED
p0125[0...n]
Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
r0126[0...n]
Power unit components active/inactive / PU comp act/inact
r0127[0...n]
Power unit version EPROM data / PU EPROM version
r0128[0...n]
Power unit, firmware version / PU FW version
r0200[0...n]
Power unit code number actual / PU code no. act
p0201[0...n]
Power unit code number / PU code no
r0203[0...n]
Actual power unit type / PU actual type
r0204[0...n]
Power unit hardware properties / PU HW property
p0251[0...n]
Operating hours counter power unit fan / PU fan t_oper
p0895[0...n]
BI: Activate/deactivate power unit components / PU_comp act/deact
p3901[0...n]
Power unit EEPROM Vdc offset calibration / PU EEPROM Vdc_offs
p7001[0...n]
Par_circuit power units enable / PU enable
r7002[0...n]
Par_circuit status power units / Status PU
r7020[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase U / Phase U curr dev
r7021[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase V / Phase V curr dev
r7022[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit deviation current in phase W / Phase W curr dev
r7030[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage deviation / Vdc deviation
p7040[0...n]
Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase U / Comp t_lockout U
p7042[0...n]
Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase V / Comp t_lockout V
p7044[0...n]
Par_circuit correction valve lockout time phase W / Comp t_lockout W
r7050[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current phase U / Circ_I_phase U
r7051[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current phase V / Circ_I_phase V
r7052[0...n]
Par_circuit circulating current phase W / Circ_I_phase W
r7200[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit overload I2T / PU overload I2T
r7201[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. inverter / PU temp max inv
r7202[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. depletion layer / PU TempMaxDepLayer
r7203[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures max. rectifier / PU temp max rect
r7204[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures air intake / PU temp air intake
r7205[0...n]
Par_circuit power unit temperatures electronics / PU temp electr
r7206[0...n]
r7207[0...n]
r7208[0...n]
r7209[0...n]
r7210[0...n]
r7211[0...n]
r7212[0...n]
r7213[0...n]
r7214[0...n]
r7215[0...n]
r7216[0...n]
r7217[0...n]
r7218[0...n]
r7219[0...n]
r7220[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit drive output current maximum / Drv I_outp max
r7222[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit absolute current actual value / I_act abs val
r7223[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U / I_phase U act val

1-867
Parameter
1-868
r7224[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V / I_phase V act val
r7225[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W / I_phase W act val
r7226[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase U offset / I_phase U offset
r7227[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase V offset / I_phase V offset
r7228[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value phase W offset / I_phase W offset
r7229[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase current actual value sum U, V, W / I_phase sum UVW
r7230[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit DC link voltage actual value / Vdc_act
r7231[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase U / V_phase U act val
r7232[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase V / V_phase V act val
r7233[0...n]
CO: Par_circuit phase voltage actual value phase W / V_phase W act val
r7240[0...n]
Par_circuit gating unit status word 1 / Gating unit ZSW1

Function diagrams
Contents
2.1
Table of contents
2-870
2.2
Explanations for the function diagrams
2-876
2.3
Overviews
2-881
2.4
CU320-2 input/output terminals
2-893
2.5
PROFIdrive
2-900
2.6
Internal control/status words
2-932
2.7
Sequence control
2-945
2.8
Brake control
2-948
2.9
Safety Integrated
2-953
2.10 Setpoint channel
2-959
2.11 Encoder evaluation
2-968
2.12 Vector control
2-971
2.13 Technology functions
2-994
2.14 Technology controller
2-1000
2.15 Signals and monitoring functions
2-1006
2.16 Diagnostics
2-1014
2.17 Data sets
2-1020
2.18 Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
2-1026
2.19 Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
2-1031
2.20 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-1038
2.21 Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
2-1049
2.22 Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2-1053

2-869
Function diagrams
Table of contents
2.1
2.2
Table of contents
Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-876
1020 Explanation of the symbols (Part 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-877
2-878
2-879
1030 Handling BICO technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-880
2.3
Overviews . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-881
1510 CU320 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-882
1520 PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-883
1530 Internal control/status words, data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-884
1550 Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-885
1680 Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature) . . . . . . . . .
2-886
1690 Vector control, V/f control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-887
1700 Vector control, closed-loop speed control, and generation of torque limits . . . .
2-888
1710 Vector control, closed-loop current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-889
1750 Monitoring functions, faults, alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-890
1790 Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-891
1840 Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-892
2.4
CU320-2 input/output terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-893
2120 Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-894
2121 Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20, DI 21) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-895
2130 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-896
2131 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-897
2-898
2-899
2.5
PROFIdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-900
2410 PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-902
2420 Standard telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-903
2422 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-904
2423 Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data (PZD) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-905
2425 STW1_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . .
2-906
2426 STW2_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . .
2-907
2428 ZSW1_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . .
2-908
2-870

Function diagrams
Table of contents
2429 ZSW2_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0) . . . . . . . . . .
2-909
2439 PZD receive signals interconnection profile-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-910
2440 PZD receive signals interconnection manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-911
2441 STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-912
2-913
2-914
2449 PZD send signals interconnection profile-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-915
2450 PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-916
2451 ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-917
2-918
2-919
2468 IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . .
2-920
2470 IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999) . . . . . . . . . . .
2-921
2472 IF1 status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-922
2-923
2-924
2-925
2-926
2489 IF2 status words, free interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-927
2495 CU_STW control word 1 Control Unit interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-928
2496 CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-929
2497 A_DIGITAL interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-930
2498 E_DIGITAL interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-931
2.6
Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-932
2501 Control word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-933
2503 Status word, sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-934
2505 Control word, setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-935
2520 Control word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-936
2522 Status word, speed controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-937
2526 Status word, closed loop control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-938
2530 Status word, closed-loop current control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-939
2534 Status word, monitoring functions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-940
2-941
2-942

2-871
Function diagrams
Table of contents
2546 Control word, faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-943
2548 Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-944
2.7
Sequence control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-945
2610 Sequencer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-946
2634 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-947
2.8
Brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-948
2701 Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-949
2704 Extended brake control, zero speed detection (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-950
2707 Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-951
2711 Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-952
2.9
Safety Integrated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-953
2800 Basic functions, parameter manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-954
2802 Basic functions, monitoring and faults/alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-955
2804 Basic functions, status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-956
2810 Basic functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-957
2814 Basic functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter) . . . . . .
2-958
2.10
Setpoint channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-959
3010 Fixed speed setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-960
3020 Motorized potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-961
3030 Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-962
3040 Direction of rotation limiting and reversal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-963
3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-964
3060 Basic ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-965
3070 Extended ramp-function generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-966
3080 Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-967
2.11
Encoder evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-968
4704 Raw signal sensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-969
4715 Actual speed value and pole pos. sens., motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1) . . . .
2-970
2.12
Vector control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-971
6030 Speed setpoint, droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-972
6031 Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-973
6040 Speed controller with/without encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-974
2-872

Function diagrams
Table of contents
6050 Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-975
6060 Torque setpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-976
6220 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-977
6300 V/f characteristic and voltage boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-978
6310 Resonance damping and slip compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-979
6320 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-980
6490 Closed-loop speed control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-981
6491 Flux control configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-982
6630 Upper/lower torque limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-983
6640 Current/power/torque limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-984
6710 Current setpoint filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-985
6714 Iq and Id controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-986
6721 Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-987
6722 Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-988
6723 Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-989
6724 Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-990
6730 Interface to Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-991
6731 Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-992
6799 Display signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-993
2.13
Technology functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-994
7010 Friction characteristic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-995
7014 External armature short-circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-996
7016 Internal armature short-circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-997
7017 DC brake (p0300 = 1xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-998
7020 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-999
2.14
Technology controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1000
7950 Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1001
7951 Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1002
7954 Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1003
7958 Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1004
7960 DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1005
2.15
Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1006
8010 Speed messages 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1007
8011 Speed messages 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1008

2-873
Function diagrams
Table of contents
8012 Torque messages, motor locked/stalled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1009
8013 Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1010
8014 Thermal monitoring, power unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1011
8016 Thermal monitoring, motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1012
8017 Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1013
2.16
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1014
8060 Fault buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1015
8065 Alarm buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1016
8070 Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1017
8075 Fault/alarm configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1018
8134 Measuring sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1019
2.17
Data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1020
8560 Command data sets (CDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1021
8565 Drive data sets (DDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1022
8570 Encoder data sets (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1023
8575 Motor data sets (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1024
8580 Power unit data sets (PDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1025
2.18
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1026
9100 Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1027
9102 Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1028
9104 Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1029
9106 Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1030
2.19
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1031
9204 Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1032
9206 Receive telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1033
9208 Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1034
9210 Send telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1035
9220 Control word CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1036
9226 Status word CANopen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1037
2.20
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1038
2-1039
2-1040
9556 Digital relay outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1041
2-874

Function diagrams
Table of contents
9560 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1042
2-1043
9566 Analog input 0 (AI 0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1044
9568 Analog input 1 (AI 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1045
9572 Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1046
9576 Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1047
9577 Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1048
2.21
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1049
9880 Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1050
9886 Temperature evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1051
9887 Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1052
2.22
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1053
9912 Control word interconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1054

2-875
Function diagrams
2.2
Function diagrams
1020 Explanation of the symbols (Part 1)
2-877
2-878
2-879
1030 Handling BICO technology
2-880
2-876


Fig. 2-1
Parameter
Meaning
Symbol
Parameter name [Unit]

Monitoring parameter
rxxxx [x...y]
(parameter may appear .
Parameter name [Unit]
Index name
Monitoring parameter
rxxxx[x]
with index.
Connectors
Binectors
Symbol
Symbol
[aaaa.b]
Parameter name
Index name
from ... to [Unit]
pxxxx[y] (Def)
Setting parameter
(if the parameter appears
a multiple number of times,
then diagram references
are specified).
name
name
pxxxx
pxxxx
(xxxx)
Connector input CI.
Symbol
Symbol
pxxxx[y...z]
(Def)
The function diagrams are sub-divided into signal

paths 1...8 in order to facilitate orientation.
Text
Text = Unique signal designation
[aaaa.b] aaaa = Signal goes to target diagram aaa
b
= Signal goes to signal path b
Text = Unique signal designation
Text
[cccc.d]
cccc = Signal comes from source diagram cccc
d
= Signal comes from signal path d
To "function diagram name" [aaaa.b] = for binectors.
Binector input BI with

index range [y...z] and
factory setting (Def).
name
Connector output CO with [dimension
unit] and index range [y...z].
rxxxx
Binector output BO.
Cross references for control bits
name
Connector output CO
[dimension unit] and with index [y]
Symbol
Binector output BO with

bit y.
rxxxx.y
pxxxx
[aaaa.b]
Information on parameters, binectors, connectors
Symbol
Symbol
Meaning
Parameter name
Parameter name (up to 18 characters)
[Unit]
[dimension unit]
rxxxx[y] or
rxxxx[y...z] or
rxxxx[y].ww or
rxxxx.ww
"r" = monitoring parameter. These parameters are read-only

"xxxx" stands for the parameter number
"[y]" specifies the valid index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range
".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15).
Parameter belongs to the

Encoder Data Set (EDS).
pxxxx[y] or
pxxxx[y...z] or
pxxxx[y].ww or
pxxxx.ww
"p" = setting parameter. These parameters can be changed.

"xxxx" stands for the parameter number,
"[y]" specifies the applicable index, "[y...z]" specifies the applicable index range
".ww" specifies the bit number (e.g. 0...15).

Motor Data Set (MDS).
from ... to
Value range.
(xxxx[y].ww)
Parameter number (xxxx) with Index number [y] and bit number .ww.
(Def)
Factory setting.
(Def.w)
Factory setting with bit number as prefix.
[aaaa.b]
Diagram references for setting parameters that occur a multiple number of times.
[Function diagram number, signal path]
pxxxx[C]
pxxxx[E]
pxxxx[M]
pxxxx= Original parameter of signal

aaaa = Signal comes from source diagram aaaa
b
= Signal comes from signal path b
Sampling times
Symbol
Meaning
pxxxx[Y] (ZZZ.ZZ s)
Setting parameter with factory setting to

select the time slice.
p0115[y] (Drive Object)
Time slice depending on the pre-setting

p0112 of the drive object.
"[y]" specifies the applicable index.
p0115[y] (Motor Modules) Time slice depending on the rated pulse

frequency of the motor module.
"[y]" specifies the applicable index.
PROFIdrive sampling time According to presetting in p2048.
CAN bus sampling time
Background

Power unit Data Set (PDS).
2-877
1
2
3
4
DO: All objects
Explanations for the function diagrams - Explanation of the symbols (Part 1)
Refer to [1020.7]
Not relevant
Presetting in p8848.
There is no fixed sampling time for this
function. The processing takes place in
background. The cycle time depends on
the computational load of the control unit.
A static state is displayed here. The
sampling time data is not relevant.
Refer to [1020.7]
6
fp_1020_51_eng.vsd
27.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1020 -
Function diagrams
pxxxx[P]

Drive Data Set (DDS).
Meaning
pxxxx[D]

Command Data Set (CDS).
Meaning
Signal path
name
Connector input CI with index
range [y...z]
name [unit]
rxxxx[y]
(Def)
Connector/binector output CO/BO
Cross references between diagrams
Binector input BI with

index [y] and factory
setting (Def).
pxxxx[y]
Connector input CI with index [y]
name
pxxxx[y...z]
(xxxx [y])
(Def)
Data sets
Meaning
Meaning
rxxxx
rxxxx
Binektor input BI with

factory setting (Def).
name
name
name [unit]
rxxxx[y...z]
Setting parameter with
index (if the parameter
appears a multiple number
of times, then diagram
references are specified).
Connectors/binectors
Meaning
Parameter name
pxxxx[y]
(xxxx [x])
[aaaa.b]
Parameter name
from ... to [Unit]
pxxxx[y...z] (Def)
Meaning
Logical inversion
&
AND element
with logical inversion
of an input signal
p2900[D]
Fixed value 2

-10 000.00...10 000.00 [%]

p2901[D] (0.00)
p2901[D]
p2902[0...14] (0.00)
S Q
R Q
x1
p1001[D]
y = 1 when x1
Outputs at y a logical "1" if x > S.

0
S
x2 is.
p1015[D]
Outputs a logical "1" at y if x < S.

If x >= S + H then y returns to 0.
y = -x
Threshold value 1/0 with

hysteresis
Sign reversal
-1
Threshold value switch 0/1
1 y
Symbols for computational and

closed-loop control functions
n_set_fixed 15
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [1/min]
p1015[D] (0.000)
Exclusiv-OR/XOR
x2
Pre-assigned binectors and connectors
n_set_fixed 1
Outputs at y a logical "1" if x < S.
S = setting input
R = reset input
Q = non-inverted output
Q = inverted output
=1
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [1/min]

p1001[D] (0.000)
Threshold value switch 1/0
R/S flip-flop
p2902[0...14]
Fixed speed values
1 y
Threshold value 0/1 with

hysteresis
Absolute value generator
y = |x|
Outputs a logical "1" at y if x > S.
If x <= S - H then y returns to 0.

x1
Divider
x2
y=
Fixed torque values

x
Fixed value M [Nm]
-100 000.00...100 000.00 [Nm]
p2930[D] (0.00)
>0
x1
x2
Comparator
Output y = a logical "1", if the analog

signal x > 0, i.e. is positive.
p2930[D]
LU
MLU
x
dx
dt
Switch symbol
dx
dt
LL
MLL
pxxxx
Sample & Hold element

Simple changeover switch
x is limited to the upper limit LU and the lower

limit LL and output at y.
The digital signals MLU and MLL have the
value "1", if the upper or lower limit is active.
Differentiator
y=
Limiter
The switch position is shown according to

the factory setting
(in this case, switch position 1 in the
default state on delivery).
Symbol for monitoring

Monitoring
Axxxxx
or
Fxxxxx
SET
x
Monitoring
S&H
Sample and hold element.

y = x if SET = 1
(not retentively saved at POWER OFF)
In the bottom right-hand corner of

the diagram.
1
2
3
4
DO: All objects
6
fp_1021_51_eng.vsd
01.07.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1021 -
Function diagrams
Fixed value 1
-10 000.00...10 000.00 [%]
p2900[D] (0.00)
Symbols for computational and closed-loop

control functions
Symbols for logic functions
Fig. 2-2
2-878

Fixed percentage values
PT1 element
Switch-on delay
y
Natural frequency, denominator

Damping, denominator
fn_n
D_n
pxxxx
pxxxx
Delay element, first order.

pxxxx

Fig. 2-3
x
T
PT2 low pass
pxxxx
pxxxx
|y|
pxxxx = time constant
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without any interruption
during the time T before output y changes to "1".
fn
2nd-order filter (bandstop/general filter)

Natural frequency, numerator
fn_z
pxxxx
Damping, numerator
D_z
pxxxx
Transfer function
H(s) =
y
|y|
pxxxx
y
0
fn_n
2 2 D_n
+
2 fn_n
.s+1
Linear
Switch-off delay
s
2
fs
U_output max r0071

Mot U_rated p0304
f_B
f_set
U_boost total r1315
2nd Order Filter
pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "0" without interruption during
the time T before output y changes to "0".
T
p0310
Natural frequency, denominator
fn_n
pxxxx
Damping, denominator
D_n
pxxxx
Used as bandstop filter - center frequency fs:
Parabolic
y
- bandwidth f_B:
y
T1 T2
2
H(s) =
fn_z
s
fn_n
2 2
+
2
2 2
+
2
. D_z .
fn_z
. D_n .
fn_n
s + 1
p0310
Flux current control (FCC)
s + 1
U_output max r0071

Mot U_rated p0304
Analog adder can be activated
f_set
U_boost total r1315
x1
y
The following applies to I = 1 signal: y = x1 + x2
x2
The following applies to I = 0 signal: y = x1
Dependent on the load current
2-879
Mot f_rated
p0310
1
2
3
4
DO: All objects
6
fp_1022_51_eng.vsd
19.01.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1022 -
Function diagrams
pxxxx pxxxx
The digital signal x must have the value "1" without interruption during
time T1 or must have the value "0" during time T2 before output y
changes its signal state.
T1
T1
T2
T2
. fs
Transfer function when used as general filter
pxxxx pxxxx
U_boost total r1315
f_B
D_n =
f_set
D_z = 0
Delay (switch-on and switch-off)
T1 T2
U_output max r0071

Mot U_rated p0304
fn_z = fs
fn_n = fs
r0723.15
Binectors are binary signals that can be freely interconnected (BO = Binector Output).
They represent a bit of a "BO:" display parameter (e.g. bit 15 from r0723).
Connector:
r0723
Connectors are "analog signals" that can be freely interconnected (e.g. percentage variables, speeds or torques).
Connectors are also "CO:" display parameters (CO = Connector Output).
Parameterization:
At the signal destination, the required binector or connector is selected using appropriate parameters:
"BI:" parameter for binectors (BI = Binector Input)
or
"CI:" parameter for connectors (CI = Connector Input)
Example:
The main setpoint for the speed controller (CI: p1070) should be received from the output of the motorized potentiometer (CO: r1050) and
the "jog" command (BI: p1055) from digital input DI 0 (BO: r0722.0, X122.1 terminal) on the CU320.

Digital input
DI 0
X122.1
Control bit 8
Setpoint channel
p1055 [C]
722.0
r0722.0
[2120]
r0967.8
[2501]
Motorized potentiometer
2
Raise
Lower
Main setpoint
Speed controller
p1070[C]
1050
r1050
Jog setpoint 1
[3030]
[3020]
Parameterizing steps:
1
p1055[0] = 722.0
Terminal X122.1 acts as "Jog bit 0".
p1070[0] = 1050
The output of the motorized potentiometer acts as main setpoint for the speed controller.
1
2
3
4
DO: All objects
Explanations for the function diagrams - Handling BICO technology
6
fp_1030_51_eng.vsd
19.01.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1030 -
Function diagrams
1030 Handling BICO technology
Binector:
2-880
Fig. 2-4
Handling BICO technology
Function diagrams
Overviews
2.3
Overviews
Function diagrams
1510 CU320 input/output terminals
2-882
1520 PROFIdrive
2-883
1530 Internal control/status words, data sets
2-884
1550 Setpoint channel
2-885
1680 Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature)
2-886
1690 Vector control, V/f control
2-887
1700 Vector control, closed-loop speed control, and generation of torque limits
2-888
1710 Vector control, closed-loop current control
2-889
1750 Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
2-890
1790 Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
2-891
1840 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2-892

2-881
CU320-2
Simulation for DI 0...DI 21 1 = Simulation on
X124
+ 24 V

1510 CU320 input/output terminals
+
+
M
M
Simulation signals
p0796.0...21
M
M
r0722.0
r0723.0
r0722.3
r0723.3
r0722.16
r0723.16
r0722.17
r0723.17
r0723.0...21
6 digital inputs, electrically isolated
X122
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
<2>
r0722.0...21
1
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
DI 16
DI 17
M1
M
DI/DO 8 <1>
DI/DO 9 <1>
M
DI/DO 10 <1>
DI/DO 11 <1>
M
...
...
[2120]
4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
p0728.8
0
r0722.8
p0738
p0728.11
...
...
...
r0723.8
...
...
r0722.11
[2130]
r0723.11
p0741
1
[2131]
X132
<2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
DI 4
DI 5
DI 6
DI 7
DI 20
DI 21
M2
M
DI/DO 12 <1>
DI/DO 13 <1>
M
DI/DO 14 <1>
DI/DO 15 <1>
M
r0723.4
r0722.7
r0723.7
r0722.20
r0723.20
r0722.21
r0723.21
...
...
[2121]
4 digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
p0728.12
0
r0722.12
r0723.12
...
...
...
...
...
<1> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for G130/G150), the following applies:
Can be used as fast measuring probe inputs (refer to [4735], [4740]).
<2> Jumper open, electrical isolation for DI 0 DI 7, DI 16, DI 17, DI 20, DI 21.
p0742
1
p0728.15
1
2
3
DO: CU_G, CU_GL, CU_GM, CU_S, CU_SL
Overviews - CU320-2 input/output terminals
r0722.4
r0722.15
[2132]
r0723.15
p0745
1
[2133]
6
fp_1510_51_eng.vsd
17.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1510 -
Function diagrams
r0721.0...21
=
+
p0799 (4000.00 s)
p0795.0...21
Overviews
2-882
Fig. 2-5
24 V DC to the
next device
Interconnecting the permanently assigned receive telegrams.

Signal
LED
1520 PROFIdrive

Fig. 2-6
PB address
p0918
Monitoring
Axxxxx
Fxxxxx
Diagnostics
rxxxx
Permanently assigned telegrams
[2410] PROFIBUS address, diagnostics
Description
Receive telegram
Interconnection
...
...
...
...
...
...
Drive
n
[2439] ... [2447][2495][2497]

Interconnecting the permanently assigned send telegrams
PD telegr_sel
p0922
Signal
Description
Interconnection
Telegram 1, 2 ...... 83
Signal
assignment PZD1
Signal x
...
...
...
...
...
...
PZD32
[2449] ... [2457][2496][2498]
Interconnecting the free receive telegram
[2420] Standard telegrams and process data (PZD)
PROFIdrive
PZD 1
PD Telegr_ausw
p0922
PZD 2
Send telegram
PZD 3
Telegram 102 ..... 352
..
.
Signal assignment
PZD1
...
Signal x
PZD32
[2468] [2481]
Interconnecting the free send telegram
[2422] Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD)
Drive
n
PZD 1
PD Telegr_sel
p0922
PZD 2
PZD 3
Telegram 370 ..... 392; 999
Signal x
...
Free telegram
[2470] [2472] [2483]
2-883
[2423] Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data
1
DO: All objects
Overviews - PROFIdrive
6
fp_1520_54_eng.vsd
03.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 1520 -
Overviews
999
PZD32
Function diagrams
Signal assignment
PZD1
Current control
15
STW
sequence control
15

1530 Internal control/status words, data sets
r0899
15
0
31
[2530]
[2501]
r0836
ZSW
Current control
ZSW
sequence control
[8560]
Monitoring functions
DDS - Drive Data Sets
r2197
0
[2502]
15
ZSW Monitoring
functions 1
r0837
0
[2534]
Setpoint Channel
31
r2198
STW3
0
15
r1198
STW
setpoint channel
0
15
STW
CDS selection
STW
DDS selection
[8565]
ZSW Monitoring
functions 2
EDS - Encoder Data Sets
[2536]
r0838[1...3]
[2505]
r2199
0
Speed controller
15
STW
n-controller
15
ZSW Monitoring
functions 3
STW
EDS selection
2
[8570]
[2537]
r1406
0
Faults/alarms
MDS - Motor Data Sets

r2138
[2520]
r1407
0
15
ZSW
n-controller
15
r0838[0]
STW
Faults/alarms
0
15
[2546]
[8575]
r2139
0
[2522]
15
Regelung
ZSW
Faults/alarms 1
PDS - Power unit Data Sets
[2548]
r0056
0
ZSW
controller
15
r2135
0
15
[2526]
1
2
3
DO: All objects
Overviews - Internal control/status words, data sets
STW
MDS selection
15
ZSW
Faults/alarms 2
STW
PDS selection
[8580]
[2548]
6
fp_1530_54_eng.vsd
06.03.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 1530 -
Function diagrams
CDS - Command Data Sets

r1408
r0898
Overviews
2-884
Fig. 2-7
Sequence control
Jog 1
r0898.8
1550 Setpoint channel

Fig. 2-8
p0115[3]
Jog 2
r1024
r0898.9
Main setpoint
p1070
Suppl setpoint
p1075
[3010] Fixed speed setpoints
raise
Main setp scal

p1071
0 0
+
+
0 1
+/-
1 0
Jog setpoint 1
p1058
r1114
pos
neg
1 1
Jog setpoint 2
p1059
(-1)
[3030] Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling,
jogging
r1050
RFG setpoint
at the input
Setpt after limit
n_set_1
Suppl setp scal

p1076
[3040] Direction limitation/-reversal
[3050] Skip (suppression) bandwidth

and speed limiting
r1119
lower
[3020] Motorized potentiometer

n_set_4
p1191
r1150
p1155
[5020.1]
KPC
p1430
p1160
[3060] Basic ramp-function

generator
p1190
XERR
Kp
+ +
ZSW
n_set DSC
[5020.4]
n_act
n_set_5
Ramp-function
generator
tracking
DSC position
controller
M_limit
[3070] Expanded ramp-function generator

[3080] Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
Deadtime element
2-885
[3090] Dynamic Servo Control (DSC)

<1> Only for SERVO
Simulate ramp-function generator
<1>
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV
Overviews - Setpoint channel
6
fp_1550_51_eng.vsd
14.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1550 -
Overviews
x_act
Function diagrams
from
PROFIdrive
r1170
[1590.1] <1>
[1700.1]
r1199
Interpolator
r1438
+
x,y
n_ctrl setp sum
n_pre_control
n_cmd speed pre-control signal
p0115[1]
RFG n_set at outp
RFG selection
p1115
SMx
Sensorless operation
Raw position signals

(only from encoder 1)
x2n
n_act unsmoothed
r0061[0]
encoder 1
p0432 p0410.0 p1821

p1441
Fine resolution

1680 Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature)
Temperature
from sensor n
[8016.1]
x2n
n_act unsmoothed
Invertierung
III
r0063[0]
Fine resolution
n_act_measurement
p0045
p0433
n_act smoothed
n_act calculation
[4704]
r0063[1]
[4715]
Encoder Data Sets (EDS)

p0187...p0189
3 encoder data sets
EDS[0]
EDS[1]
EDS[2]
p0400...p0425
Parameters,
encoder 1
Parameters,
encoder 2
<1>
Parameters,
encoder 3
No encoder
99
[8570]
<1> Only 1 encoder for G130/G150.
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Overviews - Vector control, encoder evaluations (position, speed, temperature)
6
fp_1680_56_eng.vsd
19.01.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS G130/G150
8
- 1680 -
Function diagrams
Encoders 1
Speed actual value and rotor position sensing for motor encoder (encoder 1)
Overviews
Fig. 2-9
2-886
Faults/
alarms
F31100...A33904
Raw signal sensing
Refer to [1020.7]
Flying restart mode
1690 Vector control, V/f control

Fig. 2-10
p0115[1] (Motor Modules)
Vdc_ctrl config
p1200
Speed actual value

calculation
p1280
[6320]
Vf Res_damp gain
Slip compensation
p1338
p1335
[6310]
[6310]
n_ctrl setp sum

r1170
RFG setpt at input
Ramp-function
generator
[3050.8] r1119
Current limit
p0640
[3060]
I_max_ctrl f_outp
r1343
Current limit Var
[4715]
[6730.4]
I_outp max
r0067
I_max motor module
MIN
Transformat_angle
r0094
Imax closed-loop
voltage control
180
Sym act angle

p1358
Angle difference
r1359
I_act abs.val.
p1345 ... p1346
[6714.5] r0068
<1>
V_boost accelerate
p1311
V_boost Anlauf
p1312
(0)
+
[6730.4]
[6300.8]
V_output
r0072
V/f Eco fac act v
V_outp smooth
0
100 ms
[6300]
r0025
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Overviews - Vector control, V/f control
6
fp_1690_54_eng.vsd
28.05.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 1690 -
Overviews
2-887
<1> Only for p1300 = 19 and p1302.1 = 1.
Function diagrams
r1348
Eco mode
[2526]
Vf angle setpt
p1350
V_boost perm
p1310
f_set
p1356
Soft starting
Control mode
p1300
r0056
.
.
.
f_outp smooth
r0024
100 ms
I_max_ctrl V_outp
r1344
[6310]
Mot PolePairNo act

r0313
p1340 ... p1341
r0066
Imax closed-loop
frequency control
I_max reduction
f_outp
60
p0641[C]
(1)
[8016.8]
[6030.1]
<1>
Tn adaptation
p1462 p1472
<1>
p1511
p1512
For Kp
adaptation
Refer to [1020.7]
p1514
p0341 p0342
p1496

1700 Vector control, closed-loop speed control, and generation of torque limits
p1513
r1515
r1518
p1540
p1300
(r1407.1)
p1416
n_set after filter
n_ctrl setp sum
r0062
r1170
[1550.8]
n_ctrl n_set
Symmetrizing
p1501
Kp
M_set total
r1438
p1508
Droop input
p1488
[1710.1]
Tn
Reference model
p1400.3
r0079
p1503
n_set I_comp
r1439
p1541
[6060] Torque setpoint
[6030] Speed setpoint filter
[6031] Acceleration model

I_outp max
p0640
Integrator control
r0067
M-max upper/mot
p1442
p1452
p1520
<1>
r1538
Forming the
torque limits
M-max lower/gen
n_act unsmoothed
r0061[0]
encoder 1
p1521
M_max lower eff.
p1523
r1539
[6040] Speed controller

p1300
(r1407.1)
p1300
(r1407.1)
p1530 p1531
<1>
n_act smooth
n_pre-control [1710.1]
r0063
[6630] Torque limit

[6640] Current-power limit
p1400
n_model
[1710.1]
M_max upper eff.

p1522
p1401
r0056
r1408
<1>
[6490] Closed-loop speed control configuration

[6491] Closed-loop flux control configuration
[2526] Status word closed-loop control
[2530] Status word closed-loop current control
[4715] Speed actual value and pole position sensing motor encoder ASM/SM (encoder 1)
<1> Only for vector control without encoder.
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Overviews - Vector control, speed control and generation of the torque limits
6
fp_1700_54_eng.vsd
19.01.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 1700 -
Function diagrams
Kp adaptation
p1460 p1470
Overviews
2-888
Fig. 2-11
[6050] Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
p1715
Refer to [1020.7]
r0072
p1717
Vdc_act
r0070
|y|
Iq_set
|y|
1710 Vector control, closed-loop current control

Fig. 2-12
U_output
p1655
r0079
[1700.8]
V_set
r0077
M_set total
P
iq controller
Modulation depth
r0074
V_angle
M
Iq
V_output max
r0071
p1715
[6710] Current setpoint filter
p1717
Id_set
[6722.1]
[6723.4]
[6724.4]
[6725.4] <2>
r0075
Field-weakening
controller
V_set
Iq_act
p1570
r0078
p1580
r0076
Field-weakening
characteristic
p1610
p1611
[6714] Current controller

<1>
Current calculation
V_phase actual value
[6722] Field-weakening characteristic, Id setpoint

[6723] Field weakening control, flux controller for induction motors (p0300 = 1)
[6724] Field weakening controller for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2)
<2> [6725] Flux setpoit, field weakening controller (FEM, p0300 = 5)
n_pre-control
[1700.5]
f_outp
r0066
p1764
Motor model
(Observer)
r0065
M
Iq
p1767
<1>
n_model
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Overviews - Vector control, current control
[6730] Interface to the motor module for an induction motor (p0300 = 1)

[6731] Interface to the motor module for a synchronous motor (p0300 = 2)
6
fp_1710_54_eng.vsd
30.01.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 1710 -
Overviews
2-889
<1> Only for vector control without encoder.

<2> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
Function diagrams
Current model
[1700.1]
I_phase actual value

Transformation
Id_act
n_act smooth
<1> <2>
<1> <2>
Fxxxxx
[4715] <2>

1750 Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
r0945
r0949
r0948
r2109
Code
Value
coming
going
Ayyyyy
r2122
r2124
r2123
r2125
Azzzzz
alarms
Code
Value
coming
going
r3115
III
III
r2169
[8012]
[8013]
System runtime
r0969
Fzzzzz
faults
Fault case count

r0952
[8060] Fault buffer
Axxxxx
n_max
n_ctrl setp sum

r1170
III
III
[3080] <2>
n_ctrl setp sum

r1438
Alarms counter
r2111
[8065] Alarm buffer
[5210] <1>
r2129
p2128
[0]
[8011] Speed monitoring 2
[8010] Speed monitoring 1

<1> <2>
M_set total
[15]
r0079
[5610] <1>
[6060] <2>
[8070] Fault/alarm trigger word
M_max upper eff
<1> <2> <3>
Limit value monitor
Changing the fault response
r1538
[5650] <1>
[6640] <2>
M_max lower eff
r0080
[5730] <1>
[6714] <2>
r1539
[5650] <1>
[6640] <2>
Motor locked
r2169
[8012] torque monitoring
p2101
Changing the message type

[0]
[1]
p2118
p2119
[19]
Changing the acknowledge mode

[0]
[1]
r2169
[8010]
p2100
[19]
n_act smth message
n_act smth message

[8010]
[0]
[1]
M_act
p2126
p2127
[8013] load monitoring

[19]
<1> Only for SERVO.

<2> Only for VECTOR.
<3> Only for p0108.17 = 1.
1
2
3
DO: All objects
Overviews - Monitoring functions, faults, alarms
[8075] Fault/alarm configuration
6
fp_1750_51_eng.vsd
12.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1750 -
Function diagrams
r0063
III
Fyyyyy
n_act smth message
Overviews
2-890
Fig. 2-13
r0063
[4710] <1>
n_act unsmoothed
Fig. 2-14
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 0
X501
DRIVE-CLiQ socket 1
=
+
p4099 (4000.00 s)
1 = Simulation on p4095.0...3
Simulation for DI 0...DI 3
1790 Terminal Board 30 (TB30)

+24 V DC
to the next
device
X500
r4022.0...3
r4023.0...3
1
X424
+
+
M
M
+24 V
Simulation signals p4096.0..3
M
M

X481
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
r4022.0
r4023.0
r4023.3
...
...
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
DO 0
DO 1
DO 2
DO 3
r4022.3
[9100]
4 digital outputs, electrically isolated
p4030
...
...
p4033
[9102]
2 analog inputs +/-11 V
A
10 V
V
V
X482
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
r4055[0]
[%]
r4055[1]
[%]
D
AI 0+
AI 0AI 1+
AI 1AO 0+
AO 0AO 1+
AO 1-
A
D
A
[9104]
p4071[0]
0
2 analog outputs +/-11 V
Reference quantities for 10 V or 100 %

p200x 10 V
100 %
p205x 10 V
100 %
D
p4071[1]
0
2-891
1
2
DO: TB30
Overviews - Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
6
fp_1790_51_eng.vsd
19.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1790 -
Overviews
[9106]
Function diagrams
=
M
X501
1 = Simulation on
p4095.0...11
r4021.0...11
DRIVE-CLiQ-socket 1
X524
r4022.0...11
+24 V
1840 Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
+
+
M
M
p4099 (4000.00 s)
Auxiliary voltage for

the digital inputs
r4023.0..11
1
M
M
Simulation signals
p4096.0...11
X520
1
2
3
4
5
6
DI 0
DI 1
DI 2
DI 3
M1
M
r4022.0
...
6
7
8
...
1
r4022.3
p4030
r4023.3
X542
NC 0
COM
NO 0
NC 1
COM
NO 1
DO 0
X530
DO 1

DI4
DI5
DI 6
DI 7
M2
M
X540
1
2
3
4
5
p4048.0
r4023.0
[9550] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated

1
2
3
4
5
6
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
+24 V
r4022.4
...
p4031
r4023.4
...
1
r4022.7
1
2
3
4
5
6
r4023.7
p4048.1
[9552] 4 digital inputs, electrically isolated
[9556] 2 digital outputs (relay)

X522
X541
1
2
3
4
5
6
p4028.8
+
DI/D0 8
DI/D0 9
DI/D0 10
DI/D0 11
M
r4022.8
p4038
...
p4028.11
0
...
...
1
A
D
A
r4023.11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
[9572] 2 analog outputs
[9560], [9562] 4 digital inputs/outputs
r4104.0
X521
2
AI 03
AI 1+
4
AI 15
P 10
6
M
7
N 10
8
M
AO 0V+
AO 0AO 0A+
AO 1V+
AO 1AO 1A+
+Temp
-Temp
p4071[1]
0
...
r4022.11
AI 0+
r4023.8
...
p4041
p4071[0]
0
A35211
A
r4055[0]
[%]
Alarm:
Overtemperature
sensor TM31
Temp. KTY/PTC
r4105
r4104.1
A
A
r4055[1]
[%]
F35207
D
[9566], [9568] 2 analog inputs
1
2
DO: TM31
Overviews - Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
Fault:
Overtemperature
sensor TM31
[9576][9577] Input for temperature sensor
6
fp_1840_51_eng.vsd
19.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 1840 -
Function diagrams
Simulation for DI 0...DI 11
DRIVE-CLiQ-socket 0
Overviews
2-892
Fig. 2-15
+24 V DC to the X500

next device
Function diagrams
2.4
Function diagrams
2120 Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17)
2-894
2-895
2130 Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9)
2-896
2-897
2-898
2-899

2-893
24 V DC to the next device

+24 V
p0799
X124.M
X122.1
DI 0
DI 0 DI 3, DI 16, DI 17
r0723
r0722
1 = Simulation on
p0795.0
<1>
r0721.0
0
r0723.0
0722.0
p0796.0
p0795.1
24 V
X122.2
r0721.1
DI 1
r0723.1
0722.1
p0796.1
p0795.2
r0721.2
X122.3
DI 2
r0723.2
0722.2
p0796.2
p0795.3
r0721.3
X122.4
DI 3
r0723.3
0722.3
p0796.3
p0795.16
r0721.16
X122.5
DI 16
r0723.16
0722.16
5V
p0796.16
p0795.17
r0721.17
<1>
<1> When using the electrical isolation, omit the
terminal jumper and connect the load power
supply shown as a dashed line.

X124.M
DI 0 DI 3, DI 16, DI 17
inverted
24 V
<1>
X122.6
DI 17
X122.7
M1
<1>
X122.8
r0723.17
0722.17
p0796.17
1
2
3
4
5
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3, DI 16, DI 17)
6
fp_2120_51_eng.vsd
24.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2120 -
Function diagrams
X124.+
2-894
Fig. 2-16
X124.+

+24 V
p0799
X124.+
X124.M
X124.M
X132.1
DI 4
DI 4 DI 7, DI 20, DI 21
inverted
DI 4 DI 7, DI 20, DI 21
r0723
r0722
1 = Simulation on
p0795.4

Fig. 2-17
X124.+
<1>
r0721.4
0
r0723.4
0722.4
p0796.4
p0795.5
24 V
X132.2
r0721.5
DI 5
r0723.5
0722.5
p0796.5
p0795.6
r0721.6
X132.3
DI 6
r0723.6
0722.6
p0796.6
p0795.7
r0721.7
X132.4
DI 7
r0723.7
0722.7
p0796.7
p0795.20
X132.5
DI 20
r0723.20
0722.20
5V
p0796.20
p0795.21
<1>
2-895

terminal jumper and connect the load power
supply shown as a dashed line.
24 V
<1>
X132.6
DI 21
X132.7
M2
<1>
X132.8
r0723.21
0722.21
p0796.21
1
2
3
4
5
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7, DI 20, DI 21)
6
fp_2121_51_eng.vsd
24.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2121 -
Function diagrams
r0721.21
r0721.20

p0799
+24 V
X124.M

p0796.8 (0)
X124.M
M
r0721.8
p0728.8 (0)
DI
X122.9
DI/DO 8
<3>
DI/DO 8 9
inverted
DI/DO 8 9
r0723
r0722
p0795.8 (0)
DI 8_probe
<2>
r0723.8
r0722.8
DI
0
p0748.8 (0)
24 V
1
DO
CU S_src DI/DO 8
0
DO
<1>
p0738
(0)
r0747.8
0
p0796.9 (0)
r0721.9
p0728.9 (0)
DI
X122.10
DI/DO 9
<3>
p0795.9 (0)
DI 9_probe
<2>
r0723.9
r0722.9
DI
0
p0748.9 (0)
5V
1
DO
CU S_src DI/DO 9
0
DO
<1>
p0739
(0)
X122.11
r0747.9
0
<1> The connection shown as a dashed line applies

when used as digital output (p0728.x = 1).
<2> For SERVO and VECTOR (except for SINAMICS G130/G150), the following applies:
<3> The digital output access authority is displayed in r0729.
1
2
3
4
5
CU320-2 input/output terminals - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)
6
fp_2130_51_eng.vsd
24.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2130 -
Function diagrams
X124.+
2-896
Fig. 2-18
X124.+

p0799
+24 V
X124.+
X124.M
DI/DO 10 11
inverted
r0723
M
p0796.10 (0)
+
X124.M
M
r0721.10
p0728.10 (0)
DI
X122.12
DI/DO 10
<3>
r0723.10
r0722.10
DI
0
p0748.10 (0)
24 V
1
DO
r0722
p0795.10 (0)
DI 10_probe
<2>
DI/DO 10 11
CU S_src DI/DO 10
0
DO
<1>
p0740
(0)
r0747.10
0
p0796.11 (0)
r0721.11
p0728.11 (0)
DI
X122.13
DI/DO 11
<3>
p0795.11 (0)
DI 11_probe
<2>
r0723.11
r0722.11
DI
0
p0748.11 (0)
5V
1
DO
CU S_src DI/DO 11
0
DO
<1>
p0741
(0)
r0747.11
0

2-897
1
2
3
4
5
6
fp_2131_51_eng.vsd
24.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2131 -
Function diagrams
X122.14

Fig. 2-19
X124.+

p0799
+24 V
X124.M
DI/DO 12 13
inverted
r0723

p0796.12 (0)
X124.M
M
r0721.12
p0728.12 (0)
DI
X132.9
DI/DO 12
<3>
r0723.12
r0722.12
DI
0
p0748.12 (0)
24 V
1
DO
r0722
p0795.12 (0)
DI 12_probe
<2>
DI/DO 12 13
CU S_src DI/DO 12
0
DO
<1>
p0742
(0)
r0747.12
0
p0796.13 (0)
r0721.13
p0728.13 (0)
DI
X132.10
DI/DO 13
<3>
p0795.13 (0)
DI 13_probe
<2>
r0723.13
r0722.13
DI
0
p0748.13 (0)
5V
1
DO
CU S_src DI/DO 13
0
DO
<1>
p0743
(0)
X132.11
r0747.13
0

1
2
3
4
5
6
fp_2132_51_eng.vsd
24.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2132 -
Function diagrams
X124.+
2-898
Fig. 2-20
X124.+

p0799
+24 V
X124.+
X124.M
DI/DO 14 15
inverted
r0723
M
p0796.14 (0)
+
X124.M
M
r0721.14
p0728.14 (0)
DI
X132.12
DI/DO 14
<3>
r0723.14
r0722.14
DI
0
p0748.14 (0)
24 V
1
DO
r0722
p0795.14 (0)
DI 14_probe
<2>
DI/DO 14 15
CU S_src DI/DO 14
0
DO
<1>
p0744
(0)
r0747.14
0
p0796.15 (0)
r0721.15
p0728.15 (0)
DI
X132.13
DI/DO 15
<3>
p0795.15 (0)
DI 15_probe
<2>
r0723.15
r0722.15
DI
0
p0748.15 (0)
5V
1
DO
CU S_src DI/DO 15
0
DO
<1>
p0745
(0)
r0747.15
0

2-899
1
2
3
4
5
6
fp_2133_51_eng.vsd
24.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2133 -
Function diagrams
X132.14

Fig. 2-21
X124.+
Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2.5
PROFIdrive
Function diagrams
2410 PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics
2-902
2420 Standard telegrams and process data (PZD)
2-903
2422 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD)
2-904
2423 Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data (PZD)
2-905
2425 STW1_BM control word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0)
2-906
2-907
2428 ZSW1_BM status word metals sector interconnection (p2038 = 0)
2-908
2-909
2439 PZD receive signals interconnection profile-specific
2-910
2440 PZD receive signals interconnection manufacturer-specific
2-911
2441 STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
2-912
2-913
2-914
2449 PZD send signals interconnection profile-specific
2-915
2450 PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific
2-916
2451 ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
2-917
2-918
2-919
2468 IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
2-920
2470 IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
2-921
2472 IF1 status words, free interconnection
2-922
2-923
2-924
2-925
2-926
2-927
2495 CU_STW control word 1 Control Unit interconnection
2-928
2-900

Function diagrams
PROFIdrive
2496 CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection
2-929
2497 A_DIGITAL interconnection
2-930
2498 E_DIGITAL interconnection
2-931

2-901
PROFIBUS sampling time
Drive-specific functions (available once for each drive object)
Setting the PROFIBUS address
PB state t_monit
p2047
<8>

2410 PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics
PB PZD state Setpoint failure
2043.0
Monitoring functions
Alarms
Cyclic telegrams
from the master
<1>
A01920 "PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection"
<4>
t > t_response
PD fault delay
No cyclic telegrams from the
0...100 s
master
p2044 (0)
0
t
PD PZD state Clock cycle synchronous operation active
Faults
r2043.1
PB address
1...126
p0918 (126)
S Q
Address switches
on the Control Unit
<7>
p0918
<5>
DP ADDRESS
1...126
'3+
POWER ON
Setting the PROFIBUS address:

- Via p0918:
Set the address switches DP H and
DP L to 00 hex (= 0 dez), 7F hex
(= 127 dez), 80 hex or FF hex.
- Via the address switches
DP H and DP L:
Set the desired address as hexadecimal value between 01 hex
(= 1 dez) und 7E hex (= 126 dez).
Any change only becomes
PB addr diagn
effective after a POWER ON.
r2057
PB diag standard
r2055[0...2]
Diagnostic parameters
PN Name of Station
r61000[0...239]
<7>
PB diag clock sync
r2064[0...7]
No telegrams from the master
F01912
"IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure"
&
>
F01910 "PROFIBUS: Setpoint timeout"
<2>
<5>
n > p0925
F01911 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure"
A01921 "PROFIBUS: Receive setpoints after To"
A01930 "IF1: PB/PN current controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal"
A01931 "IF1: PB/PN speed controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal"
A01940 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronism not reached"
A01941 "IF1: PB/PN clock signal missing when establishing bus"
A01943 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal faulted when establishing the bus"
A01944 "IF1: PB/PN sign-of-life synchronism not reached"
A01950 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation synchronization unsuccessful"
PB status
r2054
PROFINET address
PN IP of Station
r61001[0...3]
Detecting
missing
signs-of-life
in a series
R Q
<3>
= 65535
<7>
Sign-of-life from the
clock cycle
synchronous master
SET
'3/
Example: 15 hex = 21 dez
Memory
Actual
PROFIBUS
address
PD SoL_tol
0...65535
p0925 (1)
A01900 "PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error"

A01901 "PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram error"
<1> The monitoring function is only executed after at least one
<7> A01902 "IF1: PB/PN clock cycle
"valid" cyclic telegram has been received. "Valid" means:
synchronous operation
the master is in operation and net data are transmitted.
parameterization not
<2> The monitoring function is only executed after the first
permissible"
sign-of- life has been received.
<3> Sign-of-life monitoring not effective for p0925 = 65535.
PD mast-SoL diag
<4> The response monitoring time t_response is automatically
r2065
defined when configuring PROFIBUS/PROFINET
PD mast-SoL S_Src
(e.g. HW Config made by SIEMENS).
<6>
p2045
<5> Only for the clock-cycle synchronous operation of the
r2050[3]
(0)
SERVO and VECTOR drive object.
<6> p2045 is automatically interconnected when the telegram
<5>
is selected.
r2075 IF1 diag offs recv
(no clock cycle synchronous operation with G130/G150).
r2076 IF1 diag offs send
<8> Only for cyclic operation.
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, CU_G, CU_S, SERVO, TB30, TM31, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - PROFIBUS (PB) / PROFINET (PN), addresses and diagnostics
6
fp_2410_54_eng.vsd
17.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2410 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive
2-902
Fig. 2-22
CU-specific functions
<1> <2> <4>

Refer to [1020.7]
Interconnec
tion is made
according to
[2440] [2450] automatically
Not suitably for sensorless vector control
<6>
<6>
<6>
Telegram
20
81
82
83
Appl.-Class
1, 4
1, 4
4 DSC
4 DSC
PZD 1
PZD 2
STW1
ZSW1
NSOLL_A NIST_A
PZD 3
PZD 4
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
NSOLL_B NIST_B NSOLL_B

STW2
ZSW2
PZD 5
STW2
PZD 8
PZD 9
PZD 10
PZD 11
PZD 12
PZD 13
Send telegram to
PROFIdrive
PZD 6
PZD 7
<5>
<5>
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW
Receive telegram from

PROFIdrive
2420 Standard telegrams and process data (PZD)

Fig. 2-23
PROFIdrive sampling time
PD Telegram select
p0922 (999)
PZD 14
G1_XIST1
G2_STW
<5>
STW1
ZSW1
XERR
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
KPC
G1_XIST2
G2_STW
G1_XIST1
XERR
G1_XIST2
G2_ZSW
G1_XIST2
KPC
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST2
G2_XIST2
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
SATZANW AKTSATZ SATZANW AKTSATZ NSOLL_A NIST_A_GLATT
G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
STW1
STW2
ZSW2
MDI_
TARPOS
XIST_A
STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC STW2_ENC ZSW2_ENC

G1_STW
IAIST_GLATT
MIST_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
<3>
MDI_
VELOCITY
G1_ZSW
G1_STW
G1_ZSW
G1_STW
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST2
G1_XIST2
G1_XIST2
NIST_A
NIST_B
MDI_ACC
MDI_DEC
MDI_MOD
PZD 15
PZD 16
PZD 17
PZD 18
PZD 19
PZD 20
PZD 21
PZD 22
PZD 23
PZD 24
PZD 25
PZD 26
PZD 27
PZD 28
PZD 29
PZD 30
PZD 31
PZD 32
<6> Only for ENCODER.
2-903
1
2
3
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - Standard telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
6
fp_2420_54_eng.vsd
11.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2420 -
PROFIdrive
= Position encoder signal

Function diagrams
<1> Depending on the Drive object, only specific telegrams can be used. Not suitably for sensorless vector control.
<2> If p0922 = 999 is changed to another value, the telegram is automatically assigned as specified in [2420] - [2423].
If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2420] - [2423].
<3> Freely interconnectable (pre-setting: MELD_NAMUR).
<4> The maximum number of PZD words depends on the drive object type.

2422 Manufacturer-specific telegrams and process data (PZD)
Interconnection is made
according to
<5>
<5>
Telegramm
102
103
<5>
105
Appl.- Class
1, 4
1, 4
4 DSC
PZD 1
PZD 2
PZD 3
PZD 4
PZD 5
PZD 6
PZD 7
PZD 8
PZD 9
PZD 10
PZD 11
PZD 12
PZD 13
PZD 14
PZD 15
PZD 16
PZD 17
PZD 18
PZD 19
PZD 20
PZD 21
PZD 22
PZD 23
PZD 24
PZD 25
PZD 26
PZD 27
PZD 28
PZD 29
PZD 30
PZD 31
PZD 32

<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
<5>
106
110
111
116
118
125
126
4 DSC
4 DSC
4 DSC
4 DSC
4 DSC
<5>
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
MOMRED MELDW MOMRED MELDW MOMRED MELDW MOMRED MELDW
G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW
G2_STW
G2_STW
G1_XIST1
G1_XIST1 XERR G1_XIST1
G1_XIST1
XERR
G1_XIST2
G1_XIST2
KPC
G1_XIST2
G1_XIST2
KPC
G2_ZSW
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST2
G2_XIST2
STW1
SATZANW
POS_STW
STW2
OVERRIDE
MDI_TAR
POS
MDI_VELO
CITY
MDI_ACC
MDI_DEC
MDI_MODE
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
AKTSATZ POS_STW1 POS_ZSW1
NSOLL_B
POS_ZSW POS_STW2 POS_ZSW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
MELDW OVERRIDE
MELDW
MOMRED
G1_STW
MDI_TAR
XIST_A
XIST_A
POS
G2_STW
MDI_VELO
NIST_B
XERR
CITY
MDI_ACC FAULT_CODE
KPC
MDI_DEC WARN_CODE
<3>
<3>
<5>
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
STW1
ZSW1
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
ZSW2
MELDW
G1_ZSW
STW2
MOMRED
G2_STW
G3_STW
ZSW2
MELDW
G2_ZSW
STW2
ZSW2
STW2
ZSW2
MOMRED MELDW MOMRED MELDW
G1_STW G1_ZSW G1_STW G1_ZSW
G2_STW
XERR G1_XIST1
G1_XIST1
XERR
KPC
G1_XIST2
G1_XIST2
KPC
M_VST
G2_ZSW
G1_XIST1
G2_XIST1
XERR
G1_XIST2
G2_XIST2
KPC
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST1
G3_ZSW
G3_XIST1
G2_XIST2
G3_XIST2
AIST_GLATT
MSOLL_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
ITIST_GLATT
AIST_GLATT
MSOLL_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
ITIST_GLATT
Reseved
Reseved
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST2
<1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used.
If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2420] - [2423]!
<3> Can be freely connected.
= Position encoder signal
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive Manufacturer-specific/telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
6
fp_2422_54_eng.vsd
25.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2422 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive
Fig. 2-24
2-904
<1> <2> <4>

PD Telegr_select
p0922 (999)
Refer to [1020.7]

<5>
[2481] [2483]
<5>
Telegram
136
220
352
370
371
390
391
392
Appl.- Class
4 DSC
PZD 1
PZD 2
PZD 3
PZD 4
PZD 5
PZD 6
PZD 7
PZD 8
PZD 9
PZD 10
PZD 11
PZD 12
PZD 13
PZD 14
PZD 15
PZD 16
PZD 17
PZD 18
PZD 19
PZD 20
PZD 21
PZD 22
PZD 23
PZD 24
PZD 25
PZD 26
PZD 27
PZD 28
PZD 29
PZD 30
PZD 31
PZD 32
STW1
ZSW1
NSOLL_B
NIST_B
STW2
MOMRED
G1_STW
G2_STW
ZSW2
MELDW
G1_ZSW
G1_XIST1
XERR
G1_XIST2
KPC
M_VST
Reserved
G2_ZSW
G2_XIST1
G2_XIST2
999
<3> - <3>
STW1_BM ZSW1_BM
STW1
ZSW1
E_STW1 E_ZSW1 E_STW1_BM E_ZSW1_BM CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 CU_STW1 CU_ZSW1 STW1 ZSW1
NIST_A
NSOLL_A NIST_A_GLATT
<6>
IAIST
A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL A_DIGITAL E_DIGITAL
NSOLL_B
IAIST
<3>
IAIST_GLATT
<6>
WARN_CODE
MT_STW
MT_ZSW MT_STW MT_ZSW
STW2_BM MIST <6>
<3>
MIST_GLATT
<6>
FAULT_CODE
MT1_ZS_F
MT1_ZS_F
M_ADD <8> WARN_CODE
<3>
WARN_CODE
<6>
<6>
MT1_ZS_S
MT1_ZS_S
M_LIM <7> FAULT_CODE
<3>
FAULT_CODE
<6>
MT2_ZS_F
MT2_ZS_F
<3>
ZSW2_BM
<6>
MT2_ZS_S
MT2_ZS_S
<3>
<3>
<6>
MT3_ZS_F
<3>
<3>
MT3_ZS_S
<3>
<3>
MT4_ZS_F
MT4_ZS_S
MT5_ZS_F
MT5_ZS_S
MT6_ZS_F
MT6_ZS_S
AIST_GLATT
MSoll_GLATT
PIST_GLATT
ITIST_GLATT
6
fp_2423_54_eng.vsd
25.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2423 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and Process Data (PZD)
<6> Freely interconn.

<7> Not for V/f Steuerung.
<8> Preassignment, not disabled.
PROFIdrive
2-905
<1> Depending on the drive object, only specific telegrams can be used.
If p0922 999 is changed to p0922 = 999, the "old" telegram assignment is maintained as specified in [2420] - [2423]!
<3> In order to comply with the PROFIdrive profile, PZD1 must be used as control word 1 (STW1) or status word 1 (ZSW1).
p2037 = 2 should be set if STW1 is not transferred with PZD1 as specified in the PROFIdrive profile.
<5> Only for S120/S150.
Transmit telegram length freely selectable via central

PROFIdrive configuration in the master
2423 Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and process data (PZD)
Interconnection
is made
according to
Receive telegram length freely selectable via central

PROFIdrive configuration in the master
Fig. 2-25

<1>
<2> <4>
<1>
<2>
PD Telegram select
p0922 (999)
<1>
Meaning
STW1.0
= ON (pulses can be enabled)

0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancellation and ready-to-power-up)
p0840[0] = r2090.0
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.1
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)

0 = OFF2 (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
p0844[0] = r2090.1
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.2
1 = No OFF3 (enable possible)

0 = OFF3 (braking with the OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
p0848[0] = r2090.2
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.3
1 = Enable operation (pulses can be enabled)

0 = Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
p2816[0] = r2090.3
[2501.3]
[2634.3]
STW1.4
1 = Operating condition (the ramp-function generator can be enabled)

0 = inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
p1140[0] = r2090.4
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
STW1.5
1 = Enable the ramp-function generator

0 = stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
p1141[0] = r2090.5
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070]
STW1.6
1 = Enable setpoint
0 = inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
p1142[0] = r2090.6
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
p2103[0] = r2090.7
[2546.1]
[8060]
STW1.7
= Acknowledge faults
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
internal control word signal target
Inverted
STW1.8
Reserved
STW1.9
Reserved
STW1.10
1 = Control via PLC
p0854[0] = r2090.10
[2501.3]
[2501]
STW1.11
Reserved
STW1.12
Reserved
<3>
<3>
STW1.13
Reserved
<3>
<3>
STW1.14
Reserved
<3>
<3>
STW1.15
Reserved
<3>
<3>
<2>

Refer to [1020.7]
<1> Used in telegrams 220.

<2> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the drive object accepts the process data (PZD).
<3> Interconnection is not disabled.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - STW1_BM-control word metal industry interconnection
6
fp_2425_54_eng.vsd
06.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2425 -
Function diagrams

Signal
Interconnection
parameters
PROFIdrive
2-906
Fig. 2-26
Signal targets for STW1_BM

Fig. 2-27
Signal targets for STW2_BM
<1>
Interconnection
parameters
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
Meaning
STW2.0
Command data set selection CDS, bit 0
p0810 = r2093.0
[8560]
STW2.1
Command data set selection CDS, bit 1
p0811 = r2093.1
[8560]
STW2.2
Drive data set selection DDS, bit 0
p0820[0] = r2093.2
<2>
[8565]
STW2.3
p0821[0] = r2093.3
<2>
[8565]
STW2.4
p0822[0] = r2093.4
<2>
[8565]
STW2.5
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
p1122[0] = r2093.5
STW2.6
Reserved
STW2.7
1 = Load compensation
p1477[0] = r2093.7
STW2.8
1 = Droop enabled
p1492[0] = r2093.8
[6030]
STW2.9
1 = Speed controller enabled
p0856[0] = r2093.9
<2>
STW2.10
Reserved
<2>
STW2.11
1 = Torque controlled operation

0 = Speed controlled operation
STW2.12
Reserved
<2>
<2>
STW2.13
Reserved
<2>
<2>
STW2.14
Reserved
<2>
<2>
STW2.15
Controller slave sign-of-life Toggle bit
<2>
p1501[0] = r2093.11
p2081[15] = r2093.15
Inverted
Refer to [1020.7]
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - STW2_BM-control word metal industry interconnection
6
fp_2426_54_eng.vsd
06.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2426 -
PROFIdrive
2-907

Function diagrams
Signal
<1>
Meaning
ZSW1.0
1 = Ready to power-up
p2080[0] = r0899.0
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.1
1 = Ready to operate
p2080[1] = r0899.1
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.2
1 = Operation enabled
p2080[2] = r2811.0
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.3
1 = Fault present
p2080[3] = r2139.3
[2548.7]
[8060]
ZSW1.4
1 = No coast down active (OFF2 inactive)
p2080[4] = r0899.4
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.5
1 = No fast stop active (OFF3 inactive)
p2080[5] = r0899.5
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.6
1 = Power-on inhibit active
p2080[6] = r0899.6
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.7
1 = Alarm present
p2080[7] = r2139.7
[2548.7]
[8065]
ZSW1.8
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_off
p2080[8] = r2197.7
[2534.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.9
1 = Control requested
<3>
p2080[9] = r0899.9
[2503.7]
[2503]
ZSW1.10
1 = f or n comparison value reached/exceeded
p2080[10] = r2199.1
[2536.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.11
1 = I, M, or P limit not reached
p2080[11] = r1407.7
[2522.7]
[5610] [6060]
<5>
ZSW1.12
1 = Open holding brake
p2080[12] = r0899.12
[2503.7]
[2701]
ZSW1.13
Reserved
<6>
<6>
ZSW1.14
Reserved
<6>
<6>
ZSW1.15
Reserved
<6>
<6>
<4>
<1> Used in telegram 220.

<2> The ZSW1 is generated using the binector-connector converter (BI: p2080[0...15], inversion: p2088[0].0...p2088[0].15)
<3> The drive object is ready to accept data.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - ZSW1_BM-status word metal industry interconnection
[Function diagram]
Internal status word
[Function diagram]
signal source
Inverted
<2>
PROFIdrive Abtastzeit
siehe [1020.7]
<4> Not for VECTOR V/f.

<5> Only for SINAMICS S120.
6
fp_2428_54_eng.vsd
06.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2428 -
Function diagrams

Signal
Interconnection
parameters
PROFIdrive
2-908
Fig. 2-28
Signal sources for ZSW1_BM

Fig. 2-29
Signal sources for ZSW2_BM
<1>
Interconnection
parameters
[Function diagram]
internal status word
[Function diagram]
signal source
Inverted
Signal
Meaning
ZSW2.0
Reserved
<3>
<3>
ZSW2.1
Reserved
<3>
<3>
ZSW2.2
Reserved
<3>
<3>
ZSW2.3
Reserved
<3>
<3>
ZSW2.4
Reserved
<3>
<3>
ZSW2.5
1 = Alarm class bit 0
p2081[5] = r2139.11
[2548]
-
ZSW2.6
p2081[6] = r2139.12
[2548]
ZSW2.7
Reserved
ZSW2.8
Reserved
ZSW2.9
1 = Speed setpoint controll activ
<2>
p2081[9] = r1407.11
ZSW2.10
1 = Upper torque limit
<2>
p2081[10] = r1407.8
ZSW2.11
1 = Lower torque limit
<2>
p2081[11] = r1407.9
ZSW2.12
1 = Encoderless operation due to fault
p2081[12] = r1407.13
ZSW2.13
SS1_ACTIVE
p2081[13] = r9773.2
--
POWER-REMOVED
p2081[14] = r9773.1
ZSW2.15
Controller slave sign-of-life Toggle bit
p2081[15] = r2093.15
Refer to [1020.7]
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - ZSW2_BM status word metal industry interconnection
6
fp_2429_54_eng.vsd
06.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2429 -
PROFIdrive
2-909

Function diagrams
ZSW2.14
Signal receivers for PZD receive signals

PROFIBUS
PROFINET

2439 PZD receive signals interconnection profile-specific
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
<2>
<1>
PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Interconnection
parameter
Function diagram
Data
type
Signal
Meaning
Normalization
STW1
Control word 1
(bitwise)
[2442][2443] <3>
[2475] <3>
U16
STW2
Control word 2
(bitwise)
[2444]
[2445]
U16
[3030.2]
[3080.4] <3>
I16
4000 hex
[3030.2]
[3080.4]
[3090.8] <3>
I32
4000 0000 hex
NSOLL_A
Speed setpoint A (16-bit)
p1070 (Erw. Soll.)

p1155
NSOLL_B
Speed setpoint B (32-bit)
p1070 (Erw. Soll.)

p1155
p1430 (DSC) <3>
<3>
G1_STW
Encoder 1 control word
p0480[0]
[4720]
U16
<3>
[2468], [2481]
r2090...r2095 bit
<3>
r2050[0...n] WORD
r2060[0...30] DWORD
G2_STW
13
p0480[1]
[4720]
U16
G3_STW
17
p0480[2]
[4720]
U16
A_DIGITAL
Digital output (16-bit)
22
(bitwise)
[2497]
U16
XERR
Position deviation
25
p1190
[3090.5]
I32
KPC
Position controller gain factor
26
p1191
[3090.5]
I32
SATZANW
Pos block selection
32
(bitwise)
[2476]
U16
MDI_TARPOS
MDI position
34
p2642
[3618]
I32
1 hex
1 LU
MDI_VELOCITY
MDI velocity
35
p2643
[3618]
I32
1 hex
1000 LU/min
Drive object m
MDI_ACC
MDI acceleration override
36
p2644
[3618]
I16
4000 hex
100%
Trailer
MDI_DEC
MDI deceleration override
37
p2645
[3618]
I16
4000 hex
100%
MDI_MOD
MDI mode
38
(bitwise)
[2480]
U16
STW2_ENC
Status word 2 ENCODER
80
(bitwise)
[2433]
U16
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
.
.
.
...
<3>
p2000
p2000
Drive object n
.
.
.
<3>
Telegram assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
<4>
<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters of the command data set CDS0 are automatically set.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32.
1
2
3
4
5
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_S, ENCODER, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals, connection of profile-specific
6
fp_2439_54_eng.vsd
11.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2439 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
PROFIdrive
2-910
Fig. 2-30
2440 PZD receive signals interconnection manufacturer-specific

Fig. 2-31

Refer to [1020.7]
Signal receivers for PZD receive signals
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
<2>
<1>
PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Interconnection
parameter
Function
diagram
Signal
Meaning
MOMRED
Torque reduction
101
p1542
[5610.2]
I16
MT_STW
Measuring probe control word
130
p0682
U16
Data type
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
POS_STW
Pos control word
203
(bitwise)
[2462]
U16
Header
OVERRIDE
Pos velocity override
205
p2646
[3630]
I16
Drive object 1
POS_STW1
Pos control word 1
220
(bitwise)
[2463]
U16
Drive object 2
POS_STW2
Pos control word 2
222
(bitwise)
[2464]
U16
MDI_MOD
Pos MDI mode
229
p2654
[3620]
U16
M_LIM
Torque limit
310
p1503/p1552/p1554
U16
<3>
.
.
.
[2468], [2481]
r2090...r2095 bit
r2050[0...n] WORD
r2060[0...30] DWORD
...
Drive object n
.
.
.
Telegram assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
M_ADD
Additional torque
311
p1495
U16
E_STW1
Control word 1 for Active Infeed (ALM, SMART)
320
(bitwise)
[2447]
U16
STW1_BM
Control word 1, variant for BM
322
(bitwise)
[2425]
U16
STW2_BM
Control word 2, variant for BM
324
(bitwise)
[2426]
U16
E_STW1_BM
Control word 1 for Active Infeed
326
(bitwise)
[2427]
U16
CU_STW1
Control word 1 for Control Unit
500
(bitwise)
[2495]
U16
Normalization
4000 hex
p2003
4000 hex
100%
Drive object m
Trailer
6
fp_2440_54_eng.vsd
04.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2440 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_CX32, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - PZD receive signals, connection of manufacturer-specific
PROFIdrive
2-911
<1> When selecting a standard telegram or a manufacturer-specific telegram via p0922, these interconnection parameters of the command data set CDS0 are automatically set.
<2> Data type according to to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32.
<1>
[Function diagram]
internal control word
[Function diagram]
signal target
Inverted

Signal
Meaning
STW1.0

0 = OFF1 (braking with ramp-function generator, then pulse cancllation & ready-to-power-up)
p0840[0] = r2090.0
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.1
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible) <3>

p0844[0] = r2090.1
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.2
1 = No OFF3 (enable possible) <3>

p0848[0] = r2090.2
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.3

p0852[0] = r2090.3
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.4

0 = Inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
p1140[0] = r2090.4
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
STW1.5

0 = Stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
p1141[0] = r2090.5
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070]
STW1.6
1 = Enable setpoint
0 = Inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
p1142[0] = r2090.6
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
p2103[0] = r2090.7
[2546.1]
[8060]
STW1.7
STW1.8
Reserved
STW1.9
Reserved
STW1.10
1 = Control via PLC
p0854[0] = r2090.10
[2501.3]
[2501]
STW1.11
1 = Direction reversal
p1113[0] = r2090.11
[2505.3]
[3040]
STW1.12
Reserved
STW1.13
Reserved
STW1.14
Reserved
STW1.15
1 = CDS selection
<4>
p0810[0] = 2090.15
[8560]
<2>

1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
PROFIdrive - STW1 control word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
Refer to [1020.7]
<3> OC = Operating condition.

6
fp_2441_54_eng.vsd
14.08.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2441 -
Function diagrams
Interconnection
parameters
PROFIdrive
2-912
Fig. 2-32
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2)

Fig. 2-33
Signal targets for STW1 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
<1>
Signal
Meaning
Interconnection
parameters
STW1.0

p0840[0] = r2090.0
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.1
1 = No OFF2 (enable is possible)

p0844[0] = r2090.1
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.2
1 = No OFF3 (enable possible)

p0848[0] = r2090.2
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.3

p0852[0] = r2090.3
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.4

0 = inhibit ramp-function generator (set the ramp-function generator output to zero)
p1140[0] = r2090.4
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
STW1.5

0 = stop the ramp-function generator (freeze the ramp-function generator output)
p1141[0] = r2090.5
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070]
STW1.6
1 = Enable setpoint
0 = inhibit setpoint (set the ramp-function generator input to zero)
p1142[0] = r2090.6
[2501.3]
[3060] [3070] [3080]
p2103[0] = r2090.7
[2546.1]
[8060]
STW1.7
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
Inverted
Reserved
STW1.9
Reserved
STW1.10
1 = Control via PLC
<2>
p0854[0] = r2090.10
[2501.3]
[2501]
STW1.11
1 = Direction reversal
<3>
p1113[0] = r2090.11
[2505.3]
[3040]
STW1.12
Reserved
STW1.13
1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, raise
<3>
p1035[0] = r2090.13
[2505.3]
[3020]
STW1.14
1 = Motorized potentiometer, setpoint, lower
<3>
p1036[0] = r2090.14
[2505.3]
[3020]
STW1.15
Reserved
2-913
<3> Only for "expanded setpoint channel" and "extended ramp-function generator".
<4> OC = Operating condition.
<1> Used in telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 352.

1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
6
fp_2442_54_eng.vsd
27.11.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2442 -
PROFIdrive
<5>
Refer to [1020.7]
Function diagrams
STW1.8
<1>

Signal
Meaning
STW2.0
p0820[0] = r2093.0
<4> r2092.0
[8565]
STW2.1
p0821[0] = r2093.1
<4> r2092.1
[8565]
STW2.2
p0822[0] = r2093.2
<4> r2092.2
[8565]
STW2.3
p0823[0] = r2093.3
<4> r2092.3
[8565]
STW2.4
p0824[0] = r2093.4
<4> r2092.4
[8565]
STW2.5
Reserved
STW2.6
Reserved
STW2.7
1 = Parking axis
p0897 = r2093.7
<4> r2092.7
STW2.8
1 = Traverse to fixed endstop <2>
p1545[0] = r2093.8
[2520.2]
[8012]
STW2.9
Reserved
STW2.10
Reserved
p0828 = r2093.11
<4> r2092.11
p2045 = r2050[3]
<4> r2050[2]
[2410]
STW2.11
<3>
<5>
1 = Motor changeover, feedback Signal
STW2.12
Master sign-of-life, bit 0
<5>
STW2.13
<5>
STW2.14
<5>
STW2.15
<5>
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
Inverted
Refer to [1020.7]
<3>
<1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 110 and 111.
<2> Not for telegrams 9, 110 and 111.
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
<4> Only for Telegram 9.
6
fp_2444_54_eng.vsd
26.09.08 V04.03.01
<5> Not for Vector V/f.
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2444 -
Function diagrams
Interconnection
parameters
PROFIdrive
2-914
Fig. 2-34
Signal targets for STW2 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
2449 PZD send signals interconnection profile-specific

Fig. 2-35
Signal sources for PZD send signals
<1>
PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Interconnection
parameter
Function diagram
Refer to [1020.7]
Signal
Description
Data type
Normalization
ZSW1
Status word 1
r2089[0]
[2452][2453][2479] <2>
U16
ZSW2
Status word 2
r2089[1]
[2454][2455] <2>
U16
NIST_A
Speed setpoint A (16 bit)
r0063 SERVO
r0063[0] VECTOR
r0061 ENCODER
[4710] <2>
[4715]
[4710]
I16
4000 hex
[4710] <2>
[4715]
[4710]
I32
PROFIdrive send
telegram
Drive object 1
NIST_B
Speed setpoint B (32 bit)
r0063 SERVO
r0063[0] VECTOR
r0061 ENCODER
G1_ZSW
Encoder 1 status word
10
r0481[0]
[4730]
U16
G1_XIST1
Encoder 1 actual position 1
11
r0482[0]
[4704]
U32
G1_XIST2
12
r0483[0]
[4704]
U32
G2_ZSW
14
r0481[1]
[4730]
U16
G2_XIST1
15
r0482[1]
[4704]
U32
G2_XIST2
16
r0483[1]
[4704]
U32
G3_ZSW
18
r0481[2]
[4730]
U16
G3_XIST1
19
r0482[2]
[4704]
U32
G3_XIST2
20
r0483[2]
[4704]
U32
E_DIGITAL
Digital inputs
21
r2089[2]
[2459]
U16
<2>
XIST_A
Position actual value A
28
r2521[0]
[4010]
I32
<2>
AKTSATZ
Pos selected block
33
r2670
[3650]
U16
IAIST_GLATT
Absolute actual current, smoothed
51
r0068[1]
[6714]
I16
4000 hex
p2002
ITIST_GLATT
Current actual value, torque-generating
52
r0078[1]
[6714]
I16
4000 hex
p2002
MIST_GLATT
Actual torque smoothed
53
r0080[1]
[6714]
I16
4000 hex
p2003
PIST_GLATT
Power factor, smoothed
54
r0082[1]
[6714]
I16
4000 hex
p2004
NIST_A_GLATT
Actual speed, smoothed
57
r0063[1]
[4715]
I16
4000 hex
p2000
MELD_NAMUR
VIK-NAMUR message bit bar
58
r3113
U16
IAIST
Absolute actual current
59
r0068[0]
[6714]
I16
4000 hex
MIST
Actual torque
60
r0080[0]
[6714]
I16
4000 hex
ZSW2_ENC
Status word 2 ENCODER
81
(bitwise)
[2434]
U16
<2>
<3>
Header
p2000
4000 0000 hex
p2000
1 hex
1 LU
Send words 1...16

p2051[0...15] WORD
r2053[0...15] WORD
p2061[0...14] DWORD
r2063[0...14] DWORD
Drive object 2
.
.
.
...
Drive object n
Telegram
assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
.
.
.
Drive object m
Trailer
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
p2002
p2003
-
6
fp_2449_54_eng.vsd
11.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2449 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
DO: A_INF, B_INF, ENCODER, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - PZD send signals connection of profile-specific
PROFIdrive
2-915
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32.

2450 PZD send signals interconnection manufacturer-specific
<2>
<2>
<1>
PROFIdrive
Signal No.
Interconnection
parameter
Function
diagram
Signal
Description
Data type
Normalization
MELDW
Message word
102
r2089[2]
[2456]
U16
MSOLL_GLATT
Total speed setpoint smoothed
120
r0079[1]
[5610] <2>
I16
4000 hex
p2003
AIST_GLATT
Torque utilization smoothed
121
r0081
[8012]
I16
4000 hex
100%
MT_ZSW
Measuring probe status word
131
r0688
U16
MT1_ZS_F
Measuring probe 1 measuring time, falling edge
132
r0687[0]
U16
MT1_ZS_S
Measuring probe 1 measuring time, rising edge
133
r0686[0]
U16
MT2_ZS_F
134
r0687[1]
U16
MT2_ZS_S
135
r0686[1]
U16
MT3_ZS_F
136
r0687[2]
U16
MT3_ZS_S
137
r0686[2]
U16
MT4_ZS_F
138
r0687[3]
U16
MT4_ZS_S
139
r0686[3]
U16
MT5_ZS_F
140
r0687[4]
U16
MT5_ZS_S
141
r0686[4]
U16
MT6_ZS_F
142
r0687[5]
U16
MT6_ZS_S
143
r0686[5]
U16
Drive object m
POS_ZSW
Pos status word
204
r2683
[3645]
U16
Trailer
POS_ZSW1
Pos status word 1
221
r2089[3]
[2466]
U16
POS_ZSW2
Pos status word 2
223
r2089[4]
[2467]
U16
FAULT_CODE
Fault code
301
r2131
[8060]
U16
WARN_CODE
Alarm code
303
r2132
[8065]
U16
E_ZSW1
Status word 1 for Active Infeed
321
r2089[1]
[2457]
U16
ZSW1_BM
Status word 1, variant for BM
323
r2089[0]
[2428]
U16
ZSW2_BM
Status word 2, variant for BM
325
r2089[1]
[2429]
U16
E_ZSW1_BM
Status word 1 for Infeed, variant for BM (ALM, BLM, SLM)
327
r2080
[2430]
U16
CU_ZSW1
Status word 1 for Control Unit
501
r2089[1]
[2496]
U16
M_VST
Torque pre-control value
p1513
I16
PROFIdrive send
telegram
Header
Drive object 1
Send words 1...16
p2051[0...15] WORD
r2053[0...15] WORD
p2061[0...14] DWORD
r2063[0...14] DWORD
Drive object 2
.
.
.
...
Drive object n
Telegram
assignment
according to p0922
[2420]
.
.
.
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
4000 hex
p2003
<1> Data type according to the PROFIdrive profile: I16 = Integer16, I32 = Integer32, U16 = Unsigned16, U32 = Unsigned32
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - PZD send signals, connection of manufacture-specific
6
fp_2450_54_eng.vsd
26.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2450 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Signal sources for PZD send signals
PROFIdrive
2-916
Fig. 2-36

Fig. 2-37
Signal sources for ZSW1 in Interface Mode VIK-NAMUR (p2038 = 2)
<1>
Interconnection
parameters
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
Signal source
Signal
Meaning
ZSW1.0
p2080[0] = r0899.0
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.1
1 = Ready to operate (DC link loaded, pulses blocked)
p2080[1] = r0899.1
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.2
1 = Operation enabled (drive follows n_set)
p2080[2] = r0899.2
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.3
1 = Fault present
p2080[3] = r2139.3
[2548.7]
[8060]
ZSW1.4
p2080[4] = r0899.4
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.5
p2080[5] = r0899.5
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.6
p2080[6] = r0899.6
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.7
1 = Alarm present
p2080[7] = r2139.7
[2548.7]
[8065]
ZSW1.8
p2080[8] = r2197.7
[2534.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.9
<3>
p2080[9] = r0899.9
[2503.7]
[2503]
ZSW1.10
p2080[10] = r2199.1
[2536.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.11
p2080[11] = r0056.13
[2522.7]
[6060]
ZSW1.12
Reserved
ZSW1.13
1 = No motor overtemperature alarm
p2080[13] = r2135.14
[2548.7]
[8016]
ZSW1.14
1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0)

0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)
p2080[14] = r2197.3
[2534.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.15
1 = Display CDS
<4>
p2080[15] = r0836.0

6
fp_2451_54_eng.vsd
14.08.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2451 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
PROFIdrive - ZSW1 status word interconnection (p2038 = 2)
Inverted
<2>
PROFIdrive
2-917

Refer to [1020.7]
[Function diagram] [Function diagram]

Internal status word signal source
<1>
Inverted
<2>
siehe [1020.7]

Signal
Meaning
ZSW1.0
p2080[0] = r0899.0
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.1
1 = Ready to operate
p2080[1] = r0899.1
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.2
p2080[2] = r0899.2
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.3
1 = Fault present
p2080[3] = r2139.3
[2548.7]
[8060]
ZSW1.4
p2080[4] = r0899.4
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.5
p2080[5] = r0899.5
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.6
p2080[6] = r0899.6
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW1.7
1 = Alarm present
p2080[7] = r2139.7
[2548.7]
[8065]
ZSW1.8
p2080[8] = r2197.7
[2534.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.9
<3>
p2080[9] = r0899.9
[2503.7]
[2503]
ZSW1.10
p2080[10] = r2199.1
[2536.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.11
p2080[11] = r1407.7
[2522.7]
[5610] [6060]
<5>
ZSW1.12
p2080[12] = r0899.12
[2503.7]
[2701]
ZSW1.13
1 = No motor overtemperature alarm
p2080[13] = r2135.14
[2548.7]
[8016]
ZSW1.14
1 = Motor rotates forwards (n_act 0)

0 = Motor rotates backwards (n_act < 0)
p2080[14] = r2197.3
[2534.7]
[8010]
ZSW1.15
1 = No alarm, thermal overload, power unit
p2080[15] = r2135.15
[2548.7]
[8014]
<4>
<5>
<1> Used in telegrams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 352.
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR

6
fp_2452_54_eng.vsd
27.11.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2452 -
Function diagrams
Interconnection
parameters
PROFIdrive
2-918
Fig. 2-38
Signal sources for ZSW1 im Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)

Fig. 2-39
Signal sources for ZSW2 in Interface Mode SINAMICS (p2038 = 0)
<3>
<4>
<1>
Interconnection
parameters

Inverted
internal status word signal source
Meaning
ZSW2.0
1 = Drive data set DDS effective, bit 0
p2081[0] = r0051.0
[8565]
ZSW2.1
p2081[1] = r0051.1
[8565]
ZSW2.2
p2081[2] = r0051.2
[8565]
ZSW2.3
p2081[3] = r0051.3
[8565]
ZSW2.4
p2081[4] = r0051.4
[8565]
ZSW2.5
p2081[5] = r2139.11
[2548]
-
ZSW2.6
p2081[6] = r2139.12
[2548]
ZSW2.7
1 = Parking axis active
p2081[7] = r0896.0
ZSW2.8
1 = Traverse to fixed endstop
p2081[8] = r1406.8
[2520]
ZSW2.9
Reserved
ZSW2.10
1 = Pulses enabled
p2082[13] = r0899.11
[2503.7]
[2610]
ZSW2.11
1 = Data set changeover active
p2081[11] = r0835.0
ZSW2.12
ZSW2.13

Implicitly interconnected
ZSW2.14
ZSW2.15
<2>
<4>
Refer to [1020.7]
2-919
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
<4> Not for Vector V/f.
6
fp_2454_54_eng.vsd
26.09.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2454 -
PROFIdrive
<3>
<1> Used in telegrams 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 110, 111.
<2> These signals are automatically interconnected for clock-cycle synchronous operation.
Function diagrams
Signal
<6>
<1> <4>
PZD receive word 1
r2050[0]

PROFIBUS
PROFINET
r2050[1]
r2060[1]
PZD receive word 3
r2050[2]
r2060[2]
PZD receive word 4

PROFIdrive
receive telegram
r2050[3]
r2060[3]
DWORD
r2060[4]
DWORD
r2060[5]
DWORD
PZD receive word 5
Header
...
r2093.15
r2050[4]
p2098[0].0
<2>
Drive object 2
p2099[0]
(0)
.
.
.
r2094.0
p2098[0].15
Drive object n
.
.
.
PZD receive word 29
r2050[28]
r2060[28]
Drive object m
p2048
2 connector-binector converter
r2050[5]
PZD receive word 6

Drive object 1
...
r2092.15
r2093.0
DWORD
Refer to [1020.7]
r2091.15
r2092.0
DWORD
...
r2091.0
DWORD
PZD receive word 2
...
r2090.15
r2050[29]
r2060[29]
Trailer
p2098[1].0
DWORD
PZD receive word 30
<2>
DWORD
PZD receive word 31
p2099[1]
r2050[30]
r2060[30]
(0)
DWORD
PZD receive word 32
r2094.15
r2095.0
r2050[31]
<3>
<3>
p2098[1].15
Reference quantities for further interconnection

p200x
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 32 and used as binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 % for double words 4000 0000 hex = 100 %.
The reference variables p200x apply for the ongoing interconnection (100 % -> p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %.
<4> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type.
<5> The connector-binector converter only converts the lower 16 bits irrespective of the input variable.
<6> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r2050 or r2060 can have a value
1
2
3
4
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
r2095.15
0 for a PZD word.
6
fp_2468_54_eng.vsd
25.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2468 -
Function diagrams
r2060[0]
r2090.0
PROFIdrive
2-920
Fig. 2-40
<6>
r2063[0...30]
Fig. 2-41
...

PZD send word 1
p2051[1]
<1>
<4>
(0)0
DWORD

DWORD
<2>
p2061[0]
IF1 Diag send Wort 1...32

r2053[0...31]
<2> p2051[0]
(0)0
<1>
p2061[1]
PZD send word 2

p2051[2]
(0)0
DWORD
p2061[2]
PZD send word 3

p2051[3]
(0)0
DWORD
p2061[3]
PZD send word 4

p2051[4]
(0)0
DWORD
p2061[4]
PZD send word 5

p2051[5]
(0)0
DWORD
p2061[5]
PZD send word 6

p2051[6]
(0)0
DWORD
p2061[6]
PZD send word 7

p2051[7]
(0)0
DWORD
p2061[7]
PZD send word 8

p2051[8]
PROFIdrive send
telegram
Header
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
(0)0
.
.
.
PZD send word 9
DWORD
p2061[27]
Drive object n
.
.
.
p2051[28]
(0)
DWORD
p2061[28]
PZD send word 29

p2051[29]
(0)
DWORD
p2061[29]
Drive object m
PZD send word 30
p2051[30]
Trailer
(0)
DWORD
p2061[30]
PZD send word 31

p2051[31]
(0)
PZD send word 32
<3>
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
6
fp_2470_54_eng.vsd
25.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2470 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
DO: ENCODER, SERVO, TM41, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - IF1 send telegram, free interconnection via BICO (p0922 = 999)
PROFIdrive
2-921
Reference quantities for

further interconnection
p200x
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (ZSW1), not as DWORD.
<2> A PZD transmit word can either be supplied via connector input p2051[x] (WORD) or via p2061[x] (DWORD).
The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected.
<3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced variables. p200x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or
4000 0000 hex in the case of double words, if the input variable has the value p200x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 4000 0000 hex; 0 C -> 0%.
<4> The number of PZD send words depends on the drive object type.
p2088[2].0
p2082[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
[1]
(0.0)

p2088[0].0
p2080[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
[1]
(0.0)
Free status word 3

r2089[2]
p2088[2].15
Status word 1
r2089[0]
(0.0)
[15]
p2088[0].15
p2088[3].0
(0.0)
[15]
p2083[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
(0.0) [1]
Free status word 4

r2089[3]
p2088[3].15
p2088[1].0
p2081[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
(0.0) [1]
(0.0)
Status word 2
[15]
r2089[1]
p2088[1].11
[11]
(0.0)
[12]
(0.0)
p2088[4].0
p2084[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
(0.0) [1]
Free status word 4

r2089[4]
<2> <1>
(0.0)
p2088[4].15
[15]
<1> For clock-cycle synchronous SERVO, these signals must not be interconnected (slave sign-of-life).
1
2
3
DO: A_INF, CU_G, CU_S, SERVO, TB30, TM31, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - IF1 status words, free interconnection
(0.0)
[15]
6
fp_2472_54_eng.vsd
11.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2472 -
Function diagrams
5 binector-connector converter
PROFIdrive
2-922
Fig. 2-42
p2048
r2090.0
Refer to [1020.7]
r2090.15
PROFIBUS
PROFINET

Fig. 2-43
PZD receive word 1
r2050[0]
PZD receive word 2
r2050[1]
PROFIdrive
receive telegram
PZD receive word 3
r2050[2]
Header
PZD receive word 4
r2050[3]
PZD receive word 5
r2050[4]
<1>
r2091.0
r2091.15
Drive object 1
p2048
p2099[0]
(0)
Drive object 2
.
.
.
p2098[0].0
<2>

p200x
r2094.0
p2098[0].15
<3>
0
Drive object n
r2094.15
.
.
.
p2098[1].0
Drive object m
<2>
0
p2099[1]
Trailer
(0)
r2095.0
p2098[1].15
0
r2095.15
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, CU_G, CU_S, TB30, TM31
6
fp_2481_54_eng.vsd
06.12.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2481 -
PROFIdrive
2-923
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF must be used as control word (E_STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the two connector-binector converters, two of the PZD receive words 3 to 5 can be converted into binectors for continued interconnection.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %.
Function diagrams
p2051[0]

(0)
PZD send word 1
(0)
PZD send word 2
<1>
PROFIdrive send telegram
p2051[1]
Header
Drive object 1
p2051[2]
(0)
PZD send word 3
(0)
PZD send word 4
.
.
.
(0)
PZD send word 5
Drive object n
Drive object 2
p2051[3]
p2051[4]
p2051[5]
(0)
p2051[6]
<4> <5>
PZD send word 6
<4> <5>
PZD send word 7
<4> <5>
.
.
.
<4> <5>
(0)
Drive object m
Trailer
p2051[7]
<4> <5>
PZD send word 8
(0)
<4> <5>
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
<4>
p2051[12]
<4>
(0)
p2051[13]
PZD send word 13
<4>
PZD send word 14
<4>
PZD send word 15
<4>
<4>
(0)
p2051[14]
<4>
(0)
<3>
p200x
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1 (E_ZSW1) for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF.
<2> Using the binector/connector converters at [2472], bits of 4 send words can be interconnected with any binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 %.
The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %.
<4> Valid for CU_S.
<5> Valid for A_INF, B_INF, S_INF.
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, CU_G, CU_S, S_INF, TB30, TM15DI_DO, TM31
6
fp_2483_54_eng.vsd
06.12.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2483 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
...
<2>
PROFIdrive
2-924
Fig. 2-44
IF1 Diag send word 1...7
r2053[0...6]
<6>

Fig. 2-45
<6>
<1> <4>
PZD receive word 1
r8850[0]
r8860[0]
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
r8850[1]
r8860[1]
r8850[2]
r8860[2]
PZD receive word 4

PROFIdrive
receive telegram
r8850[3]
r8860[3]
DWORD
r8860[4]
DWORD
PZD receive word 5
Header
...
r8892.15
...
r8893.15
r8850[4]
r8860[5]
<5>
p8898[0].0
DWORD
<2>
Drive object 2
p8899[0]
(0)
.
.
.
r8894.0
p8898[0].15
Drive object n
.
.
.
PZD receive word 13
r8850[12]
r8860[12]
Drive object m
p8848
r8850[5]
PZD receive word 6

Drive object 1
Refer to [1020.7]
r8891.15
r8893.0
DWORD
...
r8892.0
DWORD
PZD receive word 3
...
r8890.15
r8891.0
DWORD
PZD receive word 2
r8890.0
r8850[13]
r8860[13]
Trailer
p8898[1].0
DWORD
PZD receive word 14
<2>
DWORD
PZD receive word 15
p8899[1]
r8850[14]
r8860[14]
(0)
DWORD
PZD receive word 16
r8894.15
r8895.0
r8850[15]
<3>
<3>
p8898[1].15

p880x
r8895.15
0 for a PZD word.
6
fp_2485_54_eng.vsd
24.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2485 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
PROFIdrive
2-925
<1> In order to maintain the PROFIdrive profile, receive word 1 must be used as control word (STW1) (due to bit 10 "control requested").
<2> Using the connector-binector converters, the bits can be extracted from two of the PZD receive words 5 to 16 and used as binectors.
<3> The following representation applies for words: 4000 hex = 100 % for double words 40000 0000 hex = 100 %.
The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex or 40000 0000 hex; 0 C -> 0 %.
<4> The number of PZD receive words depends on the drive object type.
<5> The connector-binector converter only converts the lower 16 bits irrespective of the input variable.
<6> Every PZD word can be assigned a word or a double word. Only one of the 2 interconnection parameters r8850 or r8860 can have a value

DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
p8861[1]
p8861[2]
p8861[3]
p8861[4]
p8861[5]
p8861[6]
p8861[7]
PZD send word 1
...
p8851[1]
(0)0
PZD send word 2
(0)0
PZD send word 3
(0)0
PZD send word 4
(0)0
PZD send word 5
(0)0
PZD send word 6
(0)0
PZD send word 7
<1>
<4>
p8851[2]
p8851[3]
p8851[4]
p8851[5]
p8851[6]
PROFIdrive send
telegram
Header
p8851[7]
(0)0
PZD send word 8
(0)0
PZD send word 9
Drive object 1
Drive object 2
p8851[8]
.
.
.
Drive object n
DWORD
p8861[11]
.
.
.
p8851[12]
(0)
DWORD
p8861[12]
PZD send word 13

p8851[13]
Drive object m
(0)
DWORD
p8861[13]
PZD send word 14

p8851[14]
Trailer
(0)
DWORD
p8861[14]
PZD send word 15

p8851[15]
(0)
<1> To comply with the PROFIdrive profile, send word 1 must be used as status word 1
(ZSW1), not as DWORD.
<2> A PZD transmit word can either be supplied via connector input p2051[x] (WORD) or
via p2061[x] (DWORD).
The two corresponding connector inputs cannot be interconnected.
<3> Physical word and double word values are inserted in the telegram as referenced
variables. p880x apply as reference variables (telegram contents = 4000 hex or 4000
0000 hex in the case of double words, if the input variable has the value p880x).
The following applies for temperature values: 100 C -> 100 % = 4000 hex; 0 C -> 0%
= 4000 0000 hex.
<4> The number of PZD send words depends on the drive object type.
PZD send word 16
PROFIBUS
PROFINET
<3>
Reference quantities for
further interconnection
p880x
1
2
3
4
6
fp_2487_54_eng.vsd
24.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2487 -
Function diagrams
DWORD
<2>
p8861[0]
IF2 Diag send Wort 1...16

r8853[0...15]
PROFIdrive
2-926
Fig. 2-46

r8863[0...14] <2> p8851[0]
(0)0
<1>
p8888[2].0
5 binector-connector converter
p8882[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
[1]
(0.0)
p8888[0].0

Fig. 2-47
p8848
p8880[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
[1]
(0.0)
Free status word 3

r8889[2]
p8888[2].15
Status word 1
r8889[0]
(0.0)
[15]
p8888[0].15
p8888[3].0
(0.0)
[15]
p8883[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
(0.0) [1]
Free status word 4

r8889[3]
p8888[3].15
p8888[1].0
p8881[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
(0.0) [1]
(0.0)
Status word 2
[15]
r8889[1]
p8888[1].11
[11]
(0.0)
[12]
(0.0)
p8888[4].0
p8884[0...15]
[0]
(0.0)
(0.0) [1]
Free status word 5

r8889[4]
(0.0)
p8888[4].15
[15]
2-927
<1> For clock-cycle synchronous SERVO, these signals must not be interconnected (slave sign-of-life).
1
2
3
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
PROFIdrive - IF2 status words, free interconnection
[15]
6
fp_2489_54_eng.vsd
11.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2489 -
PROFIdrive
(0.0)
Function diagrams
<2> <1>
<1>
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
Meaning
CU_STW1.0
Synchronization
p0681[0] = r2090.0
CU_STW1.1
RTC PING
p3104 = r2090.1
CU_STW1.2
Reserved
CU_STW1.3
Reserved
CU_STW1.4
Reserved
CU_STW1.5
Reserved
CU_STW1.6
Reserved
CU_STW1.7
Acknowledge faults
p2103[0] = r2090.7
CU_STW1.8
Reserved
CU_STW1.9
Reserved
CU_STW1.10
To assume control
p3116 = r2090.10
CU_STW1.11
Reserved
CU_STW1.12
CU_STW1.13

p2045 =r2050[0]
CU_STW1.14
CU_STW1.15
Refer to [1020.7]
Inverted
<1> Used in telegrams 390, 391 and 392.
1
2
3
4
DO: CU_G, CU_S
PROFIdrive - CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit interconnection
6
fp_2495_54_eng.vsd
10.09.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2495 -
Function diagrams
2495 CU_STW control word 1 Control Unit interconnection

Signal
Interconnection
parameters
PROFIdrive
2-928
Fig. 2-48
Signal targets for CU_STW1
Fig. 2-49
2496 CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection

Signal sources for CU_ZSW1
<1>

Refer to [1020.7]
Signal
Meaning
Interconnection
parameters
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
signal source
Inverted
Reserved
CU_ZSW1.1
Reserved
CU_ZSW1.2
Reserved
CU_ZSW1.3
1 = Fault present
p2081[3] = r2139.3
CU_ZSW1.4
Reserved
CU_ZSW1.5
Reserved
CU_ZSW1.6
Reserved
CU_ZSW1.7
1 = Alarm present
p2081[7] = r2139.7
CU_ZSW1.8
Synchronization (SYNC)
p2081[8] = r0899.8
CU_ZSW1.9
1 = No alarm present
p2081[9] = r3114.9
CU_ZSW1.10
1 = No fault present
p2081[10] = r3114.10
CU_ZSW1.11
1 = No safety message present
p2081[11] = r3114.11
CU_ZSW1.12
CU_ZSW1.13

Implicitly
interconnected
CU_ZSW1.15
2-929
1
2
3
4
DO: CU_G, CU_S
PROFIdrive - CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit interconnection
6
fp_2496_54_eng.vsd
30.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2496 -
PROFIdrive
CU_ZSW1.14
Function diagrams
CU_ZSW1.0
<1>
[Function diagram]
internal status word
[Function diagram]
signal target
Inverted
2497 A_DIGITAL interconnection

Signal
Meaning
A_DIGITAL.0
Digital output 8 (DI/DO 8)
<2>
p0738[0] = r2091[0]
A_DIGITAL.1
<2>
p0739[0] = r2091[1]
A_DIGITAL.2
<2>
p0740[0] = r2091[2]
A_DIGITAL.3
<2>
p0741[0] = r2091[3]
A_DIGITAL.4
<2>
p0742[0] = r2091[4]
A_DIGITAL.5
<2>
p0743[0] = r2091[5]
A_DIGITAL.6
<2>
p0744[0] = r2091[6]
A_DIGITAL.7
<2>
p0745[0] = r2091[7]
A_DIGITAL.8
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.9
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.10
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.11
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.12
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.13
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.14
Reserved
A_DIGITAL.15
Reserved
1
2
DO: CU_G, CU_S
PROFIdrive - A_DIGITAL interconnection
<2> Can be set via p0728 as input (DI) or output (DO).
Refer to [1020.7]
<3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed.
6
fp_2497_54_eng.vsd
06.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2497 -
Function diagrams
Interconnection
parameters <3>
PROFIdrive
2-930
Fig. 2-50
Signal targets for A_DIGITAL
2498 E_DIGITAL interconnection

Fig. 2-51
Signal targets for E_DIGITAL
<1>
Interconnection
parameters <3>
[Function diagram]
[Function diagram]
signal target
Inverted
E_DIGITAL.0
Digital input 8 (DI/DO 8)
<2>
p2082[0] = r0722[8]
E_DIGITAL.1
<2>
p2082[1] = r0722[9]
E_DIGITAL.2
<2>
p2082[2] = r0722[10]
E_DIGITAL.3
<2>
p2082[3] = r0722[11]
E_DIGITAL.4
<2>
p2082[4] = r0722[12]
E_DIGITAL.5
<2>
p2082[5] = r0722[13]
E_DIGITAL.6
<2>
p2082[6] = r0722[14]
E_DIGITAL.7
<2>
p2082[7] = r0722[15]
E_DIGITAL.8
Digital input 0 (DI 0)
p2082[8] = r0722[0]
E_DIGITAL.9
p2082[9] = r0722[1]
E_DIGITAL.10
p2082[10] = r0722[2]
E_DIGITAL.11
p2082[11] = r0722[3]
E_DIGITAL.12
p2082[12] = r0722[4]
E_DIGITAL.13
p2082[13] = r0722[5]
E_DIGITAL.14
p2082[14] = r0722[6]
E_DIGITAL.15
p2082[15] = r0722[7]
2-931
1
2
DO: CU_G, CU_S
PROFIdrive - E_DIGITAL interconnection
<2> Can be set via p0728 as input (DI) or output (DO).
<3> Pre-assignment, can be freely changed.
6
fp_2498_54_eng.vsd
06.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2498 -
Function diagrams
Meaning
PROFIdrive
Signal
Refer to [1020.7]
Function diagrams
2.6
Function diagrams
2501 Control word, sequence control
2-933
2503 Status word, sequence control
2-934
2505 Control word, setpoint channel
2-935
2520 Control word, speed controller
2-936
2522 Status word, speed controller
2-937
2526 Status word, closed loop control
2-938
2530 Status word, closed-loop current control
2-939
2534 Status word, monitoring functions 1
2-940
2-941
2-942
2546 Control word, faults/alarms
2-943
2548 Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2
2-944
2-932

1. OFF2 (electrical)
2501 Control word, sequence control

Fig. 2-52
PROFIdrive bit
<6> p0844[C]
<3>
(1)
2000.00 s
<5>
STW sequence ctrl
p0845[C]
(1)
Bit No.
2. OFF2 (electrical)
1. OFF3 (fast stop)
<6> p0848[C]
<3>
(1)
p0840[C]
(0)
= ON
0 = OFF1
To the control unit [2610]
1 = Operating condition, no coast stop (no OFF2)

0 = OFF2
r0898.1
1 = Operating condition, no quick stop (no OFF3)

0 = OFF3
r0898.2
(1)
1 = Enable operation
<3>
r0898.3
(1)
1 = Enable ramp-function generator
<3>
r0898.4
To the setpoint channel

[3060.6] [3070.7] [3080.5]
(1)
1 = Unfreeze ramp-function generator
<3>
r0898.5

[3060.1] [3070.1]
1 = Enable speed setpoint
<4>
r0898.6

[3060.1] [3070.1] [3080.4]
(0)
1 = Command, open brake
<3>
r0898.7
To the brake control [2701.5]

To the expanded brake control [2707.1]
(0)
1 = Jog 1
<3>
r0898.8
To jog [3030.6]
To Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.3]
(0)
1 = Jog 2
<3>
r0898.9
To jog [3030.6]
To Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.4]
(1)
10
1 = Control via PLC
<3> <5>
r0898.10
11
Reserved
12
1 = Speed controller enable
13
Reserved
14
1 = Command, close brake
15
Reserved
(1)
2. OFF3 (fast stop)
<3>
p0852[C]
p2816[0]
r2090.3
r2817.0<3>
p1140[C]
(0)
[2425]
r0898
r0898.0
p0849[C]
p2816[1]
Control word sequence control
<2>
p1141[C]
Enable n_set
<3> p1142[C]
(1)
<4> p1152
(r0899.15)
Setpoint 2 enable
[2711.8]
p0855[C]
p1055 [C]
p1056 [C]
p0854[C]
<1>
(1)
<3>

To the torque setpoint [6060.4]
r0898.14

2-933
<6> PROFIdrive interconnection: For PROFIdrive standard telegrams, the upper inputs are connected with PROFIdrive-STW1 [2420]. Only relevant for CDS0.
1
2
3
Internal control/status words - Control word, sequence control
6
fp_2501_54_eng.vsd
19.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2501 -
Function diagrams
<1> STW1.10 must be set to ensure that the

drive object accepts the process data (PZD).
p0858[C]
<3> When the master control is retrieved,
(0)
predefined by STARTER or AOP30.
<4> Only applies if the function module
"extended brake control (r0108.14 = 1)" is
active.
<5> For DO ENCODER only bit 10.
r0898.12
p0856[C]
PROFIdrive bit
Status word sequence control
<6>
r0899

2503 Status word, sequence control
From the control unit [2610]
r0899.0
r0899.1
r0899.2
1 = Jog active
p2810[0]
(0)
r2811.0
p2810[1]
[4015.1]
2. OFF2
p0845[C]
(0)
[2428]
<5>
<2>
r0899.3
(1)
2. OFF3
p0849[C]
r0899.4
[2701.1][2711.1]
(1)
INF operation
r0899.5
p0864
(0)
r0899.6
[2701.1][2711.1]
OFF1
&
1 = Drive ready
r0899.7
1 = Controller enable
r0899.8
Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data
10
Reserved
From the control unit [2610.4]
11
1 = Pulses enabled
r0899.11
From the basic brake control (p0108.14 = 0) [2701.8]

From the expanded brake control/standstill detection (p0108.14 = 1) [2711.8]
12
1 = Open holding brake (only for booksize units when the brake is
connected to the power unit)
r0899.12
From the basic brake control (p0108.14 = 0) [2701.8]

13
1 = Command, close holding brake
<4>
r0899.13
14
1 = Pulse enable from the brake control
<3>
r0899.14
OFF2
OFF3
Enable
internal
missing
or
fault with
this reaction
r0899.9
<1> <6>

15
1 = Enable setpoint from the brake control <3>
<3> These signals are only relevant if the "extended brake control" function module is active (r0108.14 = 1).
<4> If Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled via this signal (Only with SINAMICS S120 Booksize).
<5> Only with message frame 220 and activated function module "Extended brake control" (r0108.14 = 1), otherwise hard wiring set to 1.
1
2
3
Internal control/status words - Status word, sequence control
r0899.15
[4015.1]
<6> For DO ENCODER only bit 9.
6
fp_2503_54_eng.vsd
11.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2503 -
Function diagrams
Bit No.
2000.00 s
2-934
Fig. 2-53
ZSW sequence ctrl
STW setpoint channel

Bit No.
Control word, setpoint channel
r1198
Fixed setpoint selection, bit 0 p1020[C]
2505 Control word, setpoint channel

Fig. 2-54
p0115[3]
(0)
1 = Fixed setpoint, bit 0
r1198.0
To fixed speed setpoints [3010.2]
(0)
r1198.1
(0)
r1198.2
(0)
r1198.3
Reserved
(0)
1 = Inhibit negative direction
r1198.5
To direction limiting and direction reversal

[3040.3]
(0)
1 = Inhibit positive direction
r1198.6

[3040.5]
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
1 = Setpoint inversion
r1198.11

[3040.2]
12
Reserved
(0)
13
1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise
r1198.13
To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
(0)
14
1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower
r1198.14
To the motorized potentiometer [3020.1]
(0)
15
1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
r1198.15
To the setpoint channel [3060.1] [3070.3]
Inhib neg dir p1110[C]

Inhib pos dir p1111[C]
Setpoint inversion p1113[C]

(0)
Bypass RFG
p1122[C]
2-935
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV
Internal control/status words - Control word, setpoint channel
6
fp_2505_51_eng.vsd
20.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2505 -
Function diagrams
Motorized potentiometer, lower p1036[C]
Motorized potentiometer, raise p1035[C]
Bit No.
Control word, speed controller
Servo Vector
r1406
<1>
<2>
2520 Control word, speed controller

Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
(0)
1 = speed controller, hold I component
r1406.4
To the speed controller [6040.4]
(0)
1 = speed controller, set I component
r1406.5
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Travel to fixed stop <2>
Reserved
10
Reserved
(0)
11
1 = Droop enable
(0)
12
1 = Closed-loop torque control active
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Set speed adaptation controller I component
r1406.15
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
n_ctrl integ stop p1476[C]
n_ctrl integ set p1477[C]
TfS activation p1545[C]

<2>
Enables droop
Changeov n/M_ctrl
(0)
r1406.8
To torque signals,
<2>
Motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
p1492[C]
r1406.11
p1501[C]
r1406.12
To the speed setpoint, droop [6030.1]

To the closed-loop speed control
[5060.1 and 6060.1]
<2>
<1> Only for Servo.

1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Internal control/status words - Control word, speed controller
fp_2520_54_eng.vsd
27.02.08 V04.03.01
8
- 2520 -
Function diagrams
1000.00 s
STW n_ctrl
2-936
Fig. 2-55

<1>
<2>
2522 Status word, speed controller

Fig. 2-56

<2>
<3>
1000.00 s
ZSW n_ctrl
Bit No.
Status word, speed controller
Servo Vector
r1407
<2>
<3>
1 = V/f control active
r1407.0
1 = Sensorless operation active
r1407.1
To the speed actual value and pole position

sensing, motor encoder (encoder 1)
[4710.4]<3> [4715.4]
1 = Closed-loop torque control active
r1407.2
To speed setpoint, droop [6030.5]

To torque setpoint [6060.3]
1 = Closed-loop speed control active
1 = Speed setpoint from DSC <3>
<3><1> From the speed controller [5210.8]

From the speed controller [5040.7][6040.7]
1 = Speed controller, I component held
r1407.5

From the speed controller [5040.7][6040.7]
1 = Speed controller, I component set
r1407.6
<3> From torque limiting [5610.4]

From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
1 = Torque limit reached
r1407.7

From the torque setpoint [6060.7]
1 = Torque limiting, upper, active
r1407.8

From the torque setpoint [6060.4][6060.7]
1 = Torque limiting, lower, active
r1407.9
From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.3]
10
1 = Droop enabled
<3> From the setpoint, n-ctrl [5030.8]

From the speed setpoint, droop [6030.4][6030.5]
11
1 = Speed setpoint limited
12
1 = Ramp-function generator set
13
1 = Sensorless operation due to a fault
14
1 = I/f control active
15
Reserved
<3>
From the changeover, closed-loop control types [5060.5]
1 = Torque control
[2520.7] r1406.12
p1190 > 0 (interconnected)
Sensorless operation
&
<2>
p1191 > 0 (interconnected)
From the control unit [2610.4]
r1407.3
PcCtrl active
Motion-based
PolID
OFF1
OFF3
STOP2
<3>
&
Mot-ID
1
<3>
To Speed setpoint filter [5020.1] <3>

To Reference model [5030.3]
Ramp-function generator tracking [3080.1]

Traveling blocks mode [3616.1]<3>
Speed controller [5040.7]<3>[5042.5][6040.4]
Motor locked/stalled [8012.5]
r1407.10
r1407.11
r1407.12
r1407.13
r1407.14
6
fp_2522_54_eng.vsd
08.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2522 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Internal control/status words - Status word, speed controller
r1407.4
2-937
<1> Only for servo control without encoder.

<2> Only for SERVO.
Bit No.
Meaning
r0056
2526 Status word, closed loop control

1 = Initialization completed <2>
r0056.0
1 = De-magnetization completed
r0056.1
1 = Pulses enabled
<2>
r0056.2
1 = Soft starting available
<1> <2>
r0056.3
1 = Magnetization completed
r0056.4
Reserved
r0056.5
1 = Acceleration voltage active
<3>
<3>
[6725.4][6730.5][6731.5][6732.4]
1 = Frequency, negative <2>
r0056.7
<3>
[6722.3][6725.4]
1 = Field weakening active
r0056.8
[6714.8]
1 = Voltage limit active
<2>
r0056.9
[6310.8]
10
1 = Slip limiting active
<1> <2>
r0056.10
<3>
[6730.5][6731.5][6732.4]
11
1 = Frequency limit active <2>
12
1 = Current limiting controller, voltage output active
[6060.7]
13
1 = Current/torque limiting active
[6220.8][6320.8]
14
1 = Vdc_max controller active
r0056.14
[6031.6][6710.2]
[6220.8][6320.8]
15
1 = Vdc_min controller active
r0056.15
[6710.2]
<3>
[6722.6][6725.6]
Refer to [1020.7]
[2701.1][2707.1]
r0056.6
<1> <2>
<1> <2>
r0056.11
<3>
[8018.1]
r0056.12
[8012.5]
r0056.13
<1> <2>
<1> Only for V/f control.

<2> Not for SERVO.
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Internal control/status words - Status word, closed-loop control
6
fp_2526_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2526 -
Function diagrams
ZSW closed-loop control
2-938
Fig. 2-57
Status word closed-loop control
Bit No.
2530 Status word, closed-loop current control

Fig. 2-58
Status word closed-loop current control
[6714.5]
[6714.7]
[6730.3]
Meaning
1 = Closed-loop current control active
1 = Lim. I comp. Id-R active
Reserved
Refer to [1020.7]
r1408.1
1 = Limiting U active
<2>
r1408.3
1 = Limiting Ud active
<1> <3>
r1408.4
1 = Limiting Uq active
<1> <3>
r1408.5
[5040.7][5042.5]
1 = Pos. limit. Iq active
<1> <3>
r1408.6
[5714.5] <3>
1 = Neg. limit. Iq active
<1> <3>
r1408.7
[5714.4] <3>
1 = Iq setpoint limit. active
<1> <3>
r1408.8
[5714.4] <3>
1 = Id setpoint limit. active
<1> <3>
r1408.9
[5722.7] <3>
10
1 = Lim. EMF/Obs-ctrl. active
<2>
r1408.10
11
1 = Error EMF/Obs-N active
<2>
r1408.11
12
1 = Motor stalled active
<2>
r1408.12
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
2-939
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Internal control/status words - Status word, current control
6
fp_2530_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2530 -
Function diagrams
<2>
<1> Only for SERVO.
ZSW closed-loop
current control
r1408
ZSW monitoring functions 1

Bit No.
Status word, monitoring functions 1
r2197
Reserved
|n_act| <= speed threshold value 2 (p2155)
|n_act| > speed threshold value 2 (p2155)
1 = n_act >= 0
Reserved
Reserved
From speed signals 1 [8010.6]
n_act > n_max
r2197.6
r2197.7
Reserved
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
1
<1>
<1>
r2197.1
r2197.2
r2197.3
<1> nact = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
Internal control/status words - Status word, monitoring functions 1
6
fp_2534_51_eng.vsd
08.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2534 -
Function diagrams

2-940
Fig. 2-59
p0115[3]

Fig. 2-60
p0115[3] (4000.00 s)

Bit No.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
r2198
1 = |n_set| < p2161
r2198.4
<1>
1 = n_set >0
r2198.5
From torque messages, motor locked/stalled [8012.8]
1 = Motor blocked
r2198.6
1 = Motor stalled
r2198.7
Reserved
Reserved
10
1 = Torque setpoint < torque threshold value 1 (p2174)
r2198.10
From load monitoring [8013.8]
11
1 = Load monitoring signals an alarm
r2198.11
From load monitoring [8013.8]
12
1 = Load monitoring signals a fault
r2198.12
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
2-941
<1> Only relevant if the function module "extended signals/

monitoring functions" (r0108.17 = 1) is active.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
6
fp_2536_54_eng.vsd
04.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2536 -
Function diagrams
<1>
PROFIdrive bit

1 = |n_act| < speed threshold value 3 (p2161)
1 = f or n comparison value reached or exceeded (p2141)
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on
r2199.4
1 = Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
0 = Ramp-function generator active
r2199.5
1 = Current below residual current threshold
r2199.6
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
1 = Torque utilization < torque threshold value 2 (p2194)
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
<1>
r2199.0
r2199.1
[8012.1]
r2199.11
<1>n_act = smoothed speed actual value r2169 [8010.2].
1
2
3
4
6
fp_2537_51_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2537 -
Function diagrams

r2199
From torque signals [8012.5]
Fig. 2-61
2-942
Bit No.
P0115[4]
2546 Control word, faults/alarms

Fig. 2-62
PROFIdrive bit
4000.00 s
STW faults/alarms
Bit No.
Control word, faults/alarms
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Ackn all faults p2102[C]

<1>
Reserved
1. Acknowledge p2103[C]
<2>
Reserved
<2>
<2>
Reserved
Reserved
Pulse generator
r2138
r2138.7
To fault buffer [8060.1]
p2112[C] (1)
<2>
10
= External alarm 1 (A07850)
r2138.10
To alarm buffer [8065.1]
11
r2138.11
12
r2138.12
13
= External fault 1 (F07860)
r2138.13
14
r2138.14
15
r2138.15
p2116[C] (1)
<2>
p3110 [ms]
<2>
p2117[C] (1)
<2>
p3111[C] (1)
<2>
p2106[C] (1)
<2>
<2>
p2107[C] (1)
<2>
2-943
<1> This parameter refers to the Control Unit and is

used as source to simultaneously acknowledge
all faults on all drive objects.
<2> These parameters refer to the Command Data Sets (CDS)
depending on the individual drive object (DO).
1
2
3
DO: All objects
Internal control/status words - Control word, faults/alarms
6
fp_2546_51_eng.vsd
08.05.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2546 -
Function diagrams
p3112[C] (0)
p2108[C] (1)
ZSW faults/alarms 1
From the alarm buffer [8065.4]
r2139
1 = Acknowledgement running
Reserved
Reserved
1 = Fault present
Reserved
1 = Safety signal present
r2139.5
1 = Internal signal 1 present
r2139.6
1 = Alarm present
r2139.7
1 = Internal signal 2 present
r2139.8
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
r2139.11
12
r2139.12
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
Source sampling time

Refer to [1020.7]
r2139.0
r2139.3
ZSW faults/alarms 2
Bit No.
Status word, faults/alarms 2
r2135
1 = Fault, encoder 1
r2135.0
r2135.1
r2135.2
3
...
Reserved
9
<1> From the thermal monitoring, transformer [8016.8]
10
1 = Fault transformer overtemperature <1>
r2135.10
<1>
<1> From the thermal monitoring, transformer [8016.8]
11
1 = Alarm transformer overtemperature <1>
r2135.11
<1>
From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8]
12
1 = Fault motor overtemperature
r2135.12
From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8]
13
1 = Fault, thermal overload, power module
r2135.13
From the thermal monitoring, motor [8016.8]
14
1 = Alarm motor overtemperature
r2135.14
From the thermal monitoring, power module [8014.8]
15
1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power module
r2135.15
<1> Not for VECTOR and VECTORGL.
1
2
3
4
DO: All objects
Internal control/status words - Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2
6
fp_2548_51_eng.vsd
13.02.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 2548 -
Function diagrams

2548 Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2
From the fault buffer [8060.6]
Status word, faults/alarms 1
2-944
Fig. 2-63
Bit No.
Function diagrams
Sequence control
2.7
Sequence control
Function diagrams
2610 Sequencer
2-946
2634 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation
2-947

2-945
p0857... p0862
POWER ON <1>
Fault
S1: Power-on inhibit
2000.00 s
with OFF1 or
OFF3
&
...
response
From all states
ZSWA.06 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
ZSWA.00/01/02 = 0
Drive at standstill
"0 = OFF" (STWA.00)
2610 Sequencer
<4>
<5>
Pulses inhibited
"0 = Coast down" (STWA.01)

"0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02)
r0046.8 EP terminals, enable missing

<6> [2634]
"Commissioning completed" (p0010 = 0 & p0009 = 0)
<4> <5>
"0 = Coast down" (STWA.01)
&
<4> <5>
<6> [2634]
"0 = Fast stop" (STWA.02)
"0 = Cost down" (STWA.01)

r0046.8 EP terminals,
enable missing
Pulse enable
HW [2701.8] [2711.8]
1
1
<6> [2634]
enable missing
<5>
<5>
S5b: Fast stop

"0 = Fast stop"
(STWA.02)
<4> <5>
S2: Ready to power up

ZSWA.00 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
Main contactor is OPEN
Wait for power-up or jog
"0 = OFF"
Jog 1
Jog 2
0 = Coast down (STWA.01)

<4> <5>
0 = Fast stop (STWA.02)
<4> <5>

<6> [2634]
1
"0 = OFF"
Jog 1
Jog 2
Infeed ready
enable missing
p0862
1
p0864
<3>
0
&
No LT_fault
<6> [2634]
enable missing
1
S5c: Jogging down ramp
<5>
&
"Enable operation"
(STWA.03)
De-magnetization completed
(r0046.27 = 0)
OFF2 (has priority over jogging)
ZSWA.00/01 = 1
ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
&
<7>
Bring the drive to n <= 0 along

the Ramp-funktion Generator,
then inhibit the pulses
Controller enable
<5>
S4: Operation
ZSWA.00/01/02 = 1
ZSWA.11 = 1
"0 = OFF"
No jog operation
Jog 1
&
1
Jog 2
<1> POWER ON = 24 V electronics supply OFF --> ON or RESET button.

ZSWA.06 = 0
<2> The sequence control is implemented according to the PROFIdrive profile.
<3> Only for SINAMICS S120:
Pulses enabled
If a DO Infeed (A_INF, B_INF and S_INF) is used, it closes the line contactor
Controller enabled
(refer to [8732][8832][8932]) and not the DO SERVO/VECTOR.
No jog operation: Setpoints enabled
OFF3 (has priority over jogging)
<4> These control commands can also be triggered by a fault response.
<5> STWA.xx = control word, sequence control, bit xx (r0898) [2501]; ZSWA.xx = status word, sequence control bit xx (r0899) [2503].
<6> Only if Safety Integrated is active.
<7> The parameters p1226, p1227 and p1228 influence this status.
1
2
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Sequence control - Sequencer
<7>
Bring the drive to n <= 0 along

the Ramp-funktion Generator,
S5a: Ramp stop
<5>
"Enable operation" (STWA.03)
<7>
Bring the drive to n <= 0 along the

fast stopping ramp or torque limit,
ZSWA.00/01 = 1
ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Line contactor is CLOSED

Wait for pre-charging
r0863.0

"0 = Cost down"
<4> <5>
(STWA.01)
Drive at
standstill
ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 0
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
Energize contactor
r0863.1
Drive at
standstill
&
ZSWA.00/01 = 1, ZSWA.11 = 1
ZSWA.02/06 = 0
&
&
S3: Ready
UDC uploaded
T
Pulse enable HW[

2701.8][2711.8]
<5>
&
&
6
fp_2610_54_eng.vsd
03.11.09 V04.03.01
Jog 1
Jog 2
Jog mode
Faults
F07300...F07802
F6000
1
&
r0899.8
[2503.3]
Missing enable
signals
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
[2634]
8
- 2610 -
Function diagrams
Pulse enable
HW[2701.8]
Drive at standstill
<5>
Sequence control
2-946
Fig. 2-64
<2>
2634 Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation

Fig. 2-65
Missing enable signals

Missing enable signals that prevent the drive going into operation
(this situation can be detected at the ZSW sequence control, infeed r0899.2 = 1 [8926]<3>).
Bit Nr.
[2701.8]
Bedeutung
p0115[3] (2000.00 s)
Line contactor control
Control unit
Missing enable sig

r0046
1 = OFF1, enable missing
r0046.0
r0046.1
r0046.2
1 = Enable operation missing
r0046.3
1 = Armature short-circuit/DC brake, enable missing
r0046.4
1 = STOP2, enable missing
r0046.5
1 = STOP1, enable missing
r0046.6
1 = EP terminals, enable missing
r0046.8
1 = Infeed, enable missing
r0046.9
10
1 = Ramp-function generator enable missing
r0046.10
11
1 = Ramp-function generator start missing
r0046.11
12
1 = Setpoint, enable missing
r0046.12
16
1 = OFF1, enable, internal missing
r0046.16
17
r0046.17
18
r0046.18
19
1 = Pulse enable, internal missing
r0046.19
20
1 = Internal armature short circuit/DC brake, enable missing
r0046.20
21
1 = STOP2, enable internal missing
r0046.21
22
1 = STOP1, enable internal missing
r0046.22
25
1 = Function bypass active
r0046.25
26
1 = Drive inactive or not operational
27
1 = Demagnetization not completed
28
1 = Open brake missing
r0046.28
29
1 = Cooling system ready missing
r0046.29
30
1 = Speed controller inhibited
r0046.30
31
1 = Jog setpoint active
r0046.31
[3020.5]
Fault with
OFF3 response
From the line

supply
0 = Internal fast stop
1 = Internal RFG missing
[3060.2]
[3070.2]
Line contactor control from sequence control

[2610.4]<2> Energize line contactor
[8732.4]<3>
r0863.1
[8832.4]<3>
[8964.6]<3> [2130]...[2133]
[8932:4]
DO
+24 V
Line contactor feedback signal

p0860
r0863.1
DI
[2120]...[2133]
ON/OFF monitoring
p0861
r0046.26
<1>
[3060.2]
[3060.4]
[3070.2]
[3070.4]
r0046.27
Time monitoring
F07300
"Line contactor
feedback signal
missing"
To the infeed
<2>
Operating monitoring
Logic operation
p2816[0]
r2811.0
p2810[1]
(0)
(0)
AND operation
OR operation
&
r2817.0
p2816[1]
(0)
2-947

<2> For AC/AC devices, diode infeed
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Sequence control - Missing enable signals, line contactor control, logic operation
&
6
fp_2634_54_eng.vsd
23.07.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2634 -
Sequence control
(0)
Function diagrams
p2810[0]
Function diagrams
Brake control
2.8
Brake control
Function diagrams
2701 Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0)
2-949
2704 Extended brake control, zero speed detection (r0108.14 = 1)
2-950
2707 Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1)
2-951
2711 Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1)
2-952
2-948

p0858 1 = Unconditionally close the holding brake

0.000...10.000 [s]
p1228 (0.000)
n_act smooth
<10>
[4710.7] r0063
2701 Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0)

Fig. 2-66
Background
[2501.3] r0898.14
1
0
p0856
RESET
(Q=0) Q
SET
(Q=1)
[2501.3] r0898.12
Close brake
p1215 = 0
<1>
Open brake
&
[4715.7] r0063[0]
[2503.3]
<6>
0.000...300.000 [s]
p1227 (4.000)
<3>
0...10 000 [ms]
p1217 (100)
<10> n_ctrl n_set

[5030.8] r1438
&
for SERVO
OFF 1 present
RESET
(Q=0) Q
1
&
SET
(Q=1)
1 = No coast down active

[2503.7] r0899.4
RESET
Q
(Q=0)

[2503.7] r0899.6
1 = Unconditionally open the

holding brake
[2501.3] r0898.7
&
SET
(Q=1)
r0046.21
&
<2>
[2634.1]
<7>
<1> p1215 = 2
[2610.5]
[2610.8]
<10> [5042.8]
<10> [5730.4]
Stop 2 enable internal missing

RESET
Q
(Q=0)
p0855
[2501.3] r0898.3
Pulse enable HW
Q
<3>
0...10 000 [ms]
p1216 (100)
Pulse enable X21

<4>
p0852
[2503.3]
r0899.12
<5>
for VECTOR
OFF 3 present
SET
(Q=1)
r0899.13
<10> Close "normal" brake

[2814.2]
1 = Open the holding brake
Q
[2503.3]
[6030.2] r0060
<8>
RESET
(Q=0) Q
<2>
n_act unsmoothed
n_stop n_thresh
0.0...210 000.0 [RPM]
p1226 (20.0)
n_set before filter
Refer to [1020.7]
<9>
1 = Enable speed controller
SET
(Q=1)
[2526.6] r0056.4
6
fp_2701_54_eng.vsd
07.05.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2701 -
Function diagrams
2-949
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Braking control - Basic braking control (r0108.14 = 0)
Brake control
<5> For p1227 = 300 s, the monitoring function is deactivated.

<6> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r0899.12 should be interconnected as
control signal.
<7> r0046.21 = 0, as long as r0046.0 = 1 (OFF1 enable missing or power-on inhibit).
r0046.21 = 1, if p0858 = 1 or p0856 = 0.
The signal generation is shown simplified.
<8> The internal signal includes signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3 (e. g. BICO or fault response).
<9> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait while the brake is released or applied.
Note: Braking signal diagnostic evaluation (p1278) only applies for SBC (Safe Brake Control) (controls the Safe Brake Relay). <10>
<1> Motor holding brake configuration (p1215)

0 = No motor holding brake being used.
1 = Motor holding brake acc. to sequence control.
2 = Motor holding brake always released.
3 = Motor holding brake like sequence control, connection via BICO.
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856, sequence control.
<3> If p1215 = 0, 2 -> t = 0 ms.
<10>
<4> Only if Safety Integrated is active (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41).
n_act smooth
<5>
[4710.7] r0063
Refer to [1020.7]
r1229.7
p1225
(r0063)0

2704 Extended brake control, zero speed detection (r0108.14 = 1)
0
n_act unsmoothed p1225
(r0063[0])
[4715.7] r0063[0]
n_set before filter

[6030.2] r0060
<2>
0.000...300.000 s
p1227 (4.000)
n_stop n_thresh
0.0...210 000.0 RPM
p1226 (20.0)
r1229.8
for VECTOR
n_ctrl n_set
<5>
[5030.8] r1438
for SERVO
p1275.02 (0)
p1224[1]
<3>
(0)
p1224[2]
SET
(Q=1)
Close brake from standstill detection
[2707.1]
[2711.1]
RESET
Q
(Q=0)
<2>
0.000...300.000 s
p1276 (300.000)
0
(0)
&
p1275.03 (0)
Brk close standstill

p1224[0]
Brake,
monitoring
time expired
0
T
-1 1
(0)
p1224[3]
(0)
OFF1 present
<4>
OFF3 present
<1> Shutdown threshold of the standstill detection. In this case (e.g. when using a brake), another criterion than the
speed actual value can be selected to clear the pulses. Otherwise, we recommend to keep the factory setting.
<2> For p1276 = 300.000 s, the timer is de-activated, i.e. the timer output is always 0. Note: When operating a
motor with a brake which must not be applied while the motor is rotating, the monitoring time of both timers
must be set to 300 s.
<3> For operation without brake, p1224[0...3] must be 0 (factory setting) in order to avoid undesirable interaction
with the sequence control.
<4> The internal signal comprises signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3, e.g. BICO or fault response.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Braking control - Extended braking control, zero-speed detection (r0108.14 = 1)
6
fp_2704_54_eng.vsd
07.05.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2704 -
Function diagrams
<1>
Standstill threshold
Brake, threshold value

fallen below
Brake control
2-950
Fig. 2-67
Background
0.000...10.000 s
p1228 (0.000)
p0858

Background
1 = Unconditionally close the holding brake
<2>
[2501.3] r0898.14
p1275.00 (0)
Refer to [1020.7]
<4>
p1275.01 (0)
Immediately close brake
2707 Extended brake control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1)

Fig. 2-68
[2704.8]
p1219[0]
(0)
p1219[1]
Close brake (internal)
<1>
p1215 = 0
(0)
p1219[2]
[2711.1]
(0)
[2711.8]
p0856
Request pulse enable
Request, pulse enable missing/n_ctrl inhibited
1 = Enable speed controller
&
r1229.9
p1219[3]
(r1229.9)
[2501.3] r0898.12
Brake open threshold
0.00...200.00%
p1221(0.00)
0.000...300.000 s
p1277(0.000)
<2>
r1229.6
Brake open threshold

p1220
Brake threshold
exceeded
<1>
p1215 = 2
1
(1)
Open brake
p1218[0]
(1)
Open brake (internal)
[2711.1]
r0056.4
[2526.6]
p1218[1]
(1)
p0855
1 = Unconditionally open the holding brake
OR logic operation
[2501.3] r0898.7
p1279[0]
(0)
6
fp_2707_54_eng.vsd
21.11.07 V04.03.01
(0)
AND logic operation
p1279[2]
(0)
<3>
Brake AND
logic operation
result
1229.11
p1279[3]
(0)
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2707 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Braking control - Extended braking control, open/close brake (r0108.14 = 1)
1229.10
p1279[1]
Brake control
2-951
<1> Motor holding brake configuration

0 = No brake or brake always applied (brake connected to the power unit)
1 = Brake control active (brake connected to the power unit)
2 = Brake always released (brake connected to the power unit)
3 = Brake control active (brake connection can be interconnected using BICO)
Note:
A motor brake cannot be connected to all power units. p1215 is set to 3 and the brake is controlled via a digital output (e.g. TM31).
<2> Priority assignment (high -> low): p1215, p0858, p0855, p0856/p1219, apply brake from standstill detection, p1218.
<3> These blocks/modules are evaluated with the same sampling rate as the brake control and therefore may only be used to individually adapt the brake control.
<4> If the brake is permanently applied or released (p0855, p0858 or p1215), the drive does not wait until the brake is released or applied.
Brake OR
logic operation
result
<3>
[2503.7]
[2704.8]
Background
Pulse enable X21<7>, X41<8>
Refer to [1020.7]
&
Enable operation (r0898.3)

Power-on inhibit (r0899.6)
Request pulse enable

[2707.1]

2711 Extended brake control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1)
Brake feedb closed

<2>
r1229.5
p1222
&
(0)
&
0...10 000 ms
p1217 (100)
&

No OFF1
Brake with
<5> No OFF3
feedback signal
p1275.5
Brake is being used
p1215 > 0
Brake is being used

p1215 > 0
&
[2704.8]
Close brake
0
0
From the standstill detection
<1>
1
Pulse enable, HW [2610.5]

[2610.8]
<7> [5730.4]
Pulse enable from the brake control
&
r0899.14
[2503.3]
Pulse enable from the expanded brake control
Brake feedb open

<2>
p1223
(1)
A07932
r1229.3
&
A07931
Brake does not open
0...10 000 ms
p1216 (100)
r1229.4
Setpoint enable from the brake control
&
[2501.1]
[2503.3]
r0899.15
0
1
1

[2503.3]
r0899.13
[2707.8]
[2707.8]
Close brake (internal)
RESET
(Q=0) Q
Open brake (internal)
SET
(Q=1)
Close "normal" brake <7>

[2814.2]
1 = Command, open brake
r1229.1
<4>

<1> This pulse enable path only works for operation with brake (p1215 > 0).
<2> For brakes with one single checkback signal, the inverted signal has to be interconnected to the BICO input for the second checkback. The switching times of the brake are set in p1216 and p1217.
<3> Only if Safety Integrated is active (Double Motor Module: X22, Chassis: X41).
<4> If an external motor holding brake is used, p1215 should be set to 3 and r1229.1 should be used as control signal.
<5> The internal signal comprises signals that lead to OFF1 or OFF3, e.g. BICO or fault response.
<6> If the function module "extended brake control" is active (r0108.14 = 1), r1229.1 should be interconnected as control signal.
<7> Only for SINAMICS S120 booksize.
<8> Only for SINAMICS S120/S150 Chassis/G130/G150.
Note: Braking signal diagnostic evaluation (p1278) is only relevant for SBC (Safe Brake Control) (controls the Safe Brake Relay).
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Braking control - Extended braking control, signal outputs (r0108.14 = 1)
6
fp_2711_54_eng.vsd
03.11.09 V04.03.01
r0899.12
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
[2503.3]
<6>
8
- 2711 -
Function diagrams
[2501.7]
Coast down not active (r0899.4)
Brake control
2-952
Fig. 2-69
[2503.7]
Function diagrams
Safety Integrated
2.9
Safety Integrated
Function diagrams
2800 Basic functions, parameter manager
2-954
2802 Basic functions, monitoring and faults/alarms
2-955
2804 Basic functions, status words
2-956
2810 Basic functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1)
2-957
2814 Basic functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter)
2-958

2-953
<3>
Safety commissioning mode
[2802.1][2804.1][2804.3][2810.3]
--> select STO
SI act_checksum CU
r9798
Enter password
Safety parameters
p9601 ... p9899
can be changed
&
SI password new
p9762
<1>
Safety parameterizing enable

p0010 = 95
SI password input
p9761
SI set_checksum CU
p9799
&
Checksum check
for safety
parameters
Safety parameters
p9601 ... p9899
are valid
<1>
=
SI ackn password
p9763
SET
y=x
Effective password
<2>
<1>
=
r9898
SI act_checksum MM
Reset safety parameters
Inhibit safety functions

p9601 = 0
[2810.3]
p9899
SI set_checksum MM
<3>
p0010 95
Exit safety
commissioning mode
Safety parameters
p9601 ... p9899
can be reset to the
factory settings via
p0970, p3900
&
p9801 = 0
[2810.3]
<1>
<1> Comparator, refer to [1021]

<2> Analog signal memory, refer to [1021]
<3> The target checksum must be equal to the actual checksum.
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, Parameter manager
6
fp_2800_54_eng.vsd
07.08.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2800 -
Function diagrams

2800 Basic functions, parameter manager
Safety Integrated
2-954
Fig. 2-70
r9780 CU/r9880 MM
Change safety parameters
2802 Basic functions, monitoring and faults/alarms

Fig. 2-71
r9780 CU/r9880 MM
Safety Integrated version

CU
r9770
[2810.3] STO terminal CU (r0722.x)
MM
r9870
Monitoring clock cycle

CU
r9780
MM
r9880
STOP F->A CU
p9658
STOP F->A MM
p9858
F01611
F30611
1 = Faults with response "NONE"
Safety monitoring functions
810.1] STO terminal MM (X21/22 <1>)

(X41 <2>)
STOP F
[2800.3] Safety commissioning mode
Timer for emergency retraction
[2810.6] DIAG_U
r9772.15 (CU)
[2804.2]
Faults/alarms
CU: F/A01600 ... 01699
MM: F/A30600 ... 30699
[2810.6] DIAG_L
r9872.15 (MM)
[2804.5]
[2814.7] BR_DIAG
1
1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation"
[2810.3] Status SS1 CU
r9772.10 (CU)
[2804.2]
r9872.10 (MM)
[2804.5]
[2810.3] Status SS1 MM

1 = Faults with response "immediate pulse cancelation"
that cannot be acknowledged
Additional diagnostics
Information
CU
r9794
MM
r9894
Cross checking list
CU
r9795
1 = STOP A
To Safe Torque Off
[2810.3]
MM
r9895
To Safe Brake Control

[2814.1]
Diagnostics for STOP F
1
F01600/F30600
"STOP A initiated"
2-955
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, Monitoring functions and faults/alarms
6
fp_2802_54_eng.vsd
02.12.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2802 -
Function diagrams
r9872.9 (MM)
[2804.5]
<1> Only for SINAMICS S120 Booksize.

<2> Only for SINAMICS S120 Chassis/S150/G130/G150.
Safety Integrated
r9772.9 (CU)
[2804.2]
Status (Control Unit)
r9772
Bit No.
Status word Safety Integrated

Control Unit and Motor Module
Status (Motor Module)
Bit No.
r9872
Status (Control Unit + Motor Module)

2804 Basic functions, status words
[2810.3]
1 = STO selected on Control Unit
[2810.3]
1 = STO selected on Motor Module
&
1 = STO selected in drive
[2810.7]
1 = STO active on Control Unit
[2810.6]
1 = STO active on Motor Module
&
1 = STO active in drive
[2810.3]
1 = SS1 active on Control Unit
[2810.3]
1 = SS1 active on Motor Module
&
1 = SS1 active in drive
1 = SBA active
1 = SBC requested
Reserved
[2814.3]
1 = SBC requested
[2814.3]
Reserved
&
1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
[2802.7]
1 = STOP A cannot be acknowledged, active
[2802.8]
10
1 = STOP A active
[2802.8]
10
1 = STOP A active
1 = STOP F active
[2800.3]
16
1 = STO cse: Safety comm. mode
[2810.3]
17
[2825.8]
[2825.8]
1 = SBC requested
Reserved
[2802.7]
15
r9773
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
r9780 CU/r9880 MM
[2810.5]
31
1 = The shutdown paths must be tested
Reserved
15
1 = STOP F active
[2800.3]
16
1 = STO cse: Safety comm. mode
1 = STO cause selection via terminal
[2810.3]
17
18
1 = STO cause selection via SMM
[2825.8]
18
1 = STO cause selection via SMM
19
1 = STO cause actual value missing
Reserved
Reserved
Functions available on the CU and MM

from the MM perspective
Functions available on the CU and MM

from the CU perspective
Bit No.
Common functions (Control Unit)
r9771
Bit No.
Common functions (motor module)
1 = STO supported via terminals
1 = STO supported through terminals
1 = SBC supported
1 = SBC supported
1 = SI motion supported
1 = SI motion supported
1 = SS1 supported
1 = SS1 supported
1 = PROFIsafe supported
1 = PROFIsafe supported
1 = Drive-based motion monitoring functions

supported
1 = Drive-based motion monitoring

functions supported
Reserved
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, Status words
r9871
r9773.0
Group n
r9773.1
Group n
r9773.2
Group n
Bit No.
Status (Safe Torque Off group)
&
1 = STO selected in group
&
1 = STO active in group
&
1 = SS1 active in group
r9773.4
Group n
&
r9773.31
Group n
&
31
r9774
Reserved
Reserved

Safe Torque Off group
1 = SBC requested in group

Reserved
6
fp_2804_54_eng.vsd
02.12.09 V04.03.01
1 = Shutdown paths of the group must

be tested
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2804 -
Function diagrams
Bit No.

Motor Module
Safety Integrated
2-956
Fig. 2-72

Control Unit
<7>
p0120
Control Unit

r9772.17 1 = Safety commissioning mode
0 = Safe Torque Off CU
1 = Shutdown paths must be tested

r9773.31
Timer for forced
checking procedure
[2804.7]
<2> T 0
A01699
"Shutdown
paths must
T
be tested"
Timer forced checking procedure
0...9000 h
p9659(8)
[2804.1]
r0722.0
SI Stop 1 t_del CU
0.00...300.00 [s]
p9652 (0.00)
<3>
1 = STO selected
on CU
r9772.0
p9620[3]
r0722.3
&
p9620[4]
[2804.2]
0
1
r0722.4
[2802.2]
1 = STO
release
[2825.8]
1 = STOP A
[2802.8]
p9620[21]
r0722.21
Additional for
CU320-2,
SIMOTION,
Dxxx and
NCU7xx
Motor Module
r9780 Control Unit
&
&
<4>
[2804.2]
1
Shutdown path
from CU
0 = STO_CU
F-DI chg tol CU p9650

F-DI chg tol MM p9850
0...2000 ms (500 ms)
=1
T
1 = STO was selected on the MM

r9872.0
1 = STO cause selection
[2804.5]
via terminal
r9872.17
F01611 (CU)
F30611 (MM)
&
W
+5 V
Shutdown path
from MM
0 = STO_MM
<5>
&
1
1
&
[2802.2]
1 = Safety commissioning mode [2800.3]
2-957
EP: Enable Pulses
1 = STO on MM active
r9872.1
[2804.5]
1 = "STO active" for

sequence control
&
SS1: Safe Stop 1
Lower IGBT
bridge halve
- Vdc
Gating unit
<1> One terminal can be used for several drives to form a group.
<2> Switch-on delay according to [1024], starts when the "request pulse cancelation CU" is withdrawn.
<3> Value range: p9620 = 0 or r0722.0...7 (for CU310 and CX32 only r0722.0...17).
<4> Redundant functions in the Control Unit (CU) and Motor Modules (MM).
<5> Transistors inhibited for a "0" signal.
<6> Only for Booksize.
<7> Only for VECTOR. The number of active AND inputs corresponds to the number of Motor Modules
connected in parallel (p0120).
<8> Not for G130/G150.
<9> Only for SINAMICS S120 Chassis/S150/G130/G150.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1)
6
fp_2810_54_eng.vsd
18.12.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2810 -
Function diagrams
EP M
0 = Request pulse cancelation MM
Safety Integrated
<8>
1 = Enable STO (SH) via terminals (MM) p9801.0
1 = Enable SOS/SLS p9301.0
[2802.2]
+24 V
[2802.1][2814.2] DIAG_L
[2802.1][2814.2] DIAG_U
1 = STO release [2825.8]

1 = STOP A [2802.8]
to SBC
[2814.2]
[2804.3]
1
Gating unit
Safe pulse
cancelation
Monitoring for simultaneous occurrence
EP +
+ Vdc
to SBC
[2814.2]
[2802.2]
[2804.1]
<9> X41
<6> X21/22
Upper IGBT
bridge halve
<5>
r9872.2 SS1 active on Motor Module
SI Stop 1 t_del MM
0.00...300000.00 [s]
p9852 (0.00)
+5 V
[2802.2]
[2804.1]
r9772.2 SS1 active on Control Unit
Redundant functions
1 = STO active on Control Unit

r9772.1
0 = Request Pulse
cancelation CU
&
<1> CU terminals that can be used for STO.

<8>
1 = Enable STO (SH) via terminals (CU) p9601.0
1 = Enable SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) p9501.0
Motor Module
r9880 (Motor Modules)
[2800.3]
p9620[0]
DRIVE-CLiQ
2810 Basic functions, STO (Safe Torque Off), SS1 (Safe Stop 1)

Fig. 2-73
+24 V
Control Unit
0
=1
Enable SBC p9602
SI SBA WT CU
p9622
&

2814 Basic functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter)
1 = "Fault, brake control"
Safety fault
[2802.8]
0 = STO_CU
0 = "SBC requested"
1
0 = STO_MM
DIAG_U
F01630 "Incorrect safety brake control, CU"
<2>
Causes for "close brake"
0 = Pulses
cancelled
[2810.7]
F07930 "Incorrect brake control"
Safety Logic CU
&
1 = STOP A
p9621
SI S_q SBA CU
(Implementation and
monitoring of brake control)
1 = SBC
requested
r9772.4
2804.2]
DIAG_L
<3>
SBA_DIAG
<1> Motor brake 24 V DC.

<2> Not if:
p9602 = p9802 = 0 and p1278 = 1
<3> Only for Booksize.
<4> Only for Chassis (CIM).
<5> Motor brake 230 V AC.
<2>
BR1 BR2* SBA-DIAG BR_DIAG

<3>
BR1*
0 = "SBC selected"
<4>
SBA_DIAG
Close "normal" brake from the basic brake control [2701.8]

Close "normal" brake from the expanded brake control [2711.8]
DRIVE-CLiQ
DRIVE-CLiQ-Controller
BR2*
Motor Module
Causes for "safely close brake"
From the STO
Shutdown paths
[2810.6]
0 = STO_CU
Safety fault
[2802.8]
0 = "SBC angewhlt"
DIAG_U
BR_DIAG
<3>
BR1 BR2 SBA_Diag
BR1*
1 = SBC
requested
r9872.4
[2804.5]
0 = STO_MM
0 = Pulses
canceled
[2810.7]
r9880 MM
<4>
SBA_DIAG
&
+24 V
Safety Logic MM
(Implementation and
monitoring of brake control)
1 = Transistor conductive
SBA - BR-
Enable SBC p9802
=1
1 = Fault, brake control
M
<5>
<1>
BR2
&
Lower gating control channel

<2>
1 = "SBC enabled"
SBA: Safe Brake Adapter
S
B
A
Rapid de-exitation
Brake rectifier
>0
<4>
BR_DIAG
[2802.1]
0 = "SBC requested"
Enable signals for SBC MM

Safety enable p9801
<1>
SBA - BR+
BR1
<2>
1 = STOP A
Diagnostic signal
<3>
DIAG_L
Upper gating control channel
Safe Brake Adapter Rckmeldesignal

r9872.3
&
p9822
SI SBA t_wait MM
F30630 "Incorrect safety brake control, MM"
SBC: Safe Brake Control (Sichere Bremsenansteuerung)
1
2
3
4
5
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Safety Integrated - Basic Functions, SBC (Safe Brake Control), SBA (Safe Brake Adapter)
6
fp_2814_54_eng.vsd
29.01.10 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 2814 -
Function diagrams
Safety enable p9601
From the STO

shutdown paths
[2810.6]
r9780 CU
1 = "SBC enabled"
>0
Safety Integrated
2-958
Fig. 2-74
Enable signals for SBC CU
Function diagrams
Setpoint channel
2.10
Setpoint channel
Function diagrams
3010 Fixed speed setpoints
2-960
3020 Motorized potentiometer
2-961
3030 Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging
2-962
3040 Direction of rotation limiting and reversal
2-963
3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limiting
2-964
3060 Basic ramp-function generator
2-965
3070 Extended ramp-function generator
2-966
3080 Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
2-967

2-959
[2505.3] r1198.0
p1021 Fixed speed setpoint selection bit 1
3010 Fixed speed setpoints
From
control word
setpoint
channel
[2505.3] r1198.1

[2505.3] r1198.2

[2505.3] r1198.3

<100> For SERVO, the following applies:

Only if the function module "extended setpoint
channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101> Pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115,
refer to p0112.
0.000
Fixed speed setpoint 1
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1001[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1002[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1003[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1004[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1005[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1006[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1007[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1008[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1009[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1010[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1011[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1012[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1013[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1014[D] (0.000)
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1015[D] (0.000)
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Fixed speed setpoints
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
p1001[D]
0 0 1 0
p1002[D]
0 0 1 1
p1003[D]
0 1 0 0
p1004[D]
0 1 0 1
p1005[D]
0 1 1 0
p1006[D]
0 1 1 1
Fixed speed setpoint, actual
p1007[D]
r1024
1 0 0 0
Fixed speed setpoint number actual
0...15
r1197
p1008[D]
1 0 0 1
p1009[D]
1 0 1 0
p1010[D]
1 0 1 1
p1011[D]
1 1 0 0
p1012[D]
1 1 0 1
p1013[D]
1 1 1 0
p1014[D]
1 1 1 1
p1015[D]
6
fp_3010_51_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 3010 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
<100>
<101>
Setpoint channel
2-960
Fig. 2-75
p0115[3]
Fig. 2-76
p0115[3]
Refer to [1020.7]
Data save active
Automatic mode
3020 Motorized potentiometer

Mop configuration
0000...0111
p1030[D] (0110)

Save in NVRAM active
r1198.13
Mop raise
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Old value is kept
[2505.7]
p1035
<100>
<101>
The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p1040.
The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a ashion after OFF and after ON set to the saved value.
Without ramp generator in automatic mode (ramp-up/ramp-down time = 0).
With ramp generator in automatic mode.
Without initial rounding.
With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
Not saved in the NVRAM.
Save in NVRAM active.
-1
(0)
r1198.14
Mop lower
Mop manual/auto
[2505.7]
p1036
p1030.1
p1041[C] (0)
(0)
&
<2>
Mop ramp-up time
0.0...1 000.0 [s]
p1047[D] (10.0)
00
<2>
Mop ramp-down time
0.0...1 000.0 [s]
p1048[D] (10.0)
Mop n_set bef RFG

Mop n_max
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1037[D] (n_max_Mot)
<1>
Mop n_min
-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1038[D] (-n_max_Mot)
r1045
01
y
p1082
0
0
-1
10
x
1
Mop setp after RFG

r1050
e.g. to [3030.1]
<1>
-p1082
11
y=0
n_max (reference value for

ramp-function generator p1082)
Mop inversion
p1039[C] (0)
[3050.5]
Mop auto setpoint
p1042[C] (0)
2-961
[2634.3]
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
<101> To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Motorized potentiometer
<3>
Mop accept set val
p1043[C]
OFF1 enable missing (r0046.0)
6
fp_3020_51_eng.vsd
22.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 3020 -
Function diagrams
<2> If initial rounding-off is active (p1030.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly.
<3> Only effective if p1030.0 = 0.
p1044[C]
Setpoint channel
<1> For automatic commissioning, p1037 and p1038 are set to the
maximum motor speed or to the rated motor speed, provided that
n_max_mot has not been specified.
Mop start value

-210 000.000...210 000.000 [RPM]
p1040[D] (0.000)
Mop setting value
p0115[3]
No OFF1
&
No OFF2
<1>
Refer to [1020.7]
<100>
<101>
No OFF3
LOCAL
REMOTE
<2>

3030 Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging
[3040.1]
<2>
JOG
<3> p1055 Jog 1

<5> [2501.3] r0898.8
[2501.1]
PcCtrl active
r0807.0
<3> p1056 Jog 2

<5> [2501.3] r0898.9
[2501.2]
<4>
<4>
Main setpoint
p1070[C]
(1024[0])
0 0
r1078
Jog setpoint 1
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1058[D] (100.000)
Main setp scal

p1071[C]
0 1
r1073
(1)
Jog setpoint 2
-210 000.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1059[D] (100.000)
Fixed value 1 [%]

p2900
1 0
n_set_1
[3040.1]
Fixed value 2 [%]

1 1
p2901
Suppl setp scal
p1076[C]
(1)
Keep old setpoint
Supplement setpoint
p1075[C]
(0)
r1077
Sync f_targ
[7020.8] r3804
<1>
<2>
<3>
AOP30 not at SINAMICS SM150.

Only active in LOCAL mode (r0807.0 = 1) [2501.2].
Jogging can only be activated in the following operating states (sequencer see [2610]):
- For SERVO and VECTOR: In the Ready to start (S2) operating state.
- For VECTORGL and VECTORMV: In the Operation (S4) operating strate.
<4>
Only if control priority is with control panel with speed setpoint input.
<5>
With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module extended setpoint channel is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Main/supplementary setpoint, setpoint scaling, jogging
[6730.2]
f _slip
6
fp_3030_51_eng.vsd
06.05.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 3030 -
Function diagrams
AOP30
Setpoint channel
2-962
Fig. 2-77
Synchronization
<1>
LOCAL
REMOTE
3040 Direction of rotation limiting and reversal

Fig. 2-78
p0115[3]
Refer to [1020.7]
<100>
<101>
AOP30
I
O
JOG
p1111 1 = Inhibit positive direction

[2505.3] r1198.6
<2>
p1110 1 = Inhibit negative direction
[2505.3] r1198.5
p1113 1 = Setpoint inversion

[2505.3] r1198.11
n_limit setp
p1063[D]
[3030.8]
-1 1
Setp after lim
0
0
r1114
[3050.1]
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Direction limitation and direction reversal
6
fp_3040_51_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 3040 -
Function diagrams
AOP30 not at SINAMICS SM150.

Only active in LOCAL mode (r0807.0 = 1) [2501.2]
For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module extended setpoint channel is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
Setpoint channel
2-963
<1>
<2>
<100>
<101>
n_set_1
n_skip 2
n_skip 3
n_skip 4
n_limit pos
0.000...210 000.000 RPM 0.000...210 000.000 RPM 0.000...210 000.000 RPM 0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1092[D] (0.000)
p1093[D] (0.000)
p1094[D] (0.000)
p1083[D] (210 000.000)
<1>
<1>
<1>
p0115[3]
Refer to [1020.7]
<100> <101>
p1085[C]
(1083)
p1083
n_limit pos eff
Min
r1084

3050 Skip frequency bands and speed limiting
-1
-1
-1
-1
y
Reference value
for the rampfunction generator
Maximum speed
0...210 000.000 RPM
p1082[D] (n_max_Mot)
w
p1083
[3020.6]
[3060.4]
[3070.4]
-1
<2>
Minimum speed
0.00...19 500.00 RPM
p1080[D] (0.00)
<4>[5030.5]
<4>[5210.1]
[6640.5]
[7020.5]
[8010.2]
p1051[C]
(1083)
0
w
Setpt after limit
RFG setpt at input
r1114
[3040.8]
r1119
-1
[3060.1]
[3070.1]
[8020.1]
r1112
w
p1086
p1052[C]
(1086)
Maximum
limiting
active
[3080.4]
w
w
<3>
n_skip bandwidth
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1101[D] (0.000)
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<100>
<101>
n_limit neg
-210 000.000...0.000 RPM
p1086[D] (-210 000.000)
p1086
p1088[C]
(1086)
Max
A suppression speed of "0" de-activates the suppression speed bandwidth.

The setting range of p1082 is limited to n_max_mot.
If the drive is not stopped via the input setpoint, but via controlled intervention, the lower hysteresis branch is relevant after a subsequent run-up.
Not at S150/G130/G150.
For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "Extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). For r0108.8 = 0, [3095] applies for the generation of the speed limits.
To view the pre-assignment of the sampling times in p0115, refer to p0112.
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Skip frequency bands and speed limitations
6
fp_3050_51_eng.vsd
19.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
n_limit neg eff

r1087
<4> [5030.5]
<4> [5210.1]
[6640.5]
[7020.5]
[8010.2]
8
- 3050 -
Function diagrams
<1>
1000.00 s
Setpoint channel
2-964
Fig. 2-79
n_skip 1
0.000...210 000.000 RPM
p1091[D] (0.000)
Fig. 2-80
3060 Basic ramp-function generator

Ramp-up time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1120[D] (10.000)
Ramp-down time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1121[D] (10.000)
[2634.4]
OFF3 ramp-down time

0.000...600.000 s
p1135[D] (0.000)
0
p1122 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
p0115[3]
Refer to [1020.7]
<100>
<101>
[2505.3] r1198.15
Ramp flattening-off
[3080.8]
Tup
p1142 1 = Enable speed setpoint

[2501.3] r0898.6
RFG setpt at input

1
r1119
[3050.8]
From the setpoint limiting
Tup
Tdn
p1082
[3080.1]
-p1082
p1140 1 = Enable ramp-function generator
p1141 0 = Freeze ramp-function generator
n_set_4
0
<1>
Tdn
Freeze ramp-function generator
[2501.3] r0898.5
<3>
[2501.3] r0898.4
y
p1082
1 = Internal RFG enable

[2634.4]
t
-p1082
[2634.4]
HLG acceleration
Tup
Tdn
r1149
<4>
Accept RFG set val
Other status bits
p1143[C]
(0)
RFG setting value
p1144[C]
(0)
x
y
Ramp-up active
Ramp-down active
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Basic ramp-function generator
Ramp-function generator, status bits
6
fp_3060_51_eng.vsd
05.05.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
[3080.5]
8
- 3060 -
Function diagrams
2-965
For SERVO and VECTOR, the following applies: Inhibited during jogging.
p1082
Not at S150/G130/G150.
After a 0/1 signal a ramp-up is started again.
n_max
[3050.5]
With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint
<2> [3095.7]
Threshold for
remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
"Ramp-up/ramp-down active"
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module
0.00...1000.00 RPM
"Extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1).
p1148[D] (19.80)
Setpoint channel
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
OFF3
Final rounding-off Final rounding-off
0.000...30.000 s
0.000...30.000 s
p1131[D] (0.000) p1137[D] (0.000)
p0115[3]
Refer to [1020.7]
<100>
<101>
[2634.4]

3070 Extended ramp-function generator
0
p1122 1 = Bypass ramp-function generator
0
0
[2505.3] r1198.15
p1142 1 = Enable speed setpoint
[3080.8]
Ramp flattening-off
[2501.3] r0898.6
Freeze ramp-function generator
r1119
RFG setpoint at the input

1
[2634.4]
FR
Expanded ramp-function
generator
Tdn
0
<5> p1141 0 = Freeze ramp generator
[2501.3] r0898.5
[2634.4]
Tup
p1082
[3050.8]
IR
n_set_5
[3080.1]
1
y
<3>
1 = Internal RFG enable

<4>
<7>
Set ramp-function generator

p1143[C]
RFG rounding-off type

0...1
p1134[D] (0)
p1140
1 = Ramp-function
generator enabled
[2501.3] r0898.4
-p1082
<6>
dy/dt
IR
FR
IR
FR
IR
FR
IR
FR
(0)
Ramp-function generator setting value
p1144[C]
HLG acceleration
r1149
(0)
Other status bits

<1> Not at S150/G130/G150.
Tup_eff <2>
Tdn_eff <2>
<2> Effective ramp-up time: Tup_eff = Tup + (IR/2 + FR/2)
1
Ramp-up active
Effective ramp-down time: Tdn_eff = Tdn + (IR/2 + FR/2)
<3> p1151.00 = 0: Rounding-off at zero crossover enabled.
x
Ramp-down active
+
p1151.00 = 1: Rounding-off at zero crossover disabled.
0
y
<4> p1134 = 0: Rounding-off is always active.
p1082
t
Overshoots can occur.
p1134 = 1: Final rounding-off is not effective
[3080.5]
[3050.5] n_max
when the setpoint is suddenly
t
Ramp-function generator, status bits
Threshold for
<1> [3095.7]
nset
reduced during ramp-up.
t
"Ramp-up/ramp-down active"
<5> For SERVO and VECTOR, the following applies: Inhibited during jogging.
0.00...1000.00 RPM
<6> After a 0/1 signal a ramp-up is started again.
p1148[D] (19.80)
<7> With simultaneous jog 1 and 2 (p1055 = p1056 = 1) the last setpoint remains effective (Freeze ramp-function generator).
<100> For SERVO, the following applies: Only if the function module "extended setpoint channel" is activated (r0108.8 = 1). For r0108.8 = 0, [3095] applies for the generation of the speed limits.
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Extended ramp-function generator
6
fp_3070_51_eng.vsd
06.05.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 3070 -
Function diagrams
OFF3
OFF3
Ramp-down time Initial rounding-off Initial rounding-off
0.000...600.000 s 0.000...30.000 s
0.000...30.000 s
p1135[D] (0.000) p1130[D] (0.000) p1136[D] (0.000)
Ramp-down time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1121[D] (10.000)
Setpoint channel
Fig. 2-81
2-966
Ramp-up time
0.000...999 999.000 s
p1120[D] (10.000)
3080 Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking

Fig. 2-82
p0115[3] (Drive Object)

Refer to [1020.7]
Enable ramp-function generator

r0898.4
Enable speed setpoint
r0898.6
Jog 1
from the
STW
sequence
control
[2501.7]
r0898.8
n_ctrl n_set 1/2
Jog 2
r0898.9
r1169
n_ctrl n_set 1
Ramp-function generator selection
<5>
p1155[C]
<2>
x,y
0
p1160[C]
<2>
(0)
<8> [9816.7]
f_set
<7> [7020.8] r3812
n_set_4
[3060.8]
From the basic ramp-function generator
[3070.8]
n_set_5
1
Friction char. Record

x
y
No OFF2
&
Interpolator
1
Not SERVO or
p1189.0
r0108.8 = 1 (Extent setp)
x,y
&
RFG n_set at outp

r1150
T1
No OFF3
Sync f_corr [Hz]
Synchronization
No OFF1
No OFF2
No OFF3
<3>
p1189.1
(0)
n_ctrl n_set 2
RFG selection
p1115
Refer to [1020.7]
<101>
0
RFG track intens
0.0...50.0
p1145[D] (1.3)
<4>
T1
x
y
From the ramp-function

generator friction characteristic
[7010.6]
Interpolator
Ramp-function generator tracking
Ramp flattening-off
r1199.5
<1>
Ramp-function generator status word

[3060.8]
[3070.8]
[3060.8]
[3070.8]
[3080.8]
[3050.8]
Ramp-function generator status word

Ramp-up active
Ramp-down active
Ramp-function generator held
Maximum limiting active
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
6
fp_3080_51_eng.vsd
02.12.09 V04.03.01
RFG ZSW
r1199
r1199.2
<1>
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 3080 -
Function diagrams
1
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Setpoint channel
2-967
1
2
3
4
Setpoint channel - Ramp-function generator selection, status word, tracking
[3060.1]
<4>
[3070.3]
[2522.7] r1407.7
For p1145 > 0, ramp-function generator tracking is activated when the
torque limiting responds. This means that the speed controller output only exceeds the torque limit by a
deviation that can be set via p1145.
<2>
For OFF1/OFF3, the ramp-function generator ramp is active. The ramp-function generator is set (SERVO: to the
actual value, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL: to the setpoint (r1170)) and stops the drive
with the ramp-downtime (p1121 or p1135). STW1.4 (enable ramp-function generator) is effective while the drive
is stopped via the ramp-function generator. Depending on the p1115, the basic ramp-function generator [3060]
or the extended ramp-function generator [3070] is effective.
For SERVO is valid: When the function module "extended setpoint channel" is not active (r0108.8 = 0), for
OFF1/OFF3 the down ramp of the basic ramp-function generator is effective (refer to n_set_4 on [3060.8]).
<3>
The interpolator is only effective for clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation and sign-of-life received from
the master (STW2.12 ... STW2.15).
<4>
Behavior of the response ramp of the torque limiting:
p1145 = 0.0: No ramp-function generator tracking. The ramp-function generator ramp is no longer in the range
of the speed actual value.
p1145 = 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp remains as close as possible to the speed actual value.
p1145 > 1.0: The ramp-function generator ramp is steeper than for p1145 = 1.0 (higher "speed following error").
<5>
The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled).
<6>
For SERVO only.
<7>
For VECTOR, VECTORMV only.
<8>
For VECTORGL only.
n_ctrl setp sum

r1170
[5020.1] <6>
[6030.1]
<5>
[8011.2]
Function diagrams
Encoder evaluation
2.11
Encoder evaluation
Function diagrams
4704 Raw signal sensing
2-969
4715 Actual speed value and pole pos. sens., motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1)
2-970
2-968

4704 Raw signal sensing

Fig. 2-83
Encoder Sensor Module
Control Unit
p0115[0]
See [1020.7]
Configuration, absolute value encoder
Encoder type selection

Enc
0 = No encoder
configuration
p0400[E]
p0404[E]
Enc
squarewave A/B
p0405[E]
<1>
Encoder
pulse number Enc rot clearance ZM
p0408[E]
p0425[E]
<3>
<3>
<3>
Abs enc. Abs enc. Abs enc.

Multiturn Meas. Step Singleturn
p0421[E] p0422[E] p0423[E]
<3>
<3>
[E]
The Encoder Data Set

changeover is shown
at [8570].
<2>
<2>
Enc_interface
Comp_No. p0141[E]
1
Encoder Comp_No.
p0142[E]
2
Incr
A
DRIVE-CLiQ
B
To speed
sensing
(only from encoder 1) 4715.1]

SMC30
SM characteristics
r0458
1 signal period
232 -1
0
For SSI encoders: Absolute position information
F31100...A33905
encoder faults/alarms
2-969
<1> For rotary encoders = pulse number setting.

For resolvers = pole pair number setting.
<2> p0142 = p0141 for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ.
<3> These parameters are automatically set.
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Encoder evaluation - Raw signal sensing
6
fp_4704_56_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS G130/G150
8
- 4704 -
Function diagrams
p0979[0...25]
encoder format acc. to
PROFIdrive
Encoder evaluation
p0492
1 = Sensorless operation active
[2522.6] r1407.1
p0115[0]
<4>
C,D
Gearbox enc Inv encoder actual value

p0432[E]
p0410.0[E]
n_act measurement
Dir of rot
p1821[D]
n_act T_smooth
0.00...1000.00 [ms]
p1441[D] (0.00)
To basic braking control [2701.1]

To extended braking control [2704.1]
To speed controller with/without encoder
[6040.1]
To Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation [6050.1]
To current/power/torque limits [6640.1]
n_act unsmoothed To Iq and Id controllers [6714.7]
To field-weakening characteristic [6722.1]
r0063[0]
To interface to the Motor Module [6730.1]
T_smth display To display signals [6799.1]
0.00...200.00 [ms] To speed signals 1[8010.1]
To extended functions 1 [8020.1]
p0045
<2>

4715 Actual speed value and pole pos. sens., motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1)
A,B
up
Fine resolution
for the speed
actual value
Raw position
signals from
encoder 1 1 encoder revolution
[4710.8]
<4>
dn
dx
dt
III
-1 1
-1 1
Smoothing
n_act unsmoothed
r0061[0]
encoder 1
Gearbox mot
p0433[E]
C
D
<1> [6730.1]
n_act smoothed with p0045
n_act calculation
r0063[1]
Zero mark
Synchronous motor
Enc commut_factor
r0451
<2>
<5>
Inv encoder actual value

p0410.0[E]
<5>
1 = Geberloser Betrieb aktiv

[2522.6] r1407.1
p0115[0]
Refer to [1020.7]
Pole position sensing

Incl. measuring gearbox
p0432[E], p0433[E]
<5>
C,D
A,B
Gearbox enc
p0432[E]
n_act measurement
Fine resolution
for the speed
actual value
Raw position sign.

from encoder 1
[4710.8]
1 encoder revolution
<5>
up
dn
dx
dt
III
r0094
-1 1
Inv encoder actual value
p0410.0[E]
<2>
= Only for vector control without encoder.
<2> [E]: The encoder data set changeover is represented on [8570].

<3> Only for operation with encoder and p0300 = 2.
<4> Only for S120/S150.
<5> Only for S120/S150 and p0300 = 2, 5
<6> Only for FEM.
To basic braking control [2701.1]

To speed controller with/without encoder
[6040.1]
Zu Kp_n-/Tn_n-Adaption [6050.1]
To current/power/torque limits [6640.1]
To Iq and Id controllers [6714.7]
To field-weakening characteristic [6724.1]
To interface to the Motor Module [6733.1] <6>
To display signals [6799.1]
n_act unsmoothed To speed signals 1[8010.1]
r0063[0]
To extended functions 1 [8020.1]
<3>
n_act T_smooth
Dir of rot 0.00...1000.00 [ms]
p1821[D]
p1441[D] (0.00)
-1 1
-1 1
Smoothing
D
Zero mark
<1>
Transformat_angle
T_smth display
0.00...200.00 [ms]
p0045
n_act unsmoothed encoder 1
Gearbox mot
p0433[E]
r0061[0]
[6731.1]
<1>
0
n_act smoothed with p0045
[6731.1] n_act calculation

[6733.8]
r0063[1]
Encoder angel [6731.1]
[6732.1]
-1 1
1
2
3
4
5
DO: VECTOR
Encoder evaluation - Speed act. value and pole pos. sensing, motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1)
6
fp_4715_54_eng.vsd
29.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 4715 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Encoder evaluation
2-970
Fig. 2-84
Induction motor
Function diagrams
Vector control
2.12
Vector control
Function diagrams
6030 Speed setpoint, droop
2-972
6031 Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model
2-973
6040 Speed controller with/without encoder
2-974
6050 Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation
2-975
6060 Torque setpoint
2-976
6220 Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
2-977
6300 V/f characteristic and voltage boost
2-978
6310 Resonance damping and slip compensation
2-979
2-980
6490 Closed-loop speed control configuration
2-981
6491 Flux control configuration
2-982
6630 Upper/lower torque limit
2-983
6640 Current/power/torque limits
2-984
6710 Current setpoint filter
2-985
6714 Iq and Id controller
2-986
6721 Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2)
2-987
6722 Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)
2-988
6723 Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)
2-989
6724 Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2)
2-990
6730 Interface to Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)
2-991
6731 Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2)
2-992
6799 Display signals
2-993

2-971
[6060.5]
6030 Speed setpoint, droop
Statik M_komp Skal

[6060.8]
-2000.0 ... 2000.0 [%]
p1487 [D] (100.0)
Statik M_komp
Droop n_reduction
p1486[C]
150 ms
r1490
nN
MN
<2>
(0)
p1492 Enable droop
[2520.3] r1406.11
Droop enabled
r1407.10
[2522.3]
<4>
n_ctr setp sum

r1170
Refer to [1020.7]
<1>
M_set total
r0079
Droop input
n_set before filt.

r0060
n_set limited
[2701.1]
[2704.1]
[6799.1]
[2522.3]
n_set_filter 1 T
0.00...5000.00 [ms]
p1416 [D] (0.00)
r1407.11
n_set after filter

r0062
[3080.8]
[6031.1]
n_limit pos eff

[3050.8] r1084
n_limit neg eff
[3050.8] r1087
<1>
Mot moment of inertia ratio
1.000...10000.000
p0342 [M] (1.000)
Mot M_inertia
0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm]
p0341 [M] (0.00000)
[6490.7]
1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active
from speed control configuration
p1400.15
n_set limited
a at M_ctrl scal
0.0...400.0 [%]
p1499 [D] (100.0)
n_prectrl motormod.
r1431
r1407.11
M_set total
[2522.3]
r0079
[6732.1]
Pre-control speed
[6730.1]
[6732.1]
[6733.1]
[6060.8]
M_ctrl active
Mom of inert scal

p1497[C]
(100)
r1407.2
[6060.3]
<1>
= Only for vector control without encoder. <3> Scaling: p1489 = 0.100 - for a rated motor torque of r0333 - results in a speed setpoint reduction of 0.1 x p0311.
<4> The value is displayed correctly only with r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled).
<2> Only for p1488 > 0.
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Speed setpoint, droop
6
fp_6030_54_eng.vsd
18.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6030 -
Function diagrams
M_set before M_suppl

r1508
[6040.8]
<3>
Droop scaling
0.000...0.500
p1489 [D] (0.050)
Vector control
Fig. 2-85
2-972
Droop input source

0...3
p1488 (0)
n-ctrl I_output
r1482
Fig. 2-86
Mot M_inertia
0.00000...100000.00000 [kgm]
p0341[M] (0.00000)
[6490.7]
Acceleration pre-control, source
p1400[D].2
a_before scaling
0.0...10 000.0 [%]
p1496[D] (0.0)

Refer to [1020.7]
Mom of inert scal
Mom of inert total
a_prectrl dn/1s
6031 Pre-control balancing for reference/acceleration model

Mot moment of inertia ratio

1.000...10000.000
p0342[M] (1.000)
p1497[C]
(100)
r1493
p1495
(0)
Calculated accelerating torque
Acceleration calculation
[6060.1]
[6490.7]
Reference model
Speed setpoint
I component
p1400[D].3
n_pre t_dead bal n

0.0...3.0
p1428[D] (0.0) <1>
n_pre T bal
0.00...10.00 [ms]
p1429[D] (0.00) <2>
p1400[D].2 = 1
or
(p1400[D].3 = 0 and p1496[D] > 0)
Pre-control balancing
n_ctrl n_set
n_set after filter
r1438
[6030.8] r0062
[6040.1]
n_ctrl RefMod t_dead

0.0...3.0
p1435[D] (0.0)
n_ctrl RefMod fn n_ctrl RefMod D
0.00...8000.00 [Hz]
0.00...5.00
Sampling time, closed-loop speed control (p0115[1])
p1433[D] (0.00)
p1434[D] (1.00)
[6490.7]
Reference model, speed setpoint I component
p1400[D].3
n_set I_comp
r1439
n_set smooth
0
n_ctrRefMod I_comp
x
Reference model
RefMod n_set
p1437
r1436
[6040.1]
(r1436)
(y = x for the factory setting of p1433 ... p1435)

n_limit pos eff
RFG setpt at input
r1119
n_ctrl n_set 1
p1160[C]
PcCtrl active
r0807.0
n_limit pos eff
n_limit neg eff

r1087
n_set via PC
r1084
n_ctrl n_set stat

r1444
0
+
+
n_limit neg eff
2-973
r1087
<1> p1428 only effective for p1400[D].2 = 1 or p1428 > 2,0
<2> p1429 only effective for p1400[D].2 = 1.
For p1400[D].2 = 0 the following applies: p1442[D] or p1452[D] for sensorless operation is effective [6040.2].
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV, VECTORSL
Vector control - Pre-control balancing, reference/acceleration model
6
fp_6031_51_eng.vsd
21.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 6031 -
Vector control
n_ctrl n_set 2
Steady-state setpoint calculation
Function diagrams
p1155[C]
r1084
Kp_n_basic
Tn_n_adapt

6040 Speed controller with/without encoder
From Kp/Tn adaptation [6050.7]
Tn_n_basic
Kp_n_adapt
[6490.7]
1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
p1400.5
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active

p1400.0
[6490.7]
To Kp/Tn adaptation
[6050.2]
0
n_ctrl Tn effective
r1469
Dynamic reduction, field weakening

<1>
n_ctrl Kp effective
r1468
Kp
n_ctrl system deviation

r0064
Tn
n_ctrl n_set
n_ctrl P-M_output
Speed controller
Kp
r1481
Kp
[6031.8] r1438
n_act T_smooth
0.00...32000.00 [ms]
p1442 [D] (4.00)
<1> p1452 [D] (10.00)
M_set from the speed controller
M_max upper effective
[6640.8] r1538
M_max lower effective
n_ctrl n_act
n_act smooth
r1445
[4715.6] p1440[C]
r0063(0)
[6640.8] r1539
Kp
n_ctrl I_sys dev
Tn
r1454
n_ctrl I-M_output
r1482
n_act n_ctrl Input
[2610.4]
r1443
Set
Hold Set Val
Enable speed controller
[6030.1]
Speed control active
r1407.3
[2522.2]
from sequence control S4: Operation
[8012.6]
p1476 1 = Speed controller, hold I component
[2520.3] r1406.4
[6031.8]
n_set I_comp
1 = Speed controller, I component held
1 = Speed controller, set I component

r1406.5
n_ctrl I_value scal
[2520.3]
r1407.5
p1477
r1439
n_ctrl integ_set val
p1478[C]
[2522.3]
Integrator control
1 = Speed controller, I component set
p1479[C]
(1)
r1407.6
[2522.3]
(0)
<1>
= Only for vector control without encoder.

[2522.7] r1407.7
<2> For p1462/p1472 = 0.0 s or 100.0 s, the I component is

disabled (integral action time = ).
<3> Units Kp can be changed over via p0528.
<1>
[6490.7]
1
2
3
Vector control - Speed controller with/without encoder
1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component

p1400.1
6
fp_6040_51_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 6040 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Vector control
Fig. 2-87
2-974
<2>
n_ctrl Tn n lower
0.00...100000.00 [ms]
p1462 [D] (20.00)
<1> p1472 [D] (20.00)
<3>
n_ctrl Kp n lower
0.000...999999.000
p1460 [D] (0.300)
<1> p1470 [D] (0.300)
Fig. 2-88
6050 Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation

Adapt_factor upper
0.0...200 000.0 %
p1459[D] (100.0)
Free Kp_n adaptation
Refer to [1020.7]
Free Tn adaptation active (p1400.6)
[6490.7]
y
n_ctrl Adpt_sig Kp
p1455[C]
(0)0
x
Adapt_factor lower
<1>
<1>
0.0...200 000.0 % n_ctrl adapt Kp lower n_ctrl adapt Kp upper
p1458[D] (100.0)
0.00...400.00 %
0.00...400.00 %
p1456[D] (0.00)
p1456[D] (0.00)
n_ctrl Kp scal
p1466[C]
(1)0
Speed-dependent Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation

n_act unsmoothed
[6040.8]
Kp_n_basic (p1460, p1470)
Kp
r0063[0]
Kp_n_adapt
Kp
n_ctrl Kp n upper
p1461[D] (100.000)
0.000...200 000.000 %
n_ctrl n upper
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p1465[D] (0.00)
<1>
n_ctrl Tn n upper
0.000...200 000.000 %
p1463[D] (100.000)
n_ctrl n lower
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p1464[D] (0.00)
<1>
Tn
Tn_n_basic (p1462, p1472)

n
2-975
<1> If the lower transition point exceeds the upper transition point, the Kp-adaptation also changes over.
1
2
3
Vector control - Kp_n/Tn_n adaptation
6
fp_6050_51_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 6050 -
Vector control
[6040.8]
Tn_n_adapt
Tn
Function diagrams
M_suppl 1
+
+
M_suppl 1 scal
M_supply 2 scal
-2000.0 %...2000.0 %
p1514[D] (100.0 %)
p1512[C]
(0)
[6490.7]
p0856
[2501.7]
6060 Torque setpoint
M_suppl 2
p1513[C]
r0056.14
(0)
1
0
[6031.8]
0
0
0...100.00 [ms]
<2>
p1517[D] (4.00)
<1>
<5>
[2526.6]
Calculated accelerating torque
1 = Speed controller enable
Vdc_max-Regler aktiv
Refer to [1020.7]
p1400.14 1 = Torque pre-control
r0898.12
<1>
M_accel unsmooth
M_accel smooth
r1518[0]
r1518[1]
M_suppl total
r1515
+
M_suppl+M_accel
<1>
r1516
[6640.8] r1538
M_max upper scal
p1540[C]
0
(1)
M_max output n_ctrl upper limit

r1547[0]
Min
M_max up. w/o offs
Example:
0 = Fast stop
active (OFF3)
[6630.8] r1526
M_max up w/o offs
M_max lower eff

p1552[C]
(1)
r0056.13
[2526.2]
r1407.15
r0899.5
r1539
r1407.8
p1551[C]
r1407.2
r1407.8
Min
r1508
[6030.1] [6722.1]
[6726.7]
n_ctrl PI-M_output
[6040.8]
M_set from speet controller
r1480
M_soll
M_max u Skal oOffs
p1503[C]
(0)
p1554[C]
Torque limiting upper active
[2522.3]
(1)
[6030.5]
r1407.7
[2522.3]
Torque limiting, upper active
M_lim var/fixed S_src
0 = Speed control
p1501 1 = Torque control
[2520.3] r1406.12
p1300 = MCtr
Current/torque limit active
Torque limiting
without Pre-control
[2522.3]
<3>
M_set total
r0079
+
M_setp sv SLVC
[6030.1] [6710.1]
[8012.1]
Torque limiting
r1617
(1)
r1538
Torque limiting lower active
Max
[6726.8] <5>
r1407.9
M_max low w/o offs
Torque limiting lower active
[2522.3]
r1407.9
[6630.8] r1527
[2522.3]
M_max nctr lowScal
Max
M_max output n_ctrl lower limit
p1541[C]
r1547[1]
(1)
M_set
[6640.8] r1539
<1> The signal is only effective after magnetization has been completed (r0056.4 = 1).
<2>
Acceleration control is inhibited for p1517 = 100 ms.
1
2
3
Vector control - Torque setpoint
<3> M_set is also influenced by the speed limit controller.

<4> Only for DO: VECTOR and sensorless FEM with speed controller inhibited r1776[4] = 0.
6
fp_6060_51_eng.vsd
24.11.09 V04.03.01
<5> Not for DO. VECTORGL.
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 6060 -
Function diagrams
(0)
Vector control
2-976
Fig. 2-89
p1511[C]

Fig. 2-90
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1251[D]

Refer to [1020.7]
Vdc_max (ctrl)
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1250[D]
Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1252[D]
Vdc_ctrl config
p1240[D]
Vdc_act
[6730.1]
r0070
[6731.1]
<2>
1,3
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056
r0056.14
0,2,4,5,6
[2526.2]
Calculate on_level
<1>
Vdc_max on_level
r1242
Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1243[D]
Vdc_max SenseOnLev
p1254
Vdc controller active
[6710.2]
Vdc_ctrl output
r1258
Iq_max
Supply voltage
p0210
Operating point
selection
Iq_min
[6710.2]
[6710.2]
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1251[D]
Vdc_min on_level
p1245
Vdc_min on_level
r1246
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1250[D]
Calculate on_level
Vdc_ctrl t_rate
p1252[D]
Vdc_min (ctrl)
0
Vdc_act
[6730.1]
r0070
[6731.1]
<2>
2,3
ZSW cl-loop ctrl
r0056
r0056.15
[2526.2]
2-977
Vdc_min dyn_factor
p1247[D]
<1> As standard, the controller is designed as a P controller.
<2> The Vdc controller is switched on when reaching the threshold value. The switch-off hysteresis is 5% of the switch-on level.
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR, VECTORMV
Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
6
fp_6220_51_eng.vsd
30.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 6220 -
Vector control
<1>
Function diagrams
0,1,4,5,6
Linear

6300 V/f characteristic and voltage boost
V/f Eco fac act v

ECO-Mode
Mot f_rated
p0310
V_output max r0071
Control type
p1300
r1348
Flux current control (FCC)

Dependent on the load current
0/5
Mot V_rated p0304
1/6
2
3
[1690.4]
Vf V_set independ.
U/f FCC f_Start
p1333
p1330[C]
Mot f_rated
p0310
Parabolic
19
(0)
V_output max r0071

Mot V_rated p0304
[1690.1]
f_set
Freely programmable
Mot f_rated
V_output max r0071
p0310
Vf characteristic V4 p1327
I_outp max
r0067
V_boost total
r1315
V_boost perm
p1311
Ramp-up active
p1199.0
Mot I_rated
p0305
0
R_stator act
r0395
<1>
V_boost accel
p1311
Vf charact. f1
p1320
Vf charact. f3
p1324
Vf charact. f2
p1322
Vf charact. f4
p1326
<1> For p1320 = 0, the voltage boost via p1310 is not effective.
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - V/f characteristic and voltage boost
6
fp_6300_54_eng.vsd
04.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6300 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Vector control
2-978
Fig. 2-91
V_output max r0071

Mot V_rated p0304
6310 Resonance damping and slip compensation

Fig. 2-92

Refer to [1020.7]
V/f slip compensation
V/f resonance damping

Vf gain res damp
p1338
f_res damp
[1690.7]
Vf T res damp
p1339
Slip comp limit

p1336
Iq_act
r0078
[6714.4]
f_slip
r0065
Slip compensation
p1335
Slip compensation
actual value
r1337
[6730.2]
[1690.6]
250 ms
-1
6%
10 % 95 % x p1349
f/f Mot N
p1349
f_outp
<1>
r0066
0
[6730.4]
[6731.4]
Control ZSW1
slip limiting
r0056
r0056.10
[2526.2]
p1334
p1334 + 4 %
f/f Mot N
6
fp_6310_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6310 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Resonance damping and slip compensation
Vector control
2-979
<1> If p1349 = 0: the limit is 0,95 x f Mot N <= 45 Hz.
p0115[y] (Motor Modules)
Vdc_max (V/f)
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1290
Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action

p1292

Vdc_ctrl config.
p1280
Vdc_ctrl output_limit
p1293
<1>
Vdc_act
<3>
r0070
<2> [8950.1]
[6730.1] [6731.1]
1,3
0,2,4,5,6
Control ZSW 1
r0056
r0056.14
[2526.2]
0
Calculate on_level
Vdc_max on_level
r1282
Vdc_max dyn_factor
p1283
Vdc_max SenseOnLev
p1294
Vdc_ctrl output
r1298
0
[1690]
Supply voltage
p0210
r3405.1
Vdc_min (V/f)
Calculate on_level
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p1290
Vdc_ctrl t_deriv action

p1292
Vdc_ctrl config
p1280
<1>
r0070
<2> [8950.1]
[6730.1] [6731.1]
r3517
<4>
Vdc_min on_level
r1286
Vdc_act
I_act ctrl set
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1291
Vdc_min on_level
p1285
<3>
[7960.8]
2,3
0,1,4,5,6
<1> p1280
[0] Inhib Vdc ctrl
[1] Enables Vdc_max controller
[2] Enables Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering)
Vdc_min dyn_factor
[3] Enables Vdc_min controller and Vdc_max controller
p1287
[4] Activates Vdc_max monitoring
[5] Activates Vdc_min monitoring
[6] Activates Vdc_min monitoring and Vdc_max monitoring
<3> The Vdc controller is switched on when reaching the threshold value. The switch-off hysteresis is 5% of the switch-on level.
<4> Only relevant if the function module "technology controller" (r0108.16 = 1) is active.
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min controller
[2526.2]
- Vdc_ctrl output_limit
p1293
6
fp_6320_54_eng.vsd
03.09.09 V04.03.01
Control ZSW 1
r0056
r0056.15
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6320 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Vector control
2-980
Fig. 2-93
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p1291
6490 Closed-loop speed control configuration

Fig. 2-94
n_ctrl config
p1400[D]
Speed control configuration

Bit No.
Factory setting
Refer to [1020.7]
Meaning
[6040.3]
1 = Sensorless vector control, freeze I component
[6040.3]
1 = Acceleration pre-control, external source (p1495)

0 = Acceleration pre-control, internal source (n_set)
[6031.2]
1 = Reference model, speed setpoint I component ON
[6031.1][6031.7]
Reserved
1 = Kp/Tn adaptation active
[6040.3]
1 = Free Tn adaptation active
[6050.6]
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
1 = Torque pre-control always active

0 = Torque pre-control for n_ctrl enabled
[6060.4]
15
1 = Sensorless vector control, speed pre-control active
[6030.5]
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
1
2
3
Vector control - Speed control configuration
fp_6490_51_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
8
- 6490 -
Function diagrams
1 = Automatic Kp/Tn adaptation active
Vector control
2-981
Flux control, configuration
Factory setting
Bit No.
Meaning
p1401[D]
6491 Flux control configuration

1 = Flux setpoint, soft starting active
[6722.3]
1 = Flux setpoint, differentiation active
[6723.7]
1 = Flux build-up control active
[6723.6]
1 = Flux characteristic, load-dependent
[6725.2]
1 = Flux controller (ASM with encoder)
1 = Flux impression with model chngov (ASM with encoder)

0 = Flux impression from 30 % n_rated (ASM with encoder)
1 = Quick magnetizing
Reserved
3
8
Reserved
Reserved
10
Reserved
11
Reserved
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Flux control configuration
[6722.5]
6
fp_6491_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6491 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
F_ctrl config
Vector control
2-982
Fig. 2-95
p1401[D]
Refer to [1020.7]
A <1>
M_max upper
6630 Upper/lower torque limit

Fig. 2-96
Upper torque limit
M_max upper
-1 000 000.00...20 000 000.00 [Nm]
p1520[D] (0.00)
M
2
1
n
p1520[D]
p1522[C]
(1520)
M_max up w/o offs [Nm]

r1526
[6640.1]
M_max upper scal
M_max up/mot scal

-2 000.0...2 000.0 [%]
p1524[D] (100.0)
p1524[D]
Example:
0 = Fast stop active
(OFF3)
r0899.5
p1528[C]
(1524)
M_lim var/fixS_src
p1551[C]
(1)
Lower torque limit

M_max lower
M_max lower
-20 000 000.00...1 000 000.00 [Nm]
p1521[D] (0.00)
M
n
3
M_max low w/o offs [Nm]

r1527
M_max lower scal
M_max lower scal

-2 000.0...2 000.0 [%]
p1525[D] (100.0)
Danger: Negative values at
p1525[D]
or positive values at
[6640.1]
p1529[C]
(1525)
<1>
represent a minimum torque for the other torque direction and can cause the motor to accelerate uncontrollably.
1
2
3
Vector control - Upper/lower torque limit
6
fp_6630_51_eng.vsd
19.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 6630 -
Function diagrams
2-983
p1523[C]
(1521)
Vector control
<1>
p1521[D]
Kp from speed controller [6040.5]

Iq stall
calculation
I_outp max
6640 Current/power/torque limits
Current limit
p0640[D]
Current limit var
n_limit pos eff
Iq_max total
r1533
Min
x2
[6730.4] I_max Motor Module
[6731.4]
<4> [6732.4]
[3050.8] r1084
[6722.1][6724.1]
[6726.6][6727.6]
I_max reduction
Tn from speed controller [6040.6]
r0067
p0641[C]
(1)
[8016.8]
Refer to [1020.7]
[3050.8] r1087
n_limit neg eff
y2
Speed limiting
controller
<2>
Sign
+ or -
-1
Pre-control
[6723.8] Id_set total

<4> [6727.8]
Max
Min
Id_set total
r1624
p1401.7
n_act unsmoothed

r0063[0]
[4715.6]
M_max up. w/o Offs

r1526
Lower limit
Upper limit
r1548[1]
r1548[0]
[6630.8]
Min
[6721.8] M
[6730.1]
Iq
<4> [6732.1]
M_max low w/o Offs

r1527

r1538
[6060.1] [6040.4]
[8012.1]
[6630.8]
Max
Power limiting
P_max_scale
<3>
p1556[D] (0.00)
P_max
(1)
r1539
+
Isq_max
r1536
<1>
p1555[C]

[6060.1] [6040.4]
[8012.1]
Iq
Min
-1
P_max regen
-10 000.00...-0.01 kW
p1531 (-0.01)
Max
P_max mot
0.00...10 000.00 kW
p1530 (0.00)
Min
[6710.1]
Isq_min
r1537
Max
[6710.1]
<1>
<1> Intervention by the Vdc controller.

<2> Intervention when the speed limit is exceeded + 2 % nrated.
<3> p1556 = 0 switches the evaluation of the connector input p1555 off.
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Current/power/torque limits
6
fp_6640_54_eng.vsd
11.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6640 -
Function diagrams
[6722.1] U_output max

r0071
[6723.4]
[6724.4]
<4> [6725.4]
Speed limiting
Vector control
2-984
Fig. 2-97
Mot L_leakage total

r0377[M]
Current limiting
Vdc_max controller active
[6220.8]
Iq_max
Refer to [1020.7]
Isq_max
r1536
[6640.8]
<4>
Vdc_min controller active
6710 Current setpoint filter

Fig. 2-98
[2526.6] r0056.14
[2526.6] r0056.15
Iq_min
[6220.8]
Isq_min
r1537
[6640.8]
p1656.0[D]
p1656.1[D]
0
0
Isq_s T_smooth
p1654[D]
Iq_set before filter

r1650
M_set total
r0079
[6060.8]
Interpolator and
smoothing for
voltage limits
fn_n
p1663[D]
D_n
p1659[D]
D_n
p1664[D]
r0077
[6714.1]
[6721.1]
[6725.1]
[6727.1]
p1657[D]
M_suppl 3
p1569[C]
(3841)
fn_n
p1658[D]
Iq_set
p1662[D]
|y|
Isq_s T_smooth_min
p1653[D]
[7010.7]
fn
|y|
0
fn
<2>
M
[6721.8] Iq
[6730.1]
<5> [6732.1]
I_set_filt fn
I_set_filt fn
p1655[0]
<2>
p1655[1]
(1)
(1)
fn_z
D_z
p1660[D] p1661[D]
<3>
<3>
fn_z
D_z
p1665[D] p1666[D]
|y|
|y|
x
2nd Order filter
f <1>
2nd Order filter
General 2nd-order filter (detailed representation at [1024]).

PT2 low pass (detailed representation at [1024]).
The frequency is multiplied by this factor.
With p1699 = 1, the parameter settings are transferred to the controller.
Only for SINAMICS S120/S150.
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Current setpoint filter
fn_n
D_n
p1658[D] p1659[D]
fn_n
D_n
p1663[D] p1664[D]
Filter 1
4
Filter 2
5
6
fp_6710_54_eng.vsd
03.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6710 -
Vector control
2-985
<1>
<2>
<3>
<4>
<5>
Function diagrams
f <1>
<1>
Quad_de-couple UmaxScal
p1727[D]
<2> <3>
U_quad_de-couple
r1729
<1> [6723.1]
r1598
<2> [6724.1]
<3> [6726.8] Flux setpoint pre-ctrl
U_set 1
6714 Iq and Id controller
Pre-control, de-coupling and

limiting
U_dir axis_de-couple
r1728
U_max 1 [6723.4] <1>

[6724.4] <2>
[6725.4] <3>
Isd_ctrl I_limit
r1725
Isd_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal
EMF scal Isq_ctrl Flux track thresh
p1702[D]
p1704[D]
p1705[D]
<2> <3>
<3>
<3>
Isq_ctrl_pre-ctrl scal
p1703
Id current controller
Id_set
r0075
from r1624
<1> [6723.5]
<2> [6721.8]
<3> [6727.8]
p0393[M]
Isd_ctrl I_comp
r1724
Isd_ctrl output
r1723
Kp_I
Kp_I adaption
+
+
r0056.9
[2526.2]
U_dir axis_set
r1408.1
+
Symmetrizing
Voltage limit active
Id control, I component limiting
[6725.1] <3>
[6723.1] <1>
[6724.1] <2>
[6725.1] <3>
r1732
Voltage limiting
[6731.5]
r1408.3
+
+
U_set
[6730.1] <1>
[6731.1] <2>
[6732.1] <3>
U_angle
[6730.1] <1>
[6731.1] <2>
[6732.1] <3>
Tn_I
Kp_I
0

Entkopplung
p1726
<2>
<3>
f_output
p1717
r0066
Kp_I
p1402.2
Current
controller
I_ctrl Kp
adaption
p1715[D]
active
Iq_set
p1717
p1726
Transv_decpl scal
+
Symmetrizing
Kp_I
<1> [6730.1] Transformat_angle

<2> [4715.6] r0094
<3> [6732.4]
<1> [6730.4] Phase W

<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
Isq_ctrl I_comp
r1719
p0392[M] p0391[M]
<1> [6730.4] Phase V

<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
Iq
[6710.8] r0077
<1> [6730.4] Phase U

<2> [6731.4]
<3> [6732.4]
Coordinate converter
Isq_reg Ausg
+
+
+
+
+
U_quad_set
r1718
Tn_I
r1732
Iq current controller
Ia
x2
[6731.5]
[6799.1]
I_act abs. value [7017.6]
[8014.1]
r0068[0]
[8017.1]
[8018.1]
[8020.1]
y2
VD 2
Ib
Iq_act
r0078
Id_act
<1> For induction motors.

<2> For synchronous motors.
<3> Only for SINAMIC S120/S150 and separately-excited synchronous motors.
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Iq and Id controllers
r0076
6
fp_6714_54_eng.vsd
03.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
[6310.1]
[6727.1] <3>
[6731.4] <2>
[6799.5]
[6731.4] <2>
[6799.5]
8
- 6714 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Flux setpoint total
Vector control
2-986
Fig. 2-99
<1>
Mot L_leakage total Quad_de-couple scal
p1726[D]
r0377[M]
From Id_field weakening

n_act unsmoothed
r0063[0]
Refer to [1020.7]
Id_setp total
r1624
To current controller
[6714]
Id_inject
Iq_set
[6710.8] r0077
MIN
I_set T_smooth
p1616
r1751.0
[6731]
from the model control
P1750.5
p1755 2.0 *
p1755
Mot load angle opt

p0327[M]
6721 Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2)

Fig. 2-100
[6724]
Optimal Current
Id_set
<1>
Iabs
Iq
Mot kt
p0316[M]
(r1407.2)
0 = M-ctrl
1 = n-ctrl
Mot kt_reluctance
p0328[M]
Mot L_leakage total
r0377[M]
Mot t_excitation
p0346
kt
M
Iq [6640.5]
[6710.1]
[6714.6]
kt
rel
Lq
M_set steady-state
p1610[D]
0.9 x r0067
Ld
M_suppl_accel
p1611[D]
r1538
Mot L_stator_d
r0378[M]
Id
r0067
Iabs
MAX
[6731.3]
Iq
M
r1797 MotMod kT corr

from model control
M adaptation
[6060.6]
[6060.4]
r1518 M_acceleration
Torque setting value, speed controller
MotMod w/o enc

p1757[D]
r1539
[6040]
Open-loop
controlled
operation
&
select n-ctrl
r1762 Mot mod dev comp 1
2-987
<1> G130/G150 only at PEM without encoder.
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2)
6
fp_6721_54_eng.vsd
01.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6721 -
Vector control
n-Ctrl = 1
Function diagrams
[6731.2]
Iabspre
r1515 M_suppl total
Flux setpoint T_smth Fs

p1584[D]
Field weakening scal
80.0 ...120.0 [%]
[6640.1]
p1586[D] (100.0)

Refer to [1020.7]
Flux thresh magnet

p1573[D]
[6723.3]
Magnetization

6722 Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)
1 = Flux setpoint soft starting active

p1401.0
p1570[D]
Field weakening
Flux setpoint
p1570[D]
r0056.8
[2526.2]
[2526.2]
Quick magnetizing active

[6723.8]
1 = Quick magnetizing
p1401.6
n_act unsmoothed
[4715.7] r0063[0]
r1405.4
r0056.4
1 = Flux build-up control active

p1401.2
Magnetization control
f
Field-weakening
characteristic
[6730.3]
MotMod status (r1751)
Mot T_rotor
r0384
0
MIN
Efficiency opt
0...100 %
p1580[D](0)
r1583
< 0.3 s
[6723.1]
Flux setpoint T_smooth

p1582[D]
0,9
I_outp max
Id current limit
[6640.3] r0067
<1>
Flux setpoint, smoothed
[6723.1]
M_set steady-state
p1610[D]
M_suppl_accel
p1611[D]

[6060.5] r1508
I_set T_smooth
p1616
Mot I_mag_rated act

r0331[M]
Id_set
calculation
Flux setpoint
calculation
<1> Only for vector control without encoder (SLVC).
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint (ASM, p0300 = 1)
6
fp_6722_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6722 -
Function diagrams
Mot t_excitation
p0346[D]
Vector control
2-988
Fig. 2-101
U_output max
r0071

Refer to [1020.7]
Calculation, max. modulation depth

U_max 1
6723 Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)

Fig. 2-102
Drv filter type Pulse frequency Modulator mode Modulation depth max
p0230
p1800
p1802
p1803
Modulat_depth max
r0073
[6714.8]
U_output max
r0071
U_reserve dyn
0...150 [Vrms]
p1574[D] (10)
Field_ctrl Tn
10...10 000 [ms]
p1596[D] (50) Field_ctrl output
r1597
0
[6640.1]
[6722.1]
Vdc_act
r0070
[6730.1]
-200 %
[6491]
Flux build-in ctrl
p1401.2
[6714.8]
U_set 1
[6491]
Flux differentiation
p1401.1
[6722.8]
Quick magnetizing active
Flux setpoint total

r1598
I_set_steady-state
r1623
[6714.1]
Flux setpoint, smoothed
[6722.8] r1583
Id_set total
r1624
+
[6714.1]
Saturation characteristic
p0362 ... p0369
[6722.8]
-1
Id current limit
6
fp_6723_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6723 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Field weakening controller, flux controller (ASM, p0300 = 1)
Vector control
2-989
Calculation, max. modulation depth

U_max 1

6724 Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2)
Modulat_depth max
r0073
[6714.8]
U_output max
r0071
U_reserve dyn
0...150 [Vrms]
p1574[D] (10)
Field_ctrl Tn
10...10 000 [ms]
p1596[D] (50)
[6640.1]
[6722.1]
Mot I_mag_rated act

r0331
Field_ctrl output
r1593
Vdc_act
r0070
[6731.1]
Mot U_rated
0...20 000 [Vrms]
p0304(0)
[6714.8]
U_set 1
Field weakening scal

80.0 ...120.0 [%]
p1586[D] (100.0)
Mot I_mag_rated act

r0331
+
n_act unsmoothed
-nF
Field weakening current Vst

r1589
nF
[4715.7] r0063[0]
Id_field weaken. ctrl

[6721.1]
Ld
\Nom
0.9
I_outp max
[6640.3] r0067
Min
100 %
-1
Flux setpoint total
r1598
Flux setpoint T_smooth
p1582
Flux setpoint smooth
r1583
1
2
3
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Field weakening controller (PEM, p0300 = 2)
6
fp_6724_54_eng.vsd
24.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6724 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
Vector control
2-990
Fig. 2-103
Filter Pulse frequency Modulator modes Modulation depth max

p0230
p1800
p1802
p1803
6730 Interface to Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)

Fig. 2-104
Control Unit
Refer to [1020.7]
[6220.1]
[6723.1]
[6799.1]
[8020.1]
Vdc_act
r0070
DC link voltage
U_output
r0072
f_slip
r0065
Current model
Vibration damping
Kp
Tn
+
+
Flux actual value

r0084
[4715.7]
Cos phi act
[6799.5]
[6714.4]
r0087
Transformat_angle
M
Iq
Sign +
or Frequency, negative
+ MotMod
I_max Motor Module
r0056.7
n_adapt Tn
r1771
[1690.1]
[6640.1]
I_max Motor Module
I_Phase actual value

r0069[0...2]
Motor model
(observer)
r1762, r1763,
r1778, r1779
[6714.1]
U_Phase actual value
r0089[0...2]
Dir of rot p1821[D]
Stall monitoring
p1744, p1745
Model control
p1750 ... p1759
p1750 p1755 p1756 p1758 p1759
r1408.11
r1408.12
[8012.3] <2>
[8012.3]
<3>
[6722.7]
2-991
R1751
MotMod status
<1>
<2>
P24
+ BRP
- BRN
Brake control
= Only for vector ctrl. without encoder.

= Only for vector ctrl. with encoder.
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Interface to the Motor Module (ASM, p0300 = 1)
<3>
Additionally for Booksize
6
fp_6730_54_eng.vsd
20.02.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6730 -
Vector control
[6640.5]
[6710.2]
[6714.6]
r0094
Function diagrams
[6714.1]
Adaptation controller
DRIVE
CLiQ
MotMod
n_adapt Kp
r1770
n_act calculation
[4715.4]
R_stator act
r0395
<1>
Precontrol speed
[6030.8]
PWM
r0066
[6310.1]
[6799.1]
r0063[0]
p1761
p1767
[2526.2]
f_outp
[6310.5]
p1760
p1764
r0074
r0056.11
n_act unsmoothed
<1>
[6799.5]
p1740
<1>
Pulse enable
HW
Modulation depth
[6799.1]
[6714.5]
[8020.1]
[1690.8] U_set
[6714.8] U_angle
[6714.8]
[4715.7]
Motor Module
r0070
U_output

6731 Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2)
[6714.8]
DC link voltage
r0072
[6799.1]
[8020.1]
Pulse enable
HW
Modulation depth
r0074
[6799.5]
U_set
U_angle
PWM
p1740
1 = Encoderless operation active
r0056.11
[2522.6] r1407.1
AC-Pulse generator
Current model
[2526.2]
f_outp
Vibration damping
[4715.5] r0061[0]
r0066
<1> Precontrol
speed [6030.8]
p1605[D] p1607[D]
p1760[D]
p1764[D]
p1798[D]
n_act calculation
p1761[D]
p1767[D]
p1750
[6310.1]
[6799.1]
[4715.7]
p1755
Frequency negative
p1756
r0056.7
r1751
r1771
Kp
Tn
Motor model configuration
r1762.0
r1770
r1762.1
Transformat_angle
[6714.1]
r0094
Cos phi act
[6799.5]
r0087
DRIVE-CLiQ
Sign + or -
Motor model
p0350[M]
p0356[M]
p0357[M]
r0334
AC-Korrelator
p1750.5
p0398[M]
p0399[M]
r1608
R_stator act
r0395
I_max Motor Module
I_max Motor Module
[6640.1]
I_Phase actual value
r0069[0...2]
From thermal motor model
U_Phase actual value

r0089[0...2]
[6714.1]
Model actual
r1606
I_Resp_act
r1608[0...1]
Id_act
p1795[D]
r0076 [6714.8]
Iq_act
r1763
kT estimator
p0328[M]
p0316[M]
p1780.3
<2>
r0078 [6714.8]
Ud_set
r1732 [6714.6]
Uq_set
P24
+ BRP
- BRN
r1733 [6714.6]
Brake control
<1>
= Only for vector ctrl. without encoder.
r1797
MotMod kT corr
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Interface to the Motor Module (PEM, p0300 = 2)
PEM: Permanent-magnet
synchronous motor
<2>
6
fp_6731_54_eng.vsd
29.07.09 V04.03.01
Additionally for Booksize.
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6731 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
[6714.8]
Motor Module
Vdc_act
Vector control
2-992
Fig. 2-105
Control Unit
[6220.1]
[6724.1]
[6799.1]
[8020.1]
n_set before filter
6799 Display signals

Fig. 2-106
[6030.1] r0060
n_act unsmoothed
<1> [6730.4] Modulation depth

<2> [6731.4] r0074
<3> [6732.4]
n_set smooth
r0020
100 ms
100 ms
Modulation depth, smooth

r0028
300 ms
Id_act smooth
r0029
300 ms
Iq_act smooth
r0030
Id_act
n_act smooth
[4715.6] r0063[0]
100 ms
r0021
[6714.8] r0076
T_smth display
p0045
Iq_act
[6714.8] r0078
<1> [6730.1]
<2> [6721.8]
<3> [6732.1]
n_act
Smoothed with p0045
r0063[1]
M
Iq
M_act
r0080[0]
<1> [6730.4] f_outp

<2> [6731.4] r0066
<3> [6732.4]
f_outp smooth
r0024
100 ms
<1> [6730.1] Vdc_act

<2> [6731.1] r0070
<3> [6732.1]
100 ms
Vdc smooth
M_act
r0026
r0080[1]
n_act unsmoothed
I_act abs value smooth
I_act abs. value unsmoothed

[6714.8] r0068[0]
300 ms
[4715.7] r0063[0]
r0027
T_smth display
p0045
T_smth display
p0045
cos phi actual val

<1> [6730.1]
r0087
<3> [6732.1]
[6799.1]
I_act abs. value
smoothed with p0045 [7017.6]
[8014.1]
r0068[1]
[8017.1]
[8018.1]
[8020.1]
r0082[1]
M_act unsmoothed
[6799.8] r0080[0]
100 ms
[6799.8] r0082[0]
100 ms
300 ms
cos phi smooth

r0038
2-993
<1> For induction motors.

<2> For synchronous motors.
<3> Only for SINAMIC S120/S150 and separately-excited synchronous motors.
1
2
DO: VECTOR
Vector control - Display signals
6
fp_6799_54_eng.vsd
24.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 6799 -
Vector control
<1> [6730.1] Cos phi actual value

<2> [6731.1] r0087
<3> [6732.1]
r0025
r0032
Function diagrams
U_outp smooth
M_act smooth
r0031
P_active_actual smooth
P_act unsmoothed
r0082[2]
100 ms
P_act unsmoothed
[6799.5]
r0082[0]
[8021.1]
P_act Smoothed with p0045
Power drawn
<1> [6730.4] U_output

<2> [6731.4] r0072
<3> [6732.4]
[6799.5]
T_smth display
p0045
Function diagrams
Technology functions
2.13
Function diagrams
7010 Friction characteristic
2-995
7014 External armature short-circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx)
2-996
7016 Internal armature short-circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx)
2-997
7017 DC brake (p0300 = 1xx)
2-998
7020 Synchronization
2-999
2-994

7010 Friction characteristic

Fig. 2-107
Record friction characteristic

Friction ZSW
Frict rec t_RFG

0.000...999999.000 [s]
p3846[D] (10 s)
Friction rec t_warm

0.000...3600.000 [s]
p3847[D] (0)
Refer to [1020.7]
r3840
Friction characteristic record activated
r3840.1
Friction characteristic record completed
r3840.2
To
setpoint channel
[3080.7]
Drive ON from the sequence control
Friction rec act

0...3
p3845 (0)
Friction characteristic record aborted

r3840.3

A07961
"Friction characteristic record activated"
Friction characteristic record active (p3845 > 0)

<1>
F07963
"Friction characteristic record interrupted"
M_max offset
Play friction characteristic

Friction M0
p3830[D] (0)
<2> p1532
Friction M9
p3839[D] (0)
M_max lower eff

<2> [5650.8] r1539
Friction characteristic OK
r3840.0
M [Nm]
Frict act
p3842 (0)
A07960
"Friction characteristic incorrect"
n_act smoot
M_suppl 3
<2> [4710.7] r0063
Frict outp
r3841
Sign
+ or -
n [RPM]
n_act unsmoothed
p1569[C]
To M_set total
(3841)
e. g.
SERVO [5610.5][5650.7] <2>
VECTOR, VECTORMV [6710.1]
[4715.7] r0063[0]
Friction n0
p3820[D] (15)
Friction n9
p3829[D] (3000)
M_max upper eff

<2> [5650.8] r1538
Friction characteristic positive direction
M_max offset
<2> p1532
r3840.8
6
fp_7010_51_eng.vsd
24.11.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 7010 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR (n/M), VECTORMV
Technology functions - Friction characteristic
2-995
<1> p3845
= 0: Friction characteristic record deactivated
= 1: Friction characteristic record activated
= 2: Friction characteristic record completed
= 3: Friction characteristic record aborted
= 8: Friction characteristic positive direction
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120 and SERVO.
2000 s
p1231 = 1

7014 External armature short-circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx)
Contactor feedback signal

Pulse enable via hardware
ASC act
DI
p1235
Drive converter
r0046.4
p1230
Pulse inhibit
(r0046.19 = 1)
Contactor
closed
r0002 = 19
(0)
DO
r1239.0
+24 V
r0046.20
Drive status S1, S2, S3 [2610]
3~
p1236 = 200 ms
=1
p1231 = 1
0
&
F07905
"Contactor feedback signal "Open" missing"
&
A07904
"Contactor feedback signal "Closed" missing"
p1237 = 200 ms
<1> p0300 = 4xx only with S120/S150.
p1231 = 2
Pulse enable via hardware
EASC: External Armature Short-Circuit
1
2
3
4
5
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Technology functions - External Armature Short-Circuit (EASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx)
6
fp_7014_54_eng.vsd
28.02.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 7014 -
Function diagrams
<1>
2-996
Fig. 2-108
Control Unit
7016 Internal armature short-circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx)

Fig. 2-109
Control Unit
Motor Module
2000 s
p1231 = 4
<1>
F07907
"Motor terminals are not at zero potential after pulse cancellation"
Armature short-circuit, enable missing
r0046.4
ASC act
p1230
(1)
Drive converter
Control of armature short-circuiting in the power unit
Fault response, Internal Armature Short-Circuit
DRIVE-CLiQ
Armature short-circuit, internal enable missing
r0046.20
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Technology functions - Internal Armature Short-Circuit (IASC, p0300 = 2xx or 4xx)
6
fp_7016_54_eng.vsd
28.02.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 7016 -
Function diagrams
IASC: Internal Armature Short-Circuit
2-997
<1> p0300 = 4xx only with S120/S150.
3~
p0115
DCBRK n_start
20...210000 [1/min]
p1234[M] (0)
7017 DC brake (p0300 = 1xx)
BICO = 1
n_act
ASC config
0...3
p1231[M] (0)
Current actual values

<7> [5730]
[6714]
BICO = 0
Pulse disable
(0)
r0068[0]
n_set
The parameters of the I_max current controller are also used.
I_max_U_ctrl Kp I_max_U_ctrl Tn
0.000...100000.000 0.000...50.000 [s]
p1345[D] (0.000) p1346D] (0.030)
ASC act
p1230[C]
I_act abs val
To pulse disable
To sequencer
OFF
p0347
DC brake ready
r1239.10
|I_set|
<6>
<6>
U_output
Kp
p1232
|I_act|
From I2t control [8014]
|I_act|
<2>

Mot t_de-excitat
0...20 [s]
p0347[M] (0)
Tn
r0072
MIN
To control
[5730]<7>
[6730]
To V/f characteristic [6300]
Braking response
n_act
I_ctrl Kp
0.000...100000.000 [V/A]
p1715[D] (0.000)
<5>
Pulse disable
n_set
p1234
DC brake fault response
I_ctrl Tn
0.00...1000.00 [ms]
p1717[D] (2.00)
<5>
<4>
DC brake active
t
|I_set|
r1239.8
p0347
<3>
p1232
|I_act|
t
p1233
<1> The DC braking current is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1).
<2> The de-magnetization time is determined during automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 3).
<3> As soon as the standstill threshold (p1226) has been reached, the DC current injection will be aborted prematurely.
<4> Signal r1239.8 is only set while the DC brake is active.
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Technology functions - DC brake (p0300 = 1xx)
6
fp_7017_54_eng.vsd
27.02.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 7017 -
Function diagrams
DCBRK time
0...3600 [s]
p1233[M] (0)
Fig. 2-110
2-998
<1>
DCBRK I_brake
0...10000 [A]
p1232[M] (0)
To setpoint channel
Frequency measurement
Sync f_target
n_limit neg eff
r3804
r1087
fset
7020 Synchronization

Fig. 2-111
[3030.8]
Sync DO No
1...62
p3801[D] (1)
Sync f_diff
Synchronizing
voltage
sensing
set
(measurement
via VSM10 with
PLL)
|U|set
Sync f_diff thresh

0.00...1.00 [Hz]
p3806[D] (0.10)
n_limit pos eff
-1
r1084
r3805
A07941
f_target < f_min
0
1
A07941
f_target > f_max
Start closed-loop phase control

Sync phase setp
-180.00...179.90 []
p3809[D] (0.00)
f
Actual voltage
sensing
KP TN

(closed-loop
control gating
unit)
Sync f_lim
0.00...1.00 [Hz]
p3811[D] (0.20)
To setpoint channel
[3080.5]
+
|U|
-p3811
Sync phase diff

r3808
Sync f_corr
Sync Ph_sync thrsh

1.00...20.00 []
p3813[D] (2.00)
Sync enable
(0)
Sequence
control
Sync U_diff thresh

0.00...10.00 [%]
p3815[D] (10.00)
Sync U_diff
r3814
&
Sync-line-drive in synchronism
r3819.2
Sync-line-drive frequency measurement active

r3819.5
2-999
Sync-line-drive closed-loop phase control active

r3819.6
Sync-line-drive synchronizing error

r3819.3
1
2
DO: VECTOR, VECTORMV
Technology functions - Synchronization
To motor control
6
fp_7020_51_eng.vsd
15.05.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 7020 -
Function diagrams
r3819.0
Sync-line-drive enabled
p3802[C]
Phase measurement/
closed-loop control
Sync act
0...1
p3800[D] (0)
r3812
Function diagrams
2.14
Function diagrams
7950 Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1)
2-1001
7951 Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1)
2-1002
7954 Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)
2-1003
7958 Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1)
2-1004
7960 DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1)
2-1005
2-1000

Tec_ctrl sel bit 0

(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
23
0.00 %
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
0000
p2222[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2223[C]
(0)
p2201[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 2

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2202[D] (20.00)
p2202[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 3

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2203[D] (30.00)
p2203[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 4

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2204[D] (40.00)
p2204[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 5

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2205[D] (50.00)
p2205[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 6

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2206[D] (60.00)
p2206[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 7

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2207[D] (70.00)
p2207[D]
Tec_ctrl No act
r2229
0001
0010
Tec_ctr FixVal sel
0011
r2225.0
0100
0101
0110
0111
Tec_ctrl fix val 8

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2208[D] (80.00)
p2208[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 9

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2209[D] (90.00)
p2209[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 10

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2210[D] (100.00)
p2210[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 11

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2211[D] (110.00)
p2211[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 12

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2212[D] (120.00)
p2212[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 13

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2213[D] (130.00)
p2213[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 14

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2214[D] (140.00)
p2214[D]
Tec_ctr FixVal eff

r2224
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1111
p2215[D]
2-1001
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORMV
Technology controller - Fixed value selection binary (r0108.16 = 1)
6
fp_7950_51_eng.vsd
06.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 7950 -
Function diagrams
1110
Tec_ctrl fix val 15

-200.00...200.00 [%]
For SERVO and VECTOR is valid:

p2215[D] (150.00)
Further condition: p2216[D] = 2 (factory setting).
<101> The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 s.
<1>
<1>
Tec_ctrl fix val 1

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2201[D] (10.00)
Refer to [1020.7]
<101>
20 0 ... 15
p2221[C]
7950 Fixed values, binary selection (r0108.16 = 1)

Fig. 2-112
p2220[C]
Tec_ctrl sel bit 0

7951 Fixed values, direct selection (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1)
p2220[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 1
p2221[C]
(0)
Tec_ctr FixVal sel
Tec_ctrl sel bit 2
r2225.0
p2222[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl sel bit 3
p2223[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl fix val 1

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2201[D] (10.00)
p2201[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 2

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2202[D] (20.00)
p2202[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 3

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2203[D] (30.00)
p2203[D]
Tec_ctrl fix val 4

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2204[D] (40.00)
0001
0010
0100
+
1000
p2204[D]
+
+
Tec_ctr FixVal eff

r2224
1
2
3
4
5
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Technology controller - Fixed value selection direct (r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1)
6
fp_7951_54_eng.vsd
06.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 7951 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
<101>
2-1002
Fig. 2-113
7954 Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)

Fig. 2-114
Tec_ctr mop config

p2230[D] (0110)
The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is not saved and after ON is entered using p2240.
The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved after OFF and after ON is entered using r2231.
0
1
Without initial rounding.

With initial rounding. The ramp-up/down time set is exceeded accordingly.
Non-volatile data save active
0
1
Non-volatile data save not activated.

The setpoint for the motorized potentiometer is saved in a non-volatile fashion (for p2230.0 = 1).
Data save active
Tec_ctrl mop raise
Refer to [1020.7]
<101>
Old value is kept
p2235[C]
(0)
Tec_ctrl Mop lower
<2>
p2236[C]
<2>
Tec_ctr mop t_r-up

0.0...1000.0 [s]
p2247[D] (10.0)
(0)
Tec_ctr mop t_r-dn

0.0...1000.0 [s]
p2248[D] (10.0)
0 0
Tec_ctrl mop max
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2237[D] (100.00)
y
p2237
Tec_ctr mop befRFG
0 1
r2245
x
Tec_ctrl mop min

-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2238[D] (-100.00)
y
t
Tec_ctr mop aftRFG

r2250
1 0
p2238
y=0
1 1
Tec_ctrl mop start
-200.00...200.00 [%]
p2240[D] (0.00)
<1>
r0046.0
[2634.0]
1 = OFF1 enable missing
1
2
3
Technology controller - Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1)
6
fp_7954_51_eng.vsd
22.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 7954 -
Function diagrams
2-1003
<1>
For p2230.0 = 0, this setpoint is entered after ON.
<2>
If initial rounding-off is active (p2230.2 = 1), the selected ramp-up/down times are exceeded accordingly.
Tec_ctrl mop mem

r2231
p2286[C]
<3>
(r0056.13)
p2296[C]
(2295)0
Refer to [1020.7]
<101>
Tec_ctrl pre-control
p2289[C]

7958 Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1)
Tec_reg config
p2252.0
(0)
p2295
Tec_ctr set aft. flt
(0)
r2262
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-up
0.00...650.00 s
p2257 (1.00)
Tec_ctrl set 2 scal

0.00...100.00 %
p2256 (100.00)
Tec_ctrl setpoint 2
Tec_ctrl set T
0.00...60.00 s
p2261 (0.00)
Tec_ctr error
r2273
<2>
(0)
<1>
<2>
<1>
p2263 = 1
p2254[C]
Tec_ctrl Tec_ctrl
Kp 0.000...1000.000 Tn 0.000...60.000 s
p2280 (1.000) p2285 (0.000)
Tec_ctr outp_sig
r2294
Technology controller limited

Tec_ctr ActVal max
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
p2267 (100.00)
Tec_ctr set a. RFG
Tec_ctr error
r2260
r2273
p2263 = 0
Tec_ctr ActValGain Tec_ctr ActVal Fct

0.00 ... 500.00
0 ...3
p2269 (100.00)
p2270 (0)
Tec_ctrl act T
0.00...60.00 s
p2265 (0.00)
Tec_ctr ActValScal
Tec_ctr ActVal inv
0 ...1
p2271 (0)
Tec_ctr act val
r2272
Tec_ctrl max_limit
-200.00...200.00 %
p2291 (100.00)
p2252.2
<2>
Tec_ctr max_limit p2297[C]

p2291
(2291)
p2264[C]
(0)
r2349.1
p2252.1
-1
F07426
Tec_ctrl t_ramp-dn
0.00...650.00 s
p2258 (1.00)
Tec_ctrl type
0 = D component in the actual value signal
1 = D component in the fault signal
p2263(0)
Tec_ctr ActVal min
-200.00 ... 200.00 [%]
p2268 (-100.00)
1
Tec_ctrl min_limit
-200.00...200.00 %
p2292 (0.00)
p2299[C]
p2252.2
(0)
<2>
<1>
Tec_ctrl T diff
0.000...60.000 s
p2274 (0.000)
Tec_ctr act a. flt
Tec_ctrl lim offs
Tec_ctr min_lim p2298[C]

p2292
(2292)
r2266
d
dt
<1>
<2>
<3>
<101>
Tec_ctrl enable
P, I and D components can be disabled by entering a zero.

Behavior can be changed via p2252.
I component stop, only when r2273 and r2294 in same direction.
The pre-assignment of the sampling time in p0115[6] is 4000.00 s.
1
2
3
Technology controller - Closed-loop control (r0108.16 = 1)
Technology controller de-activated
p2200[C]
(0)
6
fp_7958_51_eng.vsd
10.12.09 V04.03.01
r2349.0
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
Tec_ctrl up/down
0.00...100.00 s
p2293 (1.00)
8
- 7958 -
Function diagrams
Tec_reg Integ Stop
Tec_ctrl setpoint 1
p2253[C]
Tec_ctrl output scal

-100.00...100.00 %
p2295 (100.00)
Fig. 2-115
2-1004
Tec_ctrl Set1 scal

0.00...100.00 %
p2255 (100.00)
p0115[0] (250.00 s)
Prectrl P scal
p3521[0]
Vdc pre-ctrl P
p3520[0]
(0)
7960 DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1)

Fig. 2-116
Power controll
I = P/U
Vdc pre-ctrl P
p3520[3]
(0)
p3521[3]
Prectrl P scal
Vdc Z_set
DC link voltage controller
Vdc_ctrl Kp
p3560
p3511
[7984.6]
r5433
Kp
r0074
Tn
r3405.1
+
+
r0063
Vdc-ctrl active
C_DCL tot
p3422
Vdc Z_set
300.00...1600.00 V
<1> p3510 (600.00)
Vdc_ctrl Tn
p3562
+
+
[6320.8]
Enabling and linearisation
r3533
I_act ctrl stp
r3517
Vdc_act
r0070
[8950.1]
Vdc setpoint
r3554
Vdc_ctr I_comp
-1
r0088
[8964.6]
r3533
Inhib V_ctrl mode
2-1005
<1> Upon pulse enable, the dc link voltage is transmitted via a ramp (p3566) from the actual current value to the setpoint value p3510.
1
2
3
4
DO: VECTOR
Technology controller - DC link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1)
6
fp_7960_54_eng.vsd
16.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 7960 -
Function diagrams
p3513
Function diagrams
Signals and monitoring functions
2.15
Function diagrams
8010 Speed messages 1
2-1007
2-1008
8012 Torque messages, motor locked/stalled
2-1009
8013 Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1)
2-1010
8014 Thermal monitoring, power unit
2-1011
8016 Thermal monitoring, motor
2-1012
8017 Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
2-1013
2-1006

[3050.8]
<5> [3095.7]
n_limit neg eff

r1087
0
n_act smooth
[8011.1]
[8012.5]
[8013,1]
n_act unsmoothed
p0115[1] (<2>)
p0115[3] (<3>)
[2534.3]
[8021.1]
r2169
0...1 000 000 ms
p2153 (0)
p0115[3] (4000.00 s)
r2197.6
n_act smooth signal
[4710.7] <5>
p0115[1] (125.00 s)
|n_act| > n_max
r0063

Fig. 2-117
n_limit pos eff

r1084
F07901 "motor overspeed"

0.00...60 000.00 RPM
p2162[D] (600.00)
r0063[0]
[4715.7] <4>
Smoothing
n_thresh val 3
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2161[D] (5.00)
|n_act| < p2161
r2199.0
n_thresh val 1
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2141[D] (5.00)
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
n_hysteresis 3
1
1
[2537.3]
0...10 000 ms
p2156[D] (0)
f or n-comparison value
reached/exceeded
r2199.1
[2537.3]
0
0
0.000...300.000 RPM
p2142[D] (2.00)
n_hysteresis 1
<1>
|n_act|
p2155
r2197.1
[2534.3]
2-1007
<1> VECTOR: Calculated.

<2> VECTOR:
Depending on the drive unit (250 or 400 s).
<3> VECTOR:
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Speed signals 1
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2140[D] (90.00)
n_Hysterrese 2
<1>
6
fp_8010_54_eng.vsd
29.06.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8010 -
Function diagrams
n_thresh val 2
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2155[D] (900.00)
n_act
r2169
r2197.3
[2534.3]
[8010.2]
<1>
n_set for msg
<5>
<7>
n_hysteresis 3
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
<2>
p2151[C]
r1170
r2198.5
n_hysteresis 3
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
<2>
n_set for msg

p2151[C]
r1438
n_thresh val 3
0.00...210000.00 RPM
p2161[D] (5.00)
|n_set|
r2198.4

[5210.4]
p2161
[2536.3]
n_thresh val 4
0.00...210.000 RPM
p2163[D] (90.00)
+
n_act 2
[2536.3]
[3080.8]
<6>
n_set > 0
t_del_off n_i=n_se
0.0...500.0 ms
p2166[D] (200.0)
n_hysteresis 3
0.00...300.00 RPM
p2150[D] (2.00)
r2197.7
Enable alarm A07903
p2149.0[D]
[6060.3]
n_hysteresis 4
0.00...200.00 RPM
p2164[D] (2.00)
<2>
Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_off
r1407.2
p2154[C]
<1> Applies only if the function module "extended

signals/monitoring functions" is active
(r0108.17 = 1).
<2> VECTOR: Calculated.
<3> VECTOR:
<4> Evaluation only for:
Pulse enable and operating enable (r0899.2)
or OFF1
or OFF3
or rotating measurements
or friction characteristic plot.
<7> The value is displayed correctly only with
r0899.2 = 1 (Operation enabled).
t_on n_act=n_set
0.0...10 000.0 ms
p2167[D] (200.0)
[2534.3]
<4>
A07903 "Motor speed deviation"

A07903 is only signaled for p2149.0 = 1 and r2197.7 = 0.
Speed setpoint actual value deviation in tolerance t_on
r2199.4
[2537.3]
Ramp-up/ramp-down completed
RFG active
SET
(Q=1) Q
Priority
RESET
1 RESET
(Q=0) Q 2 SET
1 = RESET
p2148[C]
(0)
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Speed signals 2
6
fp_8011_54_eng.vsd
20.04.09 V04.03.01
r2199.5
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
[2537.3]
[8021.1]
8
- 8011 -
Function diagrams
n_act smooth signal
p0115[3] (4000.00 s)
2-1008
Fig. 2-118
p0115[3] (<3>)
8012 Torque messages, motor locked/stalled

Fig. 2-119
0.0...1 000.0 ms
p2195[D] (800.0)
p0115[3] (4000.00 s)
p0115[3] (<5>)
Ramp-up completed
r2199.5
Ramp-function generator operating
[2537.7]
<2>
0.00...99 999.00 Nm
p2174 (5.13)
<2>
Torque setpoint < p2174
M_set total
[6060.8]
p2177 (1.000)
Control type
p1300
[2522.7]
Mot stall enab neg
p2144[C]
(0)
[5610.5]
r0079
[2520.7] r1406.8
r1407.7
M_set total
r0079[0]
Motor locked detection or motor locked monitoring function

(not for closed-loop torque control) 0.000...65.000 s
p1545 Travel to fixed stop
r2198.10
[2536.3]
<4>
Mot block n_thresh

0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2175 (120.00)
M_set total, smooth

r0079[1]
x1
<2>
r0079
x2
<4>
[6060.8]
r1538
<4>
&
r0056.13
[2526.6]
Torque utilization < p2194
x1
y
[%]
[Nm]
Stall detection or stall monitoring

(not for V/f control and not for p0300 = 5)
Only VECTOR
r2199.11
0.000...1.000 s
p2178 (0.010)
<3>
Speed adaptation, speed deviation
[2537.3]
0
x1x 100 %
x2
r1408.11
2 % von p2194
[6730.3]
M_utilization smooth
p0045
100 ms
[6730.3]
M_utilization
r0033
Motor stalled
r1408.12
Motor stalled
r2198.7
[2536.3]
p3237[D]
F07902
p3238[D](3.0)
r0081
n_act n_cont. In
[3080.4]
r1443
2-1009
<1> The torque setpoint and the torque limits are determined by p1532
(M_max offset). As a rule, M_max offset = 0.
<2> Only for SINAMICS S120 with SERVO (r0107 = 11).
<3> Only for vector control with encoder.
<4> Only for VECTOR (r0107 = 12).
<5> VECTOR: Depending on the drive unit (1000 or 1600 s).
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Torque signals, motor locked/stalled
[6040.2]
n_diff. Mod./Ext
r2199.7
0
F07937
p3236[D]
6
fp_8012_54_eng.vsd
23.04.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8012 -
Function diagrams
Actual torque limit
r1539
<2>
[5650.8]
F07900
r0056.12
x2
r2198.6
[2536.3]
<20
I_limit/M_limit act
0.00...100.00 %
p2194 (90.00)
p0045
<4>
r2169
Requested
torque
[Nm]
[6640.8]
r1539
[6640.8]
M_max upper
effective
r1538
<2>
[5650.8]
Motor locked
[8010.2]
I_limit U_output act
M_max Offset
p1532
<2> [5620.7]
<1> [5630.7]
n_act smooth signal
x1 > x2 = y = 1
(positive torque requested)
n_act
smooth
signal
< p2175
2 % of p2174
[5610.5]
M_set total
20
&
p2149.1
A07926 "Envelop characteristic, parameter not value"
r0080
[5730.1] <3>
[6714.8] <2>

8013 Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1)
M_thresh 3 lower
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2190[D] (0.00)
M_thresh 3 upper
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2189[D] (10 000 000.00)
Load monitoring response

p2181[D](0)
p2193[D] (1)
Tolerance
bandwidth
<2>
0
0.00...65.00 s
p2192[D] (10.00)
A07920 ... A07922
r2198.11
M_thresh 2 lower
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2188[D] (0.00)
M_thresh 1 lower
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2186[D] (0.00)
M_thresh 2 upper
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2187[D] (10 000 000.00)
Evaluation
[2536.3]
F07923 ... F07925
r2198.12
[2536.3]
M_thresh 1 upper
0.00...20 000 000.00 Nm
p2185[D] (10 000 000.00)
(0)
Load monitoring disabled
(1)
A07920 "Torque too low"
(2)
A07921 "Torque too high"
(3)
A07922 "Torque outside tolerance"
(4)
F07923 "Torque too low"

<1>
F07924 "Torque too high"
<1>
n_act smooth signal

0
r2169
n [RPM]
[8010.2]
1
n_threshold 1
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p3231[D] (150.00) p2182[D](150.00)
p2149.1
(5)
n_threshold 3
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2184[D](1500.00)
(6)
<2>
n_act load monitor
p3230[C]
n_threshold 2
0.00...210 000.00 RPM
p2183[D](900.00)
F07925 "Torque outside tolerance"

<1>
F07928 "Encoder falling off"
<2>
(0)
<2>
Load monitor Encoder falling off

p3232[C]
(1)
<2>
<1> The response to these faults can be defined.
<3> Only for SERVO.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1)
6
fp_8013_54_eng.vsd
04.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8013 -
Function diagrams
M_act
2-1010
Fig. 2-120
p0115[6] (4000.00 s)
M [Nm]
Control Unit
Thermal monitoring for the power unit
Maximum power unit temperature
Tmax heatsink
p0115[3] (2000.00 s)
1 = Fault thermal overload in power unit
r2135.13
[2548.2]
Temperature measurement
8014 Thermal monitoring, power unit

Fig. 2-121
Power unit
Max
Faults "power unit overtemperature"

F30004 inverter heatsink
F30024 thermal model <3>
F30025 chip F30035 air intake
F30036 electronics module
F30037 rectifier
0
Power unit
temperatures [C]
r0037 [0...19]
<1>
Pulse frequency
p1800
5 C
+
1
<2>
I_act abs. value
DRIVECLiQ
r0068[0]
[6714.5]
<2>
100 %
Power unit overload
(0...100 %)
<2>
r0036
I_act abs. value

r0068
[5730.4]
[8850.4]
[8950.4]
<2> <5>
Alarms "power unit overtemperature"

A05000 inverter heatsink
A05001 chip
A05002 air intake
A05003 electronics module
A05004 rectifier
A05006 chip to heatsink <4>
it model
power unit
F30005 "Power unit overload" <2>

0
PU Tmodel_A_thresh
r0293
<1> <3>
<2>
A05007 Power unit overtemperature chip to heatsink <3>

1
1 = Alarm, thermal overload, power unit
r2135.15
[2548.2]
Overload response
Alarm threshold
it overload power unit 0...100 %
p0294 (95 %)
<1>
1
A07805 "Power unit overload" <2>
2-1011
<1> Not for A_INF, B_INF and S_INF.

<2> Not for Basic Line Modules Chassis.
<3> Only for Power Unit Chassis
<4> Only for Power Unit Blocksize
1
2
3
4
DO: A_INF, B_INF, S_INF, SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal monitoring, power unit
6
fp_8014_54_eng.vsd
27.02.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8014 -
Function diagrams
Power unit overload response

p0290
<2>
LT I_rated
r0207
Rated motor temperature rise
MotTMod T_iron
r0631[M]
Mot temp_sensortyp
p0601[M]
Mot temp_sensor
p0600[M]
only
for
KTY
from encoder 1
from encoder 2

von Geber 3
from Motor Modules
or CUA31
Mot Temperatur [C]
p0603
(0)
e.g. r4105 from TM31

Mot temperatur [C]
0 = No sensor
0
1
3
11
(0)
4 = Bimetal NC
contact alarm
with time step
for MM only
<6>
21
11 = Evaluation of
several
temperature
channels (BICO)
p0610[M]
p0610 = 0: No response, only alarm, no reduction of I_max
p0610 = 1: Alarm and reduction of I_max and fault
p0610 = 2: Alarm and fault, no reduction of I_max
Mot_temp fault thresh

p0605[M]
<4>
&
<7>
Mot Temp_sensortyp
r4620[0]
r4620[1] r4620[2]
Fault response
Suppress fault
p0610 = 0
Mot temp_sensortyp
KTY sensor type
Temperature channel
(threshold not applicable for PTC)
1
2
3
4
p4600[E] p4601[E] p4602[E] p4603[E]
channel
MIN
11 =1 PTC alarm
2
3
4
p4610[M]
12
= PTC p4611[M]
alarm andp4612[M]
time stepp4613[M]
20 = KTY84
Configuration
30 = Bimetal NC contact fault
0 = No sensor
31 = Bimetal
NC contact alarm
p0606[M]
1650
<8> <1>
<5>
Sensor type KTY
<3>
32 =10
Bimetal
contact
= PTCNC
fault
alarm & time step
11 = PTC alarm
PTC
12 = PTC alarm and time step

1
31 = Bimetal NC contact alarm

32 = Bimetal NC contact
alarm & time step
r2135.12
[2548.2]
A07910
"Motor overtemperature"
0
Mot temp_sens time
p0607[M]

<1> For KTY and PTC, the value p0606 = 0 has a different meaning:
KTY: 0 The output of the timer is always switched out (logical 0)
PTC: 0 Delay time = 0 s
<2> As for the switch-in delay, refer to [1024]. p0607 = 0 suppresses fault F07016.
<3> For KTY and "No sensor", temperature as defined in the model.
<4> Applies only for VECTOR.
<5> P0606 does not work for alarms via p0616.
<6> p0601 = 5 can only be evaluated if r0192.15 = 1 and p0600 = 11; PT100 is calibrated via p0624.
<7> The assignment of temperature channels 1 4 depends on the hardware used.
<8> The relevant rated response temperature (C) depends on the temperature sensor chosen by the motor manufacturer.
F07011
"Motor overtemperature"
&
1
[8017.8]
20 = KTY84
30 = Bimetal NC contact fault
1
2
3
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal monitoring, motor
I_max reduction
[1690.1][6640.2]
&
Mot_tempAlrmThresh
p0604[M]
Mot temp alarm 1
p0616[M]
r4620[3]
Configuration
Mot temp_sensortyp
0 = No sensor
10 = PTC
fault
Temperature
p0610 = 1
r4620[3]
Mot Temp_sensortyp
r4620[0]
r4620[1] r4620[2]
3 = KTY84 & PTC,

for encoder only
20
(0)
p0609[4]
2 = KTY84
10 = Evaluation of
several
temperature
channels
SME12x)
p0608[4]
Mot temperatur [C]
1 = PTC alarm and

time
5 = PT100
10
MAX
MotTMod T_copper
r0632[M]
MotTMod T_rotor
r0633[M]
Model tracking
[9576.7]
1.00 s
-140 C
250 C
r2135.14
[2548.2]
<2>
T
A07016
"Motor temperature
sensor fault, fault"
A07015
"Motor temperature
sensor fault alarm"
A07820 "Temperature sensor not connected"
6
fp_8016_54_eng.vsd
07.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8016 -
Function diagrams
8016 Thermal monitoring, motor
Thermal
3-mass-model
(for induction motors
only)
Mot T_on rotor

p0628[M]
[4704.8]
r0035
MotTMod T_environ
r0630[M]
Mot T_on iron

p0626[M]
Mot T_on stator
p0627[M]
[4704.8]
Fig. 2-122
2-1012
Mot T_environment
p0625[M]
[4704.8]
Mot_temp
Calculated motor temperatures
8017 Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)

Fig. 2-123
1.00 s
I2t mot mod thresh

p0615[M]
I2t motor model activate
p0612.0[M] (0)
1
[8016.6]
0
Mot I_standstill
p0318[M]
Thermal
I2t motor model
(only for synchronous
machine)
I_act abs val unsmoothed

r0068[0]
Model
I2t mot mod T

p0611[M]
Mot temp
[8016.5] r0035
<1>
r0034 =
Model
- 40C
p0605 - 40C
x 100 [%]
Motor utilization
r0034
MotTempFaultThresh
p0605[M]
Mot T_ambient
p0625[M]
<2>
A07012
"I2t-motor model overtemperature"
6
fp_8017_54_eng.vsd
15.05.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8017 -
Function diagrams
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Signals and monitoring functions - Thermal I2t motor model (PEM, p0300 = 2xx)
2-1013
<1> Only if there is a temperature sensor (p0600 > 0 and p0601 = 2, 3, or with p0601 = 10 and p4600 ... p4603 = 20).
<2> Only if <1> are not met.
Function diagrams
Diagnostics
2.16
Diagnostics
Function diagrams
8060 Fault buffer
2-1015
8065 Alarm buffer
2-1016
8070 Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129)
2-1017
8075 Fault/alarm configuration
2-1018
8134 Measuring sockets
2-1019
2-1014

8060 Fault buffer

Fig. 2-124
LED "RDY" [= red for fault]
1 ms
System time
r0969 [ms]
Background
Actual fault code
Actual fault value
r2131
r3131
Refer to [1020.7]
0 = "No fault present"
<3>
Fault code
Fault value
Fault time
"come"
Fault time
"removed"
Fault Drive
Compo_
Object
no fault
triggernd
Diag_attr
fault
Fault times
III
32 bit counter,
free running
[8065.1]
Operating time
Fault 1
r0945[0]
r0949[0] [I32]
r2133[0] [Float]
r0948[0] [ms]
r2130[0] [d]
r2109[0] [ms]
r2136[0] [d]
r3115[0]
r3120[0]
r3122[0]
Fault 2
r0945[1]
r0949[1] [I32]
r2133[1] [Float]
r0948[1] [ms]
r2130[1] [d]
r2109[1] [ms]
r2136[1] [d]
r3115[1]
r3120[1]
r3122[1]
16 bit counter
Fault case
Actual
fault case
RESET
p3981
Acknowledge faults
POWER ON
p2102 ... p2105
r0945[7]
r0949[7] [I32]
r2133[7] [Float]
r0948[7] [ms]
r2130[7] [d]
r2109[7] [ms]
r2136[7] [d]
Fault 1
r0945[8]
r0949[8] [I32]
r2133[8] [Float]
r0948[8] [ms]
r2130[8] [d]
r2109[8] [ms]
r2136[8] [d]
r3115[8]
r3120[8]
r3122[8]
Fault 2
r0945[9]
r0949[9] [I32]
r2133[9] [Float]
r0948[9] [ms]
r2130[9] [d]
r2109[9] [ms]
r2136[9] [d]
r3115[9]
r3120[9]
r3122[9]
Fault 8
r3115[7]
<1>
r3120[7]
<1>
r3122[7]
<1>
Faults Acknowledging
Acknowledge faults
r2138.7
1. Acknowledged
fault case
p0952 = 0:
Fault buffer
delated
Delete fault buffer

r0945 = 0
r0948 = 0
r0949 = 0
r2109 = 0
r2130 = 0
r2133 = 0
r2136 = 0
Fault goes
p2107 External fault 2
Fault 8
r0945[15]
r0949[15] [I32] r0948[15] [ms]

r2133[15] [Float] r2130[15] [d]
r2109[15] [ms]
r3115[15] r3120[15] r3122[15]
r2136[15] [d]
External fault 3
Fault 1
r0945[56]
r0949[56] [I32] r0948[56] [ms]

r2133[56] [Float] r2130[56] [d]
r2109[56] [ms]
r3115[56] r3120[56] r3122[56]
r2136[56] [d]
Fault 2
r0945[57]
r0949[57] [I32] r0948[57] [ms]

r2133[57] [Float] r2130[57] [d]
r2109[57] [ms]
r3115[57] r3120[57] r3122[57]
r2136[57] [d]
Fault buffer
change
r0944
acknowl.
POWER ON
[2546.3] r2138.14
p2108, p3110 ... p3112
Automatic <2>
III
RESET
Fault case
p2106 External fault 1
p2147 (CU) = 1
16 bit counter,
free running
Fault comes
[2546.3] r2138.13
Fault case
count
p0952
III
RESET
comes
Fault buffer change [8065.6]
[2546.1] r2138.15
7. Acknowledged
fault case
[oldest]
r3114.10
r0945[63]
r0949[63] [I32] r0948[63] [ms]

r2133[63] [Float] r2130[63] [d]
r2109[63] [ms]
r3115[63] r3120[63] r3122[63]
r2136[63] [d]
2-1015
Fault active
r2139.3
[2548.2]
6
fp_8060_51_eng.vsd
21.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8060 -
Diagnostics
Fault responses to the sequence control [2610]
<1> This fault is overwritten when "more recent" faults occur (with the exception of "safety faults").
<2> Refer to the list manual, index entry "Fault buffer - save upon power OFF".
<3> The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to the status signal in r2139).
Function diagrams
Fault 8
1
2
DO: All objects
Diagnostics - Fault buffer
Control Unit
Fault Present
<1>
Background
Alarm code
Alarm value
Refer to [1020.7]
Alarm time
"come"
Alarm time
"removed"
Compo_no Diag_attr
alarm
alarm
Operating time
[8060.1]
8065 Alarm buffer
p2112
Alarm times
External alarm 1
Counter
16 bit
r2122[0]
r2124[0] [I32]
r2134[0] [Float]
r2123[0] [ms]
r2145[0] [d]
r2125[0] [ms]
r2146[0] [d]
r3121[0]
r3123[0]
Alarm 2
r2122[1]
r2124[1] [I32]
r2134[1] [Float]
r2123[1] [ms]
r2145[1] [d]
r2125[1] [ms]
r2146[1] [d]
r3121[1]
r3123[1]
[2546.3] r2138.10
p2116
III
RESET
p2111 = 0:
Alarm buffer is deleted
RESET
External alarm 2
[2546.3] r2138.11
p2117
External alarm 3
[2546.3] r2138.12
r2122[7]
r2124[7] [I32]
r2134[7] [Float]
r2123[7] [ms]
r2145[7] [d]
r2125[7] [ms]
r2146[7] [d]
r3121[7]
r3123[7]
Alarm 1
(most recent)
r2122[8]
r2124[8] [I32]
r2134[8] [Float]
r2123[8] [ms]
r2145[8] [d]
r2125[8] [ms]
r2146[8] [d]
r3121[8]
r3123[8]
Alarm 2
r2122[9]
r2124[9] [I32]
r2134[9] [Float]
r2123[9] [ms]
r2145[9] [d]
r2125[9] [ms]
r2146[9] [d]
r3121[9]
r3123[9]
Alarm 56
(oldest)
r2122[63]
r2124[63] [I32] r2123[63] [ms] r2125[63] [ms]

r3121[63] r3123[63]
r2134[63] [Float] r2145[63] [d]
r2146[63] [d]
Alarm 8
(most recent)
Alarms
counter
p2111
Alarm comes
Alarm 1
(oldest)
Alarm history
Delete alarm buffer

r2122 = 0
r2123 = 0
r2124 = 0
r2125 = 0
r2134 = 0
r2145 = 0
r2146 = 0
POWER ON
Control Unit
Warning Present

r3114.9
16 bit counter,
free running
Alarm comes
Alarm number
r2110
Alarm goes
Alarm present
III
RESET
Alarm buffer change

r2121
Alarm buffer
change
r2139.7
POWER ON
[2548.2]
16 bit counter,
free running
Fault buffer change [8060.8]
Fault/alarm buffer changes from
other drive objects
<1> The buffer parameters are updated cyclically in the background (see status signal in r2139).
1
2
DO: All objects
Diagnostics - Alarm buffer
III
RESET
Sum, buffer changed

r2120
POWER ON
6
fp_8065_51_eng.vsd
21.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8065 -
Function diagrams
0 = "No alarm present"
Diagnostics
2-1016
Fig. 2-125
Actual alarm code

r2132
8070 Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129)

Fig. 2-126
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
Fault/alarm trigger word
(e.g. as trigger condition to record traces)
SAelect fault/alarm code
for trigger
p2128
[0]
r2129
0. Message/signal present
0. Fault/alarm code
[1]
1. Fault/alarm code
[15]
15. Fault/alarm code
r2129.0
r2129.1
r2129.15
Setting, fault/alarm trigger
6
fp_8070_51_eng.vsd
18.08.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8070 -
Function diagrams
Diagnostics
2-1017
1
2
3
DO: All objects
Diagnostics - Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129)
p2100
Changing the message type - fault <==> alarm for maximum 20 faults/alarms <1>
p2101
p2118
p2119
8075 Fault/alarm configuration
[0]
0. Fault code
[0]
Fault response
0 = NONE
[0]
0. Fault/alarm code
[0]
Fault/alarm type
1 = Fault (F)
[1]
1. Fault code
[1]
Fault response
1 = OFF1
[1]
1. Fault/alarm code
[1]
Fault/alarm type
2 = Alarm (A)
2 = OFF2
3 = No message(N)
3 = OFF3
4 = STOP1
5 = STOP2
6 = IASC/DCBRAKE
[19]
19. Fault code
[19]
Fault response
7 = ENCODER (p0491)
[19]
19. Fault/alarm code
[19]
Fault/alarm type

Changing the acknowledge mode for maximum 20 faults <1>

p2126
[0]
[1]
0. Fault code
1. Fault code
p2127
[0]
Acknowledge mode
1 = Acknowledgment is only possible using POWER ON
[1]
Acknowledge mode
2 = Acknowledgment IMMEDIATELY after the cause has been removed.

3 = Acknowledge only when the PULSES ARE INHIBITED.
[19]
19. Fault code
[19]
Acknowledge mode
<1> The fault response, acknowledge mode and message type for all faults and alarms are set to meaningful default values in the factory setting.
Changes that may be required are only possible in specific value ranges specified by SIEMENS.
When the message type is changed, the supplementary information is tranferred from fault value r0949 to alarm value r2124 and vice versa.
1
2
DO: All objects
Diagnostics - Fault/alarm configuration
6
fp_8075_51_eng.vsd
07.09.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8075 -
Function diagrams
Changing the fault response for maximum 20 faults <1>
Diagnostics
2-1018
Fig. 2-127
Background
Refer to [1020.7]
-100 000.00...427.9E9 %
p0779[0] (100.00)
p0110[0] (125.00 s)
y [V]
4.98
[%]
r0772[0]
p0784[0]
y2
y1
0.00...4.98 V
p0778[0] (2.49)
p0771[0]
x1
(4.98 V) y [V]
P2
(2.49 V)
x1
-10
Offset
-4.98...4.98 V
p0783[0] (0.00)
Reference quantities
p200x
5 x [V]
4.98
[V]
5 10 x
4.98
[V]
-5
-100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...427.9E9 %

p0777[1] (0.00)
p0779[1] (100.00)
y [V]
4.98
[%]
r0772[1]
p0784[1]
y2
y1
0.00...4.98 V
p0778[1] (2.49)
p0771[1]
x2
P2
(2.49 V)
-5
5 x [V]
4.98
Scaling
[V]
5 10 x
4.98
[V]
-5
y [V]
4.98
y
p0784[2]
y2
y1
0.00...4.98 V
p0778[2] (2.49)
Offset
-4.98...4.98 V
p0783[2] (0.00)
(100 %) x [%] y
4.98
-5
5 x [V]
4.98
r0774[2]
[V]
Limit
P1
x
-10
Measuring socket
T2
D
A
y [V]
Dimension unit
per volt <4>
r0786[2]
1
2
3
DO: CU_G, CU_CX32, CU_GM, CU_I, CU_S
Diagnostic - Measuring sockets
6
fp_8134_51_eng.vsd
25.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8134 -
Diagnostics
2-1019
y
x
<1> Only for measuring equipment with Ri 1 M
Scaling
<2>
<2> With the factory setting, input values
-10 -5
5 10 x
from -100...100 % result in output voltages from 0...4.98 V.
4.98
<3> The input signals are determined by the reference quantities p200x (100 % corresponds to
[V]
p200x). The calculated normalization is indicated via r0786.
<4> Example: If a speed signal is entered via p0071 and r0786 indicates 100.0, a speed change of 100 RPM results in an output voltage change of 1.0 V.
<1>
0..0.40.98
M V
Function diagrams
x2
P2
(2.49 V)
<1>
0..0.40.98 V
[%]
r0772[2]
x1
(4.98 V) y [V]
Measuring socket
T1
<2>
-100 000.00...100 000.00 % -100 000.00...427.9E9 %

p0777[2] (0.00)
p0779[2] (100.00)
0.00...4.98 V
p0780[2] (4.98)
Dimension unit
per volt
<4>
r0786[1]
y [V]
4.98
-10
p0771[2]
r0774[1]
Limit
(100 %) x [%] y
-10
Offset
-4.98...4.98 V
p0783[1] (0.00)
P1
<1>
0..0.40.98 V
y
-10
x1
(4.98 V) y [V]
Measuring socket
T0
<2>
[%]
0.00...4.98 V
p0780[1] (4.98)
Dimension unit
per volt <4>
r0786[0]
y [V]
4.98
+
x
Scaling
r0774[0]
Limit
x2
x1x 100 %
x2
-5
(100 %) x [%] y
x
y
x2
P1
0
<3>
x
0.00...4.98 V
p0780[0] (4.98)
8134 Measuring sockets

Fig. 2-128
-100 000.00...100 000.00 %

p0777[0] (0.00)
Function diagrams
Data sets
2.17
Data sets
Function diagrams
8560 Command data sets (CDS)
2-1021
8565 Drive data sets (DDS)
2-1022
8570 Encoder data sets (EDS)
2-1023
8575 Motor data sets (MDS)
2-1024
8580 Power unit data sets (PDS)
2-1025
2-1020

Fig. 2-129
8560 Command data sets (CDS)

Example:
Change over Command Data Set
CDS0 --> CDS1
BI: p0810 = "0"
CDS0 selected
r0836.0 = 0
BI: p0810 = "1"

CDS1 selected
r0836.0 = 1
CDS0 effective
r0050.0 = 0
Copy CDS, source

p0809[0] (0)
Not relevant
Copy CDS, target

p0809[1] (1)
Refer to [1020.7]
Copy CDS, start

p0809[2] (0)
Drive n
CDS1 effective
r0050.0 = 1
Drive 2
Drive 1
CDS selected
r0836
r0836.0
r0836.1
t
CDS select., bit 0
p0810
<1>
CDS count
p0170 (1, 2)
(0)
CDS select., bit 1

p0811
CDS3
(0)
CDS2
CDS effective
CDS1
r0050
r0050.0
r0050.1
CDS0
6
fp_8560_54_eng.vsd
20.10.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8560 -
Function diagrams
1
2
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Data sets - Command Data Sets (CDS)
Data sets
2-1021
<1> For SERVO, the following applies: Min / Max / Factory setting: 1 / 2 / 2.
For VECTOR, the following applies: Min / Max / Factory setting: 2 / 4 / 2.
Copy DDS, source

p0819[0] (0)
p0186[0...n] (MDS number)

p0187[0...n] (enc 1 EDS number)
Copy DDS, start

p0819[2] (0)
8565 Drive data sets (DDS)
p0188[0...n] (enc 2 EDS number) <2>

p0189[0...n] (enc 3 EDS number) <2>
Drive n
EDS (Encoder Data Set)
Drive 2
r0838
r0838[0]
r0049[1]
r0838[2]
r0838[3]
Drive 1
MDS (Motor Data Set)
Motor data set MDS selected

Encoder 1 encoder data set EDS selected
Encoder 2 encoder data set EDS selected <2>
Encoder 3 encoder data set EDS selected <2>
DDS selected
Select DDS bit 0

r0837
r0837.0
r0837.1
r0837.2
r0837.3
r0837.4
DDS number
p0180 (1)
p0820[C]
(0)
Select DDS bit 1
DDS31
p0821[C]
(0)
A07530 "Drive data set does not exist"
Select DDS bit 2
DDS effective
DDS1
p0822[C]
r0051
r0051.0
r0051.1
r0051.2
r0051.3
r0051.4
(0)
<1>
DDS0
Select DDS bit 3

p0823[C]
(0)
r0049
r0049[0]
r0049[1]
r0049[2]
r0049[3]
Select DDS bit 4

p0824[C]
(0)
Motor data set MDS effective

Encoder 1 encoder data set EDS effective
Encoder 2 encoder data set EDS effective <2>
Encoder 3 encoder data set EDS effective <2>
<1> A BICO interconnection to a parameter which is part of a drive data set always influences the currently effective data set.
1
2
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, TM41
Data sets - Drive Data Sets, DDS
6
fp_8565_54_eng.vsd
25.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8565 -
Function diagrams
DDS (Drive Data Set)
Refer to [1020.7]
Data sets
2-1022
Fig. 2-130
Not relevant
Copy DDS, target

p0819[1] (1)
p0820[C]
<1>
(0)
p0186[D] (MDS number)
8570 Encoder data sets (EDS)

Fig. 2-131
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
p0187[D] (Enc 1 EDS number)
p0824[C]
(0)
EDS0
EDS1
EDS15
Not configured
EDS count
p0140 (1)
EDS0
EDS1
EDS15
EDS15 - Encoder Data Set 15

Not configured
...
p0141[0] =
EDS1
p0400[0]
EDS for encoder 1
p0400[E]
15
99
p0425[E]
E = p0187[D]
Assigned parameters
for position sensing for encoder n
[4704]
for speed actual value sensing for
encoder n:
[4710] for SERVO
[4715] for VECTOR, VECTORGL,
VECTORMV, VECTORSL
0
1
EDS for encoder 2
p0400[E]
15
99
p0425[E]
E = p0188[D]
EDS15

Component number of the Sensor
Module
EDS0
EDS0
EDS1
EDS15
Not configured
0
1
EDS for encoder 3
p0400[E]
15
99
p0425[E]
p0425[0]
E = p0189[D]
r0838[1] Encoder 1 EDS selected

F07502 "Encoder Data Set EDS not configured"
2-1023
1
2
3
4
Data sets - Encoder Data Sets, EDS
6
fp_8570_51_eng.vsd
27.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8570 -
Data sets
F07510 "Identical encoder in the drive data set"

<1> Encoder errors always refer to the currently active Encoder Data Set.
Function diagrams
r0049[1] Encoder 1 EDS effective

(0)
1
Application
p0186[D] (MDS number)
Drive
8575 Motor data sets (MDS)
p0824[C]
(0)
DO
r0830
r0830.0
r0830.1
r0830.2
r0830.3
K1H
Copy MDS, target

p0139[1] (0)
Copy MDS, source
Copy MDS, start
p0139[0] (0) MDS count
p0139[2] (0)
DO
r0830.15
K2H
0V
Motor
Module
Mot_chng fdbk sig
p0130 (1)
Application
p0828[C]
Motor changeover
MDS15
K1
K2
K1H
K2H
Mot_chng fdbk ZSW

MDS1
r0832
MDS0
<1>
r0832.0
Request
pulse enable
p0826[0] Motor number

p0827[0] Bit number
r0832.1
r0832.2
r0832.3
p0833.1 (0)
Drive
Application
1
MDS selected
r0838[0]
Pulse cancellation
Feedback signal, contactor 0

p0831[0]
DI
M1
3~
K2
M2
3~
K1

p0831[1]
DI

p0831[2]
DI
K2
DI
K1

p0831[3]
MDS effective
r0049[0]
MDS_chngov ZSW
r0832.15
r0835
r0835.0

p0831[15]
DI
<1> The following applies for the changeover of motor data sets:
SERVO and VECTOR: The thermal motor model of motors with the same motor number is identical.
VECTORGL and VECTORMV: The thermal monitoring of motors with the same motor number is identical.
An unequal bit number means that the motor must be changed over.
1
2
3
4
Data sets - Motor Data Sets, MDS
6
fp_8575_51_eng.vsd
27.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 8575 -
Function diagrams
Motor selection
Data sets
2-1024
Fig. 2-132
4000.00 s
p0833.0 (0)
p0820[C]
De-activate power unit 1 (PDS0)
8580 Power unit data sets (PDS)

Fig. 2-133
Not relevant
Refer to [1020.7]
pxxxx[0]
(1)
LT_comp act/inact
r0126[0]
De-activate power unit 8 (PDS7)

pxxxx[7]
(1)
LT_compo act/de-act
p0125 [P]
0 = De-activate component
1 = Activate component
Word 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PDS0
PDS7
PDS1
PDS0
6
fp_8580_54_eng.vsd
28.07.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 8580 -
Function diagrams
LT_comp act/inact
r0126[7]
Data sets
2-1025
1
2
DO: SERVO, VECTOR
Data sets - Power unit Data Sets, PDS
PDS7
Function diagrams
Terminal Board 30 (TB30)
2.18
Function diagrams
9100 Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3)
2-1027
9102 Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3)
2-1028
9104 Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1)
2-1029
9106 Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1)
2-1030
2-1026


p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
+24 V
DI 0 DI 3
inverted
X424.+
r4023
X424.M
X424.M
<1>
M
X481.1
DI 0
DI 0 DI 3
r4022
1 = Simulation on
p4095.0

Fig. 2-134
X424.+
r4021.0
r4023.0
r4022.0
p4096.0
24 V
p4095.1
r4021.1
X481.2
DI 1
r4023.1
r4022.1
p4096.1
p4095.2
r4021.2
X481.3
DI 2
r4023.2
r4022.2
p4096.2
r4021.3
DI 3
r4023.3
r4022.3
p4096.3
2-1027
<1> M electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M.
<1>
1
2
3
4
DO: TB30
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3)
6
fp_9100_51_eng.vsd
24.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9100 -
Function diagrams
X481.4
p4095.3
5V
X424.+
X424.+

9102 Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3)
X424.M
<1>
p4048.0
TB30 S_src DO 0
0
p4030
(0)
X424.M
DO 0 (X481.5)
r4047.0
DO 0
X481.5
DO 1
X481.6
DO 2
X481.7
DO 3
X481.8
24 V
p4048.1
DO 1 (X481.6)
r4047.1
TB30 S_src DO 1
0
p4031
(0)
p4048.2
DO 2 (X481.7)
r4047.2
TB30 S_src DO 2
0
p4032
(0)
5V
p4048.3
DO 3 (X481.8)
r4047.3
TB30 S_src DO 3
0
p4033
(0)
M
<1>
<1> M electrically isolated to the internal CU reference potential M.
1
2
3
4
DO: TB30
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Digital outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 3)
6
fp_9102_51_eng.vsd
24.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9102 -
Function diagrams
+24 V
2-1028
Fig. 2-135
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
p4099[1] (4000.00 s)
Fig. 2-136

Hardware
smoothing 100 s
X482.1
X482.2
AI 0
D
<2>
-11...+11 V
-11.000...11.000 V -11.000...11.000 V
p4057[0] (0.000)
p4059[0] (10.000)
<3>
Offset
[V]
-20.000...20.000 V
p4063[0] (0.000) r4052[0]
+
+
p4097.0
Simulation mode
-11.000...11.000 V
p4098[0] (0.000)
y [%]
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[0] (100.00)
y2
x
[%]
y
x2 x
[V]
x1
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[0] (0.00)
y1
Scaling
p200x
Enable
p4067[0]
Smoothing
0.0...1 000.0 ms
p4053[0] (0.0)
(0)
p4066 [0]
0
<1> When interconnected
further, the output
signals are referred to
the reference
quantities
p2000 ... r2004
(100 %
p200x).
-11...+11 V
(1)
AI 1
D
+
+
x1 x x 2
100 %
0
0%
r4055[0]
1
<1>
-11.000...11.000 V -11.000...11.000 V
p4057[1] (0.000)
p4059[1] (10.000)
<3>
Offset
[V]
-20.000...20.000 V
p4063[1] (0.000) r4052[1]
x2
p4097.1
Simulation mode
-11.000...11.000 V
p4098[1] (0.000)
y [%]
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[1] (100.00)
y2
x
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[1] (0.00)
[%]
x2 x
[V]
x1
y1
Scaling
p2000...r2004
Enable
p4067[1]
(0)
Smoothing
0.0...1 000.0 ms
p4053[0] (0.0)
-1
1
2
3
DO: TB30
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 1)
y = x if
|y - x| > p4068
otherwise y = y(old)
p4069[1]
x2
(1)
0%
r4055[1]
y
1
6
fp_9104_51_eng.vsd
21.06.05 V04.03.01
<1>
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9104 -
Function diagrams
p4066 [1]
Window to suppress noise

0.00...20.00 %
p4068[1] (0.00)
x1
2-1029
<3> Caution: The voltage

between an input and
the grounding point
must not exceed 35V.
The voltage between
the inputs must not
exceed 35V.
y = x if |y - x| > p4068
p4069[0]
<2>
<2> Differential inputs!
For input signals
referred to ground,
terminal 2
and/or terminal 4
must be connected to
the reference
potential M.
Hardware
smoothing 100 s
X482.3
X482.4
-1

0.00...20.00 %
p4068[0] (0.00)
x1
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[0] (100.00 %)
(0)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[0] (0.00 %)
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[0] (0.0)
p4075 [0] (0)
<1> p4071 [0] (0)

y
-1
y [V]
-11.000...11.000
V p4080[0] (10.000 V)
[V]
r4074 [0]
y2
x
-11.000...11.000 V
p4078[0] (0.000 V)
Smoothing
+ +
X482.5
A
AO 0
y1
X482.6
-11...+11 V
Scaling
<1>
y
x2 x
[%]
x1
Offset
-10.000...10.000 V
p4083[0] (0.000)
x1
y

x2
[%]
x1 x 100 %
x2
[%]
r4072 [1]
p2000... r2004
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[1] (100.00 %)
p4082 [1]
(0)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[1] (0.00 %)
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[1] (0.0)
p4075 [1] (0)
<1>
y
p4071 [1] (0)
-1
y [V]
-11.000...11.000 V
p4080[1] (10.000 V)
[V]
r4074 [1]
y2
x
-11.000...11.000 V
p4078[1] (0.000 V)
Smoothing
1
2
3
DO: TB30
Terminal Board 30 (TB30) - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1)
+ +
X482.7
A
AO 1
y1
X482.8
-11...+11 V
Scaling
<1> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... r2004 (100 %
y
x2 x
[%]
x1
Offset
-10.000...10.000 V
p4083[1] (0.000)
p200x).
6
fp_9106_51_eng.vsd
25.10.05 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9106 -
Function diagrams
[%]
r4072 [0]
p4082 [0]
2-1030
Fig. 2-137
p4099[2] (4000.00 s)
Function diagrams
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10)
2.19
Function diagrams
9204 Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
2-1032
9206 Receive telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1)
2-1033
9208 Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
2-1034
9210 Send telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1)
2-1035
9220 Control word CANopen
2-1036
9226 Status word CANopen
2-1037

2-1031
PDO mapping for RPDO 1

p8710[0...3]
<2>

9204 Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
RPDO 1
Automatic assignment of the

RPDOs to the receive buffer
Object 1
X451
CAN bus
<1>
Receive buffer
r8890.0
PZD receive word 1
r8850[0]
r8860[0]
Object 2
DWORD
PZD receive word 2
Object 3
r8850[1]
r8860[1]
DWORD
PZD receive word 3
Object 4
r8860[2]
The assignment is made from

RPDO 1, RPDO 2 ... RPDO 8
and from receiver buffer word
RPDO 2
DWORD
r8860[5]
DWORD
r8860[6]
DWORD
r8860[7]
DWORD
r8860[8]
DWORD
r8860[9]
DWORD
r8860[10]
DWORD
r8860[11]
DWORD
r8860[12]
DWORD
r8860[13]
DWORD
r8860[14]
DWORD
PZD receive word 6
Object 2
Evaluation
of the COBID
Object 4
RPDO 8
Objects available a multiple

number of times are
marshalled to the same
position in the receive buffer.
r8850[8]
r8850[9]
PZD receive word 11
r8850[10]
PZD receive word 12
r8850[11]
PZD receive word 13
Object 1
r8850[12]
PZD receive word 14

Object 2
Object 3
Object 4
r8850[13]
PZD receive word 15
r8850[14]
PZD receive word 16
r8850[15]
<1> To use automatic BICO interconnection (p8790 = 1), one of the receive words 1-4 must be used as control word 1 (STW1).
<2> Telegram: up to 4 words or 64 bits.
The sum of the various objects must not exceed 16 words.
1
2
3
4
5
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Receive telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
Bit 0
...
Bit 15
r8850[7]
PZD receive word 10
p8707[0] p8717[0...3]
Bit 15
r8850[6]
PZD receive word 9
Object 4
Bit 0
...
r8850[5]
PZD receive word 8
Object 3
r8892.0
...
r8850[4]
PZD receive word 7
CANopen
receive telegram
Object 1
r8860[4]
PZD receive word 5
Object 1
COB-ID
DWORD
Bit 0
Bit 15
r8893.15
r8850[3]
r8860[3]
Bit 15
r8891.15
r8893.0
DWORD
Bit 0
...
r8891.0
r8892.15
r8850[2]
PZD receive word 4

p8701[0] p8711[0...3]
X452
CAN bus
r8890.15

COB-ID: CAN Communication Object Identifier
6
fp_9204_51_eng.vsd
23.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9204 -
Function diagrams
Refer to [1020.7]
COB-ID for RPDO 1
p8700[0]
2-1032
Fig. 2-138
Refer to [1020.7]
COB-ID for RPDO 1
p8700[0]
PDO mapping for RPDO 1

p8710[0...3]
<1>
RPDO 1

RPDOs to the receive buffer
60400010
Receive buffer
r8890.0
PZD receive word 1
r8850[0]
r8860[0]
DWORD
PZD receive word 2
X451
CAN bus
r8850[1]
r8860[1]
DWORD
PZD receive word 3

p8701[0]
p8711[0...3]
r8850[2]
r8860[2]
X452
CAN bus
CANopen
receive telegram
COB-ID
Object 1
p8702[0]
p8712[0...3]
DWORD
r8860[4]
DWORD
r8860[5]
DWORD
r8860[6]
DWORD
r8860[7]
DWORD
r8860[8]
DWORD
r8860[9]
DWORD
r8860[10]
DWORD
r8860[11]
DWORD
r8860[12]
DWORD
r8860[13]
DWORD
r8860[14]
DWORD
PZD receive word 5
60400010
60FF0020
Evaluation
of the
COB-ID
r8850[3]
r8860[3]
PZD receive word 8
Object 4
p8703[0]
p8713[0...3]
RPDO 4
Objects available a
multiple number of
times are
marshalled to the
same position in the
receive buffer.
r8850[10]
r8850[11]
PZD receive word 13
r8850[12]
PZD receive word 14
r8850[13]
PZD receive word 15
r8850[14]
PZD receive word 16
r8850[15]
2-1033


1
2
3
4
5
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Receive telegram, Predef. Conn. Set (p8744 = 1)
Bit 0
...
Bit 15
r8850[9]
PZD receive word 12
60710010
r8893.15
Bit 15
6
fp_9206_51_eng.vsd
23.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9206 -
Function diagrams
60FF0020
Bit 0
...
r8892.15
r8850[8]
PZD receive word 11
60400010
r8892.0
...
r8850[7]
PZD receive word 10
60710010
Bit 15
r8850[6]
PZD receive word 9

60400010
Bit 0
r8891.15
r8850[5]
PZD receive word 7
RPDO 3
Bit 15
r8850[4]
PZD receive word 6

The assignment is
made from RPDO
1, RPDO 2 ...
RPDO 4 and from
receiver word 1.
Bit 0
...
r8891.0
r8893.0
DWORD
PZD receive word 4

RPDO 2
r8890.15
9206 Receive telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1)

Fig. 2-139
CANopen send words 1 ... 16
(0)
DWORD

9208 Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
p8861[0]
(0)
p8861[1]
(0)
...

send buffer to the TPDOs
<1>
(0)
Refer to [1020.7]
TPDO 1
PZD send word 1
Object 1
PZD send word 2
Object 2
p8851[1]
(0)
p8851[2]
(0)
Object 3
PZD send word 3
p8861[2]
p8851[3]
Object 4
(0)
CANopen send telegram
PZD send word 4
p8861[3]
(0)
p8851[4]
(0)
(0)
p8851[5]
(0)
PZD send word 6
p8861[5]
(0)
p8851[6]
COB-ID
p8721[0] p8731[0...3]
PZD send word 5
p8861[4]
Object 1
The assignment is made

from send buffer 1 and
from TPDO 1.
.
.
.
TPDO 2
Object 1
(0)
PZD send word 7
p8861[6]
(0)
p8851[7]
Object 2
(0)
Object 4
Evaluation of
the COB-ID
and data
transfer type
PZD send word 8
p8861[7]
(0)
p8851[8]
Object 3
(0)
PZD send word 9
p8861[8]
(0)
Object 4
p8851[9]
(0)
PZD send word 10
p8861[9]
(0)
p8851[10]
(0)
PZD send word 11
p8861[10]
(0)
p8851[11]
(0)
Objects that occur a

multiple number of times
are updated from the
same send buffer.
p8727[0] p8737[0...3]
X451
CAN bus
PZD send word 12
p8861[11]
(0)
p8851[12]
(0)
TPDO 8
PZD send word 13
p8861[12]
(0)
p8851[13]
Object 1
(0)
PZD send word 14
p8861[13]
(0)
p8851[14]
Object 2
(0)
PZD send word 15
p8861[14]
(0)
X452
CAN bus
Object 3
p8851[15]
(0)
PZD send word 16
Object 4
TPDO: Transmit Process Data Object

1
2
3
4
5
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Send telegram, free PDO mapping (p8744 = 2)
6
fp_9208_51_eng.vsd
23.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9208 -
Function diagrams
p8851[0]
Send buffer
PDO mapping for TPDO 1

p8730[0...3]
Fig. 2-140
2-1034
IF2 Diag PZD send

r8853[0...15]
COB-ID for TPDO 1

p8720[0]
CANopen send words 1...16
Fig. 2-141
p8851[0]
8784
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
Automatic assignment of
send buffer to the TPDOs
(0)

Refer to [1020.7]
<1>
TPDO 1
PZD send word 1
p8861[0]
PDO mapping for TPDO 1

p8730[0...3]
60410010
p8851[1]
(0)
PZD send word 2
p8861[1]
63
p8851[2]
(0)
CANopen send telegram
PZD send word 3
p8861[2]
(0)
p8851[3]
79
COB-ID
PZD send word 4
p8861[3]
(0)
p8861[4]
492.0
p8721[0] p8731[0...3]
p8851[4]
Object 1
(0)
PZD send word 5
TPDO 2
p8851[5]
60410010
(0)
PZD send word 6
p8861[5]
(0)
606C0020
p8851[6]
(0)
Object 4
PZD send word 7
p8861[6]
(0)
p8851[7]
(0)
PZD send word 8
p8861[7]
(0)
p8851[8]
(0)
PZD send word 9
p8861[8]
(0)
p8851[9]
The assignment
is made from
the send buffer
1 and from
TPDO 1.
p8722[0] p8732[0...3]
(0)
TPDO 3
PZD send word 10
p8861[9]
(0)
p8851[10]
60410010
(0)
60740010
PZD send word 11
p8861[10]
(0)
(0)
(0)
p8851[12]
(0)
PZD send word 13
p8861[12]
(0)
p8851[13]
(0)
Objects that occur

a multiple number
of times are
updated from the
same send buffer.
p8723[0] p8733[0...3]
PZD send word 14
p8861[13]
(0)
(0)
X452
CAN bus
TPDO 4
p8851[14]
(0)
60410010
PZD send word 15
p8861[14]
X451
CAN bus
p8851[11]
PZD send word 12
p8861[11]
Evaluation of
the COB-ID
and data
transfer type.
60630020
p8851[15]
(0)
PZD send word 16
2-1035
TPDO: Transmit Process Data Object


1
2
3
4
5
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV. VECTORSL
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Send telegram, Predef. Connection Set (p8744 = 1)
6
fp_9210_51_eng.vsd
23.10.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9210 -
Function diagrams
DWORD
...
Send buffer
COB-ID for TPDO 1

p8720[0]
9210 Send telegram, predefined connection set (p8744 = 1)

IF2 Diag PZD send

r8853[0...15]
STW1.0
Meaning
9220 Control word CANopen

p0840[0] = r8890.0
[2501.3]
[2610]

STW1.1
1 = No coast-down activated (enable possible)

0 = Activate coast-down (immediate pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
p0844[0] = r8890.1
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.2
1 = No fast stop activated (enable possible)

0 = Activate fast stop (braking along an OFF3 ramp p1135, then pulse cancellation and power-on inhibit)
p0848[0] = r8890.2
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.3

p0852[0] = r8890.3
[2501.3]
[2610]
STW1.4
Reserved
STW1.5
Reserved
STW1.6
Reserved
p2103[0] = r8890.7
[2546.1]
[8060]
STW1.7
= Acknowledge fault
STW1.8
Reserved
STW1.9
Reserved
STW1.10
Reserved
STW1.11
Can be freely connected
pxxxx[y] = r8890.11
STW1.12
pxxxx[y] = r8890.12
STW1.13
pxxxx[y] = r8890.13
STW1.14
pxxxx[y] = r8890.14
STW1.15
pxxxx[y] = r8890.15
<1> Depending on the position of the CANopen control word in p8750, the number of the binector to be connected changes.
1
2
3
4
DO: SERVO, VECTOR, VECTORGL, VECTORMV,VECTORSL
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Control word, CANopen
6
fp_9220_51_eng.vsd
04.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9220 -
Function diagrams
Signal
Refer to [1020.7]
Interconnection
Inverted
parameters <1> internal control word
signal target
2-1036
Fig. 2-142
Signal targets for control word CANopen
9226 Status word CANopen

Fig. 2-143

Refer to [1020.7]
Status word CANopen
Bit No.
Status word CANopen
r8784
From sequence control [2610]
From fault buffer [8060]
1 = Fault present
1 = No coast down active
1 = No fast stop active
From alarm buffer [8065]
1 = Alarm present
Freely interconnectable (BI: p8785)
Bit 9 = 1 --> Ready to exchange process data
From speed signals [8011.8] (r2197.7)
10
1 = Target reached <1>
From status word speed controller [2522]
11
From status word monitoring 3 [8010.8] (r2199.0)
12
1 = Velocity equal to zero
13
Reserved
(0)
14
(0)
15
p8785
(0)
2-1037
<1> With setpoint channel: connect p2151 with r1119 [8010.5].
1
2
3
4
Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) - Status word, CANopen
6
fp_9226_51_eng.vsd
04.11.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9226 -
Function diagrams
p8787
p8786
Function diagrams
Terminal Module 31 (TM31)
2.20
Function diagrams
2-1039
2-1040
9556 Digital relay outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 1)
2-1041
2-1042
2-1043
9566 Analog input 0 (AI 0)
2-1044
2-1045
2-1046
9576 Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC
2-1047
9577 Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
2-1048
2-1038


p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
+24 V
DI 0 DI 3
inverted
X524.+
r4023
X524.M
X524.M
X520.1
DI 0
DI 0 DI 3
r4022

Fig. 2-144
X524.+
<1>
1 = Simulation on
p4095.0
r4021.0
r4023.0
r4022.0
p4096.0
24 V
p4095.1
r4021.1
X520.2
DI 1
r4023.1
r4022.1
p4096.1
p4095.2
r4021.2
X520.3
DI 2
r4023.2
r4022.2
p4096.2
r4021.3
X520.5
M1
<1>
X520.6
r4023.3
2-1039
24 V
<1>
p4096.3
1
2
3
4
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 0 ... DI 3)
6
fp_9550_51_eng.vsd
25.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9550 -
Function diagrams
DI 3
r4022.3
<1>

terminal jumper and connect the load power supply
shown as a dashed line.
X520.4
p4095.3
5V

p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
+24 V
r4023
M
X524.M
X530.1
DI 4
r4022
<1>
1 = Simulation on
p4095.4
r4021.4
r4023.4
r4022.4
p4096.4
24 V
p4095.5
r4021.5
X530.2
DI 5
r4023.5
r4022.5
p4096.5
p4095.6
r4021.6
X530.3
DI 6
r4023.6
r4022.6
p4096.6
p4095.7
5V
r4021.7
X530.4
DI 7
X530.5
M2
<1>
X530.6
r4023.7
r4022.7
<1>

X524.M
DI 4 DI 7

terminal jumper and connect the load power supply
shown as a dashed line.
24 V
<1>
p4096.7
1
2
3
4
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs, electrically isolated (DI 4 ... DI 7)
6
fp_9552_51_eng.vsd
25.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9552 -
Function diagrams
DI 4 DI 7
inverted
X524.+
2-1040
Fig. 2-145
X524.+
9556 Digital relay outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 1)

Fig. 2-146
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
p4048.0
TM31 S_src DO 0
(0)
<1>
r4047.1
p4030
X542
NC 0
COM
NO 0
p4048.1
TM31 S_src DO 1
<1>
r4047.1
0
p4031
(0)
NC 1
COM
NO 1
1
2
3
4
5
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital relay outputs, electrically isolated (DO 0 ... DO 1)
6
fp_9556_51_eng.vsd
30.07.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9556 -
Function diagrams
2-1041
<1> NO: Normally Open contact ("open" in the quiescent state = NO contact)
NC: Normally Closed contact ("closed" in the quiescent state = NC contact)
The relay contacts have the following ratings - up to 100 V DC 240 W or 250 V AC 2000 VA.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
These terminal can have
voltages up to 250 V AC!
X540.1
+24 V
[9562.2]
X541.1
DI/DO 8 9
inverted
r4023
+24 V
p4096.8 (0)

[9562.4]
1
DI
X541.2
DI/DO 8
r4023.8
r4022.8
DI
0
p4048.8 (0)
24 V
1
DO
r4022
p4095.8 (0)
r4021.8
p4028.8 (0)
DI/DO 8 9
TM31 S_src DI/DO 8

0
DO
<1>
p4038
(0)
r4047.8
0
p4096.9 (0)
p4095.9 (0)
1
DI
X541.3
DI/DO 9
r4023.9
r4021.9
p4028.9 (0)
r4022.9
DI
0
p4048.9 (0)
5V
1
DO
TM31 S_src DI/DO 9

0
DO
<1>
p4039
(0)
X541.6
r4047.9
0

<2> Limits the total output current of the terminals X541.2, X541.3, X541.4 and X541.5 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1).
<3> The total (summed) output current of the 24 V auxiliary power supply on terminals X540.1 to X540.8 and X541.1 is limited to 150 mA.
Incandescent lamps must not be connected to the 24 V auxiliary power supply!
1
2
3
4
5
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 8 ... DI/DO 9)
6
fp_9560_51_eng.vsd
27.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9560 -
Function diagrams
X540.8
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
<2>
Current
limiting
p4046 (0)
Fig. 2-147
2-1042
<3>
Current
limiting
150 mA
24 V DC zum nchsten Gert

p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
+24 V
X524.+
X524.M
X524.M
0V
X541.1
+24 V
+24 V
DI/DO 10 11
inverted
r4023
<2>
[9560.4]
X541.4
DI/DO 10
r4022.10
DI
0
p4048.10 (0)
r4023.10
r4021.10
DI
r4022
p4095.10 (0)
[9560.6]
p4028.10 (0)
+24 V
p4096.10 (0)
DI/DO 10 11
24 V
TM31 S_src DI/DO 10
DO
DO
<1>
p4040
(0)
r4047.10
0
0
p4096.11 (0)
p4095.11 (0)
1
DI
X541.5
DI/DO 11
r4022.11
DI
0
p4048.11 (0)
TM31 S_src DI/DO 11
5V
DO
r4023.11
r4021.11
p4028.11 (0)
DO
<1>
p4041
(0)
r4047.11
0
2-1043
<1> The connection shown in a dashed line applies

<2> Limits the total output current of the terminals X541.2, X541.3, X541.4 and
X541.5 to 0.1 A (p4046 = 0) or 1 A (p4046 = 1).
1
2
3
4
5
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional (DI/DO 10 ... DI/DO 11)
6
fp_9562_51_eng.vsd
27.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9562 -
Function diagrams
X541.6

Fig. 2-148
X524.+
+24 V
p4097[0] (0)
20 mA
X521.1
Current
I S5.0
I S5.1 [9568]
Voltage
V
V
S5.0
+
AI 0
-
<1>
+
D
<2>
-20.000...20.000
p4057[0] (0.000)
r4052[0]
4, 5

-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[0] (0.00)
-1

0.0...20.0 %
p4068[0] (0.0)
p2000...r2004
p4069 [0]
0%
x1
y
x1 x x 2
100 %
r4055[0]
1
<1> Differential input!

For an input signal referred to ground, terminal X521.2 must be connected to reference potential M.
Caution:
The voltage between an input (X521.1 or X521.2) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V.
When the load resistor is switched in (S5.0 closed), the voltage between the input terminals must not exceed 15 V.
<2> For p4056 = 2, 3, 5 the units are mA.
For p4056 = 0, 4 the units are V.
1
2
3
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog input 0 (AI 0)
y1
x2
(1)
y=x
if |y - x| > p4068
[%]
Scaling
Enable
y
x2 x
x1
p4067 [0]
y2
x
<2>
Simulation mode
-20.000...20.000
p4098[0] (0.000)
p4066[0] (0)
y [%]
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[0] (100.00)
Smoothing
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4053[0] (0.0)
<2>
-20.000...20.000
p4059[0] (10.000)
p4097[0] (0)
0, 2
X521.2
(0)
F03505
"Wire
breakage"
4 mA
+/-20 mA
+/-10 V
<2>
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4063[0] (0.000)
Hardware
smoothing
100 s
3
20 mA
<3> p4056
= 0: 0 V ... +10 V
= 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
= 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
= 4: -10 V ... +10 V
= 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA
6
fp_9566_51_eng.vsd
21.03.06 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9566 -
Function diagrams
p4099[1] (4000.00 s)
Threshold for
wire breakage detection
0.00...20.00 mA
0...1000 ms
p4061[0] (2.00)
p4062[0] (100)
2-1044
Fig. 2-149
<2> <3>
Analog inputs, type
p4056[0] (4)

Fig. 2-150
<2> <3>
Analog inputs, type
p4056[1] (4)
p4099[1] (4000.00 s)
Threshold for
wire breakage detection
0.00...201 mA
p4061[0] (2.00)
0...1000 ms
p4062[1] (100)
p4097[1] (0)
20 mA
X521.3
Current
I S5.0 [9566]
I S5.1
Voltage
V
V
S5.1
+
AI 1
-
<1>
+
D
<2>
-20.000...20.000
p4057[1] (0.000)
<2>
r4052[1]
y2
y
4, 5
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4058[1] (0.00)
y1
Scaling
-1

0.00...20.00 %
p4068[1] (0.00)
p4069 [1]
x1 x x 2
100 %
0%
r4055[1]
1
<3> p4056
= 0: 0 V ... +10 V
= 2: 0 mA ... +20 mA
= 3: 4 mA ... +20 mA with monitoring
= 4: -10 V ... +10 V
= 5: -20 mA ... +20 mA
6
fp_9568_51_eng.vsd
19.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9568 -
Function diagrams
2-1045
<1> Differential input!

For an input signal referred to ground, terminal X521.4 must be connected to reference potential M.
Caution:
The voltage between an input (X521.3 or X521.4) and the ground point must not exceed 35 V.
When the load resistor is switched in (S5.1 closed), the voltage between the input terminals must not exceed 15 V.
1
2
3
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog input 1 (AI 1)
x2
(1)
y = x if
|y - x| > p4068
otherwise y = y(alt)
x1
p2000...r2004
Enable
p4067 [1]
[%]
x2 x
x1
Simulation mode
-20.000...20.000
p4098[1] (0.000)
p4066[1] (0)
<2>
-20.000...20.000
p4059[1] (10.000)
y [%]
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4060[1] (100.00)
Smoothing
0.0..1000.0 ms
p4053[1] (0.0)
F03505
"Wire break"
p4097[1] (0)
0, 2
X521.4
(0)
4 mA
+/-20 mA
+/-10 V
<2>
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4063[1] (0.000)
Hardware
smoothing
100 s
3
20 mA
(0)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[0] (100.00 %)
-20.000...20.000
p4080[0] (10.000)

-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[0] (0.00)
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[0] (0.0)
p4075 [0] (0)
-1
-20.000...20.000
p4078[0] (0.000)
4 mA
AO 0 A+
X522.3
+/-20 mA
AO 0 des
X522.2
<2>
Current output
[%]
x1x 100 %
x2
p2000...r2004
<3>
<2>
X522.1
+/-10 V
<1>
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4083[0] (0.000)
scaling
%
y
<1>
p4082 [1]
(0)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4079[1] (100.00 %)
-20.000...20.000
p4080[1] (10.000)
-1000.00...1000.00 %
p4077[1] (0.00)
0.0...1000.0 ms
p4073[1] (0.0)
p4075 [1] (0)
<1>
0, 1
y2
x
0
x2 x
[%]
x1
Smoothing
-20.000...20.000
p4078[1] (0.000)
<1>

<2> For a voltage output, the output voltage can be taken between the following terminals:
AO 0 between X522.2 (reference potential) and X522.1, AO 1 between X522.5 (reference potential) and X522.4.
For a current output, the output current can be taken from between the following terminals:
AO 0 between X522.2 and X522.3, AO 1 between X522.5 and X522.6.
<3> The input signals are referred to the reference quantities p2004 ... r2004 (100 % = p200x).
1
2
3
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Analog outputs (AO 0 ... AO 1)
Voltage
output
<4>
y
-1
Analog outputs type

p4076[1] (4)
[%]
r4072 [1]
p4071 [1] (0)
3, 4
AO 0 V+
y1
<1>
x2
x2 x
[%]
x1
Smoothing
x1
0, 1
y2
<1>
r4074[0]
Voltage
output
<4>
[%]
r4072 [0]
p4071 [0] (0)
Analog outputs type

p4076[0] (4)
4 mA
r4074[1]
3, 4
<2>
AO 1 V+
X522.4
AO 1 A+
+/-10 V
X522.6
y1
+/-20 mA
<1>
Offset
-20.000...20.000
p4083[1] (0.000)
scaling
AO 1 des
<2>
Current output
<4> p4076
= 0: 0 mA ... +20 mA
= 1: 0 V ... +10 V
= 2: 4 mA ... +20 mA
= 3: -20 mA ... +20 mA
= 4: -10 V ... +10 V
X522.5
6
fp_9572_51_eng.vsd
17.03.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9572 -
Function diagrams
<1>
p4082 [0]
2-1046
Fig. 2-151
p4099[2] (4000.00 s)
9576 Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC

Fig. 2-152
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
<3> 188.6 C
<1>
Sensor type
p4100
Temperature sensor
X522.7
+ temp
2 mA
Hardware
smoothing 1 s
Software
smoothing 0.5 s
+
X522.8
KTY/PTC
Sensor
resistance
r4101
PTC resistor
threshold 1650 Ohm
-50 C
250 C
- temp
-140 C
Resistance
calculation
2
T
KTY
PTC
Sensortype
p4100
<1>
Sensor resistance [9577.1]
Measured temperature
<1> p4100
= 0: Evaluation disabled
= 1: PTC
= 2: KTY
Temp. alarm threshold

-48...251 C
p4102[0] (100)
<2> An alarm A35920 in

the temperature
evaluation of the
TM31 is signaled to
the next
(downstream) vector
control via the special
temperature value 300 C (refer to
[9577]).
Alarm A35920
temperature sensor evaluation
Alarm is not present

-300 C
<4>
r4104.0
1
0
Alarm is present
TempTimer
p4103
A35211
"Overtemperature sensor TM31"
<5>
1
r4104.1
F35207
"Overtemperature sensor TM31"
<4>
2-1047
<5> Bei KTY p4103 = 0

Output from
TempTimer (0).
Bei PTC p4103 = 0
delay time = 0s.
1
2
3
4
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC
TM31 Temperature actual value

r4105
6
fp_9576_51_eng.vsd
13.08.09 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9576 -
Function diagrams
Temp. fault threshold

-48...251 C
p4102[1] (120)
<3> As a result of the wire

breakage monitoring
[9577.3] the
maximum
temperature that can
be measured is
limited to approx.
188.6 C.
<4> A value > 250 C deactivates the alarm or
fault.
<2>
x 1
A35920 "fault temperature sensor"

alarm value = 2
&
y
x
50 Ohm
x 1
y <1>
&

alarm value = 2
1 y <2>
&

alarm value = 1
1630 Ohm
y
x
<1> For KTY84-130 the threshold value of 50 Ohm corresponds to a temperature of -140 C.
<2> For KTY84-130 the threshold value of 1630 Ohm corresponds to a temperature of +180 C.
1
2
3
DO: TM31
Terminal Module 31 (TM31) - Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
6
fp_9577_51_eng.vsd
25.04.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
SINAMICS
8
- 9577 -
Function diagrams

p4100 = 2
sensor type KTY
[9576.8]
20 Ohm
Sensor resistance
[9576.6]
2-1048
Fig. 2-153
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
p4100 = 1
sensor type PTC
[9576.8]
Function diagrams
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
2.21
Function diagrams
2-1050
9886 Temperature evaluation
2-1051
2-1052

2-1049
r3671
r3673
Rated line freq

p0211
X520.2
+/-10 V
A
AI 0
X520.1
p0115[3] (2000.00 s)
Rated line freq

p0211
I1
0.5 s
I2
<1>
VSM CT_gain
p3670
0.5 s
X520.4
+/-10 V
I3
AI 1
X520.3
0.5 s
PT1 smoothing
x2
x1
PT1 smoothing
r3672

C3
C2
C1
r3674
I3 3
2 f U3
INF C_filter
p0221
I2 3
2 f U2
VSMfilt C A_thresh
r3676
C3
C2
I1 3
2 f U1
C1
Limit value
comparison
A06250
Defective
capacitor(s)
in at least
one phase
of line filter
X521.1
100 V
r3677[2]
X521.2
Rated line freq
p0211
X521.3
+
<1>
VSM input U_scaler
p3660
U1
AI 2
-
x2
x1
690 V
X522.2
X522.3
U3
AI 3
-
r3661
U2
0.5 s
X522.1
r3677[0]
0.5 s
r3677[1]
[8850.1]
[8950.1]
<1>
VSM input U_scaler
p3660
0.5 s
D
PT1 smoothing
x2
PT1 smoothing
x1
r3662
[8850.1]
[8950.1]
<1> The VECTOR drive object is assigned a dynamic index (p0150).
1
2
3
DO: A_INF, S_INF, VECTOR
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Analog inputs (AI 0 ... AI 3)
6
fp_9880_54_eng.vsd
26.06.08 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 9880 -
Function diagrams
x2
x1
p0115[1] (250.00 s)
2-1050
Fig. 2-154
<1>
VSM CT_gain
p3670
Fig. 2-155
9886 Temperature evaluation

Temperature sensor
X520.5
+ temp
2 mA
+
X520.6
KTY/PTC
Sensor type
p3665 (0)
Hardware
smoothing 1 s
<6> <1>
4000.00 s
248 C
<5>
Sensor type
p3665 (0)
Software smoothing 0.5 s
-140 C
<3>
KTY
Resistance
calculation
<6>
<1>
PTC
- temp
-50 C
250 C
PTC resistor
threshold 1650 Ohm
Sensor resistance
[9887.1]
Overtemperature alarm threshold

<4> 0...301 [C]
<6> p3667[0] (150)
A34211
"Temperature alarm threshold exceeded"
1
r3664.0
0
<6>
Overtemperature hysteresis
p3669
F34207
"Temperature fault threshold exceeded"
1
r3664.1
<2>
Alarm A35920
temperature sensor evaluation
Overtemperature fault threshold
<4> 0...301 [C]
<6> p3668[1] (180)
Alarm is not present
1
2
3
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Temperature evaluation
6
fp_9886_54_eng.vsd
08.06.07 V04.03.01
Temperature KTY
r3666
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 9886 -
Function diagrams
2-1051
<1> p3665
= 0: No sensor
Alarm is present
-300 C
= 1: PTC
= 2: KTY
<2> A fault or alarm in the temperature evaluation of the VSM is communicated to the downstream evaluation using special temperature values.
<3> As a result of the wire breakage monitoring the maximum temperature that can be measured is limited to approx. 175 C.
<4> A value > 250 C de-activates the alarm or fault.
<5> Can only be used with chassis infeeds.
p4099[0] (4000.00 s)
p3665 = 2
<4>
Sensor type KTY
[9886.8]

20 Ohm
Sensor resistance
[9886.6]
x 1
A34920 "Temperature sensor fault"

Alarm value = 2 "Measured resistance too low"
&
y
x
50 Ohm
x 1
<1>
&

Alarm value = 2 "Measured resistance too low"
1 y
<2>
&

Alarm value = 1 "Wire breakage or sensor not connected"
1630 Ohm
y
x
<1> For KTY84-130 temperature sensor, the following applies: A threshold value 50 Ohm corresponds to -140 C.
<2> For KTY84-130 temperature sensor, the following applies: A threshold value 1630 Ohm corresponds to +180 C.
<3> Can only be used with the Chasis Active Line Modules.
1
2
3
Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) - Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC
6
fp_9887_54_eng.vsd
10.08.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 9887 -
Function diagrams
<3>
Fig. 2-156
2-1052
p3665 = 1
<4>
Sensor type PTC
[9886.8]
Function diagrams
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20)
2.22
Function diagrams
9912 Control word interconnection

2-1054
2-1053
Refer to [1020.7]
Interconnection
parameters

9912 Control word interconnection
Signal
Meaning
STW BOP.0
1 = On
0 = OFF (OFF1)
p0840[0] = r0019.0
STW BOP.1
1 = No coast down
0 = Coast down (OFF2)
p0844[0] = r0019.1
STW BOP.2
1 = No fast stop
0 = Fast stop (OFF3)
p0848[0] = r0019.2
STW BOP.3
Reserved
STW BOP.4
Reserved
STW BOP.5
Reserved
STW BOP.6
Reserved
STW BOP.7
= Acknowledge fault
p2102[0] = r0019.7
STW BOP.8
Reserved
STW BOP.9
Reserved
STW BOP.10
Reserved
STW BOP.11
Reserved
STW BOP.12
Reserved
STW BOP.13
1 = Motorized potentiometer, raise
p1035[0] = r0019.13
STW BOP.14
1 = Motorized potentiometer, lower
p1036[0] = r0019.14
STW BOP.15
Reserved
<1> The BICO interconnection represents an example that can be be changed by the user.
1
2
3
4
DO: CU_G, CU_S
Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) - Control word interconnection
6
fp_9912_54_eng.vsd
16.01.07 V04.03.01
7
Function diagram
S120/S150/G130/G150
8
- 9912 -
Function diagrams
<1>
2-1054
Fig. 2-157
Interconnection STW BOP (r0019)
Faults and alarms
Contents
3.1
Overview of faults and alarms
3-1056
3.2
List of faults and alarms
3-1066

3-1055
Faults and alarms

3.1
3.1.1
General information about faults and alarms
Displaying faults and alarms

If a fault occurs, the drive indicates the fault(s) and/or alarm(s).
The following methods for displaying faults and alarms are available:
Via the fault and alarm buffer with PROFIBUS
Online via the commissioning software
Differences between faults and alarms
The differences between faults and alarms are as follows:
Table 3-1
Differences between faults and alarms
Type
Faults
Description
What happens when a fault occurs?
The appropriate fault reaction is triggered.
Status signal ZSW1.3 is set.
The fault is entered in the fault buffer.
How are faults eliminated?
Remove the original cause of the fault.
Acknowledge the fault.
Alarms
What happens when an alarm occurs?

Status signal ZSW1.7 is set.
The alarm is entered in the alarm buffer.
How are alarms eliminated?
Alarms acknowledge themselves. If the cause of the alarm is no longer present, they automatically reset themselves.
3-1056

Faults and alarms

Fault reactions
The following fault reactions are defined:
Table 3-2
Fault reactions
List
NONE
PROFIdrive
-
Reaction
None
Description
No reaction when a fault occurs
Note:
When the "Basic positioner" function module is activated
(r0108.4 = 1), the following applies:
When a fault occurs with fault reaction "NONE", an active
traversing task is interrupted and the system switches to
tracking mode until the fault has been rectified and
acknowledged.
OFF1
ON/
OFF
Brake along the

ramp-function
generator deceleration ramp followed by pulse
disable
Closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)

n_set = 0 is input immediately to brake the drive along
the ramp-function generator deceleration ramp (p1121).
When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
parameters have been assigned for it) is closed (p1215).
The pulses are suppressed when the brake closing time
(p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below
the threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23)
The following applies to closed-loop torque control
mode:
Reaction as for OFF2
When the system switches to closed-loop control with
p1501, the following applies:
No separate braking reaction.
If the actual speed value drops below the speed threshold (p1226) or the timer stage (p1227) has expired, the
motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed. The
pulses are suppressed when the brake closing time
(p1217) expires.
OFF2
COAST
STOP
Internal/external
pulse disable
Closed-loop speed and torque control

Instantaneous pulse suppression, the drive "coasts" to a
standstill.
The motor holding brake (if one is being used) is closed
immediately.
Switching on inhibited is activated.

3-1057
Faults and alarms

Table 3-2
Fault reactions, continued
List
OFF3
PROFIdrive
QUICK
STOP
Reaction
Brake along the
OFF3 deceleration ramp followed by pulse
disable
Description
Closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21)
the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135).
When zero speed is detected, the motor holding brake (if
parameters have been assigned for it) is closed. The
pulses are suppressed when the holding brake's closing
time (p1217) expires.
Zero speed is detected if the actual speed drops below
the threshold in p1226 or if the monitoring time (p1227)
started when speed setpoint <= speed threshold (p1226)
has expired.
Switching on inhibited is activated.
Closed-loop torque control (p1300 = 23)
Changeover to speed-controlled operation and other
reactions as described for speed-controlled operation.
STOP1
Under development
STOP2
n_set = 0

the OFF3 deceleration ramp (p1135).
The drive remains in closed-loop speed control mode.
IASC/
DCBRAKE
For synchronous motors, the following applies:

If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, an internal armature short-circuit is triggered.
The conditions for p1231 = 4 must be observed.
For induction motors, the following applies:
If a fault occurs with this fault reaction, DC-injection
braking is triggered.
The DC brake must have been put into operation
(p1232, p1233, p1234).
ENCODER
Internal/external
pulse disable
(p0491)
The fault reaction ENCODER is applied as a function of

the setting in p0491.
Factory setting:
p0491 = 0 --> Encoder fault causes OFF2
Notice:
When changing p0491, it is imperative that the information
in the description of this parameter is carefully observed.
3-1058

Faults and alarms

Acknowledging faults
The list of faults and alarms specifies how to acknowledge each fault after the
cause has been remedied.
Table 3-3
Acknowledging faults
Acknowledgment
POWER ON
Description
The fault is acknowledged by a POWER ON process (switch drive unit off and on again).
Note:
If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault is displayed again immediately
after power up.
IMMEDIATE
Faults can be acknowledged on one drive object (Points 1 to 3) or on all drive objects
(point 4) as follows:
1 Acknowledge by setting parameter:
p3981 = 0 --> 1
2 Acknowledge via binector inputs:
p2103
BI: 1. Acknowledge faults
p2104
p2105
3 Acknowledge using PROFIBUS control signal:

STW1.7 = 0 --> 1 (edge)
4 Acknowledge all faults
p2102
BI: Acknowledge all faults
All of the faults on all of the drive objects of the drive system can be acknowledged
using this binector input.
Note:
These faults can also be acknowledged by a POWER ON operation.
If this action has not eliminated the fault cause, the fault will continue to be displayed
after acknowledgment.
Safety Integrated faults
The "Safe standstill" (SH) function must be deselected before these faults are
acknowledged.
PULSE INHIBIT The fault can only be acknowledged with a pulse inhibit (r0899.11 = 0).
The same options are available for acknowledging as described under acknowledgment
with IMMEDIATE.

3-1059
Faults and alarms

Saving fault buffer on POWER OFF

The contents of the fault buffer are saved to a non-volatile storage medium when
the Control Unit 320 (CU320) is switched off (i.e. the fault buffer history is still
available when the unit is switched on again).
Note:
Requirements:
Firmware version 2.2 or higher.
Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher.
The hardware version is shown on the rating plate or can be displayed online
with the commissioning software (in Project Navigator under "Drive Unit" -->
Configuration --> Version Overview).
If these prerequisites are not fulfilled, the contents of the fault buffer are deleted
at every POWER ON operation.
The fault buffer of a drive object comprises the following parameters:
r0945[0 to 63], r0947[0 to 63], r0948[0 to 63], r0949[0 to 63]
r2109[0 to 63], r2130[0 to 63], r2133[0 to 63], r2136[0 to 63]
The fault buffer contents can be deleted manually as follows:
Delete fault buffer for all drive objects:
p2147 = 1 --> p2147 = 0 is automatically set after execution.
Delete fault buffer for a specific drive object:
p0952 = 0 --> The parameter belongs to the specified drive object.
The fault buffer contents are automatically deleted when the following occurs:
Restore factory setting (p0009 = 30 and p0976 = 1).
Download with modified structure (e.g. number of drive objects changed)
Power-up after other parameter values have been loaded (e.g. p0976 = 10)
Upgrade firmware to later version
3-1060

Faults and alarms

3.1.2
Explanation of the list of faults and alarms

The data in the following example has been chosen at random. A description can
contain the information listed below. Some of the information is optional.
The list of faults and alarms (See Section 3.2) is structured as follows:
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Start of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Axxxxx (F, N)
Fault location (optional): Name
Message value:
Component Number: %1, cause: %2
Drive object:
List of objects.
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledgment:
NONE
Cause:
Description of possible causes

Fault value (r0949, interpret format): or alarm value (r2124, interpret format): (optional)
Information about fault or alarm values (optional)
Remedy:
Description of possible remedies
Reaction to F:
A_INFEED: OFF2 (OFF1, NONE)

SERVO: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
VECTOR: NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledgement for F:
IMMEDIATELY (POWER ON)
Reaction to N:
NONE
Acknowledge-
Axxxxx
Axxxxx (F, N)
Fxxxxx
Fxxxxx (A, N)
Nxxxxx
Nxxxxx (A)
Cxxxxx
Alarm xxxxx
Alarm xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N)
Fault xxxxx
Fault xxxxx (message type can be changed to F or N)
No message
No message (message type can be changed to A)
Safety message (separate message buffer)
A message comprises a letter followed by the relevant number.
The letters have the following meanings:
A means "Alarm".
F means "Fault".
N means "No message" or "Internal message".
C means "Safety message"
The optional brackets indicate whether the type specified for this message can be
changed and which message types can be adjusted via parameters (p2118,
p2119).
Information about reaction and acknowledgment is specified independently for a
message with an adjustable message type (e.g. reaction to F, acknowledgment
for F).

3-1061
Faults and alarms

Note:
You can change the default properties of a fault or alarm by means of parameter
assignment.
The list of faults and alarms (see Section 3.2) provides information in relation to
the properties of a message that have been set as standard. If the properties of a
specific message are changed, the corresponding information may have to be
modified in this list.
Fault location (optional): Name

The fault location (optional), the name of the fault or alarm, and the message
number are all used to identify the message (e.g. with the commissioning software).
Message value:
The information provided under the message value tells you about the composition of the fault/alarm value.
Example:
Message value: Component Number: %1, cause: %2
This fault value or alarm value contains information about the Component Number and cause. The entries %1 and %2 are placeholders, which are filled in
accordingly during online operation with the commissioning software.
Drive object:
Each message (fault/alarm) specifies the drive object in which it can be found.
A message can belong to either one, several, or all drive objects.
Reaction: Default fault reaction (adjustable fault reaction)
Specifies the default reaction in the event of a fault.
The optional brackets indicate whether the default fault reactions can be changed
and which fault reactions can be adjusted via parameters (p2100, p2101).
Note:
See Section 3.1.1
3-1062

Faults and alarms

Acknowledgment: Default acknowledgment (adjustable acknowledgment)

Specifies the default method of acknowledging faults after the cause has been
eliminated.
The optional brackets indicate whether the default acknowledgment can be
changed and which acknowledgment can be adjusted via parameters (p2126,
p2127).
Note:
See Section 3.1.1
Cause:
Describes the possible causes of the fault/alarm. A fault or alarm value can also
be specified (optional).
Fault value (r0949, format):
The fault value is entered in the fault buffer in r0949[0 to 63] and specifies additional, precise information about a fault.
Alarm value (r2124, format):
The alarm value specifies additional, precise information about an alarm.
The alarm value is entered in the alarm buffer in r2124[0 to 7] and specifies additional, precise information about an alarm.
Remedy:
Describes the methods available for eliminating the cause of the active fault or
alarm.
Alarm
In certain cases, the servicing and maintenance personnel are responsible for
choosing a suitable method for eliminating the cause of faults.

3-1063
Faults and alarms

3.1.3
Number ranges of faults and alarms

Note:
The following number ranges represent an overview for all faults and alarms in
SINAMICS.
The faults and alarms for the product described in this List Manual are described
in detail in Section 3.2.
Faults and alarms are organized into the following number ranges:
Table 3-4
Number ranges of faults and alarms
From
To
Range
1000
3999
Control Unit
4000
4999
Reserved
5000
5999
Power unit
6000
6899
Infeed
6900
6999
Braking Module
7000
7999
Drive
8000
8999
Option Board
9000
12999
Reserved
13000
13001
Licensing
13002
19999
Reserved
20000
29999
OEM
30000
30999
DRIVE-CLiQ component power unit
31000
31999
DRIVE-CLiQ component encoder 1
32000
32999

Note:
Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the
encoder parameters are assigned so that it acts as a direct
measuring system and if the encoder does not intervene in the
motor control.
33000
33999

Note:
Faults that occur are automatically output as an alarm if the
encoder parameters are assigned so that it acts as a direct
measuring system and if the encoder does not intervene in the
motor control.
3-1064
34000
34999
35000
35199
Terminal Module 54F (TM54F)
35200
35999

Faults and alarms

Table 3-4
Number ranges of faults and alarms, continued
From
To
Range
36000
36999
40000
40999
Controller Extension 32 (CX32)
41000
48999
Reserved
49000
49999
SINAMICS GM/SM/GL
50000
50499
Communication Board (COMM BOARD)
50500
59999
OEM Siemens
60000
65535
SINAMICS DC MASTER (DC closed loop control)

3-1065
Faults and alarms

3.2

Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4301400, Language: eng,
Objects: CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
F01000
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An internal software error has occurred.

Fault value (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
Remedy:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.

- upgrade firmware to later version.
- contact the Hotline.
- replace the Control Unit.
F01001
Floating point exception
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
A floating point exception has occurred.

The error can be caused by the basic system, DCC, FBLOCKS or OA_applications.
Additional debug information can be found in p9999:
Index 0: Alarm number
Index 1: Program counter at the time the exception occurred
Index 2: Cause of floating point exception:
To be treated as a hexadecimal:
0x1 - Invalid operation
0x2 - Divide by zero
0x4 - Overflow
0x8 - Underflow
0x10 - Inexact result
Remedy:

- check configuration and signals of the free function blocks.
- check configuration and signals of the DCC charts.
F01002
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:

3-1066

Faults and alarms

F01003
Acknowledgement delay when accessing the memory
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A memory area was accessed that does not return a "READY".

Remedy:

N01004 (F, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Fault value (r0949, hexadecimal):
Remedy:
- read out diagnostics parameter (r9999).

See also: r9999 (Software error internal supplementary diagnostics)
Reaction upon F:
OFF2
Acknowl. upon F:
POWER ON
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01005
Firmware download for DRIVE-CLiQ component unsuccessful
Message value:
Component number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
It was not possible to download the firmware to a DRIVE-CLiQ component.

yyxxxx hex: yy = component number, xxxx = fault cause
xxxx = 000B hex = 11 dec:
DRIVE-CLiQ component has detected a checksum error.
xxxx = 000F hex = 15 dec:
The selected DRIVE-CLiQ component did not accept the contents of the firmware file.
xxxx = 0012 hex = 18 dec:
Firmware version is too old and is not accepted by the component.
xxxx = 0013 hex = 19 dec:
Firmware version is not suitable for the hardware release of the component.
xxxx = 0065 hex = 101 dec:
After several communication attempts, no response from the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
xxxx = 008B hex = 139 dec:
Initially, a new boot loader is loaded (must be repeated after POWER ON).
xxxx = 008C hex = 140 dec:
Firmware file for the DRIVE-CLiQ component not available on the memory card.
xxxx = 008D hex = 141 dec:
An inconsistent length of the firmware file was signaled. The firmware download may have been caused by a loss of
connection to the firmware file. This can occur during a project download/reset in the case of a SINAMICS Integrated
Control Unit, for example.
xxxx = 008F hex = 143 dec:
Component has not changed to the mode for firmware download. It was not possible to delete the existing firmware.
xxxx = 0090 hex = 144 dec:
When checking the firmware that was downloaded (checksum), the component detected a fault. It is possible that
the file on the memory card is defective.

3-1067
Faults and alarms

xxxx = 0091 hex = 145 dec:

Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time.
xxxx = 009C hex = 156 dec:
Component with the specified component number is not available (p7828).
xxxx = Additional values:
Remedy:
- check the selected component number (p7828).

- save suitable firmware file for download in the directory "/siemens/sinamics/code/sac/".
- use a component with a suitable hardware version
- after POWER ON has been carried out again for the DRIVE-CLiQ component, download the firmware again.
Depending on p7826, the firmware will be automatically downloaded.
A01006
Firmware update for DRIVE-CLiQ component required
Message value:
Component number: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The firmware of a DRIVE-CLiQ component must be updated as there is no suitable firmware or firmware version in
the component for operation with the Control Unit.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy:
Firmware update using the commissioning software:

The firmware version of all of the components on the "Version overview" page can be read in the Project Navigator
under "Configuration" of the associated drive unit and an appropriate firmware update can be carried out.
Firmware update via parameter:
- take the component number from the alarm value and enter into p7828.
- start the firmware download with p7829 = 1.
A01007
POWER ON for DRIVE-CLiQ component required
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ component must be powered up again (POWER ON) as, for example, the firmware was updated.
Note:
For a component number = 1, a POWER ON of the Control Unit is required.
Remedy:
Switch off the power supply of the specified DRIVE-CLiQ component and switch it on again.
A01009 (N)
CU: Control module overtemperature
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature (r0037[0]) of the control module (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified limit value.
Remedy:
- check the air intake for the Control Unit.

- check the fan for the Control Unit (only for CU310).
Note:
The alarm automatically disappears after the limit value has been undershot.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1068

Faults and alarms

F01010
Drive type unknown
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An unknown drive type was found.

Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Drive object number (refer to p0101, p0107).
Remedy:
- Replace Power Module.

F01011 (N)
Download interrupted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The project download was interrupted.

- the project download was prematurely ended by the user or by the commissioning software (e.g. STARTER,
SCOUT).
- the communication cable was interrupted (e.g. cable breakage, cable withdrawn).
Note:
The response to an interrupted download is the state "first commissioning".
Remedy:
- check the communication cable.

- download the project again.
- boot from previously saved files (power-down/power-up or p0976).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F01012 (N)
Project conversion error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When converting the project of an older firmware version, an error occurred.

Parameter number of the parameter causing the error.
For fault value = 600, the following applies:
The temperature evaluation is no longer assigned to the power unit but to the encoder evaluation.
Notice:
Monitoring of the motor temperature is no longer ensured.
Remedy:
Check the parameter indicated in the fault value and correctly adjust it accordingly.
Re fault value = 600:
Parameter p0600 must be set to the values 1, 2 or 3 in accordance with the assignment of the internal encoder evaluation to the encoder interface.
Value 1 means: The internal encoder evaluation is assigned to the encoder interface 1 via p0187.
- If necessary, the internal encoder evaluation must be assigned to an encoder interface via parameters p0187,
p0188 or p0189 accordingly.
- If necessary, upgrade the firmware to a later version.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1069
Faults and alarms

F01015
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:

Remedy:

A01016 (F)
Firmware changed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
At least one firmware file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/ has been changed without authorization with
respect to the version shipped from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory.
0: Checksum of one file is incorrect.
1: File missing.
2: Too many files.
3: Incorrect firmware version.
4: Incorrect checksum of the back-up file.
See also: r9925 (Firmware file incorrect)
Remedy:
For the non-volatile memory for the firmware (memory card/device memory), restore the delivery condition.
Note:
The file involved can be read out using parameter r9925.
See also: r9926 (Firmware check status)
Reaction upon F:
OFF2
Acknowl. upon F:
POWER ON
A01017
Component lists changed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
On the memory card, one file in the directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA or /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA has been
illegally changed with respect to that supplied from the factory. No changes are permitted in this directory.
The problem is indicated in the first digit of the alarm value:
1. File does not exist.
2. Firmware version of the file does not match the software version.
3. The file checksum is incorrect.
The second digit of the alarm value indicates in which directory the file is located:
0: Directory /SIEMENS/SINAMICS/DATA/
1. Directory /ADDON/SINAMICS/DATA/
The third digit of the alarm value indicates the file:
0: File MOTARM.ACX
1: File MOTSRM.ACX
2: File MOTSLM.ACX
3: File ENCDATA.ACX
4: File FILTDATA.ACX
5: File BRKDATA.ACX
6: File DAT_BEAR.ACX
7: File CFG_BEAR.ACX
8: File ENC_GEAR.ACX
Remedy:
For the memory card file involved, restore the status originally supplied from the factory.
3-1070

Faults and alarms

F01023
Software timeout (internal)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An internal software timeout has occurred.

Remedy:

F01030
Sign-of-life failure for master control
Message value:
Drive object:
ENCODER, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3 (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For active PC master control, no sign-of-life was received within the monitoring time.
The master control was returned to the active BICO interconnection.
Remedy:
Set the monitoring time higher at the PC or, if required, completely disable the monitoring function.
For the commissioning software, the monitoring time is set as follows:
<Drive> -> Commissioning -> Control panel -> Button "Fetch master control" -> A window is displayed to set the monitoring time in milliseconds.
Notice:
The monitoring time should be set as short as possible. A long monitoring time means a late response when the
communication fails!
F01031
Sign-of-life failure for OFF in REMOTE
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
With the "OFF in REMOTE" mode active, no sign-of-life was received within 3 seconds.
Remedy:
- Check the data cable connection at the serial interface for the Control Unit (CU) and operator panel.
- Check the data cable between the Control Unit and operator panel.
F01033
Units changeover: Reference parameter value invalid
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When changing over the units to the referred representation type, it is not permissible for any of the required reference parameters to be equal to 0.0
Fault value (r0949, parameter):
Reference parameter whose value is 0.0.
See also: p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505 (Selecting the system of units),
p0595 (Selecting technological units)
Remedy:
Set the value of the reference parameter to a number different than 0.0.
See also: p0304, p0305, p0310, p0596, p2000, p2001, p2002, p2003, r2004

3-1071
Faults and alarms

F01034
Units changeover: Calculation parameter values after reference value change unsuccessful
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The change of a reference parameter meant that for an involved parameter the selected value was not able to be
recalculated in the per unit representation. The change was rejected and the original parameter value restored.
Parameter whose value was not able to be recalculated.
Remedy:
Select the value of the reference parameter such that the parameter involved can be calculated in the per unit representation.
A01035 (F)
ACX: Boot from the back-up parameter back-up files
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When the Control Unit is booted, no complete data set was found from the parameter back-up files. The last time
that the parameterization was saved, it was not completely carried out. Instead, a back-up data set or a back-up
parameter back-up file is downloaded.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret hexadecimal):
Remedy:
If you have saved the project using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project. Save
using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely written to the non-volatile memory.
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F01036 (A)
ACX: Parameter back-up file missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When downloading the device parameterization, a parameter back-up file associated with a drive object cannot be
found. Neither a PSxxxyyy.ACX, a PSxxxyyy.NEW nor a PSxxxyyy.BAK parameter back-up file exists in the nonvolatile memory for this drive object.
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 000 --> consistency back-up file
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 2, 3, 4:
Remedy:
If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project.
Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely
written to the non-volatile memory.
If you have not saved the project data, then first commissioning of the system has to be carried out again.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1072

Faults and alarms

F01037 (A)
ACX: Re-naming the parameter back-up file unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Re-naming after saving a parameter back-up file in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
One of the parameter back-up files to be re-named had the "read only" attribute. The parameter back-up files are
saved in the directory \USER\SINAMICS\DATA.
It is possible that the non-volatile memory is defective.
Byte 1: yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.* or CAxxxyyy.* or CCxxxyyy.*
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file PSxxx099.*
Byte 2: xxx in the file name PSxxxyyy.*
xxx = 000 --> data save started with p0977 = 1
Byte 4, 3:
Remedy:
- check whether one of the files to be overwritten has the attribute "read only" and change this file attribute to "writable". Check all of the files (PSxxxyyy.*, CCxxxyyy.*, CAxxxyyy.*) that belong to drive yyy designated in the fault
value.
- replace the memory card or Control Unit.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01038 (A)
ACX: Loading the parameter back-up file unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error has occurred when downloading PSxxxyyy.ACX or PTxxxyyy.ACX files from the non-volatile memory.
Byte 1: yyy in the file name PSxxxyyy.ACX
yyy = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
yyy = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
Byte 4, 3, 2:
Remedy:
- If you have saved the project data using the commissioning software, carry out a new download for your project.
Save using the function "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1 so that all of the parameter files are again completely
written to the non-volatile memory.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1073
Faults and alarms

F01039 (A)
ACX: Writing to the parameter back-up file was unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Writing to at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** in the non-volatile memory was unsuccessful.
- In the directory /USER/SINAMICS/DATA/ at least one parameter back-up file PSxxxyyy.*** has the "read only" file
attribute and cannot be overwritten.
- There is not sufficient free memory space available.
- The non-volatile memory is defective and cannot be written to.
dcba hex
a = yyy in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
a = 000 --> consistency back-up file
a = 001 ... 062 --> drive object number
a = 070 --> FEPROM.BIN
a = 080 --> DEL4BOOT.TXT
a = 099 --> PROFIBUS parameter back-up file
b = xxx in the file names PSxxxyyy.***
b = 000 --> data save started with p0977 = 1
d, c:
Remedy:
- check the file attribute of the files (PSxxxyyy.***, CAxxxyyy.***, CCxxxyyy.***) and, if required, change from "read
only" to "writeable".
- check the free memory space in the non-volatile memory. Approx. 80 kbyte of free memory space is required for
every drive object in the system.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01040
Save parameter settings and carry out a POWER ON
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
A parameter was changed in the drive system which means that it is necessary to save the parameters and re-boot
(e.g. p0110).
Remedy:
- save the parameters (p0971/p0977).

F01041
Parameter save necessary
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Defective or missing files were detected on the memory card when booting.
1: Source file cannot be opened.
2: Source file cannot be read.
3: Target directory cannot be set up.
4. Target file cannot be set up/opened.
5. Target file cannot be written to.
Additional values:
3-1074

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- save the parameters.

- download the project again to the drive unit.
- update the firmware
- if required, replace the Control Unit and/or memory card card.
F01042
Parameter error during project download
Message value:
Parameter: %1, Index: %2, fault cause: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software (e.g. incorrect parameter
value).
For the specified parameter, it was detected that dynamic limits were exceeded that may possibly depend on other
parameters.
ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
0: Parameter number illegal.
1: Parameter value cannot be changed.
2: Lower or upper value limit exceeded.
3: Sub-index incorrect.
4: No array, no sub-index.
5: Data type incorrect.
6: Setting not permitted (only resetting).
7: Descriptive element cannot be changed.
9: Descriptive data not available.
11: No master control.
15: No text array available.
17: Task cannot be executed due to operating state.
20: Illegal value.
21: Response too long.
22: Parameter address illegal.
23: Format illegal.
24: Number of values not consistent.
25: Drive object does not exist.
101: Presently deactivated.
104: Illegal value.
107: Write access not permitted when controller enabled.
108: Unit unknown.
109: Write access only in the commissioning state, encoder (p0010 = 4).
110: Write access only in the commissioning state, motor (p0010 = 3).
111: Write access only in the commissioning state, power unit (p0010 = 2).
112: Write access only in the quick commissioning mode (p0010 = 1).
113: Write access only in the ready mode (p0010 = 0).
114: Write access only in the commissioning state, parameter reset (p0010 = 30).
115: Write access only in the Safety Integrated commissioning state (p0010 = 95).
116: Write access only in the commissioning state, technological application/units (p0010 = 5).
117: Write access only in the commissioning state (p0010 not equal to 0).
118: Write access only in the commissioning state, download (p0010 = 29).
119: Parameter may not be written in download.
120: Write access only in the commissioning state, drive basis configuration (device: p0009 = 3).
121: Write access only in the commissioning state, define drive type (device: p0009 = 2).
122: Write access only in the commissioning state, data set basis configuration (device: p0009 = 4).
123: Write access only in the commissioning state, device configuration (device: p0009 = 1).
124: Write access only in the commissioning state, device download (device: p0009 = 29).
125: Write access only in the commissioning state, device parameter reset (device: p0009 = 30).
126: Write access only in the commissioning state, device ready (device: p0009 = 0).
127: Write access only in the commissioning state, device (device: p0009 not equal to 0).
129: Parameter may not be written in download.
130: Transfer of the master control is inhibited via BI: p0806.

3-1075
Faults and alarms

131: Required BICO interconnection not possible because BICO output does not supply floating value
132: Free BICO interconnection inhibited via p0922.
133: Access method not defined.
200: Below the valid values.
201: Above the valid values.
202: Cannot be accessed from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
203: Cannot be read from the Basic Operator Panel (BOP).
204: Write access not permitted.
Remedy:
- enter the correct value in the specified parameter.

- identify the parameter that restricts the limits of the specified parameter.
F01043
Fatal error at project download
Message value:
Fault cause: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fatal error was detected when downloading a project using the commissioning software.
1: Device status cannot be changed to Device Download (drive object ON?).
2: Incorrect drive object number.
3: A drive object that has already been deleted is deleted again.
4: Deleting of a drive object that has already been registered for generation.
5: Deleting a drive object that does not exist.
6: Generating an undeleted drive object that already existed.
7: Regenerating a drive object already registered for generation.
8: Maximum number of drive objects that can be generated exceeded.
9: Error while generating a device drive object.
10: Error while generating target topology parameters (p9902 and p9903).
11: Error while generating a drive object (global component).
12: Error while generating a drive object (drive component).
13: Unknown drive object type.
14: Drive status cannot be changed to "ready for operation" (p0947 and p0949).
15: Drive status cannot be changed to drive download.
16: Device status cannot be changed to "ready for operation".
17: It is not possible to download the topology. The component wiring should be checked, taking into account the
various messages/signals.
18: A new download is only possible if the factory settings are restored for the drive unit.
19: The slot for the option module has been configured several times (e.g. CAN and COMM BOARD)
20: The configuration is inconsistent (e.g. CAN for Control Unit, however no CAN configured for drive objects A_INF,
SERVO or VECTOR ).
Remedy:
- use the current version of the commissioning software.

- modify the offline project and carry out a new download (e.g. compare the number of drive objects, motor, encoder,
power unit in the offline project and at the drive).
- change the drive state (is a drive rotating or is there a message/signal?).
- carefully note any other messages/signals and remove their cause.
F01044
CU: Descriptive data error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An error was detected when loading the descriptive data saved in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy:
Replace the memory card or Control Unit.
3-1076

Faults and alarms

A01045
CU: Configuring data invalid
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error was detected when evaluating the parameter files PSxxxyyy.ACX, PTxxxyyy.ACX, CAxxxyyy.ACX, or
CCxxxyyy.ACX saved in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy:
Restore the factory setting using (p0976 = 1) and re-load the project to the drive unit. Operation without any restrictions is then possible.
After downloading the project, save the parameters in STARTER using "Copy RAM to ROM" or with p0977 = 1. This
overwrites the incorrect parameter files in the non-volatile memory.
A01049
CU: It is not possible to write to file
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
It is not possible to write into a write-protected file (PSxxxxxx.acx). The write request was interrupted.
Drive object number.
Remedy:
Check whether the "write protected" attribute has been set for the files in the non-volatile memory under
.../USER/SINAMICS/DATA/...
When required, remove write protection and save again (e.g. set p0977 to 1).
F01050
Memory card and device incompatible
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The memory card and the device type do not match (e.g. a memory card for SINAMICS S is inserted in SINAMICS
G).
Remedy:
- insert the matching memory card.

- use the matching Control Unit or power unit.
F01054
CU: System limit exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
At least one system overload has been identified.

1: Computing time load too high (r9976[1]).
5: Peak load too high (r9976[5]).
See also: r9976 (System utilization)
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1, 5:
- check the sampling times and adjust if necessary (p0115).
- deactivate the function module.
- deactivate the drive object.
- remove the drive object from the target topology.

3-1077
Faults and alarms

A01064 (F)
CU: Internal error (CRC)
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
CRC error in the Control Unit program memory
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F:
A01065
Drive: Fault on non-active encoder
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
One or several non-active encoders indicate an error.
Remedy:
Remove the error for the non-active encoder.
F01068
CU: Data memory, memory overflow
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A data memory area has been overloaded.

Fault value (r0949, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: High-speed data memory 1 overloaded
Remedy:
- deactivate the function module.

- deactivate the drive object.
- remove the drive object from the target topology.
A01099
Tolerance window of time synchronization exited
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The time master exited the selected tolerance window for time synchronization.
See also: p3109 (RTC real time synchronization, tolerance window)
Remedy:
Select the re-synchronization interval so that the synchronization deviation between the time master and drive system lies within the tolerance window.
See also: r3108 (RTC last synchronization deviation)
A01100
CU: Memory card withdrawn
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The memory card (non-volatile memory) was withdrawn during operation.

Notice:
It is not permissible for the memory card to be withdrawn or inserted under voltage.
3-1078

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- power down the drive system.

- re-insert the memory card that was withdrawn - this card must match the drive system.
- power up the drive system again.
F01105 (A)
CU: Insufficient memory
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets,
OA applications, blocks, etc).
Remedy:
- change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications,
blocks, etc).
- use an additional Control Unit.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01107
CU: Data save in the non-volatile memory unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A data save in the non-volatile memory was not able to be successfully carried out.
- non-volatile memory is defective.
- insufficient space in the non-volatile memory.
Remedy:
- try to save again.

F01110
CU: More than one SINAMICS G on one Control Unit
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
More than one SINAMICS G type power unit is being operated from the Control Unit.
Number of the second drive with a SINAMICS G type power unit.
Remedy:
Only one SINAMICS G drive type is permitted.
F01111
CU: Mixed operation of drive units illegal
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Illegal operation of various drive units on one Control Unit:

- SINAMICS S together with SINAMICS G
- SINAMICS S together with SINAMICS S Value or Combi
Number of the first drive object with a different power unit type.
Remedy:
Only power units of one particular drive type may be operated with one Control Unit.

3-1079
Faults and alarms

F01112
CU: Power unit not permissible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The connected power unit cannot be used together with this Control Unit.
1: Power unit is not supported (e.g. PM240).
2: DC/AC power unit connected to CU310 not permissible.
Remedy:
Replace the power unit that is not permissible by a component that is permissible.
F01120 (A)
Terminal initialization has failed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An internal software error occurred while the terminal functions were being initialized.
Remedy:

Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01122 (A)
Frequency at the measuring probe input too high
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input is too high.
1: DI/DO 9 (X122.8)
2: DI/DO 10 (X122.10)
4: DI/DO 11 (X122.11)
8: DI/DO 13 (X132.8)
16: DI/DO 14 (X132.10)
32: DI/DO 15 (X132.11)
64: DI/DO 8 (X122.7)
128: DI/DO 12 (X132.7)
Remedy:
Reduce the frequency of the pulses at the measuring probe input.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01150
CU: Number of instances of a drive object type exceeded
Message value:
Drive object type: %1, number permitted: %2, current number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The maximum permissible number of instances of a drive object type was exceeded.
Byte 1: Drive object type (p0107).
Byte 2: Max. permissible number of instances for this drive object type.
Byte 3: Actual number of instances for this drive object type.
3-1080

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- power down the unit.

- suitably restrict the number of instances of a drive object type by reducing the number of inserted components.
- re-commission the unit.
F01151
CU: Number of drive objects of a category exceeded
Message value:
Drive object category: %1, number permitted: %2, current number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The maximum permissible number of drive objects of a category was exceeded.

Byte 1: Drive object category.
Byte 2: Max. permissible number for this drive object category.
Byte 3: Actual number for this drive object category.
Remedy:
- power down the unit.

- suitably restrict the number of drive objects of the specified category by reducing the number of inserted components.
- re-commission the unit.
F01200
CU: Time slice management internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A time slice management error has occurred.

It is possible that the sampling times have been inadmissibly set.
998: Too many time slices occupied by OA (e.g. DCC)
999: Too many time slices occupied by the basic system
Too many different sampling times may have been set.
Further values for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Remedy:
- check the sampling time setting (p0112, p0115, p4099).

F01205
CU: Time slice overflow
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
Insufficient processing time is available for the existing topology.

Remedy:
- reduce the number of drives.

- increase the sampling times.
F01221
CU: Bas clk cyc too low
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The closed-loop control / monitoring cannot maintain the envisaged clock cycle.
The runtime of the closed-loop control/monitoring is too long for the particular clock cycle or the computing time
remaining in the system is not sufficient for the closed-loop control/monitoring.
Remedy:
Increase the basic clock cycle of DRIVE-CLiQ communication.

See also: p0112 (Sampling times presetting p0115)

3-1081
Faults and alarms

A01223
CU: Sampling time inconsistent
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When changing a sampling time (p0115[0], p0799 or p4099), inconsistency between the clock cycles has been identified.
1: Value, low minimum value.
2: Value, high maximum value.
3: Value not a multiple of 1.25 s.
4: Value does not match clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation.
5: Value not a multiple of 125 s.
10: Special restriction of the drive object violated.
20: On a SERVO with a sampling time of 62.5 s, more than two drive objects or one drive object of a type other
than SERVO have been detected on the same DRIVE-CLiQ line (a maximum of two SERVO type drive objects are
permitted).
21: Value can be a multiple of the current controller sampling time of a servo or vector drive in the system (e.g. for
TB30, the values of all of the indices should be taken into account).
30: Value less than 31.25 s.
31: Value less than 62.5 s.
32: Value less than 125 s.
40: Nodes have been identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line whose highest common denominator of the sampling times
is less than 125 s. Further, none of the nodes has a sampling tine of less than 125 s.
41: A chassis unit was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of
the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 250 s.
42: An Active Line Module was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is less than 125 s.
43: A Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) was identified on the DRIVE-CLiQ line as a node. Further, the highest common
denominator of the sampling times of all of the nodes connected to the line is not equal to the current controller sampling time of the drive object of the VSM.
44: The highest common denominator of the sampling times of all of the components connected to the DRIVE-CLiQ
line is not the same for all components of this drive object (e.g. there are components on different DRIVE-CLiQ lines
on which different highest common denominators are generated).
is less than 31.25 s.
is less than 62.5 s.
is less than 125 s.
is less than 250 s.
99: Inconsistency of cross drive objects detected.
116: Recommended clock cycle in r0116[0...1].
General note:
The topology rules should be noted when connecting up DRIVE-CLiQ (refer to the appropriate product documentation).
The parameters of the sampling times can also be changed with automatic calculations.
Example for highest common denominator: 125 s, 125 s, 62.5 s --> 62.5 s
Remedy:
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.

- set a valid sampling time.
See also: p0115, p0799, p4099
3-1082

Faults and alarms

A01224
CU: Pulse frequency inconsistent
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When changing the minimum pulse frequency (p0113) inconsistency between the pulse frequencies was identified.
1: Value, low minimum value.
2: Value, high maximum value.
3: Resulting sampling time is not a multiple of 1.25 s.
4: Value does not match clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS operation.
10: Special restriction of the drive object violated.
99: Inconsistency of cross drive objects detected.
116: Recommended clock cycle in r0116[0...1].
Remedy:
Set a valid pulse frequency.

See also: p0113 (Minimum pulse frequency, selection)
F01250
CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-only data
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Remedy:
- carry out a POWER ON.

A01251
CU: CU-EEPROM incorrect read-write data
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Control Unit.
Remedy:
For alarm value r2124 < 256, the following applies:

For alarm value r2124 >= 256, the following applies:
- for the drive object with this alarm, clear the fault memory (p0952 = 0).
- as an alternative, clear the fault memory of all drive objects (p2147 = 1).
F01255
CU: Option Board EEPROM read-only data error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
Error when reading the read-only data of the EEPROM in the Option Board.
Remedy:


3-1083
Faults and alarms

A01256
CU: Option Board EEPROM read-write data error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error when reading the read-write data of the EEPROM in the Option Board.
Remedy:

F01303
DRIVE-CLiQ component does not support the required function
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ component.

1: The component does not support the deactivation.
101: The Motor Module does not support an internal armature short-circuit.
102: The Motor Module does not support the deactivation.
201: The Sensor Module does not support actual value inversion (p0410.0 = 1) when using a Hall sensor (p0404.6
= 1) for the commutation.
202: The Sensor Module does not support parking/unparking.
203: The Sensor Module does not support the deactivation.
204: The firmware of this Terminal Module 15 (TM15) does not support the application TM15DI/DO.
205: The Sensor Module does not support the selected temperature evaluation (r0458).
206: The firmware of this Terminal Modules TM41/TM31/TM15 refers to an old firmware version. It is urgently necessary to upgrade the firmware to ensure disturbance-free operation.
207: The power unit with this hardware version does not support operation with device supply voltages of less than
380 V.
208: The Sensor Module does not support deselection of commutation with zero mark (via p0430.23).
211: The Sensor Module does not support single-track encoders (r0459.10)
Remedy:
Upgrade the firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.

Check parameter p0600 and p0601 and if required, adapt interpretation.
Replace the power unit or if required set the device supply voltage higher (p0210).
Check parameter p0430.23 and reset if necessary.
A01304 (F)
Firmware version of DRIVE-CLiQ component is not up-to-date
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The non-volatile memory has a more recent firmware version than the one in the connected DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Component number of the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved.
Remedy:
Update the firmware (p7828, p7829 and commissioning software).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1084

Faults and alarms

F01305
Topology: Component number missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The component number from the topology was not parameterized (p0121 (for power unit, refer to p0107), p0131 (for
servo/vector drives, refer to p0107), p0141, p0151, p0161).
The fault value includes the particular data set number.
Note:
The fault also occurs if speed encoders have been configured (p0187 to p0189) but no component numbers exist for
them.
In this case, the fault value includes the drive data set number plus 100 * encoder number (e.g. 3xx, if a component
number was not entered in p0141 for the third encoder (p0189)).
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
Remedy:
Enter the missing component number or remove the component and restart commissioning.
See also: p0121, p0131, p0141, p0142, p0151, p0161, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
A01306
Firmware of the DRIVE-CLiQ component being updated
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Firmware update is active for at least one DRIVE-CLiQ component.

Remedy:
None necessary.
This alarm automatically disappears after the firmware has been updated.
A01314
Topology: Component must not be present
Message value:
Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For a component, "deactivate and not present" is set but this component is still in the topology.
Byte 1: Component number
Byte 2: Component class of the component
Byte 3: Connection number
Note: Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy:
- remove the corresponding component.

- change the setting "deactivate and not present".
Note:
Under "Topology --> Topology view" the commissioning software offers improved diagnostics capability (e.g. setpoint/actual value comparison).
See also: p0105, p0125, p0145, p0155
A01315
Drive object not ready for operation
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For the active drive object involved, at least one activated component is missing.
Note:
All other active and operational drive objects can be in the "RUN" state.

3-1085
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
The alarm automatically disappears again with the following actions:

- deactivate the drive object involved (p0105 = 0).
- deactivate the components involved (p0125 = 0, p0145 = 0, p0155 = 0, p0165 = 0).
- re-insert the components involved.
See also: p0105, p0125, p0145, p0155
A01316
Drive object inactive and again ready for operation
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
If, when inserting a component of the target topology, an inactive, non-operational drive object becomes operational
again. The associated parameter of the component is, in this case, set to "activate" (p0125, p0145, p0155, p0165).
Note:
This is the only message that is displayed for a deactivated drive object.
Remedy:

- activate the drive object involved (p0105 = 1).
- again withdraw the components involved.
See also: p0105 (Activate/deactivate drive object)
A01317 (N)
Deactivated component again present
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
If a component of the target topology for an active drive object is inserted and the associated parameter of the component is set to "deactivate" (p0125, p0145, p0155, p0165).
Note:
This is the only message that is displayed for a deactivated component.
Remedy:

- activate the components involved (p0125 = 1, p0145 = 1, p0155 = 1, p0165 = 1).
- again withdraw the components involved.
See also: p0125 (Activate/deactivate power unit components), p0145 (Activate/deactivate encoder interface), p0155
(Voltage Sensing Module, activate/deactivate)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A01318
BICO: Deactivated interconnections present
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
This alarm is used in the following cases:

- If an inactive/non-operational drive object is active again/ready for operation
- If there are items in the list of BI/CI parameters (r9498[0...29], r9499[0...29])
- If the BICO interconnections saved in the list of BI/CI parameters (r9498[0...29], r9499[0...29]) have actually been
changed
Remedy:
Reset alarm:
- Set p9496 to 1 or 2
or
- deactivate the drive object again.
3-1086

Faults and alarms

A01319
Inserted component not initialized
Message value:
Drive object:
ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Initialization is required for at least one inserted component.

This is only possible if the pulses are inhibited for all the drive objects.
Remedy:
Activate pulse inhibit for all drive objects.
A01320
Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A drive object number is missing in p0978

Index of p0101 under which the missing drive object number can be determined.
Remedy:
Set p0009 to 1 and change p0978:

Rules:
- p0978 must include all of the drive object numbers (p0101).
- it is not permissible for a drive object number to be repeated.
- by entering a 0, the drive objects with PZD are separated from those without PZD.
- only 2 partial lists are permitted. After the second 0, all values must be 0.
- dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
A01321
Topology: Drive object number does not exist in configuration
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
p0978 contains a drive object number that does not exist.

Index of p0978 under which the drive object number can be determined.
Remedy:

Rules:
A01322
Topology: Drive object number present twice in configuration
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A drive object number is present more than once in p0978.

Index of p0978 under which the involved drive object number is located.
Remedy:

Rules:

3-1087
Faults and alarms

A01323
Topology: More than two partial lists created
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Partial lists are available more than twice in p0978. After the second 0, all must be 0.
Index of p0978 under which the illegal value is located.
Remedy:

Rules:
A01324
Topology: Dummy drive object number incorrectly created
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In p0978, dummy drive object numbers (255) are only permitted in the first partial list.
Index of p0978 under which the illegal value is located.
Remedy:

Rules:
F01325
Topology: Component Number not present in target topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The component configured in a parameter (e.g. p0121, p0131, etc.) is not present in the target topology.
Configured Component Number that is not present in target topology.
Remedy:
Establish topology and DO configuration consistency.
A01330
Topology: Quick commissioning not possible
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, supplementary information: %2, preliminary component number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Unable to carry out a quick commissioning. The existing actual topology does not fulfill the requirements.
ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary component number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause
aa = 01 hex = 1 dec:
On one component illegal connections were detected.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: For a Motor Module, more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ was detected.
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: For a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ, the DRIVE-CLiQ cable is not connected to a Motor Module.
3-1088

Faults and alarms

The topology contains too many components of a particular type.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: There is more than one master Control Unit.
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: There is more than 1 infeed (8 for a parallel circuit configuration).
- bb = 03 hex = 3 dec: There are more than 10 Motor Modules (8 for a parallel circuit configuration).
- bb = 04 hex = 4 dec: There are more than 9 encoders.
- bb = 05 hex = 5 dec: There are more than 8 Terminal Modules.
- bb = 07 hex = 7 dec: Unknown component type
- bb = 08 hex = 8 dec: There are more than 6 drive slaves.
- bb = 09 hex = 9 dec: Connection of a drive slave not permitted.
- bb = 0a hex = 10 dec: There is no drive master.
- bb = 0b hex = 11 dec: There is more than one motor with DRIVE-CLiQ for a parallel circuit.
- cccc: Not used.
More than 16 components are connected at a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit.
- bb = 0, 1, 2, 3 means e.g. detected at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100, X101, X102, X103.
- cccc: Not used.
The number of components connected one after the other is greater than 125.
- bb: Not used.
- cccc = preliminary component number of the first component and component that resulted in the fault.
The component is not permissible for SERVO.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: SINAMICS G available.
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: Chassis available.
- cccc = preliminary component number of the first component and component that resulted in the fault.
On one component illegal EEPROM data was detected. These must be corrected before the system continues to
boot.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: The Order No. [MLFB] of the power unit that was replaced includes a space retainer. The
space retainer (*) must be replaced by a correct character.
- cccc = preliminary component number of the component with illegal EEPROM data.
The actual topology contains an illegal combination of components.
- bb = 01 hex = 1 dec: Active Line Module (ALM) and Basic Line Module (BLM).
- bb = 02 hex = 2 dec: Active Line Module (ALM) and Smart Line Module (SLM).
- bb = 03 hex = 3 dec: SIMOTION control (e.g. SIMOTION D445) and SINUMERIK component (e.g. NX15).
- bb = 04 hex = 4 dec: SINUMERIK control (e.g. SINUMERIK 730.net) and SIMOTION component (e.g. CX32).
- cccc: Not used.
Note:
Connection type and connection number are described in F01375.
See also: p0097 (Select drive object type), r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology)
Remedy:
- adapt the output topology to the permissible requirements.

- carry out commissioning using the commissioning software.
- for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ, connect the power and DRIVE-CLiQ cable to the same Motor Module (Single Motor
Module: DRIVE-CLiQ at X202, Double Motor Module: DRIVE-CLiQ from motor 1 (X1) to X202, from motor 2 (X2) to
X203).
Re aa = 06 hex = 6 dec and bb = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Correct the order number when commissioning using the commissioning software.
See also: p0097 (Select drive object type), r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology)
A01331
Topology: At least one component not assigned to a drive object
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
At least one component is not assigned to a drive object.

- when commissioning, a component was not able to be automatically assigned to a drive object.
- the parameters for the data sets are not correctly set.
Component number of the unassigned component.

3-1089
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
This component is assigned to a drive object.

Check the parameters for the data sets.
Examples:
- power unit (p0121).
- motor (p0131, p0186).
- encoder interface (p0140, p0141, p0187 ... p0189).
- encoder (p0140, p0142, p0187 ... p0189).
- Terminal Module (p0151).
- option board (p0161).
F01340
Topology: Too many components on one line
Message value:
Component number or connection number: %1, fault cause: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For the selected communications clock cycle, too many DRIVE-CLiQ components are connected to one line of the
Control Unit.
xyy hex: x = fault cause, yy = component number or connection number.
1yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the CU is not sufficient for all read transfers.
2yy:
The communications clock cycle of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection on the CU is not sufficient for all write transfers.
3yy:
Cyclic communication is fully utilized.
4yy:
The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle starts before the earliest end of the application. An additional dead time must be added to
the control. Sign-of-life errors can be expected.
5yy:
Internal buffer overflow for net data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
6yy:
Internal buffer overflow for receive data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
7yy:
Internal buffer overflow for send data of a DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
Remedy:
Check the DRIVE-CLiQ connection:

Reduce the number of components on the DRIVE-CLiQ line involved and distribute these to other DRIVE-CLiQ connections of the Control Unit. This means that communication is uniformly distributed over several communication
lines.
Re fault value = 1yy - 4yy in addition:
- increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115).
F01354
Topology: Actual topology indicates an illegal component
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, component number: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The actual topology indicates at least one illegal component.

yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = cause.
xx = 1: Component at this Control Unit not permissible.
xx = 2: Component in combination with another component not permissible.
Note:
Pulse enable is prevented.
Remedy:
Remove the illegal components and restart the system.
3-1090

Faults and alarms

F01355
Topology: Actual topology changed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The device target topology (p0099) does not correspond to the device actual topology (r0098).
The fault only occurs if the topology was commissioned using the automatic internal device mechanism and not using
the commissioning software.
See also: r0098 (Actual device topology), p0099 (Device target topology)
Remedy:
One of the following counter-measures can be selected if no faults have occurred in the topology detection itself:
If commissioning was still not completed:
- carry out a self-commissioning routine (starting from p0009 = 1).
General: Set p0099 to r0098, set p0009 to 0; for existing Motor Modules, this results in servo drives being automatically generated (p0107).
Generating servo drives: Set p0097 to 1, set p0009 to 0.
Generating vector drives: Set p0097 to 2, set p0009 to 0.
Generating vector drives with parallel circuit: Set p0097 to 12, set p0009 to 0.
In order to set configurations in p0108, before setting p0009 to 0, it is possible to first set p0009 to 2 and modify
p0108. The index corresponds to the drive object (p0107).
If commissioning was already completed:
- re-establish the original connections and re-connect power to the Control Unit.
- restore the factory setting for the complete equipment (all of the drives) and allow automatic self-commissioning
again.
- change the device parameterization to match the connections (this is only possible using the commissioning software).
Notice:
Topology changes that result in this fault being generated cannot be accepted by the automatic function in the
device, but must be transferred using the commissioning software and parameter download. The automatic function
in the device only allows constant topology to be used. Otherwise, when the topology is changed, all of the previous
parameter settings are lost and replaced by the factory setting.
See also: r0098 (Actual device topology)
F01356
Topology: Defective components in actual topology
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, Component number: %2, Connection number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The actual topology indicates at least one defective DRIVE-CLiQ component.

zzyyxx hex:
zz = connection number of component before the defective component
yy = component number of component before the defective component
xx = fault cause
xx = 1: Component at this Control Unit not permissible.
Note:
Pulse enable is withdrawn and prevented.
Remedy:
Remove the defective components and restart the system.

3-1091
Faults and alarms

F01360
Topology: Actual topology not permissible
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, preliminary component number: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The detected actual topology is not permissible.

ccccbbaa hex: cccc = preliminary component number, aa = fault cause
Too many components were detected at the Control Unit. The maximum permissible number of components is 199.
The component type of a component is not known.
It is illegal to combine ALM and BLM.
It is illegal to combine ALM and SLM.
It is illegal to combine BLM and SLM.
A CX32 was not directly connected to a permitted Control Unit.
An NX10 or NX15 was not directly connected to a permitted Control Unit.
A component was connected to a Control Unit that is not permitted for this purpose.
aa = 0A hex = 10 dec:
Too many components of a particular type detected.
aa = 0B hex = 11 dec:
Too many components of a particular type detected on a single line.
Note:
The drive system is no longer booted. In this state, the drive control (closed-loop) cannot be enabled.
Remedy:
Re fault cause = 1:
Change the configuration. Connect less than 199 components to the Control Unit.
Re fault cause = 2:
Remove the component with unknown component type.
Re fault cause = 3, 4, 5:
Establish a valid combination.
Re fault cause = 6, 7:
Connect the expansion module directly to a permitted Control Unit.
Re fault cause = 8:
Remove component or use a permissible component.
Re fault cause = 10, 11:
Reduce the number of components.
A01361
Topology: Actual topology contains SINUMERIK and SIMOTION components
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The detected actual topology contains SINUMERIK and SIMOTION components.

ddccbbaa hex: cc = fault cause, bb = component class of the actual topology, aa = component number of the component
cc = 01 hex = 1 dec:
An NX10 or NX15 was connected to a SIMOTION control.
A CX32 was connected to a SINUMERIK control.
3-1092

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Replace all NX10 or NX15 by a CX32.
Re alarm value = 2:
Replace all CX32 by an NX10 or NX15.
A01362
Topology: Topology rule(s) broken
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
At least one topology rule for the SINAMICS S120 Combi has been broken.
In the event of a fault, the ramping up of the drive system is aborted and closed-loop drive control is not enabled.
The fault value indicates which rule has been broken.
1: The S120 Combi may only be wired via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X200 to X1 on the NCU.
2: Only one Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X2 on the NCU. If a TM54 is
being used, it may only be wired via X500 to X2 on the NCU.
3: Only one DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module (hub) may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X3 on the NCU. If a hub is
being used, it may only be wired via X500 to X3 on the NCU.
4: Only Sensor Modules may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ sockets X201 through X203 (3-axis) or X204 (4-axis) on
the S120 Combi.
5: Only one Single Motor Module or one Double Motor Module may be connected to DRIVE-CLiQ socket X205 (X204
is not available for 3-axis). The module must be wired to the S120 Combi via X200.
6: Only certain Motor Modules may be used for expansion axes.
7: If a Single Motor Module is being used as the first expansion axis, only one more Single Motor Module may be
connected (via X200 to X201 on the first Single Motor Module).
8: Only Sensor Modules may be connected to the corresponding DRIVE-CLiQ socket X202 on any Single Motor
Modules which may be present.
9. On the second Single Motor Module there must be nothing connected to X201.
10: If a Double Motor Module is used as an expansion axis, only Sensor Modules may be connected to X202 and
X203.
11: On the Double Motor Module there must be nothing connected to X201.
12: On the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) there must be nothing connected to X501.
13: On the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module, only Sensor Modules Cabinet (SMC) and Sensor Modules External (SME) may
be connected to X501 through X505.
Remedy:
Evaluate the fault value and ensure compliance with the corresponding topology rule(s).
F01375
Topology: Actual topology, duplicate connection between two components
Message value:
Preliminary component number: %1, component class: %2, connection number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When detecting the actual topology, a ring-type connection was detected.

ccbbaaaa hex:
cc = connection number
bb = component class
aaaa = preliminary component number of a component included in the ring
Component class:
1: Control Unit.
2: Motor Module.
3: Line Module.
4: Sensor Module (SM).
5: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
6: Terminal Module (TM).
7: DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
8: Controller Extension 32 (CX32, NX10, NX15).
49: DRIVE-CLiQ components (non-listed components).
50: Option Slot (e.g. Terminal Board 30).
60: Encoder (e.g. EnDat).
70: Motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.

3-1093
Faults and alarms

Component type:
Precise designation within a component class (e.g. "SMC20").
Connection number:
Consecutive numbers, starting from zero, of the appropriate connection or slot (e.g. DRIVE-CLiQ connection X100
on the Control Unit has the connection number 0).
Remedy:
Output the fault value and remove the specified connection.

Note:
F01380
Topology: Actual topology, defective EEPROM
Message value:
Preliminary component number: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
When detecting the actual topology, a component with a defective EEPROM was detected.
bbbbaaaa hex:
aaaa = preliminary component number of the defective components
Remedy:
Output the fault value and remove the defected component.
A01381
Topology: Comparison power unit shifted
Message value:
Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Component (target): %3, Connection number: %4
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a power unit in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to the
target topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number
cc = component number
aa = component number of the component shifted in the target topology
Note:
The connection in the actual topology where the shifted component was detected is described in dd, cc and bb.
Component class and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy:
Adapting the topologies:

- undo the change to the actual topology by changing over the DRIVE-CLiQ cables.
- commissioning software: Go online, upload the drive unit, adapt the topology offline and download the modified
project.
- automatically remove the topology error (p9904).
Note:
A01382
Topology: Comparison Sensor Module shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
3-1094

Faults and alarms

Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a Sensor Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect to
the target topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:
A01383
Topology: Comparison Terminal Module shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a Terminal Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect
to the target topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:

3-1095
Faults and alarms

A01384
Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the actual topology that has been shifted with
respect to the target topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:
A01385
Topology: Comparison CX32 shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the actual topology that has been shifted
with respect to the target topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:
3-1096

Faults and alarms

A01386
Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ component shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the actual topology that has been shifted with
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:
A01387
Topology: Comparison option slot component shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a option slot component in the actual topology that has been shifted with
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:

3-1097
Faults and alarms

A01388
Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the actual topology that has been shifted with respect
to the target topology.
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:
A01389
Topology: Comparison motor with DRIVE-CLiQ shifted
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the actual topology that has been shifted with
ddccbbaa hex:
Note:
Remedy:

project.
Note:
3-1098

Faults and alarms

A01416
Topology: Comparison additional component in actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has found a component in the actual topology which is not specified in the target topology.
The alarm value includes the component number and connection number of the component with which the additional
component is connected.
ddccbbaa hex:
bb = component class of the additional component
aa = component number
Note:
- component class and connection number are described in F01375.
- components that are connected to this additional component are not operational.
Remedy:

- remove the additional component in the actual topology.
- download the target topology that matches the actual topology (commissioning software).
Note:
A01420
Topology: Comparison a component is different
Message value:
Component number: %1, component class target: %2, component class actual: %3, fault cause: %4
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected differences in the actual and target topologies in relation to one component.
There are differences in the electronic rating plate.
ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number of the component, bb = component class of the target topology, cc = component class of the actual topology, dd = fault cause
dd = 01 hex = 1 dec:
Different component type.
Different Order No.
Different manufacturer.
Connection changed over for a multi-component slave (e.g. Double Motor Module), defective EEPROM data in the
electronic rating plate, or only part of a multi-component slave set to "deactivate and not present".
A CX32 was replaced by an NX10 or NX15.
An NX10 or NX15 was replaced by a CX32.
Note:
Component class and component type are described in F01375.
Remedy:

- check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commissioning software and correct differences.
- parameterize the topology comparison of all components (p9906).
- parameterize the topology comparison of one components (p9907, p9908).
Note:

3-1099
Faults and alarms

A01421
Topology: Comparison different components
Message value:
Component number: %1, component class target: %2, component class actual: %3, fault cause: %4
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The component class, the component type or the number of connections differ.
ddccbbaa hex: aa = component number of the component, bb = component class of the target topology, cc = component class of the actual topology, dd = fault cause
Different component class.
Different component type.
Different Order No.
Different number of connections.
Note:
Component class, component type and connection number are described in F01375.
Remedy:
Check the component soft-wired connections against the hardware configuration of the drive unit in the commissioning software and correct differences.
Note:
A01425
Topology: Comparison serial number of a component is different
Message value:
Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Differences: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The serial number is different.
ddccbbaa hex:
cc = number of differences
aa = component number of the component
Note:
The component class is described in F01375.
Remedy:

- change over the actual topology to match the target topology.
Re byte cc:
cc = 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9904 or p9905.
cc > 1 --> can be acknowledged using p9905 and can be deactivated using p9906 or p9907/p9908.
Note:
See also: p9904 (Topology comparison, acknowledge differences), p9905 (Device specialization), p9906 (Topology
comparison, comparison stage of all components), p9907 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of the component number), p9908 (Topology comparison, comparison stage of a component)
3-1100

Faults and alarms

A01428
Topo: Comparison connection of a component is different
Message value:
Component number: %1, Component class: %2, Connection number1: %3, Connection number2: %4
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A component was connected to another connection.
The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value:
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number of the target topology
cc = connection number of the actual topology
Note:
Remedy:

Note:
See also: p9904 (Topology comparison, acknowledge differences)
A01429
Topology: Comparison connection is different for more than one component
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A topology comparison has found differences between the actual and target topology for several components. A
component was connected to another connection.
The different connections of a component are described in the alarm value:
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number of the target topology
cc = connection number of the actual topology
Note:
Remedy:

Note:
In the software, a Double Motor Module behaves just like two separate DRIVE-CLiQ nodes. If a Double Motor Module
is re-inserted, this can result in several differences in the actual topology.

3-1101
Faults and alarms

F01451
Topology: Target topology is invalid
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error was detected in the target topology.

The target topology is invalid.
ccccbbaa hex: cccc = index error, bb = component number, aa = fault cause
aa = 1B hex = 27 dec: Error not specified.
aa = 1C hex = 28 dec: Value illegal.
aa = 1D hex = 29 dec: Incorrect ID.
aa = 1E hex = 30 dec: Incorrect ID length.
aa = 1F hex = 31 dec: Too few indices left.
aa = 20 hex = 32 dec: component not connected to Control Unit.
Remedy:
Reload the target topology using the commissioning software.
F01470
Topology:Target topology ring-type connection detected
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A ring-type connection was detected when writing to the target topology.

ddccbbaa hex:
aa = component number of a component included in the ring
Note:
Remedy:
Read out the fault value and remove one of the specified connections.
Then download the target topology again using the commissioning software.
Note:
F01475
Topology: Target topology duplicate connection between two components
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When writing the target topology, a duplicate connection between two components was detected.
ddccbbaa hex:
dd = connection number 2 of the duplicate connection
cc = connection number 1 of the duplicate connection
aa = component number of one of the components connected twice
Note:
Remedy:
Read out the fault value and remove one of the two specified connections.
Then download the target topology again using the commissioning software.
Note:
3-1102

Faults and alarms

A01481
Topology: Comparison power unit missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a power unit in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology.
Component number of the additional target components.
Remedy:
- delete the drive belonging to the power unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- check that the actual topology matches the target topology and if required, change over.
- check DRIVE-CLiQ cables for interruption and contact problems.
- check the 24 V supply voltage.
- check that the power unit is working properly.
Note:
A01482
Topology: Comparison Sensor Module missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a Sensor Module in the target topology that is not available in the actual topology.
Remedy:
- re-configure the drive belonging to the Sensor Module in the commissioning software project (encoder configuration) and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to the Sensor Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- check that the Sensor Module is working properly.
Note:
A01483
Topology: Comparison Terminal Module missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a Terminal Module in the target topology that is not available in the actual
topology.
Remedy:
- delete the Terminal Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive
unit.
- check that the Terminal Module is working properly.
Note:

3-1103
Faults and alarms

A01484
Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the target topology that does not exist in the
actual topology.
Remedy:
- delete the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to
the drive unit.
- test the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module to ensure that it functions properly.
Note:
A01485
Topology: Comparison CX32 missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a controller extension 32 (CX32) in the target topology that is not available
in the actual topology.
Remedy:
- delete the CX32 / NX in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- check that CX32/NX functions correctly.
Note:
A01486
Topology: Comparison DRIVE-CLiQ components missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a DRIVE-CLiQ component in the target topology that is not available in the
actual topology.
Remedy:
- delete the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive belonging to this component in the commissioning software project and download the new
configuration to the drive unit.
- check that the component is working properly.
Note:
3-1104

Faults and alarms

A01487
Topology: Comparison option slot components missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected an option slot module in the target topology that is not available in the actual
topology.
Remedy:
- delete the option board in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive unit in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive
unit.
- check that the option board is functioning correctly
Note:
A01488
Topology: Comparison EnDat encoder missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected an EnDat encoder in the target topology that is not available in the actual
topology.
Remedy:
- re-configure the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project (encoder configuration) and
download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- delete the drive belonging to the encoder in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
Note:
A01489
Topology: Comparison motor with DRIVE-CLiQ missing in the actual topology
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The topology comparison has detected a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ in the target topology that is not available in the
actual topology.
Remedy:
- re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- re-configure the drive belonging to this motor in the commissioning software project and download the new configuration to the drive unit.
- check that the motor is working properly.
Note:

3-1105
Faults and alarms

F01505 (A)
BICO: Interconnection cannot be established
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A PROFIdrive telegram has been set (p0922).

An interconnection contained in the telegram was not able to be established.
Parameter receiver that should be changed.
Remedy:
Establish another interconnection.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01506 (A)
BICO: No standard telegram
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The standard telegram in p0922 is not maintained and therefore p0922 is set to 999.
BICO parameter for which the write attempt was unsuccessful.
Remedy:
Again set the required standard telegram (p0922).
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A01507 (F, N)
BICO: Interconnections to inactive objects present
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
There are BICO interconnections as signal sink from a drive object that is either inactive/not operational.
The BI/CI parameters involved are listed in r9498.
The associated BO/CO parameters are listed in r9499.
The list of the BICO interconnections to other drive objects is displayed in r9491 and r9492 of the deactivated drive
object.
Note:
r9498 and r9499 are only written to, if p9495 is not set to 0.
Number of BICO interconnections found to inactive drive objects.
Remedy:
- set all open BICO interconnections centrally to the factory setting with p9495 = 2.
- make the non-operational drive object active/operational again (re-insert or activate components).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A01508
BICO: Interconnections to inactive objects exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The maximum number of BICO interconnections (signal sinks) when deactivating a drive object was exceeded.
When deactivating a drive object, all BICO interconnections (signal sinks) are listed in the following parameters:
- r9498[0...29]: List of the BI/CI parameters involved.
- r9499[0...29]: List of the associated BO/CO parameters.
3-1106

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
The alarm automatically disappears as soon as no BICO interconnection (value = 0) is entered in r9498[29] and
r9499[29].
Notice:
When reactivating the drive object, all BICO interconnections should be checked and if required, re-established.
F01510
BICO: Signal source is not float type
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The requested connector output does not have the correct data type. This interconnection is not established.
Parameter number to which an interconnection should be made (connector output).
Remedy:
Interconnect this connector input with a connector output having a float data type.
F01511 (A)
BICO: Interconnection between different scalings
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The requested interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO
input using the reference values.
- the BICO output has different normalized units than the BICO input.
- message only for interconnections within a drive object.
Example:
The BICO output has, as normalized unit, voltage and the BICO input has current.
This means that the factor p2002 (contains the reference value for current) / p2001 (contains the reference value for
voltage) is calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Parameter number of the BICO input (signal sink).
Remedy:
No correction needed.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01512
BICO: No scaling available
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An attempt was made to determine a conversion factor for a scaling that does not exist.
Unit (e.g. corresponding to SPEED) for which an attempt was made to determine a factor.
Remedy:
Apply scaling or check the transfer value.
F01513 (A)
BICO: Spanning DO between different scalings
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The requested interconnection was established. However, a conversion is made between the BICO output and BICO
input using the reference values.
An interconnection is made between different drive objects and the BICO output has different normalized units than
the BICO input or the normalized units are the same but the reference values are different.

3-1107
Faults and alarms

Example:
The BICO output has, as standard unit, voltage and the BICO input has current; both lie in different drive objects.
This means that the factor p2002 (contains the reference value for current) / p2001 (contains the reference value for
voltage) is calculated between the BICO output and BICO input.
Remedy:
None necessary.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A01514 (F)
BICO: Error when writing during a reconnect
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
During a reconnect operation (e.g. while booting or downloading - but can also occur in normal operation) a parameter was not able to be written to.
Example:
When writing to a double word BICO input in the second index, the memory areas overlap (e.g. p8861). The parameter is then reset to the factory setting.
Remedy:
None necessary.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F01515 (A)
BICO: Writing to parameter not permitted as the master control is active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
While changing the number of CDS or when copying from CDS, the master control was active.
Remedy:
None necessary.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A01590 (F)
Drive: Motor maintenance interval expired
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected service/maintenance interval for this motor was reached.

Motor data set number.
See also: p0650 (Actual motor operating hours), p0651 (Motor operating hours maintenance interval)
Remedy:
carry out service/maintenance and reset the service/maintenance interval (p0651).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1108

Faults and alarms

F01600
SI CU: STOP A initiated
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected a fault and initiated a STOP A
(pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit).
- forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F01611 (defect in a monitoring channel).
0: Stop request from the Motor Module.
1005: Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present.
1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
1015: Feedback of the safe pulse suppression for Motor Modules connected in parallel are different.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F01611.
Remedy:
- select Safe Torque Off and deselect again.

- replace the Motor Module involved.
- carry out diagnostics for fault F01611.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01611
SI CU: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected a fault in the data cross-check
between the CU and Motor Module (MM) and initiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (SI CU: STOP A initiated)
is output.
0: Stop request from the Motor Module.
1 ... 999:
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9795.
1: SI monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880).
2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits.
3: SI SGE changeover tolerance time (p9650, p9850).
4: SI transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858).
5: SI enable Safe Brake Control (p9602, p9802).
6: SI Motion enable, safety-relevant functions (p9501, internal value).
7: SI pulse suppression delay time for Safe Stop 1 (p9652, p9852).
8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810).
9: SI debounce time for STO/SBC/SS1 (MM) (p9651, p9851).
11: SI Safe Brake Adapter mode, BICO interconnection (p9621, p9821).
12: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay ON time (p9622[0], p9822[0]).
13: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay OFF time (p9622[1], p9822[1]).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 * p9650 too many switching operations have
occurred at terminal EP of the Motor Module, or STO (also as subsequent response) was initiated too frequently via
PROFIsafe/TM54F.
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
2000: Status of the STO selection on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2004: Status of the STO selection for modules connected in parallel are different.
2005: Feedback signal of the safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Modules connected in parallel
are different.

3-1109
Faults and alarms

6000 ... 6999:

Error in the PROFIsafe control. The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message
C01711 of the Control Unit.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1 ... 5 and 7 ... 999:

- check the cross-checked data that resulted in a STOP F.
- upgrade the Motor Module software.
- upgrade the Control Unit software.
Re fault value = 6:
- check the EP terminal at the Motor Module (contact problems).
- PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller.
- check the wiring of the fail-safe inputs at the TM54F (contact problems).
Re fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852).
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) (contact problems).
- check the causes of the STO selection in r9772. When the SMM functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also be
selected using these functions.
Re fault value = 6000 ... 6999:
Refer to the description of the message values in safety message C01711.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
EP: Enable Pulses (pulse enable)
MM: Motor Module
SGE: Safety-relevant input
F01612
SI CU: STO inputs for power units connected in parallel different
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function on the Control Unit (CU) has identified different states of the AND'ed
STO inputs for power units connected in parallel and has initiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9658), fault F01600 (SI CU: STOP A initiated)
is output.
Binary image of the digital inputs of the Control Unit that are used as signal source for the function "Safe Torque Off".
Remedy:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650).
Note:
CU: Control Unit
3-1110

Faults and alarms

N01620 (F, A)
SI CU: Safe Torque Off active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The "Safe Torque Off" (STO) function has been selected on the Control Unit (CU) using the input terminal and is
active.
Note:
This message does not result in a safety stop response.
Remedy:
None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
Reaction upon F:
OFF2
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
N01621 (F, A)
SI CU: Safe Stop 1 active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The "Safe Stop 1" (SS1) function has been selected on the Control Unit (CU) and is active.
Note:
Remedy:
None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
Reaction upon F:
OFF3
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01625
SI CU: Sign-of-life error in safety data
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected an error in the sign-of-life of the
safety data between the CU and Motor Module (MM) and initiated a STOP A.
- there is either a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error or communication has failed.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.

3-1111
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved and, if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- deselect all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary.
- check the electrical cabinet design and cable routing for EMC compliance
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01630
SI CU: Brake control error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit (CU) has detected a brake control error and initiated
a STOP A.
10, 11:
Fault in "open holding brake" operation.
- Parameter p1278 incorrectly set.
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1 and p9602/p9802 = 0 (SBC
deactivated)).
- Ground fault in brake cable.
20:
Fault in "brake open" state.
- Short-circuit in brake winding.
30, 31:
Fault in "close holding brake" operation.
deactivated)).
40:
Fault in "brake closed" state.
50:
Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between the Control Unit and Motor Module (brake control).
80:
SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between Control Unit
and Motor Module (brake control diagnostics).
Note:
The following causes may apply to fault values:
- motor cable is not shielded correctly.
- defect in control circuit of the Motor Module.
3-1112

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check parameter p1278 (for SBC, only p1278 = 0 is permissible).

- check the motor holding brake connection.
- check the function of the motor holding brake.
- check that the electrical cabinet design and cable routing are in compliance with EMC regulations (e.g. shield of the
motor cable and brake conductors are connected with the shield connecting plate and the motor connectors are
tightly screwed to the housing).
Operation with Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter:
- check the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter connection.
- replace the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
F01649
SI CU: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the Control Unit has occurred.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
Remedy:

- re-commission the "Safety Integrated" function and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01650
SI CU: Acceptance test required
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Control Unit requires an acceptance test.
Note:
This fault results in a STOP A that can be acknowledged.
130: Safety parameters for the Motor Module not available.
1000: Reference and actual checksum on the Control Unit are not identical (booting).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on the Control Unit are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Control Unit (p9799 not equal to r9798).
- when deactivating the safety functions, p9501 or p9503 are not deleted.
2001: Reference and actual checksum on the Motor Module are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Motor Module (p9899 not equal to r9898).
- when deactivating the safety functions, p9501 or p9503 are not deleted.
2002: Enable of safety-related functions between the Control Unit and Motor Module differ (p9601 not equal to
p9801).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
2004: An acceptance test is required because a project with enabled safety-functions has been downloaded.

3-1113
Faults and alarms

2005: The Safety LogBook has identified that a functional safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test is
required.
2010: Safe Brake Control is enabled differently between the Control Unit and Motor Module (p9602 not equal to
p9802).
2020: Error when saving the safety parameters for the Motor Module.
3003: Acceptance test is required as a hardware-related safety parameter has been changed.
3005: The Safety LogBook has identified that a hardware-related safety checksum has changed. An acceptance test
is required.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance
test.
Remedy:
3-1114

- carry out safety commissioning routine.
- again carry out safety commissioning routine.
- check the safety parameters in the Control Unit and adapt the reference checksum (p9799).
- check the safety parameters in the Motor Module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
- enable the safety-related functions in the Control Unit and check in the Motor Module (p9601 = p9801).
Re fault value = 2003, 2004, 2005:
- Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
The procedure when carrying out an acceptance test as well as an example of the acceptance report are provided
in the documentation for SINAMICS Safety Integrated.
The fault with fault value 3005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is deselected.
- check enable of the safety-related brake control in the Control Unit and Motor Module (p9602 = p9802).
- carry out the function checks for the modified hardware and generate an acceptance report.
in the following literature:
SINAMICS S120 Function Manual Safety Integrated
The fault with fault value 3005 can only be acknowledged when the "STO" function is deselected.
- carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
See also: p9799 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit)), p9899 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module))

Faults and alarms

F01651
SI CU: Synchronization safety time slices unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The "Safety Integrated" function requires a synchronization of the safety time slices between the Control Unit (CU)
and Motor Module (MM) and between the Control Unit and the higher-level control. This synchronization routine was
unsuccessful.
Note:
150: Fault in the synchronization to the PROFIBUS master.
All other values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
See also: p9510 (SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master)
Remedy:

- check the setting of p9510 (SI Motion clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS master) and if required, correct.
General:
- upgrade the software of the higher-level control.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01652
SI CU: Illegal monitoring clock cycle
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
One of the Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycles is not permissible:

- the drive-based monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions required in the
system.
- the monitoring clock cycle for safe motion monitoring functions with the higher-level control is not permissible
(p9500).
- The sampling time for the current controller (p0112, p0115) cannot be supported.
Note:
- for enabled drive-based SI monitoring (p9601/p9801 > 0):
Minimum setting for the monitoring clock cycle (in s).
- with the motion monitoring function enabled (p9501 > 0):
100: No matching monitoring clock cycle was able to be found.
101: The monitoring clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle.
102: An error has occurred when transferring the DP clock cycle to the Motor Module (MM).
103: An error has occurred when transferring the DP clock cycle to the Sensor Module.
104,105:
- four times the current controller sampling time is greater than 1 ms when operating with a non-isochronous PROFIBUS.
- four times the current controller sampling time is greater than the DP clock cycle when operating with an isochronous PROFIBUS.
- The DP clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the sampling time of the current controller.
106: The monitoring clock cycle does not match the monitoring clock cycle of the TM54F.
107: Four times the current controller sampling time is greater than the actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) or
the actual value sensing clock cycle is not an integer multiple of the current controller sampling time.
108: The parameterized actual value sensing clock cycle cannot be set on this component.
109: If the motion monitoring functions have been parameterized as encoderless (p9506), the actual value sensing
clock cycle (p9511) and the current controller clock cycle must be identical.
110: The actual value sensing clock cycle (p9511) for safety with encoder (p9506 = 0) is less than 2 ms for this Control Unit (e.g. CU305).

3-1115
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
For enabled drive-based SI monitoring (p9601/p9801 > 0):

For enabled motion monitoring function (p9501 > 0):
- correct the monitoring clock cycle (p9500) and carry out POWER ON.
- actual value sensing clock cycle corresponds to position control clock cycle/DP clock cycle (factory setting).
- for the drive-based motion monitoring functions (p9601/p9801bit 2 = 1) the actual value sensing clock cycle can be
directly parameterized in P9511/p9311.
- set a separate actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511.
- restrict operation to a maximum of two vector drives. For the standard setting in p0112, p0115, the current controller
sampling time is automatically reduced to 250 s. If the standard values were changed, then the current controller
sampling time (p0112, p0115) should be appropriately set.
- increase the DP clock cycle for operation with a clock-cycle synchronous PROFIBUS so that there is a multiple
clock cycle ratio of at least 4:1 between the DP clock cycle and the current controller sampling time. A clock cycle
ratio of at least 8:1 is recommended.
- With firmware version 2.5, please ensure that parameter p9510 is set to 1 in the drive (clock cycle synchronous
operation).
- set the parameters for the monitoring clock cycles the same (p10000 and p9500 / p9300).
- set an actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 that matches the current controller clock cycle. A clock cycle ratio
of at least 8:1 is recommended.
- set a suitable actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511.
- if the DP clock cycle is used as the actual value sensing clock cycle for operation with isochronous PROFIBUS
(p9511 = 0), then a suitable DP clock cycle must be configured.
A suitable multiple of the DP clock cycle (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10) must be parameterized on the D410. Otherwise,
the clock cycle must be set to less than 8 ms.
- set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p115).
- set the actual value sensing clock cycle in p9511 to 2 ms or higher.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01653
SI CU: PROFIBUS configuration error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
There is a PROFIBUS configuration error for using Safety Integrated monitoring functions with a higher-level control
(SINUMERIK or F-PLC).
Note:
For safety functions that have been enabled, this fault results in a STOP A that cannot be acknowledged.
200: A safety slot for receive data from the control has not been configured.
210, 220: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the control has an unknown format.
230: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
231: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
240: The configured safety slot for the receive data from the SINUMERIK has the incorrect length.
250: A PROFIsafe slot is configured in the higher-level F control, however PROFIsafe is not enabled in the drive.
300: A safety slot for the send data to the control has not been configured.
310, 320: The configured safety slot for the send data to the control has an unknown format.
330: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
331: The configured safety slot for the send data to the F-PLC has the incorrect length.
340: The configured safety slot for the send data to the SINUMERIK has the incorrect length.
3-1116

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
The following generally applies:

- check and, if necessary, correct the PROFIBUS configuration of the safety slot on the master side.
- remove the PROFIsafe configuring in the higher-level F control or enable PROFIsafe in the drive.
- configure the PROFIsafe telegram matching the parameterization in the F-PLC.
The following applies for p9501.30 = 1 (FDI via PROFIsafe is enabled): PROFIsafe telegram 900 must be configured.
The following applies for p9501.30 = 0 (FDI via PROFIsafe not enabled): PROFIsafe telegram 30 must be configured.
F01655
SI CU: Align monitoring functions
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the Control Unit (CU) and Motor
Module (MM). Control Unit and Motor Module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring
functions.
- Safety Integrated software releases on the Control Unit and Motor Module are not compatible with one another.
Note:
Remedy:

Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01656
SI CU: Motor Module parameter error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the Motor Module (MM) in the non-volatile memory, an error
has occurred.
Note:
129: Safety parameters for the Motor Module corrupted.
131: Internal Motor Module software error.
132: Communication errors when uploading or downloading the safety parameters for the Motor Module.
255: Internal software error on the Control Unit.
Remedy:
- re-commission the safety functions.

Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module

3-1117
Faults and alarms

F01659
SI CU: Write request for parameter rejected
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Control Unit (CU) was rejected.
Note:
This fault does not result in a safety stop response.
1: The Safety Integrated password is not set.
2: A reset of the drive parameters was selected. However, the Safety Integrated parameters were not reset, as Safety
Integrated is presently enabled.
3: The interconnected STO input is in the simulation mode.
10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported.
11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported.
12: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit configuration.
13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported.
14: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version
of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different.
15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be
supported.
16: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported when the internal voltage
protection (p1231) is enabled.
17: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function although this cannot be supported for a parallel circuit
configuration.
18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported.
19: An attempt was made to enable the SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), although this cannot be supported.
See also: p0970, p3900, r9771, r9871
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
- set the Safety Integrated password (p9761).
Re fault value = 2:
- Inhibit Safety Integrated (p9501, p9601) or reset safety parameters (p0970 = 5), then reset the drive parameters
again.
Re fault value = 3:
- end the simulation mode for the digital input (p0795).
Re fault value = 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 17, 18, 19:
- check whether there are faults in the safety function alignment between the Control Unit and the Motor Module
involved (F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out diagnostics for the faults involved.
- use a Motor Module that supports the required function ("Safe Torque Off", "Safe Brake Control",
"PROFIsafe/PROFIsafe V2", "motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive").
- inhibit the internal voltage protection (p1231).
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
SBA: Safe Brake Adapter
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive
(Control Unit)), p9620 (SI signal source for STO (SH)/SBC/SS1 (Control Unit)), p9761 (SI password input), p9801
(SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module))
3-1118

Faults and alarms

F01660
SI CU: Safety-related functions not supported
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The Motor Module (MM) does not support the safety-related functions (e.g. the Motor Module version is not the correct one). Safety Integrated cannot be commissioned.
Note:
Remedy:
- use a Motor Module that supports the safety-related functions.

Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F01663
SI CU: Copying the SI parameters rejected
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
One of the following values is saved in p9700 or was entered offline: 87 or 208.
This is the reason that when booting, an attempt is made to copy SI parameters from the Control Unit to the Motor
Module. However, no safety-relevant function has been selected on the Control Unit (p9501 = 0, p9601 = 0). This is
the reason that copying is not possible.
Note:
See also: p9700 (SI Motion copy function)
Remedy:
- Set p9700 to 0.
- Check p9501 and p9601 and if required, correct.
- Restart the copying function by entering the corresponding value into p9700.
F01664
SI CU: No automatic firmware update
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
During booting, the system detected that the "Firmware update automatic" function (p7826 = 1) was not activated.
This function must be activated for automatic firmware updates/downgrades to prevent impermissible version combinations when safety functions are enabled.
Note:
See also: p7826 (Firmware update automatic)
Remedy:
For enabled drive-based SI monitoring:

1. Activate the "Firmware update automatic" function (p7826 = 1).
2. Save the parameters (p0977 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON.
When deactivating drive-based SI monitoring (p9601 = 0), the fault can be acknowledged after exiting the safety
commissioning mode.
F01665
SI CU: System is defective
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Before the drive booted the last time, it detected a defect in the system and carried out an emergency stop.

3-1119
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).

F01670
SI Motion: Invalid parameterization Sensor Module
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameterization of a Sensor Module used for Safety Integrated is not permissible.
Note:
1: No encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated.
2: An encoder was parameterized for Safety Integrated that does not have an A/B track (sine/cosine).
3: The encoder data set selected for Safety Integrated is still not valid.
4: A communication error with the encoder has occurred.
10: For an encoder used for Safety Integrated, not all of the Drive Data Sets (DDS) are assigned to the same Encoder
Data Set (EDS) (p0187 ... p0189).
Remedy:
- use and parameterize an encoder that Safety Integrated supports (encoder with track A/B sine-wave, p0404.4 = 1).
Re fault value = 3:
- check whether the drive or drive commissioning function is active and if required, exit this (p0009 = p00010 = 0),
save the parameters (p0971 = 1) and carry out a POWER ON
Re fault value = 4:
- check whether there is a DRIVE-CLiQ communication error between the Control Unit and the Sensor Module
involved and if required, carry out a diagnostics routine for the faults identified.
- align the EDS assignment of all of the encoders used for Safety Integrated (p0187 ... p0189).
Note:
F01671
SI Motion: Parameterization encoder error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameterization of the encoder used by Safety Integrated is different to the parameterization of the standard
encoder.
Note:
Parameter number of the non-corresponding safety parameter.
Remedy:
Align the encoder parameterization between the safety encoder and the standard encoder.
Note:
3-1120

Faults and alarms

F01672
SI CU: Motor Module software/hardware incompatible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The existing Motor Module software does not support safe motion monitoring or is not compatible to the software on
the Control Unit or there is a communications error between the Control Unit and Motor Module.
Note:
1: The existing Motor Module software does not support the safe motion monitoring function.
2, 3, 6, 8: There is a communications error between the Control Unit and Motor Module.
4, 5, 7: The existing Motor Module software is not compatible to the software on the Control Unit.
9: The current Motor Module software does not support safe encoderless motion monitoring.
Remedy:
involved
(F01655, F30655) and if required, carry out the appropriate diagnostics routine for the particular faults.
Re fault value = 1:
- use a Motor Module that supports safe motion monitoring
Re fault value = 2, 3, 6, 8:
Re fault value = 4, 5, 7:
Re fault value = 9:
- upgrade the Motor Module firmware.
Note:
F01673
SI Motion: Sensor Module software/hardware incompatible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The existing Sensor Module software and/or hardware does not support the safe motion monitoring function with the
higher-level control.
Note:
Remedy:
- upgrade the Sensor Module software.

- use a Sensor Module that supports the safe motion monitoring function.
Note:
F01680
SI Motion CU: Checksum error safety monitoring functions
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The actual checksum calculated by the drive and entered in r9728 via the safety-relevant parameters does not match
the reference checksum saved in p9729 at the last machine acceptance.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring.
1: Checksum error for SI parameters for actual values.
2: Checksum error for SI parameters for component assignment.

3-1121
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the safety-relevant parameters and if required, correct.

- perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified.
- carry out an acceptance test.
Note:
F01681
SI Motion CU: Incorrect parameter value
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameter cannot be parameterized with this value.

Note:
Parameter number with the incorrect value.
The gearbox stage has been set to an excessively high value for the parameter 9522 fault value.
Remedy:
Correct the parameter value.

With hysteresis/filtering enabled (p9501.16=1), the following applies:
Set parameters p9546/9346 and p9547/9347 acc. to the following rule: p9546 >= 2 * p9547; 9346 >= 2 * p9347.
The following rule must also be adhered to when actual value synchronization (p9501.3 = 1) is enabled: p9549 <=
p9547; p9349 <= p9347.
Correct the parameter 9522 fault value.
Also check p9516.0 for fault value 9517.
F01682
SI Motion CU: Monitoring function not supported
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The monitoring function enabled in p9501, p9601 or p9801 is not supported in this firmware version.
Note:
Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9501.1).
2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9501.7 and p9501.8 ... 15 and p9503).
3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9501.5).
4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9501.4).
5: Monitoring function FDI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9501.30).
6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9501.3).
9: Monitoring function not supported, enable bit reserved (p9501.2, p9501.17 ... 29, p9501.31, if required p9501.6).
10: Monitoring functions only supported for a SERVO drive object.
11: Only drive-based encoderless monitoring functions are supported.
12: Monitoring functions for ncSI are not supported on a CU305.
20: Drive-based motion monitoring functions are only supported in conjunction with PROFIsafe (p9501 and p9601.1
... 2 and p9801.1 ... 2).
21: PROFIsafe only supported in conjunction with motion monitoring functions in the drive (p9501 and p9601.1 ... 2
and p9801.1 ... 2).
Remedy:
Deselect the monitoring function involved (p9501, p9503, p9506, p9601, p9801).
Note:
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9503 (SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit))
3-1122

Faults and alarms

F01683
SI Motion CU: SOS/SLS enable missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The safety-relevant basic function "SOS/SLS" is not enabled in p9501 although other safety-relevant monitoring
functions are enabled.
Note:
Remedy:
Enable the function "SOS/SLS" (p9501.0) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit))
F01684
SI Motion: Safely limited position limit values interchanged
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
For the function "Safely-Limited Position" (SE), a lower value is in p9534 than in p9535.
Note:
1: Limit values SLP1 interchanged.
2: Limit values SLP2 interchanged.
Remedy:
Correct the limit values in p9534 and p9535 and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
F01685
SI Motion CU: Safely-limited speed limit value too high
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The limit value for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) is greater than the speed that corresponds to an
encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz.
Note:
Maximum permissible speed.
Remedy:
Correct the limit values for SLS and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit))

3-1123
Faults and alarms

F01686
SI Motion: Illegal parameterization cam position
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
At least one enabled "Safety Cam" (SCA) is parameterized in p9536 or p9537 too close to the tolerance range around
the modulo position.
The following conditions must be complied with to assign cams to a cam track:
- the cam length of cam x = p9536[x]-p9537[x] must be greater or equal to the cam tolerance + the position tolerance
(= p9540 + p9542). This also means that for cams on a cam track, the minus position value must be less than the
plus position value.
- the distance between 2 cams x and y (minus position value[y] - plus position value[x] = p9537[y] - p9536[x]) on a
cam track must be greater than or equal to the cam tolerance + position tolerance (= p9540 + p9542).
Note:
Number of the "Safe Cam" with an illegal position.
Remedy:
Correct the cam position and carry out a POWER ON.

Note:
See also: p9536 (SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit)), p9537 (SI Motion SCA (SN) plus cam position (Control Unit))
F01687
SI Motion: Illegal parameterization modulo value SCA (SN)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameterized modulo value for the "Safe Cam" (SCA) function is not a multiple of 360 000 mDegrees.
Note:
Remedy:
Correct the modulo value for SCA and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
See also: p9505 (SI Motion SCA (SN) modulo value (Control Unit))
F01688
SI Motion CU: Actual value synchronization not permissible
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
- It is not permissible to enable actual value synchronization for a 1-encoder system.

- It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and a monitoring function with absolute
reference (SCA/SLP).
Note:
Remedy:
- Either select the "actual value synchronization" function or parameterize a 2-encoder system.
- Either deselect the function "actual value synchronization" or the monitoring functions with absolute reference
(SCA/SLP) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9526 (SI Motion encoder assignment second
channel)
3-1124

Faults and alarms

C01689
SI Motion: Axis re-configured
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The axis configuration was changed (e.g. changeover between linear axis and rotary axis).
Parameter p0108.13 is internally set to the correct value.
Note:
Parameter number of parameter that initiated the change.
See also: p9502 (SI Motion axis type (Control Unit))
Remedy:
The following should be carried out after the changeover:

- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
Once the Control Unit has been switched on, safety message F01680 or F30680 indicates that the checksums in
r9398[0] and r9728[0] have changed in the drive. The following must, therefore, be carried out:
- activate safety commissioning mode again.
- complete safety commissioning of the drive.
- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010).
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM").
Note:
For the commissioning software, the units are only consistently displayed after a project upload.
F01690
SI Motion: Data save problem for the NVRAM
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
There is not sufficient memory space in the NVRAM on the drive to save parameters r9781 and r9782 (safety logbook).
Note:
0: There is no physical NVRAM available in the drive.
1: There is no longer any free memory space in the NVRAM.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 0:
- use a Control Unit NVRAM.
Re fault value = 1:
- deselect functions that are not required and that take up memory space in the NVRAM.
A01691 (F)
SI Motion: Ti and To unsuitable for DP cycle
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The configured times for PROFIBUS communication are not permitted and the DP cycle is used as the actual value
acquisition cycle for the safe movement monitoring functions:
Isochronous PROFIBUS: the total of Ti and To is too high for the set DP cycle. The DP cycle should be at least 1
current controller cycle greater than the sum of Ti and To.
Non-isochronous PROFIBUS: the DP cycle must be at least 4 x current controller cycle.

3-1125
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Configure Ti and To low so that they are suitable for the DP cycle or increase the DP cycle time.
Alternative when drive-based SI monitoring is enabled (p9601/p9801 > 0):
Use the actual value acquisition cycle p9511/p9311 and, in turn, set independently from DP cycle. The actual value
sensing clock cycle must be at least four times the current controller clock cycle. A clock cycle ratio of at least 8:1 is
recommended.
See also: p9511 (SI Motion actual value sensing cycle clock (Control Unit))
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
F01692
SI Motion CU: Parameter value not permitted for encoderless
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameter cannot be set to this value if encoderless motion monitoring functions have been selected in p9506.
Note:
Remedy:
- Correct the parameter specified in the fault value.

- If necessary, deselect encoderless motion monitoring functions (p9506).
A01693 (F)
SI Motion CU: Safety parameter setting changed, wam restart/POWER ON required
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON.
Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a warm restart or POWER ON.
Remedy:
- carry out a warm restart (p0971 = 3)

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
POWER ON
A01696 (F)
SI Motion: Testing of the motion monitoring functions selected when booting
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The test of the motion monitoring functions was already illegally active when booting.
This is the reason that the test is only carried out again after selecting the forced checking procedure parameterized
in p9705.
Note:
See also: p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal source)
Remedy:
Deselect the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions and then select again.
The signal source for initiation is parameterized in binector input p9705.
Notice:
Note:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
3-1126

Faults and alarms

A01697 (F)
SI Motion: Motion monitoring functions must be tested
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The time set in p9559 for the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions has been
exceeded. A new test is required.
After next selecting the forced checking procedure parameterized in p9705, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset.
Note:
As the shutdown paths are not automatically checked during booting, an alarm is always issued once booting is complete.
See also: p9559 (SI Motion forced checking procedure timer (Control Unit)), p9705 (SI Motion: Test stop signal
source)
Remedy:
Carry out the forced checking procedure of the safety motion monitoring functions.
The signal source for initiation is parameterized in binector input p9705.
Notice:
Note:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
A01698 (F)
SI CU: Commissioning mode active
Message value:
Drive object:
TM54F_MA, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The commissioning of the "Safety Integrated" function is selected.

This message is withdrawn after the safety functions have been commissioned.
Note:
See also: p0010
Remedy:
None necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
A01699 (F)
SI CU: Shutdown path must be tested
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The time set in p9659 for the forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown paths has been exceeded. The
safety shutdown paths must be re-tested.
After the next time the "STO" function is deselected, the message is withdrawn and the monitoring time is reset.
Note:
See also: p9659 (SI forced checking procedure timer)

3-1127
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Select STO and then deselect again.

Note:
CU: Control Unit
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
C01700
SI Motion CU: STOP A initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit).
Possible causes:
- stop request from the second monitoring channel
- pulses not suppressed after a parameterized time (p9557) after test stop selection.
- subsequent response to the message C01706 "SI Motion CU: Safe Acceleration Monitoring limit exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01701 "SI Motion CU: STOP B initiated".
Remedy:
- remove the cause of the fault on the second monitoring channel

- carry out a diagnostics routine for message C01706.
- check the value in p9557 (where available), increase the value if necessary, and carry out a POWER ON
- check the shutdown path of the Control Unit (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication if it has been implemented)
- replace the Motor Module/Power Module
- replace Control Unit.
This message can be acknowledged without a POWER ON as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: via the machine control panel in acceptance test mode only
Note:
C01701
SI Motion CU: STOP B initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp).
As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9556 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in
p9560 has been undershot, message C01700 "STOP A initiated" is output.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the second monitoring channel
- subsequent response to the message C01714 "SI Motion: Safely reduced speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C01711 "SI Motion: Defect in a monitoring channel".
Remedy:
- remove the cause of the fault on the second monitoring channel

Note:
3-1128

Faults and alarms

C01706
SI Motion CU: SBR limit undershot
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Motion monitoring functions with encoder: SBR - Safe Acceleration Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or
STOP C (SS2), the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
Encoderless motion monitoring function: SBR - Safe Brake Ramp Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS
changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C01700 "SI Motion: STOP A initiated".
Remedy:
Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor" or modify the
parameter settings for the "safe brake ramp".
Note:
See also: p9548 (SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit)), p9581 (SI Motion brake ramp reference
value (Control Unit)), p9582 (SI Motion brake ramp delay time (Control Unit)), p9583 (SI Motion brake ramp monitoring time (Control Unit))
C01707
SI Motion CU: Tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The actual position has distanced itself further from the target position than the standstill tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated".
Remedy:
- check whether safety faults are present and if required carry out the appropriate diagnostic routines for the particular faults.
- check whether the standstill tolerance matches the accuracy and control dynamic performance of the axis.
Note:
See also: p9530 (SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit))
C01708
SI Motion CU: STOP C initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
STOP2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP C (braking along the OFF3 deceleration ramp).
"Safe Operating Stop" (SOS) is activated after the parameterized timer has expired.
Possible causes:
- stop request from the higher-level control.
- subsequent response to the message C01715 "SI Motion: Safe end stop exceeded".
See also: p9552 (SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))

3-1129
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- remove the cause of the fault at the control.

This message can be acknowledged as follows:
- motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive: Via Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel
Note:
C01709
SI Motion CU: STOP D initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP D (braking along the path).

Possible causes:
See also: p9553 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy:

Note:
C01710
SI Motion CU: STOP E initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP E (retraction motion).

Possible causes:
See also: p9554 (SI Motion transition time STOP E to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy:

Note:
3-1130

Faults and alarms

C01711
SI Motion CU: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When cross-checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input
data or results of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
functions - i.e. safe operation is no longer possible.
If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, the message C01701 "SI
Motion: STOP B initiated" is output.
The message value that resulted in a STOP F is displayed in r9725. The described message values involve the data
cross-check between the Control Unit and Motor Module. If the drive is operated together with a SINUMERIK, the
message values are described in message 27001 of SINUMERIK.
The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does
not apply:
- cycle times not set uniformly (p9500/p9300 and p9511/p9311)
- differently parameterized axis types (p9502/p9302).
- excessively fast cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311).
- for message values 3, 44 ... 57, 232, and encoder systems, differently parameterized encoder values
(p9516/p9316, p9517/p9317, p9518/p9318, p9520/p9320, p9521/p9321, p9522/p9322, p9526/p9326).
- incorrect synchronization.
Message value (r9749, interpret decimal):
0 to 999: Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this fault.
Message values that are not subsequently listed are only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
0: Stop request from the other monitoring channel.
1: Status image of monitoring functions SOS, SLS or SLP (result list 1) (r9710[0], r9710[1]).
2: Status image of monitoring function SCA or n < nx (result list 2) (r9711[0], r9711[1]).
3: The position actual value differential (r9713) between the two monitoring channels is greater than the tolerance in
p9542/p9342. When actual value synchronization is enabled (p9501.3/p9301.3), the velocity differential (based on
the position actual value) is greater than the tolerance in p9549/p9349.
4: Error when synchronizing the crosswise data comparison between the two channels.
5: Function enable signals (p9501/p9301)
6: Limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])
10: Standstill tol. (p9530/p9330)
31: Position tolerance (p9542/p9342) or (p9549/p9349) when actual value synchronization is enabled
(p9501.3/p9301.3)
33: Time, velocity changeover (p9551/p9351)
35: Delay time, pulse canc. (p9556/p9356)
36: Checking time, pulse canc. (p9557/p9357)
37: Trans. time, STOP C to SOS (p9552/p9352)
38: Trans. time STOP D to SOS (p9553/p9353)
40: Stop response for SLS (p9561/p9361)
42: Shutdown speed, pulse canc. (p9560/p9360)
43: Memory test, stop response (STOP A).
44 ... 57: General
Possible cause 1 (during commissioning or parameter modification)
The tolerance value for the monitoring function is not the same on the two monitoring
channels.
Possible cause 2 (during active operation)
The limit values are based on the current actual value (r9713). If the safe actual values on the two monitoring channels do not match, the limit values, which have been set at a defined interval, will also be different (i.e. corresponding
to fault value 3). This can be ascertained by checking the safe actual positions.
44: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])
45: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value for SLS1 (p9531[0]/p9331[0])

3-1131
Faults and alarms

52: Standstill position + tolerance (p9530/9330)
53: Standstill position - tolerance (p9530/9330)
54: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346) + tolerance (p9542/p9342)
55: Position actual value (r9713) + limit value nx (p9546/p9346)
56: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346)
57: Position actual value (r9713) - limit value nx (p9546/p9346) - tolerance (p9542/p9342)
58: Actual stop request.
75: Velocity limit nx (p9546, p9346).
76: Stop response for SLS1 (p9563[0]/p9363[0])
81: Velocity tolerance for SBR (p9548/p9348)
82: SGEs for SLS correction factor.
83: Acceptance test timer (p9558/p9358)
84: Trans. time STOP F (p9555/p9355)
85: Trans. time bus failure (p9580/p9380)
86: ID 1-encoder system (p9526/p9326).
87: Encoder assignment, 2nd channel (p9526/p9326)
89: Encoder limit freq.
230: Filter time constant for n < nx.
231: Hysteresis tolerance for n < nx.
232: Smoothed velocity actual value.
233: Smoothed velocity actual value + limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle + hysteresis tolerance.
234: Smoothed velocity actual value + limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle.
235: Smoothed velocity actual value - limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle.
236: Smoothed velocity actual value - limit value nx / safety monitoring clock cycle - hysteresis tolerance.
237: SGA n < nx.
238: Speed limit value for SBR (p9568/p9368).
239: Acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383).
240: Inverse value of acceleration for SBR (p9581/p9381 and p9583/p9383).
241: Deceleration time for SBR (p9582/p9382).
242: Encoderless safety (p9506/p9306).
243: Extended alarm acknowledgment (p9507/p9307).
244: Encoderless actual value sensing filter time (p9587/p9387).
245: Encoderless actual value sensing minimum current (p9588/p9388).
246: Voltage tolerance acceleration (p9589/p9389).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at safety-relevant inputs.
1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer.
1005: Pulses already suppressed for test stop selection.
1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ.
1012: Plausibility violation of the actual value from the encoder.
1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles.
1021: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. channel and Sensor Module.
1022: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder CU
1023: Error in the effectiveness test in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
1032: Sign-of-life error for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder MM
1033: Error checking offset between POS1 and POS2 for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder CU
1034: Error checking offset between POS1 and POS2 for DRIVE-CLiQ encoder MM
1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless)
1042: Current/voltage plausibility error
1043: Too many acceleration phases
1044: Actual current values plausibility error.
5000 ... 5140: PROFIsafe message values.
5000, 5014, 5023, 5024, 5030 ... 5032, 5042, 5043, 5052, 5053, 5068, 5072, 5073, 5082 ... 5087, 5090, 5091, 5122
... 5125, 5132 ... 5135, 5140: An internal software error has occurred (only for internal Siemens troubleshooting).
5012: Error when initializing the PROFIsafe driver.
5013: The result of the initialization is different for the two controllers.
5022: Error when evaluating the F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the
expected values in the PROFIsafe driver.
5025: The result of the F parameterization is different for the two controllers.
5026: CRC error for the F parameters. The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the value
calculated in the PST.
3-1132

Faults and alarms

5065: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
5066: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
6000 ... 6166: PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET).
6000: An internal software error has occurred (only for internal Siemens troubleshooting).
6064 ... 6071: Error when evaluating the F parameters. The values of the transferred F parameters do not match the
expected values in the PROFIsafe driver.
6064: Destination address and PROFIsafe address are different (F_Dest_Add).
6065: Destination address not valid (F_Dest_Add).
6066: Source address not valid (F_Source_Add).
6067: Watchdog time not valid (F_WD_Time).
6068: Incorrect SIL level (F_SIL).
6069: Incorrect F-CRC length (F_CRC_Length).
6070: Incorrect F parameter version (F_Par_Version).
6071: CRC error for the F parameters (CRC1). The transferred CRC value of the F parameters does not match the
value calculated in the PROFIsafe driver.
6072: F parameterization is inconsistent.
6165: A communications error was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
6166: A time monitoring error (timeout) was identified when receiving the PROFIsafe telegram.
See also: p9555 (SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit)), r9725 (SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F)
Remedy:

The monitoring clock cycles in both channels and the axis types should be checked for equality and the same setting
applied if necessary. If the error continues to be identified, increasing the monitoring clock cycles may resolve it.
Re fault value = 0:
- no error was identified in this monitoring channel. Note the error message of the other monitoring channel (for MM:
C30711).
Re fault value = 3:
Commissioning phase:
Encoder evaluation for own or second channel has been set incorrectly --> Correct the encoder evaluation.
In operation:
Check the mechanical design and the encoder signals.
Re fault value = 4:
The monitoring clock cycles in both channels should be checked for equality and if required, set the same. In combination with fault value 5 from the other monitoring channel (with MM: C30711), the monitoring clock cycle settings
must be increased.
Re fault value = 1 ... 999:
- if the fault value is listed under cause: Check the crosswise-compared parameters to which the fault value refers.
- copy the safety parameters.
- correction of the encoder evaluation. The actual values differ as a result of mechanical faults (V belts, travel to a
mechanical endstop, wear and window setting that is too narrow, encoder fault, ...).
- investigate the signal associated with the safety-relevant input (contact problems).
- check the conditions for pulse enable.
- for diagnostics, refer to parameter (r9571).
- upgrade the Sensor Module software.
- check the encoder parameters in the encoder systems for equality (p9515/p9315, p9519/p9319, p9523/p9323,
p9524/p9324, p9525/p9325, p9529/p9329).
- check the communication link.
- increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511).
- replace the hardware.

3-1133
Faults and alarms

Re fault value = 5000, 5014, 5023, 5024, 5030, 5031, 5032, 5042, 5043, 5052, 5053, 5068, 5072, 5073, 5082 ...
5087, 5090, 5091, 5122 ... 5125, 5132 ... 5135, 5140:
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810). It is
not permissible for the PROFIsafe address to be 0 or FFFF!
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810).
- check the setting of the values of the F parameters at the PROFIsafe slave (F_SIL, F_CRC_Length,
F_Par_Version, F_Source_Add, F_Dest_add, F_WD_Time).
- check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at
the PROFIsafe slave and update.
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave (cons. No. / CRC).
- check the setting of the value for F parameter F_WD_Time on the PROFIsafe slave and increase if necessary.
- evaluate diagnostic information in the F host.
- check PROFIsafe connection.
- increase the monitoring cycle clock settings (p9500, p9511).
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the setting of the PROFIsafe address of the Control Unit (p9610) and that of the Motor Module (p9810).
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Dest_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
destination address to be either 0 or FFFF!
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Source_Add at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for
the source address to be either 0 or FFFF!
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_WD_Time at the PROFIsafe slave. It is not permissible for the
watch time to be 0!
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_SIL at the PROFIsafe slave. The SIL level must correspond to
SIL2!
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_CRC_Length at the PROFIsafe slave. The setting of the CRC2
length is 2-byte CRC in the V1 mode and 3-byte CRC in the V2 mode!
- check the setting of the value in the F parameter F_Par_Version at the PROFIsafe slave. The value for the F parameter version is 0 in the V1 mode and 1 in the V2 mode!
- check the settings of the values of the F parameters and the F parameter CRC (CRC1) calculated from these at
the PROFIsafe slave and, if required, update.
3-1134

Faults and alarms


- check the settings of the values for the F parameters and, if required, correct.
The following combinations are permissible for F parameters F_CRC_Length and F_Par_Version:
F_CRC_Length = 2-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 0
F_CRC_Length = 3-byte CRC and F_Par_Version = 1
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave.
- check the configuration and communication at the PROFIsafe slave.
- evaluate diagnostic information in the F host.
- check PROFIsafe connection.
See also: p9300 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Motor Module)), p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle (Control
Unit))
C01712
SI Motion CU: Defect in F-IO processing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between parameters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
The safety message C01711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F.
If at least one monitoring function is active, the safety message C01701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output after
the parameterized timer has expired.
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this message.
1: SI discrepancy monitoring time inputs (p10002, p10102).
2: SI acknowledgement internal event input terminal (p10006, p10106).
3: SI STO input terminal (p10022, p10122).
4: SI SS1 input terminal (p10023, p10123).
5: SI SS2 input terminal (p10024, p10124).
6: SI SOS input terminal (p10025, p10125).
7: SI SLS input terminal (p10026, p10126).
8: SI SLS_Limit(1) input terminal (p10027, p10127).
9: SI SLS_Limit(2) input terminal (p10028, p10128).
10: SI Safe State signal selection (p10039, p10139).
11 SI F-DI input mode (p10040, p10140).
12: SI F-DO 0 signal sources (p10042, p10142).
13: Different states for static inactive signal sources (p10006, p10022 ... p10028).
14: SI discrepancy monitoring time outputs (p10002, p10102).
15: SI acknowledgment internal event (p10006, p10106).
16: SI test sensor feedback signal test mode selected for test stop (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147).
17: SI wait time for test stop at DOs (p10001).
18 ... 25: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of internal readback
signal, generated from the selected test stop mode.
26 ... 33: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of external readback
signal, generated from the selected test stop mode.
34 ... 41: SI test sensor feedback signal (p10046, p10146, p10047, p10147). Expected state of second internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode.
42: Internal data for processing the second internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode
(p10047, p10147).
43: Internal data for processing the internal readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047,
p10147).

3-1135
Faults and alarms

44: Internal data for processing the external readback signal, generated from the selected test stop mode (p10047,
p10147).
45: Internal data for initialization state of test stop mode, dependent upon test stop parameters.
46: SI digital inputs debounce time (p10017, p10117)
47: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150)
48: Selection F-DI for PROFIsafe (p10050, p10150)
Remedy:
- check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required.

- ensure equality by copying the SI data to the second channel and then carry out an acceptance test.
- check monitoring clock cycle in p9500 and p9300 for equality.
Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe.
Unit))
C01714
SI Motion CU: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive has moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9531). The drive is stopped as a result of
the configured stop response (p9563).
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded.
Remedy:
- check the traversing/motion program in the control.

- check the limits for "Safely-Limited Speed (SLS) and if required, adapt (p9531).
Note:
See also: p9531 (SI Motion SLS (SG) limit values (Control Unit)), p9563 (SI Motion SLS (SG)-specific stop response
(Control Unit))
C01745
SI Motion CU: Checking braking torque for the brake test
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON (IMMEDIATELY)
Cause:
The scaling of the brake torque for the brake test can be changed using parameter p2003.
An acceptance test must be carried out again for the braking test. This determines whether the braking test is still
carried out with the correct braking torque.
Remedy:

- repeat the acceptance test for the safe brake test if the brake test is used.
See also: p2003 (Reference torque)
C01750
SI Motion CU: Hardware fault safety-relevant encoder
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The encoder that is used for the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions signals a hardware fault.
Encoder status word 1, encoder status word 2 that resulted in the message.
3-1136

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the encoder connection.

- replace the encoder.
- motion monitoring functions with SINUMERIK: Via the machine control panel.
C01751
SI Motion CU: Effectivity test error safety-relevant encoder
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder for safe motion monitoring signals an error for the effectivity tests.
Remedy:

A01796 (F, N)
SI Motion CU: Wait for communication
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The drive waits for communication to be established with SINUMERIK or TM54F to execute the safety-relevant
motion monitoring functions.
Note:
In this state, the pulses are safely suppressed.
Remedy:
If, after a longer period of time, the message is not automatically withdrawn, the following checks have to be made
as appropriate:
For communication with SINUMERIK, the following applies:
- check any other PROFIBUS messages/signals present and remove their cause.
- check that assignment of the axes on the higher-level control to the drives in the drive unit is correct.
- check enable signal of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions for the corresponding axis on the higherlevel control and if required, set it.
For communication with TM54F, the following applies:
- check any other messages/signals present for DRIVE-CLiQ communication with the TM54F and remove their
cause.
- check the setting of p10010. All the drive objects controlled by the TM54F must be listed.
See also: p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Control Unit)), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated
in the drive (Motor Module)), p10010 (SI drive object assignment)
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
C01798
SI Motion CU: Test stop running
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The test stop is active.
Remedy:
None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when the test stop is finished.
Note:

3-1137
Faults and alarms

C01799
SI Motion CU: Acceptance test mode active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The acceptance test mode is active. The POWER ON signals of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions can
be acknowledged during the acceptance test using the RESET button of the higher-level control.
Remedy:
None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode.
Note:
F01800
DRIVE-CLiQ: Hardware/configuration error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ connection fault has occurred.

100 ... 107:
Communication via DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100 ... X107 has not been switched to cyclic operation. The cause may be
an incorrect structure or a configuration that results in an impossible bus timing.
10:
Loss of the DRIVE-CLiQ connection. The cause may be, for example, that the DRIVE-CLiQ cable was withdrawn
from the Control Unit or as a result of a short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
11:
Repeated faults when detecting the connection. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
12:
A connection was detected but the node ID exchange mechanism does not function. The reason is probably that the
component is defective. This fault can only be acknowledged in cyclic communication.
Remedy:

- ensure that the DRIVE-CLiQ components have the same firmware releases.
- avoid longer topologies for short current controller clock cycles.
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ cables at the Control Unit.
- remove any short-circuit for motors with DRIVE-CLiQ.
- replace the component involved.
A01840
SMI: Component found without motor data
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An SMI/DQI without motor data has been found (e.g. SMI installed as replacement part).
Component number from target topology.
Remedy:
1. Download the SMI/DQI data (motor/encoder data) from the backup again (p4690, p4691).
2. Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for this component.
Note:
DQI: DRIVE-CLiQ Sensor Integrated
See also: p4690 (SMI spare part component number), p4691 (Save/download SMI spare part data)
3-1138

Faults and alarms

A01900 (F)
PROFIBUS: Configuration telegram error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect configuring telegram.

50: Syntax error.
51: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for process data
exchange and their sequence are defined in p0978.
52: Too many PZD data words for output or input to a drive object. The number of possible PZD items in a drive
object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2.
53: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
54: Cyclic operation not active.
55: Invalid operating state.
Remedy:
Check the bus configuration on the master and slave sides.

Re alarm value = 51:
Check the list of the drive objects with process data exchange (p0978). With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive
objects in the list are excluded from the process data exchange.
Check the number of data words for output and input to a drive object.
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A01901 (F)
PROFIBUS: Parameterizing telegram error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A PROFIBUS master attempts to establish a connection using an incorrect parameterizing telegram.

1: Incorrect parameterizing bits.
10: Illegal length of an optional parameterizing block.
11: Illegal ID of an optional parameterizing block.
20: Double parameterizing block for clock synchronization.
21: Incorrect parameterizing block for clock synchronization. For more information, see A01902.
22: Incorrect parameterizing bits for clock synchronization.
23: Illegal clock synchronization for PZD interface 2.
30: Double parameterizing block for peer-to-peer data transfer.
31: Incorrect parameterizing block for peer-to-peer data transfer.
Remedy:
Check the bus configuration:

- bus addresses
- slave configuring
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A01902
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation parameterization not permissible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

0: Bus cycle time Tdp < 0.5 ms.
1: Bus cycle time Tdp > 32 ms.
2: Bus cycle time Tdp is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
3: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti > Bus cycle time Tdp or Ti = 0.
4: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
5: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To >= Bus cycle time Tdp or To = 0.

3-1139
Faults and alarms

6: Instant of the setpoint acceptance To is not an integer multiple of the current controller clock cycle.
7: Master application cycle time Tmapc is not an integer multiple of the speed controller clock cycle.
8: Bus reserve bus cycle time Tdp - data exchange time Tdx less than two current controller clock cycles.
10: Instant of the setpoint acceptance not To <= data exchange time Tdx + To_min.
11: Master application cycle time Tmapc > 14 or Tmapc = 0.
12: PLL tolerance window Tpll_w > Tpll_w_max.
13: Bus cycle time Tdp is not a multiple of all basic clock cycles p0110[x].
14: For COMM BOARD with the setting To - 1 = Tdp - Ti, the instant of the setpoint acceptance is not To <= Data
exchange time Tdx + 2 * To_min.
15: This configuration is not permitted for Tdp < 1 ms.
16: Instant of the actual value sensing Ti is less than the permitted value (COMM BOARD: Ti >= 2).
17: The setting (To + Ti = Tdp + 2) is not permitted for COMM BOARD.
Remedy:
- adapt the parameterizing telegram.

- adapt the current and speed controller clock cycle.
- check the number of specific drive object types in the configuration.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
F01910 (N, A)
PROFIBUS: Setpoint timeout
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF3 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The receipt of setpoints from the PROFIBUS interface is interrupted because the bus connection is interrupted or the
PROFIBUS master is switched off or was set to the STOP state.
See also: p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time)
Remedy:
Restore the bus connection and set the PROFIBUS master to RUN.
Slave redundancy: For operation on a Y link, it must be ensured that "DP alarm mode = DPV1" is set in the slave
parameterization.
See also: p2047 (PROFIBUS additional monitoring time)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01911
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation clock cycle failure
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The global control telegram to synchronize the clock cycles has failed - in cyclic operation - for several DP clock
cycles or has violated the time grid specified in the parameterizing telegram over several consecutive DP clock
cycles (refer to the bus cycle time, Tdp and Tpllw).
Remedy:
- check the PROFIBUS cables and connectors.

- check whether communication was briefly or permanently interrupted.
- check the bus and master for utilization level (e.g. bus cycle time Tdp was set too short).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
3-1140

Faults and alarms

F01912
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The maximum permissible number of errors in the master sign-of-life (clock synchronous operation) has been
exceeded in cyclic operation.
Remedy:
- check the physical bus configuration (terminating resistor, shielding, etc.).

- correct the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045).
- check whether the master correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. create a trace with STW2.12 ... STW2.15 and trigger
signal ZSW1.3).
- check the permissible telegram failure rate (p0925).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
F01915
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation sign-of-life failure drive object 1
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Group display for problems with the sign-of-life of the master (clock-cycle synchronous operation) on the drive object
1 (Control Unit).
For central measurements, synchronism with the central master is lost.
Remedy:
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01920 (F)
PROFIBUS: Interruption cyclic connection
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The cyclic connection to the PROFIBUS master is interrupted.
Remedy:
Establish the PROFIBUS connection and activate the PROFIBUS master in the cyclic mode.
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A01921 (F)
PROFIBUS: Receive setpoints after To
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Output data of PROFIBUS master (setpoints) received at the incorrect instant in time within the PROFIBUS clock
cycle.
Remedy:
- check bus configuration.

- check parameters for clock cycle synchronization (ensure To > Tdx).
Note:
To: Time of setpoint acceptance
Tdx: Data exchange time
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY

3-1141
Faults and alarms

A01930
IF1: PB/PN current controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The current controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock cycle synchronous operation.
Number of the drive object with different current controller clock cycle.
Remedy:
Set current controller clock cycles to identical values (p0115[0]).

Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
See also: p0115
A01931
IF1: PB/PN speed controller clock cycle clock cycle synchronous not equal
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The speed controller clock cycle of all drives must be set the same for the clock cycle synchronous operation.
Number of the drive object with the different speed controller clock cycle.
Remedy:
Set the speed controller clock cycles the same (p0115[1]).

Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
See also: p0115
A01932
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronization missing for DSC
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
There is no clock cycle synchronization and DSC is selected.

Note:
DSC: Dynamic Servo Control
Remedy:
Set the clock cycle synchronization when configuring the bus.
A01940
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronism not reached
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The bus is in the data exchange state and clock synchronous operation has been selected using the parameterizing
telegram. It was not possible to synchronize to the clock cycle specified by the master.
- the master does not send a clock synchronous global control telegram although clock synchronous operation was
selected when configuring the bus.
- the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameterizing telegram.
- at least one drive object has a pulse enable (not controlled from PROFIBUS/PROFINET either).
3-1142

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the master application and bus configuration.

- check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the master.
- check that no drive object has a pulse enable. Only enable the pulses after synchronizing the PROFIBUS/PROFINET drives.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01941
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal missing when establishing bus communication
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is not being received.
Remedy:
Check the master application and bus configuration.

Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01943
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle signal error when establishing bus communication
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
telegram. The global control telegram for synchronization is being irregularly received.
-.the master is sending an irregular global control telegram.
- the master is using another clock synchronous DP clock cycle than was transferred to the slave in the parameterizing telegram.
Remedy:
- check the master application and bus configuration.

- check the consistency between the clock cycle input when configuring the slave and clock cycle setting at the master.
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
A01944
IF1: PB/PN sign-of-life synchronism not reached
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
telegram. Synchronization with the master sign-of-life (STW2.12 ... STW2.15) could not be completed because the
sign-of-life is changing differently to how it was configured in the Tmapc time grid.
Remedy:
- ensure that the master correctly increments the sign-of-life in the master application clock cycle Tmapc.
- correct the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (p2045).
Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET

3-1143
Faults and alarms

A01945
PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher failed
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer, the connection to at least one Publisher has failed.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret binary):
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection failed.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection failed.
Remedy:
- check the PROFIBUS cables.

- carry out a first commissioning of the Publisher that has the failed connection.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)
F01946 (A)
PROFIBUS: Connection to the Publisher aborted
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
At this drive object, the connection to at least one Publisher for PROFIBUS peer-to-peer data transfer in cyclic operation has been aborted.
Bit 0 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[0], connection aborted.
...
Bit 15 = 1: Publisher with address in r2077[15], connection aborted.
Remedy:
- check the PROFIBUS cables.

- check the state of the Publisher that has the aborted connection.
See also: r2077 (PROFIBUS diagnostics peer-to-peer data transfer addresses)
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F01950 (N, A)
IF1: PB/PN clock cycle synchronous operation synchronization unsuccessful
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Synchronization of the internal clock cycle to the global control telegram has failed. The internal clock cycle exhibits
an unexpected shift.
Remedy:

Note:
IF1: Interface 1
PB: PROFIBUS
PN: PROFINET
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1144

Faults and alarms

F01951
CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization application clock cycle missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
If DRIVE-CLiQ components with different application clock cycle are operated on a DRIVE-CLiQ port, this requires
synchronization with the Control Unit.
This synchronization routine was unsuccessful.
Remedy:

- upgrade the software of the DRIVE-CLiQ components.
F01952
CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization of component not supported
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The existing system configuration requires that the connected DRIVE-CLiQ components support the synchronization
between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and the application clock cycle.
However, not all DRIVE-CLiQ components have this functionality.
Component number of the first faulty DRIVE-CLiQ component.
Remedy:
Upgrade the firmware of the component specified in the fault value.

Note:
If required, also upgrade additional components in the DRIVE-CLiQ line.
A01953
CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization not completed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
After the drive system is powered up, the synchronization between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle
and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance.
Remedy:
Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.

If the error occurs after the drive sampling times were adjusted, and if a Terminal Module 31 (TM31) is being used,
the sampling times (p0115, p4099) should be set as integer multiples to the drive clock cycles (p0115).
F01954
CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
and application clock cycle was started and was not able to be successfully completed.
Remedy:
1. Ensure perfect functioning of the DRIVE-CLiQ.

2. Initiate a new synchronization, e.g. as follows:
- remove the PROFIBUS master and re-insert again.
- restart the PROFIBUS master.
- power down the Control Unit and power it up again.
- press the Control Unit reset button.
- reset the parameter and download the saved parameters (p0009 = 30, p0976 = 2).

3-1145
Faults and alarms

A01955
CU DRIVE-CLiQ: Synchronization DO not completed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
and application clock cycle was started but was not completed within the selected time tolerance.
Remedy:
Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components of the DO.
A01990 (F)
USS: PZD configuration error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The configuration of the process data (PZD) for the USS protocol is incorrect.
2: PZD amount (p2022) too great for the first drive object (p978[0]).
The number of possible PZD items in a drive object is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD
IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2.
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 2:
Check the amount of USS PZD (p2022) and the maximum PZD amount (r2050/p2051) for the first drive object
(p0978[0]).
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A02000
Function generator: Start not possible
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The function generator has already been started.
Remedy:
Stop the function generator and restart again if necessary.

Note:
The alarm is reset as follows:
- remove the cause of this alarm.
- restart the function generator.
See also: p4800 (Function generator control)
A02005
Function generator: Drive does not exist
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The drive object specified for connection does not exist.

See also: p4815 (Function generator drive number)
Remedy:
Use the existing drive object with the corresponding number.

Note:
3-1146

Faults and alarms

A02006
Function generator: No drive specified for connection
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
No drive specified for connection in p4815.

Remedy:
At least one drive to be connected must be specified in p4815.

Note:
A02007
Function generator: Drive not SERVO / VECTOR
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The drive object specified for connection is not a SERVO / VECTOR.

Remedy:
Use a SERVO / VECTOR drive object with the corresponding number.

Note:
A02008
Function generator: Drive specified a multiple number of times
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The drive object specified for connection is already specified.

Drive object number of the drive object that is specified a multiple number of times.
Remedy:
Specify a different drive object.

Note:
A02009
Function generator: Illegal mode
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The set operating mode (p1300) of the drive object is not permissible when using the function generator.
Number of the drive object involved.
Remedy:
Change the operating mode for this drive object to p1300 = 20 (encoderless speed control) or p1300 = 21 (speed
control with encoder).
Note:

3-1147
Faults and alarms

A02010
Function generator: Speed setpoint from the drive is not zero
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The speed setpoint of a drive selected for connection is greater than the value for the standstill detection set using
p1226.
Remedy:
For all of the drives specified for connection, set the speed setpoints to 0.
Note:
A02011
Function generator: The actual drive speed is not zero
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The speed actual value of a drive selected for connection is greater than the value for the standstill detection set
using p1226.
Remedy:
Set the relevant drives to zero speed before starting the function generator.
Note:
A02015
Function generator: Drive enable signals missing
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The master control and/or enable signals are missing to connect to the specified drive.
Remedy:
Fetch the master control to the specified drive object and set all enable signals.
Note:
A02016
Function generator: Magnetizing running
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Magnetizing has not yet been completed on a drive object specified for connection.
3-1148

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Wait for magnetizing of the motor (r0056.4).

Note:
See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control)
A02020
Function generator: Parameter cannot be changed
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
This parameter setting cannot be changed when the function generator is active (p4800 = 1).
See also: p4810, p4812, p4813, p4815, p4820, p4821, p4822, p4823, p4824, p4825, p4826, p4827, p4828, p4829
Remedy:
- stop the function generator before parameterizing (p4800 = 0).

- if required, start the function generator (p4800 = 1).
Note:
See also: p4800 (Function generator control)
A02025
Function generator: Period too short
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The value for the period is too short.

See also: p4821 (Function generator period)
Remedy:
Check and adapt the value for the period.

Note:
See also: p4821 (Function generator period)
A02026
Function generator: Pulse width too high
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected pulse width is too high.

The pulse width must be less than the period duration.
See also: p4822 (Function generator pulse width)
Remedy:
Reduce pulse width.

Note:
See also: p4821 (Function generator period), p4822 (Function generator pulse width)
A02030
Function generator: Physical address equals zero
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The specified physical address is zero.

See also: p4812 (Function generator physical address)

3-1149
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Set a physical address with a value other than zero.

Note:
See also: p4812 (Function generator physical address)
A02040
Function generator: Illegal value for offset
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The value for the offset is higher than the value for the upper limit or lower than the value for the lower limit.
See also: p4826 (Function generator offset)
Remedy:
Adjust the offset value accordingly.

Note:
See also: p4826 (Function generator offset), p4828 (Function generator lower limit), p4829 (Function generator
upper limit)
A02041
Function generator: Illegal value for bandwidth
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The bandwidth referred to the time slice clock cycle of the function generator has either been set too low or too high.
Depending on the time slice clock cycle, the bandwidth is defined as follows:
Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 * time slice clock cycle)
Bandwidth_min = Bandwidth_max / 100000
Example:
Assumption: p4830 = 125 s
--> Bandwidth_max = 1 / (2 * 125 s) = 4000 Hz
--> Bandwidth_min = 4000 Hz / 100000 = 0.04 Hz
Note:
p4823: Function generator bandwidth
p4830: Function generator time slice clock cycle
See also: p4823 (Function generator bandwidth), p4830 (Function generator time slice cycle)
Remedy:
Check the value for the bandwidth and adapt accordingly.

Note:
A02047
Function generator: Time slice clock cycle invalid
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
See also: p4830 (Function generator time slice cycle)
Remedy:
Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
Note:
See also: r7901 (Sampling times)
3-1150

Faults and alarms

A02050
Trace: Start not possible
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The trace has already been started.

See also: p4700 (Trace control)
Remedy:
Stop the trace and, if necessary, start again.
A02055
Trace: Recording time too short
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The trace duration is too short.

The minimum is twice the value of the trace clock cycle.
See also: p4721 (Trace recording time)
Remedy:
Check the selected recording time and, if necessary, adjust.
A02056
Trace: Recording cycle too short
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected recording cycle is shorter than the selected basic clock cycle 0 (p0110[0]).
See also: p4720 (Trace recording cycle)
Remedy:
Increase the value for the trace cycle.
A02057
Trace: Time slice clock cycle invalid
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The time slice clock cycle selected does not match any of the existing time slices.
See also: p4723 (Time slice cycle for trace)
Remedy:
Enter an existing time slice clock cycle. The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
A02058
Trace: Time slice clock cycle for endless trace not valid
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for the endless trace
Remedy:
Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 2 ms for up to 4 recording channels or >= 4 ms
from 5 recording channels per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.

3-1151
Faults and alarms

A02059
Trace: Time slice clock cycle for 2 x 8 recording channels not valid
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected time slice clock cycle cannot be used for more than 4 recording channels.
Remedy:
Enter the clock cycle of an existing time slice with a cycle time >= 4 ms or reduce the number of recording channels
to 4 per trace.
The existing time slices can be read out via p7901.
A02060
Trace: Signal to be traced missing
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
- a signal to be traced was not specified.

- the specified signals are not valid.
See also: p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace
record signal 3)
Remedy:
- specify the signal to be traced.

- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A02061
Trace: Invalid signal
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
- the specified signal does not exist.

- the specified signal can no longer be traced (recorded).
See also: p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace record signal 2), p4733 (Trace
record signal 3)
Remedy:
- specify the signal to be traced.

- check whether the relevant signal can be traced.
A02062
Trace: Invalid trigger signal
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
- a trigger signal was not specified.

- the specified signal does not exist.
- the specified signal is not a fixed-point signal.
- the specified signal cannot be used as a trigger signal for the trace.
See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal)
Remedy:
Specify a valid trigger signal.
3-1152

Faults and alarms

A02063
Trace: Invalid data type
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The specified data type to select a signal using a physical address is invalid.
See also: p4711 (Trace trigger signal), p4730 (Trace record signal 0), p4731 (Trace record signal 1), p4732 (Trace
record signal 2), p4733 (Trace record signal 3)
Remedy:
Use a valid data type.
A02070
Trace: Parameter cannot be changed
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The trace parameter settings cannot be changed when the trace is active.
See also: p4700, p4710, p4711, p4712, p4713, p4714, p4715, p4716, p4720, p4721, p4722, p4730, p4731, p4732,
p4733, p4780, p4781, p4782, p4783, p4789, p4795
Remedy:
- stop the trace before parameterization.

- if required, start the trace.
A02075
Trace: Pretrigger time too long
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected pretrigger time must be shorter than the trace time.
See also: p4721 (Trace recording time), p4722 (Trace trigger delay)
Remedy:
Check the pretrigger time setting and change if necessary.
F02080
Trace: Parameterization deleted due to unit changeover
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The trace parameterization in the drive unit was deleted due to a unit changeover or a change in the reference
parameters.
Remedy:
Restart trace.
A02099
Trace: Insufficient Control Unit memory
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The memory space still available on the Control Unit is no longer sufficient for the trace function.
Remedy:
Reduce the memory required, e.g. as follows:

- reduce the trace time.
- increase the trace clock cycle.
- reduce the number of signals to be traced.
See also: r4708 (Trace memory space required), r4799 (Trace memory location free)

3-1153
Faults and alarms

A02100
CU: Computing dead time current controller too short
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The value in p0118 produces a dead time of one clock cycle because it is prior to setpoint availability. A possible
cause could be, for example, that the system characteristics no longer match those parameterized after a component
has been replaced.
Alarm value (r2134, floating point):
The minimum value for p0118 where a dead time no longer occurs.
Remedy:
- set p0118 to a value greater than or equal to the alarm value.

- set p0117 to an automatic setting.
- check the firmware releases of the components involved.
See also: p0117 (Current controller computing dead time mode), p0118 (Current controller computing dead time)
A02150
OA: Application cannot be loaded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The system was not able to load an OA application.

Remedy:

Note:
See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957
F02151 (A)
OA: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An internal software error has occurred within an OA application.

Remedy:

Note:
See also: r4950, r4955, p4956, r4957
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F02152 (A)
OA: Insufficient memory
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Too many functions have been configured on this Control Unit (e.g. too many drives, function modules, data sets,
OA applications, blocks, etc).
3-1154

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- change the configuration on this Control Unit (e.g. fewer drives, function modules, data sets, OA applications,
blocks, etc).
- use an additional Control Unit.
Note:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F03000
NVRAM fault on action
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault occurred during execution of action p7770 = 1, 2 for the NVRAM data.
yyxx hex
yy: Fault cause
yy = 1:
The action p7770 = 1 is not supported by this version if Drive Control Chart (DCC) is activated for the drive object
concerned.
yy = 2:
The data length of the specified application is not the same in the NVRAM and the backup.
yy = 3:
The data checksum in p7774 is not correct.
yy = 4:
No data available to load.
xx: Application ID
See also: p7770 (NVRAM action)
Remedy:
F03001
NVRAM checksum incorrect
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A checksum error occurred when evaluating the non-volatile data (NVRAM) on the Control Unit.
The NVRAM data affected was deleted.
Remedy:
Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for all components.
F03500 (A)
TM: Initialization
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When initializing the Terminal Modules, the terminals of the Control Unit or the Terminal Board 30, an internal software error has occurred.
The thousands digit = 1 ... 3:
The component number (p0151) of the module involved is specified at the units, tens and hundreds digit.
Remedy:
- power down the power supply for the Control Unit and power it up again.
- if required, replace the Terminal Module.
The Terminal Module should be directly connected to a DRIVE-CLiQ socket of the Control Unit.
If the fault occurs again, replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1155
Faults and alarms

A03501
TM: Sampling time change
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The sampling times of the inputs/outputs were changed.

This change only becomes valid after the next boot.
Remedy:
Carry out a POWER ON.
F03505 (N, A)
TM: Analog input wire breakage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
CU_G_G130, CU_G_G150, ENCODER, HUB, TB30, TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The input current of the Terminal Module analog input has exceeded the threshold value parameterized in p4061[x].
This fault can only occur if p4056[x] = 3 (4 ... 20 mA with monitoring) is set.
Index x = 0: Analog input 0 (X522.1 to .3)
The thousands digit specifies the analog input involved: 0: Analog input 0 (AI 0), 1: Analog input 1 (AI 1). The leading
zero of analog input 0 (AI 0) is masked out of the fault value.
Remedy:
Check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.

Check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low.
Please note that the input has a load resistance of 250 Ohm.
The input current measured by the Terminal Module can be read out from r4052[x].
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F03505 (N, A)
CU: Analog input wire breakage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The input current of the Terminal Module analog input has exceeded the threshold value parameterized in p4061[x].
This fault can only occur if p4056[x] = 3 (4 ... 20 mA with monitoring) is set.
The thousands digit specifies the analog input involved: 0: Analog input 0 (AI 0), 1: Analog input 1 (AI 1). The leading
zero of analog input 0 (AI 0) is masked out of the fault value.
Remedy:
Check the connection to the signal source for interruptions.

Check the magnitude of the injected current - it is possible that the infed signal is too low.
Please note that the input has a load resistance of 250 Ohm.
The input current measured by the Terminal Module can be read out from r4052[x].
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1156

Faults and alarms

A03506 (F, N)
24 V power supply missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs (X124) is missing.
Remedy:
Check the terminals for the power supply voltage (X124, L1+, M).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A03550
TM: Speed setpoint filter natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The natural filter frequency of the speed setpoint filter (p1417) is greater than the Shannon frequency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[0]
Remedy:
Reduce the natural frequency of the speed setpoint filter (PT2 low pass) (p1417).
F03590 (N, A)
TM: Module not ready
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The Terminal Module involved does not send a ready signal and no valid cyclic data.
Drive object number of the Terminal Module involved.
Remedy:
- check the 24 V power supply.

- check whether the sampling time of the drive object involved is not equal to zero (p4099[0]).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A05000 (N)
Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The alarm threshold for overtemperature at the inverter heat sink has been reached. The response is set using
p0290.
If the temperature of the heat sink increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30004 is initiated.
Remedy:
Check the following:

- is the ambient temperature within the defined limit values?
- have the load conditions and the load duty cycle been appropriately dimensioned?
- has the cooling failed?
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1157
Faults and alarms

A05001 (N)
Power unit: Chip overtemperature
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Alarm threshold for overtemperature of the power semiconductor in the AC converter has been reached. The
response is set using p0290.
If the chip temperature increases by an additional 15 K, then fault F30025 is triggered.
Remedy:

- has the cooling failed?
- pulse frequency too high?
See also: r0037, p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A05002 (N)
Power unit: Air intake overtemperature
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The alarm threshold for the air intake overtemperature has been reached. For air-cooled power units, the threshold
is 42 C (hysteresis 2 K). The response is set using p0290.
If the air intake temperature increases by an additional 13 K, then fault F30035 is output.
Remedy:

- has the fan failed? Check the direction of rotation.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A05003 (N)
Power unit: Internal overtemperature
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.

If the temperature inside the power unit increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30036 is triggered.
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A05004 (N)
Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The alarm threshold for the overtemperature of the rectifier has been reached. The response is set using p0290.
If the temperature of the rectifier increases by an additional 5 K, then fault F30037 is triggered.
3-1158

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

- has a phase of the line supply failed?
- is an arm of the supply (incoming) rectifier defective?
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A05005
Cooling system: Cooling medium flow rate too low
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Cooling system: Alarm - flow rate has fallen below the alarm value
Remedy:
A05006 (N)
Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (blocksize
power units only).
Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated.
See also: r0037
Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot.
Note:
If the alarm does not disappear automatically and the temperature continues to rise, this can result in fault F30024.
See also: p0290 (Power unit overload response)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
N05007 (A)
Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model (chassis PU)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature difference between the chip and heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value (r0293) (chassis
power units only).
Depending on p0290, an appropriate overload response is initiated.
See also: r0037, r0293 (Power unit alarm threshold model temperature)
Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically once the limit value is undershot.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1159
Faults and alarms

F05050
Parallel circuit: Pulse enable in spite of pulse inhibit
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A power unit signals that the pulses are enabled although the pulses are inhibited.
Number of the power unit involved.
Remedy:
The power unit is defective and must be replaced.
F05051
Parallel circuit: Power unit pulse enable missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For one or several power units, the pulses were not able to be enabled.
Number of the power unit involved.
Remedy:
- acknowledge power unit faults that are still present.

- inhibit the pulses of the power unit involved (p7001).
A05052 (F)
Parallel circuit: Illegal current dissymmetry
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The deviation of the individual currents of the power units exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7010.
1: Phase U.
2: Phase V.
3: Phase W.
Remedy:
- inhibit the pulses of the faulted power unit (p7001).

- check the connecting cables. Loose contacts can cause current spikes.
- the motor reactors are non-symmetrical or faulty and must be replaced.
- the CTs must be calibrated or replaced.
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A05053 (F)
Parallel circuit: Inadmissible DC link voltage dissymmetry
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The deviation of the DC link voltage measured values exceeds the alarm threshold specified in p7011.
Remedy:
- inhibit the pulses of the faulted power unit (p7001).

- check the DC link connecting cables.
- the DC link voltage measurement is incorrect and must be calibrated or renewed.
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1160

Faults and alarms

A05054
Parallel circuit: Power unit deactivated
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For the drive object involved, fewer power unit components connected in parallel are active than exist in the target
topology. Operation is only possible at reduced power (power derating).
Remedy:
Reactivate the deactivated power unit components.

See also: p0125 (Activate/deactivate power unit components), p0895 (Activate/deactivate power unit components),
p0897 (Parking axis selection)
F05055
Power circuit: Power units with different code numbers
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The code numbers of the power units do not match.

Parameter in which the first different power unit code number was detected.
Remedy:
For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical power unit data may be used.
F05056
Parallel circuit: Power unit EPROM versions differ
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The EEPROM versions of the power units do not match.

Parameter in which the first different version number was detected.
Remedy:
For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical EEPROM versions may be used.
F05057
Parallel circuit: Power unit firmware versions differ
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The firmware versions of the power units connected in parallel do not match.
Remedy:
For parallel circuit configurations, only power units with identical firmware versions may be used.
F05058
Parallel circuit: VSM EEPROM versions differ
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The EEPROM versions of the Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) do not match.
Remedy:
For parallel circuit configurations, only Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) with identical EEPROM versions may be
used.

3-1161
Faults and alarms

F05059
Parallel circuit: VSM firmware versions differ
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The firmware versions of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) do not match.
Remedy:
For parallel circuit configurations, only Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) with identical firmware versions may be
used.
F05060
Parallel circuit: Power unit firmware version does not match
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Firmware from version V02.30.01.00 is required when connecting the power units in parallel.
Remedy:
Update the firmware of the power units (at least V02.30.01.00).
F05061
Infeed, number of VSM
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The number of active Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM) for the drive object infeed with chassis power units is not correct.
For A_Infeed, each active power unit must be assigned an active VSM also for a parallel circuit configuration.
For S_Infeed, the active drive object, must be assigned at least one active VSM.
Number of VSMs that are currently assigned to the drive object.
Remedy:
Adapts the number of active Voltage Sensing Modules (VSM).
F06310 (A)
Supply voltage (p0210) incorrectly parameterized
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
For AC/AC drive units, the measured DC voltage lies outside the tolerance range after pre-charging has been completed: 1.16 * p0210 < r0070 < 1.6 * p0210.
The fault can only be acknowledged when the drive is powered down.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage)
Remedy:
- check the parameterized supply voltage and if required change (p0210).

- check the line supply voltage.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1162

Faults and alarms

F07011
Drive: Motor overtemperature
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
KTY or no sensor:
The measured motor temperature or model temperature has exceeded the fault threshold (p0605) or the timer
(p0606) has elapsed following the alarm threshold (p0604) being exceeded.
The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened and the timer (p0606) has expired.
Possible causes:
- motor is overloaded.
- motor ambient temperature too high.
- wire breakage or sensor not connected.
With SME (p0601 = 10), TM120 (p0601 = 11) selected, the number of the sensor channel leading to the message.
When the I2t motor model is activated (p0612 bit[0] = yes, p0611 > 0), fault value= 200 refers to the fact that the fault
has been triggered by the I2t motor model.
See also: p0604 (Motor temperature alarm threshold), p0605 (Motor temperature fault threshold), p0606 (Motor temperature timer), p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
Remedy:
- reduce the motor load.

- check the ambient temperature.
- check the wiring and sensor connector.
See also: p0604 (Motor temperature alarm threshold), p0605 (Motor temperature fault threshold), p0606 (Motor temperature timer)
A07012 (N)
Drive: I2t motor model overtemperature
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The thermal I2t motor model (for synchronous motors) identified that the temperature alarm threshold was exceeded.
See also: r0034 (Motor utilization), p0605 (Motor temperature fault threshold), p0611 (I2t motor model thermal time
constant)
Remedy:
- check the motor load and if required, reduce.

- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check the thermal time constant p0611.
- check the overtemperature fault threshold p0605 (= alarm threshold for the I2t motor model, see p0612)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07015
Drive: Motor temperature sensor alarm
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
With the fault, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then fault F07016 is
output; however, at the earliest, 0.2 s after alarm A07015.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).

3-1163
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- make sure that the sensor is connected correctly.

- check the parameterization (p0600, p0601).
See also: r0035 (Motor temperature), p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 (Motor temperature
sensor type), p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
F07016
Drive: Motor temperature sensor fault
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error was detected when evaluating the temperature sensor set in p0600 and p0601.
Possible causes:
- wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
- measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Note:
If alarm A07015 is present, the time in p0607 is started. If the fault is still present after this time has expired, then
fault F07016 is output; however, at the earliest, 0.2 s after alarm A07015.
See also: p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
Remedy:

- induction motors: Deactivate temperature sensor fault (p0607 = 0).
See also: r0035 (Motor temperature), p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 (Motor temperature
sensor type), p0607 (Temperature sensor fault timer)
F07080
Drive: Incorrect control parameter
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The closed-loop control parameters have been parameterized incorrectly (e.g. p0356 = L_spread = 0).
The fault value includes the parameter number involved.
The following parameter numbers only occur as fault values for vector drives:
p0310, for synchronous motors: p0341, p0344, p0350, p0357
The following parameter numbers do not occur as fault values for synchronous motors:
p0354, p0358, p0360
p1082, p1300
Remedy:
Modify the parameter indicated in the fault value (r0949) (e.g. p0640 = current limit > 0).
See also: p0311, p0341, p0344, p0350, p0354, p0356, p0358, p0360, p0400, p0404, p0408, p0640, p1082
F07082
Macro: Execution not possible
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, supplementary information: %2, preliminary parameter number: %3
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The macro cannot be executed.

ccccbbaa hex:
cccc = preliminary parameter number, bb = supplementary information, aa = fault cause
Fault causes for the trigger parameter itself:
-19: Called file is not valid for the trigger parameter.
-20: Called file is not valid for parameter 15.
-24: Data type of a TAG is incorrect (e.g.: Index, number or bit is not U16).
3-1164

Faults and alarms

Fault causes for the parameters to be set:

-25: Error level has an undefined value.
-26: Mode has an undefined value.
-27: A value was entered as string in the tag value that is not "DEFAULT".
-31: Entered drive object type unknown.
-32: A device was not able to be found for the determined drive object number.
-34: A trigger parameter was recursively called.
-35: It is not permissible to write to the parameter via macro.
-36: Check, writing to a parameter unsuccessful, parameter can only be read, not available, incorrect data type, value
range or assignment incorrect.
-37: Source parameter for a BICO interconnection was not able to be determined.
-38: An index was set for a non-indexed (or CDS-dependent) parameter.
-39: No index was set for an indexed parameter.
-41: A bit operation is only permissible for parameters with the parameter format DISPLAY_BIN.
-42: A value not equal to 0 or 1 was set for a BitOperation.
-43: Reading the parameter to be changed by the BitOperation was unsuccessful.
-51: Factory setting for DEVICE may only be executed on the DEVICE.
-61: The setting of a value was unsuccessful.
Remedy:
- check the parameter involved.

- check the macro file and BICO interconnection.
See also: p0015, p0700 (Macro Binector Input (BI)), p1000 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints), p1500
(Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints)
F07083
Macro: ACX file not found
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The ACX file (macro) to be executed was not able to be found in the appropriate directory.
Parameter number with which the execution was started.
See also: p0015, p0700 (Macro Binector Input (BI)), p1000 (Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for speed setpoints), p1500
(Macro Connector Inputs (CI) for torque setpoints)
Remedy:
- check whether the file is saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card.
Example:
If p0015 is set to 1501, then the selected ACX file must be located in the following directory:
... /PMACROS/DEVICE/P15/PM001501.ACX
F07084
Macro: Condition for WaitUntil not fulfilled
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The WaitUntil condition set in the macro was not fulfilled in a certain number of attempts.
Parameter number for which the condition was set.
Remedy:
Check and correct the conditions for the WaitUntil loop.
F07085
Drive: Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters changed
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters have had to be changed because:

1) They have exceeded dynamic limits because of other parameters, or
2) They cannot be used due to the hardware detected not having certain properties.

3-1165
Faults and alarms


The fault value includes the modified parameter number.
340: The motor and control parameters were automatically calculated (p0340 = 1), because the vector control was
subsequently activated as configuration (r0108.2).
See also: p0640 (Current limit), p1082 (Maximum speed), p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode),
p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint)
Remedy:
It is not necessary to change the parameters as they have already been correctly limited.
F07086
Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to reference value change
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A reference parameter was changed in the system. This resulted in the fact that for the parameters involved, the
selected value was not able to be written in the per unit representation (cause: e.g. the steady-state minimum/maximum limit or that defined in the application was violated). The values of the parameters were set to the corresponding violated minimum/maximum limit or to the factory setting.
Diagnostics parameter r9450 to display the parameters that were not able to be recalculated.
Remedy:
Check the adapted parameter value and if required correct.

See also: r9450 (Reference value change parameter with unsuccessful calculation)
F07088
Units changeover: Parameter limit violation due to units changeover
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A changeover of units was initiated.

Possible causes for the violation of a parameter limit are:
- when rounding off a parameter corresponding to its decimal places, the steady-state minimum or maximum limit
was violated.
- inaccuracies for the data type "Floating Point".
In these cases, when the minimum limit is violated then the parameter value is rounded up and when the maximum
limited is violated the parameter value is rounded down.
Diagnostics parameter r9451 to display all parameters whose value had to be adapted.
See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505
(Selecting the system of units), p0595 (Selecting technological units)
Remedy:
Check the adapted parameter values and if required correct.

See also: r9451 (Units changeover adapted parameters)
A07089
Changing over units: Function module activation is blocked because the units have
been changed over
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An attempt was made to activate a function module. This is not permissible if the units have already been changed
over.
See also: p0100 (IEC/NEMA mot stds), p0349 (System of units, motor equivalent circuit diagram data), p0505
(Selecting the system of units)
Remedy:
Restore units that have been changed over to the factory setting.
3-1166

Faults and alarms

F07100
Drive: Sampling times cannot be reset
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When resetting drive parameter (p0976) sampling times cannot be reset using p0111, p0112, p0115.
Parameter whose setting prevents the sampling times being reset.
See also: r0110 (Basic sampling times)
Remedy:
- continue to work with the set sampling times.

- before resetting the drive parameters, set the basic clock cycle p0110[0] to the original value.
See also: r0110 (Basic sampling times)
F07110
Drive: Sampling times and basic clock cycle do not match
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The parameterized sampling times do not match the basic clock cycle.
The fault value specifies the parameter involved.
See also: r0110, r0111, p0115
Remedy:
Enter the current controller sampling times so that they are identical to the basic clock cycle, e.g. by selecting p0112.
Note which basic clock cycle is selected in p0111.
The sampling times in p0115 can only be changed manually in the sampling times presetting "Expert" (p0112).
See also: r0110, r0111, p0112, p0115
A07200
Drive: Master control ON/OFF1 command present
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The ON/OFF1 command is not 0, either via binector input p0840 (current CDS) or in control word bit 0 via the master
control.
Remedy:
Both the signal at binector input p0840 (current CDS) and bit 0 via the master control must be 0.
F07220 (N, A)
Drive: Master control by PLC missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The "master control by PLC" signal was missing in operation.

- interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" is incorrect (p0854).
- the higher-level control has withdrawn the "master control by PLC" signal.
- data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive) was interrupted.
Remedy:
- check the interconnection of the binector input for "master control by PLC" (p0854).
- check the "master control by PLC" signal and, if required, switch in.
- check the data transfer via the fieldbus (master/drive).
Note:
If the drive should continue to operate after withdrawing "master control by PLC" then fault response must be parameterized to NONE or the message type should be parameterized as alarm.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1167
Faults and alarms

F07300 (A)
Drive: Line contactor feedback signal missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
- the line contactor was not able to be closed within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor was not able to be opened within the time in p0861.
- the line contactor dropped out during operation
- the line contactor has closed although the drive converter is powered down.
Remedy:
- check the setting of p0860.

- check the feedback circuit from the line contactor.
- increase the monitoring time in p0861.
See also: p0860 (Line cont. fdbk sig), p0861 (Line contactor monitoring time)
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07311
Bypass motor switch
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault value: Bit field BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERROR_STATE

Bit 1
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_ON_MISSING
Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing
Bit 2
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_OFF_MISSING
Switch "Open" feedback signal missing
Bit 3
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_TOO_SLOW
Switch feedback signal too slow:
After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the
specified time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued.
Bit 6
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_BYPASS_INCONSISTENCY
Drive switch feedback signal is not consistent with the bypass state:
When powering up or for STAGING, the drive switch is closed.
See also: p1260 (Bypass configuration), r1261 (Bypass control/status word), p1266 (Bypass, control command),
p1267 (Bypass changeover source configuration), p1269 (Bypass switch feedback signal), p1274 (Bypass switch
monitoring time)
Remedy:
- check the transfer of the feedback signals.

- check the switch.
F07312
Bypass LSS:
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault value: Bit field BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERROR_STATE

Bit 1
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_ON_MISSING
Switch "Closed" feedback signal missing
Bit 2
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_FBK_OFF_MISSING
Switch "Open" feedback signal missing
3-1168

Faults and alarms

Bit 3
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_TOO_SLOW
Switch feedback signal too slow:
After switching, the system waits for the positive feedback signal. If the feedback signal is received later than the
specified time, then a fault trip (shutdown) is issued.
Bit 6
BYPASS_CONTACTOR_ERR_BYPASS_INCONSISTENCY
Line Side Switch feedback signal is not consistent with the bypass state:
When powering up or for STAGING, the Line Side Switch is closed without this having been requested from the
bypass.
See also: p1260 (Bypass configuration), r1261 (Bypass control/status word), p1266 (Bypass, control command),
p1267 (Bypass changeover source configuration), p1269 (Bypass switch feedback signal), p1274 (Bypass switch
monitoring time)
Remedy:
- check the transfer of the feedback signals.

- check the switch.
F07320
Drive: Automatic restart interrupted
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
- The specified number of restart attempts (p1211) has been completely used up because within the monitoring time
(p1213) the faults were not able to be acknowledged. The number of restart attempts (p1211) is decremented at each
new start attempt.
- there is no active ON command.
- the monitoring time for the power unit has expired (p0857).
- when exiting commissioning or at the end of the motor identification routine or the speed controller optimization, the
drive unit is not automatically powered up again.
Remedy:
- increase the number of restart attempts (p1211). The actual number of starting attempts is displayed in r1214.
- increase the delay time in p1212 and/or the monitoring time in p1213.
- issue an ON command (p0840).
- either increase or disable the monitoring time of the power unit (p0857).
- Reduce the waiting time for resetting the fault counter p1213[1] so that fewer faults are registered in the time interval.
A07321
Drive: Automatic restart active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The automatic restart (AR) is active. When the line supply returns and/or the causes of the existing faults are
removed the drive is automatically restarted. The pulses are enabled and the motor starts to rotate.
Remedy:
- the automatic restart (AR) should, if required, be inhibited (p1210 = 0).

- an automatic restart can be directly interrupted by withdrawing the power-on command (BI: p0840).
F07330
Flying restart: Measured search current too low
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
During a flying restart, it was identified that the search current reached is too low.
It is possible that the motor is not connected.
Remedy:
Check the motor feeder cables.

3-1169
Faults and alarms

F07331
FlyRestart: Not supported
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
It is not possible to power up with the motor rotating (no flying restart). In the following cases, the "flying restart" function is not supported:
Permanent-magnet and separately-excited synchronous motors (PEM, FEM): Operation with V/f characteristic.
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PEM): Encoderless operation without a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM)
being connected.
Remedy:
- deactivate the "flying restart" function (p1200 = 0).

- change the open-loop/closed-loop control mode (p1300).
- connect a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) (voltage measurement).
A07350 (F)
Drive: Measuring probe parameterized to a digital output
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The measuring probe is connected to a bi-directional digital input/output and the terminal is set as output.
8: DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X132.1)
9: DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X132.2)
10: DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X132.3)
11: DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X132.4)
12: DI/DO 12 (X132.9)
13: DI/DO 13 (X132.10)
14: DI/DO 14 (X132.12)
15: DI/DO 15 (X132.13)
Remedy:
- set the terminal as input (p0728).

- deselect the measuring probe (p0488, p0489, p0580).
Reaction upon F:
OFF1
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07400 (N)
Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The DC link voltage controller has been activated because the upper switch-in threshold has been exceeded (r1242,
r1282).
The ramp-down times are automatically increased in order to maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) within the permissible limits. There is a system deviation between the setpoint and actual speeds.
When the DC link voltage controller is switched out (disabled), this is the reason that the ramp-function generator
output is set to the speed actual value.
See also: p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration), p1280 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f))
Remedy:
If the controller is not to intervene:

- increase the ramp-down times.
- shut down the Vdc_max controller (p1280 = 0).
If the ramp-down times are not to be changed:
- use a chopper or regenerative feedback unit.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1170

Faults and alarms

A07401 (N)
Drive: DC link voltage maximum controller deactivated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Vdc_max controller can no longer maintain the DC link voltage (r0070) below the limit value (r1242, r1282) and
was therefore switched out (disabled).
- the line supply voltage is permanently higher than specified for the power unit.
- the motor is permanently in the regenerative mode as a result of a load that is driving the motor.
Remedy:
- check whether the input voltage is within the permissible range.

- check whether the load duty cycle and load limits are within the permissible limits.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07402 (N)
Drive: DC link voltage minimum controller active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The DC link voltage controller has been activated as the lower switch-in threshold has been undershot (r1246,
r1286).
The kinetic energy of the motor is used to buffer the DC link. The drive is therefore braked.
See also: r0056 (Status word, closed-loop control), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration), p1280
(Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration (V/f))
Remedy:
The alarm disappears when power supply returns.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07403 (N, A)
Drive: Lower DC link voltage threshold reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 , p1280 = 5, 6) and the lower DC link voltage threshold (r1246, r1286)
was reached in the "Operation" state.
Remedy:

- check the infeed module
- adapt the device supply voltage (p0210) or the switch-on level (p1245, p1285).
- disable the DC link voltage monitoring (p1240, p1280 = 0).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07404
Drive: Upper DC link voltage threshold reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The DC link voltage monitoring is active (p1240 , p1280 = 4, 6) and the upper DC link voltage threshold (r1242,
r1282) was reached in the "Operation" state.
Remedy:

- check the infeed module
- adapt the device supply voltage (p0210).
- disable the DC link voltage monitoring (p1240, p1280 = 0).

3-1171
Faults and alarms

F07405 (N, A)
Drive: Kinetic buffering minimum speed not reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
During kinetic buffering the speed fell below minimum speed (p1257 or p1297 for vector drives with V/f control) and
the line supply did not return.
Remedy:
Check the speed threshold for the Vdc_min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1257, p1297).
See also: p1257 (Vdc_min controller speed threshold)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07406 (N, A)
Drive: Kinetic buffering maximum time exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The maximum buffer time (p1255 and p1295 for vector drives with V/f control) has been exceeded without the line
supply having returned.
Remedy:
Check the time threshold for Vdc-min controller (kinetic buffering) (p1255, p1295).
See also: p1255 (Vdc_min controller time threshold)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07409
Drive: V/f control, current limiting controller active
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The current limiting controller of the V/f control was activated because the current limit was exceeded.
Remedy:
The alarm is automatically withdrawn when increasing the current limit (p0640), reducing the load or using a slower
up ramp for the setpoint (reference) speed.
F07410
Drive: Current controller output limited
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present and can be caused by the following:
- motor not connected or motor contactor open.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- no DC link voltage present.
- power unit defective.
- the "flying restart" function is not activated.
Remedy:
- connect the motor or check the motor contactor.

- check the motor parameterization and the connection configuration (star-delta).
- check the DC link voltage (r0070).
- check the power unit.
- activate the "flying restart" function (p1200).
3-1172

Faults and alarms

F07411
Drive: Flux setpoint not reached when building up excitation
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When quick magnetizing is configured (p1401.6 = 1) the specified flux setpoint is not reached although 90% of the
maximum current is specified.
- incorrect motor data.
- motor data and motor configuration (star-delta) do not match.
- the current limit has been set too low for the motor.
- induction motor (encoderless, open-loop controlled) in I2t limiting.
- the Motor Module is too small.
- the magnetizing time p0346 is too short.
Remedy:
- correct the motor data. Perform motor data identification and rotating measurement.
- check the motor configuration.
- correct the current limits (p0640).
- reduce the induction motor load.
- if required, use a larger Motor Module.
- check motor supply cable.
- check power unit.
- increase p0346.
F07412
Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (motor model)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
ENCODER (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An incorrect commutation angle was detected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller.
Possible causes:
- the motor encoder is incorrectly adjusted with respect to the magnet position.
- the motor encoder is damaged.
- the angular commutation offset is incorrectly set (p0431).
- data to calculate the motor model has been incorrectly set (p0356 (motor-stator leakage inductance) and/or p0350
(motor-stator resistance) and/or p0352 (cable resistance).
- the changeover speed for the motor model is too low (p1752). The monitoring function only becomes effective
above the changeover speed.
- pole position identification might have calculated an incorrect value when activated (p1982 = 1).
- the motor encoder speed signal is faulted.
- the control loop is instable due to incorrect parameterization.
SERVO:
0: The comparison of the pole position angle from the encoder and the motor model resulted in an excessively high
value (> 80 electrical).
1: VECTOR:
0: The comparison of the pole position angle from the encoder and the motor model resulted in an excessively high
value (> 45 electrical).
1: The change in the speed signal from the motor encoder has changed by > p0492 within a current controller clock
cycle.

3-1173
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- if the encoder mounting was changed - re-adjust the encoder.

- replace the defective motor encoder.
- correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431).
- correctly set the motor stator resistance, cable resistance and motor-stator leakage inductance (p0350, p0352,
p0356).
- increase the changeover speed for the motor model (p1752). The monitoring is completely deactivated for p1752
> p1082 (maximum speed).
- with pole position identification activated (p1982 = 1) check the procedure for pole position identification (p1980)
and force a new pole position identification procedure by means of deselection followed by selection (p1982 = 0 -> 1).
Note:
For High Dynamic Motors (1FK7xxx-7xxx), for applications with a higher current, if necessary, the monitoring should
be disabled.
F07413
Drive: Commutation angle incorrect (pole position identification)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
ENCODER (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An incorrect commutation angle was detected that can result in a positive coupling in the speed controller.
- within the pole position identification routine (p1982 = 2):
A difference of > 45 electrical to the encoder angle was determined.
- for VECTOR, within the encoder adjustment (p1990 = 2):
A difference of > 6 electrical to the encoder angle was determined.
Remedy:
- correctly set the angular commutation offset (p0431).

- re-adjust the motor encoder after the encoder has been replaced.
- replace the defective motor encoder.
- check the pole position identification routine. If the pole position identification routine is not suitable for this motor
type, then disable the plausibility check (p1982 = 0).
A07416
Drive: Flux controller configuration
Message value:
Parameter: %1, Index: %2, fault cause: %3
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The configuration of the flux control (p1401) is contradictory.

ccbbaaaa hex
aaaa = Parameter
bb = Index
cc = fault cause
Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for soft start (p1401.0).
Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for flux build-up control (p1401.2).
Quick magnetizing (p1401.6) for Rs identification after restart (p0621 = 2).
Remedy:
Re fault cause = 1:
- Shut down soft start (p1401.0 = 0).
- Shut down quick magnetizing (p1401.6 = 0).
Re fault cause = 2:
- De-energize flux build-up control (p1401.2 = 0).
Re fault cause = 3:
- Re-parameterize Rs identification (p0621 = 0, 1)
3-1174

Faults and alarms

F07417
Drive: Pulse technique not plausible (motor model)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The evaluation of the test pulse response found incorrect values.

Fault value 0: An impermissible pulse technique configuration was detected during ramp-up.
Possible causes:
- The pulse technique was initially selected during system ramp-up (p1750.5=1) but the
power unit component does not support the current oversampling required (see r192.23).
As a consequence, p1750.0 was deselected automatically.
Fault value 10: The pulse response is repeatedly implausible.
Possible causes:
- Incorrect configuration of the power unit component
- The power unit component is faulty.
Fault value 20: At the preset pulse amplitude the measured pulse response is much higher than the expected value.
Possible causes:
- The orientation loop has been affected by major vibration phenomena.
- The motor is short-circuited for high frequencies (output filter).
- The motor is damaged.
Remedy:
Re fault value 0:
Once the pulse technique has been deselected automatically (p1750.5=0), there are two possible options:
- acknowledge the fault and save parameter p1750.5=0 => field-oriented control mode to standstill is forfeited and
replaced by transition to open-loop control at low speeds.
- replace the power unit firmware (at least V4.30) => field-oriented control mode to standstill is available.
Re fault value 10:
With active selection of the pulse technique (p1750.5)
- power both the CU and the power unit component down and then back up again, or
- perform a manual warm restart (see P0009, P0976).
If this does not solve the problem: Replace the power unit component.
Re fault value 20:
- control parameters might have been adjusted (factory setting, commissioning).
- filters must not be connected between motor and converter/inverter.
- check the motor.
F07422
Drive: Reference model natural frequency > Shannon frequency
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The natural filter frequency of the PT2 element for the reference model (p1433) is greater than the Shannon frequency.
The Shannon frequency is calculated according to the following formula: 0.5 / p0115[1]
Remedy:
- reduce the natural frequency of PT2 element for reference model (p1433).
- reduce the speed controller sampling time (p0115[1]).
F07426 (A)
Technology controller actual value limited
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The actual signal of the technology controller has reached its limit.
- Fault value = 1: upper limit reached
- Fault value = 2: lower limit reached

3-1175
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- Adapt the limits in P2267, P2268 to the signal level.

- Check scaling of the actual signal.
See also: p2264 (Technology controller actual value), p2267 (Technology controller upper limit actual value), p2268
(Technology controller lower limit actual value)
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07434
Drive: It is not possible to change the direction of rotation with the pulses enabled
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A drive data set was selected - with the pulses enabled - which has a different parameterized direction of rotation
(p1821).
It is only possible to change the motor direction of rotation using p1821 when the pulses are inhibited.
Remedy:
- change over the drive data set with the pulses inhibited.
- ensure that the changeover to a drive data set does not result in the motor direction of rotation being changed (i.e.
for these drive data sets, the same value must be in p1821).
See also: p1821 (Dir of rot)
F07435 (N)
Drive: Setting the ramp-function generator for encoderless vector control
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
During operation with encoderless vector control (r1407.1) the ramp-function generator was stopped (p1141) or
bypassed (p1122). An internal setting command of the ramp-function generator output caused the set setpoint speed
to be frozen or was not able to be realized.
Remedy:
- deactivate the holding command for the ramp-function generator (p1141).

- do not bypass the ramp-function generator (p1122).
- suppress the fault (p2101, p2119). This is necessary if the ramp-function generator is held using jogging and the
speed setpoint is simultaneously inhibited (r0898.6).
Note:
For encoderless vector control it is not practical to read-in the main setpoint of the speed control via p1155 or p1160
(p0922). In this case, the main setpoint should be injected before the ramp-function generator (p1070). The reason
for this is that the ramp-function generator output is automatically set when transitioning from closed-loop speed controlled into open-loop speed controlled operation.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07440
EPOS: Jerk time is limited
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The calculation of the jerk time Tr = MAX(p2572, p2573) / p2574 resulted in an excessively high value so that the
jerk time is internally limited to 1000 ms.
Note:
The alarm is also output if jerk limiting is not active.
Remedy:
- increase the jerk limiting (p2574).

- reduce maximum acceleration or maximum deceleration (p2572, p2573).
3-1176

Faults and alarms

A07441
LR: Save the position offset of the absolute encoder adjustment
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The status of the absolute encoder adjustment has changed.

In order to permanently save the determined position offset (p2525) it must be saved in a non-volatile fashion (p0971,
p0977).
Remedy:
None necessary.
This alarm automatically disappears after the offset has been saved.
F07442 (A)
LR: Multiturn does not match the modulo range
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The ratio between the multiturn resolution and the modulo range (p2576) is not an integer number.
This results in the adjustment being set back, as the position actual value cannot be reproduced after poweroff/power-on.
Remedy:
Make the ration between the multiturn resolution and the modulo range an integer number.
The ratio v is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking:
v = (p0421 * p2506 * p0433 * p2505) / (p0432 * p2504 * p2576)
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for the measuring gear:
v = (p0412 * p2506 * p2505) / (p2504 * p2576)
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for the load gear:
v = (p2721 * p2506 * p0433) / (p0432 * p2576)
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for the load and measuring gear:
v = (p2721 * p2506) / p2576
5. Direct encoder without position tracking:
v = (p0421 * p2506 * p0433) / (p0432 * p2576)
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for the measuring gear:
v = (p0412 * p2506) / p2576
Note:
With position tracking, it is recommended that p0412 and p2721 are changed
See also: p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0432 (Gearbox factor, encoder
revolutions), p0433 (Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual)
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07443 (A)
LR: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input p2599 lies outside the half
of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position.
Maximum permissible value for the reference point coordinate.
Remedy:
Set the reference point coordinate to a lower value than specified in the fault value.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1177
Faults and alarms

F07446 (A)
Load gear: Position tracking cannot be reset
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The position tracking cannot be reset.
Remedy:
Reset the position tracking as follows:

- select encoder commissioning (p0010 = 4).
- reset position tracking, position (p2720.2 = 1).
- deselect encoder commissioning (p0010 = 0).
The fault should then be acknowledged and, if necessary, the absolute encoder adjusted (p2507).
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07447
Load gear: Position tracking, maximum actual value exceeded
Message value:
Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2, drive data set: %3
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When the position tracking of the load gear is configured, the drive/encoder (motor encoder) identifies a maximum
possible absolute position actual value (r2723) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits.
Maximum value: p0408 * p2721 * 2^p0419
ccbbaa hex
aa = encoder data set
bb = component number
cc = drive data set
See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)), p2721 (Load
gear, rotary absolute gearbox, revolutions, virtual)
Remedy:
- reduce the fine resolution (p0419).

- reduce the multiturn resolution (p2721).
See also: p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits)), p2721 (Load gear, rotary absolute gearbox,
revolutions, virtual)
F07448 (A)
Load gear: Position tracking, linear axis has exceeded the maximum range
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For a configured linear axis/no modulo axis, the currently effective motor encoder (encoder 1) has exceeded the
maximum possible traversing range.
For the configured linear axis, the maximum traversing range is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421. It should be
read in p2721 and interpreted as the number of load revolutions.
Note:
Only the motor encoder in the currently effective drive data set is monitored here. The actual effective drive data set
is displayed in x = r0051 and the corresponding motor encoder is specified in in p0187[x].
Remedy:
The fault should be resolved as follows:

The fault should then be acknowledged and the absolute encoder adjusted.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1178

Faults and alarms

F07449 (A)
Load gear: Position tracking, actual position outside tolerance window
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When powered down, the currently effective motor encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system
and encoder.
Note:
Only the motor encoder in the currently effective drive data set is monitored here. The actual effective drive data set
is displayed in x = r0051 and the corresponding motor encoder is specified in in p0187[x].
Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value after the measuring gear - if
one is being used. The sign designates the traversing direction.
Note:
The deviation (difference) found is also displayed in r2724.
See also: p2722 (Load gear, position tracking tolerance window), r2724 (Load gear position difference)
Remedy:

See also: p0010
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07450 (A)
LR: Standstill monitoring has responded
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
After the standstill monitoring time (p2543) expired, the drive left the standstill window (p2542).
- position actual value inversion incorrectly set (p0410).
- standstill window set too small (p2542).
- standstill monitoring time set too low (p2543).
- position loop gain too low (p2538).
- position loop gain too high (instability/oscillation, p2538).
- mechanical overload.
- check the connecting cable, motor/drive converter (phase missing, interchange).
- when selecting motor identification, select tracking mode (BI: p2655[0] = 1 signal).
- when selecting function generator, select tracking mode (BI: p2655[0] = 1 signal) and deactivate position control
(BI:p2550 = 0 signal).
Remedy:
Check the causes and resolve.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07451 (A)
LR: Position monitoring has responded
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When the position monitoring time (p2545) expired, the drive had still not reached the positioning window (p2544).
- positioning window parameterized too small (p2544).
- position monitoring time parameterized too short (p2545).
- position loop gain too low (p2538).
- position loop gain too high (instability/oscillation, p2538).
- drive mechanically locked.

3-1179
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07452 (A)
LR: Following error too high
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The difference between the position setpoint position actual value (following error dynamic model, r2563) is greater
than the tolerance (p2546).
- the drive torque or accelerating capacity exceeded.
- position measuring system fault.
- position control sense incorrect.
- mechanical system locked.
- excessively high traversing velocity or excessively high position reference value (setpoint) differences
Remedy:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07453
LR: Position actual value preprocessing error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
Remedy:
Check the encoder for the position actual value preprocessing.
A07454
LR: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
One of the following problems has occurred with the position actual value preprocessing:
- an encoder is not assigned for the position actual value preprocessing (p2502 = 0).
- an encoder is assigned, but no encoder data set (p0187 = 99 or p0188 = 99 or p0189 = 99).
- an encoder an an encoder data set have been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any
encoder data (p0400 = 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy:
Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets and encoder assignment.
See also: p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number), p0400 (Encoder type selection)
A07455
EPOS: Maximum velocity limited
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The maximum velocity (p2571) is too high to correctly calculate the modulo correction.
Within the sampling time for positioning (p0115[5]), with the maximum velocity, a maximum of the half modulo length
must be moved through. p2571 was limited to this value.
Remedy:
- reduce the maximum velocity (p2571).

- increase the sampling time for positioning (p0115[5]).
3-1180

Faults and alarms

A07456
EPOS: Setpoint velocity limited
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The actual setpoint velocity is greater than the parameterized maximum velocity (p2571) and is therefore limited.
Remedy:
- check the entered setpoint velocity.

- reduce the velocity override (CI: p2646).
- increase the maximum velocity (p2571).
- check the signal source for the externally limited velocity (CI: p2594).
A07457
EPOS: Combination of input signals illegal
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An illegal combination of input signals that are simultaneously set was identified.
0: Jog 1 and jog 2 (p2589, p2590).
1: Jog 1 or jog 2 and direct setpoint input/MDI (p2589, p2590, p2647).
2: Jog 1 or jog 2 and start referencing (p2589, p2590, p2595).
3: Jog 1 or jog 2 and activate traversing task (p2589, p2590, p2631).
4: Direct setpoint input/MDI and starting referencing (p2647, p2595).
5: Direct setpoint input/MDI and activate traversing task (p2647, p2631).
6: Start referencing and activate traversing task (p2595, p2631).
Remedy:
Check the appropriate input signals and correct.
F07458
EPOS: Reference cam not found
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
After starting the search for reference, the axis moved through the maximum permissible distance to search for the
reference cam without actually finding the reference cam.
Remedy:
- check the "reference cam" binector input (BI: p2612).

- check the maximum permissible distance to the reference cam (p2606).
- if axis does not have any reference cam, then set p2607 to 0.
F07459
EPOS: No zero mark
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
After leaving the reference cam, the axis has traversed the maximum permissible distance between the reference
cam and zero mark without finding the zero mark.
Remedy:
- check the encoder regarding the zero mark

- check the maximum permissible distance between the reference cam and zero mark (p2609).
- use an external encoder zero mark (equivalent zero mark) (p0495).
See also: p0495 (Equivalent zero mark, input terminal)

3-1181
Faults and alarms

F07460
EPOS: End of reference cam not found
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
During the search for reference, when the axis reached the zero mark it also reached the end of the traversing range
without detecting an edge at the binector input "reference cam" (BI: p2612).
Maximum traversing range: -2147483648 [LU] ... -2147483647 [LU]
Remedy:
- check the "reference cam" binector input (BI: p2612).

- repeat the search for reference.
A07461
EPOS: Reference point not set
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When starting a traversing block/direct setpoint input, a reference point is not set (r2684.11 = 0).
Remedy:
Reference the system (search for reference, flying referencing, set reference point).
A07462
EPOS: Selected traversing block number does not exist
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A traversing block selected via BI: p2625 to BI: p2630 was started via BI: p2631 = 0/1 edge "Activate traversing task".
- the number of the started traversing block is not contained in p2616[0...n].
- the started traversing block is suppressed.
Number of the selected traversing block that is also not available.
Remedy:
- correct the traversing program.

- select an available traversing block number.
A07463 (F)
EPOS: External block change not requested in the traversing block
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For a traversing block with the block change enable CONTINUE_EXTERNAL_ALARM, the external block change
was not requested.
Number of the traversing block.
Remedy:
Resolve the reason as to why the edge is missing at binector input (BI: p2632).
Reaction upon F:
OFF1
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F07464
EPOS: Traversing block is inconsistent
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The traversing block does not contain valid information.

Number of the traversing block with invalid information.
Remedy:
Check the traversing block and where relevant, take into consideration alarms that are present.
3-1182

Faults and alarms

A07465
EPOS: Traversing block does not have a subsequent block
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
There is no subsequent block in the traversing block.

Number of the traversing block with the missing subsequent block.
Remedy:
- parameterize this traversing block with the block change enable END.
- parameterize additional traversing blocks with a higher block number and for the last block, using the block change
enable END.
A07466
EPOS: Traversing block number assigned a multiple number of times
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The same traversing block number was assigned a multiple number of times.
Number of the traversing block that was assigned a multiple number of times.
Remedy:
Correct the traversing blocks.
A07467
EPOS: Traversing block has illegal task parameters
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The task parameter in the traversing block contains an illegal value.

Number of the traversing block with an illegal task parameter.
Remedy:
Correct the task parameter in the traversing block.
A07468
EPOS: Traversing block jump destination does not exist
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In a traversing block, a jump was programmed to a non-existent block.

Number of the traversing block with a jump destination that does not exist.
Remedy:
- correct the traversing block.

- add the missing traversing block.
A07469
EPOS: Traversing block < target position < software limit switch minus
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the traversing block the specified absolute target position lies outside the range limited by the software limit switch
minus.
Number of the traversing block with illegal target position.
Remedy:

- change software limit switch minus (CI: p2578, p2580).

3-1183
Faults and alarms

A07470
EPOS: Traversing block> target position > software limit switch plus
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the traversing block the specified absolute target position lies outside the range limited by the software limit switch
plus.
Remedy:

- change software limit switch plus (CI: p2579, p2581).
A07471
EPOS: Traversing block target position outside the modulo range
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the traversing block the target position lies outside the modulo range.
Remedy:
- in the traversing block, correct the target position.

- change the modulo range (p2576).
A07472
EPOS: Traversing block ABS_POS/ABS_NEG not possible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the traversing block the positioning mode ABS_POS or ABS_NEG were parameterized with the modulo correction
not activated.
Number of the traversing block with the illegal positioning mode.
Remedy:
Correct the traversing block.
A07473 (F)
EPOS: Beginning of traversing range reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When traversing, the axis has moved to the traversing range limit.
Remedy:
Move away in the positive direction.
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07474 (F)
EPOS: End of traversing range reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When traversing, the axis has moved to the traversing range limit.
Remedy:
Move away in the negative direction.
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1184

Faults and alarms

F07475 (A)
EPOS: Target position < start of traversing range
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The target position for relative traversing lies outside the traversing range.
Remedy:
Correct the target position.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07476 (A)
EPOS: Target position > end of the traversing range
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The target position for relative traversing lies outside the traversing range.
Remedy:
Correct the target position.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07477 (F)
EPOS: Target position < software limit switch minus
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the actual traversing operation, the target position is less than the software limit switch minus.
Remedy:
- correct the target position.

Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07478 (F)
EPOS: Target position > software limit switch plus
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the actual traversing operation, the target position is greater than the software limit switch plus.
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07479
EPOS: Software limit switch minus reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The axis is at the position of the software limit switch minus. An active traversing block was interrupted.
Remedy:


3-1185
Faults and alarms

A07480
EPOS: Software limit switch plus reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The axis is at the position of the software limit switch plus. An active traversing block was interrupted.
Remedy:

F07481 (A)
EPOS: Axis position < software limit switch minus
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The actual position of the axis is less than the position of the software limit switch minus.
Remedy:

Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07482 (A)
EPOS: Axis position > software limit switch plus
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The actual position of the axis is greater than the position of the software limit switch plus.
Remedy:

Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07483
EPOS: Travel to fixed stop clamping torque not reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The fixed stop in the traversing block was reached without the clamping torque/clamping force having been achieved.
Remedy:
- Check the maximum torque-generating current (r1533).

- check the torque limits (p1520, p1521).
- check the power limits (p1530, p1531).
- check the BICO interconnections of the torque limits (p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529).
F07484
EPOS: Fixed stop outside the monitoring window
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3 (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
In the "fixed stop reached" state, the axis has moved outside the defined monitoring window (p2635).
Remedy:
- check the monitoring window (p2635).

- check the mechanical system.
3-1186

Faults and alarms

F07485 (A)
EPOS: Fixed stop not reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
In a traversing block with the task FIXED STOP, the end position was reached without detecting a fixed stop.
Remedy:
- check the traversing block and locate the target position further into the workpiece.
- check the "fixed stop reached" control signal (p2637).
- if required, reduce the maximum following error window to detect the fixed stop (p2634).
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07486
EPOS: Intermediate stop missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the modes "traversing blocks" or "direct setpoint input/MDI" at the start of motion, the binector input "no intermediate stop/intermediate stop" (BI: p2640) did not have a 1 signal.
Remedy:
Connect a 1 signal to the binector input "no intermediate stop/intermediate stop" (BI: p2640) and re-start motion.
A07487
EPOS: Reject traversing task missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the modes "traversing blocks" or "direct setpoint input/MDI" at the start of motion, the binector input "do not reject
traversing task/reject traversing task" (BI: p2641) does not have a 1 signal.
Remedy:
Connect a 1 signal to the binector input "do not reject traversing task/reject traversing task" (BI: p2641) and restart
motion.
F07488
EPOS: Relative positioning not possible
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
In the mode "direct setpoint input/MDI", for continuous transfer (p2649 = 1) relative positioning was selected (BI:
p2648 = 0 signal).
Remedy:
Check the control.
A07489
EPOS: Reference point correction outside the window
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For the function "flying referencing" the difference between the measured position at the measuring probe and the
reference point coordinate lies outside the parameterized window.
Remedy:
- check the mechanical system.

- check the parameterization of the window (p2602).

3-1187
Faults and alarms

F07490
EPOS: Enable signal withdrawn while traversing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
- for a standard assignment, another fault may have occurred as a result of withdrawing the enable signals.
- the drive is in the "switching on inhibited" state (for a standard assignment).
Remedy:
- set the enable signals or check the cause of the fault that first occurred and then result (for a standard assignment).
- check the assignment to enable the basic positioning function.
F07491 (A)
EPOS: STOP cam minus reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A zero signal was detected at binector input BI: p2569, i.e. the STOP cam minus was reached.
For a positive traversing direction, the STOP cam minus was reached - i.e. the wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect.
Remedy:
- leave the STOP cam minus in the positive traversing direction and return the axis to the valid traversing range.
- check the wiring of the STOP cam.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07492 (A)
EPOS: STOP cam plus reached
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A zero signal was detected at binector input BI: p2570, i.e. the STOP cam plus was reached.
For a negative traversing direction, the STOP cam plus was reached - i.e. the wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect.
Remedy:
- leave the STOP cam plus in the negative traversing direction and return the axis to the valid traversing range.
- check the wiring of the STOP cam.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07493
LR: Overflow of the value range for position actual value
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for the position actual value representation was exceeded.
When the overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "adjustment absolute measuring system" status is reset.
1: The position actual value (r2521) has exceeded the value range.
2: The encoder position actual value Gn_XIST2 (r0483) or the absolute value after the load gear (r2723) has
exceeded the value range.
3: The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range for displaying the position actual value.
3-1188

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution (p2506).

Increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual value (p0419).
Reference to fault value = 3:
If the value for the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is greater than 4294967296, then it is not possible to
make an adjustment due to an overflow.
For rotary encoders, the maximum possible absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
1. Motor encoder without position tracking
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 * p0421 / (p0432 * p2504) for multiturn encoders
2. Motor encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear
p2506 * p2721
5. Direct encoder without position tracking
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0433 * p0421 / p0432 for multiturn encoders
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear
p2506 * p0412
F07494
LR: Drive Data Set changeover in operation
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A drive data set changeover (DDS changeover) when the mechanical relationships change (p2503 .. 2506), the
direction of rotation (p1821) or the encoder assignment (p2502) were requested during operation.
Remedy:
To changeover the drive data set, initially, exit the "operation" mode.
A07495 (F)
LR: Reference function interrupted
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was interrupted.
- an encoder fault has occurred (Gn_ZSW.15 = 1).
- position actual value was set during an activated reference function.
- simultaneously activate reference mark search and measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 1 signal).
- activated reference function (reference mark search or measuring probe evaluation) was deactivated (BI: p2508
and BI: p2509 = 0 signal).
Remedy:
- check the causes and resolve.

- reset the control (BI: p2508 and BI: p2509 = 0 signal) and activate the requested function.
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07496
EPOS: Enable not possible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
It is not possible to enable the basic positioner because at least one signal is missing.
1: EPOS enable missing (BI: p2656).
2: Position actual value, valid feedback signal missing (BI: p2658).
Remedy:
Check the appropriate binector inputs and signals.

3-1189
Faults and alarms

A07497
LR: Position setting value activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The position actual value is set to the value received via CI: p2515while BI: p2514 = 1 signal. A possible system
deviation cannot be corrected.
Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears with BI: p2514 = 0 signal.
A07498 (F)
LR: Measuring probe evaluation not possible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When evaluating the measuring probe, an error occurred.

6: The input terminal for the measuring probe is not set.
4098: Error when initializing the measuring probe.
4100: The measuring pulse frequency is too high.
> 50000: The measuring clock cycle is not a multiple integer of the position controller clock cycle.
Remedy:
Deactivate the measuring probe evaluation (BI: p2509 = 0 signal).

Re alarm value = 6:
Set the input terminal for the measuring probe (p0488, p0489 or p2517, p2518).
Check the Control Unit hardware.
Reduce the frequency of the measuring pulses at the measuring probe.
Re alarm value > 50000:
Set the clock cycle ratio of the measuring clock cycle to the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple.
To do this, the currently effective measuring clock cycle can be determined from the alarm value as follows:
Tmeas [125 s] = alarm value - 50000
With PROFIBUS, the measuring clock cycle corresponds to the PROFIBUS clock cycle (r2064[1]).
Without PROFIBUS, the measuring clock cycle is an internal cycle time that cannot be influenced.
Reaction upon F:
OFF1
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F07499 (A)
EPOS: Reversing cam approached with the incorrect traversing direction
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The reversing cam MINUS was approached in the positive traversing direction or the reversing cam PLUS was
approached in the negative traversing direction.
Remedy:
- check the wiring of the reversing cam (BI: p2613, BI: p2614).
- check the traversing direction to approach the reversing cam.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1190

Faults and alarms

F07500
Drive: Power unit data set PDS not configured
Message value:
Drive data set: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Only for controlled line supply infeed/regenerative feedback units:

The power unit data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the drive data
set.
Drive data set number of p0185.
Remedy:
The index of the power unit data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0185.
F07501
Drive: Motor Data Set MDS not configured
Message value:
Drive data set: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Only for power units:

The motor data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated drive
data set.
The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0186.
Remedy:
The index of the motor data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0186.
See also: p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number)
F07502
Drive: Encoder Data Set EDS not configured
Message value:
Drive data set: %1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Only for power units:

The encoder data set was not configured - this means that a data set number was not entered into the associated
drive data set.
The fault value includes the drive data set number of p0187, p0188 and p0189.
The fault value is increased by 100 * encoder number (e.g. for p0189: Fault value 3xx with xx = data set number).
Remedy:
The index of the encoder data set associated with the drive data set should be entered into p0187 (1st encoder),
p0188 (2nd encoder) and p0189 (3rd encoder).
A07504
Drive: Motor data set is not assigned to a drive data set
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A motor data set is not assigned to a drive object.

All of the existing motor data sets in the drive data sets must be assigned using the MDS number (p0186[0...n]).
There must be at least as many drive data sets as motor data sets.
Number of the motor data set that has not been assigned.
Remedy:
In the drive data sets, assign the non-assigned motor data set using the MDS number (p0186[0...n]).
- check whether all of the motor data sets are assigned to drive data sets.
- if required, delete superfluous motor data sets.
- if required, set up new drive data sets and assign to the corresponding motor data sets.
See also: p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number)

3-1191
Faults and alarms

F07509
Drive: Component number missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A Drive Data Set (DDS) is assigned to a Motor Data Set (MDS) or Encoder Data Set (EDS) that does not have a
component number.
nnmmmxxyyy
nn: Number of the MDS/EDS.
mmm: Parameter number of the missing component number.
xx: Number of the DDS that is assigned to the MDS/EDS.
yyy: Parameter number that references the MDS/EDS.
Example:
p0186[7] = 5: DDS 7 is assigned MDS 5.
p0131[5] = 0: There is no component number set in MDS 5.
Alarm value = 0513107186
Remedy:
In the drive data sets, no longer assign MDS/EDS using p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189 or set a valid component number.
See also: p0131, p0141, p0142, p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189
F07510
Drive: Identical encoder in the drive data set
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
More than one encoder with identical component number is assigned to a single drive data set. In one drive data set,
it is not permissible that identical encoders are operated together.
1000 * first identical encoder + 100 * second identical encoder + drive data set.
Example:
Fault value = 1203 means:
In drive data set 3, the first (p0187[3]) and second encoder (p0188[3]) are identical.
Remedy:
Assign the drive data set to different encoders.

See also: p0141 (Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number), p0187 (Encoder 1 encoder data set number), p0188 (Encoder 2 encoder data set number), p0189 (Encoder 3 encoder data set number)
F07511
Drive: Encoder used a multiple number of times
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Each encoder may only be assigned to one drive and within a drive must - in each drive data set - either always be
encoder 1, always encoder 2 or always encoder 3. This unique assignment has been violated.
The two parameters in coded form, that refer to the same component number.
First parameter:
Index: First and second decimal place (99 for EDS, not assigned DDS)
Parameter number: Third decimal place (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189, 4 for EDS not assigned DDS)
Drive number: Fourth and fifth decimal place
Second parameter:
Index: Sixth and seventh decimal place (99 for EDS, not assigned DDS)
Parameter number: Eighth decimal place (1 for p0187, 2 for p0188, 3 for p0189, 4 for EDS, not assigned DDS)
Drive number: Ninth and tenth decimal place
See also: p0141 (Encoder interface (Sensor Module) component number)
Remedy:
Correct the double use of a component number using the two parameters coded in the fault value.
3-1192

Faults and alarms

F07512
Drive: Encoder data set changeover cannot be parameterized
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Using p0141, a changeover of the encoder data set is prepared that is illegal. In this firmware release, an encoder
data set changeover is only permitted for the components in the actual topology.
Incorrect EDS data set number.
(Encoder 3 encoder data set number)
Remedy:
Every encoder data set must be assigned its own dedicated DRIVE-CLiQ socket. The component numbers of the
encoder interfaces (p0141) must have different values within a drive object.
The following must apply:
p0141[0] not equal to p0141[1] not equal to ... not equal to p0141[n]
A07514 (N)
Drive: Data structure does not correspond to the interface module
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The interface mode "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" was set (p2038 = 1) and the data structure does not correspond to
this mode.
For the data structure, the following rule must be complied with.
Within the group of 8 drive data sets, the assignment to the motor data set must be set the same:
p0186[0] = p0186[1] = ... = p0186[7]
p0186[8] = p0186[9] = ... = p0186[15]
p0186[16] = p0186[17] = ... = p0186[23]
p0186[24] = p0186[25] = ... = p0186[31]
See also: p0180 (Number of Drive Data Sets (DDS)), p0186 (Motor Data Sets (MDS) number), p2038 (PROFIdrive
STW/ZSW interface mode)
Remedy:
- structure the data according to the rules of the "SIMODRIVE 611 universal" interface mode.
- check the interface mode (p2038).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07515
Drive: Power unit and motor incorrectly connected
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A power unit (via PDS) was assigned to a motor (via MDS) in a drive data set that is not connected in the target
topology.
Number of the incorrectly parameterized drive data set.
Remedy:
- assign the drive data set to a combination of motor and power unit permitted by the target topology.
- adapt the target topology.
See also: p0121 (Power unit component number), p0131 (Motor component number), p0186 (Motor Data Sets
(MDS) number)

3-1193
Faults and alarms

F07516
Drive: Re-commission the data set
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The assignment between the drive data set and motor data set (p0186) or between the drive data set and the
encoder data set was modified (p0187). This is the reason that the drive data set must re-commissioned.
Drive data set to be re-commissioned.
Remedy:
Commission the drive data set specified in the fault value (r0949).
F07517
Drive: Encoder data set changeover incorrectly parameterized
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An MDS cannot have different motor encoders in two different DDS.

The following parameterization therefore results results in an error:
p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 0
p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 1
The lower 16 bits indicate the first DDS and the upper 16 bits indicate the second DDS.
Remedy:
If you wish to operate a motor once with one motor encoder and then another time with the other motor encoder,
then you must set up two different MDSs, in which the motor data are the same.
Example:
p0186[0] = 0, p0187[0] = 0
p0186[0] = 1, p0187[0] = 1
F07518
Drive: Motor data set changeover incorrectly parameterized
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The system has identified that two motor data sets were incorrectly parameterized.
Parameter r0313 (calculated from p0314, p0310, p0311), r0315 and p1982 may only have different values if the
motor data sets are assigned different motors. p0827 is used to assign the motors and/contactors.
It is not possible to toggle between motor data sets.
xxxxyyyy:
xxxx: First DDS with assigned MDS, yyyy: Second DDS with assigned MDS
Remedy:
Correct the parameterization of the motor data sets.
A07519
Drive: Motor changeover incorrectly parameterized
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
With the setting p0833.0 = 1, a motor changeover via the application is selected. This is the reason that p0827 must
have different values in the appropriate motor data set.
xxxxyyyy:
xxxx: First MDS, yyyy: Second MDS
Remedy:
- parameterize the appropriate motor data sets differently (p0827).

- select the setting p0833.0 = 0 (motor changeover via the drive).
3-1194

Faults and alarms

A07520
Drive: Motor cannot be changed over
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The motor cannot be changed over.

1:
The contactor for the motor that is presently active cannot be opened, because for a synchronous motor, the speed
(r0063) is greater than the speed at the start of field weakening (p3048). As long as r0063 > p0348, the current in
the motor does not decay in spite of the pulses being suppressed.
2:
The "contactor opened" feedback signal was not detected within 1 s.
3:
The "contactor closed" feedback signal was not detected within 1 s.
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Set the speed lower than the speed at the start of field weakening (r0063 < p0348).
Re alarm value = 2, 3:
Check the feedback signals of the contactor involved.
A07530
Drive: Drive Data Set DDS not present
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected drive data set is not available (p0837 > p0180). The drive data set was not changed over.
See also: p0180, p0820, p0821, p0822, p0823, p0824, r0837
Remedy:
- select the existing drive data set.

- set up additional drive data sets.
A07541
Drive: Data set changeover not possible
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The selected drive data set changeover and the assigned motor changeover are not possible and are not carried out.
For synchronous motors, the motor contactor may only be switched for actual speeds less than the speed at the start
of field weakening (r0063 < p0348).
See also: r0063 (Actual speed value)
Remedy:
Reduce the speed below the speed at the start of field weakening.
A07550 (F, N)
Drive: Not possible to reset encoder parameters
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When carrying out a factory setting (e.g. using p0970 = 1), it was not possible to reset the encoder parameters. The
encoder parameters are directly read out of the encoder via DRIVE-CLiQ.
Component number of the encoder involved.
Remedy:
- repeat the operation.

Reaction upon F:
NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1195
Faults and alarms

F07551
Drive encoder: No commutation angle information
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, drive data set: %2
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The commutation angle information is missing. This means that synchronous motors cannot be controlled (closedloop control)
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = fault cause, xxxx = drive data set
yyyy = 1 dec:
The motor encoder used does not supply an absolute commutation angle.
yyyy = 2 dec:
The selected ratio of the measuring gear does not match the motor pole pair number.
Remedy:
Re fault cause = 1:
- check the encoder parameterization (p0404).
- use an encoder with track C/D, EnDat interface of Hall sensors.
- use an encoder with sinusoidal A/B track for which the motor pole pair number (r0313) is an integer multiple of the
encoder pulse number (p0408).
- activate the pole position identification routine (p1982 = 1).
Re fault cause = 2:
- the quotient of the pole pair number divided by the ratio of the measuring gear must be an integer number: (p0314
* p0433) / p0432.
Note:
For operation with track C/D, this quotient must be less than 8.
See also: p0402 (Gearbox type selection), p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0432 (Gearbox factor, encoder
revolutions), p0433 (Gearbox factor, motor/load revolutions)
F07552 (A)
Drive encoder: Encoder configuration not supported
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, component number: %2, encoder data set: %3
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The requested encoder configuration is not supported. Only bits may be requested in p0404 that are signaled as
being supported by the encoder evaluation in r0456.
Low word low byte: Encoder data set number
Low word high byte: Component number
High word:
The encoder evaluation does not support a function selected in p0404.
1: sin/cos encoder with absolute track (this is supported by SME25).
3: Squarewave encoder (this is supported by SMC30).
4: sin/cos encoder (this is supported by SMC20, SMI20, SME20, SME25).
12: sin/cos encoder with reference mark (this is supported by SME20).
15: Commutation with zero mark for separately-excited synchronous motors with VECTORMV.
23: Resolver (this is supported by SMC10, SMI10).
65535: Other function (compare r0456 and p0404).
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), r0456 (Encoder configuration supported)
Remedy:
- check the encoder parameterization (p0400, p0404).

- use the matching encoder evaluation (r0456).
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1196

Faults and alarms

F07553 (A)
Drive encoder: Sensor Module configuration not supported
Message value:
Encoder data set: %1, first incorrect bit: %2, incorrect parameter: %3
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The Sensor Module does not support the requested configuration.

For incorrect p0430 (cc = 0), the following applies:
- In p0430 (requested functions), at least 1 bit was set that is not set in r0458 (supported functions) (exception: Bit
19, 28, 29, 30, 31).
- p1982 > 0 (pole position identification requested), but r0458.16 = 0 (pole position identification not supported).
For incorrect p0437 (cc = 1), the following applies:
- In p0437 (requested functions), at least 1 bit was set that is not set in r0459 (supported functions).
ddccbbaa hex
aa: encoder data set number
bb: first incorrect bit
cc: incorrect parameter
cc = 0: incorrect parameter is p0430
cc = 1: incorrect parameter is p0437
cc = 2: incorrect parameter is r0459
dd: reserved (always 0)
Remedy:

- check the pole position identification routine (p1982).
- use the matching encoder evaluation (r0458, r0459).
See also: p0430, p0437, r0458, r0459, p1982
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07555 (A)
Drive encoder: Configuration position tracking
Message value:
Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2, drive data set: %3, fault cause: %4
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The configuration of the position tracking is not supported.

Position tracking can only be activated for absolute encoders.
For linear axes, it is not possible to simultaneously activate the position tracking for load and measuring gears.
ddccbbaa hex
aa = encoder data set
cc = drive data set
dd = fault cause
dd = 00 hex = 0 dez
An absolute encoder is not being used.
dd = 01 hex = 1 dez
Position tracking cannot be activated because the memory of the internal NVRAM is not sufficient or a Control Unit
does not have an NVRAM.
dd = 02 hex = 2 dez
For a linear axis, the position tracking was activated for the load and measuring gear.
dd = 03 hex = 3 dez
Position tracking cannot be activated because position tracking with another gear ratio, axis type or tolerance window
has already been detected for this encoder data set.
dd = 04 hex = 4 dez
A linear encoder is being used.
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0411 (Measuring gear, configuration)

3-1197
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- use an absolute encoder.

- if necessary, deselect the position tracking (p0411 for the measuring gear, p2720 for the load gear).
- use a Control Unit with sufficient NVRAM.
- Only activate position tracking of the load gear in the same encoder data set if the gear ratio (p2504, p2505), axis
type (p2720.1) and tolerance window (p2722) are also the same.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07556
Measuring gear: Position tracking, maximum actual value exceeded
Message value:
Component number: %1, encoder data set: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When the position tracking of the measuring gear is configured, the drive/encoder identifies a maximum possible
absolute position actual value (r0483) that cannot be represented within 32 bits.
Maximum value: p0408 * p0412 * 2^p0419
Low word low byte: Encoder data set number
Low word high byte: Component number
See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.), p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual),
p0419 (Fine resolution absolute value Gx_XIST2 (in bits))
Remedy:
- reduce the fine resolution (p0419).

- reduce the multiturn resolution (p0412).
See also: p0412 (Measuring gear, absolute encoder, rotary, revolutions, virtual), p0419 (Fine resolution absolute
value Gx_XIST2 (in bits))
A07557 (F)
Encoder 1: Reference point coordinate not in the permissible range
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The reference point coordinate received when adjusting the encoder via connector input CI:p2599 lies outside the
half of the encoder range and cannot be set as actual axis position. The maximum permissible value is displayed in
the supplementary information.
Remedy:
Set the reference point coordinate less than the value from the supplementary information.
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07558 (F)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1198

Faults and alarms

A07559 (F)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F07560
Drive encoder: Number of pulses is not to the power of two
Message value:
Encoder data set: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
For rotary absolute encoders, the pulse number in p0408 must be to the power of two.
The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved.
Remedy:
- check the parameterization (p0408, p0404.1, r0458.5).

- upgrade the Sensor Module firmware if necessary
F07561
Drive encoder: Number of multiturn pulses is not to the power of two
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The multiturn resolution in p0421 must be to the power of two.

The fault value includes the encoder data set number involved.
Remedy:
- check the parameterization (p0421, p0404.1, r0458.5).

- upgrade the Sensor Module firmware if necessary
F07562 (A)
Drive, encoder: Position tracking, incremental encoder not possible
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, component number: %2, encoder data set: %3
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The requested position tracking for incremental encoders is not supported.

ccccbbaa hex
aa = encoder Data Set number
cccc = fault cause
cccc = 00 hex = 0 dec
The encoder type does not support the "Position tracking incremental encoder" function.
Position tracking cannot be activated because the memory of the internal NVRAM is not sufficient or a Control Unit
does not have an NVRAM.
A linear encoder is used that does not support the position tracking function.
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0411 (Measuring gear, configuration), r0456 (Encoder configuration supported)

3-1199
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

- use a Control Unit with sufficient NVRAM.
- if required, deselect position tracking for the incremental encoder (p0411.3 = 0).
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07565 (F, N)
Drive: Encoder error in PROFIdrive encoder interface 1
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An encoder error was signaled for encoder 1 via the PROFIdrive encoder interface (G1_ZSW.15).
Error code from G1_XIST2, refer to the description regarding r0483.
Note:
This alarm is only output if p0480[0] is not equal to zero.
Remedy:
Acknowledge the encoder error using the encoder control word (G1_STW.15 = 1).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07566 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07567 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1200

Faults and alarms

A07569 (F)
Encoder could not be identified
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
During encoder identification (waiting) with p0400 = 10100, the encoder could not be identified.
Either the wrong encoder has been installed or no encoder has been installed, the wrong encoder cable has been
connected or no encoder cable has been connected to the Sensor Module, or the DRIVE-CLiQ component has not
been connected to DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note:
Encoder identification must be supported by the encoder and is possible in the following cases:
Encoder with EnDat interface, motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Remedy:
- check and, if necessary, connect the encoder and/or encoder cable.

- check and, if necessary, establish the DRIVE-CLiQ connection.
- in the case of encoders that cannot be identified (e.g. encoders without EnDat interface), the correct encoder type
must be entered in p0400.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F07575
Drive: Motor encoder not ready
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2 (ENCODER)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The motor encoder signals that it is not ready.

- initialization of encoder 1 (motor encoder) was unsuccessful.
- the function "parking encoder" is active (encoder control word G1_STW.14 = 1).
- the encoder interface (Sensor Module) is deactivated (p0145).
- the Sensor Module is defective.
Remedy:
Evaluate other queued faults via encoder 1.
A07576
Drive: Encoderless operation due to a fault active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Encoderless operation is active due to a fault (r1407.13).

The required response when an encoder fault occurs is parameterized in p0491.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy:
A07577 (F)
Encoder 1: Measuring probe evaluation not possible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

4200: The PROFIBUS clock cycle is not a multiple of integer of the position controller clock cycle.

3-1201
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Re alarm value = 6:
Set the clock cycle ratio between the PROFIBUS clock cycle and the position controller clock cycle to an integer multiple.
Reaction upon F:
OFF1
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07578 (F)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Re alarm value = 6:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07579 (F)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Re alarm value = 6:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1202

Faults and alarms

A07580 (F, N)
Drive: No Sensor Module with matching component number
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A Sensor Module with the component number specified in p0141 was not found.
Encoder data set involved (index of p0141).
Remedy:
Correct parameter p0141.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07581 (F)
Encoder 1: Position actual value preprocessing error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07582 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07583 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07584
Encoder 1: Position setting value activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
None necessary.

3-1203
Faults and alarms

A07585
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
None necessary.
A07586
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
None necessary.
A07587
Encoder 1: Position actual value preprocessing does not have a valid encoder
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The following problem has occurred during the position actual value preprocessing.
- an encoder data set has been assigned, however, the encoder data set does not contain any encoder data (p0400
= 0) or invalid data (e.g. p0408 = 0).
Remedy:
Check the drive data sets, encoder data sets.

A07588
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

A07589
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

3-1204

Faults and alarms

A07590 (F)
Encoder 1: Drive Data Set changeover in operation
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A Drive Data Set changeover (DDS) with a change of the mechanical relationships and the encoder assignment
(p2502) was requested in operation.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07591 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07592 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07593 (F)
Encoder 1: Value range for position actual value exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
If required, reduce the traversing range or position resolution.

Re alarm value = 3:
Reducing the position resolution and conversion factor:
- reduce the length unit (LU) per load revolution for rotary encoders (p2506).
- increase the fine resolution of absolute position actual values (p0419).
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY

3-1205
Faults and alarms

A07594 (F)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07595 (F)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1206

Faults and alarms

A07596 (F)
Encoder 1: Reference function interrupted
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07597 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A07598 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY

3-1207
Faults and alarms

F07599 (A)
Encoder 1: Adjustment not possible
Message value:
Drive data set: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The maximum encoder value times the factor to convert the absolute position (r0483 and/or r2723) from increments
to length units (LU) has exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... 2147483647) for displaying the position actual
value.
Remedy:
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
3. Motor encoder with position tracking for load gear:
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
4. Motor encoder with position tracking for load and measuring gear:
p2506 * p2721
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
6. Direct encoder with position tracking for measuring gear:
p2506 * p0412
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07600 (A)
Message value:
Drive data set: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
value.
Remedy:
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p2721
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0412
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1208

Faults and alarms

F07601 (A)
Message value:
Drive data set: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
value.
Remedy:
p2506 * p0433 * p2505 / (p0432 * p2504)
p2506 * p0412 * p2505 / p2504
p2506 * p2721 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p2721
p2506 * p0433 / p0432
p2506 * p0412
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07800
Drive: No power unit present
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit parameters cannot be read or no parameters are stored in the power unit.
Connection between the Control Unit and the Motor Module was interrupted or is defective.
Note:
This fault also occurs if an incorrect topology was selected in the commissioning software and this parameterization
is then downloaded to the Control Unit.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual)
Remedy:
- connect the data line to power unit and restart the Control Unit (POWER ON).
- check or replace the Control Unit.
- check the cable between the Control Unit and Motor Module.
- after correcting the topology, the parameters must be again downloaded using the commissioning software.
F07801
Drive: Motor overcurrent
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The permissible motor limit current was exceeded.

- effective current limit set too low.
- current controller not correctly set.
- V/f operation: Up ramp was set too short or the load is too high.
- V/f operation: Short-circuit in the motor cable or ground fault.
- V/f operation: Motor current does not match current of power unit.
- Switch to rotating motor without flying restart function (p1200).
Note:
Limit current = 2 * Minimum( p0640, 4 * p0305) >= 2 * p0305

3-1209
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the current limits (p0640).

- vector control: Check the current controller (p1715, p1717).
- V/f control: Check the current limiting controller (p1340 ... p1346).
- increase the up ramp (p1120) or reduce the load.
- check the motor and motor cables for short-circuit and ground fault.
- check the motor for the star-delta configuration and rating plate parameterization.
- check the power unit and motor combination.
- Choose "flying restart" function (p1200) if switched to rotating motor.
F07802
Drive: Infeed or power unit not ready
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
After an internal power-on command, the infeed or drive does not signal ready.
- monitoring time is too short.
- DC link voltage is not present.
- associated infeed or drive of the signaling component is defective.
- supply voltage incorrectly set.
Remedy:
- increase the monitoring time (p0857).

- ensure that there is a DC link voltage. Check the DC link busbar. Enable the infeed.
- replace the associated infeed or drive of the signaling component.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time)
A07805 (N)
Drive: Power unit overload I2t
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Alarm threshold for I2t overload (p0294) of the power unit exceeded.
Remedy:
- reduce the continuous load.

- adapt the load duty cycle.
- check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07810
Drive: Power unit EEPROM without rated data
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
No rated data are stored in the power unit EEPROM.

See also: p0205 (Power unit application), r0206 (Rated power unit power), r0207 (Rated power unit current), r0208
(Rated power unit line supply voltage), r0209 (Power unit, maximum current)
Remedy:
Replace the power unit or inform Siemens Customer Service.
3-1210

Faults and alarms

F07815
Drive: Power unit has been changed
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The code number of the actual power unit does not match the saved number. The fault only occurs if the comparator
in p9906 or p9908 is not at f 2 (low) or 3 (minimum).
Number of the incorrect parameter.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual), p0201 (Power unit code number)
Remedy:
Connect the original power unit and power up the Control Unit again (POWER ON) or set p0201 to r0200 and exit
commissioning with p0010 = 0.
If the new power unit is accepted, then if required, the current limit p0640 can be reduced by a lower maximum current of the power unit (r0209) (torque limits stay the same).
If not only the power unit is changed, but also the motor, then the motor must be re-commissioned (e.g. using p0010
= 1). This is also necessary if motor data is still to be downloaded via DRIVE-CLiQ.
If the comparison stage in p9906 is set to 2, 3, then commissioning can be exited (p0010 = 0) and the fault acknowledged.
See also: r0200 (Power unit code number actual)
A07820
Drive: Temperature sensor not connected
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature sensor for motor temperature monitoring, specified in p0600, is not available.
- 10 (SME) is set in p0601, but a value other than 1, 2, or 3 is set in p0600
- 11 (SME) is set in p0601, but a value other than 20 or 21 is set in p0600
- 11 (BICO) is set in p0601, and a sensor is set in p4610 - p4613, but the associated BICO input (p0608, p0609) is
not interconnected
- module with sensor evaluation not present or has been removed in the meantime.
- temperature sensor via Motor Module, not for CU310.
Remedy:
- connect the module with temperature sensor.

- set the available temperature sensor (p0600, p0601).
- set p4610 - p4613 to no sensor (0), or interconnect p0608 and p0609 with an external sensor value (only if BICO
(11) is set in p0601)
See also: p0600 (Motor temperature sensor for monitoring), p0601 (Motor temperature sensor type)
A07825 (N)
Drive: Simulation mode activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The simulation mode is activated.

The drive can only be powered up if the DC link voltage is less than 40 V.
Remedy:
The alarm automatically disappears if simulation mode is deactivated with p1272 = 0.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07826
Drive: Simulation mode with DC link voltage too high
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The simulation mode is activated and the DC link voltage is greater than the permissible value of 40 V.
Remedy:
- switch out (disable) simulation mode (p1272 = 0) and acknowledge the fault.
- reduce the input voltage in order to reach a DC link voltage below 40 V.

3-1211
Faults and alarms

F07840
Drive: Infeed operation missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The signal "infeed operation" is not present although the enable signals for the drive have been present for longer
than the parameterized monitoring time (p0857).
- infeed not operational.
- interconnection of the binector input for the ready signal is either incorrect or missing (p0864).
- infeed is presently carrying out a line supply identification routine.
Remedy:
- bring the infeed into an operational state.

- check the interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" (p0864).
- wait until the infeed has completed the line supply identification routine.
See also: p0857 (Power unit monitoring time), p0864 (Infeed operation)
F07841 (A)
Drive: Infeed operation withdrawn
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The signal "infeed operation" was withdrawn in operation.

- interconnection of the binector input for the signal "infeed operation" is either incorrect or missing (p0864).
- the enable signals of the infeed were disabled.
- due to a fault, the infeed withdraws the signal "infeed operation".
Remedy:
- check the interconnection of the binector input for the "infeed operation" signal (p0864).
- check the enable signals of the infeed and if required, enable.
- remove and acknowledge an infeed fault.
Note:
If this drive is intended to back up the DC link regeneratively, then the fault response must be parameterized for
NONE, OFF1 or OFF3. so that the drive can continue to operate even after the infeed fails.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07850 (F)
External alarm 1
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The BICO signal for "external alarm 1" was triggered.

The condition for this external alarm is fulfilled.
See also: p2112 (External alarm 1)
Remedy:
Eliminate the causes of this alarm.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
A07851 (F)
External alarm 2
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

3-1212

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
A07852 (F)
External alarm 3
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
F07860 (A)
External fault 1
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The BICO signal "external fault 1" was triggered.

See also: p2106 (External fault 1)
Remedy:
Eliminate the causes of this fault.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07861 (A)
External fault 2
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:

See also: p2107 (External fault 2)
Remedy:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07862 (A)
External fault 3
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:

See also: p2108, p3111, p3112
Remedy:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1213
Faults and alarms

F07890
Internal voltage protection/internal armature short-circuit with Safe Torque Off active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The internal armature short-circuit (p1231 = 4) is not possible as Safe Torque Off (STO) is enabled. The pulses cannot be enabled.
Remedy:
Switch out the internal armature short-circuit (p1231=0) or deactivate Safe Torque Off (p9501 = p9561 = 0).
Note:
F07900 (N, A)
Drive: Motor blocked
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Motor has been operating at the torque limit longer than the time specified in p2177 and below the speed threshold
set in p2175.
This signal can also be initiated if the speed actual value is oscillating and the speed controller output repeatedly
goes to its limit.
If the simulation mode is enabled (p1272 = 1) and the closed-loop control with speed encoder activated (p1300 =
21), then the inhibit signal is generated if the encoder signal is not received from a motor that is driven with the torque
setpoint of the closed-loop control.
See also: p2175 (Motor locked speed threshold), p2177 (Motor locked delay time)
Remedy:
- check that the motor can rotate freely.

- check the torque limit: For a positive direction of rotation r1538, for a negative direction of rotation r1539.
- check the parameter, message "Motor locked" and if required, correct (p2175, p2177).
- check the inversion of the actual value (p0410).
- check the motor encoder connection.
- check the encoder pulse number (p0408).
- for SERVO with encoderless operation and motors with low power ratings (< 300 W), increase the pulse frequency
(p1800).
- after deselecting the "Basic positioner" (EPOS) function mode, check the motoring (p1528) and regenerative
(p1529) torque limit and modify again.
- in the simulation mode and operation with speed encoder, the power unit to which the motor is connected must be
powered up and must be supplied with the torque setpoint of the simulated closed-loop control. Otherwise, change
over to encoderless control (see p1300).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07901
Drive: Motor overspeed
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The maximum permissible speed was either positively or negatively exceeded.

The maximum permissible positive speed is formed as follows: Minimum (p1082, CI: p1085) + p2162
The maximum permissible negative speed is formed as follows: Maximum (-p1082, CI: 1088) - p2162
Remedy:
The following applies for a positive direction of rotation:

- check r1084 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1085 and p2162.
The following applies for a negative direction of rotation:
- check r1087 and if required, correct p1082, CI:p1088 and p2162.
Activate pre-control of the speed limiting controller (p1401 bit 7 = 1).
Increase the hysteresis for the overspeed signal p2162. This upper limit is dependent upon the maximum motor
speed p0322 and the maximum speed p1082 of the setpoint channel.
3-1214

Faults and alarms

F07902 (N, A)
Drive: Motor stalled
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For a vector drive the system has identified that the motor has stall for a time longer than is set in p2178.
1: Stall detection using r1408.11 (p1744 or p0492).
2: Stall detection using r1408.12 (p1745).
3: Stall detection using r0056.11 (only for separately excited synchronous motors).
See also: p1744 (Motor model speed threshold stall detection), p2178 (Motor stalled delay time)
Remedy:
It should always be carefully ensured that the motor data identification (p1910) as well as the rotating measurement
(p1960) were carried out (also refer to r3925). For synchronous motors with encoder, the encoder must have been
adjusted (p1990).
For closed-loop speed and torque control with speed encoder, the following applies:
- check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number, broken encoder shaft).
- check the speed encoder, if another speed encoder was selected using the data set changeover. This must be connected to the same motor that is controlled for the data set changeover.
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1744 and p0492) can be increased.
If the stalled motor should take place in the range of the monitor model and for speeds of less than 30 % of the rated
motor speed, then a change can be made directly from the current model into the flux impression (p1401.5 = 1). We
therefore recommend that the time-controlled model change is switched in (p1750.4 = 1) or the model changeover
limits are significantly increased (p1752 > 0.35 * p0311; p1753 = 5 %).
For closed-loop speed and torque control without speed encoder, the following applies:
- Check whether the drive stalls solely due to the load in controlled mode (r1750.0) or when the speed setpoint is still
zero. If so, increase the current setpoint via p1610 or set p1750 bit 2 = 1 (encoderless vector control to standstill for
passive loads).
- If the motor excitation time (p0346) was significantly reduced and the drive stalls when it is switched on and run
immediately, p0346 should be increased again or quick magnetizing selected (p1401).
- Check the current limits (p0640, r0067, r0289). If the current limits are too low, then the drive cannot be magnetized.
- check the current controller (p1715, p1717) and the speed adaptation controller (p1764, p1767). If the dynamic
response was significantly reduced, then this should be increased again.
- check the speed encoder, if another speed encoder was selected using the data set changeover. This must be connected to the motor that is controlled for the data set changeover.
If there is no fault, then the fault tolerance (p1745) or the delay time (p2178) can be increased.
The following generally apply for closed-loop and torque control:
- Check whether the motor cables are disconnected.
- If the fault occurs with fault value 2 when the motor accelerates very quickly to the field weakening range, the deviation between the flux setpoint and actual value can be reduced and, in turn, the fault message prevented, by reducing p1596.
For separately-excited synchronous motors (closed-loop control with speed encoder), the following applies:
- check the speed signal (interrupted cable, polarity, pulse number).
- ensure the correct motor parameterization (rating plate and equivalent circuit diagram parameters).
- check the excitation equipment and the interface to the closed-loop control.
- encoder the highest possible dynamic response of the closed-loop excitation current control.
- check the speed control for any tendency to oscillate and if resonance effects occur, use a bandstop filter.
- do not exceed the maximum speed (p2162).
If there is no fault, then the delay time can be increased (p2178).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1215
Faults and alarms

A07903
Drive: Motor speed deviation
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The absolute value of the speed difference from the two setpoints (p2151, p2154) and the speed actual value (r2169)
exceeds the tolerance threshold (p2163) longer than tolerated (p2164, p2166).
The alarm is only enabled for p2149.0 = 1.
Possible causes could be:
- the load torque is greater than the torque setpoint.
- when accelerating, the torque/current/power limit is reached. If the limits are not sufficient, then it is possible that
the drive has been dimensioned too small.
- for closed-loop torque control, the speed setpoint does not track the speed actual value.
- for active Vdc controller.
For V/f control, the overload condition is detected as the Imax controller is active.
See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration)
Remedy:
- increase p2163 and/or p2166.

- increase the torque/current/power limits.
- for closed-loop torque control: The speed setpoint should track the speed actual value.
- deactivate alarm with p2149.0 = 0.
A07904 (N)
External armature short-circuit: Contactor feedback signal "Closed" missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When closing, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not issue the signal "Closed" (r1239.1 = 1) within the monitoring time (p1236).
Remedy:
- check that the contactor feedback signal is correctly connected (p1235).

- check the logic of the contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0: "Open").
- if required, set the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231=2).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07905 (N, A)
External armature short-circuit: Contactor feedback signal "Open" missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When opening, the contactor feedback signal (p1235) did not issue the signal "Open" (r1239.1 = 0) within the monitoring time (p1236).
Remedy:
- check that the contactor feedback signal is correctly connected (p1235).

- check the logic of the contactor feedback signal (r1239.1 = 1: "Closed", r1239.1 = 0: "Open").
- if required, set the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231=2).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1216

Faults and alarms

F07906
Armature short-circuit / internal voltage protection: Parameterization error
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, motor data set: %2
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The armature short-circuit is incorrectly parameterized.

Low word: Motor data set number
High word: Cause:
1: A permanent-magnet synchronous motor has not been selected.
2: No induction motor selected.
101: External armature short-circuit: Output (r1239.0) not connected up.
102: External armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal: No feedback signal connected (BI:p1235).
103: External armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal: Delay time when opening (p1237) is 0.
201: Internal voltage protection: The maximum output current of the Motor Module (r0209) is less than 1.8 * motor
short-circuit current (r0331).
202: Internal voltage protection: A Motor Module in booksize or chassis format is not being used.
203: Internal voltage protection: The motor short-circuit current (p0320) is greater than the maximum motor current
(p0323).
204: Internal voltage protection: The activation (p1231 = 4) is not given for all motor data sets with synchronous
motors (p0300 = 2xx, 4xx).
Remedy:
Re cause 1:
- an armature short-circuit / voltage protection is only permissible for permanent-magnetic synchronous motors. The
highest position of the motor type in p0300 must either be 2 or 4.
Re cause 101:
- the contactor for the external armature short-circuit configuration should be controlled using output signal r1239.0.
The signal can, e.g. be connected to an output terminal BI: p0738. Before this fault can be acknowledged, p1231
must be set again.
Re cause 102:
- if the external armature short-circuit with contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 1) is selected, this feedback signal
must be connected to an input terminal (e.g. r722.x) and then connected to BI: p1235.
- alternatively, the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2) can be selected.
Re cause 103:
- if the external armature short-circuit without contactor feedback signal (p1231 = 2) is selected, then a delay time
must be parameterized in p1237. This time must always be greater than the actual contactor opening time, as otherwise the Motor Module would be short-circuited!
Re cause 201:
- a Motor Module with a higher maximum current or a motor with a lower short-circuit current must be used. The maximum Motor Module current must be higher than 1.8 * short-circuit current of the motor.
Re cause 202:
- for internal voltage protection, use a Motor Module in booksize or chassis format.
Re cause 203:
- for internal voltage protection, only use short-circuit proof motors.
Re cause 204:
- The internal voltage protection must either be activated for all motor data sets with synchronous motors (p0300 =
2xx, 4xx) (p1231 = 3) or it must be deactivated for all motor data sets (p1231 not equal to 3). This therefore ensures
that the protection cannot be accidentally withdrawn as a result of a data set changeover. The fault can only be
acknowledged if this condition is fulfilled.

3-1217
Faults and alarms

F07907
Internal armature short-circuit: Motor terminals are not at zero potential after pulse
suppression
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The function "Internal voltage protection" (p1231 = 3) was activated. The following must be observed:
- when the internal voltage protection is active, after pulse suppression, all of the motor terminals are at half of the
DC link voltage (without an internal voltage protection, the motor terminals are at zero potential)!
- the Motor Module must be able to continually conduct 180% short-circuit current (r0331) of the motor (r0289).
- the internal voltage protection cannot be interrupted due to a fault response. If an overcurrent condition occurs during the active, internal voltage protection, then this can destroy the Motor Module and/or the motor.
- if the Motor Module does not support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 0), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, an external 24 V power supply (UPS) must be used for the components.
- if the Motor Module does support the autonomous, internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), in order to ensure
safe, reliable functioning when the line supply fails, the 24 V power supply for the components must be provided
through a Control Supply Module.
- if the internal voltage protection is active, it is not permissible that the motor is driven by the load for a longer period
of time (e.g. as a result of loads that move the motor or another coupled motor).
Remedy:
None necessary.
This a note for the user.
A07908
Internal armature short-circuit active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited through the power semiconductors (r1239.5 = 1). The
pulses cannot be enabled. The internal armature short-circuit is selected (p1231 = 4):
Remedy:
For synchronous motors, the armature short-circuit braking is activated if a 1 signal is present via binector input
p1230.
See also: p1230 (Armature short-circuit / DC brake activation), p1231 (Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration)
F07909
Internal voltage protection: Deactivation only effective after POWER ON
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The deactivation of the internal voltage protection (p1231 not equal to 3) only becomes effective after POWER ON.
The status signal r1239.6 = 1 indicates that the internal voltage protection is ready.
Remedy:
None necessary.
This a note for the user.
3-1218

Faults and alarms

A07910 (N)
Drive: Motor overtemperature
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
KTY or no sensor:
The measured motor temperature or temperature of the thermal model has exceeded the alarm threshold (p0604 or
p0616). The response parameterized in p0610 becomes active.
PTC or bimetallic NC contact:
The response threshold of 1650 Ohm was exceeded or the NC contact opened.
SME not selected in p0601:
1: No output current reduction.
2: Output current reduction active.
SME or TM120 selected in p0601 (p0601 = 10, 11):
The number specifies the sensor channel that resulted in the alarm being output.
See also: p0604 (Motor temperature alarm threshold), p0610 (Motor overtemperature response)
Remedy:
- check the motor load.

- check the motor ambient temperature.
- check KTY84.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07913
Excitation current outside the tolerance range
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The difference between the excitation current actual value and setpoint has exceeded the tolerance:
abs(r1641 - r1626) > p3201 + p3202
The cause of this fault is again reset for abs(r1641 - r1626) < p3201.
Remedy:
- check the parameterization (p1640, p3201, p3202).

- check the interfaces to the excitation equipment (r1626, p1640).
- check the excitation equipment.
F07914
Flux out of tolerance
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The difference between the flux actual value and setpoint has exceeded the tolerance:
abs(r0084 - r1598) > p3204 + p3205
The cause of this fault is again reset for abs(r0084 - r1598) < p3204.
The fault is only issued after the delay time in p3206 has expired.
Remedy:

- check the interfaces to the excitation equipment (r1626, p1640).
- check the excitation equipment.
- check the flux control (p1592, p1592, p1597).
- check the control for oscillation and take the appropriate counter measures (e.g. optimize the speed control loop,
parameterize a bandstop filter).

3-1219
Faults and alarms

A07918 (N)
Three-phase setpoint generator operation selected/active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Only for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5):

The actual open-loop/closed-loop control mode is I/f control (open-loop) with a fixed current (p1300 = 18).
The speed is entered via the setpoint channel and the current setpoint is given by the minimum current (p1620).
It must be ensured that in this mode, the control dynamic performance is very limited. This is the reason that longer
ramp-up times should be set for the setpoint speed than for normal operation.
See also: p1620 (Stator current, minimum)
Remedy:
Select another open-loop/closed-loop control mode

See also: p1300 (Open-loop/closed-loop control operating mode)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07920
Drive: Torque/speed too low
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
See also: p2181 (Load monitoring response)
Remedy:
- check the connection between the motor and load.

- adapt the parameterization corresponding to the load.
A07921
Drive: Torque/speed too high
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
Remedy:
Check the connection between the motor and load.

Adapt the parameterization according to the load.
A07922
Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
Remedy:

F07923
Drive: Torque/speed too low
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too low).
Remedy:

3-1220

Faults and alarms

F07924
Drive: Torque/speed too high
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic (too high).
Remedy:

F07925
Drive: Torque/speed out of tolerance
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The torque deviates from the torque/speed envelope characteristic.
Remedy:

A07926
Drive: Envelope curve, parameter invalid
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Invalid parameter values were entered for the envelope characteristic of the load monitoring.
The following rules apply for the speed thresholds:
p2182 < p2183 < p2184
The following rules apply for the torque thresholds:
p2185 > p2186
p2187 > p2188
p2189 > p2190
Number of the parameter with the invalid value.
Remedy:
Set the parameters for the load monitoring according to the applicable rules or deactivate load monitoring (p2181 =
0; p2193 = 0).
A07927
DC brake active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The motor is braked with a DC current, the DC current brake is active.

1)
An alarm with response DCBRAKE is active. The motor is braked with the braking current set in p1232 for the duration set in in p1233. If the standstill threshold p1226 is undershot, then braking is prematurely canceled.
2)
DC braking has been activated at binector input p1230 with the DC brake set (p1230 = 4). Braking current p1232 is
injected until this binector input becomes inactive.
Remedy:
None necessary.
F07928
Internal voltage protection initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The Motor Module signals that the motor is short-circuited through the power semiconductors (r1239.5 = 1). The
pulses cannot be enabled. The internal voltage protection is selected (p1231 = 3).

3-1221
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
If the Motor Module supports the autonomous internal voltage protection (r0192.10 = 1), then the Motor Module automatically decides - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the armature short-circuit should be activated.
The armature short-circuit is activated and response OFF2 is initiated if the DC link voltage exceeds 800 V. If the DC
link voltage falls below 450 V, then the armature short-circuit is withdrawn.
If the motor is still in a critical speed range, the armature short-circuit is reactivated once the DC link voltage exceeds
the threshold of 800 V.
If the autonomous (independent) internal voltage protection is active (r1239.5 = 1) and the line supply returns (450
V < DC link voltage < 800 V), the armature short-circuit is withdrawn after 3 minute.
F07930
Drive: Brake control error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The Control Unit has detected a brake control error.

10, 11:
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1).
20:
Fault in "brake open" state.
30, 31:
- No brake connected or wire breakage (check whether brake releases for p1278 = 1).
40:
50:
Note:
See also: p1278 (Brake control, diagnostics evaluation)
Remedy:

Operation with Safe Brake Module:
- check the Safe Brake Modules connection.
- replace the Safe Brake Module.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration), p1278 (Brake control, diagnostics evaluation)
A07931 (F, N)
Brake does not open
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
This alarm is output for r1229.4 = 1.

See also: p1216 (Motor holding brake, opening time), r1229 (Motor holding brake status word)
3-1222

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the functionality of the motor holding brake.

- check the feedback signal (p1223).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07932
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
This alarm is output for r1229.5 = 1.

For r1229.5 = 1, OFF/OFF3 are suppressed to prevent the drive accelerating by a load that drives the motor whereby OFF2 remains effective.
See also: p1217 (Motor holding brake closing time), r1229 (Motor holding brake status word)
Remedy:
- check the functionality of the motor holding brake.

- check the feedback signal (p1222).
F07934 (N)
Drive: S120 Combi motor holding brake configuration
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A connected motor holding brake has been detected with an S120 Combi unit. However, this motor holding brake
has not been assigned to just one Combi feed drive and, therefore, brake control is not configured (correctly).
0: No motor holding brake assigned (p1215 = 0 or 3 on all S120 Combi feed drives)
1: Multiple holding brakes assigned (p1215 = 1 or 2 on more than one S120 Combi feed drive)
MHB: Motor holding brake.
Remedy:
Check whether the motor holding brake has been assigned to one S120 Combi feed drive exclusively (p1215 = 1 or
2).
The fault will only be withdrawn once the motor holding brake has been assigned to just one of the S120 Combi feed
drives (p1215 = 1 or 2 for this one drive). From this point, the motor holding brake will be controlled by this drive.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07935 (N)
Drv: Motor holding brake detected
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A motor holding brake was detected where the brake control has not been configured (p1215 = 0). The brake control
configuration was then set to "motor holding brake the same as sequence control" (p1215 = 1).
Remedy:
None necessary.
See also: p1215 (Motor holding brake configuration)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1223
Faults and alarms

F07937 (N)
Drive: Speed deviation between motor model and external speed
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The absolute value of the speed difference from the two actual values (r2169, r1443) exceeds the tolerance threshold
(p3236) for longer than the time set in p3238.
Possible causes could be:
- External encoder signal wired incorrectly (p1440)
- Speed encoder for external encoder signal faulty
- Encoder signal's polarity or gain incorrect
- Smoothing time constant for model speed for monitoring p2157 too high
- Smoothing time constant or threshold values for monitoring too low (p3236, p3238)
See also: p2149 (Monitoring configuration)
Remedy:
- Check that the external speed (see p1440, r1443) matches the motor speed.
- Check the polarity of the external speed (r1443).
- Check connector connection p1440.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F07940
Sync-line-drive: Synchronization error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
After synchronization has been completed, the phase difference (r3808) is greater than the threshold value, phase
synchronism (p3813).
OFF1 or OFF3 response, while the closed-loop phase control is active (r3819.6 = 1) or synchronism reached
(r3819.2 = 1).
Enable signal withdrawn (p3802 = 0), while the closed-loop phase control was active (r3819.6 = 1).
Remedy:
If required increase the threshold value phase synchronism (p3813) for synchronizing the line supply to the drive.
Before OFF1 or OFF3, complete synchronizing (r03819.0 = 0).
Before withdrawing the enable signal (p3802 = 0), reach synchronism (r3819.2 = 1).
See also: p3813 (Sync-line-drive phase synchronism threshold value)
A07941
Sync-line-drive: Target frequency not permissible
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The target frequency is outside the permissible value range.

1084: Target frequency greater than the positive speed limit, f_sync > f_max (r1084).
1087: Target frequency less than the negative speed limit, f_sync < f_min (r1087).
Remedy:
Fulfill the conditions for the target frequency for line-drive synchronization.
See also: r1084 (Speed limit positive effective), r1087 (Speed limit negative effective)
A07942
Sync-line-drive: Setpoint frequency is completely different than the target frequency
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
There is a considerable difference between the setpoint frequency and the target frequency (f_set <> f_target). The
deviation that can be tolerated is set in p3806.
Remedy:
The alarm automatically disappears after the difference that can be tolerated between the setpoint and target frequencies (p3806) is reached.
See also: p3806 (Sync-line-drive frequency difference threshold value)
3-1224

Faults and alarms

A07943
Sync-line-drive: Synchronization not permitted
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Synchronization is not permitted.

1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to encoderless closed-loop speed control or V/f characteristic.
1910: Motor data identification activated.
1960: Speed controller optimization activated.
1990: Encoder adjustment activated.
3801: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) not found.
3845: Friction characteristic record activated.
Remedy:
Fulfill the conditions for the line-drive synchronization.

Set the control mode (p1300) to encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) or V/f characteristic (p1300 =
0 ... 19).
Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910).
Exist the speed controller optimization routine (p1960).
Exit the encoder adjustment (p1990).
Connect-up a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) and when connecting to an adjacent drive object ensure that the drive
objects have the same basis clock cycle.
Exit the friction characteristic record (p3845).
F07950 (A)
Drive: Incorrect motor parameter
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
- the motor parameters were incorrectly entered while commissioning (e.g. p0300 = 0, no motor)
- The braking resistor (p6811) has still not been parameterized - commissioning cannot be completed.
The parameter number involved.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Remedy:
Compare the motor data with the rating plate data and if required, correct.
See also: p0300, p0301, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0316, p0320, p0322, p0323
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F07955
Drive: Motor has been changed
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The code number of the actual motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the saved number.
Number of the incorrect parameter.
See also: p0301 (Motor code number selection), r0302 (Motor code number of motor with DRIVE-CLiQ)
Remedy:
Connect the original motor, power up the Control Unit again (POWER ON) and exit the quick commissioning by setting p0010 to 0.
Or set p0300 = 10000 (load the motor parameter with DRIVE-CLiQ) and re-commission.
Quick commissioning (p0010 = 1) is automatically exited with p3900 > 0.
If quick commissioning was exited by setting p0010 to 0, then an automatic controller calculation (p0340 = 1) is not
carried out.

3-1225
Faults and alarms

F07956 (A)
Drive: Motor code does not match the list (catalog) motor
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The motor code of the connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ does not match the possible list motor types (see selection
in p0300).
The connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ might not be supported by this firmware version.
Motor code of the connected motor with DRIVE-CLiQ.
Note:
The first three digits of the motor code generally correspond to the list motor type.
Remedy:
Use a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ and the matching motor code.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A07960
Drive: Incorrect friction characteristic
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The friction characteristic is incorrect.

1538:
The friction torque is greater than the maximum from the upper effective torque limit (p1538) and zero. This is the
reason that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value.
1539:
The friction torque is less than the minimum from the lower effective torque limit (p1539) and zero. This is the reason
that the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is limited to this value.
3820 ... 3829:
Incorrect parameter number. The speeds entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond
to the following condition:
0.0 < p3820 < p3821 < ... < p3829 <= p0322 or p1082, if p0322 = 0
Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero.
3830 ... 3839:
Incorrect parameter number. The torques entered in the parameters for the friction characteristic do not correspond
to the following condition:
0 <= p3830, p3831 ... p3839 <= p0333
Therefore the output of the friction characteristic (r3841) is set to zero.
See also: r3840 (Friction characteristic, status word)
Remedy:
Fulfill the conditions for the friction characteristic.

Check the upper effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range).
Check the lower effective torque limit (e.g. in the field weakening range).
Re alarm value = 3820 ... 3839:
Fulfill the conditions to set the parameters of the friction characteristic.
If the motor data (e.g. the maximum speed p0322) are changed during commissioning (p0010 = 1, 3), then the technological limits and threshold values, dependent on this, must be recalculated by selecting p0340= 5).
A07961
Drive: Friction characteristic record activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The automatic friction characteristic record is activated.

The friction characteristic is recorded at the next power-on command.
3-1226

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the friction characteristic record has been successfully completed or the
record is deactivated (p3845 = 0).
F07963
Drive: Friction characteristic record interrupted
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The conditions to record the friction characteristic are not fulfilled.

0046: Missing enable signals (r0046).
1082: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (p1082).
1084: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1084, p1083, p1085).
1087: The highest speed value to be approached (p3829) is greater than the maximum speed (r1087, p1086, p1088).
1110: Friction characteristic record, negative direction selected (p3845) and negative direction inhibited (p1110).
1111: Friction characteristic record, positive direction selected (p3845) and positive direction inhibited (p1111).
1198: Friction characteristic record selected (p3845 > 0) and negative (p1110) and positive directions (p1111) inhibited (r1198).
1300: The control mode (p1300) has not been set to closed-loop speed control.
1755: For encoderless closed-loop control (p1300 = 20), the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820) is less
than or equal to the changeover speed, open-loop controlled operation (p1755).
1910: Motor data identification activated.
1960: Speed controller optimization activated.
3820 ... 3829: Speed (p382x) cannot be approached.
3840: Friction characteristic incorrect.
3845: Friction characteristic record deselected.
Remedy:
Fulfill the conditions to record the friction characteristic.

Establish missing enable signals.
Re fault value = 1082, 1084, 1087:
Select the highest speed value to be approached (p3829) less than or equal to the maximum speed (p1082, r1084,
r1087).
Recalculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5).
Select the friction characteristic record, positive direction (p3845).
Select the friction characteristic record, negative direction (p3845).
Enable the permitted direction (p1110, p1111, r1198).
Set the control mode (p1300) on the closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20, 21).
For encoderless closed-loop speed control (p1300 = 20) select the lowest speed value to be approached (p3820)
greater than the changeover speed of open-loop controlled operation (p1755).
Recalculate the speed points along the friction characteristic (p0340 = 5).
Exit the motor data identification routine (p1910).
Exist the speed controller optimization routine (p1960).
Re fault value 3820 ... 3829:
- check the load at speed p382x.
- check the speed signal (r0063) for oscillation at speed p382x. Check the settings of the speed controller if applicable.
Make the friction characteristic error-free (p3820 to p3829, p3830 to p3839, p3840).
Activate the friction characteristic record (p3845).

3-1227
Faults and alarms

F07967
Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment or the pole position identification.
Remedy:
F07968
Drive: Lq-Ld measurement incorrect
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the Lq-Ld measurement.

10: Stage 1: The ratio between the measured current and zero current is too low.
12: Stage 1: The maximum current was exceeded.
15: Second harmonic too low.
16: Drive converter too small for the measuring technique.
17: Abort due to pulse inhibit.
Remedy:

Check whether the motor is correctly connected.
Replace the power unit involved.
Deactivate technique (p1909).
Check whether motor data have been correctly entered.
Repeat technique.
F07969
Drive: Incorrect pole position identification
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the pole position identification routine.

1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
4: Encoder speed signal not plausible.
14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low.
18: First harmonic too low.
20: Pole position identification requested with the motor shaft rotating and activated flying restart function.
3-1228

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Replace the Motor Module involved.
Re fault value = 2:
Open the motor holding brake (p1215 = 2) and bring the motor into a no-load condition.
Re fault value = 4:
Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct.
Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314).
When selecting p1980 = 4: Increase the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Increase the value for p0329.
Increase the value for p0329.
When selecting p1980 = 4: Reduce the value for p0325.
When selecting p1980 = 1: Reduce the value for p0329.
Reduce the value for p0329.
Motor not sufficiently anisotropic, change the technique (p1980 = 1 or 10).
Repeat technique.
Saturation not sufficient, change the technique (p1980 = 10).
Before carrying out a pole position identification routine ensure that the motor shaft is absolutely stationary (zero
speed).
F07970
Drive: Automatic encoder adjustment incorrect
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the automatic encoder adjustment.

Fault value (r0949, decimal):
1: Current controller limited
2: Motor shaft locked.
4: Encoder speed signal not plausible.
14: Current difference to determine the +d axis too low.

3-1229
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Open the motor holding brake (p1215 = 2) and bring the motor into a no-load condition.
Re fault value = 4:
Check whether the speed actual value inversion is correct (p0410.0).
Check whether the encoder pulse number (p0408) and gearbox factor (p0432, p0433) are correct.
Check whether the motor pole pair number is correct (p0314).
Repeat technique.
A07971 (N)
Drive: Angular commutation offset determination activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The automatic determination of the angular commutation offset (encoder adjustment) is activated (p1990 = 1).
The automatic determination is carried out at the next power-on command.
For SERVO and fault F07414 present, the following applies:
The determination of the angular commutation offset is automatically activated (p1990 = 1), if a pole position identification technique is set in p1980.
See also: p1990 (Encoder adjustment, determine angular commutation offset)
Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after determination or for the setting p1990 = 0.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07980
Drive: Rotating measurement activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The rotating measurement (automatic speed controller optimization) is activated.

The rotating measurement is carried out at the next power-on command.
See also: p1960 (Rotating measurement selection)
3-1230

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm disappears automatically after the speed controller optimization has been successfully completed or for
the setting p1900 = 0.
A07981
Drive: Enable signals for the rotating measurement missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The rotating measurement cannot be started due to missing enable signals.
Remedy:
- acknowledge faults that are present.

- establish missing enable signals.
See also: r0002, r0046
F07982
Drive: Rotating measurement encoder test
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the encoder test.

1: The speed did not reach a steady-state condition.
2: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the minimum limiting is active.
3: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4: The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: The encoder does not supply a signal.
6: Incorrect polarity.
7: Incorrect pulse number.
8: Noise in the encoder signal or speed controller unstable.
9: Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) incorrectly connected.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters.
- carry out a motor data identification routine (p1910).
- if required, reduce the dynamic factor (p1967 < 25 %).
Re fault value = 2:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or adapt the minimum limit (p1080).
Re fault value = 3:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or suppression (skip) bandwidths (p1091 ... p1094, p1101).
Re fault value = 4:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1965) or maximum limit (p1082, p1083 and p1086).
Re fault value = 5:
- check the encoder connection. If required, replace the encoder.
Re fault value = 6:
- check the connection assignment of the encoder cable. Adapt the polarity (p0410).
Re fault value = 7:
- adapt the pulse number (p0408).
Re fault value = 8:
- check the encoder connection and encoder cable. It is possible that there is a problem associated with the ground
connection.
- reduce the dynamic response of the speed controller (p1460, p1462 and p1470, p1472).
Re fault value = 9:
- check the connections of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Note:
The encoder test can be switched out (disabled) using p1959.0.
See also: p1959 (Rotating measurement configuration)

3-1231
Faults and alarms

F07983
Drive: Rotating measurement saturation characteristic
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred while determining the saturation characteristic.

2: The rotor flux did not reach a steady-state condition.
3: The adaptation circuit did not reach a steady-state condition.
4: The adaptation circuit was not enabled.
5: Field weakening active.
9: Several values of the determined saturation characteristic are not plausible.
10: Saturation characteristic could not be sensibly determined because load torque too high.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (p0341, p0342).
Deselect rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, recalculate the speed controller p0340
= 4 and repeat the measurement.
- increase the measuring speed (p1961) and repeat the measurement.
- check the motor parameters (rating plate data). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change: Calculate p0340 = 3.
Re fault value = 5:
- the speed setpoint (p1961) is too high. Reduce the speed.
Re fault value = 6:
- adapt the speed setpoint (p1961) or minimum limiting (p1080).
Re fault value = 7:
Re fault value = 8:
- the measurement was carried out at an operating point where the load torque is too high. Select a more suitable
operating point, either by changing the speed setpoint (p1961) or by reducing the load torque. The load torque may
not be varied while making measurements.
Note:
The saturation characteristic identification routine can be disabled using p1959.1.
F07984
Drive: Speed controller optimization, moment of inertia
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred while identifying the moment of inertia.

3. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
4. The speed setpoint was not able to be approached as the maximum limiting is active.
5: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the minimum limiting is active.
6: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the suppression (skip) bandwidth is active.
7: It is not possible to increase the speed by 10% as the maximum limiting is active.
3-1232

Faults and alarms

8: The torque difference after the speed setpoint step is too low in order to be able to still reliably identify the moment
of inertia.
9: Too few data to be able to reliably identify the moment of inertia.
10: After the setpoint step, the speed either changed too little or in the incorrect direction.
11: The identified moment of inertia is not plausible.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 8:
- the total drive moment of inertia is far higher than that of the motor (refer to p0341, p0342). Deselect rotating measurement (p1960), enter the moment of inertia p0342, recalculate the speed controller p0340 = 4 and repeat the measurement.
Re fault value = 9:
- check the moment of inertia (p0341, p0342). After the change, recalculate (p0340 = 3 or 4).
Note:
The moment of inertia identification routine can be disabled using p1959.2.
F07985
Drive: Speed controller optimization (oscillation test)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the vibration test.

5: Torque limits too low for a torque step.
6: No suitable speed controller setting was found.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Re fault value = 4:
Re fault value = 5:
- increase the torque limits (e.g. p1520, p1521).
Re fault value = 6:
- reduce the dynamic factor (p1967).
- disable the vibration test (p1959.4 = 0) and repeat the rotating measurement.

3-1233
Faults and alarms

F07986
Drive: Rotating measurement ramp-function generator
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
During the rotating measurements, problems with the ramp-function generator occurred.
1: The positive and negative directions are inhibited.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Enable the direction (p1110 or p1111).
A07987
Drive: Rotating measurement, no encoder available
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
No encoder available. The rotating measurement was carried out without encoder.
Remedy:
Connect encoder or select p1960 = 1, 3.
F07988
Drive: Rotating measurement, no configuration selected
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When configuring the rotating measurement (p1959), no function was selected.
Remedy:
Select at least one function for automatic optimization of the speed controller (p1959).
F07989
Drive: Rotating measurement leakage inductance (q-axis)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (NONE, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error has occurred while measuring the dynamic leakage inductance.

5: The 100% flux setpoint was not reached.
6: No Lq measurement possible because field weakening is active.
7: Speed actual value exceeds the maximum speed p1082 or 75% of the rated motor speed.
8: Speed actual value is below 2 % of the rated motor speed.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
- check the motor parameters.
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Re fault value = 4:
Re fault value = 5:
- flux setpoint p1570 = 100 % and current setpoint p1610 = 0 % kept during the Lq measurement.
Re fault value = 6:
- reduce the regenerative load so that the drive does not reach field weakening when accelerating.
- reduce p1965 so that the q leakage inductance is recorded at lower speeds.
3-1234

Faults and alarms

Re fault value = 7:
- increase p1082 if this is technically permissible.
- reduce p1965 so that the q leakage inductance is recorded at lower speeds.
Re fault value = 8:
- reduce the load when motoring so that the drive is not braked.
- increase p1965 so that the measurement may be taken at higher speeds.
Note:
The measurement of the q leakage inductance can be disabled using p1959.5. If only p1959.5 is set, then only this
measurement is carried out if p1960 is set to 1, 2 and the drive is powered up.
F07990
Drive: Incorrect motor data identification
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred during the identification routine.

1: Current limit value reached.
2: Identified stator resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
3: Identified rotor resistance lies outside the expected range 0.1 ... 100% of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: damping resistance outside 1.0 ...15 % of Zn.
4: Identified stator reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 900 % of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: stator reactance outside 20 ...500 % of Zn.
5: Identified magnetizing reactance lies outside the expected range 50 ... 900 % of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: magnetizing reactance outside 20 ...500 % of Zn.
6: Identified rotor time constant lies outside the expected range 10 ms ... 5 s.
Separately excited synchronous motors: damping time constant outside 5 ms ... 1 s.
7: Identified total leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 4 ... 100 % of Zn.
8: Identified stator leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: stator leakage reactance outside 2 ...40 % of Zn.
9: Identified rotor leakage reactance lies outside the expected range 2 ... 50% of Zn.
Separately excited synchronous motors: damping leakage reactance outside 1.5 ...20 % of Zn.
10: Motor has been incorrectly connected.
11: Motor shaft rotates.
20: Identified threshold voltage of the semiconductor devices lies outside the expected range 0 ... 10 V.
30: Current controller in voltage limiting.
40: At least one identification contains errors. The identified parameters are not saved to prevent inconsistencies.
Note:
Percentage values are referred to the rated motor impedance:
Zn = Vmot.nom / sqrt(3) / Imot,nom
Remedy:
Re fault value = 0:
- check whether the motor is correctly connected. Observe configuration (star-delta).
- check whether motor data have been correctly entered in p0300, p0304 ... p0311.
- is there an appropriate relationship between the motor power rating and that of the Motor Module? The ratio of the
Motor Module to the rated motor current should not be less than 0.5 and not be greater than 4.
- check configuration (star-delta).
Also for fault value = 11:
- deactivate vibration monitoring (p1909 bit 7 = 1).
Re fault value = 2:
- for parallel circuits, check the motor winding system in p7003. If, for power units connected in parallel, a motor is
specified with a single-winding system (p7003 = 0), although a multi-winding system is being used, then a large proportion of the stator resistance is interpreted as feeder cable resistance and entered in p0352.
- check whether inductances are correctly entered in p0233 and p0353.
- check whether motor has been correctly connected (star-delta).

3-1235
Faults and alarms

A07991 (N)
Drive: Motor data identification activated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The motor data ident. routine is activated.

The motor data identification routine is carried out at the next power-on command.
If rotating measurement is selected (see p1900, p1960), it will not be possible to save the parameter assignment.
Once motor data identification has been completed or deactivated, the option to save the parameter assignment will
be made available again.
See also: p1910 (Motor data identification selection)
Remedy:
None necessary.
The alarm automatically disappears after the motor data identification routine has been successfully completed or
for the setting p1900 = 0.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A07994 (N)
Drive: motor data identification not performed
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Motor data identification has not yet been performed with the actual data set.
The alarm is only triggered if the selection of the data set changes (see r0051) and vector control is parameterized
(p1300 >= 20) in the new data set selected and motor data identification has not yet been performed (see r3925).
Remedy:
- Perform motor data identification (see p1900).

- Return data set.
- Parameterize V/f control (p1300 < 20).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F08000 (N, A)
TB: +/-15 V power supply faulted
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Terminal Board 30 detects an incorrect internal power supply voltage.

0: Error when testing the monitoring circuit.
1: Fault in normal operation.
Remedy:
- replace Terminal Board 30.

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F08010 (N, A)
TB: Analog-digital converter
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The analog/digital converter on Terminal Board 30 has not supplied any converted data.
3-1236

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the power supply.

- replace Terminal Board 30.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F08500 (A)
COMM BOARD: Monitoring time configuration expired
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The monitoring time for the configuration has expired.

0: The transfer time of the send configuration data has been exceeded.
1: The transfer time of the receive configuration data has been exceeded.
Remedy:
Check communication line.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F08501 (N, A)
COMM BOARD: Monitoring time process data expired
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The set monitoring time expired while transferring process data via COMM BOARD.
See also: p8840 (COMM BOARD monitoring time)
Remedy:
- check communications link.

- check the set monitoring time if the error persists.
See also: p8840 (COMM BOARD monitoring time)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F08502 (A)
COMM BOARD: Monitoring time sign-of-life expired
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The monitoring time for the sign-of-life counter has expired.

The connection to the COMM BOARD was interrupted.
Remedy:
- check communications link.

- check COMM BOARD.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A08504 (F)
COMM BOARD: Internal cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The cyclic actual and/or setpoint values were not transferred within the specified times.

3-1237
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Check the parameterizing telegram (Ti, To, Tdp, etc.).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F08510 (A)
COMM BOARD: Send configuration data invalid
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
COMM BOARD did not accept the send-configuration data.

Return value of the send-configuration data check.
Remedy:
Check the send configuration data.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A08511 (F)
COMM BOARD: Receive configuration data invalid
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The drive unit did not accept the receive configuration data.
Return value of the receive configuration data check.
0: Configuration accepted.
1: Connection established to more drive objects than configured in the device. The drive objects for process data
exchange and their sequence are defined in p0978.
2: Too many PZD data words for output or input to a drive object. The number of possible PZD items in a drive object
is determined by the number of indices in r2050/p2051 for PZD IF1, and in r8850/p8851 for PZD IF2.
3: Uneven number of bytes for input or output.
4: Setting data for synchronization not accepted. For more information, see A01902.
5: Cyclic operation not active.
6: Buffer system not accepted.
7: Cyclic channel length too short for this setting.
8: Cyclic channel address not initialized.
9: 3-buffer system not permitted.
23: Illegal clock synchronization for PZD interface 2.
Remedy:
Check the receive configuration data.

Re alarm value = 1:
Check the list of the drive objects with process data exchange (p0978). With p0978[x] = 0, all of the following drive
objects in the list are excluded from the process data exchange.
Re alarm value = 2:
Check the number of data words for output and input to a drive object.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A08520 (F)
COMM BOARD: Non-cyclic channel error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The memory or the buffer status of the non-cyclic channel has an error.
0: Error in the buffer status.
1: Error in the memory.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1238

Faults and alarms

A08526 (F)
COMM BOARD: No cyclic connection
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
There is no cyclic connection to the control.
Remedy:
Establish the cyclic connection and activate the control with cyclic operation.
For PROFINET, check the parameters "Name of Station" and "IP of Station" (r61000, r61001).
Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF1)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A08530 (F)
COMM BOARD: Message channel error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The memory or the buffer status of the message channel has an error.
0: Error in the buffer status.
1: Error in the memory.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A08550
PZD Interface Hardware assignment error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The assignment of the hardware to the PZD interface has been incorrectly parameterized.
Only one of the two indices is not equal to 99 (automatic).
2: Both PZD interfaces are assigned to the same hardware.
3: Assigned COMM BOARD missing.
4: CBC10 is assigned to interface 1.
See also: p8839 (PZD interface hardware assignment)
Remedy:
Correct the parameterization (p8839).
A08560
IE: Syntax error in configuration file
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127). The
saved configuration file has not been loaded.
Note:
Remedy:
- Check the interface configuration (p8900 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8905 = 1).
- Save the parameters for interface configuration (e.g. p8905 = 2)
or
- Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8905 (IE Interface configuration)

3-1239
Faults and alarms

A08561
IE: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8905 = 1) for the Industrial Ethernet interface
(X127). The currently set configuration has not been activated.
Possible causes:
- IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct
- IP address or station name used twice in the network
- station name contains invalid characters, etc.
Note:
See also: p8900 (IE Name of Station), p8901 (IE IP Address of Station), p8902 (IE Default Gateway of Station),
p8903 (IE Subnet Mask of Station)
Remedy:
- Check the required interface configuration (p8900 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8905 = 1).
or
- Reconfigure the station via the "Edit Ethernet node" screen form (e.g. with STARTER commissioning software).
See also: p8905 (IE Interface configuration)
A08564
CBE20: Syntax error in configuration file
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A syntax error has been detected in the ASCII configuration file for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
The saved configuration file has not been loaded.
Remedy:
- Check the CBE20 configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 1).
Note:
The configuration is not applied until the next POWER ON!
- reconfigure the CBE20 (e.g. using the STARTER commissioning software)
See also: p8945 (CBE20 interface configuration)
A08565
CBE20: Consistency error affecting adjustable parameters
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A consistency error was detected when activating the configuration (p8945 = 1) for the Communication Board Ethernet 20 (CBE20).
The currently set configuration has not been activated.
Possible causes:
- IP address, subnet mask or default gateway is not correct
- IP address or station name used twice in the network
- station name contains invalid characters, etc.
See also: p8940 (CBE20 Name of Station), p8941 (CBE20 IP Address of Station), p8942 (CBE20 Default Gateway
of Station), p8943 (CBE20 Subnet Mask of Station), p8944 (CBE20 DHCP Mode)
Remedy:
Check the required interface configuration (p8940 and following), correct if necessary, and activate (p8945 = 1).
See also: p8945 (CBE20 interface configuration)
3-1240

Faults and alarms

F08700 (A)
CAN: Communications error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A CAN communications error has occurred.

1: The error counter for the send telegrams has exceeded the BUS OFF value 255. The bus disables the CAN controller.
- bus cable short circuit.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
2: The master no longer interrogated the CAN node status longer than for its "life time". The "life time" is obtained
from the "guard time" (p8604[0]) multiplied by the "life time factor" (p8604[1]).
- bus cable interrupted.
- bus cable not connected.
- incorrect baud rate.
- incorrect bit timing.
- master fault.
Note:
The fault response can be set as required using p8641.
See also: p8604 (CAN node guarding), p8641 (CAN Abort Connection Option Code)
Remedy:
- check the bus cable

- check the baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing (p8623).
- check the master.
The CAN controller must be manually restarted with p8608 = 1 after the cause of the fault has been resolved!
See also: p8608 (CAN Clear Bus Off Error), p8622 (CAN baud rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection)
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F08701
CAN: NMT state change
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF3
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational" or after "stopped".

1: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "pre-operational".
2: CANopen NMT state transition from "operational" to "stopped".
Note:
In the NMT state "pre-operational", process data cannot be transferred and in the NMT state "stopped", no process
data and no service data can be transferred.
Remedy:
None necessary.
Acknowledge the fault and continue operation.
A08751
CAN: Telegram loss
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The CAN controller has lost a receive message (telegram).
Remedy:
Reduce the cycle times of the receive messages.

3-1241
Faults and alarms

A08752
CAN: Error counter for error passive exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The error counter for the send or receive telegrams has exceeded the value 127.
Remedy:
- check the bus cable

- set a higher baud rate (p8622).
- check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).
See also: p8622 (CAN baud rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection)
A08753
CAN: Message buffer overflow
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A message buffer overflow.

1: Non-cyclic send buffer (SDO response buffer) overflow.
2: Non-cyclic receive buffer (SDO receive buffer) overflow.
3: Cyclic send buffer (PDO send buffer) overflow.
Remedy:
Check the bus cable.

Set a higher baud rate (p8622).
Check the bit timing and if required optimize (p8623).
Alarm value = 2:
- reduce the cycle times of the SDO receive messages.
- SDO request from master only after SDO feedback for previous SDO request.
See also: p8622 (CAN baud rate), p8623 (CAN Bit Timing selection)
A08754
CAN: Incorrect communications mode
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the "operational" mode, an attempt was made to change parameters p8700 ... p8737.
Remedy:
Change to the "pre-operational" or "stopped" mode.
A08755
CAN: Object cannot be mapped
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The CANopen object is not provided for the Process Data Object (PDO) Mapping.
Remedy:
Use a CANopen object intended for the PDO mapping or enter 0.

The following objects can be mapped in the Receive Process Data Object (RPDO) or Transmit Process Data Object
(TPDO):
- RPDO: 6040 hex, 6060 hex, 60FF hex, 6071 hex; 5800 hex - 580F hex; 5820 hex - 5827 hex
- TPDO: 6041 hex, 6061 hex, 6063 hex, 6069 hex, 606B hex, 606C hex, 6074 hex; 5810 hex - 581F hex; 5830 hex
- 5837 hex
Only sub-index 0 of the specified objects can be mapped.
Note:
As long as A08755 is present, the COB-ID cannot be set to valid.
3-1242

Faults and alarms

A08756
CAN: Number of mapped bytes exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The number of bytes of the mapped objects exceeds the telegram size for net data. A max. of 8 bytes is permissible.
Remedy:
Map fewer objects or objects with a smaller data type.

p8736, p8737
A08757
CAN: Set COB-ID invalid
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For online operation, the appropriate COB-ID must be set invalid before mapping.
Example:
Mapping for RPDO 1 should be changed (p8710[0]).
--> set p8700[0] = C00006E0 hex (invalid COB-ID)
--> set p8710[0] as required.
--> p8700[0] enter a valid COB-ID
Remedy:
Set the COB-ID to invalid.
A08758
CAN: Number of PDO channels too low
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The number of PDO channels in p8740 has either been set to 0 or too low.
See also: p8740 (CAN channel distribution)
Remedy:
The number of channels set in p8740 must be greater than or equal to the number of PDOs.
There are 2 possibilities:
Increase the number of channels in p8740 and confirm the selection using p8741.
Reduce the number of PDOs by setting the COB-ID to invalid.
See also: p8740 (CAN channel distribution), p8741 (CAN PDO configuration acknowledgement)
A08759
CAN: PDO COB-ID already available
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An existing PDO COB-ID was allocated.
Remedy:
Select another PDO COB-ID.

3-1243
Faults and alarms

A13000
License not adequate
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
- for the drive unit, the options that require a license are being used but the licenses are not sufficient.
- an error occurred when checking the existing licenses.
0:
The existing license is not sufficient.
1:
An adequate license was not able to be determined as the memory card with the required licensing data was withdrawn in operation.
2:
An adequate license was not able to be determined, as an error occurred when reading-out the required licensing
data from the memory card.
3:
An adequate license was not able to be determined as there is a checksum error in the license key.
4:
An internal error occurred when checking the license.
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 0:
Additional licenses are required and these must be activated (p9920, p9921).
Re alarm value = 1:
With the system powered down, re-insert the memory card that matches the system.
Re alarm value = 2:
Enter and activate the license key (p9920, p9921).
Re alarm value = 3:
Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license.
Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921).
Re alarm value = 4:
A13001
Error in license checksum
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When checking the checksum of the license key, an error was detected.
Remedy:
Compare the license key (p9920) entered with the license key on the certificate of license.
Re-enter the license key and activate (p9920, p9921).
F13009
Licensing OA application not licensed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
At least one OA application which is under license does not have a license.
Code for unlicensed OA applications corresponds to p4956 or p4955.
Remedy:
- Enter and activate the license key which licenses OA applications under license (p9920, p9921).
- Deactivate unlicensed OA applications (p4956).
3-1244

Faults and alarms

F13010
Licensing function module not licensed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF1
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
At least one function module which is under license does not have a license.
Unlicensed function modules are coded bit by bit. The code corresponds to that used in r0108.
Remedy:
- Deactivate unlicensed function modules (p108).

- Enter and activate the license key which licenses function modules under license (p9920, p9921).
F30001
Power unit: Overcurrent
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit has detected an overcurrent condition.

- closed-loop control is incorrectly parameterized.
- motor has a short-circuit or fault to ground (frame).
- V/f operation: Up ramp set too low.
- V/f operation: Rated motor current is significantly greater than that of the Motor Module.
- infeed: High discharge and post-charging current for voltage dip.
- infeed: High post-charging currents for overload when motoring and DC link voltage dip.
- infeed: Short-circuit currents at power-up due to the missing line reactor.
- power cables are not correctly connected.
- power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- line phase interrupted.
Additional causes for a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1):
- a power unit has tripped (powered down) due to a ground fault.
- the closed-loop circulating current control is either too slow or has been set too fast.
Fault value (r0949, interpret bitwise binary):
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Bit 3: Overcurrent in the DC link.
Note:
Fault value = 0 means that the phase with overcurrent is not recognized (e.g. for blocksize device).
Remedy:
- check the motor data - if required, carry out commissioning.

- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta)
- V/f operation: Increase up ramp.
- V/f operation: Check the assignment of the rated currents of the motor and Motor Module.
- infeed: Check the line supply quality.
- infeed: Reduce the motor load.
- infeed: Correct connection of the line reactor.
- check the power cable connections.
- check the power cables for short-circuit or ground fault.
- check the length of the power cables.
- replace power unit.
- check the line supply phases.
For a parallel switching device (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies:
- check the ground fault monitoring thresholds (p0287).
- check the setting of the closed-loop circulating current control (p7036, p7037).

3-1245
Faults and alarms

F30002
Power unit: DC link voltage, overvoltage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link.

- motor regenerates too much energy.
- device connection voltage too high.
- when operating with a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), the phase assignment L1, L2, L3 at the VSM differs from
the phase assignment at the power unit.
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
For SINAMICS GM/SM, the following applies:
32: Overvoltage in the negative partial DC link (VdcN).
64: Overvoltage in the positive partial DC link (VdcP).
96: Overvoltage in both partial DC links.
Remedy:
- increase the ramp-down time

- activate the DC link voltage controller
- use a brake resistor or Active Line Module
- increase the current limit of the infeed or use a larger module (for the Active Line Module)
- check the device supply voltage
- check and correct the phase assignment at the VSM and at the power unit
- set the rounding times (p1130, p1136). This is particularly recommended in V/f operation to relieve the DC link voltage controller with rapid ramp-down times of the ramp-function generator.
See also: p0210 (Drive unit line supply voltage), p1240 (Vdc controller or Vdc monitoring configuration)
F30003
Power unit: DC link voltage, undervoltage
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit has detected an undervoltage condition in the DC link.

- line supply failure
- line supply voltage below the permissible value.
- line supply infeed failed or interrupted.
Note:
The monitoring threshold for the DC link undervoltage is the minimum of the following values:
- for a calculation, refer to p0210.
Remedy:
- check the line supply voltage

- check the line supply infeed and observe the fault messages relating to it (if there are any)
Note:
The ready signal for the infeed (r0863) must be connected to the associated drive inputs (p0864).
3-1246

Faults and alarms

F30004
Power unit: Overtemperature heat sink AC inverter
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The temperature of the power unit heat sink has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- insufficient cooling, fan failure.
- overload.
- ambient temperature too high.
- pulse frequency too high.
Fault value (r0949):
Temperature [1 bit = 0.01 C].
Remedy:
- check whether the fan is running.

- check the fan elements.
- check whether the ambient temperature is in the permissible range.
- reduce the pulse frequency if this is higher than the rated pulse frequency.
Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged after this alarm threshold for alarm A05000 has been undershot.
See also: p1800 (Pulse frequency setpoint)
F30005
Power unit: Overload I2t
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit was overloaded (r0036 = 100 %).

- the permissible rated power unit current was exceeded for an inadmissibly long time.
- the permissible load duty cycle was not maintained.
I2t [100 % = 16384].
Remedy:
- reduce the continuous load.

- check the motor and power unit rated currents.
- increase p0294
See also: r0036 (Power unit overload I2t), r0206 (Rated power unit power), p0307 (Rated motor power)
F30006
Power unit: Thyristor Control Board
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The Thyristor Control Board (TCB) of the Basic Line Module signals a fault.
- there is no line supply voltage.
- the line contactor is not closed.
- the line supply voltage is too low.
- line supply frequency outside the permissible range (45 ... 66 Hz).
- there is a DC link short-circuit.
- there is a DC link short-circuit (during the pre-charging phase).
- voltage supply for the Thyristor Control Board outside the nominal range (5 ... 18 V) and line voltage >30 V.
- there is an internal fault in the Thyristor Control Board.
Remedy:
The faults must be saved in the Thyristor Control Board and must be acknowledged. To do this, the supply voltage
of the Thyristor Control Board must be switched out for at least 10 s!
- check the line supply voltage
- check or energize the line contactor.
- check the monitoring time and, if required, increase (p0857).
- if required, observe additional power unit messages/signals.
- check the DC link regarding short-circuit or ground fault.
- evaluate diagnostic LEDs for the Thyristor Control Board.

3-1247
Faults and alarms

F30008
Power unit: Sign-of-life error cyclic data
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit has detected that the cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit have not been updated on time.
The number of consecutive sign-of-life errors has exceeded the fault threshold (p7789).
Remedy:
- for projects with the VECTOR drive object, check whether p0117 = 6 has been set on the Control Unit.
- increase the fault threshold (p7789).
See also: p0117 (Current controller computing dead time mode)
A30010 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred between the Control Unit and the power unit involved.
The cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit were not received on time by the power unit for at least one clock
cycle.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
F30011
Power unit: Line phase failure in main circuit
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (OFF1)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A line phase failure was detected at the power unit.

- the fuse of a phase of a main circuit has ruptured.
- the DC link voltage ripple has exceeded the permissible limit value.
Note:
The cause may also be a phase failure in the motor feeder cable.
Remedy:
- check the main circuit fuses.

- check the motor feeder cables.
F30012
Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink wire breakage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The connection to one of the heat sink temperature sensors in the power unit is interrupted.
Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy:
Contact the manufacturer.
3-1248

Faults and alarms

F30013
Power unit: Temperature sensor heat sink short-circuit
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The heat sink temperature sensor in the power unit is short-circuited.

Bit 0: Module slot (electronics slot)
Bit 1: Air intake
Bit 2: Inverter 1
Bit 3: Inverter 2
Bit 4: Inverter 3
Bit 5: Inverter 4
Bit 6: Inverter 5
Bit 7: Inverter 6
Bit 8: Rectifier 1
Bit 9: Rectifier 2
Remedy:
Contact the manufacturer.
F30015
Power unit: Phase failure motor feeder cable
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A phase failure was detected at the power unit output (motor feeder cable). Chassis power units do not feature phase
failure monitoring.
Note:
The fault can also be signaled if the drive stalled in V/f control. In this particular case, a phase failure does not necessarily have to be present, but a current of 0 was measured in one phase due to current dissymmetry.
Remedy:
1. Check the motor feeder cables.

2. If the drive has stalled in V/f control, the acceleration or deceleration time (p1120) should be increased.
A30016 (N)
Power unit: Load supply switched out
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The DC link voltage is too low.

DC link voltage in [V].
Remedy:
- switch on load supply.

- check the line supply if necessary.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1249
Faults and alarms

F30017
Power unit: Hardware current limit has responded too often
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The hardware current limitation in the relevant phase (see A30031, A30032, A30033) has responded too often. The
number of times the limit has been exceeded depends on the design and type of power unit.
- load on the infeed is too high.
- Voltage Sensing Module incorrectly connected.
- line reactor missing or the incorrect type.
The following applies to Motor Modules:
- fault in the motor or in the power cables.
- the power cables exceed the maximum permissible length.
- motor load too high
Bit 0: Phase U
Bit 1: Phase V
Bit 2: Phase W
Remedy:

- check the controller settings and reset and identify the controller if necessary (p0340 = 2, p3410 = 5)
- reduce the load and increase the DC-link capacitance or use a higher-rating infeed if necessary
- check the connection of the optional Voltage Sensing Module
- check the connection and technical data of the line reactor
The following applies to Motor Modules:
- check the motor data.
- check the motor circuit configuration (star-delta).
F30020
Power unit: Configuration not supported
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A configuration is requested that is not supported by the power unit.

0:
Autonomous operation is requested but is not supported.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 0:
If internal voltage protection is active (p1231 = 3), deactivate it if necessary.
See also: p1231 (Armature short-circuit / DC brake configuration)
3-1250

Faults and alarms

F30021
Power unit: Ground fault
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Power unit has detected a ground fault.

- ground fault in the power cables.
- winding fault or ground fault at the motor.
- CT defective.
Additional cause for CU310/CUA31:
- when the brake is applied, this causes the hardware DC current monitoring to respond.
Additional cause for parallel switching devices (r0108.15 = 1):
Absolute value, total current amplitude [20479 = r0209 * 1.4142].
Remedy:

- check the motor.
- check the CT.
The following applies additionally for CU310/CUA31:
- check the cables and contacts of the brake connection (a wire is possibly broken).
For parallel switching devices (r0108.15 = 1) the following additionally applies:
See also: p0287 (Ground fault monitoring thresholds)
F30022
Power unit: Monitoring V_ce
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
In the power unit, the monitoring of the collector-emitter voltage (V_ce) of the semiconductor has responded.
Possible causes:
- fiber-optic cable interrupted.
- power supply of the IGBT gating module missing.
- short-circuit at the power unit output.
- defective semiconductor in the power unit.
Bit 0: Short-circuit in phase U
Bit 1: Short circuit in phase V
Bit 2: Short-circuit in phase W
Bit 3: Light transmitter enable defective
Bit 4: V_ce group fault signal interrupted
See also: r0949 (Fault value)
Remedy:
- check the fiber-optic cable and if required, replace.

- check the power supply of the IGBT gating module (24 V).
- select the defective semiconductor and replace.

3-1251
Faults and alarms

A30023
Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model alarm
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- overload.
See also: r0037
Remedy:

- if DC brake is active: reduce braking current (see p1232).
F30024
Power unit: Overtemperature thermal model
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The temperature difference between the heat sink and chip has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- overload.
See also: r0037
Remedy:

- if DC brake is active: reduce braking current (see p1232).
F30025
Power unit: Chip overtemperature
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Chip temperature of the semiconductor has exceeded the permissible limit value.
- overload.
Temperature difference between the heat sink and chip [1 Bit = 0.01 C].
3-1252

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Notice:
See also: r0037
F30027
Power unit: Precharging DC link time monitoring
Message value:
Enable signals: %1, Status: %2
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit DC link was not able to be pre-charged within the expected time.
1) There is no line supply voltage connected.
2) The line contactor/line side switch has not been closed.
3) The line supply voltage is too low.
4) Line supply voltage incorrectly set (p0210).
5) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as there were too many pre-charging operations per time unit.
6) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the DC link capacitance is too high.
7) The pre-charging resistors are overheated because when there is no "ready for operation" (r0863.0) of the infeed
unit, power is taken from the DC link.
8) The pre-charging resistors are overheated as the line contactor was closed during the DC link fast discharge
through the Braking Module.
9) The DC link has either a ground fault or a short-circuit.
10) The pre-charging circuit is possibly defective (only for chassis units).
Missing internal enable signals, power unit (lower 16 bit):
(Inverted bit-coded representation FFFF hex -> all internal enable signals available)
Bit 0: Power supply of the IGBT gating shut down
Bit 1: Reserved
Bit 2: Reserved
Bit 3: Ground fault detected
Bit 4: Peak current intervention
Bit 5: I2t exceeded
Bit 6. Thermal model overtemperature calculated
Bit 7: (heat sink, gating module, power unit) overtemperature measured
Bit 8: Reserved
Bit 9: Overvoltage detected
Bit 10: Power unit has completed pre-charging, ready for pulse enable
Bit 11: STO terminal missing
Bit 12: Overcurrent detected
Bit 13: Armature short-circuit active
Bit 14: DRIVE-CLiQ fault active
Bit 15: Uce fault detected, transistor de-saturated due to overcurrent/short-circuit
Status, power unit (upper 16 bit, hexadecimal number):
0: Fault status (wait for OFF and fault acknowledgement)
1: Restart inhibit (wait for OFF)
2: Overvoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state
3: Undervoltage condition detected -> change into the fault state
4: Wait for bypass contactor to open -> change into the fault state
5: Wait for bypass contactor to open -> change into restart inhibit
6: Commissioning
7: Ready for pre-charging
8: Pre-charging started, DC link voltage lower than the minimum switch-on voltage
9: Pre-charging, DC link voltage end of pre-charging still not detected
10: Wait for the end of the de-bounce time of the main contactor after pre-charging has been completed
11: Pre-charging completed, ready for pulse enable
12: It was detected that the STO terminal was energized at the power unit

3-1253
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
In general:
- check the line supply voltage at the input terminals.
- check the line supply voltage setting (p0210).
- the following applies to booksize units: Wait (approx. 8 min.) until the pre-charging resistors have cooled down. For
this purpose, preferably disconnect the infeed unit from the line supply.
Re 5):
- carefully observe the permissible pre-charging frequency (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual).
Re 6):
- check the total capacitance of the DC link and reduce in accordance with the maximum permissible DC-link capacitance if necessary (refer to the appropriate Equipment Manual)
Re 7):
- interconnect the ready-for-operation signal from the infeed unit (r0863.0) in the enable logic of the drives connected
to this DC link
Re 8):
- check the connections of the external line contactor. The line contactor must be open during DC-link fast discharge.
Re 9):
- check the DC link for ground faults or short circuits.
A30031
Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase U
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Hardware current limit for phase U responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a Power Module, the hardware current limiting of phase U, V or W responds.
Remedy:

A30032
Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase V
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Hardware current limit for phase V responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
Note:
Remedy:

3-1254

Faults and alarms

A30033
Power unit: Hardware current limiting, phase W
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Hardware current limit for phase W responded. The pulsing in this phase is inhibited for one pulse period.
Note:
Remedy:

A30034
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The alarm threshold for internal overtemperature has been reached.

If the temperature inside the unit continues to increase, fault F30036 may be triggered.
- ambient temperature might be too high.
Bit 0 = 1: Control electronics range.
Bit 1 = 1: Power electronics range.
Remedy:
- check the ambient temperature.

- check the fan for the inside of the unit.
F30035
Power unit: Air intake overtemperature
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The air intake in the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
For air-cooled power units, the temperature limit is at 55 C.
Remedy:

Notice:

3-1255
Faults and alarms

F30036
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For chassis power units, the following applies:

The temperature inside the drive converter has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- overload.
Bit 0 = 1: Control electronics range.
Bit 1 = 1: Power electronics range.
Remedy:

Notice:
This fault can only be acknowledged once the permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has been undershot.
F30037
Power unit: Rectifier overtemperature
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The temperature in the rectifier of the power unit has exceeded the permissible temperature limit.
- overload.
- line supply phase failure.
Remedy:

Notice:
F30040
Power unit: Undervolt 24 V
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Failure of the 24 V power supply for the power unit.

- The undervoltage threshold was undershot for longer than 3 ms.
24 V voltage [1 bit = 0.1 V].
Remedy:
- check the 24 V DC voltage supply to power unit.

- carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for the component.
3-1256

Faults and alarms

A30041 (F)
Power unit: Undervoltage 24 V alarm
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
24 V power supply fault for the power unit.

- the 16 V threshold was undershot..
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
A30042
Power unit: Fan operating time reached or exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The maximum operating time of the fan in the power unit is set in p0252.
This message indicates the following:
0: The maximum fan operating time is 500 hours.
1: The maximum fan operating time has been exceeded.
Remedy:
Replace the fan in the power unit and reset the operating hours counter to 0 (p0251 = 0).
See also: p0251 (Operating hours counter power unit fan), p0252 (Maximum operating time power unit fan)
F30043
Power unit: Overvolt 24 V
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The following applies for CU31x:

Overvoltage of the 24 V power supply for the power unit.
- the 31.5 V threshold was exceeded for more than 3 ms.
Remedy:
Check the 24 V DC voltage supply to the power unit.
A30044 (F)
Power unit: Overvoltage 24 V alarm
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

24 V power supply fault for the power unit.
- the 32.0 V threshold was exceeded.
Remedy:
Check the 24 V DC voltage supply to the power unit.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:

3-1257
Faults and alarms

F30045
Power unit: Supply undervoltage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Power supply fault in the power unit.

- The voltage monitor signals an undervoltage fault on the module.
- the voltage monitoring on the DAC board signals an undervoltage fault on the module.
Remedy:

- replace the module if necessary.
A30046 (F)
Power unit: Undervoltage, alarm
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Before the last restart, a problem occurred at the power unit power supply.
- the voltage monitor in the internal FPGA of the PSA signals an undervoltage fault on the module.
Register value of the voltage fault register.
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
F30047
Cooling system: Cooling medium flow rate too low
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Cooling system: Fault - flow rate has fallen below the fault value
Remedy:
A30048
Power unit: External fan faulty
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The feedback signal from the external fan indicates a fault.

- fan faulty, blocked.
- feedback signal inaccurate.
Remedy:
- check the external fan and replace if necessary.

- if you are using an external fan with feedback, check its wiring (X12.2 or X13.2).
Note:
If you are using an external fan without feedback, check that the feedback terminal wiring on the power unit is connected to ground and make this connection if necessary (X12.1/2 or X13.1/2).
3-1258

Faults and alarms

A30049
Power unit: Internal fan faulty
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The internal fan has failed.
Remedy:
Check the internal fan and replace if necessary.
F30050
Power unit: 24 V supply overvoltage
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The voltage monitor signals an overvoltage fault on the module.
Remedy:
- check the 24 V power supply.

F30052
EEPROM data error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
EEPROM data error of the power unit module.

0: The EEPROM data read in from the power unit module is inconsistent.
1: EEPROM data is not compatible to the firmware of the power unit application.
Additional values:
Remedy:
Re fault value = 0:
Replace the power unit module or update the EEPROM data.
Re fault value = 1:
The following applies for CU31x and CUA31:
Update the firmware \SIEMENS\SINAMICS\CODE\SAC\cu31xi.ufw (cua31.ufw)
F30053
FPGA data faulty
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
Power unit module FPGA data error.
Remedy:
Replace the power unit module or update the FPGA data.
A30054 (F)
Power unit: 24 V braking undervoltage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
If the brake needs to be released during brake control, the P24 voltage must be at least 21.6 V (24 V - 10%) so that
the brake is sure to release. If the voltage undershoots the 21.6 V threshold when the brake is released, the alarm
is triggered; it goes away again as soon as the voltage rises above a threshold value of 22 V.
When the alarm is triggered, the voltage value is shown in the fault value in increments of 0.1 V (e.g. 21.2 V = 212).
Remedy:
Make sure that the 24 V voltage is stable and does not fluctuate downwards by more than 10%.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY

3-1259
Faults and alarms

F30060 (A)
Pre-charge contactor monitoring
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
At the end of the monitoring time (p0255[0]), the actual state of the pre-charge contactor does not match the desired
state.
Bit 0: Monitoring time exceeded.
Bit 1: Contactor opened during operation.
Bit 2: Contactor closed in OFF state.
Remedy:
- check the monitoring time setting p0255[0].

- check the contactor wiring and activation.
- replace the contactor.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F30061 (A)
Bridging contactor monitoring
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2 (NONE, OFF1)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
At the end of the monitoring time (p0255[1]), the actual state of the bridging contactor does not match the desired
state.
Bit 0: Monitoring time exceeded.
Bit 1: Contactor opened during operation.
Bit 2: Contactor closed in OFF state.
Remedy:
- check the monitoring time setting p0255[1].

- check the contactor wiring and activation.
- replace the contactor.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F30062 (N, A)
Bypass contactor has been opened under current
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The bypass contactor for the infeed has been damaged due to (multiple) opening under current.
Possible causes:
- Scheduled opening under load can be necessary to protect the converter line-up in the event of a ground fault in
high-frequency spindles.
- Operating the contactor under load can result from incorrect operation of the infeed; for example, if motoring power
is drawn from the DC link although no operating enable is present for the infeed.
Remedy:
Damaged infeeds must be replaced, to prevent serious damage to the entire converter line-up.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1260

Faults and alarms

F30070
Cycle requested by the power unit module not supported
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A cycle is requested that is not supported by the power unit.

0: The current control cycle is not supported.
1: The DRIVE-CLiQ cycle is not supported.
2: Internal timing problem (clearance between RX and TX instants too low).
3: Internal timing problem (TX instant too early).
Remedy:
The power unit only supports the following cycles:

62.5 s, 125 s, 250 s and 500 s
Re fault value = 0:
Set a permitted current control cycle.
Re fault value = 1:
Set a permitted DRIVE-CLiQ cycle.
Contact the manufacturer (you may have an incompatible firmware version).
F30071
No new actual values received from the power unit module
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The number of actual value telegrams from the power unit module that have failed has exceeded the permissible
number.
Remedy:
Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module.
F30072
Setpoints are no longer being transferred to the power unit
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

More than one setpoint telegram was not able to be transferred to the power unit module.
Remedy:

Check the interface (adjustment and locking) to the power unit module.
A30073 (N)
Actual value/setpoint preprocessing no longer synchronous
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Communication with the power unit module is no longer in synchronism with the current control cycle.
Remedy:
Wait until synchronization is re-established.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F30074
Communications error to the power unit module
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Communication is not possible with the power unit module via the plug connection.

3-1261
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Either replace the Control Unit or the power unit.
You must check which of the two components needs to be replaced by replacing one component and then the other
(ensuring that the component which is not being tested in each case is fully functioning). If these are not available,
then both components must be returned.
F30080
Power unit: Current increasing too quickly
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit has detected an excessive rate of rise in the overvoltage range.
Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy:

F30081
Power unit: Switching operations too frequent
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The power unit has executed too many switching operations for current limitation.
3-1262

Faults and alarms


Bit 0: Phase U.
Bit 1: Phase V.
Bit 2: Phase W.
Remedy:

F30105
PU: Actual value sensing fault
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
At least one incorrect actual value channel was detected on the Power Stack Adapter (PSA).
The incorrect actual value channels are displayed in the following diagnostic parameters.
Remedy:
Evaluate the diagnostic parameters.

If the actual value channel is incorrect, check the components and if required, replace.
A30502
Power unit: DC link voltage, overvoltage
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The power unit has detected overvoltage in the DC link on a pulse inhibit.
- device connection voltage too high.
- line reactor incorrectly dimensioned.
DC link voltage [1 bit = 100 mV].
See also: r0070 (Actual DC link voltage)
Remedy:
- check the device supply voltage (p0210).

- check the dimensioning of the line reactor.
F30600
SI MM: STOP A initiated
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Motor Module (MM) has detected a fault and initiated STOP A
(pulse suppression via the safety shutdown path of the Motor Module).
- forced checking procedure of the safety shutdown path of the Motor Module unsuccessful.
- subsequent response to fault F30611 (defect in a monitoring channel).

3-1263
Faults and alarms


0: Stop request from the Control Unit.
1005: Pulses suppressed although STO not selected and there is no internal STOP A present.
1010: Pulses enabled although STO is selected or an internal STOP A is present.
1020: Internal software error in the "Internal voltage protection" function. The "internal voltage protection" function is
withdrawn. A STOP A that cannot be acknowledged is initiated.
9999: Subsequent response to fault F30611.
Remedy:

- replace the Motor Module.
- carry out diagnostics for fault F30611.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F30611
SI MM: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function in the Motor Module (MM) has detected a fault in the data cross-check
between the Control Unit (CU) and MM and initiated a STOP F.
As a result of this fault, after the parameterized transition has expired (p9858), fault F30600 is output (SI MM: STOP
A initiated).
0: Stop request from the Control Unit.
1 ... 999:
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this fault. This number is also displayed in r9895.
1: SI monitoring clock cycle (r9780, r9880).
2: SI enable safety functions (p9601, p9801). Crosswise data comparison is only carried out for the supported bits.
3: SI SGE changeover tolerance time (p9650, p9850).
4: SI transition period STOP F to STOP A (p9658, p9858).
5: SI enable Safe Brake Control (p9602, p9802).
6: SI Motion enable, safety-relevant functions (p9501, internal value).
7: SI pulse suppression delay time for Safe Stop 1 (p9652, p9852).
8: SI PROFIsafe address (p9610, p9810).
9: SI debounce time for STO/SBC/SS1 (MM) (p9651, p9851).
11: SI Safe Brake Adapter mode, BICO interconnection (p9621, p9821).
12: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay ON time (p9622[0], p9822[0]).
13: SI Safe Brake Adapter relay OFF time (p9622[1], p9822[1]).
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Within the time of approx. 5 * p9850 too many switching operations have
occurred at the safety-related inputs of the Control Unit, or STO (also as subsequent response) was initiated too frequently via PROFIsafe/TM54F.
1001, 1002: Initialization error, change timer / check timer.
2000: Status of the STO selection on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2001: Feedback signal for safe pulse suppression on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
2002: Status of the delay timer SS1 on the Control Unit and Motor Module are different.
6000 ... 6999:
Error in the PROFIsafe control. The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message
C01711 of the Control Unit.
3-1264

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re fault value = 1 ... 5 and 7 ... 999:

- check the cross-checked data that resulted in a STOP F.
Re fault value = 6:
- check the wiring of the safety-relevant inputs (SGE) on the Control Unit (contact problems).
- PROFIsafe: Remove contact problems/faults at the PROFIBUS master/PROFINET controller. - check the wiring of
the fail-safe inputs at the TM54F (contact problems).
Re fault value = 2000, 2001, 2002:
- check the tolerance time SGE changeover and if required, increase the value (p9650/p9850, p9652/p9852).
- check the cause of the STO selection in r9772. When the SMM functions are active (p9501 = 1), STO can also be
selected using these functions.
Re fault value = 6000 ... 6999:
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
N30620 (F, A)
SI MM: Safe Torque Off active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The "Safe Torque Off" function was selected on the Motor Module (MM) via the input terminal and is active.
Note:
Remedy:
None necessary.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
Reaction upon F:
OFF2
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
N30621 (F, A)
SI MM: Safe Stop 1 active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The "Safe Stop 1" function (SS1) was selected on the Motor Module (MM) and is active.
Note:

3-1265
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
None necessary.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
Reaction upon F:
OFF3
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F30625
SI MM: Sign-of-life error in safety data
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module (MM) has detected an error in the sign-of-life of
the safety data between the Control Unit (CU) and MM and initiated a STOP A.
- a time slice overflow of the safety software has occurred.
Remedy:

- deselect all drive functions that are not absolutely necessary.
Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F30630
SI MM: Brake control error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module (MM) has detected a brake control error and initiated a STOP A.
10:
- Parameter p1278 incorrectly set.
deactivated)).
30:
deactivated)).
40:
60, 70:
81: SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in "brake closed" state.
82: SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in "open brake" state.
83: SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in "close brake" state.
3-1266

Faults and alarms

84,85:
SafeBrakeAdapter: Fault in the brake control circuit of the Control Unit or communication fault between Control Unit
and Motor Module (brake control).
Note:
Remedy:
- check parameter p1278 (for SBC, only p1278 = 0 is permissible).

Operation with Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter:
- check the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter connection.
- Replace the Safe Brake Module or Safe Brake Adapter.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
F30640
SI MM: Fault in the shutdown path of the second channel
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The Motor Module has detected a communications error with the higher-level control or the TM54F to transfer the
safety-relevant information.
Note:
Remedy:
For the higher-level control, the following applies:

- check the PROFIsafe address in the higher-level control and Motor Modules and if required, align.
- save all parameters (p0977 = 1).
For TM54F, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge hardware CRC (p9701 = EC hex).
Note:
MM: Motor Module
See also: p9810 (SI PROFIsafe address (Motor Module))

3-1267
Faults and alarms

F30649
SI MM: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An internal error in the Safety Integrated software on the Motor Module has occurred.
Note:
Remedy:

- re-commission the Safety Integrated function and carry out a POWER ON.
- replace the Motor Module.
Note:
MM: Motor Module
F30650
SI MM: Acceptance test required
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The "Safety Integrated" function on the Motor Module requires an acceptance test.
Note:
130: Safety parameters for the Motor Module not available.
1000: Reference and actual checksum in the Motor Module are not identical (booting).
- at least one checksum-checked piece of data is defective.
2000: Reference and actual checksum on the Motor Module are not identical (commissioning mode).
- reference checksum incorrectly entered into the Motor Module (p9899 not equal to r9898).
2003: Acceptance test is required as a safety parameter has been changed.
2005: The safety logbook has identified that the safety checksums have changed. An acceptance test is required.
3003: Acceptance test is required as a hardware-related safety parameter has been changed.
9999: Subsequent response of another safety-related fault that occurred when booting that requires an acceptance
test.
Remedy:

- carry out safety commissioning routine.
- check the safety parameters in the Motor Module and adapt the reference checksum (p9899).
- Carry out an acceptance test and generate an acceptance report.
- carry out diagnostics for the other safety-related fault that is present.
3-1268

Faults and alarms

Note:
MM: Motor Module
See also: p9799 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Control Unit)), p9899 (SI reference checksum SI parameters (Motor Module))
F30651
SI MM: Synchronization with Control Unit unsuccessful
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive-based "Safety Integrated" function is requesting synchronization of the safety time slices on the Control
Unit and Motor Module. This synchronization routine was unsuccessful.
Note:
Remedy:

Note:
MM: Motor Module
F30652
SI MM: Illegal monitoring clock cycle
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The Safety Integrated monitoring clock cycle cannot be maintained due to the communication conditions requested
in the system.
Note:
Remedy:
Upgrade the Motor Module software.

Note:
MM: Motor Module
F30655
SI MM: Align monitoring functions
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An error has occurred when aligning the Safety Integrated monitoring functions on the Control Unit (CU) and Motor
Module (MM). Control Unit and Motor Module were not able to determine a common set of supported SI monitoring
functions.
- Safety Integrated software releases on the Control Unit and Motor Module are not compatible with one another.
Note:

3-1269
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F30656
SI MM: Motor Module parameter error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When accessing the Safety Integrated parameters for the Motor Module (MM) in the non-volatile memory, an error
has occurred.
Note:
129: Safety parameters for the Motor Module corrupted.
131: Internal software error on the Control Unit.
255: Internal Motor Module software error.
Remedy:
- re-commission the safety functions.

Note:
MM: Motor Module
F30659
SI MM: Write request for parameter rejected
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The write request for one or several Safety Integrated parameters on the Motor Module (MM) was rejected.
Note:
10: An attempt was made to enable the STO function although this cannot be supported.
11: An attempt was made to enable the SBC function although this cannot be supported.
13: An attempt was made to enable the SS1 function although this cannot be supported.
14: An attempt was made to enable the safe motion monitoring function with the higher-level control, although this
cannot be supported.
15: An attempt was made to enable the motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive although these cannot be
supported.
16: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe communication - although this cannot be supported or the version
of the PROFIsafe driver used on the CU and MM is different.
18: An attempt was made to enable the PROFIsafe function for Basic Functions although this cannot be supported.
See also: r9771 (SI common functions (Control Unit)), r9871 (SI common functions (Motor Module)
Remedy:
Re fault value = 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18:

- use a Motor Module that supports the required function ("Safe Torque Off", "Safe Brake Control",
"PROFIsafe/PROFIsafe V2", "motion monitoring functions integrated in the drive").
3-1270

Faults and alarms

Note:
CU: Control Unit
MM: Motor Module
F30662
Error in internal communications
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
A module-internal communication error has occurred.

Remedy:

F30664
Error while booting
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An error has occurred during booting.

Remedy:

F30665
SI MM: System is defective
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The drive has detected a defect in the system and performed an emergency shutdown.
Remedy:

F30672
SI CU: Control Unit software incompatible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The existing Control Unit software does not support the safe drive-based motion monitoring function.
Note:

3-1271
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- use a Control Unit that supports the safe motion monitoring function.
Note:
F30680
SI Motion MM: Checksum error safety monitoring functions
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The actual checksum calculated by the Motor Module and entered in r9398 over the safety-relevant parameters does
not match the reference checksum saved in p9399 at the last machine acceptance.
Safety-relevant parameters have been changed or a fault is present.
Note:
0: Checksum error for SI parameters for motion monitoring.
Remedy:

- set the reference checksum to the actual checksum.
- perform a POWER ON if safety parameters requiring a POWER ON have been modified.
Note:
F30681
SI Motion MM: Incorrect parameter value
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameter value cannot be parameterized with this value.

Note:
Remedy:

If the encoder parameters (p9526/p9326) have different values, start the copy function for SI parameters on the drive
(p9700 = 57 hex).
Also check p9316.0 for fault value 9317.
F30682
SI Motion MM: Monitoring function not supported
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The monitoring function enabled in p9301, p9501, p9601 or p9801 is not supported in this firmware version.
Note:
1: Monitoring function SLP not supported (p9301.1).
2: Monitoring function SCA not supported (p9301.7 and p9301.8 ... 15).
3: Monitoring function SLS override not supported (p9301.5).
4: Monitoring function external ESR activation not supported (p9301.4).
5: Monitoring function FDI in PROFIsafe not supported (p9301.30).
6: Enable actual value synchronization not supported (p9301.3).
9: Monitoring function not supported, enable bit reserved (p9301.2, p9301.17 ... 29, p9301.31, if required p9301.6).
30: The firmware version of the Motor Module is older than the version of the Control Unit.
3-1272

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- deselect the monitoring function involved (p9301, p9301, p9303, p9601, p9801).
- Upgrade the Motor Module firmware.
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)), p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9503 (SI Motion SCA (SN) enable (Control Unit)), p9601 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive
(Control Unit)), p9801 (SI enable, functions integrated in the drive (Motor Module))
F30683
SI Motion MM: SOS/SLS enable missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The safety-relevant basic function "SOS/SLS" is not enabled in p9301 although other safety-relevant monitoring
functions are enabled.
Note:
Remedy:
Enable the function "SOS/SLS" (p9301.0).

Note:
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module))
F30685
SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed limit value too high
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The limit value for the function "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) is greater than the speed that corresponds to an
encoder limit frequency of 500 kHz.
Note:
Maximum permissible speed.
Remedy:
Correct the limit values for SLS and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
See also: p9331 (SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module))
F30688
SI Motion MM: Actual value synchronization not permissible
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
- It is not permissible to enable actual value synchronization for a 1-encoder system.

- It is not permissible to simultaneously enable actual value synchronization and a monitoring function with absolute
reference (SCA/SLP).
Note:
Remedy:
- Either select the "actual value synchronization" function or parameterize a 2-encoder system.
- Either deselect the function "actual value synchronization" or the monitoring functions with absolute reference
(SCA/SLP) and carry out a POWER ON.
Note:
See also: p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit)), p9526 (SI Motion encoder assignment second
channel)

3-1273
Faults and alarms

F30692
SI Motion MM: Incorrect parameter value encoderless
Message value:
Parameter: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The parameter cannot be set to this value if encoderless motion monitoring functions have been parameterized in
p9306.
Note:
See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module))
Remedy:
Correct the parameter value or deselect encoderless motion monitoring functions.

See also: p9301 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Motor Module)), p9501 (SI Motion enable safety functions (Control Unit))
A30693 (F)
SI MM: Safety parameter settings changed, warm restart/POWER ON required
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Safety parameters have been changed; these will only take effect following a warm restart or POWER ON.
Parameter number of the safety parameter which has changed, necessitating a warm restart or POWER ON.
Remedy:
- carry out a warm restart (p0971 = 3)

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
POWER ON
C30700
SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP A (pulses are suppressed via the safety shutdown path of the Control Unit).
Possible causes:
- stop request from the Control Unit.
- pulses not suppressed after a parameterized time (p9357) after test stop selection.
- subsequent response to the message C30706 "SI Motion MM: Safe Acceleration Monitoring, limit exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C30701 "SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated".
Remedy:
- remove the cause to the fault on the Control Unit.

- check the value in p9357, if required, increase the value.
- check the shutdown path of the Control Unit (check DRIVE-CLiQ communication).
- replace the Motor Module/Power Module
This message can only be acknowledged via the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) or PROFIsafe.
Note:
3-1274

Faults and alarms

C30701
SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF3
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP B (braking along the OFF3 ramp).
As a result of this fault, after the time parameterized in p9356 has expired, or the speed threshold parameterized in
p9360 has been undershot, message C30700 "SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated" is output.
Possible causes:
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely limited speed exceeded".
- subsequent response to the message C30711 "SI Motion MM: Defect in a monitoring channel".
Remedy:
- remove the cause of the fault on the Control Unit

Note:
C30706
SI Motion MM: SBR limit exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Motion monitoring functions with encoder: SBR - Safe Acceleration Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or
STOP C (SS2), the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
Encoderless motion monitoring function: SBR - Safe Brake Ramp Monitoring. After initiating STOP B (SS1) or SLS
changeover to the lower speed stage, the speed has exceeded the selected tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C30700 "SI Motion MM: STOP A initiated".
Remedy:
Check the braking behavior and, if necessary, adapt the tolerance for the "Safe Acceleration Monitor" or modify the
parameter settings for the "safe brake ramp".
Note:
See also: p9548 (SI Motion SBR actual velocity tolerance (Control Unit))
C30707
SI Motion MM: Tolerance for safe operating stop exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The actual position has distanced itself further from the target position than the standstill tolerance.
The drive is shut down by the message C30701 "SI Motion MM: STOP B initiated".
Remedy:
- check whether safety faults are present and if required carry out the appropriate diagnostic routines for the particular faults.
- check whether the standstill tolerance matches the accuracy and control dynamic performance of the axis.
Note:
See also: p9530 (SI Motion standstill tolerance (Control Unit))

3-1275
Faults and alarms

C30708
SI Motion MM: STOP C initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
STOP2
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP C (braking along the OFF3 ramp).
Possible causes:
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion MM: Safely limited speed exceeded".
See also: p9552 (SI Motion transition time STOP C to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy:

Note:
C30709
SI Motion MM: STOP D initiated
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive is stopped via a STOP D (braking along the path).

Possible causes:
- subsequent response to the message C30714 "SI Motion: Safely limited speed exceeded".
See also: p9353 (SI Motion transition time STOP D to SOS (Motor Module)), p9553 (SI Motion transition time STOP
D to SOS (SBH) (Control Unit))
Remedy:

Note:
C30711
SI MM MM: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When cross-checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between the input
data or results of the monitoring functions and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
If at least one monitoring function is active, then after the parameterized timer has expired, the message C30701 "SI
Motion: STOP B initiated" is output. The message is output with message value 1031 when the Sensor Module hardware is replaced.
The following message values may also occur in the following cases if the cause that is explicitly mentioned does
not apply:
- differently parameterized cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311).
- differently parameterized axis types (p9502/p9302).
- excessively fast cycle times (p9500/p9300, p9511/p9311).
- incorrect synchronization.
3-1276

Faults and alarms


0 ... 999: Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this message. Refer to safety message C01711for a
description of the individual data.
The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit.
1000: Watchdog timer has expired. Too many signal changes have occurred at safety-relevant inputs.
1001: Initialization error of watchdog timer.
1005: Pulses already suppressed for test stop selection.
1011: Acceptance test status between the monitoring channels differ.
1012: Plausibility violation of the actual value from the encoder.
1020: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. cycles.
1021: Cyc. communication failure between the monit. channel and Sensor Module.
1023: Error in the effectiveness test in the DRIVE-CLiQ encoder
1030: Encoder fault detected from another monitoring channel.
1031: Data transfer error between the monitoring channel and the Sensor Module (p9526/p9326).
1040: Pulses suppressed with active encoderless monitoring functions.
1041: Current absolute value too low (encoderless)
1042: Current/voltage plausibility error
1043: Too many acceleration phases
1044: Actual current values plausibility error.
5000 ... 5140: PROFIsafe message values.
6000 ... 6166: PROFIsafe message values (PROFIsafe driver for PROFIBUS DP V1/V2 and PROFINET).
See also: p9555 (SI Motion transition time STOP F to STOP B (Control Unit)), r9725 (SI Motion, diagnostics STOP F)
Remedy:
Re message value = 1030:

- if required, replace the encoder.
When replacing a Sensor Module, carry out the following steps:
- start the copy function for the node identifier on the drive (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge the hardware CRC on the drive (p9701 = EC hex).
The following always applies:
- if required, replace the encoder.
- deselect encoderless monitoring functions, select and deselect STO.
- if monitoring function is active, issue SLS pulse enable within 5 s of deselecting STO.
Re other message values:
- The significance of the individual message values is described in safety message C01711 of the Control Unit.
Note:
Unit))
C30712
SI Motion MM: Defect in F-IO processing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
When cross checking and comparing the two monitoring channels, the drive detected a difference between parameters or results of the F-IO processing and initiated a STOP F. One of the monitoring functions no longer reliably
The safety message C30711 with message value 0 is also displayed due to initiation of STOP F.
If at least one monitoring function is active, the safety message C30701 "SI Motion: STOP B initiated" is output after
the parameterized timer has expired.
Number of the cross-checked data that resulted in this message.

3-1277
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check parameterization in the parameters involved and correct if required.

- ensure equality by copying the SI data to the second channel and then carry out an acceptance test.
- check monitoring clock cycle in p9500 and p9300 for equality.
Note:
This message can be acknowledged via F-DI or PROFIsafe.
Unit))
C30714
SI Motion MM: Safely-Limited Speed exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The drive had moved faster than that specified by the velocity limit value (p9331). The drive is stopped as a result of
the configured stop response (p9363).
100: SLS1 exceeded.
200: SLS2 exceeded.
300: SLS3 exceeded.
400: SLS4 exceeded.
1000: Encoder limit frequency exceeded.
Remedy:
- check the traversing/motion program in the control.

- check the limits for "Safely-Limited Speed" (SLS) and if required, adapt (p9331).
Note:
See also: p9331 (SI Motion SLS limit values (Motor Module)), p9363 (SI Motion SLS stop response (Motor Module))
C30798
SI Motion MM: Test stop running
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The test stop is active.
Remedy:
None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when the test stop is finished.
Note:
C30799
SI Motion MM: Acceptance test mode active
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The acceptance test mode is active. The POWER ON signals of the safety-relevant motion monitoring functions can
be acknowledged during the acceptance test using the acknowledgement functions of the higher-level control.
Remedy:
None necessary.
The message is withdrawn when exiting the acceptance test mode.
Note:
N30800 (F)
Power unit: Group signal
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The power unit has detected at least one fault.
3-1278

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Evaluates other actual messages.
Reaction upon F:
OFF2
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F30801
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned.
The computing time load might be too high.
yyxx hex: yy = component number, xx = fault cause
xx = 0A hex:
The sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram is not set.
Remedy:
- remove DRIVE-CLiQ components that are not required.
- deselect functions that are not required.
- if required, increase the sampling times (p0112, p0115).
F30802
Power unit: Time slice overflow
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Time slide overflow.
Remedy:

A30804 (F)
Power unit: CRC
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
CRC error actuator
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
OFF2 (OFF1, OFF3)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F30805
Power unit: EPROM checksum error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Internal parameter data is corrupted.

01: EEPROM access error.
02: Too many blocks in the EEPROM.
Remedy:
Replace the module.

3-1279
Faults and alarms

F30809
Power unit: Switching information not valid
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For 3P gating unit:

The last switching status word in the setpoint telegram is identified by the end ID. Such an end ID was not found.
Remedy:

A30810 (F)
Power unit: Watchdog timer
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When booting it was detected that the cause of the previous reset was an SAC watchdog timer overflow.
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE (OFF2)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F30820
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
Telegram is shorter than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 03 hex:
Telegram is longer than specified in the length byte or in the receive list.
xx = 04 hex:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 05 hex:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list.
xx = 06 hex:
The address of the component in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 07 hex:
A SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is not a SYNC telegram.
xx = 08 hex:
No SYNC telegram is expected - but the received telegram is one.
xx = 09 hex:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set.
xx = 10 hex:
The receive telegram is too early.
Remedy:

- check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring (interrupted cable, contacts, ...).
See also: p9916 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold slave)
3-1280

Faults and alarms

F30835
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. The nodes do
not send and receive in synchronism.
xx = 21 hex:
The cyclic telegram has not been received.
xx = 22 hex:
Timeout in the telegram receive list.
xx = 40 hex:
Timeout in the telegram send list.
Remedy:

F30836
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the power unit concerned. Data were not
able to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Telegram type does not match send list.
Remedy:
F30837
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component concerned. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
Error in the telegram header.
xx = 23 hex:
Receive error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 42 hex:
Send error: The telegram buffer memory contains an error.
xx = 43 hex:
Remedy:

- if required, use another DRIVE-CLiQ socket (p9904).

3-1281
Faults and alarms

F30845
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Synchronization error during alternating cyclic data transfer.
Remedy:

F30850
Power unit: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An internal software error has occurred in the power unit.

Remedy:

- if required, upgrade the firmware in the power unit.
F30851
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the power unit to the Control Unit involved.
The DRIVE-CLiQ component did not set the sign-of-life to the Control Unit.
xx = 0A hex = 10 dec:
Remedy:
Upgrade the firmware of the component involved.
A30853
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The power unit has detected that the cyclic setpoint telegrams of the Control Unit have not been updated on time. At
least two sign-of-life errors have occurred within the window set in p7788.
Remedy:
- reduce the size of the window (p7788) for monitoring.
3-1282

Faults and alarms

F30860
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
CRC error and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error).
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
The telegram is shorter than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
The telegram is longer than that specified in the length byte or in the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
The length of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
The type of the receive telegram does not match the receive list and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list does not match and the receive telegram is too
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
The address of the power unit in the telegram and in the receive list do not match.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
The error bit in the receive telegram is set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

See also: p9915 (DRIVE-CLiQ data transfer error shutdown threshold master)
F30885
CU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
Sign-of-life bit in the receive telegram not set and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:

3-1283
Faults and alarms

xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Error at the transition to cyclic operation.
Remedy:
- check the power supply voltage of the component involved.

F30886
PU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Data were not able to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
F30887
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
Response received too late during runtime measurement.
xx = 61 hex:
Time taken to exchange characteristic data too long.
Remedy:

F30895
PU DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

3-1284

Faults and alarms

F30896
Power unit DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit), specified by the fault value, have changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable or
DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Component number.
Remedy:

- when a component is replaced, the same component type and if possible the same firmware version should be
used.
- when a cable is replaced, only cables whose length is the same as or as close as possible to the length of the original cables should be used (ensure compliance with the maximum cable length).
F30897
DRIVE-CLiQ (CU) power unit: no communication with component
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Communication with the DRIVE-CLiQ component (power unit) specified by the fault value is not possible.
One cause may, for example, be that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable has been withdrawn.
Component ID.
Remedy:
- check the DRIVE-CLiQ connections.

F30899 (N, A)
Power unit: Unknown fault
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A fault occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
This can occur if the firmware on this component is more recent than the firmware on the Control Unit.
Fault number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new fault can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128).
- upgrade the firmware on the Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1285
Faults and alarms

F30903
Power unit: I2C bus error occurred
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Communications error with an EEPROM or A/D converter.

80000000 hex:
- internal software error.
00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex:
- module fault.
Remedy:
Re fault value = 80000000 hex:

Re fault value = 00000001 hex ... 0000FFFF hex:
- replace the module.
A30920 (F)
Power unit: Temperature sensor fault
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When evaluating the temperature sensor, an error occurred.

1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm, PT100: R > 375 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm, PT100: R < 30 Ohm).
Remedy:

- replace the sensor.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A30999 (F, N)
Power unit: Unknown alarm
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An alarm occurred on the power unit that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Alarm number.
Note:
If required, the significance of this new alarm can be read about in a more recent description of the Control Unit.
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the power unit by an older firmware version (r0128).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1286

Faults and alarms

F31100 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Zero mark distance error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The measured zero mark distance does not correspond to the parameterized zero mark distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero mark distance is determined from zero marks detected pairs. This means that
if a zero mark is missing, depending on the pair generation, this cannot result in a fault and also has no effect in the
system.
The zero mark distance for the zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder) or p0424 (linear encoder).
Last measured zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse).
The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
Remedy:
- check that the encoder cables are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections
. check the encoder type (encoder with equidistant zero marks).
- adapt the parameter for the distance between zero marks (p0424, p0425).
- if message output above speed threshold, reduce filter time if necessary (p0438).
- replace the encoder or encoder cable
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31101 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Zero marked failed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE, OFF1, OFF2, OFF3, STOP1, STOP2)
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark distance was exceeded.

Number of increments after POWER ON or since the last zero mark that was detected (4 increments = 1 encoder
pulse).
Remedy:
- adapt the parameter for the clearance between zero marks (p0425).
- when p0437.1 is active, check p4686.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1287
Faults and alarms

F31103 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Amplitude error, track R
Message value:
R track: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
ENCODER (IASC/DCBRAKE, NONE)
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The amplitude of the reference track signal (track R) does not lie within the tolerance bandwidth for encoder 1.
The fault can be initiated when the unipolar voltage level is exceeded (RP/RN) or if the differential amplitude is undershot.
xxxx hex:
xxxx = Signal level, track R (16 bits with sign).
The response thresholds of the unipolar signal levels of the encoder are between < 1400 mV and > 3500 mV.
The response threshold for the differential signal level of the encoder is < -1600 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 5333 hex = 21299 dec.
Note:
The analog value of the amplitude error is not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the Sensor Module.
The fault value can only be represented between -32767dec and 32767dec (-770 mV ... 770 mV).
The signal level is not evaluated unless the following conditions are satisfied:
- Sensor Module properties available (r0459.31 = 1).
- Monitoring active (p0437.31 = 1).
Remedy:
- check the speed range; frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment might not
be sufficient for the speed range
- check that the encoder cables and shielding are routed in compliance with EMC.
- check the plug connections and contacts of the encoder cable.
- check whether the zero mark is connected and the signal cables RP and RN have been connected correctly
- replace the encoder cable.
- if the coding disk is soiled or the lighting aged, replace the encoder.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31110 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Serial communications error
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Serial communication protocol transfer error between the encoder and evaluation module.
Bit 0: Alarm bit in the position protocol.
Bit 1: Incorrect quiescent level on the data line.
Bit 2: Encoder does not respond (does not supply a start bit within 50 ms).
Bit 3: CRC error: The checksum in the protocol from the encoder does not match the data.
Bit 4: Encoder acknowledgement error: The encoder incorrectly understood the task (request) or cannot execute it.
Bit 5: Internal error in the serial driver: An illegal mode command was requested.
Bit 6: Timeout when cyclically reading.
Bit 8: Protocol is too long (e.g. > 64 bits).
Bit 9: Receive buffer overflow.
Bit 10: Frame error when reading twice.
Bit 11: Parity error.
Bit 12: Data line signal level error during the monoflop time.
Bit 13: Data line incorrect.
3-1288

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re fault value, bit 0 = 1:

- Enc defect F31111 may provide additional details.
- Incorrect encoder type / replace the encoder or encoder cable.
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable.
- EMC / connect the cable shield, replace the encoder or encoder cable, replace the Sensor Module.
- Update Sensor Module firmware.
- Check parameterization (p0429.2).
- Check parameterization (p0429.2, p0449).
- Check parameterization (p0436).
- Check data line.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31111 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Absolute encoder EnDat, internal fault/error
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The EnDat encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Bit 0: Lighting system failed.
Bit 1: Signal amplitude too low.
Bit 2: Position value incorrect.
Bit 3: Encoder power supply overvoltage condition.
Bit 4: Encoder power supply undervoltage condition.
Bit 5: Encoder power supply overcurrent condition.
Bit 6: The battery must be changed.
Remedy:

Encoder is defective. Replace the encoder, where the motor encoder has a direct DRIVE-CLiQ socket: Replace the
motor.
motor.
motor.
5 V power supply voltage fault.
When using an SMC: Check the plug-in cable between the encoder and SMC or replace the SMC.
When a motor encoder with a direct DRIVE-CLiQ connection is used: Replace the motor.

3-1289
Faults and alarms


When using a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ: Replace the motor.
motor.
The battery must be changed (only for encoders with battery back-up).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31112 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Error bit set in the serial protocol
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The encoder sends a set error bit via the serial protocol.
Bit 0: Fault bit in the position protocol.
Remedy:
For fault value, bit 0 = 1:

In the case of an EnDat encoder, F31111 may provide further details.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31115 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value:
A track: %1, B-track: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track B (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track A (16 bits with sign).
The nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 375 mV to 600 mV (500 mV -25/+20 %).
The response thresholds are < 230 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder) and > 750 mV.
Note for sensors modules for resolvers (e. g. SMC10):
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response thresholds are < 1070 mV and > 3582 mV.
Note:
The analog values of the amplitude error are not measured at the same time with the hardware fault output by the
Sensor Module.
3-1290

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the Sensor Module (e.g. contacts).
The following applies to measuring systems without their own bearing system:
- adjust the scanning head and check the bearing system of the measuring wheel.
The following applies for measuring systems with their own bearing system:
- ensure that the encoder housing is not subject to any axial force.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31116 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Amplitude error monitoring track A + B
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The amplitude of the rectified encoder signals A and B and the amplitude from the roots of A^2 + B^2 for encoder 1
are not within the tolerance bandwidth.
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31117 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Inversion error signals A and B and R
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, double ended) the A* and B* and R* signals are not inverted with respect to
signals A and B and R.
Bits 0 - 15: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Bit 16: Error track A.
Bit 17: Error track B.
Bit 18: Error track R.
Note:
For SMC30 (order no.. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), CUA32, and CU310, the following
applies:
A square-wave encoder without track R is used and track monitoring (p0405.2 = 1) is activated.

3-1291
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Check the encoder/cable: Does the encoder provide signals and the associated inverted signals?
Note:
For SMC30 (order no. 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA0 and 6SL3055-0AA00-5CA1 only), the following applies:
- check the setting of p0405 (p0405.2 = 1 is only possible if the encoder is connected at X520).
For a square-wave encoder without track R, the following jumpers must be set for the connection at X520 (SMC30)
or X23 (CUA32, CU310):
- pin 10 (reference signal R) <--> pin 7 (encoder power supply, ground)
- pin 11 (reference signal R inverted) <--> pin 4 (encoder power supply)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31118 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Speed difference outside the tolerance range
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference has exceeded the value in p0492 over several sampling cycles.
The change to the averaged speed actual value - if applicable - is monitored in the current controller sampling time.
Encoder 1 is used as motor encoder and can be effective has fault response to change over to encoderless operation.
See also: p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER), p0492
Remedy:
- check the tachometer feeder cable for interruptions.

- check the grounding of the tachometer shielding.
- if required, increase the maximum speed difference per sampling cycle (p0492).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31120 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Power supply voltage fault
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Encoder 1 power supply voltage fault.

Note:
If the encoder cables 6FX2002-2EQ00-.... and 6FX2002-2CH00-.... are interchanged, this can result in the encoder
being destroyed because the pins of the operating voltage are reversed.
Bit 0: Undervoltage condition on the sense line.
Bit 1: Overcurrent condition for the encoder power supply.
Bit 2: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation negative.
Bit 3: Overcurrent condition for encoder power supply on cable resolver excitation positive.
3-1292

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

- correct encoder cable connected?
- check the plug connections of the encoder cable.
- SMC30: Check the parameterization (p0404.22).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31121 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Coarse position error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
ENCODER (NONE)
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
For the actual value sensing, an error was detected on the module. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that
the actual value sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
Remedy:
Replace the motor with DRIVE-CLiQ or the appropriate Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31122
Encoder 1: Internal power supply voltage faulty
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
ENCODER
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault in internal reference voltage of ASICs for encoder 1.

1: Reference voltage error.
2: Internal undervoltage.
3: Internal overvoltage.
Remedy:

3-1293
Faults and alarms

F31123 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Signal level A/B unipolar outside tolerance
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The unipolar level (AP/AN or BP/BN) for encoder 1 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Bit 0 = 1: Either AP or AN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either BP or BN outside the tolerance.
The unipolar nominal signal level of the encoder must lie in the range 2500 mV +/- 500 mV.
The response thresholds are < 1700 mV and > 3300 mV.
Note:
Remedy:
- make sure that the encoder cables and shielding are installed in an EMC-compliant manner.
- check the short-circuit of a signal cable with mass or the operating voltage.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31125 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Amplitude error track A or B overcontrolled
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The amplitude of track A or B for encoder 1 exceeds the permissble tolerance band.
yyyyxxxx hex:
The response threshold is > 750 mV. This fault also occurs if the A/D converter is overcontrolled.
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is > 3582 mV.
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1294

Faults and alarms

F31126 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Amplitude AB too high
Message value:
Amplitude: %1, Angle: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The amplitude (root of A^2 + B^2 or |A| + |B|) for encoder 1 exceeds the permissible tolerance.
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
xxxx = Amplitude, i.e. root from A^2 + B^2 (16 bits without sign)
The response threshold for (|A| + |B|) is > 1120 mV or the root of (A^2 + B^2) > 955 mV.
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value of 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The angle 0 ... FFFF hex corresponds to 0 ... 360 degrees of the fine position. Zero degrees is at the negative zero
crossover of track B.
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31129 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Position difference, hall sensor/track C/D and A/B too large
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The error for track C/D is greater than +/-15 mechanical or +/-60 electrical or the error for the Hall signals is greater
than +/-60 electrical.
One period of track C/D corresponds to 360 mechanical.
One period of the Hall signal corresponds to 360 electrical.
The monitoring responds if, for example, Hall sensors are connected as equivalent for the C/D tracks with the incorrect rotational sense or supply values that are not accurate enough.
After the fine synchronization using one reference mark or 2 reference marks for distance-coded encoders, this fault
is no longer initiated, but instead, Alarm A31429.
For track C/D, the following applies:
Measured deviation as mechanical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ).
For Hall signals, the following applies:
Measured deviation as electrical angle (16 bits with sign, 182 dec corresponds to 1 ).
Remedy:
- track C or D not connected.

- correct the direction of rotation of the Hall sensor possibly connected as equivalent for track C/D.
- check the adjustment of the Hall sensor.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1295
Faults and alarms

F31130 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Zero mark and position error from the coarse synchronization
Message value:
Angular deviation, electrical: %1, angle, mechanical: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
After initializing the pole position using track C/D, Hall signals or pole position identification routine, the zero mark
was detected outside the permissible range. For distance-coded encoders, the test is carried out after passing 2 zero
marks. Fine synchronization was not carried out.
When initializing via track C/D (p0404) then it is checked whether the zero mark occurs in an angular range of +/-18
mechanical.
When initializing via Hall sensors (p0404) or pole position identification (p1982) it is checked whether the zero mark
occurs in an angular range of +/-60 electrical.
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Determined mechanical zero mark position (can only be used for track C/D).
xxxx: Deviation of the zero mark from the expected position as electrical angle.
Scaling: 32768 dec = 180
Remedy:
- Check p0431 and, if necessary, correct (trigger via p1990 = 1 if necessary).

- if the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent for track C/D, check the connection.
- Check the connection of track C or D.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31131 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Deviation, position incremental/absolute too large
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Absolute encoder:
When cyclically reading the absolute position, an excessively high difference to the incremental position was
detected. The absolute position that was read is rejected.
Limit value for the deviation:
- EnDat encoder: Is supplied from the encoder and is a minimum of 2 quadrants (e.g. EQI 1325 > 2 quadrants, EQN
1325 > 50 quadrants).
- other encoders: 15 pulses = 60 quadrants.
Incremental encoder:
When the zero pulse is passed, a deviation in the incremental position was detected.
For equidistant zero marks, the following applies:
- The first zero mark passed supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero marks must have
n times the distance referred to the first zero mark.
For distance-coded zero marks, the following applies:
- the first zero mark pair supplies the reference point for all subsequent checks. The other zero mark pairs must have
the expected distance to the first zero mark pair.
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quadrants).
3-1296

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check whether the coding disk is dirty or there are strong ambient magnetic fields.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31135
Encoder 1: Fault when determining the position
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder supplies status information via bits in an internal status/fault word.
Some of these bits cause this fault to be triggered. Other bits are status displays. The status/fault word is displayed
in the fault value.
Bit 0: F1 (safety status display)
Bit 2: Lighting (reserved)
Bit 3: Signal amplitude (reserved)
Bit 4: Position value (reserved)
Bit 5: Overvoltage (reserved)
Bit 6: Undervoltage (reserved)
Bit 7: Overcurrent (reserved)
Bit 8: Battery (reserved)
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 17: Signal amplitude (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 18: Singleturn position 1 (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 19: Overvoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 20: Undervoltage (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 21: Overcurrent (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 22: Temperature exceeded (--> F3x405, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 23: Singleturn position 2 (safety status display)
Bit 24: Singleturn system (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 25: Singleturm power down (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 26: Multiturn position 1 (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 28: Multiturn system (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 29: Multiturn power down (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 30: Multiturn overflow/underflow (--> F3x136, x = 1, 2, 3)
Bit 31: Multiturn battery (reserved)
Remedy:
Replace DRIVE-CLiQ encoder.

3-1297
Faults and alarms

F31136
Encoder 1: Error when determining multiturn information
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
in the fault value.
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Remedy:
F31137
Encoder 1: Internal error when determining the position
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The DRIVE-CLiQ encoder fault word supplies fault bits that have been set.
Only for internal SIEMENS use.
Remedy:
Replace encoder
F31138
Encoder 1: Internal error when determining multiturn information
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
3-1298

Faults and alarms

F31150 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Initialization error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Encoder functionality selected in p0404 is not operating correctly.

The fault value is a bit field. Every set bit indicates functionality that is faulted.
The bit assignment corresponds to that of p0404 (e.g. bit 5 set: Error track C/D).
See also: p0404 (Encoder configuration effective), p0491 (Motor encoder fault response ENCODER)
Remedy:
- Check that p0404 is correctly set.

- check the encoder type used (incremental/absolute value) and for SMCxx, the encoder cable.
- if relevant, note additional fault messages that describe the fault in detail.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31151 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Encoder speed for initialization AB too high
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The encoder speed is too high during while initializing the sensor.
Remedy:
Reduce the speed of the encoder accordingly during initialization.

If necessary, deactivate monitoring (p0437.29).
See also: p0437 (Sensor Module configuration extended)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31160 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel A failed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The input voltage of the analog sensor is outside the permissible limits.
1: Input voltage outside detectable measuring range.
2: Input voltage outside measuring range set in p4673.
3: The absolute value of the input voltage has exceeded the range limit (p4676).
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
- check the output voltage of the analog sensor.
Re fault value = 2:
- check the voltage setting for each encoder period (p4673).
Re fault value = 3:
- check the range limit setting and increase it if necessary (p4676).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1299
Faults and alarms

F31161 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Analog sensor channel B failed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31400 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Alarm threshold zero mark distance error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
system.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31401 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Alarm threshold zero marked failed
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

pulse).
3-1300

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F31405 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Temperature in the encoder evaluation inadmissible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The encoder evaluation for a motor with DRIVE-CLiQ has detected an inadmissible temperature.
The fault threshold is 125 C.
Measured board/module temperature in 0.1 C.
Remedy:
Reduce the ambient temperature for the DRIVE-CLiQ connection of the motor.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31407 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Function limit reached
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The encoder has reached one of its function limits. A service is recommended.
1 : Incremental signals
3 : Absolute track
4 : Code connection
Remedy:
Perform service. Replace the encoder if necessary.

Note:
The current functional reserve of an encoder can be displayed via r4651.
See also: p4650 (Encoder functional reserve component number), r4651 (Encoder functional reserve)
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1301
Faults and alarms

A31410 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Serial communications
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31411 (F, N)
Encoder 1: EnDat encoder signals alarms
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The error word of the EnDat encoder has alarm bits that have been set.
Bit 0: Frequency exceeded (speed too high).
Bit 1: Temperature exceeded.
Bit 2: Control reserve, lighting system exceeded.
Bit 3: Battery discharged.
Bit 4: Reference point passed.
Remedy:
Replace encoder.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31412 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3-1302

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31414 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Amplitude error track C or D (C^2 + D^2)
Message value:
C track: %1, D track: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The amplitude (C^2 + D^2) of track C or D of the encoder or from the Hall signals, is not within the tolerance bandwidth.
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Signal level, track D (16 bits with sign).
xxxx = Signal level, track C (16 bits with sign).
Note:
If the amplitude is not within the tolerance bandwidth, then it cannot be used to initialize the start position.
Remedy:
- check the Hall sensor box
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
N31415 (F, A)
Encoder 1: Amplitude alarm track A or B (A^2 + B^2)
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
The response threshold is < 300 mV (observe the frequency response of the encoder).
A signal level of 500 mV peak value corresponds to the numerical value 299A hex = 10650 dec.
The nominal signal level is at 2900 mV (2.0 Vrms). The response threshold is < 1414 mV (1.0 Vrms).
Note:
Sensor Module.

3-1303
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the speed range, frequency characteristic (amplitude characteristic) of the measuring equipment is not sufficient for the speed range.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31418 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Speed difference per sampling rate exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For an HTL/TTL encoder, the speed difference between two sampling cycles has exceeded the value in p0492.
See also: p0492
Remedy:

- if required, increase the setting of p0492.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31419 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Track A or B outside the tolerance range
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The amplitude, phase or offset correction for track A or B is at the limit.

Amplitude error correction: Amplitude B / Amplitude A = 0.78 ... 1.27
Phase: <84 degrees or >96 degrees
SMC20: Offset correction: +/-140 mV
xxxx1: Minimum of the offset correction, track B
xxxx2: Maximum of the offset correction, track B
xxx1x: Minimum of the offset correction, track A
xxx2x: Maximum of the offset correction, track A
xx1xx: Minimum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
xx2xx: Maximum of the amplitude correction, track B/A
x1xxx: Minimum of the phase error correction
x2xxx: Maximum of the phase error correction
1xxxx: Minimum of the cubic correction
2xxxx: Maximum of the cubic correction
3-1304

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check mechanical mounting tolerances for encoders without their own bearings (e.g. toothed-wheel encoders).
- check the plug connections (also the transition resistance).
- check the encoder signals.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31421 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For the actual value sensing, an error was detected. As a result of this error, it must be assumed that the actual value
sensing supplies an incorrect coarse position.
3: The absolute position of the serial protocol and track A/B differ by half an encoder pulse. The absolute position
must have its zero position in the quadrants in which both tracks are negative. In the case of a fault, the position can
be incorrect by one encoder pulse.
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 3:
- for a standard encoder with cable, if required, contact the manufacturer.
- correct the assignment of the tracks to the position value that is serially transferred. To do this, the two tracks must
be connected, inverted, at the Sensor Module (interchange A with A* and B with B*) or, for a programmable encoder,
check the zero offset of the position.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31422 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Pulses per revolution square-wave encoder outside tolerance bandwidth
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
This alarm is triggered with active square-wave encoder PPR correction and re-parameterized fault 31131 if the
accumulator contains larger values than p4683 or p4684.
The zero mark distance for zero mark monitoring is set in p0425 (rotary encoder).
accumulated differential pulses in encoder pulses.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1305
Faults and alarms

A31429 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31431 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
- Clean coding disk or remove strong magnetic fields.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31432 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Rotor position adaptation corrects deviation
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
For track A/B, pulses have been lost or too many have been counted. These pulses are presently being corrected.
Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal): Last measured deviation of the zero mark distance in increments (4 increments = 1 encoder pulse). The sign designates the direction of motion when detecting the zero mark distance.
3-1306

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check encoder limit frequency.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31442 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Battery voltage pre-alarm
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
- replace battery.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31443 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Unipolar CD signal level outside specification
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The unipolar level (CP/CN or DP/DN) for encoder 1 is outside the permissible tolerance.
Bit 0 = 1: Either CP or CN outside the tolerance.
Bit 16 = 1: Either DP or DN outside the tolerance.
Note:
Remedy:
- are the C/D tracks connected correctly (have the signal lines CP and CN or DP and DN been interchanged)?
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31460 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

3-1307
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Re alarm value = 2:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31461 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Re alarm value = 2:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31462 (N)
Encoder 1: Analog sensor, no channel active
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Channel A and B are not activated for the analog sensor.
Remedy:
- activate channel A and/or channel B (p4670).

- check the encoder configuration (p0404.17).
See also: p4670 (Analog sensor configuration)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31470 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Soiling detected
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the case of the alternative encoder system interface on the Sensor Module Cabinet 30 (SMC30), encoder soiling
is signaled via a 0 signal at terminal X521.7.
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1308

Faults and alarms

F31500 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Position tracking traversing range exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For a configured linear axis without modulo correction, the drive/encoder has exceeded the maximum possible traversing range. The value should be read in p0412 and interpreted as the number of motor revolutions.
For p0411.0 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is defined to be 64x (+/- 32x) of p0421.
For p0411.3 = 1, the maximum traversing range for the configured linear axis is preset (default value) to the highest
possible value and is +/-p0412/2 (rounded off to complete revolutions). The highest possible value depends on the
pulse number (p0408) and the fine resolution (p0419).
Remedy:

- reset the position tracking as follows (p0411.2 = 1).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31501 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Position tracking encoder position outside tolerance window
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
When powered down, the drive/encoder was moved through a distance greater than was parameterized in the tolerance window. It is possible that there is no longer any reference between the mechanical system and encoder.
Deviation (difference) to the last encoder position in increments of the absolute value.
The sign designates the traversing direction.
Note:
See also: p0413 (Measuring gear, position tracking tolerance window), r0477 (Measuring gear, position difference)
Remedy:

See also: p0010
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31502 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Encoder with measuring gear, without valid signals
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The encoder with measuring gear no longer provides any valid signals.
Remedy:
It must be ensured that all of the encoders, with mounted measuring gear, provide valid actual values in operation.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1309
Faults and alarms

F31503 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Position tracking cannot be reset
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The position tracking for the measuring gear cannot be reset.
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31700
Encoder 1: Effectivity test does not supply the expected value
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Bit x = 1: Effectivity test x unsuccessful.
Remedy:
N31800 (F)
Encoder 1: Group signal
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The motor encoder has detected at least one fault.

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F31801 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved.
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1310

Faults and alarms

F31802 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Time slice overflow
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Time slice overflow, encoder 1.

9: Time slice overflow of the fast (current controller clock cycle) time slice.
10: Time slice overflow of the average time slice.
12: Time slice overflow of the slow time slice.
999: Timeout when waiting for SYNO, e.g. unexpected return to non-cyclic operation.
Remedy:
Reduce the current controller frequency.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31804 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Checksum error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Sensor Module.
yyyyxxxx hex
yyyy: Memory area involved.
xxxx: Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy:
- check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the component is maintained.
- replace the Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31805 (N, A)
Encoder 1: EPROM checksum error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
Replace the module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1311
Faults and alarms

F31806 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
The encoder was not successfully initialized.

Bit 0,1: Encoder initialization with the motor rotating has failed (deviation involving coarse and fine position in encoder
pulse/4)
Bit 2: Mid-voltage matching for track A unsuccessful.
Bit 3: Mid-voltage matching for track B unsuccessful.
Bit 4: Mid-voltage matching for acceleration input (under development) unsuccessful.
Bit 5: Mid-voltage matching for track safety A unsuccessful.
Bit 6: Mid-voltage matching for track safety B unsuccessful.
Bit 7: Mid-voltage matching for track C unsuccessful.
Bit 8: Mid-voltage matching for track D unsuccessful.
Bit 9: Mid-voltage matching for track R unsuccessful.
Bit 10: The difference in mid-voltages between A and B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 11: The difference in mid-voltages between C and D is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 12: The difference in mid-voltages between safety A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 13: The difference in mid-voltages between A and safety B is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 14: The difference in mid-voltages between B and safety A is too great (> 0.5 V)
Bit 15: The standard deviation of the calculated mid-voltages is too great (> 0.3 V)
Bit 16: Internal fault - fault reading a register (CAFE)
Bit 17: Internal fault - fault writing a register (CAFE)
Bit 18: Internal fault: No mid-voltage matching available
Bit 19: Internal error - ADC access error.
Bit 20: Internal error - no zero crossover found.
Bit 0,1 : Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Bits 2..20 : 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A1 and higher
Remedy:

If the fault cannot be acknowledged:
Bits 2 - 9: Check encoder power supply,
Bits 2 -14: Check the corresponding cable,
Bit 15 with no other bits: Check track R, check settings in p404.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31811 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Encoder serial number changed
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The serial number of the motor encoder of a synchronous motor has changed. The change was only checked for
encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat encoders) and build-in motors (e.g. p0300 = 401) or third-party motors
(p0300 = 2).
Cause 1:
The encoder was replaced.
Cause 2:
A third-party, build-in or linear motor was re-commissioned.
Cause 3:
The motor with integrated and adjusted encoder was replaced.
Cause 4:
The firmware was updated to a version that checks the encoder serial number.
3-1312

Faults and alarms

Note:
With closed-loop position control, the serial number is accepted when starting the adjustment (p2507 = 2).
When the encoder is adjusted (p2507 = 3), the serial number is checked for changes and if required, the adjustment
is reset (p2507 = 1).
Proceed as follows to hide serial number monitoring:
- set the following serial numbers for the corresponding Encoder Data Set: p0441= FF, p0442 = 0, p0442 = 0, p0444
= 0, p0445 = 0.
- parameterize F07414 as message type N (p2100, p2101).
Remedy:
Re causes 1, 2:
Carry out an automatic adjustment using the pole position identification routine. Acknowledge the fault. Initiate the
pole position identification routine with p1990 = 1. Then check that the pole position identification routine is correctly
executed.
SERVO:
If a pole position identification technique is selected in p1980, and if p0301 does not contain a motor type with an
encoder adjusted in the factory, then p1990 is automatically activated.
or
Set the adjustment via p0431. In this case, the new serial number is automatically accepted.
or
Mechanically adjust the encoder. Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1.
Re causes 3, 4:
Accept the new serial number with p0440 = 1.
Reaction upon F:
NONE (ENCODER, OFF2)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F31812 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Requested cycle or RX-/TX timing not supported
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A cycle requested from the Control Unit or RX/TX timing is not supported.
0: Application cycle is not supported.
1: DQ cycle is not supported.
2: Distance between RX and TX instants in time too low.
3: TX instant in time too early.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31813
Encoder 1: Hardware logic unit failed
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Bit 0: ALU watchdog has responded.
Bit 1: ALU has detected a sign-of-life error.
Remedy:
Replace encoder

3-1313
Faults and alarms

F31820 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
xx = 03 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 07 hex:
xx = 08 hex:
xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31835 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. The nodes do not
send and receive in synchronism.
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:
xx = 40 hex:
3-1314

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31836 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Control Unit to the encoder involved. Data were not able
to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31837 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1315
Faults and alarms

F31845 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31850 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Encoder evaluation, internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An internal software error has occurred in the Sensor Module of encoder 1.

1: Background time slice is blocked.
2: Checksum over the code memory is not OK.
10000: OEM memory of the EnDat encoder contains data that cannot be interpreted.
11000 ... 11499: Descriptive data from EEPROM incorrect.
11500 ... 11899: Calibration data from EEPROM incorrect.
11900 ... 11999: Configuration data from EEPROM incorrect.
16000: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization application error.
16001: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder initialization ALU error.
16002: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder HISI / SISI initialization error.
16003: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder safety initialization error.
16004: DRIVE-CLiQ encoder internal system error.
Remedy:

- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Sensor Module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31851 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Sensor Module (encoder 1) involved to the Control Unit.
3-1316

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31860 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1317
Faults and alarms

F31885 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31886 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:

- check whether the firmware version of the encoder (r0148) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1318

Faults and alarms

F31887 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component involved (Sensor Module for encoder 1). Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
xx = 61 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31895 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31896 (N, A)
Encoder 1 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Sensor Module for encoder 1), specified by the fault value, have
changed in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a
DRIVE-CLiQ cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Component number.

3-1319
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

used.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31899 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Unknown fault
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A fault occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 1 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Fault number.
Note:
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the Sensor Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31902 (F, N)
Encoder 1: SPI-BUS error occurred
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error when operating the internal SPI bus.

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31903 (F, N)
Encoder 1: I2C-BUS error occurred
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error when operating the internal I2C bus.

3-1320

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F31905 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Parameterization error
Message value:
Parameter: %1, supplementary information: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A parameter of encoder 1 was detected as being incorrect.

It is possible that the parameterized encoder type does not match the connected encoder.
The parameter involved can be determined as follows:
- determine the parameter number using the fault value (r0949).
- determine the parameter index (p0187).
yyyyxxxx dec: yyyy = supplementary information, xxxx = parameter
Supplementary information = 0:
No information available.
The component does not support HTL level (p0405.1 = 0) combined with track monitoring A/B <> -A/B (p0405.2 = 1).
A code number for an identified encoder has been entered into p0400, however, no identification was carried out.
Please start a new encoder identification.
Please select a listed encoder in p0400 with a code number < 10000.
This component does not support SSI encoders (p0404.9 = 1) without track A/B.
For SQW encoder, value in p4686 greater than in p0425.
DRIVE-CLiQ encoder cannot be used with this firmware version.
For the SQW encoder, the Xact1 correction (p0437.2) is only permitted with equidistant zero marks.
Remedy:
- check whether the connected encoder type matches the encoder that has been parameterized.
- correct the parameter specified by the fault value (r0949) and p0187.
- re parameter number 314: Check the pole pair number and measuring gear ratio. The quotient of the "pole pair
number" divided by the "measuring gear ratio" must be less than or equal to 1000 ((r0313 * p0433) / p0432 <= 1000).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A31915 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Configuration error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The configuration for encoder 1 is incorrect.

1: Re-parameterization between fault/alarm is not permissible.
419: When the fine resolution Gx_ACT2 is configured, the encoder identifies a maximum possible absolute position
actual value (r0483) that can no longer be represented within 32 bits.

3-1321
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
1: No re-parameterization between fault/alarm.

419: Reduce the fine resolution (p0419).
Reaction upon F:
NONE (ENCODER, IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F31916 (N, A)
Encoder 1: Parameterization fault
Message value:
Drive object:
ENCODER
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

In the case of the ENCODER drive object, the selected encoder type (rotary/linear) might not match the function
module setting (r0108.12).
Parameter number.
Remedy:
- if a linear encoder has been selected in parameter p0400/p0404, the "linear encoder" function module has to be
activated (r0108.12 = 1)
- if a rotary encoder has been selected in parameter p0400/p0404, the "linear encoder" function module should not
be activated (r0108.12 = 0)
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F31916 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Parameter number.
Note:
This fault is only output for encoders where r0404.10 = 1 or r0404.11 = 1. It corresponds to A31905 with encoders
where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1322

Faults and alarms

A31920 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Temperature sensor fault
Message value:
Fault cause: %1, channel number: %2
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Low word low byte: Cause:
1: Wire breakage or sensor not connected (KTY: R > 1630 Ohm).
2: Measured resistance too low (PTC: R < 20 Ohm, KTY: R < 50 Ohm).
Additional values:
Low word high byte: Channel number.
Remedy:
- check that the encoder cable is the correct type and is correctly connected.
- check the temperature sensor selection in p0600 to p0603.
- replace the Sensor Module (hardware defect or incorrect calibration data).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A31999 (F, N)
Encoder 1: Unknown alarm
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A alarm has occurred on the Sensor Module for encoder 1 that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Alarm number.
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1323
Faults and alarms

F32100 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
system.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32101 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

pulse).
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1324

Faults and alarms

F32103 (N, A)
Message value:
R track: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xxxx hex:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32110 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

3-1325
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

- Check data line.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32111 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
3-1326

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

motor.
motor.
motor.
motor.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32115 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1327
Faults and alarms

F32116 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32117 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Note:
applies:
Remedy:
Note:
or X23 (CUA32, CU310):
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1328

Faults and alarms

F32118 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
See also: p0492
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32120 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

Note:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32121 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

3-1329
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32122
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
ENCODER
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
F32123 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1330

Faults and alarms

F32125 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32126 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1331
Faults and alarms

F32129 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32130 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
mechanical.
yyyyxxxx hex
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1332

Faults and alarms

F32131 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Absolute encoder:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32135
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
in the fault value.
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)

3-1333
Faults and alarms


Remedy:
F32136
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
in the fault value.
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Remedy:
F32137
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
3-1334

Faults and alarms

F32138
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
F32150 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32151 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32160 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

3-1335
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32161 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A32400 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
system.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1336

Faults and alarms

A32401 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

pulse).
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F32405 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A32407 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3 : Absolute track
4 : Code connection
Remedy:

Note:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1337
Faults and alarms

A32410 (F, N)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32411 (F, N)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32412 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3-1338

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32414 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
N32415 (F, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
Note:
Sensor Module.

3-1339
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A32418 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
See also: p0492
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32419 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

3-1340

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32421 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32422 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1341
Faults and alarms

A32429 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32431 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32432 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3-1342

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32442 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
- replace battery.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32443 (F, N)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32460 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

3-1343
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Re alarm value = 2:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32461 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Re alarm value = 2:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32462 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32470 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1344

Faults and alarms

F32500 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32501 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:

See also: p0010
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32502 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1345
Faults and alarms

F32503 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A32700
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
N32800 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F32801 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1346

Faults and alarms

F32802 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32804 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32805 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
Replace the module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1347
Faults and alarms

F32806 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

pulse/4)
Bit 0,1 : Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32811 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The encoder serial number has changed. The change is only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat
encoders).
Cause:
Note:
is reset (p2507 = 1).
= 0, p0445 = 0.
3-1348

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32812 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32813
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
F32820 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
xx = 03 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 07 hex:
xx = 08 hex:

3-1349
Faults and alarms

xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32835 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:
xx = 40 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32836 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1350

Faults and alarms

F32837 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32845 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1351
Faults and alarms

F32850 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32851 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1352

Faults and alarms

F32860 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1353
Faults and alarms

F32885 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32886 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32887 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
3-1354

Faults and alarms

xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
xx = 61 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32895 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F32896 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Component number.
Remedy:

used.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1355
Faults and alarms

F32899 (N, A)
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Fault number.
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A32902 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F32905 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

3-1356

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A32915 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F32916 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Parameter number.
Note:
where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1357
Faults and alarms

A32920 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Additional values:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A32999 (F, N)
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Alarm number.
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F33100 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
system.
3-1358

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33101 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

pulse).
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33103 (N, A)
Message value:
R track: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xxxx hex:
Note:
Remedy:

3-1359
Faults and alarms

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33110 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:

- Check data line.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1360

Faults and alarms

F33111 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:

motor.
motor.
motor.
motor.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33112 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:

In the case of an EnDat encoder, F31111 may provide further details.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1361
Faults and alarms

F33115 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33116 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1362

Faults and alarms

F33117 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Note:
applies:
Remedy:
Note:
or X23 (CUA32, CU310):
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33118 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
See also: p0492
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1363
Faults and alarms

F33120 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

Note:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33121 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33122
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
ENCODER
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
3-1364

Faults and alarms

F33123 (N, A)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33125 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1365
Faults and alarms

F33126 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33129 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1366

Faults and alarms

F33130 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
mechanical.
yyyyxxxx hex
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33131 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Absolute encoder:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1367
Faults and alarms

F33135
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
in the fault value.
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
Remedy:
F33136
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
in the fault value.
Bit 16: Lighting (--> F3x135, x = 1, 2, 3)
3-1368

Faults and alarms


Remedy:
F33137
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
F33138
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
F33150 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33151 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

3-1369
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33160 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33161 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
Re fault value = 2:
Re fault value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1370

Faults and alarms

A33400 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
system.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33401 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

pulse).
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F33405 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1371
Faults and alarms

A33407 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3 : Absolute track
4 : Code connection
Remedy:

Note:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33410 (F, N)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33411 (F, N)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3-1372

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Replace encoder.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33412 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33414 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1373
Faults and alarms

N33415 (F, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex:
yyyy = Angle
Note:
Sensor Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A33418 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
See also: p0492
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1374

Faults and alarms

A33419 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33421 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1375
Faults and alarms

A33422 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33429 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1376

Faults and alarms

A33431 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33432 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33442 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
- replace battery.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1377
Faults and alarms

A33443 (F, N)
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33460 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Re alarm value = 2:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33461 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
3-1378

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Re alarm value = 1:
Re alarm value = 2:
Re alarm value = 3:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33462 (N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33470 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F33500 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1379
Faults and alarms

F33501 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Note:
Remedy:

See also: p0010
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33502 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33503 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1380

Faults and alarms

A33700
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
N33800 (F)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F33801 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33802 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1381
Faults and alarms

F33804 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
yyyyxxxx hex
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33805 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
Replace the module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33806 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:

pulse/4)
3-1382

Faults and alarms


Bit 0,1 : Up to 6SL3055-0AA00-5*A0
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33811 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The encoder serial number has changed. The change is only checked for encoders with serial number (e.g. EnDat
encoders).
Cause:
Note:
is reset (p2507 = 1).
= 0, p0445 = 0.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33812 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE

3-1383
Faults and alarms

F33813
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
PULSE INHIBIT
Cause:
Remedy:
Replace encoder
F33820 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
xx = 03 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 07 hex:
xx = 08 hex:
xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1384

Faults and alarms

F33835 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:
xx = 40 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33836 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33837 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:

3-1385
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33845 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33850 (N, A)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1386

Faults and alarms

F33851 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33860 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:

3-1387
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33885 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33886 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
3-1388

Faults and alarms

F33887 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
xx = 61 hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33895 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33896 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Component number.

3-1389
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

used.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F33899 (N, A)
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Fault number.
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A33902 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A33903 (F, N)
Encoder 3: I2C-BUS error occurred
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error when operating the internal I2C bus.

3-1390

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F33905 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A33915 (F, N)
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:


3-1391
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE (IASC/DCBRAKE)
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F33916 (N, A)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Parameter number.
Note:
where r0404.10 = 0 and r0404.11 = 0.
Remedy:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A33920 (F, N)
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Additional values:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1392

Faults and alarms

A33999 (F, N)
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Alarm number.
Note:
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F34207 (N, A)
VSM: Temperature fault threshold exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The temperature (r3666) measured using the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has exceeded the threshold value
(p3668).
Note:
This fault can only be initiated if the temperature evaluation was activated (p3665 = 2 for a KTY sensor or p3665 =
1 for a PTC sensor).
yyxxxx dec:
yy: Component number of the component which detected the fault.
Remedy:
- check the fan.

- reduce the power.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A34211 (F, N)
VSM: Temperature alarm threshold exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature (r3666) measured using the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has exceeded the threshold value
(p3667).
The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component number of the VSM which detected the
fault.
Remedy:
- check the fan.

- reduce the power.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1393
Faults and alarms

N34800 (F)
VSM: Group signal
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has detected at least one fault.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
F34801
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:

- replace the Terminal Module.
F34802
VSM: Time slice overflow
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Time slice overflow on the Voltage Sensing Module.
Remedy:
Replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
F34803
VSM: Memory test
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An error has occurred during the memory test on the Voltage Sensing Module.
Remedy:
- check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the Voltage Sensing Module is being maintained.
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
F34804
VSM: CRC
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Remedy:
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
3-1394

Faults and alarms

F34805
VSM: EPROM checksum error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:

Remedy:
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
F34806
VSM: Initialization
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM), a fault has occurred while initializing.
Remedy:
A34807 (F, N)
VSM: Sequence control time monitoring
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error, timeout in the sequence control on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F34820
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module.
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
xx = 03 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 07 hex:
xx = 08 hex:

3-1395
Faults and alarms

xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

F34835
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module. The nodes
do not send and receive in synchronism.
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:
xx = 40 hex:
Remedy:

F34836
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module. Data were
not able to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
F34837
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
3-1396

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

F34845
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

F34850
VSM: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An internal software error in the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) has occurred.
Remedy:
- replace the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).

- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Voltage Sensing Module.
F34851
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) to the Control Unit.
Remedy:
F34860
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:

3-1397
Faults and alarms

xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

F34885
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Remedy:

3-1398

Faults and alarms

F34886
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
F34887
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
xx = 61 hex:
Remedy:

F34895
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:


3-1399
Faults and alarms

F34896
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module), specified by the fault value, have changed
in an incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ
cable or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Component number.
Remedy:

used.
F34897
VSM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): no communication with component
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Communication with the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Voltage Sensing Module) specified by the fault value is not possible.
Component ID.
Remedy:

F34899 (N, A)
VSM: Unknown fault
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A fault occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Fault number.
Note:
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the Voltage Sensing Module by an older firmware version (r0158).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A34903 (F, N)
VSM: I2C bus error occurred
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error has occurred when accessing the module-internal I2C bus.
3-1400

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
Replace the Terminal Module.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A34904 (F, N)
VSM: EEPROM
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error has occurred accessing the non-volatile memory on the Terminal Module.
Remedy:
Replace Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A34905 (F, N)
VSM: Parameter access
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Control Unit attempted to write an illegal parameter value to the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM).
Remedy:
- check whether the firmware version of the VSM (r0158) matches the firmware version of Control Unit (r0018).
- if required, replace the Voltage Sensing Module.
Note:
The firmware versions that match each other are in the readme.txt file on the memory card.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A34920 (F, N)
VSM: Temperature sensor fault
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1401
Faults and alarms

A34999 (F, N)
VSM: Unknown alarm
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A fault occurred on the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) an alarm has occurred that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Alarm number.
Note:
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the Voltage Sensing Module by an older firmware version (r0148).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F35000
TM54F: Sampling time invalid
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The set sampling time is invalid.

- not a multiple integer of the DP clock cycle.
Fault value (r0949, floating point):
Recommended valid sampling time.
Remedy:
Adapt the sampling time (e.g. set the recommended valid sampling time).
See also: p10000 (SI sampling time)
F35001
TM54F: Parameter value invalid
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The entered value is invalid.

Parameter number with the invalid value.
Remedy:
F35002
TM54F: Commissioning not possible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The commissioning mode setting was rejected because for at least one drive belonging to the TM54F, the pulses
had not been suppressed.
Drive object number of the first drive found without pulse suppression.
Remedy:
Cancel the pulses for the drive specified in the fault value.
3-1402

Faults and alarms

F35003
TM54F: Acknowledgement on the Control Unit is required
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault on the Terminal Module 54F (TM54) was acknowledged using the safe acknowledgement (P10006).
An additional acknowledgement is also required at the Control Unit.
Remedy:
Acknowledge the fault at the Control Unit.
F35011
TM54F: Drive object number assignment illegal
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A drive object number was assigned twice. Each drive object number can be assigned only once.
Remedy:
Correct the assignment of the drive object numbers.

See also: p10010 (SI drive object assignment)
A35012
TM54F: Test stop active
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The test stop for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is presently being executed.
F35013 is output when a error occurs during the test stop.
Remedy:
The alarm disappears automatically after successfully ending or canceling (when a fault condition occurs) the test
stop.
F35013
TM54F: Test stop error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An error was detected when carrying out the test stop on the TM54F. As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals
are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Fault value 0xaaaabbcc hex (r0949, interpret hexadecimal):
aaaa: Specifies the DOs or F-DIs (dependent on test step cc) for which the expected state was not assumed. The
number is bit-coded (bit 0 = F-DI 0 or F-DO 0; bit 3 = F-DI 3 or F-DO 3).
bb: Describes the cause of the fault
0x01 = Internal error (error state on the opposite side).
0x02 = Fault during comparison of switching signals: FDIs or DIs
0x03 = Internal error (delay time in the new state has still not expired).
0x04 = Fault during comparison of switching signals: DiagDOs

3-1403
Faults and alarms

cc: Describes the test step of the test stop in which the fault occurred
The information below is displayed in the following format:
Test stop step slave : (test actions)(test actions) | Step Master : (test actions)(test actions)
| Description
List of test stop steps:
0x00:(L1+OFF)(L2+ON) | 0x0A:(=)(=) | Synchronization / Switching step
0x0A:(L1+OFF)(L2+ON) | 0x15:(=)(=) | Wait step
0x15:(L1+OFF)(L2+OFF) | 0x20:(=) (=) | FDIs 0..4 Test for 0 V / Switching step
0x20:(L1+OFF)(L2+OFF) | 0x2B(=) (=) | Wait step
0x2B:(L1+ON)(L2+ON) | 0x36:(=) (=) | FDIs 5..9 Test for 0 V / Switching step
0x36:(DO OFF)() | 0x41:(DO OFF)() | Wait step / Switching step
0x41:(DO OFF)() | 0x4C:(DO OFF)() | Wait step
0x4C:(DO ON)() | 0x57:(DO ON)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x57:(DO ON)() | 0x62:(DO ON)() | Wait step
0x62:(DO OFF)() | 0x6D:(DO ON)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x6D:(DO OFF)() | 0x78:(DO ON)() | Wait step
0x78:(DO ON)() | 0x83:(DO OFF)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x83:(DO ON)() | 0x8E:(DO OFF)() | Wait step
0x8E:(DO OFF)() | 0x99:(DO OFF)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI / Switching step
0x99:(DO OFF)() | 0xA4:(DO OFF)() | Wait step
0xA4:(DO OFF)() | 0xAF:(DO OFF)() | Test DiagDOs or DiagDI
0xAF:(DO original state)() | 0xC5:(DO original state)() | Switching step
0xC5: End of test
The following expected states are tested in the test steps when testing the FDOs:
The information below is displayed in the following format:
Test step (SL MA): Expected DiagDO mode 1 | Expected DI20..23 mode 2 | Expected DI20..23 mode 3
(0x4C 0x57): DiagDO=0V | DI=24V | DI=24V
(0x62 0x6D): DiagDO=0V | DI=0V | DI=0V
(0x78 0x83): DiagDO=0V | DI=0V | DI=24V
(0x8E 0x99): DiagDO=24V | DI=0V | DI=24V
(0xA4 0xAF): DiagDO=0V | DI=24V | DI=24V
Example:
If an error with fault causes (bb) 0x02 or 0x04 occurs in a test stop step, the test action for the fault took place in the
previous test stop step. The expected states are tested in the next step.
Master signals fault value 0001_04AF and slave signals fault value 0001_04A4.
aaaa = 1 i.e. FDO 0 affected
bb = 04h i.e. testing of DiagFDO has failed
cc = The expected states were tested in test stop step AF on the master and A4 on the slave. Expected state
DiagDO=0V is being tested in the table; in other words, the Diag DO was at 0 V instead of the expected 24 V. The
associated test action took place in the previous step (0x99 DO OFF 0xA4 DO OFF). Both DOs were switched to
OFF.
Remedy:
Check the wiring of the F-DIs and F-DOs and restart the test stop. The fault is withdrawn if the test stop is successfully completed.
Fault values 0xCCCCCCCC / 0xDDDDDDDD / 0xEEEEEEEE : These fault values are triggered together with alarm
35152. If they appear, you should check all test stop parameters. You should also check whether the firmware version of the TM54F matches the Control Unit's software version.
You also need to check P10001, P10017, P10046, and P10047.
A35014
TM54F: Test stop required
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
- after powering up the drive, a test stop has still not been carried out.
- a new test stop is required after commissioning.
- the time to carry out the forced checking procedure (test stop) has expired (p10003).
Remedy:
Initiate test stop (BI: p10007).
3-1404

Faults and alarms

A35015
TM54F: Communication with drive not established
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Cyclic communication of one or several drives with the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is not active.
Bit 0 = 1: No communication with drive 1.
...
Bit 5 = 1: No communication with drive 6.
For fault value = 0, the following applies:
The number of drive objects specified in p10010 is not equal to the number of drives that have drive-based motion
monitoring functions that have been enabled.
The drive object number for drive n is set in p10010[n-1].
When this fault is present, none of the drives that have drive-based motion monitoring functions operating with
TM54F, are enabled.
Remedy:
For all drive objects specified in p10010, check whether the drive-based motion monitoring functions with TM54F are
enabled (p9601).
A35016
TM54F: Net data communication with drive not established
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The cyclic net data communication within the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) is still not active.
This message is output after the TM54F master and TM54F slave have booted and is automatically withdrawn as
soon as communications have been established.
If a drive does not communicate with the TM54F, then none of the drives parameterized in p10010 are enabled.
Remedy:
When replacing a Motor Module, carry out the following steps:

- start the copy function for the node identifier on the TM54F (p9700 = 1D hex).
- acknowledge the hardware CRC on the TM54F (p9701 = EC hex).
- for all drive objects specified in p10010, check whether the drive-based motion monitoring functions with TM54F
are enabled (p9601).
- check whether fault F35150 is present and if required, remove the cause of the fault.
See also: r10055 (SI TM54F communication status drive-specific)
F35040
TM54F: 24 V undervoltage
Message value:
Fault cause: %1 bin
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For the 24 V power supply for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) an undervoltage condition was detected.
As fault response fail-safe input terminal signals are transferred to the motion monitoring functions.
Bit 0 = 1: Power supply undervoltage at connection X524.
Bit 1 = 1: Power supply undervoltage at connection X514.
Remedy:
- check the 24 V DC power supply for the TM54F.

- carry out safe acknowledgement (p10006).

3-1405
Faults and alarms

F35043
TM54F: 24 V overvoltage
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
For the 24 V power supply for the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) an overvoltage condition was detected.
Remedy:
- check the 24 V DC power supply for the TM54F.

F35051
TM54F: Defect in a monitoring channel
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The Terminal Module 54F (TM54F) has identified an error in the data cross check between the two control channels.
aaaabbcc hex
aaaa: A value greater than zero indicates an internal software error.
bb: Data to be cross-checked that resulted in the error.
bb = 00 hex: p10000
bb = 01 hex: p10001
bb = 02 hex: p10002
bb = 03 hex: p10006
bb = 04 hex: p10008
bb = 05 hex: p10010
bb = 06 hex: p10011
bb = 07 hex: p10020
bb = 08 hex: p10021
bb = 09 hex: p10022
bb = 0A hex: p10023
bb = 0B hex: p10024
bb = 0C hex: p10025
bb = 0D hex: p10026
bb = 0E hex: p10027
bb = 0F hex: p10028
bb = 10 hex: p10036
bb = 11 hex: p10037
bb = 12 hex: p10038
bb = 13 hex: p10039
bb = 14 hex: p10040
bb = 15 hex: p10041
bb = 16 hex: p10042
bb = 17 hex: p10043
bb = 18 hex: p10044
bb = 19 hex: p10045
bb = 1A hex: p10046
bb = 1B hex: Test stop internal p10041
bb = 1C hex: Test stop internal p10046
bb = 1D hex: - 1F hex test stop internal p10017, p10002, p10000
bb = 20 hex: - 2A hex test stop internal p10040
bb = 2B hex: Test stop initialization
bb = 2C hex: Input/output calculation initialization
bb = 2D hex: - 45 hex internal data for output calculation, P10042 - P10045
bb = 46 hex - 63 hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 1
bb = 64 hex - 81 hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 2
bb = 82 hex - 9F hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 3
bb = A0 hex - BD hex data for SGE calculation of drive group 4
3-1406

Faults and alarms

bb = BE hex debounce time of FDI inputs, P10017

bb = BF hex debounce time of DI inputs, P10017
bb = C0 hex debounce time of diag inputs, P10017
cc: Index of the data to be cross-checked that resulted in the error.
Remedy:
Carry out the following steps on the TM54F:

- activate the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 95).
- start the copy function for SI parameters (p9700 = 57 hex).
- acknowledge complete data change (p9701 = AC hex).
- exit the safety commissioning mode (p0010 = 0).
For an internal software error (aaaa greater than zero):
- upgrade the software on the TM54F.
- replace the TM54F.
F35052 (A)
TM54F: Internal hardware error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
An internal software/hardware error has been detected on the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
Remedy:
- upgrade TM54F firmware to more recent version.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F35053
TM54F: Temperature fault threshold exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The temperature measured using the temperature sensing on the TM54F has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this fault.
Remedy:
- allow the TM54F to cool down.

A35054
TM54F: Temperature alarm threshold exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature measured using the temperature sensing on the TM54F has exceeded the threshold value to initiate this alarm.
Remedy:
- allow the TM54F to cool down.


3-1407
Faults and alarms

A35075 (F)
TM54F: Error during internal communication
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An internal communications error has occurred in the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
This alarm can also occur if the TM54F exists and no safety function has yet been parameterized.
Only for internal Siemens diagnostics.
Remedy:
For internal communication errors:

If TM54F exists and no safety function has yet been parameterized:
- None necessary. The alarm disappears automatically after a safety function has been parameterized.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
A35080 (F)
TM54F: Checksum error safety parameters
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The calculated checksum entered in r10004 over the safety-relevant parameters does not match the reference
checksum saved in p10005 at the last machine acceptance.
1: Checksum error for functional SI parameters.
Remedy:

- set the reference checksum to the actual checksum.
- acknowledge that hardware was replaced
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
A35081 (F)
TM54F: Static (steady state) 1 signal at the F-DI for safety-relevant acknowledgement
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A logical 1 signal is present at the F-DI configured in p10006 for more than 10 seconds. A logical 0 signal must be
present statically (steady-state) at the F-DI. This avoids unintentional safety-relevant acknowledgement (or the
"Internal Event Acknowledge" signal) if a wire breaks or one of the two digital inputs bounces.
Remedy:
Set F-DI (see p10006) to logical 0 signal.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1408

Faults and alarms

F35150
TM54F: Communication error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A communication error between the TM54F master and Control Unit or between the TM54F slave and the Motor
Module was detected.
Remedy:

F35151
TM54F: Discrepancy error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The safety input terminals or output terminals show a different state longer than that parameterized in p10002.
yyyyxxxx hex
xxxx:
The safety-relevant input terminals F-DI indicate a discrepancy.
Bit 0: Discrepancy for F-DI 0
...
Bit 9: Discrepancy for F-DI 9
yyyy:
The safety-relevant output terminals F-DO indicate a discrepancy.
Bit 0: Discrepancy for F-DO 0
...
Bit 3: Discrepancy for F-DO 3
Note:
If several discrepancy errors occur consecutively, then this fault is only signaled for the first error that occurs.
The following possibilities exist of diagnosing all of the discrepancy errors:
- in the commissioning software, evaluate the input states and output states of the TM54F. All discrepancy errors are
displayed here.
- compare parameters p10051 and p10052 from the TM54F master and TM54F slave for discrepancy.
Remedy:
Check the wiring of the F-DI and F-DO (contact problems).

Note:
A discrepancy of the F-DO also occurs (in this special case, in conjunction with fault F35150 for the TM54F slave),
if, after replacing a Motor Module, it was forgotten to acknowledge this.
Discrepancy errors in the F-DIs can only be completely acknowledged if, after the cause of the error was resolved,
safe acknowledgement was carried out (see p10006). As long as safety acknowledgement was not carried out, the
corresponding F-DI stays in the safe state.

3-1409
Faults and alarms

Where switching operations recur cyclically on the FDIs, the discrepancy time must be parameterized as follows:
td = possible actual discrepancy time (in ms) that can occur with a switching operation. This must correspond to at
least 1 SI sampling cycle (see p10000).
tp = period for a switching operation in ms.
The following rules must be adhered to:
p10002 < (tp/2) - td (discrepancy time must be less than half the period minus the actual discrepancy time)
p10002 > = p10000 (discrepancy time must be no less than P10000)
p10002 > td (discrepancy time must be greater than the switch discrepancy time which may actually apply)
Example: If SI sampling cycle is 12 ms and switching frequency is 110 ms, the maximum discrepancy time which
can be set is as follows:
p10002 < = 110ms/2 - 12ms = 43mS; this rounds off to P10002 <= 36 ms.
(Since the sampling time can only be accepted as a whole SI sampling cycle, the value will need to be rounded up
or down to a whole SI sampling time value if it is not an exact multiple of an SI sampling cycle.)
F35152
TM54F: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
An internal software error has occurred in the Terminal Module 54F (TM54F).
The fail-safe digital inputs and digital outputs (F-DI, F-DO) on the TM54F have been set to the safe state.
Note:
Remedy:
Check that the firmware version of the TM54F matches the Control Unit's firmware version.
The automatic firmware update must be activated in the project.
Note:
This signal will also appear, for example, in conjunction with signal 35013. In this case you should check all the
parameters for the test stop on the TM54F (p10001, p10003, p10007, p10041, p10046, p10047).
A35200 (F, N)
TM: Calibration data
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error was detected in the calibration data of the Terminal Module.

The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component ID of the Terminal Module which
detected the fault.
The thousands location specifies whether the analog input 0 (=0) or analog output 1 (= 1) is involved.
The hundreds location specifies the fault type:
No calibration data available.
1: Offset too high (> 100 mV).
The tens and ones location specifies the number of the input involved.
Remedy:
Power down the unit and power up again.

If the fault is still present, replace the module/board.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1410

Faults and alarms

F35207 (N, A)
TM: Temperature fault/alarm threshold channel 1 exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
For the temperature evaluation via the Terminal Module (TM), at least one of the following conditions to initiate this
fault is fulfilled:
- alarm threshold has been exceeded longer than that set in the timer stage (p4102[0], p4103).
or
- fault threshold exceeded (p4102[1]).
Note:
For PTC, the following applies:
- if r4101 > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = 250 C
- if r4101 <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = -50 C
The measured temperature is displayed in r4105.
This fault can only be initiated if temperature evaluation was activated (p4100 = 2 for KTY sensor or p4100 = 1 for
PTC sensor or p4100 = 4 for bimetal).
Notice:
This fault only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and the
Terminal Module.
yyxxxx dec:
yy: Component number of the component which detected the fault.
xxxx: Temperature value multiplied by 10 at the point of initiation
Remedy:
- reduce ambient temperature of temperature sensor to below p4102[1] hysteresis.

- if required, set the fault response to NONE (p2100, p2101).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A35211 (F, N)
TM: Temperature alarm threshold channel 1 exceeded
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature measured using the temperature sensing of the Terminal Module (TM) (r4105) has exceeded the
threshold value to initiate this alarm (p4102[0]).
The hundred-thousands and ten-thousands position specifies the component number of the component which
detected the fault.
For PTC, the following applies:
- if r4101 > 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = 250 C
- if r4101 <= 1650 ohms, the temperature r4105 = -50 C
yyxxxx dec:
yy: Component number of the component where the fault occurred.
xxxx: Temperature value multiplied by 10 at the point of initiation
Remedy:
Cool temperature sensor to below p4102[0] hysteresis.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1411
Faults and alarms

F35220 (N, A)
TM: Frequency limit reached for signal output
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The signals output from the Terminal Module 41 (TM41) for tracks A/B have reached the limit frequency. The output
signals are no longer in synchronism with the specified setpoint.
Note:
If with SIMOTION the TM41 has been configured as the technology project, this fault is also output in response to
short-circuited A/B signals in X520.
Remedy:
SIMOTION (p4400 = 0) operating mode:

- enter a lower speed setpoint (p1155).
- reduce the encoder pulse number (p0408).
- check track A/B for short-circuits.
SINAMICS (p4400 = 1) operating mode:
- the fine resolution of TM41 in p0418 does not match that of the connector input that was interconnected at P4420
- the encoder position actual value r0479 interconnected at connector input p4420 has an excessively high actual
speed
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F35221 (N, A)
TM: Setpoint - actual value deviation, outside the tolerance range
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The deviation between the setpoint and the output signals (track A/B) exceeds the tolerance of +/-3 %. The deviation
between the internal and external measured value is too high.
Remedy:
- reduce the basic clock cycle (p0110, p0111).

- replace the module.
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A35222 (F, N)
TM: Encoder pulse number not permissible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The encoder pulse number entered does not match the permissible pulse number from a hardware perspective.
1: Encoder pulse number is too high.
2: Encoder pulse number is too low.
4: Encoder pulse number is less than the zero mark offset (p4426).
3-1412

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- enter the encoder pulse number in the permissible range (p0408).

- if necessary, replace TM41 SAC with TM41 DAC.
Note:
TM41 SAC: order no. = 6SL3055-0AA00-3PA0
TM41 DAC: order no. = 6SL3055-0AA00-3PA1
The following applies for TM41 SAC:
- minimum/maximum value for p0408: 1000/8192
The following applies for TM41 DAC:
- minimum/maximum value for p0408: 1000/16384
See also: p0408 (Rotary encoder pulse No.)
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35223 (F, N)
TM: Zero mark offset not permissible
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The entered zero mark offset is not permissible.

1: Zero mark offset is too high.
Remedy:
Enter the zero mark offset in the permissible range (p4426).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F35230
HW problem with the TM module
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The terminal module used has signaled an internal error. Signals of this module may not be evaluated and are potentially incorrect.
Remedy:
The module must be replaced if no other alarms that refer to a communications error are present in the system.
F35233
DRIVE-CLiQ component does not support function
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A function requested by the Control Unit is not supported by a DRIVE-CLiQ component.

1: Terminal Module 31 does not support the function "Timer for temperature evaluation" (X522.7/8, p4103 > 0.000).
Remedy:
Re fault value = 1:
- Deactivate timer for temperature evaluation (X522.7/8) (p4103 = 0.000).
- Use Terminal Module 31 and the relevant firmware version to enable the "Timer for temperature evaluation" function (Order No. 6SL3055-0AA00-3AA1, firmware version 2.6 and higher).
See also: p4103 (TM31 temperature evaluation timer)

3-1413
Faults and alarms

N35800 (F)
TM: Group signal
Message value:
Drive object:
TM31, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Terminal Module has detected at least one fault.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A35801 (F, N)
TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved.
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35802 (F, N)
TM: Time slice overflow
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Time slice overflow on Terminal Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35803 (F, N)
TM: Memory test
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error has occurred during the memory test on the Terminal Module.
Remedy:
- check whether the permissible ambient temperature for the Terminal Module is being maintained.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1414

Faults and alarms

A35804 (F, N)
TM: CRC
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A checksum error has occurred when reading-out the program memory on the Terminal Module.
Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35805 (F, N)
TM: EPROM checksum error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:
- replace the Terminal Module 31 (TM31).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35807 (F, N)
TM: Sequence control time monitoring
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Error, timeout, sequence control on the Terminal Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1415
Faults and alarms

F35820
TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved.
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
xx = 03 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 07 hex:
xx = 08 hex:
xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

F35835
TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved. The nodes do
not send and receive in synchronism.
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:
xx = 40 hex:
Remedy:

3-1416

Faults and alarms

F35836
TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module to the encoder involved. Data were not
able to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
F35837
PTM DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
Remedy:

F35845
TM DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the encoder involved.
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

F35850
TM: Internal software error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
An internal software error in the Terminal Module (TM) has occurred.


3-1417
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- replace the Terminal Module (TM).

- if required, upgrade the firmware in the Terminal Module.
F35851
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communication error has occurred from the Terminal Module (TM) to the Control Unit involved.
Remedy:
F35860
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
xx = 02 hex = 02 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
xx = 03 hex = 03 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
xx = 04 hex = 04 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
xx = 05 hex = 05 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
early.
xx = 06 hex = 06 dec:
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
xx = 09 hex = 09 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

3-1418

Faults and alarms

F35885
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Remedy:

F35886
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
F35887
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be excluded.
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
xx = 61 hex:

3-1419
Faults and alarms

Remedy:

F35895
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
OFF1 (OFF2)
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

F35896
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module), specified by the fault value, have changed in an
incompatible fashion with respect to the properties when booted. One cause can be, e.g. that a DRIVE-CLiQ cable
or DRIVE-CLiQ component has been replaced.
Component number.
Remedy:

used.
F35897
TM DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): no communication with component
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
Communications with the DRIVE-CLiQ component (Terminal Module) specified by the fault value is not possible.
Component ID.
Remedy:

F35899 (N, A)
TM: Unknown fault
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A fault has occurred on the Terminal Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Fault number.
Note:
3-1420

Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the Terminal Module by an older firmware version (r0158).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A35903 (F, N)
TM: I2C bus error occurred
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error has occurred while accessing the internal I2C bus of the Terminal Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35904 (F, N)
TM: EEPROM
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An error has occurred accessing the non-volatile memory on the Terminal Module.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35905 (F, N)
TM: Parameter access
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Control Unit attempted to write an illegal parameter value to the Terminal Module.
Remedy:
- check whether the firmware version of the Terminal Module (r0158) matches the firmware version of Control Unit
(r0018).
- if required, replace the Terminal Module.
Note:
The firmware versions that match each other are in the readme.txt file on the memory card.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1421
Faults and alarms

A35906 (F, N)
TM: 24 V power supply missing
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The 24 V power supply for the digital outputs is missing.

01: TM17 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 7 missing.
04: TM15 24 V power supply for DI/DO 0 ... 7 (X520) missing.
Remedy:
Check the terminals for the power supply voltage (L1+, L2+, L3+, M).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35907 (F, N)
TM: Hardware initialization error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The Terminal Module was not successfully initialized.

01: TM17 or TM41 - incorrect configuration request.
02: TM17 or TM41 - programming not successful.
04: TM17 or TM41 - invalid time stamp
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35910 (F, N)
TM: Module overtemperature
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature in the module has exceeded the highest permissible limit.
Remedy:
- reduce the ambient temperature.

Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
3-1422

Faults and alarms

A35911 (F, N)
TM: Clock synchronous operation sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The maximum permissible number of errors in the master sign-of-life (clock synchronous operation) has been
exceeded in cyclic operation.
When the alarm is output, the module outputs are reset up to the next synchronization.
Remedy:
- check the physical bus configuration (terminating resistor, shielding, etc.).

- check the interconnection of the master sign-of-life (r4201 via p0915).
- check whether the master correctly sends the sign-of-life (e.g. set up a trace with r4201.12 ... r4201.15 and trigger
signal r4301.9).
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35920 (F, N)
TM: Error temperature sensor channel 1
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A35999 (F, N)
TM: Unknown alarm
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An alarm has occurred on the Terminal Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Alarm number.
Note:
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the Terminal Module by an older firmware version (r0158).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1423
Faults and alarms

F36207 (N, A)
Hub: Overtemperature component
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
HUB, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold.
Actual temperature in 0.1 C resolution.
Remedy:
- Check ambient temperature at component installation location.

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A36211 (F, N)
Hub: Overtemperature alarm component
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The temperature on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the alarm threshold.
Actual temperature in 0.1 C resolution.
Remedy:
- Check ambient temperature at component installation location.

Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F36214 (N, A)
Hub: overvoltage fault 24 V supply
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has exceeded the fault threshold.
Actual operating voltage in 0.1 C resolution
Remedy:
- check the supply voltage of the component involved.

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F36216 (N, A)
Hub: undervoltage fault 24 V supply
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE (OFF1, OFF2)
Acknowledge:
Cause:
The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the fault threshold.
3-1424

Faults and alarms

Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A36217 (N)
Hub: undervoltage alarm 24 V supply
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The 24 V power supply on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has undershot the alarm threshold.
Remedy:

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
N36800 (F)
Hub: Group signal
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module has detected at least one fault.
Remedy:
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A36801 (F, N)
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module involved.
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F36802 (N, A)
Hub: Time slice overflow
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A time slice overflow has occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.

xx: Time slice number xx

3-1425
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- reduce the current controller frequency.

Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A36804 (F, N)
Hub: Checksum error
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
A checksum error has occurred when reading out the program memory on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Difference between the checksum at POWER ON and the actual checksum.
Remedy:
- replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
A36805 (F, N)
Hub: EEPROM checksum incorrect
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The internal parameter data on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module is incorrect.

Remedy:
- replace the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
F36820
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 01 hex = 1 dec:
3-1426

Faults and alarms

xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

F36835
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:
xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
Remedy:

F36836
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex = 65 dec:
Remedy:

3-1427
Faults and alarms

F36837
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex = 32 dec:
xx = 23 hex = 35 dec:
xx = 42 hex = 66 dec:
xx = 43 hex = 67 dec:
Remedy:

F36845
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex = 11 dec:
Remedy:

F36851
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
HUB, TM31, VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
DRIVE-CLiQ communication error from DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module in question to Control Unit.
Remedy:
3-1428

Faults and alarms

F36860
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex = 17 dec:
Checksum error (CRC error) and the receive telegram is too early.
xx = 01 hex = 01 dec:
xx = 12 hex = 18 dec:
xx = 13 hex = 19 dec:
xx = 14 hex = 20 dec:
xx = 15 hex = 21 dec:
xx = 16 hex = 22 dec:
early.
xx = 19 hex = 25 dec:
xx = 10 hex = 16 dec:
Remedy:

F36885
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 21 hex = 33 dec:
xx = 22 hex = 34 dec:

3-1429
Faults and alarms

xx = 40 hex = 64 dec:
xx = 62 hex = 98 dec:
Remedy:

F36886
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex = 65 dec:
Remedy:
F36887
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Fault detected on the DRIVE-CLiQ component (DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module) involved. Faulty hardware cannot be
excluded.
xx = 20 hex = 32 dec:
xx = 23 hex = 35 dec:
xx = 42 hex = 66 dec:
xx = 43 hex = 67 dec:
xx = 60 hex = 96 dec:
xx = 61 hex = 97 dec:
Remedy:

F36895
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Alternating cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex = 11 dec:
Remedy:

3-1430

Faults and alarms

F36896
Hub DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Inconsistent component properties
Message value:
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The properties of the DRIVE-CLiQ component (DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module), specified by the fault value, have
Component number.
Remedy:

used.
F36899 (N, A)
Hub: Unknown fault
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
Acknowledge:
Cause:
A fault occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Fault number.
Note:
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware (r0158).
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
A36999 (F, N)
Hub: Unknown alarm
Message value:
New message: %1
Drive object:
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An alarm occurred on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module that cannot be interpreted by the Control Unit firmware.
Alarm number.
Note:
Remedy:
- replace the firmware on the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module with older firmware (r0158).
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
Reaction upon N:
NONE
Acknowl. upon N:
NONE

3-1431
Faults and alarms

F40000
Fault at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A fault has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100.
First fault that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy:
Evaluate the fault buffer of the specified object.
F40001
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
F40002
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
F40003
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
F40004
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
3-1432

Faults and alarms

F40005
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
Remedy:
A40100
Alarm at DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
An alarm has occurred at the drive object at the DRIVE-CLiQ socket X100.
First alarm that has occurred for this drive object.
Remedy:
Evaluate the alarm buffer of the specified object.
A40101
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
A40102
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
A40103
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:

3-1433
Faults and alarms

A40104
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
A40105
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Remedy:
F40799
CX32: Configured transfer end time exceeded
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The configured transfer end time when transferring the cyclic actual values was exceeded.
Remedy:

F40801
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved.
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:

F40820
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 02 hex:
3-1434

Faults and alarms

xx = 03 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 07 hex:
xx = 08 hex:
xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

F40835
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. The
nodes do not send and receive in synchronism.
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:
xx = 40 hex:
Remedy:

F40836
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Send error for DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the Control Unit to the controller extension involved. Data
were not able to be sent.
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:

3-1435
Faults and alarms

F40837
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
Remedy:

F40845
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ: Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

F40851
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Sign-of-life missing
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
A DRIVE-CLiQ communications error has occurred from the controller extension involved to the Control Unit.
xx = 0A hex:
Remedy:
3-1436

Faults and alarms

F40860
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Telegram error
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 11 hex:
xx = 01 hex:
CRC error.
xx = 12 hex:
xx = 02 hex:
xx = 13 hex:
xx = 03 hex:
xx = 14 hex:
xx = 04 hex:
xx = 15 hex:
xx = 05 hex:
xx = 16 hex:
early.
xx = 06 hex:
xx = 19 hex:
xx = 09 hex:
xx = 10 hex:
Remedy:

F40885
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 1A hex:
xx = 21 hex:
xx = 22 hex:

3-1437
Faults and alarms

xx = 40 hex:
xx = 62 hex:
Remedy:

F40886
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Error when sending DRIVE-CLiQ data
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 41 hex:
Remedy:
F40887
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Component fault
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 20 hex:
xx = 23 hex:
xx = 42 hex:
xx = 43 hex:
xx = 60 hex:
xx = 61 hex:
Remedy:

F40895
CX32 DRIVE-CLiQ (CU): Cyclic data transfer error
Message value:
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
xx = 0B hex:
Remedy:

3-1438

Faults and alarms

F49150
Cooling system: Fault occurred
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The cooling system signals a general fault.
Remedy:
- check the wiring between the cooling system and the input terminal (Terminal Module).
- check the external control device for the cooling system.
See also: p0266 (Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source)
F49151
Cooling system: Conductivity has exceeded the fault threshold
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The conductivity of the cooling liquid has exceeded the selected fault threshold (p0269[2]).
See also: p0261 (Cooling system, starting time 2), p0262 (Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time), p0266
(Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source)
Remedy:
Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid.
F49152
Cooling system: ON command feedback signal missing
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The feedback signal of the ON command of the cooling system is missing.

- after the ON command, the feedback signal has not been received within the selected starting time (p0260).
- the feedback signal has failed in operation.
See also: p0260 (Cooling system, starting time 1), r0267 (Cooling system status word)
Remedy:
F49153
Cooling system: Liquid flow too low
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The drive converter cooling system signals that the cooling liquid flow is too low.
- after the ON command, the feedback signal has not been received within the selected starting time (p0260).
- in operation, the feedback signal has failed for longer than the permitted failure time (p0263).
See also: p0260 (Cooling system, starting time 1), p0263 (Cooling system fault liquid flow, delay time), r0267 (Cooling system status word)
Remedy:
F49154 (A)
Cooling system: Liquid leak is present
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The liquid leakage monitoring function has responded.

Caution:
If this fault is re-parameterized as an alarm then using other monitoring functions it must be ensured that when cooling water is lost, the drive is powered down!
See also: r0267 (Cooling system status word)

3-1439
Faults and alarms

Remedy:
- check the cooling system for leaks in the cooling circuit.

- check the wiring of the input terminal (Terminal Module) used to monitor leaking fluid.
Reaction upon A:
NONE
Acknowl. upon A:
NONE
F49155
Cooling system: Power Stack Adapter, firmware version too old
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
POWER ON
Cause:
The firmware version in the Power Stack Adapter (PSA) is too old and does not support the liquid cooling.
Remedy:
Upgrade the firmware. Check EEPROM data.
F49156
Cooling system: Cooling liquid temperature has exceeded the fault threshold
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The cooling liquid intake temperature has exceeded the permanently set fault threshold.
Remedy:
Check the cooling system and the ambient conditions.
A49170
Cooling system: Alarm has occurred
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The cooling system signals a general alarm.
Remedy:
A49171
Cooling system: Conductivity has exceeded the alarm threshold
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
Conductivity monitoring is set for the cooling liquid (r0267.7, from p0266[7]).
See also: p0261 (Cooling system, starting time 2), p0262 (Cooling system, fault conductivity delay time), p0266
(Cooling system, feedback signals, signal source), r0267 (Cooling system status word)
Remedy:
Check the device to de-ionize the cooling liquid.
A49172
Cooling system: Conductivity actual value is not valid
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
When monitoring the conductivity of the cooling liquid, there is a fault in the wiring or in the sensor.
Remedy:
- check the wiring between the cooling system and the Power Stack Adapter (PSA).
- check the function of the sensor to measure the conductivity.
3-1440

Faults and alarms

A49173
Cooling system: Cooling liquid temperature has exceeded the alarm threshold
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The cooling liquid intake temperature has exceeded the specified alarm threshold.
Remedy:
Check the cooling system and the ambient conditions.
F49200
Excitation group signal fault
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
OFF2
Acknowledge:
IMMEDIATELY
Cause:
The excitation sequence control signals a fault.

Bit 0:
When powered down or when powering down the excitation, the signal "excitation ready to power up feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time.
Bit 1:
After an ON command, the signal "excitation ready feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time.
Bit 2:
After the pulses were enabled, the signal "excitation operational feedback signal" was not received within the monitoring time.
Bit 3:
The "excitation group signal fault" signal is present.
Remedy:
- check the excitation.

- check commands, feedback signals and BICO interconnections.
A49201 (F)
Excitation group signal alarm
Message value:
Drive object:
VECTOR_G130/G150
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
The "excitation group signal alarm" signal is present.
Remedy:
Check the excitation equipment.
Reaction upon F:
NONE
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A50002 (F)
COMM BOARD: Alarm 2
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:
In the case of CBE20 SINAMICS Link:

A specific telegram word (send) is being used twice.
Telegram word used twice
See also: p8871 (SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD)
Remedy:

Correct the parameter assignment.
See also: p8871 (SINAMICS Link send telegram word PZD)
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY

3-1441
Faults and alarms

A50003 (F)
COMM BOARD: Alarm 3
Message value:
Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

A specific telegram word (receive) is being used twice.
yyyyxxxx hex: yyyy = info. 1, xxxx = info. 2
Info. 1 (interpret decimal) = Address of sender
Info. 2 (interpret decimal) = Receive telegram word
See also: p8870 (SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A50004 (F)
COMM BOARD: Alarm 4
Message value:
Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Telegram word (receive) and address of sender inconsistent. Both values have to be either equal to zero or not equal
to zero.
Info. 1 (interpret decimal) = Drive object number from p8870, p8872
Info. 2 (interpret decimal) = Index from p8870, p8872
See also: p8870 (SINAMICS Link receive telegram word PZD), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy:

Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
A50005 (F)
COMM BOARD: Alarm 5
Message value:
%1
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

Sender not found on SINAMICS Link.
Address of sender that cannot be located
See also: p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy:

Check the connection to the sender.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY
3-1442

Faults and alarms

A50006 (F)
COMM BOARD: Alarm 6
Message value:
Info. 1: %1, info. 2: %2
Drive object:
All objects
Reaction:
NONE
Acknowledge:
NONE
Cause:

The parameter assignment indicates that the sender and the receiver are one and the same. This is not permitted.
Info. 1 (interpret decimal) = Drive object number from p8872
Info. 2 (interpret decimal) = Index from p8872
See also: p8836 (SINAMICS Link address), p8872 (SINAMICS Link address receive PZD)
Remedy:

Correct the parameter assignment. All p8872[index] must be set to a value not equal to p8836.
Reaction upon F:
Acknowl. upon F:
IMMEDIATELY

3-1443
Faults and alarms

3-1444

Appendix
Contents
A.1
ASCII table (excerpt)
A-1446
A.2
List for motor code/encoder code
A-1447

A-1445
Appendix
A.1

The following table includes the decimal and hexadecimal notation of selected
ASCII characters.
Table A-1
Character
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Character
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Space
32
20
72
48
45
2D
73
49
48
30
74
4A
49
31
75
4B
50
32
76
4C
51
33
77
4D
52
34
78
4E
53
35
79
4F
54
36
80
50
55
37
81
51
56
38
82
52
57
39
83
53
65
41
84
54
66
42
85
55
67
43
86
56
68
44
87
57
69
45
88
58
70
46
89
59
71
47
90
5A
A-1446

Appendix
A.2
A.2.1
Motor code
Induction motors (Version: 4301700)

Table A-2
Motor code for induction motors
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH2092-4WG4x-xxxx
102
10201
1PH2093-6WF4x-xxxx
102
10202
1PH2095-6WF4x-xxxx
102
10203
1PH2096-4WG4x-xxxx
102
10204
1PH2113-6WF4x-xxxx
102
10205
1PH2115-6WF4x-xxxx
102
10206
1PH2117-6WF4x-xxxx
102
10207
1PH2118-6WF4x-xxxx
102
10208
1PH2123-4WF4x-xxxx
102
10209
1PH2127-4WF4x-xxxx
102
10210
1PH2128-4WF4x-xxxx
102
10211
1PH2143-4WF4x-xxxx
102
10212
1PH2147-4WF4x-xxxx
102
10213
1PH2182-6WC4x-xxxx
102
10214
1PH2184-6WP4x-xxxx
102
10215
1PH2186-6WB4x-xxxx
102
10216
1PH2188-6WB4x-xxxx
102
10217
1PH2254-6WB4x-xxxx
102
10218
1PH2256-6WB4x-xxxx
102
10219
1PH4103-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10401
1PH4103-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10421
1PH4105-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10403
1PH4105-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10422
1PH4107-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10405
1PH4107-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10423
1PH4133-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10407
1PH4133-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10424
1PH4135-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10409
1PH4135-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10425

A-1447
Appendix
Table A-2
Motor code for induction motors, continued
Order number
A-1448
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH4137-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10411
1PH4137-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10426
1PH4138-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10413
1PH4163-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10416
1PH4163-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10427
1PH4163-xxF2x(L37)
104
10431
1PH4167-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10418
1PH4167-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10428
1PH4168-4NF2x-xxxx
104
10420
1PH4168-4xF5x-xxxx
104
10429
1PH7101-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12701
1PH7101-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10701
1PH7103-xxDxx-xLxx
107
12702
1PH7103-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10702
1PH7103-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12703
1PH7103-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10703
1PH7103-xxGxx-xLxx
107
12704
1PH7103-xxGxx-xxxx
107
10704
1PH7105-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12705
1PH7105-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10705
1PH7107-xxDxx-xLxx
107
12706
1PH7107-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10706
1PH7107-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12707
1PH7107-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10707
1PH7107-xxGxx-xLxx
107
12708
1PH7107-xxGxx-xxxx
107
10708
1PH7131-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12709
1PH7131-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10709
1PH7133-xxDxx-xLxx
107
12710
1PH7133-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10710
1PH7133-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12711
1PH7133-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10711
1PH7133-xxGxx-xLxx
107
12712
1PH7133-xxGxx-xxxx
107
10712
1PH7135-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12713

Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH7135-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10713
1PH7137-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10766
1PH7137-xxDxx-xLxx
107
12714
1PH7137-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10714
1PH7137-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12715
1PH7137-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10715
1PH7137-xxGxx-xLxx
107
12716
1PH7137-xxGxx-xxxx
107
10716
1PH7163-xxBxx-xLxx
107
12717
1PH7163-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10717
1PH7163-xxDxx-xLxx
107
12718
1PH7163-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10718
1PH7163-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12719
1PH7163-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10719
1PH7163-xxGxx-xLxx
107
12720
1PH7163-xxGxx-xxxx
107
10720
1PH7167-xxBxx-xLxx
107
12721
1PH7167-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10721
1PH7167-xxDxx-xLxx
107
12722
1PH7167-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10722
1PH7167-xxFxx-xLxx
107
12723
1PH7167-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10723
1PH7167-xxGxx-xLxx
107
12724
1PH7167-xxGxx-xxxx
107
10724
1PH7184-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10725
1PH7184-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10735
1PH7184-xxExx-xxxx
107
10727
1PH7184-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10736
1PH7184-xxLxx-xxxx
107
10737
1PH7184-xxTxx-xxxx
107
10726
1PH7186-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10770
1PH7186-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10734
1PH7186-xxExx-xxxx
107
10730
1PH7186-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10768
1PH7186-xxLxx-xxxx
107
10769

A-1449
Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
A-1450
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH7186-xxTxx-xxxx
107
10729
1PH7224-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10743
1PH7224-xxCxx-xxxx
107
10731
1PH7224-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10738
1PH7224-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10732
1PH7224-xxLxx-xxxx
107
10744
1PH7224-xxUxx-xxxx
107
10745
1PH7226-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10746
1PH7226-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10747
1PH7226-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10739
1PH7226-xxLxx-xxxx
107
10748
1PH7228-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10749
1PH7228-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10750
1PH7228-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10741
1PH7228-xxLxx-xxxx
107
10751
1PH7284-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10752
1PH7284-xxCxx-xxxx
107
10753
1PH7284-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10754
1PH7284-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10755
1PH7286-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10756
1PH7286-xxCxx-xxxx
107
10757
1PH7286-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10758
1PH7286-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10759
1PH7288-xxBxx-xxxx
107
10760
1PH7288-xxCxx-xxxx
107
10761
1PH7288-xxDxx-xxxx
107
10762
1PH7288-xxFxx-xxxx
107
10763
1PH8083-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10801
1PH8083-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10864
1PH8083-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10865
1PH8083-1xG0x-xxxx
108
10866
1PH8083-1xG1x-xxxx
108
10867
1PH8083-1xG2x-xxxx
108
10868
1PH8083-1xM0x-xxxx
108
10869
1PH8083-1xM1x-xxxx
108
10870

Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH8083-1xN0x-xxxx
108
10879
1PH8083-1xN1x-xxxx
108
10880
1PH8083-1xN2x-xxxx
108
10881
1PH8087-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10871
1PH8087-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10872
1PH8087-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10873
1PH8087-1xG0x-xxxx
108
10874
1PH8087-1xG1x-xxxx
108
10875
1PH8087-1xG2x-xxxx
108
10876
1PH8087-1xM0x-xxxx
108
10877
1PH8087-1xM1x-xxxx
108
10878
1PH8087-1xN0x-xxxx
108
10882
1PH8087-1xN1x-xxxx
108
10883
1PH8087-1xN2x-xxxx
108
10884
1PH8101-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10885
1PH8101-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10886
1PH8101-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10887
1PH8101-1xG2x-xxxx
108
10888
1PH8101-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10889
1PH8101-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10890
1PH8101-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10891
1PH8101-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10892
1PH8103-1xD0x-xxxx
108
10893
1PH8103-1xD1x-xxxx
108
10894
1PH8103-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10895
1PH8103-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10896
1PH8103-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10897
1PH8103-1xG0x-xxxx
108
10898
1PH8103-1xG1x-xxxx
108
10899
1PH8103-1xG2x-xxxx
108
11800
1PH8103-1xM0x-xxxx
108
11820
1PH8103-1xM1x-xxxx
108
11821
1PH8103-1xM2x-xxxx
108
11822
1PH8105-1xF0x-xxxx
108
11801
1PH8105-1xF1x-xxxx
108
11802

A-1451
Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
A-1452
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH8105-1xF2x-xxxx
108
11803
1PH8105-1xG2x-xxxx
108
11804
1PH8105-1xM2x-xxxx
108
11823
1PH8105-1xS0x-xxxx
108
11805
1PH8105-1xS0x-xxxx
108
11806
1PH8105-1xS1x-xxxx
108
11807
1PH8105-1xS1x-xxxx
108
11808
1PH8107-1xD0x-xxxx
108
11809
1PH8107-1xD1x-xxxx
108
11810
1PH8107-1xF0x-xxxx
108
11811
1PH8107-1xF1x-xxxx
108
11812
1PH8107-1xF2x-xxxx
108
11813
1PH8107-1xG0x-xxxx
108
11814
1PH8107-1xG1x-xxxx
108
11815
1PH8107-1xM0x-xxxx
108
11824
1PH8107-1xM1x-xxxx
108
11825
1PH8107-1xM2x-xxxx
108
11826
1PH8107-1xS0x-xxxx
108
11816
1PH8107-1xS0x-xxxx
108
11817
1PH8107-1xS1x-xxxx
108
11818
1PH8107-1xS1x-xxxx
108
11819
1PH8131-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10803
1PH8131-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10804
1PH8131-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10805
1PH8131-1xG2x-xxxx
108
10806
1PH8131-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10807
1PH8131-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10808
1PH8131-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10809
1PH8131-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10810
1PH8133-1xD0x-xxxx
108
10811
1PH8133-1xD1x-xxxx
108
10812
1PH8133-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10813
1PH8133-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10814
1PH8133-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10815
1PH8133-1xG0x-xxxx
108
10816

Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH8133-1xG1x-xxxx
108
10817
1PH8133-1xG2x-xxxx
108
10818
1PH8135-1xF0x-xxxx
108
10819
1PH8135-1xF1x-xxxx
108
10820
1PH8135-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10821
1PH8135-1xG2x-xxxx
108
10822
1PH8135-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10823
1PH8135-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10824
1PH8135-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10825
1PH8135-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10826
1PH8137-1xD0x-xxxx
108
10827
1PH8137-1xD1x-xxxx
108
10828
1PH8137-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10834
1PH8137-1xS0x-xxxx
108
10835
1PH8137-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10836
1PH8137-1xS1x-xxxx
108
10837
1PH8184-1xB2x-xxxx
108
10839
1PH8184-1xC2x-xxxx
108
10840
1PH8184-1xD2x-xxxx
108
10841
1PH8184-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10842
1PH8184-1xL2x-xxxx
108
10843
1PH8186-1xB2x-xxxx
108
10844
1PH8186-1xC2x-xxxx
108
10845
1PH8186-1xD2x-xxxx
108
10846
1PH8186-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10847
1PH8186-1xL2x-xxxx
108
10848
1PH8224-1xB2x-xxxx
108
10849
1PH8224-1xC2x-xxxx
108
10850
1PH8224-1xD2x-xxxx
108
10851
1PH8224-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10852
1PH8224-1xL2x-xxxx
108
10853
1PH8226-1xB2x-xxxx
108
10854
1PH8226-1xC2x-xxxx
108
10855
1PH8226-1xD2x-xxxx
108
10856
1PH8226-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10857

A-1453
Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
A-1454
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH8226-1xL2x-xxxx
108
10858
1PH8228-1xB2x-xxxx
108
10859
1PH8228-1xC2x-xxxx
108
10860
1PH8228-1xD2x-xxxx
108
10861
1PH8228-1xF2x-xxxx
108
10862
1PH8228-1xL2x-xxxx
108
10863
1PH8284-1xB2x-xxxx
108
11827
1PH8284-1xC2x-xxxx
108
11828
1PH8284-1xD2x-xxxx
108
11829
1PH8284-1xF2x-xxxx
108
11830
1PH8284-1xH2x-xxxx
108
11831
1PH8286-1xB2x-xxxx
108
11835
1PH8286-1xC2x-xxxx
108
11836
1PH8286-1xD2x-xxxx
108
11837
1PH8286-1xF2x-xxxx
108
11838
1PH8288-1xB2x-xxxx
108
11843
1PH8288-1xC2x-xxxx
108
11844
1PH8288-1xD2x-xxxx
108
11845
1PH8288-1xF2x-xxxx
108
11846
1PL6184-xxBxx-xxxx
166
16600
1PL6184-xxCxx-xxxx
166
16631
1PL6184-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16601
1PL6184-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16602
1PL6184-xxLxx-xxxx
166
16603
1PL6186-xxBxx-xxxx
166
16604
1PL6186-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16605
1PL6186-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16606
1PL6186-xxLxx-xxxx
166
16630
1PL6224-xxBxx-xxxx
166
16608
1PL6224-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16609
1PL6224-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16610
1PL6224-xxLxx-xxxx
166
16611
1PL6226-xxBxx-xxxx
166
16612
1PL6226-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16614
1PL6226-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16615

Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PL6226-xxLxx-xxxx
166
16616
1PL6228-xxBxx-xxxx
166
16617
1PL6228-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16618
1PL6228-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16619
1PL6228-xxLxx-xxxx
166
16620
1PL6284-xxCxx-xxxx
166
16621
1PL6284-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16622
1PL6284-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16623
1PL6286-xxCxx-xxxx
166
16624
1PL6286-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16626
1PL6286-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16625
1PL6288-xxCxx-xxxx
166
16627
1PL6288-xxDxx-xxxx
166
16628
1PL6288-xxFxx-xxxx
166
16629
1PM4101-xxF8x(L37)
134
14409
1PM4101-xxF8x(L37)
134
14410
1PM4101-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14401
1PM4101-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14402
1PM4101-xxW2x(L37)
134
13409
1PM4101-xxW2x-xxxx
134
13401
1PM4105-xxF8x(L37)
134
14411
1PM4105-xxF8x(L37)
134
14412
1PM4105-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14403
1PM4105-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14404
1PM4105-xxW2x(L37)
134
13411
1PM4105-xxW2x-xxxx
134
13403
1PM4133-xxF8x(L37)
134
14414
1PM4133-xxF8x(L37)
134
14413
1PM4133-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14405
1PM4133-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14406
1PM4133-xxW2x(L37)
134
13413
1PM4133-xxW2x-xxxx
134
13405
1PM4137-xxF8x(L37)
134
14415
1PM4137-xxF8x(L37)
134
14416
1PM4137-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14407

A-1455
Appendix
Table A-2
Order number
A-1456
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PM4137-xxF8x-xxxx
134
14408
1PM4137-xxW2x(L37)
134
13415
1PM4137-xxW2x-xxxx
134
13407
1PM6101-xxF8x(L37)
136
14615
1PM6101-xxF8x(L37)
136
14616
1PM6101-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14601
1PM6101-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14602
1PM6105-xxF8x(L37)
136
14617
1PM6105-xxF8x(L37)
136
14618
1PM6105-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14603
1PM6105-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14604
1PM6107-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14619
1PM6107-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14620
1PM6133-xxF8x(L37)
136
14621
1PM6133-xxF8x(L37)
136
14622
1PM6133-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14605
1PM6133-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14606
1PM6137-xxF8x(L37)
136
14623
1PM6137-xxF8x(L37)
136
14624
1PM6137-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14607
1PM6137-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14608
1PM6138-xxF8x(L37)
136
14626
1PM6138-xxF8x(L37)
136
14625
1PM6138-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14609
1PM6138-xxF8x-xxxx
136
14610
2SP1253-8xAxx-0xxx
191
19102
2SP1253-8xAxx-0xxx
191
19101
2SP1255-8xAxx-0xxx
191
19103
2SP1255-8xAxx-0xxx
191
19104

Appendix
Synchronous motors (Version: 4301700)

Table A-3
Motor code for synchronous motors
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FE1051-4WL11-xxxx
261
26103
1FE1051-4WL51-xxxx
261
26104
1FE1051-4WN11-xxxx
261
26105
1FE1051-6WK10-xxxx
261
26106
1FE1051-6WN00-xxxx
261
26107
1FE1051-6WN10-xxxx
261
26108
1FE1051-6WN20-xxxx
261
26109
1FE1051-6WN30-xxxx
261
26110
1FE1052-4WK11-xxxx
261
26111
1FE1052-4WN11-xxxx
261
26112
1FE1052-4WN51-xxxx
261
26113
1FE1052-6LK00-xxxx
261
26114
1FE1052-6WK10-xxxx
261
26115
1FE1052-6WN00-xxxx
261
26116
1FE1052-6WN10-xxxx
261
26117
1FE1052-6WY10-xxxx
261
26118
1FE1053-4WN11-xxxx
261
26119
1FE1054-6LR00-xxxx
261
26120
1FE1054-6WQ10-xxxx
261
26122
1FE1054-6WR10-xxxx
261
26287
1FE1055-6LU00-xxxx
261
26123
1FE1055-6LX00-xxxx
261
26124
1FE1061-6LW00-xxxx
261
26125
1FE1061-6WV10-xxxx
261
26284
1FE1061-6WY10-xxxx
261
26126
1FE1064-6LQ00-xxxx
261
26127
1FE1064-6WN11-xxxx
261
26128
1FE1072-4WH11-xxxx
261
26129
1FE1072-4WL11-xxxx
261
26130
1FE1072-4WN01-xxxx
261
26131
1FE1072-4WN11-xxxx
261
26132
1FE1072-4WN31-xxxx
261
26133
1FE1073-4WL11-xxxx
261
26289
1FE1073-4WN01-xxxx
261
26134

A-1457
Appendix
Table A-3
Motor code for synchronous motors, continued
Order number
A-1458
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FE1073-4WN11-xxxx
261
26135
1FE1073-4WR01-xxxx
261
26136
1FE1073-4WT11-xxxx
261
26137
1FE1073-4WT31-xxxx
261
26138
1FE1074-4WM11-xxxx
261
26139
1FE1074-4WN11-xxxx
261
26140
1FE1074-4WN51-xxxx
261
26141
1FE1082-4WN01-xxxx
261
26142
1FE1082-4WN11-xxxx
261
26143
1FE1082-4WN51-xxxx
261
26144
1FE1082-4WP11-xxxx
261
26145
1FE1082-4WR11-xxxx
261
26146
1FE1082-4WR31-xxxx
261
26147
1FE1082-6WE11-xxxx
261
26285
1FE1082-6WP10-xxxx
261
26148
1FE1082-6WQ11-xxxx
261
26149
1FE1082-6WS10-xxxx
261
26150
1FE1082-6WS30-xxxx
261
26151
1FE1082-6WW11-xxxx
261
26152
1FE1083-4WN01-xxxx
261
26153
1FE1083-4WN11-xxxx
261
26154
1FE1084-4WN11-xxxx
261
26155
1FE1084-4WN31-xxxx
261
26156
1FE1084-4WP11-xxxx
261
26157
1FE1084-4WQ11-xxxx
261
26158
1FE1084-4WQ51-xxxx
261
26159
1FE1084-4WT11-xxxx
261
26160
1FE1084-4WT51-xxxx
261
26161
1FE1084-6LN00-xxxx
261
26162
1FE1084-6WN11-xxxx
261
26163
1FE1084-6WR11-xxxx
261
26164
1FE1084-6WX11-xxxx
261
26165
1FE1085-4WN11-xxxx
261
26166
1FE1085-4WQ11-xxxx
261
26167
1FE1085-4WT11-xxxx
261
26168

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FE1091-6WN10-xxxx
261
26169
1FE1091-6WN30-xxxx
261
26170
1FE1091-6WS10-xxxx
261
26171
1FE1092-4WV11-xxxx
261
26172
1FE1092-6WN00-xxxx
261
26173
1FE1092-6WN10-xxxx
261
26174
1FE1092-6WN30-xxxx
261
26175
1FE1092-6WR11-xxxx
261
26176
1FE1093-4WF01-xxxx
261
26177
1FE1093-4WH11-xxxx
261
26178
1FE1093-4WK01-xxxx
261
26179
1FE1093-4WM11-xxxx
261
26180
1FE1093-4WN01-xxxx
261
26181
1FE1093-4WN10-xxxx
261
26182
1FE1093-4WN11-xxxx
261
26183
1FE1093-6WN10-xxxx
261
26184
1FE1093-6WS10-xxxx
261
26185
1FE1093-6WS30-xxxx
261
26186
1FE1093-6WV01-xxxx
261
26286
1FE1093-6WV11-xxxx
261
26187
1FE1093-6WV31-xxxx
261
26188
1FE1093-7LN00-xxxx
261
26189
1FE1094-4LW01-xxxx
261
26190
1FE1094-4WK11-xxxx
261
26191
1FE1094-4WL11-xxxx
261
26192
1FE1094-4WS11-xxxx
261
26193
1FE1094-4WU11-xxxx
261
26243
1FE1095-4WN11-xxxx
261
26194
1FE1095-6LT01-xxxx
261
26195
1FE1095-6WU11-xxxx
261
26290
1FE1096-4WK10-xxxx
261
26196
1FE1096-4WN11-xxxx
261
26197
1FE1103-4WN01-xxxx
261
26245
1FE1103-4WN11-xxxx
261
26198
1FE1103-4WN31-xxxx
261
26199

A-1459
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1460
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FE1103-4WQ01-xxxx
261
26200
1FE1103-4WQ11-xxxx
261
26201
1FE1103-4WT01-xxxx
261
26202
1FE1103-4WT11-xxxx
261
26203
1FE1103-4WU01-xxxx
261
26204
1FE1104-4WN11-xxxx
261
26205
1FE1105-4WN01-xxxx
261
26206
1FE1105-4WN11-xxxx
261
26207
1FE1105-4WQ01-xxxx
261
26208
1FE1105-4WQ11-xxxx
261
26209
1FE1106-4WN11-xxxx
261
26210
1FE1106-4WS11-xxxx
261
26211
1FE1106-4WY11-xxxx
261
26212
1FE1112-6LW01-xxxx
261
26213
1FE1113-6LU01-xxxx
261
26214
1FE1114-6LU11-xxxx
261
26215
1FE1114-6WR11-xxxx
261
26216
1FE1114-6WR31-xxxx
261
26217
1FE1114-6WT10-xxxx
261
26218
1FE1114-6WT11-xxxx
261
26219
1FE1114-6WT31-xxxx
261
26220
1FE1114-6WT51-xxxx
261
26221
1FE1114-6WW11-xxxx
261
26222
1FE1114-6WW31-xxxx
261
26223
1FE1116-6LS01-xxxx
261
26224
1FE1116-6LT01-xxxx
261
26225
1FE1116-6WR11-xxxx
261
26226
1FE1116-6WT11-xxxx
261
26227
1FE1116-6WW11-xxxx
261
26242
1FE1116-6WY11-xxxx
261
26228
1FE1124-4WN11-xxxx
261
26229
1FE1125-4WN11-xxxx
261
26230
1FE1125-4WP11-xxxx
261
26231
1FE1126-4WN11-xxxx
261
26232
1FE1126-4WP11-xxxx
261
26233

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FE1126-4WQ11-xxxx
261
26234
1FE1144-8WT10-xxxx
261
26244
1FE1145-8WN11-xxxx
261
26235
1FE1145-8WS11-xxxx
261
26237
1FE1147-8WN11-xxxx
261
26238
1FE1147-8WQ11-xxxx
261
26239
1FE1147-8WQ31-xxxx
261
26240
1FE1147-8WS11-xxxx
261
26241
1FK6032-6AK7x-xxxx
236
23601
1FK6033-7AK7x-xxxx
236
23602
1FK6040-6AK7x-xxxx
236
23603
1FK6042-6AF7x-xxxx
236
23604
1FK6043-7AH7x-xxxx
236
23605
1FK6043-7AK7x-xxxx
236
23606
1FK6044-7AF7x-xxxx
236
23607
1FK6044-7AH7x-xxxx
236
23608
1FK6060-6AF7x-xxxx
236
23609
1FK6061-7AF7x-xxxx
236
23610
1FK6061-7AH7x-xxxx
236
23611
1FK6063-6AF7x-xxxx
236
23612
1FK6064-7AF7x-xxxx
236
23613
1FK6064-7AH7x-xxxx
236
23614
1FK6080-6AF7x-xxxx
236
23615
1FK6082-7AF7x-xxxx
236
23616
1FK6083-6AF7x-xxxx
236
23617
1FK6085-7AF7x-xxxx
236
23618
1FK6100-8AF7x-xxxx
236
23619
1FK6101-8AF7x-xxxx
236
23620
1FK6103-8AF7x-xxxx
236
23621
1FK7011-xAK2x-xxxx
237
23738
1FK7011-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23747
1FK7015-xAK2x-xxxx
237
23739
1FK7015-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23748
1FK7022-xAK2x-xxxx
237
23733
1FK7022-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23726

A-1461
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1462
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FK7024-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23753
1FK7032-xAF2x-xxxx
237
23742
1FK7032-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23727
1FK7033-xAF2x-xxxx
237
23741
1FK7033-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23701
1FK7034-xAF2x-xxxx
237
23740
1FK7034-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23732
1FK7040-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23702
1FK7042-xAC7x-xxxx
237
23749
1FK7042-xAF2x-xxxx
237
23735
1FK7042-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23703
1FK7042-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23704
1FK7042-xBK7x-xxxx
237
23765
1FK7043-xAF2x-xxxx
237
23743
1FK7043-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23705
1FK7043-xAK7x-xxxx
237
23706
1FK7044-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23707
1FK7044-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23708
1FK7060-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23709
1FK7060-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23710
1FK7060-xBF7x-xxxx
237
23766
1FK7061-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23711
1FK7061-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23712
1FK7062-xBF7x-xxxx
237
23750
1FK7063-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23713
1FK7063-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23714
1FK7064-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23715
1FK7064-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23716
1FK7080-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23717
1FK7080-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23718
1FK7081-xBF7x-xxxx
237
23751
1FK7082-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23719
1FK7083-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23720
1FK7083-xAH7x-xxxx
237
23721
1FK7084-xBC7x-xxxx
237
23752

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FK7084-xBF7x-xxxx
237
23772
1FK7085-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23722
1FK7086-xAA7x-xxxx
237
23737
1FK7086-xAC7x-xxxx
237
23744
1FK7086-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23731
1FK7086-xSF7x-xxxx
237
23730
1FK7100-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23723
1FK7101-xAC7x-xxxx
237
23745
1FK7101-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23724
1FK7103-xAC7x-xxxx
237
23746
1FK7103-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23725
1FK7105-xAC7x-xxxx
237
23728
1FK7105-xAF7x-xxxx
237
23729
1FS6074-xAC7x-xxxx
276
27601
1FS6074-xAF7x-xxxx
276
27602
1FS6074-xAH7x-xxxx
276
27603
1FS6074-xAK7x-xxxx
276
27604
1FS6096-xAC7x-xxxx
276
27605
1FS6096-xAF7x-xxxx
276
27606
1FS6096-xAH7x-xxxx
276
27607
1FS6115-xAB7x-xxxx
276
27608
1FS6115-xAC7x-xxxx
276
27609
1FS6115-xAF7x-xxxx
276
27610
1FS6134-xAB7x-xxxx
276
27611
1FS6134-xAC7x-xxxx
276
27612
1FS6134-xAF7x-xxxx
276
27613
1FT6021-6AK7x-xxxx
206
20601
1FT6024-6AK7x-xxxx
206
20602
1FT6031-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20603
1FT6034-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20604
1FT6041-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20605
1FT6041-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20606
1FT6044-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20607
1FT6044-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20608
1FT6061-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20609

A-1463
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1464
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FT6061-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20610
1FT6061-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20611
1FT6061-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20612
1FT6062-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20613
1FT6062-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20614
1FT6062-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20615
1FT6062-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20616
1FT6062-xWF7x-xxxx
206
22601
1FT6062-xWH7x-xxxx
206
22602
1FT6062-xWK7x-xxxx
206
22603
1FT6064-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20617
1FT6064-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20618
1FT6064-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20619
1FT6064-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20620
1FT6064-xWF7x-xxxx
206
22604
1FT6064-xWH7x-xxxx
206
22605
1FT6064-xWK7x-xxxx
206
22606
1FT6081-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20621
1FT6081-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20622
1FT6081-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20623
1FT6081-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20624
1FT6082-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20625
1FT6082-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20626
1FT6082-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20627
1FT6082-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20628
1FT6082-xWH7x-xxxx
206
22630
1FT6084-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20629
1FT6084-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20630
1FT6084-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20631
1FT6084-xAK7x-xxxx
206
20632
1FT6084-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21601
1FT6084-xSH7x-xxxx
206
21602
1FT6084-xSK7x-xxxx
206
21603
1FT6084-xWF7x-xxxx
206
22607
1FT6084-xWH7x-xxxx
206
22608

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FT6084-xWK7x-xxxx
206
22609
1FT6086-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20633
1FT6086-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20634
1FT6086-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20635
1FT6086-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21604
1FT6086-xSG7x-xxxx
206
21626
1FT6086-xSH7x-xxxx
206
21605
1FT6086-xSK7x-xxxx
206
21606
1FT6086-xWF7x-xxxx
206
22610
1FT6086-xWH7x-xxxx
206
22611
1FT6086-xWK7x-xxxx
206
22612
1FT6102-xAB7x-xxxx
206
20636
1FT6102-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20637
1FT6102-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20638
1FT6102-xAH7x-xxxx
206
20639
1FT6105-xAB7x-xxxx
206
20640
1FT6105-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20641
1FT6105-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20642
1FT6105-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21607
1FT6105-xSC7x-xxxx
206
21608
1FT6105-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21609
1FT6105-xSH7x-xxxx
206
21610
1FT6105-xWC7x-xxxx
206
22613
1FT6105-xWF7x-xxxx
206
22614
1FT6108-xAB7x-xxxx
206
20643
1FT6108-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20644
1FT6108-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20645
1FT6108-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21611
1FT6108-xSC7x-xxxx
206
21612
1FT6108-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21613
1FT6108-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22615
1FT6108-xWC7x-xxxx
206
22616
1FT6108-xWF7x-xxxx
206
22617
1FT6132-xAB7x-xxxx
206
20646
1FT6132-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20647

A-1465
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1466
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FT6132-xAF7x-xxxx
206
20648
1FT6132-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21614
1FT6132-xSC7x-xxxx
206
21615
1FT6132-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21616
1FT6132-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22618
1FT6132-xWD7x-xxxx
206
22619
1FT6134-xAB7x-xxxx
206
20649
1FT6134-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20650
1FT6134-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21617
1FT6134-xSC7x-xxxx
206
21618
1FT6134-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21619
1FT6134-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22620
1FT6134-xWD7x-xxxx
206
22621
1FT6136-xAB7x-xxxx
206
20651
1FT6136-xAC7x-xxxx
206
20652
1FT6136-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21620
1FT6136-xSC7x-xxxx
206
21621
1FT6136-xSF7x-xxxx
206
21622
1FT6136-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22622
1FT6136-xWD7x-xxxx
206
22623
1FT6138-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22624
1FT6138-xWD7x-xxxx
206
22625
1FT6163-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21623
1FT6163-xSD7x-xxxx
206
21624
1FT6163-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22626
1FT6163-xWD7x-xxxx
206
22627
1FT6168-xSB7x-xxxx
206
21625
1FT6168-xWB7x-xxxx
206
22628
1FT7034-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20740
1FT7036-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20741
1FT7042-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20701
1FT7042-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20702
1FT7044-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20703
1FT7044-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20704
1FT7046-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20705

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FT7046-xAH7x-xxxx
207
20732
1FT7046-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20706
1FT7062-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20716
1FT7062-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20717
1FT7062-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20745
1FT7062-xWK7x-xxxx
207
20746
1FT7064-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20720
1FT7064-xAK7x-xxxx
207
20721
1FT7064-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20747
1FT7064-xWK7x-xxxx
207
20748
1FT7065-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20781
1FT7065-xSH7x-xxxx
207
20782
1FT7065-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20770
1FT7065-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20771
1FT7066-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20722
1FT7066-xAH7x-xxxx
207
20733
1FT7066-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20749
1FT7066-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20750
1FT7067-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20783
1FT7067-xSH7x-xxxx
207
20784
1FT7067-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20772
1FT7067-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20773
1FT7068-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20725
1FT7068-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20751
1FT7082-xAC7x-xxxx
207
20734
1FT7082-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20709
1FT7082-xAH7x-xxxx
207
20707
1FT7082-xWC7x-xxxx
207
20752
1FT7082-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20753
1FT7082-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20754
1FT7084-xAC7x-xxxx
207
20735
1FT7084-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20711
1FT7084-xAH7x-xxxx
207
20712
1FT7084-xSC7x-xxxx
207
20789
1FT7084-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20790

A-1467
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1468
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FT7084-xSH7x-xxxx
207
20791
1FT7084-xWC7x-xxxx
207
20755
1FT7084-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20756
1FT7084-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20757
1FT7085-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20774
1FT7085-xSH7x-xxxx
207
20775
1FT7085-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20776
1FT7085-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20777
1FT7086-xAC7x-xxxx
207
20736
1FT7086-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20714
1FT7086-xAH7x-xxxx
207
20715
1FT7086-xSC7x-xxxx
207
20792
1FT7086-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20793
1FT7086-xSH7x-xxxx
207
20794
1FT7086-xWC7x-xxxx
207
20758
1FT7086-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20759
1FT7086-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20760
1FT7087-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20778
1FT7087-xSH7x-xxxx
207
20779
1FT7087-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20769
1FT7087-xWH7x-xxxx
207
20780
1FT7102-xAB7x-xxxx
207
20726
1FT7102-xAC7x-xxxx
207
20737
1FT7102-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20727
1FT7102-xWB7x-xxxx
207
20761
1FT7102-xWC7x-xxxx
207
20762
1FT7102-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20763
1FT7105-xAB7x-xxxx
207
20728
1FT7105-xAC7x-xxxx
207
20738
1FT7105-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20729
1FT7105-xSC7x-xxxx
207
20785
1FT7105-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20786
1FT7105-xWB7x-xxxx
207
20744
1FT7105-xWC7x-xxxx
207
20764
1FT7105-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20765

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FT7108-xAB7x-xxxx
207
20730
1FT7108-xAC7x-xxxx
207
20739
1FT7108-xAF7x-xxxx
207
20731
1FT7108-xSC7x-xxxx
207
20787
1FT7108-xSF7x-xxxx
207
20788
1FT7108-xWB7x-xxxx
207
20742
1FT7108-xWC7x-xxxx
207
20766
1FT7108-xWF7x-xxxx
207
20767
1FW3150-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28301
1FW3150-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28302
1FW3150-1xP7x-xxxx
283
28303
1FW3152-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28304
1FW3152-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28305
1FW3152-1xP7x-xxxx
283
28306
1FW3154-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28307
1FW3154-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28308
1FW3154-1xP7x-xxxx
283
28309
1FW3155-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28310
1FW3155-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28311
1FW3155-1xP7x-xxxx
283
28312
1FW3156-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28313
1FW3156-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28314
1FW3156-1xP7x-xxxx
283
28315
1FW3201-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28316
1FW3201-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28317
1FW3201-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28318
1FW3202-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28319
1FW3202-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28320
1FW3202-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28321
1FW3203-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28322
1FW3203-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28323
1FW3203-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28324
1FW3204-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28325
1FW3204-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28326
1FW3204-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28327

A-1469
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1470
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FW3206-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28328
1FW3206-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28329
1FW3206-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28330
1FW3208-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28331
1FW3208-1xH7x-xxxx
283
28332
1FW3208-1xL7x-xxxx
283
28333
1FW3281-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28334
1FW3281-1xG7x-xxxx
283
28335
1FW3281-2xE7x-xxxx
283
29301
1FW3281-2xG7x-xxxx
283
29302
1FW3281-3xJ7x-xxxx
283
29303
1FW3281-3xM7x-xxxx
283
29304
1FW3283-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28336
1FW3283-1xG7x-xxxx
283
28337
1FW3283-2xE7x-xxxx
283
29305
1FW3283-2xG7x-xxxx
283
29306
1FW3283-3xJ7x-xxxx
283
29307
1FW3283-3xM7x-xxxx
283
29308
1FW3285-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28338
1FW3285-1xG7x-xxxx
283
28339
1FW3285-2xE7x-xxxx
283
29309
1FW3285-2xG7x-xxxx
283
29310
1FW3285-3xJ7x-xxxx
283
29311
1FW3285-3xM7x-xxxx
283
29312
1FW3287-2xE7x-xxxx
283
29313
1FW3287-2xG7x-xxxx
283
29314
1FW3287-3xJ7x-xxxx
283
29315
1FW3287-3xM7x-xxxx
283
29316
1FW3288-1xE7x-xxxx
283
28340
1FW3288-1xG7x-xxxx
283
28341
1FW6090-0xx05-0Fxx
286
28601
1FW6090-0xx05-0Kxx
286
28602
1FW6090-0xx07-0Kxx
286
28603
1FW6090-0xx07-1Jxx
286
28604
1FW6090-0xx10-0Kxx
286
28605

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FW6090-0xx10-1Jxx
286
28606
1FW6090-0xx15-1Jxx
286
28607
1FW6090-0xx15-2Jxx
286
28608
1FW6130-0xx05-0Kxx
286
28620
1FW6130-0xx05-1Jxx
286
28621
1FW6130-0xx07-0Kxx
286
28622
1FW6130-0xx07-1Jxx
286
28623
1FW6130-0xx10-1Jxx
286
28624
1FW6130-0xx10-2Jxx
286
28625
1FW6130-0xx15-1Jxx
286
28626
1FW6130-0xx15-2Jxx
286
28627
1FW6150-0xx05-1Jxx
286
28642
1FW6150-0xx05-4Fxx
286
28643
1FW6150-0xx07-2Jxx
286
28644
1FW6150-0xx07-4Fxx
286
28645
1FW6150-0xx10-2Jxx
286
28646
1FW6150-0xx10-4Fxx
286
28647
1FW6150-0xx15-2Jxx
286
28648
1FW6150-0xx15-4Fxx
286
28649
1FW6160-0xx05-1Jxx
286
28628
1FW6160-0xx05-2Jxx
286
28629
1FW6160-0xx07-1Jxx
286
28630
1FW6160-0xx07-2Jxx
286
28631
1FW6160-0xx10-1Jxx
286
28632
1FW6160-0xx10-2Jxx
286
28633
1FW6160-0xx15-2Jxx
286
28634
1FW6160-0xx15-5Gxx
286
28635
1FW6160-xxx05-5Gxx
286
28658
1FW6160-xxx07-5Gxx
286
28659
1FW6160-xxx07-8Fxx
286
28660
1FW6160-xxx10-2Pxx
286
28661
1FW6160-xxx10-5Gxx
286
28662
1FW6160-xxx10-8Fxx
286
28663
1FW6160-xxx15-0Wxx
286
28664
1FW6160-xxx15-2Pxx
286
28665

A-1471
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1472
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FW6160-xxx15-8Fxx
286
28666
1FW6160-xxx20-0Wxx
286
28667
1FW6160-xxx20-2Pxx
286
28668
1FW6160-xxx20-5Gxx
286
28669
1FW6160-xxx20-8Fxx
286
28670
1FW6190-0xx05-1Jxx
286
28636
1FW6190-0xx05-2Jxx
286
28637
1FW6190-0xx07-1Jxx
286
28638
1FW6190-0xx07-2Jxx
286
28639
1FW6190-0xx10-1Jxx
286
28640
1FW6190-0xx10-2Jxx
286
28641
1FW6190-0xx15-2Jxx
286
28609
1FW6190-0xx15-5Gxx
286
28610
1FW6190-xxx05-5Gxx
286
28671
1FW6190-xxx07-5Gxx
286
28672
1FW6190-xxx07-8Fxx
286
28673
1FW6190-xxx10-2Pxx
286
28674
1FW6190-xxx10-5Gxx
286
28675
1FW6190-xxx10-8Fxx
286
28676
1FW6190-xxx15-0Wxx
286
28677
1FW6190-xxx15-2Pxx
286
28678
1FW6190-xxx15-8Fxx
286
28679
1FW6190-xxx20-0Wxx
286
28680
1FW6190-xxx20-2Pxx
286
28681
1FW6190-xxx20-5Gxx
286
28682
1FW6190-xxx20-8Fxx
286
28683
1FW6230-0xx05-1Jxx
286
28611
1FW6230-0xx05-2Jxx
286
28612
1FW6230-0xx07-1Jxxx
286
28613
1FW6230-0xx07-2Jxx
286
28614
1FW6230-0xx10-2Jxx
286
28615
1FW6230-0xx10-5Gxx
286
28616
1FW6230-0xx15-4Cxx
286
28617
1FW6230-0xx15-5Gxx
286
28618
1FW6230-xxx05-5Gxx
286
28684

Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FW6230-xxx07-5Gxx
286
28685
1FW6230-xxx07-8Fxx
286
28686
1FW6230-xxx10-2Pxx
286
28687
1FW6230-xxx10-8Fxx
286
28688
1FW6230-xxx15-0Wxx
286
28689
1FW6230-xxx15-2Pxx
286
28690
1FW6230-xxx15-8Fxx
286
28691
1FW6230-xxx20-0Wxx
286
28692
1FW6230-xxx20-2Pxx
286
28693
1FW6230-xxx20-5Gxx
286
28694
1FW6230-xxx20-8Fxx
286
28695
1FW6290-0xx15-7Axx
286
28619
1FW6290-xxx07-0Lxx
286
28696
1FW6290-xxx07-2Pxx
286
28697
1FW6290-xxx07-5Gxx
286
28698
1FW6290-xxx11-0Lxx
286
28699
1FW6290-xxx11-2Pxx
286
29600
1FW6290-xxx11-7Axx
286
29601
1FW6290-xxx15-0Lxx
286
29602
1FW6290-xxx15-2Pxx
286
29603
1FW6290-xxx20-0Lxx
286
29604
1FW6290-xxx20-2Pxx
286
29605
1LE400x-1ABxx-xxxx
204
20401
1LE400x-1BBxx-xxxx
204
20402
1PH8131-2xF0x-xxxx
200
20001
1PH8131-2xF1x-xxxx
200
20002
1PH8131-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20003
1PH8131-2xL0x-xxxx
200
20004
1PH8131-2xL1x-xxxx
200
20005
1PH8131-2xL2x-xxxx
200
20006
1PH8133-2xF0x-xxxx
200
20007
1PH8133-2xF1x-xxxx
200
20008
1PH8133-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20009
1PH8133-2xG2x-xxxx
200
20010
1PH8133-2xL0x-xxxx
200
20011

A-1473
Appendix
Table A-3
Order number
A-1474
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1PH8133-2xL1x-xxxx
200
20012
1PH8135-2xF0x-xxxx
200
20013
1PH8135-2xF1x-xxxx
200
20014
1PH8135-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20015
1PH8135-2xG0x-xxxx
200
20016
1PH8135-2xG1x-xxxx
200
20017
1PH8135-2xG2x-xxxx
200
20018
1PH8137-2xF0x-xxxx
200
20019
1PH8137-2xF1x-xxxx
200
20020
1PH8137-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20021
1PH8137-2xG2x-xxxx
200
20022
1PH8137-2xL0x-xxxx
200
20023
1PH8137-2xL1x-xxxx
200
20024
1PH8137-2xM0x-xxxx
200
20025
1PH8137-2xM1x-xxxx
200
20026
1PH8138-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20027
1PH8138-2xG2x-xxxx
200
20028
1PH8184-2xC2x-xxxx
200
20029
1PH8184-2xD2x-xxxx
200
20030
1PH8184-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20031
1PH8184-2xL2x-xxxx
200
20032
1PH8186-2xC2x-xxxx
200
20033
1PH8186-2xD2x-xxxx
200
20034
1PH8186-2xF2x-xxxx
200
20035
1PH8186-2xL2x-xxxx
200
20036
2SP1202-1HAxx-xxxx
291
29101
2SP1202-1HBxx-xxxx
291
29102
2SP1204-1HAxx-xxxx
291
29103
2SP1204-1HBxx-xxxx
291
29104
2SP1253-1xAxx-xxxx
291
29105
2SP1253-1xBxx-xxxx
291
29106
2SP1255-1xAxx-xxxx
291
29107
2SP1255-1xBxx-xxxx
291
29108

Appendix
Linear motors (Version: 4301700)

Table A-4
Motor code for linear motors
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FN1072-3xF7x-xxxx
401
40131
1FN1076-3xF7x-xxxx
401
40132
1FN1122-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40103
1FN1122-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40121
1FN1124-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40101
1FN1124-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40123
1FN1126-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40104
1FN1126-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40122
1FN1184-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40102
1FN1184-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40124
1FN1186-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40105
1FN1186-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40125
1FN1244-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40106
1FN1244-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40126
1FN1246-5xC7x-xxxx
401
40107
1FN1246-5xF7x-xxxx
401
40127
1FN3050-1KD0x-xxxx
403
41329
1FN3050-1ND0x-xxxx
403
41301
1FN3050-2KC4x-xxxx
403
41328
1FN3050-2NB8x-xxxx
403
41302
1FN3050-2WC0x-xxxx
403
40349
1FN3100-1KC5x-xxxx
403
41331
1FN3100-1NC0x-xxxx
403
41303
1FN3100-1WC0x-xxxx
403
40341
1FN3100-2KC5x-xxxx
403
41325
1FN3100-2NC8x-xxxx
403
41304
1FN3100-2WC0x-xxxx
403
40302
1FN3100-2WE0x-xxxx
403
40303
1FN3100-3KC5x-xxxx
403
41326
1FN3100-3NC0x-xxxx
403
41305
1FN3100-3WC0x-xxxx
403
40342
1FN3100-3WE0x-xxxx
403
40304
1FN3100-4NC8x-xxxx
403
41306
1FN3100-4WC0x-xxxx
403
40305

A-1475
Appendix
Table A-4
Motor code for linear motors, continued
Order number
A-1476
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FN3100-4WE0x-xxxx
403
40306
1FN3100-5WC0x-xxxx
403
40307
1FN3150-1KC7x-xxxx
403
41324
1FN3150-1NC2x-xxxx
403
41307
1FN3150-1WC0x-xxxx
403
40308
1FN3150-1WE0x-xxxx
403
40309
1FN3150-2KC7x-xxxx
403
41327
1FN3150-2NB8x-xxxx
403
41308
1FN3150-2WC0x-xxxx
403
40310
1FN3150-3KC7x-xxxx
403
41330
1FN3150-3NC7x-xxxx
403
41309
1FN3150-3WC0x-xxxx
403
40311
1FN3150-4NB8x-xxxx
403
41310
1FN3150-4WC0x-xxxx
403
40312
1FN3150-5WC0x-xxxx
403
40313
1FN3300-1NC1x-xxxx
403
41311
1FN3300-1WC0x-xxxx
403
40343
1FN3300-2NC1x-xxxx
403
41312
1FN3300-2WB0x-xxxx
403
40314
1FN3300-2WC0x-xxxx
403
40315
1FN3300-2WG0x-xxxx
403
40316
1FN3300-3NC4x-xxxx
403
41313
1FN3300-3WC0x-xxxx
403
40317
1FN3300-3WG0x-xxxx
403
40318
1FN3300-4NB8x-xxxx
403
41314
1FN3300-4WB0x-xxxx
403
40319
1FN3300-4WC0x-xxxx
403
40320
1FN3450-2NC5x-xxxx
403
41315
1FN3450-2WA5x-xxxx
403
40344
1FN3450-2WC0x-xxxx
403
40321
1FN3450-2WE0x-xxxx
403
40322
1FN3450-3NC5x-xxxx
403
41316
1FN3450-3WA5x-xxxx
403
40345
1FN3450-3WB0x-xxxx
403
40323
1FN3450-3WB5x-xxxx
403
40324

Appendix
Table A-4
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FN3450-3WC0x-xxxx
403
40325
1FN3450-3WE0x-xxxx
403
40326
1FN3450-4NB8x-xxxx
403
41317
1FN3450-4WB0x-xxxx
403
40327
1FN3450-4WB5x-xxxx
403
40328
1FN3450-4WC0x-xxxx
403
40329
1FN3450-4WE0x-xxxx
403
40330
1FN3600-2NB8x-xxxx
403
41318
1FN3600-2WA5x-xxxx
403
40346
1FN3600-3NB8x-xxxx
403
41319
1FN3600-3WB0x-xxxx
403
40331
1FN3600-3WC0x-xxxx
403
40332
1FN3600-4NB8x-xxxx
403
41320
1FN3600-4WA3x-xxxx
403
40347
1FN3600-4WB0x-xxxx
403
40333
1FN3600-4WB5x-xxxx
403
40334
1FN3600-4WC0x-xxxx
403
40335
1FN3900-2NB2x-xxxx
403
41321
1FN3900-2WB0x-xxxx
403
40336
1FN3900-2WC0x-xxxx
403
40337
1FN3900-3NB2x-xxxx
403
41322
1FN3900-3WB0x-xxxx
403
40348
1FN3900-4NB2x-xxxx
403
41323
1FN3900-4WB0x-xxxx
403
40338
1FN3900-4WB5x-xxxx
403
40339
1FN3900-4WC0x-xxxx
403
40340
1FN6003-xLC57-xxxx
406
40601
1FN6003-xLC84-xxxx
406
40602
1FN6003-xLE38-xxxx
406
40603
1FN6003-xLE88-xxxx
406
40604
1FN6003-xLG24-xxxx
406
40605
1FN6003-xLG61-xxxx
406
40606
1FN6003-xLJ17-xxxx
406
40607
1FN6003-xLJ44-xxxx
406
40608
1FN6003-xLL12-xxxx
406
40609

A-1477
Appendix
Table A-4
Order number
A-1478
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FN6003-xLL35-xxxx
406
40610
1FN6003-xLN10-xxxx
406
40611
1FN6003-xLN28-xxxx
406
40612
1FN6003-xWC57-xxxx
406
40615
1FN6003-xWC84-xxxx
406
40616
1FN6003-xWE38-xxxx
406
40617
1FN6003-xWE88-xxxx
406
40618
1FN6003-xWG24-xxxx
406
40619
1FN6003-xWG61-xxxx
406
40620
1FN6003-xWJ17-xxxx
406
40621
1FN6003-xWJ44-xxxx
406
40622
1FN6003-xWL12-xxxx
406
40623
1FN6003-xWL35-xxxx
406
40624
1FN6003-xWN10-xxxx
406
40625
1FN6003-xWN28-xxxx
406
40626
1FN6007-xLC31-xxxx
406
40629
1FN6007-xLC46-xxxx
406
40630
1FN6007-xLE20-xxxx
406
40631
1FN6007-xLE53-xxxx
406
40632
1FN6007-xLG12-xxxx
406
40633
1FN6007-xLG33-xxxx
406
40634
1FN6007-xLJ08-xxxx
406
40635
1FN6007-xLJ24-xxxx
406
40636
1FN6007-xLL05-xxxx
406
40637
1FN6007-xLL18-xxxx
406
40638
1FN6007-xLN15-xxxx
406
40639
1FN6007-xLN32-xxxx
406
40640
1FN6007-xWC31-xxxx
406
40643
1FN6007-xWC46-xxxx
406
40644
1FN6007-xWE20-xxxx
406
40645
1FN6007-xWE53-xxxx
406
40646
1FN6007-xWG12-xxxx
406
40647
1FN6007-xWG33-xxxx
406
40648
1FN6007-xWJ08-xxxx
406
40649
1FN6007-xWJ24-xxxx
406
40650

Appendix
Table A-4
Order number
Motor type (p0300)
Motor code (p0301)
1FN6007-xWL05-xxxx
406
40651
1FN6007-xWL18-xxxx
406
40652
1FN6007-xWN15-xxxx
406
40653
1FN6007-xWN32-xxxx
406
40654
1FN6008-xLC17-xxxx
406
40657
1FN6008-xLC37-xxxx
406
40658
1FN6008-xLE16-xxxx
406
40659
1FN6008-xLE34-xxxx
406
40660
1FN6008-xLG16-xxxx
406
40661
1FN6008-xLG33-xxxx
406
40662
1FN6016-xLC18-xxxx
406
40663
1FN6016-xLC30-xxxx
406
40664
1FN6016-xLE17-xxxx
406
40665
1FN6016-xLE27-xxxx
406
40666
1FN6016-xLG16-xxxx
406
40667
1FN6016-xLG26-xxxx
406
40668
1FN6024-xLC12-xxxx
406
40669
1FN6024-xLC20-xxxx
406
40670
1FN6024-xLE11-xxxx
406
40671
1FN6024-xLE18-xxxx
406
40672
1FN6024-xLG10-xxxx
406
40673
1FN6024-xLG17-xxxx
406
40674

A-1479
Appendix
A.2.2
Encoder code
1FK6 encoders
Table A-5
Encoder code for 1FK6 encoders
Order number
Encoder code (p0400)
Remark
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xAxx
2001
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xExx
2051
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xGxx
2052
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xHxx
2053
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xJxx
2054
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xSxx
1002
4p (2-speed)
1003
6p (3-speed)
1004
8p (4-speed)
The pole number of the resolver corresponds to the pole number of the
motor (see catalog).
1FK6xxx-xxxxx-xTxx
1001
1FK7 encoders
Table A-6
Encoder code for 1FK7 encoders
Order number
Remark
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xAxx
2001
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xExx
2051
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xGxx
2052
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xHxx
2053
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xJxx
2054
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xSxx
1002
4p (2-speed)
1003
6p (3-speed)
1004
8p (4-speed)
The pole number of the resolver corresponds to the pole number of the
motor (see catalog).
1FK7xxx-xxxxx-xTxx
A-1480
1001

Appendix
1FS6 encoders
Table A-7
Encoder code for 1FS6 encoders
Order number
Remark
1FS6xxx-xxxxx-xAxx
2001
1FS6xxx-xxxxx-xExx
2051
1FT6 encoders
Table A-8
Encoder code for 1FT6 encoders
Order number
Remark
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xAxx
2001
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xExx
2051
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xHxx
2053
1FT6xxx-4xxxx-xSxx
1002
4p (2-speed)
1FT6xxx-6xxxx-xSxx
1003
6p (3-speed)
1FT6xxx-8xxxx-xSxx
1004
8p (4-speed)
1FT6xxx-xxxxx-xTxx
1001
1FW3 encoders
Table A-9
Encoder code for 1FW3 encoders
Order number
Remark
1FW3xxx-xAxxx-xxxx
2001
1FW3xxx-xExxx-xxxx
2051
1FW3xxx-xGxxx-xxxx
2052
1FW3xxx-xSxxx-xxxx
1003
1PH4 encoders
Table A-10
Encoder code for 1PH4 encoders
Order number
1PH4xxx-xNxxx-xxxx

2002

Remark
-
A-1481
Appendix
1PH7 encoders
Table A-11
Encoder code for 1PH7 encoders
Order number
Remark
1PH7xxx-xExxx-xxxx
2051
1PH7xxx-xHxxx-xxxx
3002
1PH7xxx-xJxxx-xxxx
3003
1PH7xxx-xMxxx-xxxx
2001
1PH7xxx-xNxxx-xxxx
2002
1PH7xxx-xRxxx-xxxx
1001
1PM4 encoders
Table A-12
Encoder code for 1PM4 encoders
Order number
Remark
1PM4xxx-xGxxx-xxxx
2002
1PM4xxx-xLxxx-xxxx
2003
1PM6 encoders
Table A-13
Encoder code for 1PM6 encoders
Order number
Remark
1PM6xxx-xGxxx-xxxx
2002
1PM6xxx-xLxxx-xxxx
2003
2SP1 encoders
Table A-14
Encoder code for 2SP1 encoders
Order number
2SP1xxx-xHxxx-xxxx
A-1482

2003
Remark
-

Note:
The following list of abbreviations includes all abbreviations and their meanings
used in the entire SINAMICS user documentation.
Abbreviation
Source of abbreviation
Meaning
A...
Alarm
Alarm
AC
Alternating Current
Alternating current
ADC
Analog Digital Converter
Analog digital converter
AI
Analog Input
Analog input
AIM
Active Interface Module
Active Interface Module
ALM
Active Line Module
Active Line Module
AO
Analog Output
Analog output
AOP
Advanced Operator Panel
Advanced operator panel
APC
Advanced Positioning Control
Advanced Positioning Control
AR
Automatic Restart
Automatic restart
ASC
Armature Short-Circuit
Armature short-circuit
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information

Interchange
American Standard Code for Information

Interchange
IM
Induction motor
Induction motor
BB
Betriebsbedingung
Operating condition
BERO
Contact-free proximity switch

Binector input
BI
Binector Input
BIA
Berufsgenossenschaftliches Institut fr Arbe- Germany's Institute for Occupational Safety

itssicherheit
and Health
BICO
Binector Connector Technology
BLM
Basic Line Module
Basic Line Module
BO
Binector Output
Binector output
BOP
Basic Operator Panel
Basic Operator Panel
Capacitance
Capacitance
C...
Safety message
CAN
Controller Area Network
Serial bus system
Binector connector technology

B-1483
Abbreviation
Meaning
CBC
Communication Board CAN
Communication Board CAN
CD
Compact Disc
Compact disc
CDS
Command Data Set
Command data set
CF Card
CompactFlash Card
CompactFlash memory card
CI
Connector Input
Connector input
CLC
Clearance Control
Clearance control
CNC
Computerized Numerical Control
Computerized numerical control
CO
Connector Output
Connector output
CO/BO
Connector Output/Binector Output
Connector output/binector output
COB ID
CAN Object Identification
CAN object identification
COM
Common contact of a change-over relay
Center contact on a changeover contact
COMM
Commissioning
Commissioning
CP
Communications Processor
Communications processor
CPU
Central Processing Unit
Central processing unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
Cyclic redundancy check
CSM
Control Supply Module
Control Supply Module
CU
Control Unit
Control Unit
CUA
Control Unit Adapter
Control Unit Adapter
CUD
Control Unit DC MASTER
Control Unit DC MASTER
DAC
Digital Analog Converter
Digital analog converter
DC
Direct Current
Direct current
DCB
Drive Control Block
Drive Control Block
DCC
Drive Control Chart
Drive Control Chart
DCC
Data Cross Check
Crosswise data comparison
DCN
Direct Current Negative
Direct current negative
DCP
Direct Current Positive
Direct current positive
DDS
Drive Data Set
Drive data set
DI
Digital Input
Digital input
DI/DO
Digital Input/Digital Output
Digital input/digital output, bidirectional
DMC
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Cabinet
DME
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External
DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module External
DO
Digital Output
Digital output
DO
Drive Object
Drive object
DP
Decentralized Peripherals
Distributed I/O
DPRAM
Dual-Port Random Access Memory
Memory with dual access
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
Dynamic memory
DRIVE-CLiQ
Drive Component Link with IQ
Drive Component Link with IQ
DSC
Dynamic Servo Control
Dynamic Servo Control
External Armature Short-Circuit
External armature short-circuit
E
EASC
B-1484

Abbreviation
Meaning
EDS
Encoder Data Set
Encoder data set
EGB
Elektrostatisch gefhrdete Baugruppen
Electrostatic sensitive devices
ELCB
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker
Residual current operated circuit breaker
ELP
Earth Leakage Protection
Ground-fault monitoring
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Electromagnetic compatibility
EMF
Electromagnetic Force
Electromagnetic force
EMK
Elektromagnetische Kraft
Electromagnetic force
EMV
Elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
Electromagnetic compatibility
EN
Europische Norm
European standard
EnDat
Encoder Data Interface
Encoder interface
EP
Enable Pulses
Pulse enable
EPOS
Einfachpositionierer
Basic positioner
ES
Engineering System
Engineering System
ESB
Ersatzschaltbild
Equivalent circuit diagram
ESD
Electrostatic Sensitive Devices
Electrostatic sensitive devices
ESR
Extended Stop and Retract
Extended stop and retraction
F...
Fault
Fault
FAQ
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently asked questions
FBL
Free Blocks
FCC
Function Control Chart
Function Control Chart
FCC
Flux Current Control
Flux current control
FD
Function Diagram
Function diagram
F-DI
Failsafe Digital Input
Failsafe digital input
F-DO
Failsafe Digital Output
Failsafe digital output
FEM
Fremderregter Synchronmotor
Separately excited synchronous motor
FEPROM
Flash EPROM
Non-volatile read/write memory
FG
Function Generator
Function generator
FI
Fault current
FOC
Fiber-Optic Cable
Fiber-optic cable
FP
Funktionsplan
Function diagram
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
Field programmable gate array
FW
Firmware
Firmware
GB
Gigabyte
Gigabyte
GC
Global Control
Global Control Telegram (broadcast telegram)
GND
Ground
Reference potential for all signal and operating voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also
referred to as G)
GSD
Gertestammdatei
Device master data: Describes the characteristics of a PROFIBUS slave

B-1485
Abbreviation
Meaning
GSV
Gate Supply Voltage
Gate Supply Voltage
GUID
Globally Unique Identifier
Globally unique identifier
HF
High Frequency
High frequency
HFD
Hochfrequenzdrossel
High-frequency reactor
HLG
Hochlaufgeber
Ramp-function generator
HMI
Human Machine Interface
Human Machine Interface
HTL
High-Threshold Logic
Logic with a high fault threshold
HW
Hardware
Hardware
i. V.
In Vorbereitung
Under development: This feature is not currently available.
I/O
Input/Output
Input/Output
I2C
Inter-Integrated Circuit
Internal serial data bus
IASC
Internal Armature Short-Circuit
Internal armature short-circuit
IBN
Inbetriebnahme
Commissioning
ID
Identifier
Identification
IE
Industrial Ethernet
Industrial Ethernet
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
International Electrotechnical Commission
IF
Interface
Interface
IGBT
Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor
Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IGCT
Integrated Gate-Controlled Thyristor
Semiconductor circuit breaker with integrated control electrode
IL
Impulslschung
Pulse cancelation
IP
Internet Protocol
Internet Protocol
IPO
Interpolator
Interpolator
IT
Isol Terr
Insulated three-phase supply network
IVP
Internal Voltage Protection
Internal voltage protection
Jogging
Jog
CDC
Crosswise Data Comparison
Crosswise data comparison
KIP
Kinetische Pufferung
Kinetic buffering
Kp
Proportional gain
KTY
Special temperature sensor
Formula symbol for inductance
LED
Light-Emitting Diode
Light-emitting diode
LIN
Linear motor
Linear motor
J
JOG
K
LR
Lageregler
Position controller
LSB
Least Significant Bit
Least Significant Bit
LSC
Line-Side Converter
Line-side converter
B-1486

Abbreviation
Meaning
LSS
Line Side Switch
Line side switch
LU
Length Unit
Length unit
LWL
Lichtwellenleiter
Fiber-optic cable
Formula symbol for torque
Masse
Reference potential for all signal and operating voltages, usually defined as 0 V (also
referred to as GND)
MB
Megabyte
Megabyte
MCC
Motion Control Chart
Motion Control Chart
MDS
Motor Data Set
Motor data set
MLFB
Maschinenlesbare Fabrikatebezeichnung
Machine-Readable Product Code
MMC
Man-Machine Communication
Man-machine communication
MMC
Micro Memory Card
Micro memory card
MSB
Most Significant Bit
Most significant bit
MSC
Motor-Side Converter
Motor-side converter
MSCY_C1
Master Slave Cycle Class 1
Cyclic communication between master

(Class 1) and slave
MSR
Motorstromrichter
Motor-side converter
MT
Messtaster
Probe
N. C.
Not Connected
Not connected
N...
No Report
No message or internal message
NAMUR
Normenarbeitsgemeinschaft fr Mess- und Standardization association for measureRegeltechnik in der chemischen Industrie
ment and control in chemical industries
NC
Normally Closed (contact)
NC contact
NC
Numerical Control
Numerical control
NEMA
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Standardization body in the USA (United

States of America)
NM
Nullmarke
Zero mark
NO
Normally Open (contact)
NO contact
NSR
Netzstromrichter
Line-side converter
NVRAM
Non-Volatile Random Access Memory
Non-volatile read/write memory
Open Architecture
Open Architecture
O
OA
OC
Operating Condition
Operating condition
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
Original equipment manufacturer
OLP
Optical Link Plug
Fiber-optic bus connector
OMI
Option Module Interface
Option module interface
p...
Adjustable parameters
PB
PROFIBUS
PROFIBUS

B-1487
Abbreviation
Meaning
PcCtrl
PC Control
Control for master
PD
PROFIdrive
PROFIdrive
PDS
Power Unit Data Set
Power unit data set
PE
Protective Earth
Protective earth
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage
Protective extra low voltage
PEM
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
PG
Programmiergert
Programming device
PI
Proportional Integral
Proportional integral
PID
Proportional Integral Differential
Proportional integral differential
PLC
Programmable Logic Controller
Programmable logic controller
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop
Phase-locked loop
PN
PROFINET
PROFINET
PNO
PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation
PROFIBUS user organization
PPI
Point-to-Point Interface
Point-to-point interface
PRBS
Pseudo Random Binary Signal
White noise
PROFIBUS
Process Field Bus
Serial data bus
PS
Power Supply
Power supply
PSA
Power Stack Adapter
Power Stack Adapter
PTC
Positive Temperature Coefficient
Positive temperature coefficient
PTP
Point-To-Point
Point-to-Point
PWM
Pulse Width Modulation
Pulse width modulation
PZD
Prozessdaten
Process data
R
r...
Display parameters (read-only)
RAM
Random Access Memory
Read/write memory
RCCB
Residual Current Circuit Breaker
RCD
Residual Current Device
RCM
Residual Current Monitor
Residual current monitor
RFG
Ramp-Function Generator
Ramp-function generator
RJ45
Registered Jack 45
Term for an 8-pin socket system for data

transmission with shielded or non-shielded
multi-wire copper cables
RKA
Rckkhlanlage
Cooling unit
RO
Read Only
Read only
RPDO
Receive Process Data Object
Receive process data object
B-1488

Abbreviation
Meaning
RS232
Recommended Standard 232
Interface standard for cable-connected serial

data transmission between a sender and
receiver
(also known as EIA232)
RS485
Recommended Standard 485
Interface standard for a cable-connected

differential, parallel, and/or serial bus system
(data transmission between a number of
senders and receivers, also known as
EIA485)
RTC
Real Time Clock
Real time clock
RZA
Raumzeigerapproximation
Space vector approximation
S1
Uninterrupted duty
S3
Intermittent duty
SBC
Safe Brake Control
Safe brake control
SBH
Sicherer Betriebshalt
Safe operating stop
SBR
Safe acceleration monitoring
SCA
Safe Cam
Safe cam
SD Card
Secure Digital Card
Secure digital memory card
SE
Sicherer Software-Endschalter
Safe software limit switch
SG
Sicher reduzierte Geschwindigkeit
Safely-Limited Speed
SGA
Sicherheitsgerichteter Ausgang
Safety-related output
SGE
Sicherheitsgerichteter Eingang
Safety-related input
SH
Sicherer Halt
Safe standstill
SI
Safety Integrated
Safety Integrated
SIL
Safety Integrity Level
Safety Integrity Level
SLM
Smart Line Module
Smart Line Module
SLP
Safely-Limited Position
Safely-Limited Position
SLS
Safely-Limited Speed
Safely limited speed
SLVC
Sensorless Vector Control
Vector control without encoder
SM
Sensor Module
Sensor Module
SMC
Sensor Module Cabinet
Sensor Module Cabinet
SME
Sensor Module External
Sensor Module External
SN
Sicherer Software-Nocken
Safe software cam
SOS
Safe Operating Stop
Safe operating stop
SP
Service Pack
Service pack
SPC
Setpoint Channel
Setpoint channel
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface
Serial interface for connecting peripherals
SPS
Speicherprogrammierbare Steuerung
Programmable logic controller
SS1
Safe Stop 1
Safe stop 1
(monitored for time and ramping up)
SS2
Safe Stop 2
Safe stop 2
SSI
Synchronous Serial Interface
Synchronous serial interface

B-1489
Abbreviation
Meaning
SSM
Safe Speed Monitor
Safe feedback for speed monitoring (n < nx)
SSP
SINAMICS Support Package
SINAMICS support package
STO
Safe Torque Off
Safe torque off
STW
Steuerwort
Control word
TB
Terminal Board
Terminal Board
TIA
Totally Integrated Automation
Totally Integrated Automation
TM
Terminal Module
Terminal Module
TN
Terre Neutre
Grounded three-phase supply network
Tn
Integral time
TPDO
Transmit Process Data Object
Transmit process data object
TT
Terre Terre
Grounded three-phase supply network
TTL
Transistor-Transistor Logic
Transistor-transistor logic
Tv
Rate time
U
UL
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UPS
Uninterruptible Power Supply
Uninterruptible power supply
USV
Unterbrechungsfreie Stromversorgung
Uninterruptible power supply
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated
Universal Time Coordinated
VC
Vector Control
Vector control
Vdc
DC link voltage
VdcN
Partial DC link voltage negative
VdcP
Partial DC link voltage positive
VDE
Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker
Association of German Electrical Engineers
VDI
Verein Deutscher Ingenieure
Association of German Engineers
VPM
Voltage Protection Module
Voltage Protection Module
Vpp
Volt peak to peak
Volt peak to peak
VSM
Voltage Sensing Module
Voltage Sensing Module
WEA
Wiedereinschaltautomatik
Automatic restart
MT
Machine Tool
Machine tool
Extensible Markup Language
Standard language for Web publishing and

document management
ZK
Zwischenkreis
DC link
ZM
Zero Mark
Zero mark
ZSW
Zustandswort
Status word
X
XML
Z
B-1490

Bibliography
SINAMICS documentation
Catalogs
/D11.1/
SINAMICS G110/SINAMICS G120 Standard Inverters

SINAMICS G120D Distributed Inverters
Order number:
/D11/
Edition: 2008
E86060-K4921-A101-A1
Edition: 2008
SINAMICS S110 The Basic Positioning Drive

Order number:
/D21.3/
E86060-K5511-A101-A4
SIMOTION, SINAMICS S120 and Motors for Production Machines

Order number:
/PM22/
Edition: 05/2009
SINAMICS G130 Drive Converter Chassis Units

SINAMICS G150 Drive Converter Cabinet Units
Order number:
/PM21/
E86060-K5511-A111-A6
E86060-K4922-A101-A1
Edition: 2009
SINAMICS S120 Chassis Format Units and Cabinet Modules

SINAMICS S150 Converter Cabinet Units
Order number:
E86060-K5521-A131-A2
Edition: 2009
Related catalogs
/ST70/
SIMATIC Products for Totally Integrated Automation

Ordering information
Order number:
/NC61/
E86060-K4670-A101-B2
Edition: 2009
SINUMERIK & SINAMICS,

Equipment for Machine Tools
Ordering information
Order number:
E86060-K4461-A101-A3

Edition: 2010
C-1491
Bibliography
Interactive catalogs
/CA01/
Products for Automation and Drives

DVD
Order number:
/Mall/
E86060-D4001-A500-C8
Edition: 10/2009
Industry Mall,
Catalog and ordering system for Siemens' automation and drive solutions
www.siemens.com/industrymall.
Electronic documentation
/CD2/
SINAMICS DOCONCD
The SINAMICS System
Order number:
6SL3097-4CA00-0YG0
Edition: 11/2009
On request
Edition: 11/2009
On request
Edition: 11/2009
On request
Edition: 11/2009
User documentation
/BA1/
SINAMICS G150
Operating Instructions
Order number:
/BA2/
SINAMICS G130
Order number:
/BA3/
SINAMICS S150
Order number:
/GH1/
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Control Units and Additional System Components
Order number:
/GH2/
Edition: 11/2009
6SL3097-4AE00-0?P0
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual Cabinet Modules
Order number:
C-1492
6SL3097-4AC00-0?P2
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Chassis Power Units
Order number:
/GH5/
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Booksize Power Units
Order number:
/GH3/
6SL3097-4AH00-0?P0
On request
Edition: 11/2009

Bibliography
/GH6/
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual AC Drive
Order number:
/GH7/
Edition: 11/2009
6SL3097-4AB00-0?P0
Edition: 11/2009
6SL3097-4AR00-0?P0
Edition: 11/2009
6SL3097-4AQ00-0?P0
Edition: 11/2009
6SL3097-4AN00-0?P0
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS S120/S150
List Manual
Order number:
/MA1/
6SL3097-4AA00-0?P0
SINAMICS/SIMOTION
Programming and Operating Manual DCC Editor Description
Order number:
/LH1/
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS/SIMOTION
Function Manual DCC Standard Blocks
Order number:
/PB1/
6SL3097-4AF00-0?P0
SINAMICS S120
Function Manual, Safety Integrated
Order number:
/FH4/
Edition: 03/2006
SINAMICS S120
Function Manual Drive Functions
Order number:
/FHS/
6SL3097-2AG00-0?P2
SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual for CANopen
Order number:
/FH1/
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS S120
Commissioning Manual
Order number:
/IH2/
6SL3097-4AM00-0?P0
SINAMICS S120
Getting Started
Order number:
/IH1/
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS S120
Equipment Manual for Chassis Liquid Cooled Power Units
Order number:
/GS1/
6SL3097-4AL00-0?P0
6SL3097-4AP00-0?P0
Edition: 11/2009
SINAMICS/SINUMERIK
Machine Configuration Guidelines
Order number:
6FC5397-6CP10-0?A2

Edition: 10/2009
C-1493
Bibliography
/SH1/
SINAMICS S120 and SIMODRIVE 611

Control Cabinet Integration Guidelines
Order number:
/PFK7S/
6SN1197-0AC71-0?P0
Edition: 05/2007
6SN1197-0AD72-0?P0
Edition: 04/2009
6SN1197-0AD23-0?P0
Edition: 04/2008
6SN1197-0AD70-0?P4
Edition: 08/2009
6SN1197-0AB31-0?P7
Edition: 02/2008
SINAMICS Synchronous/Induction Motors 1PH8

Configuration Manual
Order number:
C-1494
Edition: 08/2008
SINAMICS Hollow-Shaft Measuring System SIMAG H2

Order number:
/PH8S/
6SN1197-0AD64-0?P1
SINAMICS Complete Torque Motors 1FW3

Order number:
/PMH2/
Edition: 10/2009
SINAMICS Hollow-Shaft Motors 1PM4/1PM6

Order number:
/PKTS/
6SN1197-0AD13-0?P3
SINAMICS Induction Motors 1PH7 (MT)

Machine Tools Configuration Manual
Order number:
/PPMS/
Edition: 12/2004
SINAMICS Induction Motors 1PH7 (PM)

Production Machines Configuration Manual
Order number:
/APH7P/
6SN1197-0AD12-0?P0
SINAMICS Induction Motors 1PH4

Order number:
/APH7P/
Edition: 12/2006
SINAMICS Synchronous Motors 1FT7

Order number:
/APH4S/
6SN1197-0AD16-0?P1
SINAMICS 1FT6 Synchronous Motors

Order number:
/PFT7S/
Edition: 10/2009
SINAMICS 1FK7 Synchronous Motors

Order number:
/PFT6S/
6SL3097-0AT00-0?P1
6SN1197-0AD74-0?P0
Edition: 10/2009

Bibliography
PROFIBUS documentation
/P1/
PROFIBUS-DP/DPV1 IEC 61158

Basics, tips, and tricks for users
Hthig; Manfred Popp, 2nd edition
ISBN 3-7785-2781-9
/P2/
PROFIBUS-DP, Getting Started

PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.; Manfred Popp
Order number:
/P3/
4.071
Distributed Layouts using PROFIBUS-DP

Architecture and Fundamentals, Configuration and Use of PROFIBUS-DP with
SIMATIC S7
SIEMENS; Publicis MCD Verlag; Josef Weigmann, Gerhard Kilian
Order number:
A19100-L531-B714
ISBN 3-89578-074-X
/P4/
Manual for PROFIBUS Networks, SIEMENS

Order number:
/P5/
PROFIBUS and PROFINET, PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology

PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strae 7, D-76131 Karlsruhe, Germany
http://www.profibus.com
Order number:
/IKPI/
3.172
Version 4.0 August 2005
Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives

Catalog
Order number:
/PDP/
6GK1970-5CA20-0BA0
E86060-K6710-A101-B4
Edition: 2005
PROFIBUS Installation Guidelines

Installation Guideline for PROFIBUS-FMS/DP
Installation and wiring recommendation for RS 485 Transmission
Order number
2.111 (German)
2.112 (English)

Version 1.0
C-1495
Bibliography
Documentation for Safety Equipment

Note
For more information about technical documentation for Safety Integrated, visit
the following address:
http://www.siemens.de/safety
The following list contains some of the safety-related documentation available.
/LV1/
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution SIRIUS-SENTRON-SIVACON

Catalog
Order number:
/MRL/
E86060-K1002-A101-A5
Directive 2006/42/EG of the European Parliament and Council

Machinery Directive
Bundesanzeiger-Verlags GmbH
/SISH/
Edition: 2006
Edition: 2006
Safety Integrated
System Manual
Order number:
6ZB5000-0AA01-0BA1
5th edition
System Manual supplement to 5th edition

Order number:
/SICD/
Safety Integrated
CD-ROM
Order number:
C-1496
6ZB5000-0AB01-0BA0
E20001-F500-P210
Edition: 04/2008

Index
Numbers
1020
Explanation of the symbols (Part 1), 2-877
1021
1022
1030
Handling BICO technology, 2-880
1510
CU320 input/output terminals, 2-882
1520
PROFIdrive, 2-883
1530
Internal control/status words, data sets,
2-884
1550
Setpoint channel, 2-885
1680
Vector control, encoder evaluations
(position, speed, temperature), 2-886
1690
Vector control, V/f control, 2-887
1700
Vector control, closed-loop speed control,
and generation of torque limits, 2-888
1710
Vector control, closed-loop current
control, 2-889
1750
Monitoring functions, faults, alarms, 2-890
1790
Terminal Board 30 (TB30), 2-891
1840
Terminal Module 31 (TM31), 2-892
2120
CU320-2 digital inputs, isolated
(DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16, DI 17), 2-894
2121
CU320-2 digital inputs, isolated
(DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20, DI 21), 2-895
2130
CU320-2 digital inputs/outputs,
bidirectional (DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9),
2-896
2131
2-897
2132
2-898
2133
2-899
2410
PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN),
addresses and diagnostics, 2-902
2420
Standard telegrams and process data
(PZD), 2-903
2422
Manufacturer-specific telegrams and
process data (PZD), 2-904
2423
Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and
2425
STW1_BM control word metals sector
interconnection (p2038 = 0), 2-906
2426
2428
ZSW1_BM status word metals sector
2429
2439
PZD receive signals interconnection
profile-specific, 2-910

D-1497
Index
2440
manufacturer-specific, 2-911
2441
STW1 control word interconnection
(p2038 = 2), 2-912
2442
(p2038 = 0), 2-913
2444
(p2038 = 0), 2-914
2449
PZD send signals interconnection profilespecific, 2-915
2450
PZD send signals interconnection
2451
ZSW1 status word interconnection
(p2038 = 2), 2-917
2452
(p2038 = 0), 2-918
2454
(p2038 = 0), 2-919
2468
IF1 receive telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-920
2470
IF1 send telegram, free interconnection
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-921
2472
IF1 status words, free interconnection,
2-922
2481
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-923
2483
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-924
2485
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-925
2487
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-926
2489
2-927
D-1498
2495
CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit
interconnection, 2-928
2496
CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit
2497
A_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-930
2498
E_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-931
2501
Control word, sequence control, 2-933
2503
Status word, sequence control, 2-934
2505
Control word, setpoint channel, 2-935
2520
Control word, speed controller, 2-936
2522
Status word, speed controller, 2-937
2526
Status word, closed loop control, 2-938
2530
Status word, closed-loop current control,
2-939
2534
Status word, monitoring functions 1,
2-940
2536
2-941
2537
2-942
2546
Control word, faults/alarms, 2-943
2548
Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2, 2-944
2610
Sequencer, 2-946
2634
Missing enable signals, line contactor
control, logic operation, 2-947
2701
Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0),
2-949
2704
Extended brake control, zero speed
detection (r0108.14 = 1), 2-950
2707
Extended brake control, open/close brake
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-951

Index
2711
Extended brake control, signal outputs
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-952
2800
Basic functions, parameter manager,
2-954
2802
Basic functions, monitoring and
faults/alarms, 2-955
2804
Basic functions, status words, 2-956
2810
Basic functions, STO (Safe Stop Off),
SS1 (Safe Stop 1), 2-957
2814
Basic functions,
SBC (Safe Brake Control),
SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), 2-958
3010
Fixed speed setpoints, 2-960
3020
Motorized potentiometer, 2-961
3030
Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling,
jogging, 2-962
3040
Direction limiting and direction reversal,
2-963
3050
Skip frequency bands and speed limiting,
2-964
3060
Basic ramp-function generator, 2-965
3070
Extended ramp-function generator, 2-966
3080
Ramp-function generator selection, status
word, tracking--, 2-967
4704
Raw signal sensing, 2-969
4715
Actual speed value and pole pos. sens.,
motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1),
2-970
6030
Speed setpoint, droop, 2-972
6031
reference/acceleration model
, 2-973
6040
Speed controller with/without encoder,
2-974
6050
Kp_n-/Tn_n adaptation, 2-975
6060
Torque setpoint, 2-976
6220
Vdc_max controller and Vdc_min
controller, 2-977
6300
V/f characteristic and voltage boost, 2-978
6310
Resonance damping and slip
compensation, 2-979
6320
controller, 2-980
6490
Closed-loop speed control configuration,
2-981
6491
Flux control configuration, 2-982
6630
Upper/lower torque limit, 2-983
6640
Current/power/torque limits
, 2-984
6710
Current setpoint filter, 2-985
6714
Iq and Id controller, 2-986
6721
Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-987
6722
Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-988
6723
Field weakening controller, flux controller
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-989
6724
Field weakening controller (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-990
6730
Interface to Motor Module (ASM,
p0300 = 1), 2-991
6731
Interface to the Motor Module (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-992
6799
Display signals, 2-993
7010
Friction characteristic, 2-995
7014
External armature short-circuit (EASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-996

D-1499
Index
7016
Internal armature short-circuit (IASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-997
7017
DC brake (p0300 = 1xx), 2-998
7020
Synchronization, 2-999
7950
Fixed values, binary selection
(r0108.16 = 1), 2-1001
7951
Fixed values, direct selection
(r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1),
2-1002
7954
Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1003
7958
Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1004
7960
DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1005
8010
Speed messages 1, 2-1007
8011
8012
Torque messages, motor locked/stalled,
2-1009
8013
Load monitoring (r0108.17 = 1), 2-1010
8014
Thermal monitoring, power unit, 2-1011
8016
Thermal monitoring, motor, 2-1012
8017
Thermal I2t motor model
(PEM, p0300 = 2xx), 2-1013
8060
Fault buffer, 2-1015
8065
Alarm buffer, 2-1016
8070
Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129), 2-1017
8075
Fault/alarm configuration, 2-1018
8134
Measuring sockets, 2-1019
8560
Command data sets (CDS), 2-1021
8565
Drive data sets (DDS), 2-1022
D-1500
8570
Encoder data sets (EDS), 2-1023
8575
Motor data sets (MDS), 2-1024
8580
Power unit data sets (PDS), 2-1025
9100
TB30 digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1027
9102
TB30 digital outputs, isolated
(DO 0 to DO 3), 2-1028
9104
TB30 analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1), 2-1029
9106
TB30 analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1),
2-1030
9204
Receive telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1032
9206
Receive telegram, predefined connection
set (p8744 = 1), 2-1033
9208
Send telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1034
9210
Send telegram, predefined connection set
(p8744 = 1), 2-1035
9220
Control word CANopen, 2-1036
9226
Status word CANopen, 2-1037
9550
TM31 digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1039
9552
TM31 digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7),
2-1040
9556
TM31 digital relay outputs, isolated
(DO 0 to DO 1), 2-1041
9560
TM31 digital inputs/outputs,
2-1042
9562
TM31 digital inputs/outputs,
2-1043
9566
TM31 analog input 0 (AI 0), 2-1044

Index
9568
TM31 analog input 1 (AI 1), 2-1045
9572
TB31 analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1),
2-1046
9576
TM31 temperature evaluation KTY/PTC,
2-1047
9577
TM31 sensor monitoring KTY/PTC,
2-1048
9880
VSM analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3), 2-1050
9886
VSM temperature evaluation, 2-1051
9887
VSM sensor evaluation KTY/PTC, 2-1052
9912
BOP20 control word interconnection,
2-1054
A
Access level (parameter), 1-18
Acknowledgment
Adjustable, 3-1063
Default, 3-1063
IMMEDIATE, 3-1059
POWER ON, 3-1059
PULSE INHIBIT, 3-1059
Active (parameter, C1(x), C2(x), U, T), 1-17
Address
PROFIBUS, 2-902
PROFINET, 2-902
Technical support, Preface-8
Adjustable parameter, 1-13
Alarm
Cause, 3-1063
Display, 3-1056
Drive object, 3-1062
Explanation of list, 3-1061
Fault location, 3-1062
General information, 3-1056
How to distinguish an alarm from a fault,
3-1056
List of all alarms, 3-1066
Message value, 3-1062
Name, 3-1062
Number, 3-1061
Number range, 3-1066
Remedy, 3-1063
Alarm value, 3-1063
Analog inputs
Analog outputs
ASCII table, A-1446
Axxxx, 3-1061
B
Basic Operator Panel (BOP), 2-1053
BI, Binector Input, 1-14
Bibliography, C-1491
BICO technology, 2-880
Binector
Input (BI), 1-14
Output (BO), 1-14
Bit array (parameter), 1-25
BO, Binector Output, 1-14
Brake control
Extended, 2-948
Simple, 2-948
C
C1(x) - Status commissioning device, 1-17
C2(x) - Status commissioning drive, 1-17
Calculated (parameter), 1-18
Catalogs, C-1491
CDS (Command Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020,
2-1021
Changeable (parameter, C1(x), C2(x), U, T),
1-17
CI, Connector Input, 1-14
Closed loop control
Technology controller, 2-1004
Vector, 2-971
Closed-loop speed control
Vector, 2-971
CO, Connector Output, 1-14
CO/BO, Connector/Binector Output, 1-14
Command data sets, 2-1020
Communication
CANopen, 2-1031
Communication Board CAN 10 (CBC10),
2-1031
Configuring messages, 2-1014
Connector
Input (CI), 1-14
Output (CO), 1-14
Content
Table of contents, Content-9

D-1501
Index
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2)

Digital inputs, 2-893
Digital inputs/outputs, 2-893
Control words, 2-900
Internal, 2-932
Standard telegrams, 2-900
Converter
Binector/Connector, 2-922, 2-927
Connector/Binector, 2-920, 2-923, 2-925
Cxxxxx, 3-1061
D
Data record, 1-20
Data set, 1-20
Command data set, CDS, 1-20
Drive data set, DDS, 1-20
Encoder data set, EDS, 1-20
Motor data set, MDS, 1-20
Power unit data set, PDS, 1-20
Data sets, 2-1020
Command data set, 1-20
Drive data set, 1-20
Encoder data set, 1-20
Motor data set, 1-20
Power unit data set, 1-20
Data type (parameter, signal source), 1-19
DCBRAKE, 3-1058
DDS (Drive Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020, 2-1022
Dependency (parameter), 1-26
Description (parameter), 1-25
Digital inputs
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Digital inputs/outputs
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Digital outputs
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Direction of rotation limiting, 2-959
Direction reversal, 2-959
Directory
ASCII table, A-1446
Bibliography, C-1491
Encoder code, A-1480
List of abbreviations, B-1483
Motor code, A-1447
Table of contents, function diagrams,
2-870
D-1502
Display
Alarms, 3-1056
Faults, 3-1056
Display parameter, 1-13
DO, Drive Object, 1-15
Drive data sets, 2-1020
Drive object, 1-15
DSC (Dynamic Servo Control), 2-959
E
EDS (Encoder Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020,
2-1023
ENCODER, 3-1058
Encoder data sets, 2-1020
Encoder evaluation, 2-968
Expert list, 1-24
Explanations
about function diagrams, 2-876
F
Factory setting, 1-24
Fault
Acknowledgment, 3-1059, 3-1063
Cause, 3-1063
Display, 3-1056
Drive object, 3-1062
Explanation of list, 3-1061
Fault location, 3-1062
Fault reaction, 3-1057, 3-1062
General information, 3-1056
How to distinguish a fault from an alarm,
3-1056
List of all faults, 3-1066
Name, 3-1062
Number, 3-1061
Number range, 3-1066
Remedy, 3-1063
Saving on POWER OFF, 3-1060
Saving on POWER OFF, 3-1060
Structure, 2-1015
Fault value, 3-1063
Fixed values, 2-878, 2-1001, 2-1002
Free interconnection via BICO, 2-900
Free interconnection, status words, 2-922,
2-927
Function (parameter), 1-25

Index
Function diagrams Basic Operator Panel 20

(BOP20)
Control word BOP20 interconnection,
2-1054
Function diagrams CU320-2 input/output
terminals
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3, DI 16,
DI 17), 2-894
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 4 to DI 7, DI 20,
DI\21), 2-895
Digital inputs/outputs, bidirectional
(DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11), 2-897
(DI/DO 12 to DI/DO 13), 2-898
(DI/DO 14 to DI/DO 15), 2-899
(DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9), 2-896
Function diagrams, brake control
Extended brake control, open/close brake
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-951
Extended brake control, signal outputs
(r0108.14 = 1), 2-952
Extended brake control, zero speed
detection (r0108.14 = 1), 2-950
Simple brake control (r0108.14 = 0),
2-949
Function diagrams, Communication Board
CAN
Control word CANopen, 2-1036
Receive telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1032
Receive telegram, predefined connection
set (p8744 = 1), 2-1033
Send telegram, free PDO mapping
(p8744 = 2), 2-1034
Send telegram, predefined connection set
(p8744 = 1), 2-1035
Status word CANopen, 2-1037
Function diagrams, data sets
Command data sets (CDS), 2-1021
Drive data sets (DDS), 2-1022
Encoder data sets (EDS), 2-1023
Motor data sets (MDS), 2-1024
Power unit data sets (PDS), 2-1025
Function diagrams, diagnostics

Fault/alarm configuration, 2-1018
Fault/alarm trigger word (r2129), 2-1017
Function diagrams, encoder evaluation
Actual speed value and pole pos. sens.,
motor enc. ASM/SM (encoder 1),
2-970
Raw signal sensing, 2-969
Function diagrams, explanations
Handling BICO technology, 2-880
Function diagrams, internal control/status
words
Control word, faults/alarms, 2-943
Control word, sequence control, 2-933
Control word, setpoint channel, 2-935
Control word, speed controller, 2-936
Status word, closed loop control, 2-938
Status word, closed-loop current control,
2-939
Status word, faults/alarms 1 and 2, 2-944
2-940
2-941
2-942
Status word, sequence control, 2-934
Status word, speed controller, 2-937
Function diagrams, overviews
CU320 input/output terminals, 2-882
Internal control/status words, data sets,
2-884
Monitoring functions, faults, alarms, 2-890
PROFIdrive, 2-883
Vector control, closed-loop current
control, 2-889
Vector control, closed-loop speed control,
and generation of torque limits, 2-888
Vector control, encoder evaluations
(position, speed, temperature), 2-886
Vector control, V/f control, 2-887

D-1503
Index
Function diagrams, PROFIdrive

A_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-930
CU_STW1 control word 1 Control Unit
CU_ZSW1 status word 1 Control Unit
E_DIGITAL interconnection, 2-931
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-920, 2-923
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-921, 2-924
2-922
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-925
via BICO (p0922 = 999), 2-926
2-927
Manufacturer-specific telegrams and
Manufacturer-specific/free telegrams and
PROFIBUS (PB)/PROFINET (PN),
addresses and diagnostics, 2-902
profile-specific, 2-910
PZD send signals interconnection
PZD send signals interconnection profilespecific, 2-915
Standard telegrams and process data
(PZD), 2-903
(p2038 = 0), 2-913
(p2038 = 2), 2-912
(p2038 = 0), 2-914
(p2038 = 0), 2-918
(p2038 = 2), 2-917
D-1504

(p2038 = 0), 2-919
Function diagrams, Safety Integrated
Basic functions, monitoring and
faults/alarms, 2-955
Basic functions, parameter manager,
2-954
Basic functions,
SBC (Safe Brake Control),,
SBA (Safe Brake Adapter), 2-958
Basic functions, status words, 2-956
Basic functions, STO (Safe Stop Off),
SS1 (Safe Stop 1), 2-957
Function diagrams, sequence control
Missing enable signals, line contactor
control, logic operation, 2-947
Sequencer, 2-946
Function diagrams, setpoint channel
Direction limiting and direction reversal,
2-963
Main/additional setpoint, setpoint scaling,
jogging, 2-962
Motorized potentiometer, 2-961
Ramp-function generator (basic), 2-965
Ramp-function generator (extended),
2-966
Ramp-function generator selection, status
word, tracking--, 2-967
Skip frequency bands and speed limiting,
2-964
Function diagrams, signals and monitoring
functions
Thermal I2t motor model
(PEM, p0300 = 2xx), 2-1013
Thermal monitoring, motor, 2-1012
Thermal monitoring, power unit, 2-1011
Torque messages, motor locked/stalled,
2-1009

Index
Function diagrams, technology controller

Closed loop control (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1004
DC-link voltage controller (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1005
Fixed values, binary selection
(r0108.16 = 1), 2-1001
Fixed values, direct selection
(r0108.16 = 1 and p2216[D] = 1),
2-1002
Motorized potentiometer (r0108.16 = 1),
2-1003
Function diagrams, technology functions
DC brake (p0300 = 1xx), 2-998
External armature short-circuit (EASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-996
Internal armature short-circuit (IASC,
p0300 = 2xx), 2-997
Function diagrams, Terminal Board 30
(TB30)
Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 1), 2-1029
Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1), 2-1030
Digital inputs, isolated (DI 0 to DI 3),
2-1027
Digital outputs, isolated (DO 0 to DO 3),
2-1028
Function diagrams, Terminal Module 31
(TM31)
Analog input 0 (AI 0), 2-1044
Analog input 1 (AI 1), 2-1045
Analog outputs (AO 0 to AO 1), 2-1046
2-1039
2-1040
(DI/DO 10 to DI/DO 11), 2-1043
(DI/DO 8 to DI/DO 9), 2-1042
Digital relay outputs, isolated
(DO 0 to DO 1), 2-1041
Sensor monitoring KTY/PTC, 2-1048
Temperature evaluation KTY/PTC,
2-1047
Function diagrams, vector control

2-981
Current/power/torque limits
, 2-984
Display signals, 2-993
Field weakening characteristic, Id setpoint
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-988
Field weakening controller (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-990
Field weakening controller, flux controller
(ASM, p0300 = 1), 2-989
Flux control configuration, 2-982
Id setpoint (PEM, p0300 = 2), 2-987
Interface to Motor Module (ASM,
p0300 = 1), 2-991
Interface to the Motor Module (PEM,
p0300 = 2), 2-992
reference/acceleration model
, 2-973
Resonance damping and
slip compensation, 2-979
2-974
Speed setpoint, droop, 2-972
Upper/lower torque limit, 2-983
V/f characteristic and voltage boost, 2-978
controller, 2-977, 2-980
Function diagrams, Voltage Sensing Module
(VSM)
Analog inputs (AI 0 to AI 3), 2-1050
Temperature evaluation, 2-1051
Function module, 1-15
Fxxxx, 3-1061

D-1505
Index
General information
about faults and alarms, 3-1056
about function diagrams, 2-876
About parameters, 1-12
Main/supplementary setpoint, 2-959

Manufacturer-specific telegrams, 2-900
MDS (Motor Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020, 2-1024
Message buffer, 2-1014
Messages, 2-1006
Missing enables
Actuator, 2-947
Monitoring functions, 2-1006
Motor code, A-1447
Motor data sets, 2-1020
Motor holding brake, 2-948
Motorized potentiometer, 2-959, 2-1003
H
Holding brake, 2-948
Hotline, Preface-8
I
IASC, 3-1058
Index
Factory setting, 1-25
Parameter, 1-13, 1-25
Input terminals
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Internal control/status words, 2-932
J
Jog, 2-959, 2-962
L
Line contactor control, 2-947
Linked parameter, 1-13
List
Abbreviations, B-1483
ASCII table, A-1446
Faults and alarms, 3-1066
Message ranges, 3-1066
Motor code, A-1447
Parameter ranges, 1-27
Parameters for command data sets, 1-853
Parameters for drive data sets, 1-855
Parameters for encoder data sets, 1-862
Parameters for motor data sets, 1-864
Parameters for power unit data sets,
1-867
Parameters, all, 1-29
References, C-1491
List of abbreviations, B-1483
D-1506
Name
Alarm, 3-1062
Fault, 3-1062
Parameter, 1-14
Normalizing, 1-24
Not for motor type, 1-24
Notes
Hotline, Preface-8
Number
Alarm, 3-1061
Fault, 3-1061
Parameter, 1-13
Number range
Alarms, 3-1066
Faults, 3-1066
Parameter, 1-27
O
Object, 1-15
OFF1, 3-1057
OFF2, 3-1057
OFF3, 3-1058
Output terminals
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893

Index
P group (parameter), 1-21

Parameter
Access level, 1-18
Calculated, 1-18
Changeable in, 1-17
Data type, 1-19
Description, 1-25
Dynamic index, 1-20
Expert list, 1-24
Full name, 1-14
Function, 1-25
Index, 1-13, 1-25
Linked parameter, 1-13
List of all parameters, 1-29
List of parameters for
command data sets, 1-853
drive data sets, 1-855
encoder data sets, 1-862
motor data sets, 1-864
power unit data sets, 1-867
Name, 1-14
Normalizing, 1-24
Not for motor type, 1-24
Number, 1-13
Number range, 1-27
P group, 1-21
Safety notices, 1-26
Short name, 1-14
Unit, 1-21
Unit group, 1-21
Unit selection, 1-21
Values, 1-25
Password for access level 4, 1-18
PDS (Power Unit Data Set), 1-20, 2-1020,
2-1025
PID controller (p0108.16 = 1), 2-1000
Power unit data sets, 2-1020
Process data, 2-900
PROFIdrive, 2-900
pxxxx, 1-13
Ramp-function generator, 2-959

Reaction to faults, 3-1057
Relay outputs, 2-1038
Resetting faults, 3-1063
rxxxx, 1-13
S
Safety Integrated
Basic functions, 2-953
Extended functions, 2-953
Safety notices (parameter), 1-26
Search tools for manual, Preface-7
Sequence control, 2-945
Servo control
Signal path in function diagrams, 2-877
Signals, 2-1006
Simple/extended braking control, 2-948
Skip frequency bands, 2-959
Speed messages, 2-1006
Status words
Internal, 2-932
Standard telegrams, 2-900
STOP1, 3-1058
STOP2, 3-1058
Support, Preface-8
Support Request, Preface-8
T
T - Ready state, 1-17
Target group, Preface-6
Technology controller (p0108.16 = 1), 2-1000
Technology functions, 2-994
Telegrams, 2-900
Analog inputs/outputs, 2-1026
Analog inputs/outputs, 2-1038
Relay outputs, 2-1038
Terminals
Control Unit 320-2 (CU320-2), 2-893
Thermal monitoring, 2-1006
Torque messages, 2-1006
Triggering on messages (r2129), 2-1014

D-1507
Index
U
U - Run state, 1-17
Unit (parameter), 1-21
Usage phases, Preface-6
V
V/f control
Vector, 2-978
Values (parameter), 1-25
Vector control
2-981
Droop, 2-972
Field weakening characteristic, Id
setpoint, 2-988
Flux control, 2-982
Resonance damping and slip
compensation, 2-979
2-974
Table of contents, 2-971
V/f characteristic, 2-978
controller, 2-980
D-1508
Version
List of all parameters, 1-29
List of faults and alarms, 3-1066
command data sets, 1-853
drive data sets, 1-855
encoder data sets, 1-862
motor data sets, 1-864
power unit data sets, 1-867
Analog inputs, 2-1049
Temperature evaluation, 2-1049

Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Drive Technologies
Large Drives
Postfach 4743
90025 NUREMBERG
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/automation
Subject to change without prior notice

Siemens AG 2009

SINAMICS G130-G150 Drive Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SINAMICS G130-G150 Drive Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

SINAMICS G130/G150

List Manual 11/2009

Faults and alarms

Proper use of Siemens products

Copyright Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to

SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2)

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Usage phases and their tools/documents (as an example)

SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions

SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions

SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions

SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

+49 (0) 180 5050 - 222

+49 (0) 180 5050 - 223

+1 423 262 2522

+1 423 262 2200

+86 1064 757 575

+86 1064 747 474

Internet address for SINAMICS

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Parameters for data sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Explanations for the function diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CU320-2 input/output terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Internal control/status words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Signals and monitoring functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Board 30 (TB30). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Communication Board CAN10 (CBC10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Terminal Module 31 (TM31) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Basic Operator Panel 20 (BOP20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overview of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List of faults and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ASCII table (excerpt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

List for motor code/encoder code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Parameters for data sets

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

Explanation of list of parameters

Basic structure of parameter descriptions

BICO: Full parameter name/Abbreviated name

Drive object (function module)

Changeable in: C1(x), C2(x), U, T

Data type: Unsigned32/Integer16

Dynamic index: CDS, p0170

Function diagram: 2080

P group: Closed loop control

Unit group: 7_1

Unit selection: p0505

Not for motor type: FEM

[0] = Name and meaning of index 0

Name and meaning of value 0

Information which might be useful

Safety notices with a warning triangle

Safety notices without a warning triangle

Siemens AG 2009 All Rights Reserved

pxxxx[0 to n] Parameter number

Adjustable parameter (read and write parameter)

Display parameter (read-only)

Adjustable parameter 918